Documentacion Calentamiento

MAQUINA DE CALENTAMIENTO
DIRECTO SITA EN INAUXA S,A

INSTALACIONES
INDUSTRIALES Y
SERVICIOS, S.A
DOCUMENTO 1.
Ref. O 9.038
ESQUEMAS ELECTRICOS-
DOCUMENTO N 1
ESQUEMAS ELECTRICOS
DE LA MAQUINA DE
CALENTAMIENTO DIRECTO
SITA EN INAUXA S,A
AMURRIO (ALAVA)
Realizado por: Jose Ramn Bilbao
Revisado por: Eloy Acillona
Fecha de revisin: 12/04/2.010
Documento N 1 12/04/2.010 Revisin A

SIMATIC HORNO DE REVENIDO\ 15/07/2010 10:57:04
SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 314\...\OB1 - <offline>
OB1 - <offline>
"ENLACE"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Versin del bloque: 2
Hora y fecha Cdigo: 31/03/2010 10:18:33
Interface: 15/02/1996 16:51:12
Longitud (bloque / cdigo / datos): 00274 00148 00026
Nombre Tipo de datos Direccin Comentario

TEMP 0.0
OB1_EV_CLASS Byte 0.0 Bits 0-3 = 1 (Coming event), Bits 4-7 = 1 (Event class 1)
OB1_SCAN_1 Byte 1.0 1 (Cold restart scan 1 of OB 1), 3 (Scan 2-n of OB 1)
OB1_PRIORITY Byte 2.0 Priority of OB Execution
OB1_OB_NUMBR Byte 3.0 1 (Organization block 1, OB1)
OB1_RESERVED_1 Byte 4.0 Reserved for system
OB1_RESERVED_2 Byte 5.0 Reserved for system
OB1_PREV_CYCLE Int 6.0 Cycle time of previous OB1 scan (milliseconds)
OB1_MIN_CYCLE Int 8.0 Minimum cycle time of OB1 (milliseconds)
OB1_MAX_CYCLE Int 10.0 Maximum cycle time of OB1 (milliseconds)
OB1_DATE_TIME Date_And_Time 12.0 Date and time OB1 started
Bloque: OB1 "Main Program Sweep (Cycle)"
Segm.: 1
FC1
"SEGURIDAD
ES"
EN ENO
Informacin del smbolo

FC1 SEGURIDADES
Segm.: 2
FC2
"INICIO"
EN ENO

FC2 INICIO
Segm.: 3
FC3
QUEMADOR
S"
EN ENO

FC3 QUEMADORES
Pgina 1 de 2
SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 314\...\FB1 - <offline>
FB1 - <offline>
"TIEMPOS"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 08/02/2010 17:36:17
Nombre Tipo de datos Direccin Valor inicial Comentario

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
STAT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
Bloque: FB1
Segm.: 1 TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO
U "CONDICIONES O.K" M51.6

U(
U "S10.1.1" E5.0 -- CONFIRMACION VALVULA AIRE N1 APERTURA 100%
O "FIN DE PREBARRIDO" M52.0
)
L S5T#1M
SS "TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO" T1
UN "CONDICIONES O.K" M51.6
R "TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO" T1
NOP 0
LC "TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO" T1
T MW 142
NOP 0
Segm.: 2 TIEMPO DEL PULSO DE SEALIZACION
U(
UN "TIEMPO DE PULSO 2" T3
L S5T#1S
SE "TIEMPO DE PULSO 1" T2
NOP 0
NOP 0
NOP 0
U "TIEMPO DE PULSO 1" T2
)
= "PULSO" M52.1
U "PULSO" M52.1
L S5T#1S
SE "TIEMPO DE PULSO 2" T3
NOP 0
NOP 0
NOP 0
NOP 0
Segm.: 3 TIEMPO DE CADENA
U "S10.5.1" E5.4 -- DETECTOR CADENA

L "PANTALLA".TIEMPO_CADENA DB2.DBW2
SE T 4
NOP 0
NOP 0
NOP 0
NOP 0
Pgina 1 de 2
SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 314\...\FB1 - <offline>
Segm.: 4 SIEMPRE ON
UN "SIEMPRE OFF" M255.1

= "SIEMPRE ON" M255.0
Segm.: 5 SIEMPRE OFF
U "SIEMPRE OFF" M255.1

= "SIEMPRE OFF" M255.1
Segm.: 6 TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO
L MW 142
BTI
T "PANTALLA".TIEMPO_PREBARRIDO DB2.DBW6
NOP 0
Segm.: 7 CONTADOR DE BARRAS
U "S10.6.1" E5.5
= L 0.0
U L 0.0
U T 10
ZV Z 1
U L 0.0
BLD 102
L S5T#1S
SE T 10
Segm.: 8
U "PANTALLA".RESET_CONTADOR DB2.DBX8.1
R Z 1
Segm.: 9 MINIMO TIEMPO DE ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N1
U "ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N1" M52.2

L S5T#3S
SE T 5
Segm.: 10 MINIMO TIEMPO DE ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N2
U "ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N2" M52.4

L S5T#3S
SE T 6
Pgina 2 de 2
SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 314\...\OB1 - <offline>
Segm.: 4
FC7
"SEALIZAC
ION"
EN ENO

FC7 SEALIZACION
Segm.: 5
FC8
"COMUNICAC
ION"
EN ENO

FC8 COMUNICACION
Segm.: 6
DB1
"INS.FB1"
FB1
"TIEMPOS"
EN ENO

FB1 TIEMPOS
DB1 INS.FB1
Segm.: 7
FC5
"ENTRADAS
ANALOGICAS
"
EN ENO

FC5 ENTRADAS ANALOGICAS
Segm.: 8
FC6
"SALIDAS
ANALOGICAS
"
EN ENO

FC6 SALIDAS ANALOGICAS
Pgina 2 de 2
SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 314\...\FC1 - <offline>
FC1 - <offline>
"SEGURIDADES"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 08/02/2010 17:35:36

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC1
Segm.: 1 REARME
U "S8.6.1" E3.5 -- SOLICITUD RECONOCIMIENTO ALARMAS

= "REARME" M50.0
Segm.: 2 FALTA DE GAS
U(
O "MARCA FALTA DE GAS" M50.1
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "PR5.2.1" E0.1 -- PRESOSTATO FALTA DE GAS
= "MARCA FALTA DE GAS" M50.1
Segm.: 3 EXCESO DE GAS
U(
O "MARCA EXCESO DE GAS" M50.2
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "PR5.3.1" E0.2 -- PRESOSTATO EXCESO DE GAS
= "MARCA EXCESO DE GAS" M50.2
Segm.: 4 FALTA DE AIRE
U(
O "MARCA FALTA DE AIRE" M50.3
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "PR5.1.1" E0.0 -- PRESOSTATO FALTA DE AIRE
U "K3.2.1" E0.3 -- CONFIRMACION VENTILADOR EN SERVICIO
= "MARCA FALTA DE AIRE" M50.3
Segm.: 5 ESTANQUEIDAD INCORRECTA
U "K32.4.1" E0.6 -- PRUEBA DE ESTAQUEIDAD INCORRECTA

= L 0.0
U L 0.0
BLD 102
= "MARCA DE ESTANQUEIDAD IN" M50.4
U L 0.0
U "REARME" M50.0
= "K13.5.1" A10.4 -- ORDEN DE REARME CONT.ESTANQU.
Pgina 1 de 2
Segm.: 6 TERMICO DEL VENTILADOR
U(
O "MARCA TERMICO VENTILAODR" M50.5
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "F3.2.1" E1.3 -- FALLO TERMICO VENTILADOR
= "MARCA TERMICO VENTILAODR" M50.5
Segm.: 7 TERMICO AGITADOR N1
U(
O "MARCA TERMICO AGITADOR 1" M50.6
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "F3.4.1" E1.5 -- FALLO TERMICO AGITADOR N1
= "MARCA TERMICO AGITADOR 1" M50.6
U(
O "MARCA TERMICO AGITADOR 2" M50.7
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "F3.6.1" E1.6 -- FALLO TERMICO AGITADOR N2
= "MARCA TERMICO AGITADOR 2" M50.7
Segm.: 9 TERMICO CADENA TRANSPORTE
U(
O "MARCA TERMICO CADENA" M51.0
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "F4.2.1" E1.4 -- FALLO TERMICO CADENA TRANSPORTE
= "MARCA TERMICO CADENA" M51.0
Segm.: 10 TERMICO EXTRACTOR N1
U(
O "MARCA TERMICO EXTRACTOR1" M51.1
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "F4.4.1" E1.7 -- FALLO TERMICO EXTRACTOR N1
= "MARCA TERMICO EXTRACTOR1" M51.1
U(
O "MARCA TERMICO EXTRACTOR2" M51.2
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "F4.6.1" E2.0 -- FALLO TERMICO EXTRACTOR N2
= "MARCA TERMICO EXTRACTOR2" M51.2
Segm.: 12 EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA ZONA N1
U(
O "MARCA EXCESO TEMP. ZONA1" M51.3
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "S10.5.1" E5.4 -- DETECTOR CADENA
= "MARCA EXCESO TEMP. ZONA1" M51.3
Segm.: 13 EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA ZONA N2
U(
O "MARCA EXCESO TEMP. ZONA2" M51.4
O "REARME" M50.0
)
U "S10.6.1" E5.5
= "MARCA EXCESO TEMP. ZONA2" M51.4
Pgina 2 de 2
FC2 - <offline>
"INICIO"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 08/02/2010 17:35:45

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC2
Segm.: 1 MARCHA VENTILADOR
U(
O "K3.2.1" E0.3 -- CONFIRMACION VENTILADOR EN SERVICIO
O "S7.2.1" E2.1 -- SOLICITUD MARCHA VENTILADOR
)
U "S7.7.2" E2.7 -- SOLICITUD PARO VENTIADOR
U "MARCA TERMICO VENTILAODR" M50.5
= "K11.1.2" A8.0 -- ORDEN DE MARCHA VENTILADOR
Segm.: 2 MARCHA AGITADOR N1
U(
O "K3.4.1" E1.1 -- CONFIRMACION AGITADOR N1 EN SERVICIO
O "S7.5.1" E2.4 -- SOLICITUD MARCHA AGITADOR N1
)
U "S8.3.1" E3.2 -- SOLICITUD PARO AGITADOR N1
U "MARCA TERMICO AGITADOR 1" M50.6
= "K11.4.1" A8.3 -- ORDEN DE MARCHA AGITADOR N1
Segm.: 3 MARCHA AGITADOR N2
U(
O "S7.6.1" E2.5 -- SOLICITUD MARCHA AGITADOR N2
)
U "S8.4.1" E3.3 -- SOLICITUD PARO AGITADOR N2
= "K11.5.1" A8.4 -- ORDEN DE MARCHA AGITADOR N2
Segm.: 4 MARCHA EXTRACTOR N1
U(
O "K4.4.1" E0.5 -- CONFIRMACION EXTRACTOR N1 EN SERVICIO
O "S7.3.1" E2.2 -- SOLICITUD MARCHA EXTRACTOR N1
)
U "S8.1.1" E3.0 -- SOLICITUD PARO EXTRACTOR N1
U "MARCA TERMICO EXTRACTOR1" M51.1
= "K11.2.1" A8.1 -- ORDEN DE MARCHA EXTRACTOR N1
Pgina 1 de 3
Segm.: 5 MARCHA EXTRACTOR N2
U(
O "S7.4.1" E2.3 -- SOLICITUD MARCHA EXTRACTOR N2
)
U "S8.2.1" E3.1 -- SOLICITUD PARO EXTRACTOR N2
= "K11.3.1" A8.2 -- ORDEN DE MARCHA EXTRACTOR N2
Segm.: 6 MARCHA REDUCTOR CADENA
U(
O "K4.2.1" E1.0 -- CONFIRMACION CADENA DE TRANSPORTE EN SERVICIO
O "S7.7.1" E2.6 -- SOLICITUD MARCHA CADENA
)
U "S8.5.1" E3.4 -- SOLICITUD PARO CADENA
U "MARCA TERMICO CADENA" M51.0
= L 0.0
U L 0.0
BLD 102
= "K11.6.1" A8.5 -- ORDEN DE MARCHA DE CADENA
U L 0.0
U(
ON "S10.5.1" E5.4 -- DETECTOR CADENA
O T 4
)
= "K11.7.1" A8.6 -- MARCHA-PARO VARIADOR
Segm.: 7 MARCHA ESTANQUEIDAD

= "K11.7.2" A8.7 -- ORDEN DE INICIO CONTROL DE ESTAQUEIDAD
Segm.: 8 CONDICIONES O.K
U "MARCA EXCESO DE GAS" M50.2

U "MARCA FALTA DE AIRE" M50.3
U "MARCA FALTA DE GAS" M50.1
UN "MARCA DE ESTANQUEIDAD IN" M50.4
U "K4.2.1" E1.0 -- CONFIRMACION CADENA DE TRANSPORTE EN SERVICIO
U "K3.4.1" E1.1 -- CONFIRMACION AGITADOR N1 EN SERVICIO
U "K3.6.1" E1.2 -- CONFIRMACION AGITADOR N2 EN SERVICIO
U "K4.4.1" E0.5 -- CONFIRMACION EXTRACTOR N1 EN SERVICIO
U "K4.6.1" E0.4 -- CONFIRMACION EXTRACTOR N2 EN SERVICIO
= "CONDICIONES O.K" M51.6
Segm.: 9 COMIENZO PREBARRIDO

= L 0.0
U L 0.0
UN "TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO" T1
= "HACIENDO PREBARRIDO" M51.7
U L 0.0
U(
U "TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO" T1
O "FIN DE PREBARRIDO" M52.0
)
= "FIN DE PREBARRIDO" M52.0
Segm.: 10 SERVOS ZONA N1
U "FIN DE PREBARRIDO" M52.0

= L 0.0
BLD 103
U "HACIENDO PREBARRIDO" M51.7
= L 0.1
BLD 103
U "SIEMPRE ON" M255.0
= L 0.2
BLD 103
Pgina 2 de 3
CALL "TABLA DE SERVOS" FC4

ENTRADA:=MD150
F_PREB :=L0.0
PREB :=L0.1
ENFR :=1.000000e+000
MOD :=L0.2
TIM_MIN:=S5T#3S
S_AIRE :=MD158
S_GAS :=MD162
C_ENF :="ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N1" M52.2
ESTADO :="PREBARRIDO ZONA N1" M52.3
NOP 0
Segm.: 11 SERVOS ZONA N2

= L 0.0
BLD 103
U "HACIENDO PREBARRIDO" M51.7
= L 0.1
BLD 103
U "SIEMPRE ON" M255.0
= L 0.2
BLD 103
CALL "TABLA DE SERVOS" FC4
ENTRADA:=MD154
F_PREB :=L0.0
PREB :=L0.1
ENFR :=1.100000e+000
MOD :=L0.2
TIM_MIN:=S5T#3S
S_AIRE :=MD166
S_GAS :=MD170
C_ENF :="ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N2" M52.4
ESTADO :="PREBARRIDO ZONA N2" M52.5
NOP 0
Pgina 3 de 3
FC3 - <offline>
"QUEMADORES"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 08/02/2010 17:35:52

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC3
Segm.: 1 IGNICION DE QUEMADORES
U(
ON "S8.7.1" E3.6 -- SOLICITUD IGNICION DEL HORNO
O "IGNICION HORNO" M52.6
)
= "IGNICION HORNO" M52.6
Segm.: 2 ELECTROVALVULA PRINCIPAL

= "K13.6.1" A10.5 -- ORDEN DE APERTURA Ev.PRINCIPAL
= "K13.7.1" A10.6 -- ORDEN DE APERTURA Ev.GENERAL
Segm.: 3 QUEMADORES ZONA N1 CONEXION

= "K12.1.1" A9.0 -- ORDEN DE CONEXION QUEMADOR N1
Segm.: 4 QUEMADORES ZONA N2 CONEXION

Segm.: 5 ENCENDIDO QUEMADORES ZONA N1

U "IGNICION HORNO" M52.6
= L 0.0
U L 0.0
BLD 102
= "K12.5.1" A9.4 -- ORDEN DE ENCENDIDO QUEMADOR N1
U L 0.0
U "S9.1.1" E4.0 -- CONFIRMACION QUEMADOR N1 EN SERVICIO
UN T 5
= "K13.7.2" A10.7 -- ORDEN DE APERTURA Ev.PRINCIPAL N1
U L 0.0
Pgina 1 de 2
U "S9.5.1" E4.4 -- CONFIRMACION QUEMADOR N1 EN AVERIA

U "S8.7.1" E3.6 -- SOLICITUD IGNICION DEL HORNO
= "K13.1.1" A10.0 -- ORDEN DE REARME QUEMADOR N1
U L 0.0
BLD 102
= "K12.6.1" A9.5 -- ORDEN DE ENCENDIOD QUEMADOR N2
U L 0.0
U L 0.0
UN T 5
Segm.: 6 ENCENDIDO QUEMADORES ZONA N2

U "IGNICION HORNO" M52.6
= L 0.0
U L 0.0
BLD 102
U L 0.0
UN T 6
U L 0.0
U L 0.0
BLD 102
U L 0.0
U L 0.0
UN T 6
Pgina 2 de 2
FC5 - <offline>
"ENTRADAS ANALOGICAS"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 12/02/2010 10:10:43

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC5
Segm.: 1 ENTRADA 4-20mA REGULADOR ZONA N1
AJUSTE DE LA ENTRADA DE 4-20mA HA 0-100%
FC105
Scaling Values
"SCALE"
EN ENO
PEW320 IN RET_VAL MW100
1.000000e+ OUT MD150

002 HI_LIM
0.000000e+
000 LO_LIM
M255.1
"SIEMPRE
OFF" BIPOLAR

FC105 SCALE Scaling Values
M255.1 SIEMPRE OFF
Segm.: 2 ENTRADA 4-20mA REGULADOR ZONA N2
AJUSTE DE LA ENTRADA DE 4-20mA HA 0-100%
FC105
Scaling Values
"SCALE"
EN ENO
PEW322 IN RET_VAL MW104
1.000000e+ OUT MD154

002 HI_LIM
0.000000e+
000 LO_LIM
M255.1
"SIEMPRE
OFF" BIPOLAR
Pgina 1 de 2

FC105 SCALE Scaling Values
M255.1 SIEMPRE OFF
Pgina 2 de 2
FC6 - <offline>
"SALIDAS ANALOGICAS"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 12/02/2010 16:01:43

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC6
Segm.: 1 SALIDA SERVO DE AIRE ZONA N1
FC106
Unscaling Values
"UNSCALE"
EN ENO
MD158 IN RET_VAL MW108
1.000000e+ OUT MW112

002 HI_LIM
0.000000e+
000 LO_LIM
M255.1
"SIEMPRE
OFF" BIPOLAR

FC106 UNSCALE Unscaling Values
M255.1 SIEMPRE OFF
Segm.: 2
MOVE
EN ENO
MW112 IN OUT PAW336
Pgina 1 de 3
Segm.: 3 SALIDA SERVO DE GAS ZONA N1
FC106
Unscaling Values
"UNSCALE"
EN ENO
1.000000e+ OUT MW120

002 HI_LIM
0.000000e+
000 LO_LIM
M255.1
"SIEMPRE
OFF" BIPOLAR

M255.1 SIEMPRE OFF
Segm.: 4
MOVE
EN ENO
MW120 IN OUT PAW352
Segm.: 5
MOVE
EN ENO
MW120 IN OUT PAW354
Segm.: 6 SALIDA SERVO DE AIRE ZONA N2
FC106
Unscaling Values
"UNSCALE"
EN ENO
1.000000e+ OUT MW130

002 HI_LIM
0.000000e+
000 LO_LIM
M255.1
"SIEMPRE
OFF" BIPOLAR

M255.1 SIEMPRE OFF
Pgina 2 de 3
Segm.: 7
MOVE
EN ENO
MW130 IN OUT PAW338
Segm.: 8 SALIDA SERVO DE GAS ZONA N2
FC106
Unscaling Values
"UNSCALE"
EN ENO
1.000000e+ OUT MW138

002 HI_LIM
0.000000e+
000 LO_LIM
M255.1
"SIEMPRE
OFF" BIPOLAR

M255.1 SIEMPRE OFF
Segm.: 9
MOVE
EN ENO
MW138 IN OUT PAW356
Segm.: 10
MOVE
EN ENO
MW138 IN OUT PAW358
Pgina 3 de 3
FC7 - <offline>
"SEALIZACION"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 12/02/2010 16:52:52

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC7
Segm.: 1 EXTRACTOR N1 EN SERVICIO

O "PRUEBA DE LAMPARAS" M52.7
= "K16.2.1" A13.1 -- SEALIZACION EXTRACTOR N1 EN SERVICIO
Segm.: 2 EXTRACTOR N2 EN SERVICIO

= "K16.3.1" A13.2 -- SEALIZACION EXTRACTOR N2 EN SERVICIO
Segm.: 3 AGITADOR N1 EN SERVICIO

= "K16.4.1" A13.3 -- SEALIZACION AGITADOR N1 EN SERVICIO
Segm.: 4 AGITADOR N2 EN SERVICIO

= "K16.5.1" A13.4 -- SEALIZACION AGITADOR N2 EN SERVICIO
Segm.: 5 VENTILADOR DE COMBUTION EN SERVICIO
O "K3.2.1" E0.3 -- CONFIRMACION VENTILADOR EN SERVICIO

= "K16.1.1" A13.0 -- SEALIZACION VENTILADOR EN SERVICIO
Segm.: 6 CADENA DE TRANSPORTE EN SERVICIO
O "K4.2.1" E1.0 -- CONFIRMACION CADENA DE TRANSPORTE EN SERVICIO

= "K16.6.1" A13.5 -- SEALIZACIO CADENA TRANS. EN SERVICIO
Pgina 1 de 2
Segm.: 7 SEALIZACION VALIZA VERDE

= "K14.4.1" A11.3 -- SEALIZACION VALIZA CORRECTO
Segm.: 8 SEALIZACION DE VALIZA ROJO
ON "CONDICIONES O.K" M51.6

= "K14.5.1" A11.4 -- SEALIZACION VALIZA AVERIA
Segm.: 9 SEALIZACION DE VALIZA AMBAR

UN "K14.4.1" A11.3 -- SEALIZACION VALIZA CORRECTO
UN "PULSO" M52.1
= "K14.6.1" A11.5 -- SEALIZACION VALIZA PRECAUCION
Segm.: 10 SEALIZACION IGNICION QUEMADORES

UN "K14.4.1" A11.3 -- SEALIZACION VALIZA CORRECTO
U "PULSO" M52.1
= "K16.7.1" A13.6 -- SEALIZACION FUNCIONAMIENTO CORRECTO
Segm.: 11 PREBARRIDO EN CURSO

UN "FIN DE PREBARRIDO" M52.0
U "PULSO" M52.1
= "K16.7.2" A13.7 -- SEALIZACION PREBARRIDO EN CURSO
Segm.: 12 PRUEBA DE LAMPARAS
U "S8.7.2" E3.7 -- SOLICITUD PRUEBA DE LAMPARAS

= "PRUEBA DE LAMPARAS" M52.7
Pgina 2 de 2
FC8 - <offline>
"COMUNICACION"
Nombre: Familia:
Autor: Versin: 0.1
Interface: 30/03/2010 12:51:00

IN 0.0
OUT 0.0
IN_OUT 0.0
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET_VAL 0.0
Bloque: FC8
Segm.: 1 FALTA DE GAS
U "MARCA FALTA DE GAS" M50.1

= "PANTALLA".FALTA_GAS DB2.DBX0.0 -- PRESOSTATO
Segm.: 2 EXCESO DE GAS
U "MARCA EXCESO DE GAS" M50.2

= "PANTALLA".EXCESO_gAS DB2.DBX0.1 -- PRESOSTATO
Segm.: 3 FALTA DE AIRE
U "MARCA FALTA DE AIRE" M50.3

= "PANTALLA".FALTA_AIRE DB2.DBX0.2 -- PRESOSTATO
Segm.: 4 TERMICO VENTILADOR
U "MARCA TERMICO VENTILAODR" M50.5

= "PANTALLA".TER_VENTILADOR DB2.DBX0.3 -- TERMICO
Segm.: 5 CONDICIONES OK

= "PANTALLA".CONDICIONES_OK DB2.DBX0.4

= "PANTALLA".TER_EXTRACTOR_1 DB2.DBX0.5 -- TERMICO

= "PANTALLA".TER_EXTRACTOR_2 DB2.DBX0.6 -- TERMICO
Pgina 1 de 2

= "PANTALLA".TER_AGITADOR_1 DB2.DBX0.7 -- TERMICO

= "PANTALLA".TER_AGITADOR_2 DB2.DBX1.0 -- TERMICO
Segm.: 10 AVERIA QUEMADOR N1

= "PANTALLA".AVERIA_Q1 DB2.DBX1.1 -- QUEMADOR



Segm.: 14 AVERIA QUEMADORES
O "S9.5.1" E4.4 -- CONFIRMACION QUEMADOR N1 EN AVERIA

= "PANTALLA".AVERIA_QUEMADORES DB2.DBX1.5 -- QUEMADORES
Segm.: 15 TERMICO CADENA
U "MARCA TERMICO CADENA" M51.0

= "PANTALLA".TER_CADENA DB2.DBX4.0 -- TERMICO
Segm.: 16 ESTANQUEIDAD INCORRECTA
U "MARCA DE ESTANQUEIDAD IN" M50.4

= "PANTALLA".ESTAN_INCORRECTA DB2.DBX8.0
Pgina 2 de 2
MAQUINA DE CALENTAMIENTO
DIRECTO SITA EN INAUXA S,A
INSTALACIONES
INDUSTRIALES Y
SERVICIOS, S.A
DOCUMENTO 2.
Ref. O 9.038
GUIAS DE USUARIO Y MANUALES-
DOCUMENTO N 2
GUIAS DE USUARIO Y
MANUALES
DE LA MAQUINA DE
CALENTAMIENTO DIRECTO
SITA EN INAUXA S,A
AMURRIO (ALAVA)
Realizado por: Jose Ramn Bilbao
Revisado por: Eloy Acillona
Fecha de revisin: 12/04/2.010
Documento N 2 12/04/2.010 Revisin A

LINtools
User guide
Engineering Studio
Eurotherm LIN Products

EUROTHERM
invensys
2009
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any
form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in
operating the equipment to which the document relates, without prior written permission of the manufac-
turer.
The manufacturer pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications
in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good
faith, but is intended for guidance only. The manufacturer will not accept responsibility for any losses arising
from errors in this document.
LINtools Engineering Studio User Guide
Contents LINtools Engineering Studio User Guide

1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................1
2 Overview of LINtools ...................................................................................................................................2
3 Configure a Strategy - Overview ................................................................................................................4
4 Menus............................................................................................................................................................5
Contents Pane ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
What is a Contents Pane? .................................................................................................................................... 5
Menus ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
File menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 10
Edit menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Make menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 12
View menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 13
Online menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 14
Tools menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
Help menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 14
5 LIN Databases ............................................................................................................................................15
What is a LIN Database ? ............................................................................................................................................ 15
What is a LIN Monitor Database?................................................................................................................................. 15
Database Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 16
Function Block Diagram (FBD) - example .......................................................................................................... 16
Configure a LIN Database - Overview .......................................................................................................................... 18
Monitor a Database - Overview .................................................................................................................................... 19
Database file properties ...................................................................................................................................... 20
Loaded File Properties dialog ................................................................................................................... 20
6 Tag Configuration ......................................................................................................................................21
What is Tag Configuration? .......................................................................................................................................... 21
Configure Tags - Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 21
Tag configuration - example ............................................................................................................................... 21
7 I/O Configuration .......................................................................................................................................22
What is I/O Configuration? ........................................................................................................................................... 22
I/O Configuration - Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 22
I/O Function Block Diagram (FBD) - example ..................................................................................................... 23
8 LIN Sequences ...........................................................................................................................................24
What is a LIN Sequence?............................................................................................................................................. 24
Specific & Generic Sequences ........................................................................................................................... 24
Specificity of generic name mapping .................................................................................................................. 25
Sequence Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 26
Sequence Editor - Overview ..................................................................................................................... 26
Configure a LIN Sequence - Overview ......................................................................................................................... 26
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) - example ....................................................................................................... 27
Monitor a Sequence - Overview ................................................................................................................................... 27
Sequence Action Monitor - Overview ........................................................................................................................... 28
Sequence file properties ..................................................................................................................................... 29
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Contents Page i
9 LIN Actions .................................................................................................................................................30

What is a LIN Action? .................................................................................................................................................. 30
Action Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 30
Action names ............................................................................................................................................31
Action types ..............................................................................................................................................31
Action-type function blocks .......................................................................................................................31
Configure a LIN Action - Overview .............................................................................................................................. 31
10 Ladder Diagrams .......................................................................................................................................32
What is a Ladder Diagram? ............................................................................................................................... 32
Ladder Diagram elements .................................................................................................................................. 32
Ladder Diagram - example................................................................................................................................. 33
Ladder Diagram default colours - example ........................................................................................................ 35
11 Structured Text ..........................................................................................................................................36
What is Structured Text? ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Structured Text example ................................................................................................................................. 36
Structured Text reference ............................................................................................................................................ 36
Spaces in ST...................................................................................................................................................... 36
Comments in ST ................................................................................................................................................ 37
Statements in ST ......................................................................................................................................37
IF Statement .............................................................................................................................................38
FOR Statement .........................................................................................................................................38
REPEAT Statement ..................................................................................................................................39
WHILE Statement .....................................................................................................................................39
Expressions in ST .............................................................................................................................................. 40
Operators and functions in ST ........................................................................................................................... 41
Example CRC ...........................................................................................................................................48
FIND Examples .........................................................................................................................................49
Conversion Formats and examples ..........................................................................................................49
DELIMIT Examples ...................................................................................................................................52
Order Parameter .......................................................................................................................................53
Variables in ST................................................................................................................................................... 54
Identifiers in ST .................................................................................................................................................. 55
Constants in ST ................................................................................................................................................. 56
String constants ........................................................................................................................................57
Wide String and Byte Sequence Conversions ..........................................................................................57
Actions in ST ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Transitions in ST ................................................................................................................................................ 58
Arrays in ST ....................................................................................................................................................... 58
Notation.............................................................................................................................................................. 59
12 Online Configuration and Reconfiguration .............................................................................................60
What is Online Reconfiguration? ................................................................................................................................. 60
Live changes ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
Tentative changes .....................................................................................................................................60
Online Reconfiguration - Example ..................................................................................................................... 61
13 Profibus ......................................................................................................................................................62
What is Profibus Configuration ? ................................................................................................................................. 62
Profibus Master Configurator ............................................................................................................................. 62
Profibus Configuration - example: .............................................................................................................62
Demand Data ............................................................................................................................................62
Profibus Configuration - Overview ............................................................................................................................... 63
HA263001U055
Contents Page ii Issue 12 Nov 09
14 Data Recording ..........................................................................................................................................64

What is Data Recording Configuration ? ...................................................................................................................... 64
Data Recording Configurator .............................................................................................................................. 64
Adaptive Recording .................................................................................................................................. 64
Data Recording Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 65
15 Setpoint Programming ..............................................................................................................................66
What is Setpoint Programming ? .................................................................................................................................. 66
Setpoint Programming - Overview ............................................................................................................................... 67
Single Channel Program ..................................................................................................................................... 68
Multi-Channel Program ....................................................................................................................................... 68
16 Intellectual Property Protection ...............................................................................................................69
What is Intellectual Property Protection ?..................................................................................................................... 69
17 Alarm Suppression ....................................................................................................................................70
Alarm Suppression - Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 70
Supported alarms ......................................................................................................................................................... 70
What is Alarm Suppression Configuration? .................................................................................................................. 70
Addressing and Syntax ....................................................................................................................................... 71
Examples: ................................................................................................................................................. 71
Invalid Entries ..................................................................................................................................................... 71
Alarm Action on Suppression.............................................................................................................................. 71
Function Block Wiring Diagram (FBD) ................................................................................................................ 71
Structured Text (ST) ..................................................................................................................................................... 72
Written Statements ............................................................................................................................................. 72
Structured Text Versions and Errors................................................................................................................... 72
Alarm Suppression Supported Products ...................................................................................................................... 73
Does my existing Database Support Alarm Suppression ............................................................................................. 73
18 Raw Comms ...............................................................................................................................................74
Raw Comms - Overview............................................................................................................................................... 74
Raw Comms Supported Products ................................................................................................................................ 74
Does my existing Database Support Raw Comms? ..................................................................................................... 75
What is Raw Comms Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 76
Configuration of the RAW_COM function block fields ......................................................................................... 76
Associated Structured Text (ST) Action .............................................................................................................. 76
Associated SFC .................................................................................................................................................. 76
Raw Comms On-Line Reconfiguration ............................................................................................................... 76
19 How to... ......................................................................................................................................................77
Use LINtools ................................................................................................................................................................. 77
Use the Get Me Started wizard ........................................................................................................................... 77
Add a new network/instrument............................................................................................................................ 78
Ceate a New LIN Instrument Folder ................................................................................................................... 78
Open the Editor window ...................................................................................................................................... 79
Open a file in a New Window .............................................................................................................................. 79
Open a file in the current Window ....................................................................................................................... 80
Import a file ......................................................................................................................................................... 80
Add to Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 80
To view the Contents pane: ................................................................................................................................ 80
To view Object Properties pane .......................................................................................................................... 81
Sow/hide the Report pane .................................................................................................................................. 81
To show/hide the Status bar ............................................................................................................................... 82
To show the instrument properties: ........................................................................................................... 82
Open the Explorer............................................................................................................................................... 83
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Contents Page iii
Configure the Instrument Properties .................................................................................................................. 83

Instrument Properties - example ...............................................................................................................83
To download a configuration: ............................................................................................................................. 84
To edit the list of LINtools' downloadable files: .................................................................................................. 84
Cose a LINtools file ............................................................................................................................................ 84
Configure databases ................................................................................................................................................... 85
To change the instruments Default .dbf: ............................................................................................................ 85
Create a LIN Database file ................................................................................................................................. 85
Access the LIN Database Editor ........................................................................................................................ 85
Create a new Layer ............................................................................................................................................ 86
Change to and from a Blended Database .......................................................................................................... 86
Ordering a Blended Database............................................................................................................................ 87
Import a Layer .................................................................................................................................................... 87
Configure a PID Control Loop Strategy - Tutorial............................................................................................... 87
Work with function blocks................................................................................................................................... 88
Place a Function block ..............................................................................................................................88
Name a function block...............................................................................................................................88
Use the Find utility ....................................................................................................................................89
Inspect fields in a function block ...............................................................................................................89
Inspect wire inputs to a field ......................................................................................................................90
Edit function block fields............................................................................................................................90
Edit a function block's database ................................................................................................................90
Edit a function block's update rate ............................................................................................................90
Inspect a function block execution order ...................................................................................................91
Create a cached function block .................................................................................................................91
Compound a group of function blocks .......................................................................................................91
Add Comment tab text ..............................................................................................................................92
Import a configuration from another file ....................................................................................................93
Wire the function blocks ..................................................................................................................................... 93
Create wiring between function blocks ......................................................................................................94
Edit wiring between blocks ........................................................................................................................94
Inspect wiring connections ........................................................................................................................95
Delete a wire connection ...........................................................................................................................96
Inspect a function block execution order ...................................................................................................96
Create FBD Layout ...................................................................................................................................96
Add text to the worksheet................................................................................................................................... 96
Create and edit text items .........................................................................................................................96
Save a LIN Database ......................................................................................................................................... 97
Files to Be Downloaded dialog - example .................................................................................................97
Save a LIN Database ................................................................................................................................97
Test the Strategy .......................................................................................................................................98
Monitor remote databases ........................................................................................................................................... 99
Create a Monitor Database from scratch ........................................................................................................... 99
Create a Monitor Database from an existing database .................................................................................... 100
Open the Monitor window ................................................................................................................................ 101
Monitor an instrument Database in a new Window .......................................................................................... 101
Convert to Monitor Database ........................................................................................................................... 101
Use the Watch window .................................................................................................................................... 101
Open / Save Watch Window dialogs .......................................................................................................103
Choose a Block to Monitor ......................................................................................................................103
Add a Block tab field to the Watch Window.............................................................................................103
Add a field directly to the Watch Window ................................................................................................104
Add an ST block field to the Watch Window ...........................................................................................104
Scan for changed parameters .......................................................................................................................... 105
Save a LIN Monitor Database .......................................................................................................................... 106
HA263001U055
Contents Page iv Issue 12 Nov 09
Configure the I/O ........................................................................................................................................................ 107

Use the I/O table ............................................................................................................................................... 108
Entering data into the I/O table ............................................................................................................... 109
Editing data in a I/O table cell ................................................................................................................. 109
Create Modules ................................................................................................................................................ 110
Enter the Module Names ........................................................................................................................ 110
Select the Module Type .......................................................................................................................... 110
Create Channel blocks ........................................................................................................................... 110
Configure Tags ........................................................................................................................................................... 111
Use the Tag table ............................................................................................................................................. 111
Entering data into the Tag table .............................................................................................................. 111
Editing data in a Tag table cell ................................................................................................................ 111
Copying Tag rows to the clipboard ......................................................................................................... 112
Create Tags and Aliasses ................................................................................................................................. 112
Configure sequences ................................................................................................................................................. 113
Create a LIN Sequence file ............................................................................................................................... 113
Access the LIN Sequence Editor ...................................................................................................................... 113
Associate a Sequence with a Database ........................................................................................................... 114
Use the Find utility ............................................................................................................................................ 114
Configure steps................................................................................................................................................. 114
Place a step ............................................................................................................................................ 114
Configure a step name & initial state ...................................................................................................... 115
Associate an Action with a Step .............................................................................................................. 115
Action Qualifiers ...................................................................................................................................... 116
Add Comment tab text ............................................................................................................................ 116
Import a configuration from another file .................................................................................................. 117
Sequence wiring operations ............................................................................................................................. 117
Types of Sequence wiring....................................................................................................................... 117
Step-to-Transition wiring ......................................................................................................................... 117
Edit Sequence wiring .............................................................................................................................. 118
Configure Transitions ........................................................................................................................................ 118
Create a Transition expression ............................................................................................................... 118
Create a Sequence Action ................................................................................................................................ 119
Edit a Sequence Action .......................................................................................................................... 119
Compile an Action or Transition .............................................................................................................. 119
Convert sequences ........................................................................................................................................... 120
Create a Specific from a Generic Sequence ........................................................................................... 120
Create a Generic from a Specific Sequence ........................................................................................... 120
Save a LIN Sequence ....................................................................................................................................... 121
Monitor remote sequences ......................................................................................................................................... 122
Access the Sequence Action Monitor ............................................................................................................... 122
Sequence monitoring operations ...................................................................................................................... 122
Sequence Control operations ........................................................................................................................... 123
Monitor a Ladder Diagram Sequence Action .................................................................................................... 123
Choose a Sequence to Monitor ........................................................................................................................ 123
Configure LIN Actions ................................................................................................................................................ 124
Create a LIN Actions file ................................................................................................................................... 124
Access the LIN Action Editor ............................................................................................................................ 124
Make a LIN Action ............................................................................................................................................ 124
Monitor a LIN Action ......................................................................................................................................... 124
Monitor a Ladder Diagram Transition ............................................................................................................... 125
Use the Find utility ............................................................................................................................................ 125
Save a LIN Action ............................................................................................................................................. 126
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Contents Page v
Edit a Ladder diagram ............................................................................................................................................... 127

Edit a Ladder Diagram ..................................................................................................................................... 127
Parameterising the Ladder Diagram ................................................................................................................ 128
Associate a Variable ........................................................................................................................................ 128
Save a Ladder Diagram ................................................................................................................................... 128
Compile an Action or Transition ....................................................................................................................... 129
Configure Structured Text ......................................................................................................................................... 130
Edit Structured Text ......................................................................................................................................... 130
Associate a Variable ........................................................................................................................................ 130
Compile Structured Text .........................................................................................................................130
Compile an Action or Transition ....................................................................................................................... 130
Compile all Transitions in an SFC .................................................................................................................... 131
Use the Online Reconfiguration ................................................................................................................................. 132
Online Reconfiguration - Overview .................................................................................................................. 132
Connect to an Instrument ................................................................................................................................. 132
Access the Online Reconfiguration .................................................................................................................. 133
Reconfigure an online strategy - Overview ...................................................................................................... 133
Try an Online Strategy ..................................................................................................................................... 134
Apply an Online Strategy ................................................................................................................................. 134
Unlink a block................................................................................................................................................... 135
Use Profibus Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 136
Use the Profibus Master Configurator .............................................................................................................. 136
Configure the LIN Profibus GateWay ............................................................................................................... 137
Configure the Profibus communications protocol ............................................................................................. 138
Configure the Profibus Master Properties ........................................................................................................ 139
Configure the Profibus Slave ........................................................................................................................... 139
Configure the Profibus Slave Properties .......................................................................................................... 140
Configure the Profibus Slave Module ............................................................................................................... 141
Configure the Profibus Slave Module Properties ............................................................................................. 142
Configure the Profibus Slave Input data and Output data ................................................................................ 142
Configure the Profibus Slave Acyclic data ....................................................................................................... 143
Configure the Profibus Slave Extended Diagnostics ........................................................................................ 145
Configure the Slot number and Index address ................................................................................................. 145
Use the Data Recording Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 146
Use the Data Recording Configurator .............................................................................................................. 146
Configure the Data Recording configuration .................................................................................................... 147
Define the parameters for Data Recording....................................................................................................... 148
Edit the Group configuration ............................................................................................................................ 149
Edit the Block configuration.............................................................................................................................. 149
Edit the Field configuration............................................................................................................................... 150
Edit the Option configuration ............................................................................................................................ 151
Define the FTP Server ..................................................................................................................................... 151
Configure Review............................................................................................................................................. 153
Use the Programmer wizard ...................................................................................................................................... 154
Use the Programmer Wizard............................................................................................................................ 154
Configure Alarm Suppression .................................................................................................................................... 155
Enable Alarm Suppression............................................................................................................................... 155
Layered and Blended Databases ..................................................................................................................... 156
Alarm Suppression and SFCs .......................................................................................................................... 157
Alarm Suppression and Ladder Diagrams ....................................................................................................... 158
Header Block Unsuppression........................................................................................................................... 159
Alarm Suppression and On-line Connect ......................................................................................................... 160
Alarm Suppression and ACTION Blocks .......................................................................................................... 161
HA263001U055
Contents Page vi Issue 12 Nov 09
Customise LINtools .................................................................................................................................................... 162

Customise LINtools Printed Page Setup ........................................................................................................... 162
Print LINtools configurations ............................................................................................................................. 162
To print a LINtools configuration in page-based format: ................................................................................... 162
To generate a LINtools configuration text-only file: ................................................................................. 162
Customise LINtools colour coding .................................................................................................................... 163
Customise LINtools Toolbars ............................................................................................................................ 163
Customise Toolbars dialog - Toolbars page ........................................................................................... 164
Toolbars .................................................................................................................................................. 164
To create a custom Toolbar, ............................................................................................................................. 165
Reset/Delete ........................................................................................................................................... 165
Customise Toolbars dialog - Commands page ....................................................................................... 165
Customise LINtools Settings ............................................................................................................................. 166
Settings dialog - Editor page ................................................................................................................... 166
Settings dialog - Tags page .................................................................................................................... 167
Settings dialog - Palette page ................................................................................................................. 168
Settings dialog - Advanced page ............................................................................................................ 168
Customise LINtools Worksheet......................................................................................................................... 169
To convert to a large worksheet: ............................................................................................................. 169
Editing KeyFields.ini file .................................................................................................................................... 169
Protect the Intellectual Property ................................................................................................................................. 170
Protect your Intellectual Property ...................................................................................................................... 170
Manage the instrument passwords ................................................................................................................... 171
20 Getting specific help ...............................................................................................................................172
LINtools windows help................................................................................................................................................ 172
To get help on using LINtools Editor and Monitor windows, click the shortcuts: .................................... 172
To get help on individual function block fields: ........................................................................................ 172
Getting Whats This help: ...................................................................................................................... 172
LIN Function Block help ............................................................................................................................................. 172
Getting concise function block help ............................................................................................................................ 172
Viewing the LIN Blocks Reference Manual ................................................................................................................ 173
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Contents Page vii
1 Introduction
LINtools is a powerful multi-purpose Windows-based software package for use both off- and on-line.
Offline, LINtools creates and modifies a Local Instrument Network (LIN) based process strategy, sequences, and
actions for a range of target instruments.
Online, lets you monitor and interact with control and sequence strategies running in remote instruments across the
LIN or ALIN, providing a versatile commissioning and strategy debugging toolkit.
Online Reconfiguration, lets you reconfigure an operational instrument via an Ethernet network.
I/O Configuration, LINtools creates and modifies a block-structured I/O subsystem.
Profibus Configuration, lets you configure the Data Exchange requirements of the Profibus Master and
communicating Profibus Slaves.
Data Recording Configuration, lets you record values from defined groups of the parameters, and configure the
appearance of each defined parameter when shown in Review. Additional configuration of the Instrument Properties
provides an archiving strategy for the recorded values.
Setpoint Programming Configuration, lets you create the blocks required as an interface to the Programmer
Editor. The blocks are created with a default configuration, but are used to display the configuration of the
Programmer Editor when online.
Intellectual Property Protection, lets you encrypt specific application file types. This will help prevent the loss of
your Intellectual Property.
LINtools uses and outputs fully compatible files that can be saved locally to hard or floppy disk, or transferred to and
from target instruments at high speed over the LIN via ELIN (Ethernet), PCLIN or PC cards, or ALIN via a PCALIN or
Arcnet card, or via a serial port (SLIN).
Designing a block-structured strategy and sequence with LINtools is fast and straightforward. Engineering productivity
is boosted by its ability to function as a central configuration terminal for all our LIN-based products, capable of building
a global database for distribution across the product range - both current and future.
Related Manuals
LIN Blocks Reference Manual
This manual describes the available instruments function blocks that can be connected to this manufacturers Local
Instrument Network (LIN). The purpose and workings of each block are explained, specification menu parameters are
defined and inputs and outputs indicated, giving enough detailed information needed to configure the function block in a
Strategy.
Application And Control Modules Operator Manual
This manual describes the application and control modules available within the LIN environment. These modules can
be used in conjunction with existing LIN blocks to perform a wide range of control tasks. Application modules can be
utilised for specific activities such as combustion control, load management and pump set control, while Control
modules consist of common devices such as motors and valves.
Note
Contact your distributor if these documents are unavailable.
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Page 1
2 Overview of LINtools
LINtools is a stand-alone application that can also operate as part of a Project based suite of tools. It is used to
configure the strategy (operation) of an Instrument that communicates with other nodes via a Local Instrument Network
(LIN), i.e. other LIN Instruments and Computers. It provides graphical configuration for continuous control and
sequencing control using function block configuration, and sequential function charts (SFCs) and ladder logic allowing
creation of actions and steps.
LINtools offers you:
A common toolset for the LIN product range.
Intellectual Property Protection.
Graphical configuration.
An extensive library of function blocks and control modules.
Powerful online configuration features for instrument strategy files that may or may not exist in Instrument Folders in
a Computer based Project.
Powerful online commissioning features.
Automatic documentation.
The LINtools common toolset
LINtools is a comprehensive set of configuration, test, documentation, and commissioning tools for LIN instruments.
LINtools employs graphical configuration for continuous control and sequencing control.
The online reconfiguration features give configuration engineers the ability to a change Strategy while running; not only
to change parameters, but to change the structure of the Strategy, to allocate new elements in memory.
Tip!
The Tools menu on the Menu bar provides access to applications that can be launched from the LINtools Engineering Studio. These
applications are used to enhance the operation of the product range.
The online monitoring facility lets configuration engineers watch running LIN Monitor Databases and LIN Sequential
Function Charts (SFCs) - making for easier commissioning and trouble-shooting of a Strategy.
Note
The Connect feature in LINtools provides the functionality of monitor values from the database of a Live Instrument but without the use of additional
files, unlike the LIN Monitor Database.
Graphical configuration
Both Continuous and I/O strategies are configured graphically as a Function Block Diagram (FBD). FBDs use
block-structured technologies provided by the LIN Database Editor, supporting a comprehensive library of LIN
function blocks.
A LIN Sequence are configured graphically using Sequential Function Charts (SFCs) following the IEC1131-3
standards. Steps initiate Sequence Actions - which may be Structured Text (ST) statements, Ladder Diagrams, or
nested SFCs. Transitions determine when control passes from one Step to another.
Sequences (SFCs) can be configured as Generic or Specific. Generic Sequences let you configure and test the
Sequence once, and then replicate it many times. Generic Sequences are constructed using generic name variables
The powerful Sequence Editor allows the creation of one kind of Sequence from the other, i.e. a Specific Sequences
from Generic Sequences, or a Generic Sequences from Specific Sequences.
Function block and control module library
In addition to its extensive library of function blocks, LINtools offers a comprehensive library of standard control
modules to provide a ready-made set of versatile building blocks. The standard control module library includes a wide
range of valves, motors, and signal conditioners. Control modules enable plant devices and equipment to be
represented by dedicated objects in the control system with standard displays at workstation level, that
simplifies implementation
clarifies documentation
helps operators navigate their way around the displays
HA263001U055
Page 2 Issue 12 Nov 09
Online Reconfiguration features

The Online Reconfiguration features allow the operator to access the LIN Database files, .dbf, within a LIN Instrument.
By using the Connect feature, a user can access a LIN Database file, .dbf, in a Live Instrument, without having the
files contained in the Computer based system. However, once connected to the Live Instrument, the Strategy files can
be inspected, edited (via Online Reconfiguration), and even uploaded to the Computer based system.
By using the Reconfiguration features, including Try, Untry, and Apply, a user can tentatively try changes to a LIN
Database file, .dbf, in a Live Instrument. In a Non-Redundant (Simplex) system or a Redundant (Duplex)
unsynchronised system the changes can be tried to assess the impact these may have on the Strategy. When satisfied
with any changes that have been made, they can be saved (applied) to the operational system, and Project
environment using a single (Apply) button.
Note
Any instrument operating in Duplex mode, with a synchronised secondary processor, MUST be desynchronised to permit Online Reconfiguration.
Remember to synchronise the secondary processor when Online Reconfiguration is complete.
Online Commissioning features

LINtools' Monitor facilities let operators view and interact with Databases and Sequences running in remote instruments
on the LIN.
With the LIN Monitor Database and the necessary security clearance, remote LIN Instrument Databases can be
accessed and function blocks can be modified on-screen. The Monitor Database allows a combination of function
blocks from multiple nodes to be observed simultaneously.
With the LIN Sequence Action Monitor and the necessary security clearance, remote Sequences can be observed
and controlled, active steps can be tracked, Transitions can be forced or held, and SFC objects can be inspected.
Instrument File System
The display of instrument files is via a simplified Contents Pane, initially showing all files in the Instrument Folder that
will be downloaded to the Instrument.
Any file not used on the Strategy is stored in the Unused Files folder, but can be added at any time. This folder can be
shown or hidden using the Show Unused Files on the Contents pane.
Note
Some files types are grouped for simplicity, but can be individually added to the list of files to be downloaded to the Instrument.
Automatic documentation
The Strategy and graphics can be fully documented using the Documentation utilities and transferred across the
network using the File utilities.
LINtools follows the IEC1131-3 programming standard. It is the worldwide standard for the programming interface in
industrial control systems for a wide range of applications, supporting Function Block Diagram [FBD], Sequential
Function Charts [SFC], Ladder Diagrams [LD] and Structured Text [ST] programming languages.
HA263001U055
3 Configure a Strategy - Overview

The following stages may occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied, especially when you are editing an
existing strategy. Function blocks, wiring, parameter values and Sequences can be added, modified, or deleted at any
time using the comprehensive toolkit, even if the Strategy files do not exist in a Computer based Project.
Tip!
If a Strategy already exists on a Live instrument in th e plant/system, use the Connect feature to select the Instrument and either edit
the Strategy online, using online reconfiguration, or upload to the Computer, edit offline, and then download the changes to the target
instrument.
Configure a PID Control Loop Strategy - Tutorial

To configure a Strategy, follow these stages.
1 For a new Strategy, first create and configure a LIN Database.
By using the New Instrument wizard, or automatic database generation if supported by the instrument, all essential
blocks are automatically added to the database file, .dbf, i.e. Instrument Configuration Block (Header block)
describing the Instrument Type, Version, and fields to determine the instrument configuration, and a pre-defined
range of Diagnostic Blocks, used to assist with diagnosing potential or existing faults.
A LIN Database processes inputs to control the behaviour of an actuator, or plant instrument, in a required manner.
If a LIN Database already exists in the Live LIN Instrument, use the Connect feature to access the existing
Strategy files.
Note
A LIN Database always requires a Header block (Config category) to determine the Strategy instrument type.
2 Then, create and configure a LIN Sequence.

A LIN Sequence defines a list of steps when the process being controlled by the LIN Database can adopt several
distinct states.
3 Monitoring across nodes may be required, so create and configure a LIN Monitor Database.
A LIN Monitor Database is only required if you wish to review a selection of blocks from within a number of different
nodes.
Note
Any Sequences operating in the selected LIN Monitor Database will also be monitored, if the SFC_CON and SFC_DISP blocks have been added to the
LIN Database.
4 Next, create and edit a LIN Action.

A LIN Action defines direct operations on the LIN Database of the running Strategy.
Tip!
Some application files can be encrypted in order to protect your Intellectual Property.
Set 'Offer option to encrypt files on Save As' checkbox on the Advanced page of the Settings dialog to allow you t o configure
password protection.
Your Strategy should now be complete and ready to download to the instrument!
HA263001U055
4 Menus
Contents Pane
The Contents pane permits the creation, editing and inspection LIN Databases, LIN Sequences and Actions. The links
on this page reveal instructions concerning how to use its features.
The default view of the Contents Pane shows a list of the files used in the Strategy, via a tree view structure. Any file
displayed in the default view of this pane can be opened in the appropriate application and will be downloaded to the
Instrument.
Note
Each of the panes, Template palette, Object Properties, etc. can be individually docked anywhere in the application window, e.g. the Template Palette
can be docked below the Contents Pane.
Tip!
Use the <Ctrl> key while moving the pane to prevent it from docking unintentionally. This allows it to move freely around the Computer
window.
The icons displayed in the Contents Pane allow specific operations to be applied.
Note
Some files are have been grouped for simplicity, e.g. .dbf, .grf, .dtf, but can be individually added to the list of files that are to be downloaded to the
Instrument.
What is a Contents Pane?

The Contents Pane is the list of files contained in the selected instrument. Its purpose is to control and manage all the
files that together form the Instrument Strategy and any other files that are used to enhance the operation of the
Instrument, e.g. displays created using the User Screen Editor, and gateway files created using the Modbus tools. The
pane is designed to offer the various file types and there own set of context sensitive menu commands.
The Toolbar at the top of the Contents pane offers a quick access to the most common commands that are used
regularly in an Instrument context.
HA263001U055
Use the Contents pane

The Contents pane lists the files that are currently part of the strategy and can be selected for downloading to the
instrument.
The files stored in the Instrument Folder can be controlled by using the Contents pane toolbar. These toolbuttons are
used to allow files to move freely between the existing folders. An Unused files folder remains hidden unless specifically
requested via the context menu.
If this pane is not visible, select View > Contents. The / symbol can be used to minimise or maximise the Pane if
more than one pane is docked in the same area of the application, and the can be used to hide this pane.
Tip!
Use the <Ctrl> key while moving the pane to prevent it from docking unintentionally. This allows it to move freely around the Computer
window.
You can cycle through the open sub-windows using the editors Back and Forward toolbuttons.
Beware
Any changes made while online may seriously effect the operation of your system. While performing offline changes to instrument blocks in the
LINtools Strategy, the state of the Node, Module, and/or Channel blocks are updated when saved.
Note
During Online Reconfiguration any changes made to the I/O Configuration are indicated by the icons displayed in the Content pane.
Instrument Folder
HA263001U055
Instrument File commands
General I/O commands
I/O Instrument commands
HA263001U055
I/O Module commands
I/O Channel commands
HA263001U055
Menus
The Menus can be divided into command and information areas.
Menu bar
The Menu Bar is a special toolbar that contains the pulldown commands. Each pulldown displays a further list of
commands.
The Menu bar contains the following items,
Toolbars
The Toolbars contain buttons that enable quick access to a number of Edit and View commands.
File bar
The File toolbar hosts icon buttons that enable quick access to a limited number of File commands.
Make bar
The Make toolbar hosts icon buttons that enable quick access to a limited number of file specific configuration
commands.
View bar
The View toolbar hosts icon buttons that enable quick access to a limited number of LINtools application commands.
Status bar
The Status Bar displays specific Editor information. It is displayed by default and is located along the foot of the screen.
HA263001U055
File menu
The File menu enables the control of an individual LINtools application file using the following commands.
Note
The commands that appear below are file specific, i.e. the Build Generic SFC File command is only available when editing an SFC.
HA263001U055
Edit menu
The Edit menu enables the manipulate an individual LINtools application file using the following commands.
Note
The commands that appear below are file specific, i.e. the Build Generic SFC File command is only available when editing an SFC.
HA263001U055
Make menu
The Make menu is a list of strategy configuration commands. This provides immediate access to file specific
configuration commands.
Note
The available commands are file specific.
Function Block Diagram
Sequential Block Diagram
HA263001U055
View menu
The View menu is a list of commands that change the appearance of LINtools application.
This provides immediate access to the commands used to change how items are shown in the LINtools application.
Function Block Diagram
Sequential Block Diagram
HA263001U055
Online menu
The Online menu is a list of commands that provide control and management while online to the instrument.
Tools menu
The Tools menu is a list of applications that can be launched from LINtools.
This provides immediate access to the tools used to configure the communications protocol required and create a
complete instrument strategy.
Help menu
The Help menu enables the used to display LINtools application details using the following commands.
HA263001U055
5 LIN Databases
What is a LIN Database ?
A LIN Database (.dbf) is a database that runs in a LIN instrument providing data and rules, also known as a 'Strategy'.
It is loaded by the LIN Instrument at runtime and allows the instrument software to control and monitor signals from
sensors in the plant/system, e.g. an industrial plant, and then output the signals back to actuators.
The cycle of signal input, signal processing, and signal output to the entity is repeated continuously while the database
is run in the instrument.
More than one LIN instrument can be involved in controlling a single entity, but only one LIN Database can run in a
single LIN instrument at a time.
A LIN Database can be configured as a standard LIN Database or blended LIN Database, both operating in conjunction
with one or more LIN Sequences running in the LIN instrument. It can also make use of LIN Actions stored in action
files in the LIN instrument.
In LINtools, a LIN Database is represented and configured graphically as an arrangement of connected LIN function
blocks, where input to output links, are represented as wires between blocks.
What is a LIN Monitor Database?
A LIN Monitor Database (.udm) is a LIN Database consisting entirely of cached blocks. It is only constructed for the
purpose of viewing any collection of cached function blocks from any nodes on the (single) network, so any wiring and
local blocks are irrelevant in a Monitor Database. However, what is relevant is the origin of the cached function blocks
in the Monitor Database, i.e. from which LIN Database does this block come. The Computer operates as the LIN peer
node, and cache blocks from any other nodes on the network.
Note
Use the Connect feature to inspect a collection of local blocks in a specific LIN instrument, and Online Reconfiguration to reconfigure the Strategy.
In order to create and eventually edit a LIN Monitor Database, either

Open the required LIN Instrument Database using the LINTools Monitor program, or
Simply select View > Convert to Monitor Database, if the required LIN Instrument Database is already open.
Both methods automatically create a LIN Monitor Database, including a PC_MON Header block usually with a fixed
name, just for identification purposes. This LIN Database can then be edited to remove or add further cached blocks,
and finally saved in this form, as a .udm file.
A LIN Monitor Database works with one or more LIN Monitor Sequences in the LIN instrument.
HA263001U055
Database Configuration
The Database Editor window is where you create and edit Databases. The links on this page take you to the
instructions of how to use its features.
This Editor can be divided in to a number of separate windows.
Function Block Diagram sub-window
Contents pane
Function block template palette
Object properties pane
Message bar
Note
Each of the panes above can be shown/hidden using the corresponding View menu command.
To access the Contents pane:

If the Contents pane is not visible, in the View menu, click Contents.
You can cycle through the open sub-windows using the editors Back and Forward toolbuttons.
Use the Contents tab

Function Block Diagram (FBD) - example
An example LIN Database FBD:
HA263001U055
A Standard Database
A Standard Database is a Read/Write file that uses a only a single set of LIN Database files (.dbf, .dtf, and, .grf LIN
instrument files).
This is also considered as a Strategy.
A Blended Database
A Blended Database (or Strategy) is a Read Only file that is the result of a Build command on a selected LIN Node
containing layered LIN Database files (.dbf) and Auto generated layers (.ujc).
The Build command combines the Default DBF with any number of *.dbf and *.ujc files in a specified order as shown in
the buildlst.ubl, but configured by ordering each layered LIN Database file starting immediately below the base.dbf.
During a Build any PROGRAM and Cached Function Blocks are removed but all other blocks are blended into a
single LIN Database.
Note
The DefaultDBF and Auto generated layers are all Read Only files and do NOT require a graphics file, but each layer MUST contain a PROGRAM
(Header) block with the same name as the DefaultDBF.
HA263001U055
Configure a LIN Database - Overview

To configure a Database, follow these stages.
Stages occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied, especially when you are editing an existing database.
Function blocks, wiring, and parameter values can be added, modified, or deleted at any time using LINtools'
comprehensive toolkit.
5 Start the New LINtools file wizard to display a list of supported LINtools file types, either
Select File > New command
Press New LINtools file toolbutton.
6 For a new LIN Database, select New LIN Database radio button and complete each section of the Wizard.
Note
Additional information is displayed on the right of the dialog if the Help checkbox is set .
7 Now place function blocks on the editor worksheet, in a FBD sub-window - e.g. the default 'Main diagram.
i Place the required header block.
ii Place the required function blocks, Module blocks, Diagnostic blocks and I/O blocks etc..
iii Configure each function block with a Name and DBase. Edit any other Block fields, and add Comment tab
Text to a function block, as required.
iv Then, connect the function blocks by wires.
If you discover that the FBD is becoming to large for the default size worksheet, it can be increased by
converting to a large worksheet.
During configuration multiple connections to a block are displayed as a single wire.
v Create and configure compounds as required.
If your system contains Tactician instruments use the I/O table to configure the required I/O.
vi Next add textual comments to the FBD as required.
8 Finally, save the Database to disk.
Note
Most instructions are also used when performing Online Reconfiguration. Added and deleted blocks and wires are graphically indicated
Standard to Blended Database configuration

If changing to a Blended Database configuration, either
the build list (build.ubl.old) is converted (to buildlst.ubl) and restored, re-establishing the Blended Database
configuration.
if no backup (build.ubl.old) exists, a new build list (buildlst.ubl) is created with the Default DBF installed as the base
layer.
Blended to Standard Database configuration
If changing to a Standard Database configuration, the layers of the existing Blended Database are separated and
moved as individual files to the Unused Files folder. The Default DBF converts to a Standard Read/Write Database file
(.dbf).
Note
A backup of the Blended Databases configuration is automatically created by converting and renaming the buildlst.ubl to build.ubl.old. Therefore this
will not be recognized as a Build file.
HA263001U055
Monitor Database - Overview

The Monitor Database window is where you can configure Monitor Databases, and also monitor and interact with LIN
Databases running in remote instruments. The sections below tell you how to use its features.
Note
From the Monitor Database you can easily access the associated Sequence Action Monitor.

This Monitor window can be divided in to a number of separate panes.
Function Block Diagram sub-window

Note
Each of the following panes can be individually positioned in the application window, i.e. the Template Palette can be docked below the Contents Pane.
Contents pane
Watch window
Message bar
Note
Monitor a Database - Overview

Note
You must have a suitable communications card installed and configured in your computer to be able to monitor remote LIN Databases over the LIN or
ALIN.
Monitor Databases
To monitor a remotely running LIN Database you must have a 'copy' of the remote database loaded locally in the
computer, with cached function blocks in place of the originals. This Monitor Database need not duplicate every
function block in the original - just those you are interested in monitoring.
The Monitor Database can monitor function blocks selected from more than one remote database.
A Monitor Database is different from a regular database in that it includes a special monitor header block in place of a
regular header block. Also, any local function blocks present in the Monitor Database do not update.
Creating a Monitor Database
You can create a Monitor Database in two main ways:
From scratch, using the Database Monitor window, which is very much like the regular database configuration
window (but without the ability to wire up function blocks).
Creating a Monitor Database from scratch

Note
Apart from naming them correctly and assigning them to the remote database if necessary - you can leave all block fields in a monitor database totally
unconfigured, with just their default values. This is because parameter data is obtained from the remote database, not the local one.
From an existing LIN Database, by loading a remotely-running database to the Database Monitor window, where
LINtools automatically converts it to a Monitor Database. Once converted, the Monitor Database can have function
blocks added or removed if required, using the windows facilities. If required for future use, the Monitor Database
can be saved under a different name from the original regular database.
Creating a Monitor Database from an existing LIN Database

Note
In a converted Monitor Database, existing wiring appears in the function block diagram, but is completely non-functional.
Interacting with the remote database

Once you have your Monitor Database configured, and communicating with the remote node(s), you can inspect and
edit fields in the remote database(s) via the Monitor Database.
You can also create a Watch Window in the Monitor window, where a group of selected Database fields can be
dynamically monitored and edited.
HA263001U055
Database file properties

Loaded File Properties dialog
This read-only page summarises the resources used by or allocated to the current LIN Database.
To access it, in the windows File menu, select Loaded File Properties.
Resources
Resources are the Function blocks, Function block templates, libraries, external databases, etc., that are used by or
allocated to the Database. In the Database Properties page, each resource has three numbers applying to it - Used,
Highest, and Max.
The figure shows schematically what Used and Highest mean. In the image below, five items of the resource,
represented by black circles, are located in an array of eight indexed memory cells.
Used - This is the quantity of the resource (e.g. number of blocks) that is actually being used by the database. In
the figure, Used = 5.
Highest - This is the highest index number in the allocated array that is occupied by a resource item. Highest = 6 in
the figure. Highest may be greater than Used if any gaps have been left by deletions during configuration, e.g. in the
figure, the fourth item created during configuration was subsequently deleted.
Max - This is the number of memory cells allocated by the Editor to the resource, and is fixed at the displayed
quantity (not shown in the diagram). Max takes no account of target instrument memory limitations.
Database Free Space
This is the percentage of the available memory left to store the Database.
Template Free Space
This is the percentage of the available memory left to store the templates used by the Database.
Database Name
This is the name by which this Database will be known across the LIN communications. It is also the name of the
header block. Use this name when cacheing function blocks from this Database into other instruments.
Header Type
This is the type of LIN instrument for which this Database has been configured. It is the name of the template used to
create the first function block - header block - in the Database.
Target
This is the name of the directory from which the templates used in this database were selected during configuration.
This indicates the target LIN instrument type and version for which the Database has been constructed.
HA263001U055
6 Tag Configuration
What is Tag Configuration?
Tag configuration is the facility to create and edit either up to an 8 or 16 character name, as configured in the Settings
dialog, to represent
any Common Tag, including
an individual data field or subfield, (Field Tag)
a generic I/O point, (I/O Tag)
a LIN Function block, (Block Tag)
or a LIN Control Module Tag, (Special Tag).
The configuration is achieved via the Tags sub-window.
Use the Tag table

Configure Tags - Overview
To configure the Tags, follow these stages.
Stages occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied, especially when you are editing existing Tags. TagNames
and Aliases can be added, modified, or deleted at any time using LINtools' comprehensive toolkit.
1 For a new Tag, open the Tag configuration tool to display the Tag table sub-window.
Alternatively, with the Content list tab in Tree view, press the + until the Tag sub-window is displayed.
Note
If editing an existing instrument some Tag table cells may already be complete. Individual Tags can be deleted using the Cut command, whereas all the
Tags can be deleted using the Clear ALL Entries command.
Tip!
Pressing the PCs <Ctrl>+<F6> keys cycles the currently open sub windows.
2 In the Tag table sub-window, configure the required Tags within the constraints configured in the Setting dialog.
i Enter a Tag Name in the first available cell in the TagName column. This is an assumed name for the item
selected in the Alias For column.
ii Select an Alias for the TagName. Double-click the corresponding Alias For cell and from the drop down list
select what the TagName is an alias for, i.e. which block, field or subfield it represents.
iii If required, enter relevant information in the corresponding Comments cell.
3 Finally, save the Tag configuration.
Tag configuration - example
HA263001U055
7 I/O Configuration
What is I/O Configuration?
I/O configuration is the facility to create and edit I/O block strategies running in Tactician instruments ONLY across the
ELIN, providing a versatile commissioning and strategy debugging toolkit.
In LINtools, an I/O configuration is an extension of the LIN Database and is configured graphically as an arrangement
of LIN function blocks interconnected by wires.
Note
As with a LIN Database, the I/O configuration can also be reconfigured online.
LINtools can automatically create I/O blocks using the Match Hardware command, achieved by communicating with I/O
system and creating the appropriate blocks in the instruments database. It determines the number of slots available
and then how many and what types of module are used. It will also determine the number of channel blocks needed for
each module.
It is also possible to manually create an I/O system, simply by creating a Header block the same number of MOD_UIO
blocks to the fitted hardware modules and configuring the appropriate Module Type.
Example
If the I/O Node (T2550) is using 3 Modules (AI2 in slot 1, AO4 in slot 2, and AI2 in slot 3), LINtools must have 1 Tactician Header block
and 3 MOD_UIO blocks (automatically configured with the type and the number of channel blocks required).
I/O Configuration - Overview

Note
The I/O Configurator is only available if the current file is part of a T2550 project, or a Tactician Header block is present. The I/O configuration will not
be displayed when in Monitor mode.
To configure the I/O, follow these stages.

Stages occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied, especially when editing an existing I/O instrument. Function
blocks (including I/O blocks), wiring, and parameter values can be added, modified, or deleted at any time using
LINtools' comprehensive toolkit.
Tip!
If the I/O Node already exists on the network this process can be avoided by using the Match Hardware command. This command
attaches to the target instrument automatically adding blocks that match the hardware fitted exactly.
1 For a new I/O configuration, open the I/O configurator in the Contents tab to display the I/O table sub-window.
Alternatively, with the Content tab in tree view, press the + until the I/O sub-window is displayed.
Note
If editing an existing I/O instrument the I/O table cells and Content list I/O slots may already be complete, but can be deleted using the appropriate
Delete command from the context-sensitive menu.
Tip!
Pressing the PCs <Ctrl-F6> keys cycles the open sub-windows.
2 In the I/O table sub-window, configure the I/O Node.

i Enter the I/O Node Name in the appropriate cell.
ii Double-click the I/O Node Type cell and select the required I/O Node Type from the drop-down list.
3 Then, specify each of the I/O modules required.
As each of the following steps is completed, Module icons appear in the Contents list. This indicates that an I/O Slot
compound containing a MOD_UIO block has been successfully created.
i Enter the Module Names in the appropriate slot cells.
ii Double-click the corresponding Type cell and select the required Module Type from the drop-down list.
If the I/O hardware is present on the network, use the Match Hardware command to automatically
complete the I/O table.
Tip!
Existing Module configurations can be moved or copied (using the Ctrl key) by d ragging and dropping a required Module in to a
different slot.
HA263001U055
4 Now, configure the required Module Channels.

Remember
I/O Channel blocks do not have to remain in the Compounds they were created in. Move the I/O Channel block to an appropriate
location in the database to simplify the wiring. The compounds are used to simplify the identification of the Modules when first
created.
As each of the following steps is completed, + icons appear in the Contents tab. This indicates that the specified
number of Channel blocks have been successfully created in the I/O Slot compound.
i Double-click a configured Module Slot number to reveal a list of available channels.
ii Enter the Channel Names in the appropriate channel cells.
Right click to display a context-sensitive menu and select Autocreate Channel blocks to create individual
Channel blocks or,
Right-click the Module Slot number to display a context-sensitive menu and select Autocreate Channel
blocks to create all Channel blocks.
Tip!
To move an existing I/O Channel to another location, change the MOD_UIO blocks SiteNo or Channel field as required.
5 Finally, save the I/O Configuration to disk.

I/O Function Block Diagram (FBD) - example
HA263001U055
8 LIN Sequences
What is a LIN Sequence?
A LIN Sequence is a program that runs in a instrument, in conjunction with a Database. More than one Sequence can
be running at once in the instrument.
A Sequence interacts with its associated Database by writing new values to specified Database fields, in response to
changes in the values of other specified Database fields.
Remember
In multi-tasking instruments, e.g. T2550 and T940(X), the SFC_CON block and any blocks interfacing this block must always operate on
User Task 4.
You employ a Sequence when the process being controlled by the Database can adopt several distinct states - e.g.
'Starting Up', 'Full Running', 'Shutting Down', etc.
The purpose of a Sequence is to determine:
The initial state(s) adopted by the process at start-up.
The conditions triggering state-changes (events).
The new state(s) adopted when changes are triggered.
The way the Database controls the process in each of the possible states.
Specific & Generic Sequences
You can create two types of LIN Sequence - Specific and Generic:
A Specific SFC is a 'working SFC, designed to run with a particular control Database. It contains Structured Text
statements and expressions that refer to particular points in the specified control Database.
A Generic SFC, however, is a 'template for a specific SFC. It does not refer to specifics, but instead contains
generic names that can be made to represent real Database function blocks or points. Creating a map file that
associates each generic name with a particular function block or point in a specified control Database does this.
Combining a map file with a Generic SFC creates a Specific SFC - i.e. an instance of the Generic template SFC:
Case A
By combining with different
maps, the same Generic SFC
can generate any number of
different (but identically
structured) Specific SFCs. A
new mapping can combine the
Generic SFC with a new
control Database (case B in
the figure), or with different
points in the same Database
(case C):
HA263001U055
Case B
You can also do the reverse - i.e. produce a Generic SFC from a Specific SFC. This is useful when you have a working
Specific SFC and want to generate a set of similar SFCs to run with related control Databases:
Case C
Note
An advantage with Generic SFCs is that generic names are up to 16 characters long and can be very descriptive compared to the often nondescript
specific block/field/bit Database names. E.g. the generic name 'WaterLevelLoFlag could map to the real point 'DG_CON88.W Field3.Bit9. This clarity is
especially useful during SFC development, or modification to run with other Databases.
Specificity of generic name mapping

Generic names can be mapped to database names in three ways, according to how specific the mapping is:
Block.field.subfield mapping - The generic name maps to a complete block.field.subfield LIN Database point, e.g.
PressureAlarm maps to PID_01.Alarms.HighAbs.
Block.field mapping - The generic name maps to a block and field only, leaving the subfield (if any) unspecified,
e.g. TempHiFlag maps to DGOUT_01.Out
The rest of the LIN Database point (i.e. the particular bit of the Out field) must be specified in the Generic Sequence
Action or Transition text, e.g. as TempHiFlag.Bit3.
Block mapping - The generic name maps to a block TagName only, leaving the field and subfield (if any)
unspecified, e.g. KilnController maps to TIC015
The rest of the LIN Database point is specified in the Generic Sequence, e.g. as KilnController.OP.
HA263001U055
Sequence Configuration
Sequence Editor - Overview
The links on this page take you to the instructions of how to use its features.

This Editor can be divided in to a number of separate panes.
Sequential Function Chart sub-window

Note
Each of the following panes can be individually manoeuvred in the application window, i.e. the Template Palette can be docked below the Contents
Pane.
Contents pane
Template Palette
Object Properties pane
Compile Results pane
Message bar
Note
Configure a LIN Sequence - Overview

Tip!
Try to ensure sufficient comments are made throughout the configuration of a LIN Sequence. The comments will enable a better
understanding of the configur ation, should problems arise at a later date.
To configure a Sequence (Specific or Generic), follow these stages.

Stages occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied, especially when you are editing an existing Sequence.
Remember
In multi-tasking instruments, e.g. T2550 and T940(X), the SFC_CON block (the interface between the Database and the Sequence) and
any blocks interfacing with a Sequence must always operate on User Task 4.
1 For a new LIN Sequence, first create a LIN Sequence file.

Remember
The Get me started wizard can assist with creating new LINtools files.
2 Open the LIN Sequence file in the LIN Sequence Editor window.
3 For a Generic Sequence, open a Map file and configure it as far as possible. Validate the map to enable the
generic name PickList accessed via Variable, which will be needed in steps 7 and 9.
Tip!
Pressing the computers <F9> key displays the Variable Picklist. A filtered Picklist may be expanded to show all available var iables by
pressing the <F8>.
4 Now, place Steps on the editor worksheet in the ROOT chart.

5 Then connect the Steps by wires and Transitions.
If you discover that the Steps are becoming to large for the default size worksheet, it can be increased by
converting to a large worksheet.
6 Configure each Step with a Step name and initial state. Add Comment Tab Text to the Step, if required.
7 Next, create Structured Text, Sequential Function Chart, and Ladder Diagram Actions (as required) that will run in
the Steps.
8 Then associate the appropriate Actions with each Step in the LIN Sequence, via Action Qualifiers.
9 For each Transition, write a Transition expression. Add Comment Tab Text to the Transition, if required.
10 If required, add textual comments to the ROOT Chart, as required.
11 After adding textual comments access any Chart Actions and configure them as for the ROOT chart.
12 Then compile the LIN Sequence to check the validity of your Sequence Actions and Transitions. Correct all errors.
13 Finally save the Sequence to disk.
HA263001U055
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) - example
Monitor a Sequence - Overview

The Sequence Action monitor window
You can display locally a Sequence running in a remote instrument as a dynamically active Sequential Function Chart
(SFC), in the Sequence Action Monitor window. After accessing the Sequence Action Monitor window, you can use
this display to monitor and control the remote Sequence.
Specifically, from the Sequence Action Monitor window you can:
See the currently-active Step(s) highlighted
Hold Steps in their active state
Force Transitions to act as if TRUE or FALSE
Reset, Stop, Hold, and Run the remote Sequence
Find and inspect Actions, associations, and Steps
Find and inspect any block or field in the associated LIN Database
Monitor a selection of the associated Database fields in a Watch window
Monitor a Ladder Diagram Sequence Action
Monitor a Ladder Diagram Transition
Monitor a LIN Action

You can also very easily access the LIN Monitor Database from the Sequence monitor.
HA263001U055
What you need to Monitor a Sequence

To monitor a remote LIN Sequence, you must have:
A Monitor Database loaded locally in the computer. The Monitor Database must include as a minimum the correctly
named SFC_CON block(s) corresponding to the one(s) in the remote LIN Database associated with the LIN Sequence
you want to monitor. If a LIN Monitor Database has not already been created, it can be created automatically from a
regular LIN Database.
Note
For monitoring to be possible, the remote LIN Database associated with the LIN Sequence must have an SFC_CON block present and linked to the
appropriate SFC_DISP block.
Local copies of the LIN Sequence and graphics files (.sdb and .sgx)), to be able to monitor the corresponding remote
Sequence.
Note
Although it is advisable to have exact copies of these files in the computer, this is not a strict requirement. The copies must have as a minimum all
Steps and Transitions correctly named and wired, but apart from this you can leave the Steps and Transitions in the pre-configured state, i.e. without
associated Actions or Transition expressions. In this case, however, you won't see anything when you inspect the Steps and Transitions on the
Monitor Sequence screen, but you will be able to monitor and control the activity of the remote Sequence in every other respect.
Want to look up a particular LIN function block?

Sequence Action Monitor - Overview
The Sequence Action Monitor window is where you monitor and control a Sequence (and its associated Database).
The links below tell you how to use its features.
Note
You cannot edit the Actions in the Sequence Monitor window,but you can easily access the associated Database Monitor.
Use the Contents tab

This Monitor window can be divided in to a number of separate panes.
Sequential Function Chart sub-window

Note
Each of the following panes can be individually manoeuvered in the application window, i.e. the Template Palette can be docked below the Contents
Pane.
Contents pane
Message bar
Note
HA263001U055
Sequence file properties

Sequence Properties dialog
This read-only page summarises the resources used by the current LIN Sequence.
To access it, in the windows File menu, select File Properties, and click the Sequence tab.
Resources
Resources are the Steps, Transitions, Actions, Associations, and SFCs, that are used by the Sequence.
Used
This is the quantity of the resource that is being used by the LIN Sequence.
the Steps - Instruments have a limit of either 150 or 390 total steps loaded.
the Transitions - Instruments have a limit of either 225 or 578 total Transitions loaded.
the Actions - Instruments have a limit of either 300 or 780 total Actions loaded.
the Associations - Instruments have a limit of either 600 or 1560 total associations loaded.
the SFCs - Instruments have a limit of either 50 or 130 total SFCs loaded, including the root SFC.
Sequence Free Space
This is the percentage of the available memory left to store the Sequence.
Structured Text Free Space
This is the percentage of the available memory left to store the Structured Text used by the Sequence.
Program Name
This is the name of the LIN Sequence program - which is the short name of the file containing the selected Sequence.
Database Properties dialog
HA263001U055
9 LIN Actions
What is a LIN Action?
Two types of LIN Action exist:
A Text action, i.e. a set of instructions written in Structured Text (ST), or
A Ladder Diagram action, with graphical rungs, contacts, coils, and variables, etc.
Both types specify direct operations on the LIN Database of the running Strategy.
You create LIN Actions in the LIN Action Editor.
LIN actions created in the action editor work in a similar way to the Actions created in Sequence Editor, but there are
important differences.
Differences between LIN Actions and Sequence Actions:
LIN Actions are controlled - via Action Qualifiers - and activated directly by certain 'Action-type' function blocks in
the LIN Database. They are not associated with Sequence Steps, are not accessible from the Sequence Editor,
and indeed play no part in Sequences at all.
LIN Actions can operate only on the fields provided within one of these action-type function blocks, whereas a
Sequence Action can operate on any fields in the entire LIN Database.
LIN Actions are stored in their own special user-named 'Action files' that must be downloaded to the target
instrument with the other strategy database files. Sequence actions, however, are stored along with the Sequence
Database itself and so do not need to be individually downloaded.
Note
The Action Editor yields files that are independent of any particular LIN Database (.dbf). The text and ladder actions can be run with any suitable
Database.
Action Configuration
Action Editor - Overview
The Action Editor is where you create and edit LIN Action files.
The links on this page take you to the instruction of how to use its features.

This Editor can be divided in to a number of separate panes.
Note
A new Ladder Action can be created, but the Chart Action is not supported in this Editor.
Text Action sub-window

Note
Each of the following panes can be individually manoeuvred in the application window, i.e. the Template Palette can be docked below the Contents
Pane.
Contents pane
Template palette
Message bar
Note
HA263001U055
Action names
Action names can have up to eight characters, including only a-z, A-Z, 0-9, _. Action names must not start with a
numeral.
Action types
There are three types of Action that can be associated with a Sequence Step:
Chart action - This action is itself a LIN Sequence, represented as a Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
Text action - This action consists purely of Structured Text statements.
Ladder Diagram action - This action is represented pictorially as a Ladder Diagram, with rungs, contacts, coils,
and variables, etc.
Note
LIN Actions are unconnected with LIN Sequences. Only Structured Text and Ladder Diagram types can be created for LIN Actions.
Action-type function blocks

An Action-type LIN function block, running in a Database, can be associated with a LIN Action via an action qualifier.
This allows Sequence-like Actions to operate on the Database, independently of any LIN Sequence. In this type of
function block, an input triggers the operation of the LIN Action.
Action-type blocks include the ACTION and DIGACT function blocks.

Configure a LIN Action - Overview
You create and edit LIN Actions in the Action Editor.
To create a new LIN Action:
1 Open a blank LINtools file, and create a new Action File type configuration.
Open the Editor window

The Action Editor opens, displaying a default Contents pane, blank window, and a Function Block Template
Palette.
Alternatively, you can create a new Action files within the Project environment:
Creating a new Actions file

2 The default Action window is for configuring an Action to be run by the ACTION function block. To create an action
for any other action-type block, double-click the required function block in the function block template palette to
show a Make Action (block type) dialog.
3 Type in a name for the new Action and select the Action type required - LIN Actions can be either text or ladder
diagram types. Hit OK. A new empty Action window opens up, showing the target block type in brackets in the
title bar - e.g. action1 (DIGACT).
4 Type the Structured Text (ST) for a text Action into its Action window, or build up a Ladder Diagram from the
available elements.
Editing Structured Text.
Editing a Ladder Diagram.

5 Compile the Action at any time to check its validity.
Compiling Actions.
6 If required, repeat steps 3 to 6 to create more Actions in the Action window.
7 When finished, save the Action(s) in the Editor.
Save a LIN Action

Note
All the LIN Actions in the current configuration are saved immediately to the same file.
HA263001U055
10 Ladder Diagrams
What is a Ladder Diagram?
A Ladder Diagram is a type of Action represented graphically by a column of rungs - see example. Rungs are
equivalent to program statements, with icons along them representing digital or analog fields, constants, and logical or
arithmetic functions.
Each rung has only one output or objective - at its right-hand end - which is either a coil (digital field), variable
(analogue field), or a jump to another labelled rung.
A single rung that evaluates TRUE or FALSE can also act as a Sequence Transition.
Rungs can include any number of input elements and use any complexity of wired or explicit functions to perform the
rung operation - subject only to screen space limitations
The rungs are normally executed in order from top to bottom down the ladder, but jumps can alter this.
In a ladder diagram, a closed switch or coil equates to the TRUE (logical 1) state and an open one equates to the
FALSE (logical 0) state of the associated field.
Configuring a Ladder Diagram

Ladder Diagram elements
You click on these tools to insert elements along the rungs of your Ladder Diagram.
Editing a Ladder Diagram

Coil
There are four types of coil:
The Normally-Open coil outputs FALSE to its associated field if the rung evaluates FALSE, and outputs TRUE
otherwise.
The Normally-Closed coil outputs TRUE to its associated field if the rung evaluates FALSE, and outputs FALSE
otherwise.
The Reset coil outputs FALSE to its associated field if the rung evaluates TRUE, and does nothing otherwise.
The Set coil outputs TRUE to its associated field if the rung evaluates TRUE, and does nothing otherwise.
Contact
There are two types of contact:
The Normally-Open contact evaluates FALSE if the associated field is FALSE, and evaluates TRUE otherwise.
The Normally-Closed contact evaluates TRUE if the associated field is FALSE, and evaluates FALSE otherwise.
HA263001U055
Jump
A jump causes the execution of the ladder to continue at the labelled rung specified by the jump. Jumps can be only
forwards.
Ladder Diagram - example
Rung 1 - example
Rung 1 performs the following operation:

If digital 1a is TRUE, then digital 1b is set to TRUE,
otherwise, digital 1b is set to FALSE.
Using a circuit model, if switch 1a is closed - by digital 1a being
TRUE - then coil 1b is powered up and closes, i.e. becomes
TRUE. With switch 1a open (digital 1a FALSE), coil 1b adopts its
unpowered normally-open state (= FALSE).
Rung 2 - example

If digital 2a is TRUE, AND digital 2b is FALSE, then digital 2c is
set to FALSE,
otherwise, digital 2c is set to TRUE.
Using a circuit model, if switch 2a is closed - by digital 2a being
TRUE - and switch 2b is left closed - by digital 2b being FALSE -
then coil 2c is powered up and opens, i.e. becomes FALSE.
Otherwise, coil 2c is unpowered and adopts its normally closed
(= TRUE) state.
This arrangement is an example of a wired AND. Rung 3 shows an alternative approach.
Rung 3 - example
Rung 3 performs the following
operation:
If digital 3a is TRUE, AND digital 3b is
FALSE, then digital 3c is set to TRUE,
otherwise, digital 3c is unchanged.
A set coil latches closed (TRUE) when
powered up, and does not reset (to
FALSE) when power is removed.
This arrangement uses an explicit AND function. Rung 2 shows an alternative approach.
HA263001U055
Rung 4 - example

If digital 4a is TRUE, OR digital 4b is FALSE, then digital 4c is reset to FALSE,
otherwise, digital 4c is unchanged.
A reset coil latches open (FALSE) when powered up, and does not set (to TRUE) when power is removed.
This arrangement is an example of a wired OR. Rung 5 shows an alternative approach.
Rung 5 - example

If digital 5a is TRUE, OR digital 5b is FALSE, then execution jumps to _End (i.e. after Rung 7), otherwise, execution
continues normally at Rung 6.
This arrangement uses an explicit OR function. Rung 4 shows an alternative approach.
Rung 6 - example

If input 6a is TRUE, the field A0 is updated with the value 10; input 6a is FALSE; the field A0 is not changed.
This arrangement can also be written in Structured Text, as an If-statement;
If 6a Then
A0:=10;
End_If;
HA263001U055
Rung 7 - example

Analog variable 7a is written to analog variable 7b.
Rung 8 - example

The maximum of analog variable 8a and constant 8b is written to analog variable 8c.
Ladder Diagram default colours - example
This is an example showing the default colours used in Ladder Diagrams.
HA263001U055
11 Structured Text
What is Structured Text?
Structured Text (ST) is the language used to write the statements and expressions that specify text Actions and
Transitions in the Sequence Editor or 'non-sequence' LIN Actions that can be created in the Action Editor.
ST is composed of written statements separated by semicolons. The statements use predefined syntax configuration
and program subroutines to change variables. The variables can be explicitly defined values, internally stored variables,
or inputs and outputs. Spaces can be used to separate statements and variables, although they are not necessary.
Tip!
Structured Text is not case sensitive, but it can be useful to make variables lower case, and make statements upper case. Indenting
and Comments should also be used to clarify each Statement in the program.
Example
(*ADJUST TEMP SETPOINT*) TIC_100.SL:= REC1.A4;(*A statement*)
Dig_A.Out AND 64 (*An expression*)
Notation Formats
Structured Text example
This is an example of Structured Text used for configuring an action in a LIN Sequence.
Structured Text reference
Spaces in ST
Mandatory spaces
Space characters must
separate logical operators
from their operands.
LEV.OP>15 AND
TEMP.OP<55.5 is correct.
Illegal spaces
Spaces must not be left
anywhere inside operators,
database names,
identifiers, or constants.
HEAT_PID.
SL:=REC1. A3; is
incorrect.
Optional spaces
Spaces other than
mandatory or illegal spaces
may be inserted at will to
improve the clarity of the
expression or statement.
TIC_100.PV := 45.5; needs no spaces but may be clearer with the two shown.
Note
Space characters occupy the same amount of memory as other characters.
HA263001U055
Comments in ST
(*character string*)
Non-executing character strings can be added as 'comments' in the Structured Text of an Action or Transition, e.g. to
clarify its purpose. Comments can occupy separate lines, or precede or follow a statement/expression on the same line,
or be inserted anywhere that an optional space can go.
(*ADJUST TEMP SETPOINT*) TIC_100.SL:= REC1.A4;(*RECIPE #5*)
Notation Formats
Statements in ST
A statement can be an Assignment, an IF-statement, a FOR-statement, a WHILE-statement, or a REPEAT-
statement.
Note
Statements must be terminated by a semicolon.
Assignment
variable := expression;
Various types of assignment are possible, including the following examples:
Assign a constant to a real variable.
PIC_004.PV:=35.5;
Assign a calculation to a real variable.
ANOP_3.PV:=Const.A6 + (Block_5.PV+3.5) / Const.A7;

Assign a constant to a digital variable.
Dig_B.Out.Bit0:=1;
Assign a calculation to a digital variable.
SEQ4.Hold:=(PIC_005.PV > 30) AND Dig_B.Out.Bit5;

Assign a string to a mode.
PIC_004.Mode:="CASCADE";
Assign an integer to a bitfield.
Dig_A.Out:=96;
Assign a bitwise calculation to a bitfield.
Dig_A.Out:=Dig_B.Out XOR 96;
Notation Formats
HA263001U055
IF Statement
If Statements are entered as part of a Statement.
It includes the;
IF expression THEN statement-list
{ELSIF expression THEN statement-list}
{ELSE statement-list}
END_IF;
Note
The IF-statement allows zero or more ELSIF clauses, and zero or one ELSE clause. IF-statements can be nested, but MUST be closed using END_IF;.
IF PIC_004.PV < 10 THEN

Dig_B.Out.Bit0 := 1;
RECORD.A4 := ANIN_004.HR;
ELSE
END_IF;
FOR Statement
Each FOR Statement can be used to perform a calculation on an array of values read from a defined variable.
FOR Statements are entered as part of a Statement.
It includes the;
FOR variable:=expression TO expression [BY literal] DO
statement
END_FOR;
Note
The FOR-statement MUST be closed using END_FOR;.
The following example shows the FOR-Statement used to calculate the average of values read from an array of values.
It will loop five times adding the array of values, dividing the sum to get the average.
avg:=0;
FOR PIC_004.PV := 0 TO 10 BY 2 DO
avg := avg+f[PIC_004.PV]; (* offset value *)
END_FOR;
avg:=avg/5; (* Sum divided to calculate the average *)
HA263001U055
REPEAT Statement
Each REPEAT Statement can be used to continually repeat a configured operation until a defined value is obtained.
REPEAT Statements are entered as part of a Statement.
It includes the;
REPEAT
statement-list
UNTIL expression;
END_REPEAT;
Note
The REPEAT-statement MUST be closed using END_REPEAT;.
The following example shows the REPEAT-Statement used to increase the variable value until it reaches 10 or more,
defined by the UNTIL statement.
REPEAT
PIC_004.PV:= PIC_004.PV+1; (*array value *)
UNTIL PIC_004.PV >= 10; (* repeat until variable reaches 10 or more *)
END_REPEAT;
WHILE Statement
Each WHILE Statement can be used to perform a calculation on an array of manually assigned values read from a
defined variable.
WHILE Statements are entered as part of a Statement.
It includes the;
WHILE expression DO
statement
END_WHILE;
Note
The WHILE-statement MUST be closed using END_WHILE;.
The following example shows the WHILE-Statement used to calculate the average of five values in a real array. It will
loop five times adding the array values, dividing the sum to get the average.
avg:=0;
PIC_004.PV := 0;
WHILE PIC_004.PV<5 DO
avg := avg+f[PIC_004.PV]; (* array/offset value *)
PIC_004.PV := PIC_004.PV+1;
END_WHILE;
avg:=avg/5; (* Sum divided to calculate the average *)
HA263001U055
Expressions in ST
Expressions can contain operators, functions, variables, and constants. Brackets are allowed and can be nested to any
level.
The evaluation order of an expression is shown in the Operators & Functions table.
Arithmetical
(Block_5.PV + 3.5) / Const.A7 + Const.A6
COS(Block_6.PV)**1.5
Dig_A.Out AND 64
Logical
Recipe.A0 < 4
Dig_B.Out.Bit5 = Dig_A.Out.Bit3
STEP3.T >= T#4m
A0{7}
Note
A0{7} shows an example of an offset expression. This offsets a value in the defined field by the number specified in {}, e.g. A0{7} refers to A7, and if
N is 6, [Word 3.Bit4]{N} refers to [Word 3.Bit10] and [Word 1]{N/2}.Bit4{N} refers to [Word 4.Bit10].
Notation Formats
HA263001U055
Operators and functions in ST

In the table below, A, B, C, etc., are appropriate operands or arguments. Use the correct number format in Structured
Text (ST) expressions, and the correct units in trigonometric functions.
The Table below lists the Operators and also refers to a separate Function Table shown after the 'NOT' Operator. This
is for purpose of clarity to distinguish between Operators and Functions and also to conform to the statement in the
following Note.
Note
In an expression, the evaluation order of operators and functions follows the table, with the earliest-evaluated operators at the top.
Operator Purpose Format

() Brackets (alter precedence) (A+B)*(C+D)
- (negate) Negate -A
NOT Logical NOT (invert of boolean expression) NOT(A)
FUNCTION See Function Table Below See Function Table Below

** Exponentiate (Power AB) A**B[1]
* Multiply () A*B
/ Divide () A/B
MOD Modulo (remainder of A/B) (A)MOD(B)[2]
+ Add A+B
- Subtract A-B
= Equals A=B
< Less Than A<B
> Greater Than A>B
<= Less Than Or Equal To A<=B
>= Greater Than Or Equal To A>=B
<> Not Equals A<>B
AND AND A AND B [3]
XOR XOR (exclusive OR) A XOR B [3]
OR OR A OR B [3]
{offset} Logical offset A{B}
[1] A must exceed zero. [2] A and B must be integers. [3] 16 bit operation
Note
Some operators are effective only with the appropriate operand types, e.g. the power operator (**) requires A to be positive; the MOD operator must
have positive integer operands, etc.
If any STRING is assigned to a Block.Field of either a ByteSeq(BSEQ) or WideString(WSTR) then a $-Conversion will
always occur as defined in the rules for Constants in ST.
HA263001U055
The Function Table below lists the Sub Categories and Functions in the order listed in the appropriate LINtools ST
editor
Function Purpose Format
Sub Category:
Convert
Absolute ABS(A)
ABS
FLOAT Convert to Floating Point

FLOAT(A)
ROUND Round (up or down)

ROUND(A)
TRUNC Truncate (to an integer) TRUNC(A)
FORMAT Formats a value and returns the corresponding ByteSeq FORMAT(ByteSeq, Var Value)
byte sequence using the format string to define
the conversion required. A null is returned (zero Value - The value to be converted
length) if it is not possible to convert the value
See below for Conversion Formats and examples
using the specified format.
E.g. Tx_Value = FORMAT(04X,

Raw1.I2)converts the integer value in the Raw
Comms block register Raw1.I2 to a 4 digit
hexadecimal string and writes it to the Tx_Value
buffer
SCAN Scans a byte sequence and returns a value VAR SCAN(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2)
using ByteSeq1 to define the conversion
required. Leading spaces are ignored (except for ByteSeq1 - A string specifying the conversion format
the C format) but invalid characters at the start
ByteSeq2 - The byte sequence to be converted.
of the byte sequence will cause a zero value to
be returned. Invalid characters occurring later in See below for Conversion Formats and examples
the sequence will cause the conversion to
terminate
E.g. Setpoint := SCAN(X,

MID(Raw1.Rx_Value, 4, 10) would extract the
value 453 from the 4 character HEX ASCII value
in the byte sequence [M01G0DI*01C5E5$R
held in the Rx_Value buffer in block Raw1.
IS_VALID Operates in the same way as SCAN but instead BOOL IS_VALID(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2)
of returning a value, returns TRUE if the scanned
sequence can be interpreted as a valid number, ByteSeq1 - A string specifying the conversion format
otherwise FALSE.
ByteSeq2 - The byte sequence to be converted.
E.g. IS_VALID(U, -4789) would return FALSE
See below for Conversion Formats and examples
since -4789 cannot be interpreted as an
unsigned number.
Sub Category:
Numeric
ACOS Arc Cosine (Radians) ACOS(A)
ASIN Arc Sine (Radians)

ASIN(A)
ATAN2 Arc Tangent (Radians) ATAN2(A,B) [Tangent=A/B]
COS(A)
COS Cosine (Radians)
Degrees (from Radians) DEG(A)

DEG
EXP(A)
EXP Exponentiation (eA)
Natural Logarithm (base e) LN(A)

LN
Logarithm (base 10) LOG(A)
LOG
Radians (from degrees) RAD(A)
RAD
HA263001U055
Sub Category:
Numeric
Sine (Radians) SIN(A)
SIN
Square Root
SQRT SQRT(A)
Tangent (Radians) TAN(A)

TAN
Sub Category:
Random
RANDOM Random value

RANDOM(A) [A=max modulus]
Sub Category:
Selector
Average (arithmetic mean)
AVG AVG(A,B,C,...)
MAX Maximum value MAX(A,B,C,...)
MIN Minimum value MIN(A,B,C,...)
SWITCH Selects A (integer C=0) else B SWITCH(A,B,C)
Sub Category: Move
MOVE (Structured Assignment :=

Text(ST))
MOVE (Ladder Conditional Assignment Takes one Boolean and one number, and outputs the
Diagram) number to a specific Variable if the first input (Boolean) is
True. If Boolean is False; the number is not moved.
Sub Category:
String Basics
EQUAL TRUE if the two arguments are identical BOOL EQUAL(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2)
EQUAL functionality is also available using the OR

= operator as above. When = is applied to
'STRING' items only, a case-insensitive BOOL EQUAL(WideStr1, WideStr2)
comparison is applied. The EQUAL function
determines strict equality.
LEN Returns the length in bytes of the byte sequence. Int LEN(ByteSeq)
If ByteSeq is a null sequence (zero length), a
value of 0 is returned.
LEFT Returns L bytes starting from the left end (i.e. ByteSeq LEFT(ByteSeq, int L)
from the beginning of the byte sequence). If
ByteSeq contains less than L bytes, a null L - The number of bytes to return.
sequence (zero length) is returned.
RIGHT Returns L bytes from the right end (i.e. up to the ByteSeq RIGHT(ByteSeq, Int L)
end of the byte sequence). If ByteSeq contains
less than L bytes, a null sequence (zero length) L - The number of bytes to return.
is returned.
MID Returns L bytes starting from position P. If ByteSeq MID(ByteSeq, int L, int P)
ByteSeq contains less than L+P-1 bytes, or if P
is 0 or negative or greater than the length of L - The number of bytes to return.
ByteSeq, a null sequence (zero length) is
P - The start position from which the bytes to be taken
returned.
begins.
HA263001U055
Sub Category:
String Basics
CONCAT Returns the concatenation of the two arguments ByteSeq CONCAT(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2)
If either argument is of type WSTR then the other
is converted to WSTR. OR
WSTR CONCAT(WSTR1, WSTR2)
INSERT Returns a sequence of bytes consisting of ByteSeq INSERT(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2, int P)

ByteSeq1 with ByteSeq2 inserted starting at
position P. If P is zero, negative, or greater than P The position from which to start inserting bytes.
the length of ByteSeq1+1, a null sequence (zero
length) is returned.
DELETE Returns a sequence consisting of ByteSeq with ByteSeq DELETE(ByteSeq, int L, int P)
L bytes removed starting at position P. If
ByteSeq contains less than L+P-1 bytes or P is L The number of bytes to delete
zero or negative, a null sequence (zero length) is
P The start position from which the bytes to be deleted
returned.
begins
REPLACE Returns a sequence of bytes consisting of ByteSeq REPLACE(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2, int L, int P)
ByteSeq1 with L bytes replaced by ByteSeq2
starting at position P. If ByteSeq1 contains less L The number of bytes to replace
than L+P-1 bytes or P is zero or negative, a null
P The position from which to start replacing bytes
sequence (zero length) is returned.
FIND Returns the position of the beginning of the Nth Int FIND(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2, int N)
occurrence of ByteSeq2 inside ByteSeq1. It is
permitted to omit N, in which case it defaults to 1. N The occurrence to find (defaults to 1 if omitted)
The search is started from the beginning of
ByteSeq1 if N is positive, or from the end if N is
negative. If N is zero or ByteSeq1 is null or no
occurrence is found, 0 is returned. If ByteSeq2 is
null, the function returns 1 if N is positive, or the
length plus 1 if N is negative.
See below for FIND Examples:
DELIMIT Returns the Nth substring of ByteSeq1 delimited ByteSeq DELIMIT(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2, int N)
by ByteSeq2. (The start and end of ByteSeq1
also count as delimiters.) N may be negative, in N The occurrence to find
which case it is counted from the right. If
ByteSeq1 is null or ByteSeq2 is null or N is 0, or
there are less than ABS(N)-1 delimiters in
ByteSeq1, a null byte sequence is returned.
See below for DELIMIT Examples:
JUSTIFY_LEFT Justifies a byte sequence within a specified field ByteSeq JUSTIFY_LEFT(ByteSeq, int FieldWidth)
at the left most position. The return value is
padded with spaces on the right to fill the field
width. If the length of the argument is greater
than FieldWidth, a null sequence (zero length) is
returned.
JUSTIFY_RIGHT Justifies a byte sequence within a specified field ByteSeq JUSTIFY_RIGHT(ByteSeq, int FieldWidth)
at the right most position. The return value is
padded with spaces on the left to fill the field
width. If the length of the argument is greater
than FieldWidth, a null sequence (zero length) is
returned.
JUSTIFY_CENTRE Centrally justifies a byte sequence within a ByteSeq JUSTIFY_CENTRE(ByteSeq, int FieldWidth)
specified field. The returned value is padded with
equal numbers of spaces on the left and right to
fill the field width. If the length of the argument is
greater than FieldWidth, a null sequence (zero
length) is returned. If the byte sequence cannot
be centred exactly it will be biased to the left.
LTRIM Returns a copy of ByteSeq with any leading ByteSeq LTRIM(ByteSeq)

spaces removed.
RTRIM Returns a copy of ByteSeq with any trailing ByteSeq RTRIM(ByteSeq)

spaces removed.
TRIM Returns a copy of ByteSeq with any leading or ByteSeq TRIM(ByteSeq)

trailing spaces removed.
HA263001U055
Sub Category:
String Basics
UCASE Returns a copy of ByteSeq with any lower case ByteSeq UCASE(ByteSeq)
ASCII letters converted to upper case.
LCASE Returns a copy of ByteSeq with any upper case ByteSeq LCASE(ByteSeq)
ASCII letters converted to lower case.
STRING Returns a byte sequence consisting of the first ByteSeq STRING(int L, ByteSeq)
character of ByteSeq repeated L times. If L is
greater than 1020 it is clipped to 1020. L The length of the returned sequence
SPACE Returns a byte sequence consisting of L spaces. ByteSeq SPACE(int L)

If L is greater than 1020 it will be clipped to 1020.
L The length of the returned sequence
STRCOMP Performs a binary comparison on the two Int STRCOMP(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2)

arguments and returns -1 if ByteSeq1 is smaller
than ByteSeq2, 0 if they are equal and 1 if
ByteSeq1 is greater than ByteSeq2.
For example, aa < ab and aa < aaa
Note: the STRCOMP functionality is also

available using the existing <, =, >, etc.
operators.
PURGE Returns ByteSeq1 with any bytes that appear in ByteSeq PURGE(ByteSeq1, ByteSeq2)
ByteSeq2 removed.
Example: PURGE(abcdabcde, bd) returns

acace
DATEANDTIMENOW Returns an ASCII byte-sequence giving the ByteSeq DATEANDTIMENOW(int mode)

current date and time in the form dd/mm/yyyy
hh:mm:ss (i.e. 19 characters). Other functions mode0 = Local Time
could then be used to change this to other
mode1 = System Time
formats; for example mm/dd/yy could be
obtained as follows:
Buffer1 := DATEANDTIMENOW( );
Buffer1 := CONCAT(CONCAT(MID(Buffer1,3,4),
LEFT(Buffer1,3)), MID(Buffer1,2,9);
Sub Category: Note: If an attempt is made to EXTRACT an element

Extract which is beyond the end of the byte sequence in a buffer,
a value of zero is returned.
EXTRACT_BOOL Extracts a boolean value from a ByteSeq. The BOOL EXTRACT_BOOL(ByteSeq, Int P, Int B)
value returned is the boolean value. Eight
Booleans are stored in each byte. P The byte location to read from
B The bit position within the byte (0-7)
EXTRACT_INT8 Extracts a signed 8 bit integer value located in a Int EXTRACT_INT8(ByteSeq, Int P)
ByteSeq. The value returned is the integer value.
Each 8 bit integer is stored in 1 byte. P The byte location to start from
EXTRACT_UINT8 Extracts an unsigned 8 bit integer value located Int EXTRACT_UINT8(ByteSeq, Int P)
in a ByteSeq. The value returned is the integer
value. Each 8 bit integer is stored in 1 byte. P The byte location to start from
EXTRACT_INT16 Extracts a signed 16 bit integer value located in a Int EXTRACT_INT16(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Order)
ByteSeq. The value returned is the 16 bit integer.
Each 16 bit integer is stored in 2 bytes. P The byte location to start from
See below for Order Parameter Byte order option
EXTRACT_UINT16 Extracts an unsigned 16 bit integer value located Int EXTRACT_UINT16(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Order)
in a ByteSeq. The value returned is a 32-bit
integer containing the 16-bit unsigned value P The byte location to start from
(Note: ST evaluation in LIN does not have a 16-
bit unsigned type). Each 16 bit integer is stored
in 2 bytes of the buffer
HA263001U055
Sub Category: Note: If an attempt is made to EXTRACT an element

Extract which is beyond the end of the byte sequence in a buffer,
a value of zero is returned.
EXTRACT_INT32 Extracts a signed 32 bit integer value located in a Int EXTRACT_INT32(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Order)
ByteSeq. The value returned is the 32 bit integer.
Each 32 bit integer is stored in 4 bytes. (Note that P The byte location to start from
in practice this can also be used with 32-bit
unsigned values.)
EXTRACT_REAL Extracts a 32 bit real value located in a ByteSeq. Real EXTRACT_REAL(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Order)
The value returned is the 32 bit real. Each 32 bit
real is stored in 4 bytes. P - The byte location to start from
See below for Order Parameter - Byte order option
Sub Category: Note: REPLACE cannot be used to initialise a character

Replace buffer. If an attempt is made to write an element which is
beyond the end of the byte sequence in the buffer, a null
sequence will be returned.
REPLACE_BOOL Replaces a boolean value located in a character ByteSeq REPLACE_BOOL(ByteSeq, Int P, Int B, BOOL
buffer. The value returned is the byte sequence Value)
containing the replaced value. Eight Booleans are
stored in each byte. P - The byte location to write to
B - The bit position within the byte
Value - Boolean value to write
REPLACE_INT8 Replaces a signed 8 bit integer value located in a ByteSeq REPLACE_INT8(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Value)
character buffer. The value returned is the byte
sequence containing the replaced value. Each 8 P - The byte location to start from
bit integer is stored in 1 byte.
Value - Integer value to write
REPLACE_UINT8 Replaces an unsigned 8 bit integer value located ByteSeq REPLACE_UINT8(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Value)
in a character buffer. The value returned is the
byte sequence containing the replaced value. P - The byte location to start from
Each 8 bit integer is stored in 1 byte. (Note that in
practice this is identical to REPLACE_INT8.)
REPLACE_INT16 Replaces a signed 16 bit integer value located in ByteSeq REPLACE_INT16(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Value, Int
a character buffer. The value returned is the byte Order)
sequence containing the replaced value. Each 16
bit integer is stored in 2 bytes. P - The byte location to start from
REPLACE_UINT16 Replaces an unsigned 16 bit integer value located ByteSeq REPLACE_UINT16(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Value, Int
in a character buffer. The value returned is the Order)
byte sequence containing the replaced value.
Each 16 bit integer is stored in 2 bytes. (Note that P - The byte location to start from
in practice this is identical to REPLACE_INT16.)
REPLACE_INT32 Replaces a signed 32 bit integer value located in ByteSeq REPLACE_INT32(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Value, Int
a character buffer. The value returned is the byte Order)
sequence containing the replaced value. Each 32
bit integer is stored in 4 bytes. (Note that in P - The byte location to start from
practice this can also be used with 32-bit
unsigned values.)
REPLACE_REAL Replaces a 32 bit real value located in a character ByteSeq REPLACE_REAL(ByteSeq, Int P, Int Value, Int
buffer. The value returned is the byte sequence Order)
containing the replaced value. Each 32 bit real is
stored in 4 bytes. P - The byte location to start from
HA263001U055
Sub Category: Bit
BIT_INVERT Returns a 32-bit integer value which is the ones Int BIT_INVERT(Int)
complement of Int. (This will effectively be 16-bit if
subsequently used in a 16-bit context.)
SHL8 Returns the integer value (0-255) Int left shifted Int SHL8(Int, Int N)
by N bits, zero filled on the right.
Int - 8 bit integer value
N - The number of bit positions to shift
SHL16 Returns the integer value (0-65535) Int left shifted Int SHL16(Int, Int N)
by N bits, zero filled on the right.
SHL32 Returns the integer value (-2,147,483,648 to Int SHL32(Int, Int N)

2,147,483,647) Int left shifted by N bits, zero filled
on the right. Int - 32 bit integer value
SHR8 Returns the integer value (0-255) Int right shifted Int SHR8(Int, Int N)
by N bits, zero filled on the left.
SHR16 Returns the integer value (0-65535) Int right Int SHR16(Int, Int N)
shifted by N bits, zero filled on the left.
SHR32 Returns the integer value (-2,147,483,648 to Int SHR32(Int, Int N)

2,147,483,647) Int right shifted by N bits, zero
filled on the left. Int - 32 bit integer value
ROL8 Returns the integer value (0-255) Int left rotated Int ROL8(Int, Int N)
by N bits.
N - The number of bit positions to rotate
ROL16 Returns the integer value (0-65535) Int left rotated Int ROL16(Int, Int N)
by N bits.
ROL32 Returns the integer value (-2,147,483,648 to Int ROL32(Int, Int N)

2,147,483,647) Int left rotated by N bits.
ROR8 Returns the integer value (0-255) Int right rotated Int ROR8(Int, Int N)
by N bits.
ROR16 Returns the integer value (0-65535) Int right Int ROR16(Int, Int N)
rotated by N bits.
ROR32 Returns the integer value (-2,147,483,648 to Int ROR32(Int, Int N)

2,147,483,647) Int right rotated by N bits.
HA263001U055
Sub Category:
Checksum
BCC Mode=0 - Returns a checksum byte which is Int BCC(ByteSeq, Int Mode, Int Seed)
either the exclusive OR of all bytes in the
sequence. Mode - Mode (XOR, Sum or Untruncated Sum)
Mode=1 - The 8 LS bits of the sum of all bytes in Seed - Initial seed value
the sequence.
Mode=2 - The sum, not truncated to 8 bits.

Note: An initial 8-bit seed value can be specified if
required if not required it should be set to 0.
CRC Returns a 2 byte CRC calculated for all the bytes Int CRC(ByteSeq, Int Mode, Int Poly, Int Seed)
in ByteSeq.
Mode - Mode (whether bit-reflected)
Poly specifies the polynomial coding value and is
a binary value containing a bit 1 for each non- Poly - Value of the CRC polynomial
zero polynomial coefficient. The most significant
Seed - Initial seed value
polynomial bit (x^16) is omitted.
Mode=0 - Defaulft (Non reversed).
Mode=1 - the bits within each byte are reversed

before performing the calculation. This bit-
reflection is a common, though not universal,
requirement for CRCs used in comms protocols.
This is often the order in which the bits are
transmitted.
An initial 16-bit seed value can be specified if
required if not required it should be set to 0.
See below for Example CRC
FUNCTION Table
Example CRC
Returns a 2 byte CRC calculated for all the bytes in ByteSeq.
Poly specifies the polynomial coding value and is a binary value containing a bit 1 for each non-zero polynomial coefficient. The most significant
polynomial bit (x^16) is omitted.
Mode=0 - Non-reversed
Mode=1 - the bits within each byte are reversed before performing the calculation. This bit-reflection is a common, though not universal, requirement for
CRCs used in comms protocol. This is often the order in which the bits are transmitted.
An initial 16-bit seed value can be specified if required if not required it should be set to 0.
Examples of polynomials
CRC16
x^16 + x^15 + x^2 + 1 1-1000-0000-0000-0101
Poly = 8005 hexadecimal
CRC16 reversed
x^16 + x^14 + x + 1 1-0100-0000-0000-0011
Poly = 4003 hexadecimal
Example CRC (Modbus)
CRC('123456789',1,16#8005,16#FFFF) returns 16#4B37
HA263001U055
FIND Examples
Returns the position of the beginning of the Nth occurrence of ByteSeq2 inside ByteSeq1. It is permitted to omit N, in which case it defaults to 1. The
search is started from the beginning of ByteSeq1 if N is positive, or from the end if N is negative. If N is zero or ByteSeq1 is null or no occurrence is found,
0 is returned. If ByteSeq2 is null, the function returns 1 if N is positive, or the length plus 1 if N is negative, e.g.:
Examples:
FIND('ABACA','A',2) returns 3
FIND('ABACABA','AB',2) returns 5
FIND(AAAAA, AA, -1) returns 4
FIND(AAAAA, A, -1) returns 5
FIND(AAAAA,,-1) returns 6
Conversion Formats and examples

Format strings consist of an optional width followed conversion character(s) as defined below. An optional further
character in the case of FORMAT will override the default * used for unformattable values, e.g. numbers which will not
fit within the specified width.
For FORMAT with a specified width, the output is padded on the left with spaces to fill this width, unless the width
begins with 0, in which case 0 is used. For SCAN or IS_VALID with a specified width, the input is effectively truncated
to this width before being scanned. So, for example, SCAN(6I, Buffer) is equivalent to SCAN(I, LEFT(Buffer, 6)).
For FORMAT of real values only, the width may include an optional decimal point followed by an optional precision (i.e.
number of decimal places).
Conversion Specifications
I - Signed decimal integer.
Examples:
FORMAT(5I,Value) would return the byte sequence 7412 if Value was 7412.
FORMAT(05I,Value) would return the byte sequence 07412 if Value was 7412.
FORMAT(05I,Value) would return the byte sequence -0123 if Value was -123 (FF85 hexadecimal)
FORMAT(3I!,Value) would return the byte sequence !!! if Value was 7412.
SCAN(I, 4789) would return the value 4789
SCAN(I, -4789) would return the value -4789
SCAN(3I, -4789) would return the value -47
IS_VALID(I, -4789) would return TRUE
IS_VALID(I, A123) would return FALSE
U Unsigned decimal integer.

Examples
FORMAT(5U,Value) would return the byte sequence 7412 if Value was 7412.
FORMAT(05U,Value) would return the byte sequence 07412 if Value was 7412
FORMAT(5U,Value) would return the byte sequence 65535 if Value was FFFF hexadecimal.
SCAN(U, 4789) would return the value 4789
SCAN(2U, 4789) would return the value 47
SCAN(U, -4789) would return the value 0 as -4789 cannot be interpreted as an unsigned number.
IS_VALID(U, -4789) would return FALSE
HA263001U055
x, X Hexadecimal integer.
x for 0 9 and a,b,c,d,e,f
X for 0 9 and A,B,C,D,E,F
Examples
FORMAT(06x,Value) would return the byte sequence 007fff if Value was 32767 decimal.
FORMAT(X,Value) would return the byte sequence FFFF if Value was 65535 decimal.
SCAN(X, FF) would return the value 255 decimal
B Binary integer.
Examples
FORMAT(08B,Value) would return the byte sequence 01011101 if Value was 93 decimal.
SCAN(B, 1111111111) would return the value 1023 decimal
O Octal integer.
Examples
FORMAT(O,Value) would return the byte sequence 777 if Value was 511 decimal.
FORMAT(4O,Value) would return the byte sequence 777 if Value was 511 decimal.
FORMAT(04O,Value) would return the byte sequence 0777 if Value was 511 decimal.
SCAN(O, 77) would return the value 63 decimal
F Real (floating point).

For FORMAT only, the size can be followed by an optional decimal point and an optional precision (i.e. the
number of digits after the decimal point). Exponential formats are not supported for F, but see Conversions e,
E & G below.
Examples
Where Value was the result of dividing 1000 by 3
FORMAT(6.2F,Value) would return the byte sequence 333.33
FORMAT(6.F,Value) would return the byte sequence 333.
FORMAT(6F,Value) would return the byte sequence 333
FORMAT(F,Value) would return the byte sequence 333
SCAN(F, -1.456E-2) would return the value -1.456
e, E
For use only with FORMAT, this behaves like F but outputs in scientific format using e or E as specified. The
exponent will include a sign and at least two digits.
Example
Where Value was the result of dividing 1000 by 3
FORMAT(10.2E,Value) will return the byte sequence 3.33E+02
Note: if 'e' was used in the example, the returned byte sequence would state 3.33e+02
HA263001U055
G
For use only with SCAN & IS_VALID, this behaves like F, except that unlike F it will accept scientific format.
Example
SCAN(G, -1.456E-2) would return the value -0.01456
C Single ASCII character.

For FORMAT this converts a value in the range 0 255 into a single ASCII character. For SCAN a single
character is converted into a value in the range 0 255.
Examples
FORMAT(C,Value) would return the single byte A if Value was 65 decimal.
SCAN(C, B) would return the value 66 decimal.
T ISO8601 format
Converts between time held as an integer in the ISO8601 format and HH:MM:SS. In ISO8601 time is held as a
decimal number in the format HHMMSS.
Can be followed by an optional separator character which is assumed to be : if not specified.
Examples
FORMAT(T,Value) would return the character sequence 12:33:06 if Value was 123306 decimal.
FORMAT(T.,Value) would return the character sequence 12.33.06 if Value was 123306 decimal.
SCAN(T, 14:27:30) would return the value 142730 decimal.
TP (Posix format)
Converts between time held as an integer number of seconds and HH:MM:SS format. Time values greater than
86399 will be reduced modulo 86400 so this is compatible with Date/Time values held in Posix format ( the
number of seconds since midnight on 1/1/70).
Can be followed by an optional separator character which is assumed to be : if not specified.
Examples
FORMAT(TP,Value) would return the character sequence 12:33:06 if Value was 45186 decimal.
FORMAT(TP.,Value) would return the character sequence 12.33.06 if Value was 45186 decimal.
SCAN(TP, 00:01:30) would return the value 90 decimal.
D ISO8601 format
Converts between a date held as an integer in the ISO8601 format and DD/MM/YYYY. In ISO8601 dates are
held as decimal numbers in the format YYYYMMDD
Examples
FORMAT(D,Value) would return the character sequence 23/09/2006 if Value was 20060923 decimal.
SCAN(D, 04/07/2005) would return the value 20050704 decimal.
HA263001U055
DP Posix format
Converts between time held as an integer number of seconds since midnight 1/1/1970 (Posix format) and date
in DD/MM/YY format.
Examples
FORMAT(DP,Value) would return the character sequence 05/01/70 if Value was 345600 decimal.
SCAN(DP, 15/01/70) would return the value 1209600 decimal.
Note that LIN-encoded dates and times, specifically the LIN DATE and TIME types are handled within ST as strings.
Therefore LIN encoding is implicit when reading from or writing to DATE or TIME fields.
DELIMIT Examples
Returns the Nth substring of ByteSeq1 delimited by ByteSeq2. (The start and end of ByteSeq1 also count as delimiters.) N may be negative, in which
case it is counted from the right. If ByteSeq1 is null or ByteSeq2 is null or N is 0, or there are less than |N| - 1 delimiters in ByteSeq1, a null byte sequence
is returned.
Examples:
DELIMIT(a+b+c, +, 2) returns b
DELIMIT(abc;;def;ghi, ;, 3) returns def
DELIMIT(a::bb::ccc::dddd, ::, -2) returns ccc
DELIMIT(A/B/C/, /, -4) returns A
DELIMIT(ABCDEFG, BX, 1) returns ABCDEFG
DELIMIT(ABCDEFG, BX, 2) returns
As with FIND, occurrences are treated as non-overlapping, for example
DELIMIT(ABC>>>DEF>>>G,>>,2) returns >DEF
HA263001U055
Order Parameter
Some functions also have an Order parameter which provides different options for byte or word order in the data value
to be written or read. These options include big endian and little endian byte order for integer values and normal and
swapped word order for 32 bit values.
Order Parameter Table
order 16 bit values 32 bit values
0 Little Endian Little Endian

n LS byte n LS byte
n+1 MS byte n+1
n+2
n+3 MS byte
1 Big Endian Big Endian

n MS byte n MS byte
n+1 LS byte n+1
n+2
n+3 LS byte
2 NA Little Endian, word order swapped

n MS word, LS byte
n+1 MS word, MS byte
n+2 LS word, LS byte
n+3 LS word, MS byte
3 NA Big Endian, word order swapped

n LS word, MS byte
n+1 LS word, LS byte
n+2 MS word, MS byte
n+3 MS word, LS byte
HA263001U055
Variables in ST
The types of Variable that can be used are:
database names
bitfields
aliases
SFC step variables
Note
Identifiers contained in a Variable must be valid.
Database names
These can take the following formats:
blockname.fieldname PIC_004.PV
blockname.bitfield.bit Dig_A.Out.Bit3
blockname.bitfield TIC_100.Options
blockname.Alarms.alarmname ANIN_005.Alarms.HiLevel
Note
LIN Database names are not case-sensitive, i.e. capital or small letters may be freely used or mixed in the names. Dig_A.OUT.BIT3 is equivalent
to Dig_A.Out.
Bitfields
8-bit bitfields may be referred to as decimal integers in the range 0 to 255 (i.e. binary 00000000 to 11111111).
Dig_A.Out:=96; assigns the binary value 01100000 to the bitfield.

16-bit bitfields may be referred to as decimal integers in the range -32768 to +32767 (i.e. binary 1000 0000 0000
0000 to 0111 1111 1111 1111, in 2's complement format).
Aliases
TagName aliases, created in the Tag table, can be used in Structured Text and are displayed, as with all Variables, via
the Template Palette or the Variable field PickList, in the Object Properties pane.
SFC step variables
stepname.X END_STEP.X
stepname.T STEP5.T
Stepname.X is TRUE when the step called Stepname is active, or when the step timers have been stopped but not
initialised (Run and Init = FALSE, in the SFC_CON block). Otherwise Stepname.X is FALSE.
Stepname.T is the elapsed time in the step called Stepname, in seconds. Stepname.T is frozen when Stepname is
exited, and zeroed when Stepname starts or when the SFC is reset.
HA263001U055
Identifiers in ST
An identifier is a blockname, fieldname, or stepname. A valid identifier must have the format:
letter | _ {letter | digit | _ }...
Note
'_' is the underscore (underline) character, not the hyphen or minus sign.
That is, one letter or underscore, followed by any number (including zero) of letters, digits or underscores, up to a
maximum of eight characters.
Valid Structured Text (ST) identifiers

A1
act_4
FlowMetr
_Pump
X__3Y (consecutive underscores)
z567931
Invalid Structured Text (ST) identifiers

1A (digit first)
Pump 3 (space)
Flow-Mtr (minus sign)
x*y*z (multiply sign)
6366 (digit first)
T1.2 (dot)
Pulserate (too long)
Note
Variable names containing bad Identifiers can be made recognisable as Variables by enclosing the whole Variable name in square brackets:
[6366.MN]
[DG_CONN3.W Field2.Bit6]
[x*y*z.OP]
HA263001U055
Constants in ST
Structured Text (ST) supports four types of constant:
Integer
Real
Time
String
Note: Integers are considered as 32 bit signed Integers. Values outside -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 will be
clipped to these limits
Decimal constants have the format:
{sign} digit {digit}
45
-12345
Hexadecimal constants have the format:
16#hexdigit {hexdigit}
16#FF (represents 255 decimal)
16#00ff (represents 255 decimal - padding zeroes OK)
16#03e8 (represents 1000 decimal)

Note
Hexadecimal digits are not case-sensitive.
Binary constants have the format:

2# binarydigit { binarydigit }
2#1100 (represents 12 decimal)
2#0010 (represents 2 decimal)

Real constants
These have the format:
{sign} integer.integer
3.6
-0.0033
Time constants
These have the format:
T# {integer unit} real unit
Units are d (days) h (hours) m (minutes) or s (seconds). Time constants evaluate to seconds if assigned or compared
to real constants, e.g. In the assignment Recipe.A3:=T#1h; Recipe.A3 takes the value 3600.
T#3s (3 seconds)
T#4m13.0s (4 minutes, 13 seconds)
T#5.6h (5 hours, 36 minutes)
T#1d12.2h (36 hours, 12 minutes)

Note
Time units may be input as upper or lower case.
HA263001U055
String constants
Certain block types fields, can be written to/from ST only by using strings, e.g.
pid1.mode:="Manual";
TimeDate.Date1:="18/07/09";
The table below lists these block types and associated example fields::
Block Types Example Fields
STRING SFC_CON.FileName:="Batch1"
ENUM pid1.mode:="Manual"
DATE TimeDate.Date1:="18/07/09"
TIME TimeDate.CurrTime:="14:22:18"
WSTR WIDESTR24S.VAL1:="r$F4le"
BSEQ RAW_COM.Buffer1:="a$62c"
Wide String and Byte Sequence Conversions

With reference to the $-sequence table given below, when a character or byte string is assigned to a Wide
String(WSTR) or Byte Sequence(BSEQ) a $- sequence conversion based on IEC61131-3 occurs as shown in the
examples below.
Note
Byte Sequence and Wide String Fields cannot be wired
Examples
RAW_COM.Buffer1:="a$62c" --------- Assigns 'abc' to the RAW_COM block, Buffer1 field. ($62 = 'b' ASCII)
WIDESTR24S.VAL1:="r$F4le" --------- Assigns 'rle' to the WIDESTR block, Var1 field. ($F4 = '' ASCII)
Block.Field(STRING):="a$62c" --------- Assigns 'a$62c' to the block, field. (No Conversion occurs for 'STRING'
fields)
$-Sequence Conversion
$nn The character with ASCII code 'nn' in hexadecimal,

e.g. $0A
$$ Dollar sign
$' Single quote
$L or $l Linefeed (0A Hexadecimal)
$N or $n Newline (equivalent to $R followed by $L)
$P or $p Form feed (0C Hexadecimal)
$R or $r Carriage Return (0D hexadecimal)
$T or $t Tab (09 Hexadecimal)
$U Reserved for future use
HA263001U055
Actions in ST
Text Actions are Structured Text (ST) statements that assign, conditionally or unconditionally, values to variables. A
text Action can contain one or many statements.
SFC Actions contain Steps that may refer to text actions, Ladder Diagram Actions, or to other SFC Actions.
Structured Text statements

Transitions in ST
Transitions are Structured Text (ST) expressions that may be either TRUE (evaluate to logic or integer 1) or FALSE
(evaluate to logic or integer 0).
A Transition is used in an Sequence Action to test for a condition in the control Database. A TRUE Transition following
an active step (or parallel steps) causes the Sequence to move on to the next step(s). That is, the active step(s)
preceding the Transition de-activate(s), and the step(s) following the Transition activate(s).
Test a real variable against a constant
Recipe.a0 < 4
Test a digital for TRUE
Dig_B.Out.Bit5
Test a digital for FALSE
NOT Dig_B.Out.Bit5
Test a step time
STEP6.T >= T#2m

Test a step time in seconds
waitstep.t > 95
Test if an SFC Action end-step reached
Act4_end.X
Logical combination of tests
Dig_B.Out.Bit5 AND (Rec.A0<4 OR Rec.A0>5) OR step6.T>=T#4s

Arrays in ST
LIN does not support arrays in ST configuration, but the syntax described below can be used to perform a function that
provides a form of array (Offset) configuration using the { and } brackets. The expression in the { and } brackets
evaluates to an offset from the current field, to make a reference to another field.
Remember
Square brackets are used to indicate invalid id's, e.g. block names with spaces and other characters.
Offset syntax can be used In both Arithmetical and Logical expressions and to the left of assignments:
Block.Field {<expression>}
Block.Field.Subfield {<expression>}
Block.Field {<expression>}.Bit0
Block.Field {<expression>}.Subfield {<expression>}

This syntax can also be used to treat sets of numbered fields in a block as an array, e.g. an AN_CONN block has fields
PV_1 to PV_8 that can be treated as an array of 8 fields. Any individual field in a set of numbered fields can be used as
the base of the array, i.e. a block with 8 REAL_F fields can be used as two arrays of 4 reals, e.g. PV_1{3} means PV_4,
and PV_5{3} means PV_8. This can also apply to subfields.
Note
Block_5.Val1.Bit7{0} is not a permitted offset value syntax because Bit 7 is the last bit in an 8-bit subfield so therefore cannot be the start of an
array.
Example
HA263001U055
FOR TC001:=0 to 6 DO (*Analogue shift register*)

Block_5.Val1{TC001}:=Block_5.Val1{TC001 + 1};
END_FOR;
Block_5.Val1{7}:=50
Notation
The following syntax and format notation is used in the Structured Text (ST) reference:
Boldface - Items in boldface characters must be input as shown.
Italics - Items in italics are to be supplied by the user.
{ } - Items inside braces are optional.
- Items followed by an ellipsis may be repeated any number of times.
| - Items separated by a '|' character are alternatives (XOR'd).
Courier - Items printed in Courier typeface are examples of Structured Text (ST).
All punctuation - including periods, commas, colons, semicolons, underscores, quotation marks, parentheses, and
equal signs - must be included where shown.
HA263001U055
12 Online Configuration and Reconfiguration

What is Online Reconfiguration?
Online Configuration, using the Connect feature to locate a specific Instrument, and Reconfiguration, using Try, Untry,
and Apply features, is the facility to make direct LIN Database changes to a Strategy in a target instrument currently
operating in a system.
If differences between the LINtools Strategy and target instrument Strategy exist, the LINtools program compares the
instruments latest structural edits to assess the Alignment Options. There are 2 distinct types of changes that can be
made.
Live changes
Tentative changes
Live changes
Live changes are defined as edits made directly to the Strategy running, immediately affecting the target Instrument.
For example, changing tuning parameters in a PID block happens immediately. In order to make tentative parameter
changes to a running Strategy, the block must be detached from the Strategy. The Unlink command allows the block to
remain running in the instrument, but is considered as Offline when edited in LINtools. Any changes do not directly
apply to the running block, and can be Tried in complete safety, until satisfied with the results.
Tentative changes
Tentative changes can be defined as edits that modify the structure, such as adding or deleting function blocks, or,
moving a wire from one input to another. These changes can be made as Tentative because there is no immediate
instruction to the target instrument; the delete and create is executed as Tentative and then the new result Applied to
the target.
Note
Tentative changes apply to the object being deleted or created. An existing wire can be marked delete this - tentative and a wire added - tentative
offering an object the following states: tentative new; existing permanent; tentative delete.
Where Tentative changes include new Function Blocks, the new blocks can be configured in their Tentative state, as if
offline (LIN Database is not running in the target), the configuration rules that are applied will be the same as in the
normal offline Editor. When those changes are then applied to the target, the blocks become Online and operate as in
Monitor mode (LIN Database is running in the target).
Where Tentative changes include deleting or creating wires, the wires are used as their state suggests, i.e. a deleted
wire is ignored, while an added wire passes the output from one block to another. When a wire contains multiple
connections that differ, LINtools identifies it using colour and line style.
I/O Configuration
Any structural changes made to the I/O while Online are considered as Tentative. Online reconfiguration of the I/O
system involves edits to running blocks (e.g. to add I/O modules or extra channels on the same I/O module), but it is
desirable that any changes should be made tentative, i.e. capable of being Tried/Untried, since a change made to one
I/O block can potentially affect many others. Changing a modules type, for example, could throw all channel blocks
assigned to it into status error (i.e. non-zero value in the Status field). Therefore, when in Online Reconfiguration mode
LINtools will not permit modification of certain fields of I/O blocks via the Object Properties pane unless the block is first
Unlinked.
Note
If the Strategy configuration files do not already exist on the Computer, simply press the Connect toolbutton on the toolbar, and select the Port and
Node. LINtools can then upload the files from the target Instrument.
HA263001U055
Online Reconfiguration - Example

This shows the Object Properties pane displaying added and deleted FBD objects.
Note
The Connections tab shows the source and destination of a wire using colour, symbols and line styles to indicate its state.
HA263001U055
13 Profibus
What is Profibus Configuration ?
Profibus configuration is used to define the communication between instruments operating on a Profibus Network, e.g.
Eycon-20 (Profibus Master), and other devices (Profibus Slaves).
The Profibus Master configuration runs in conjunction with a LIN database, in an instrument environment provided with
a Profibus interface. The interface between the LIN database and the Profibus data uses a GateWay file, gwf that
configures the LIN instrument to communicate with the Profibus Slaves. This file must be generated and downloaded
along with the LIN Database, .dbf, to a LIN instrument.
The relationship between data collected by the Profibus Slave and the associated LIN database fields is configured
using the Profibus Master Configurator in LINtools. This software uses the LIN Profibus Master Configuration file, .upm,
to link the GWProfM_CON block in the database to the Profibus network. When the configuration is saved a Profibus
Binary file, .upb is generated. This file must also be downloaded to the LIN Profibus Master. The .upb file describes the
specific configuration of the network, devices, and informs the Profibus Master what data is expected, based on the
parameters defined in the .gsd file, GerteStammDaten, provided by the manufacturer. Each LIN Profibus Master
instrument specifies a unique .gwf that is identified via a GWProfM_CON block.
Profibus Master Configurator
The primary function of the Profibus Master Configurator is to assign LIN database block fields via the LIN Reference
field to a specific address space in the Profibus Slave.
The Profibus Master Configurator displays the Network configuration of Profibus Master, Network and Profibus Slaves,
and the configured Modules, in a tree view. Profibus Slaves can be Compact devices or Modular Stations. The Profibus
Master Configurator is used to identify each Module fitted to the Profibus Slave. When modules have been added the
Profibus Master can read this information and understand what data to expect, e.g. Input data from Analogue Input
module and Output data from an Analogue Output module.
The specific Input data and Output data, Extended Diagnostics, and Acyclic data must be configured for each Profibus
device via the appropriate pages in the Profibus Master Configurator.
Profibus Configuration - example:
Demand Data
Demand Data is a sub-protocol using the first 8 bytes in both the Input data and Output data of the cyclic Data
exchange. It allows random read/write access to any defined parameter in the device.
It is used to define device parameters that are to be transferred at a priority greater than cyclic data without introducing
new messages. Support for Demand Data is dependant on the Profibus card, and controlled via the Profibus Master
.gsd file.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Demand Data will only operate correctly when configured to Module 1.
HA263001U055
Profibus Configuration - Overview

Profibus configuration is used for configuring the transfer of data existing in Profibus Slaves, both manufacturer and
third-party devices, to and from a Profibus Master. It allows the user to read and write selected parameters from third-
party devices via the Profibus network in to a LIN database.
For Profibus configuration a basic knowledge of the devices that exist on the Profibus network, the configuration of the
device, and the parameters that are to be transferred between Profibus Master and Profibus Slave is required. A further
understanding of address space for each parameter used is useful.
The Profibus Master Configurator tree view, below, shows the devices connected to this particular Profibus Master.
Devices are added to the tree view simply by using the Add Slave button, and removed using the Remove Slave
button. A further selection of buttons is provided depending on the context of the window beside the tree view. The
Input data, Output data, Extended Diagnostics, and Acyclic data are configured on separate pages shown beside the
tree view.
To use the Profibus Configurator,

1 Configure the LIN Profibus GateWay.
This will seamlessly create all required files and folders and launch the Profibus Master Configurator. While
configuring the LIN Profibus GateWay, the Network folder can be specified or a new Network folder created.
2 Configure the Profibus communications protocol for the Profibus Master.
This defines the communications Protocol used by this COM port, i.e. Profibus Master COM port should be
configured to ProfibusDvp1-M.
3 Configure the Profibus Master properties.
These properties define the control of the devices in the network.
4 Configure the Profibus Slave
Profibus Slaves can be Compact devices or Modular stations and are added to represent each device
communicating via the Profibus network connected to the Profibus Master. A .gsd file provides detailed information
about the Profibus Slave.
Configure the Data exchange parameters to define the values that will be read b or written to the Profibus Salve via
the Profibus Master.
5 Save and download the Instrument configuration.
Save the strategy to ensure the information is retained. Add the relevant files to the list of files to be downloaded,
and download the strategy to ensure the Instrument operates as expected.
HA263001U055
14 Data Recording
What is Data Recording Configuration ?
Data Recording configuration is used to define which block fields in a database will be recorded. The values from
selected block fields are recorded to Data Recording files, .uhh, and can be displayed at a later date in either an
electronic chart display, or printed hardcopy chart.
Note
Recorded data in the .uhh files can be used to replace periods of lost data in InSQL and the Alarm database using the Store and Forward tool.
The Data Recording configuration consists of a Data Recording Configuration file, .uxg, and a Data Recording
compound, DataRec. The .uxg file is used to define which block fields are to be recorded, while the DataRec compound
controls and monitors the actual recording, e.g. the update rate, and archiving, e.g. PrArchv1.
Note
The archiving of recorded .uhh files is configured via the Instrument Properties, and monitored using the RARCDIAG block.
The .uxg file must be downloaded to the instrument.

Data Recording Configurator
The primary function of the Data Recording Configurator is to define groups of block fields in the database, and record
the associated values at defined intervals. This provides an accurate record of a particular part of the plant/system.
An example of Data Recording Configuration
Adaptive Recording
Adaptive recording shows the minimum and maximum of a value even if the instrument is recording data at a slower
interval. Recording intervals can slowed to save historical data storage space while any spikes or anomalies can still be
seen between the recorded points.
At slow chart speeds it is possible that the input circuit, between chart increments will pick up a spike or other brief
disturbance in the measured signal, but that this disturbance will not appear on the chart, even though it may trigger an
alarm. With adaptive recording enabled, if a sudden change in the input signal is detected, the recorder will place an
additional dot on the chart without the chart being moved. This means that even at the lowest chart speed, unexpected
signal changes can still be trended.
HA263001U055
Data Recording Overview

Data recording is the process of writing groups of values from selected block fields in the database to a Data Recording
file, .uhh. As data is sampled and logged in the instrument, .uhh files are created in the internal flash memory. The .uhh
file allows the user to read and print the selected block fields in the Review software.
Note
Data Recording requires a D10 to D90 Licence, and supports function block codes K to T. The Licence code is used to permit the use of the blocks, and
the function block codes describe a collection of supported function blocks.
Typically, Data Recording is used for

general audit records (for subsequent analysis with MS Excel, for instance)
quality control of product and plant
monitoring performance
The Data Recording configuration functions according to the mode selected in LINtools. Full Data Recording
configuration is available when LINtools is operating in Online Reconfiguration, but if LINtools is operating in Connect or
Monitor mode only limited functionality is available. Connect mode only allows users to control data recording by
enabling or disabling specific groups, and Monitor mode simply displays the Data Recording configuration.
To use the Data Recording Configurator,
1 Configure the Data Recording configuration.
Define block fields to be recorded and configure the presentation when displayed as a chart using the Review
software.
2 Define the FTP Server.
Identify the archive Host, FTP Server, used to archive the .uhh files.
Tip!
Use the Store and Forward tool to replace periods of lost data in InSQL and the A larm databases with recorded data from the .uhh files
in LIN instruments and 5000/6000 recorders.
3 Save and download the Instrument configuration.

Save and download the strategy to the instrument. The Data Recording configuration file, .uxg, will automatically be
added to the list of Files to be Downloaded.
4 Configure the Review software.
Imports recorded data, .uhh file, into the Review software, and creates charts to display the recorded data.
HA263001U055
15 Setpoint Programming
What is Setpoint Programming ?
Setpoint Programming is used to control a selected instrument output value (channel), typically a SP, over a specified
period of time.
The Setpoint Program information is generated by the Programmer Editor and held in a Program file, .uyy. The
Program file is produced from a previously configured template defined in a Program Template file, .uyw. This Program
Template file is created using the Programmer Wizard available from the Tools menu in LINtools.
The Program Template file defines a suite of blocks that includes the PROGCTRL block, PROGCHAN and SEGMENT
blocks, held in a PROG_WIZ compound. These blocks provide access to all parameters in the Setpoint Program that
are used to configure the values in the Program file and control the Profile of the setpoint, Events and User Values in
the instrument.
Note
The Program configured in the Programmer Editor is read by the blocks in the .dbf file when LINtools is connected to the instrument.
HA263001U055
Setpoint Programming - Overview

The purpose of a Setpoint Program is to control and manage the changing target value that an automatic control
system, e.g. PID controller, will aim to reach. For example, a boiler control system might have a temperature setpoint,
i.e. a temperature the control system aims to attain in the system.
The Setpoint Program is a set of defined values for a Single Channel Program or a Multi-Channel Program stored in a
Program file, .uyy. A Program file is generated using this Editor within the specification defined in a Program Template
file, .uyw, generated using the Programmer Wizard.
Remember...
Programs can be launched using the appropriate command available from the Tools menu.
To create a Program, a Program Template must first be produced using the Programmer Wizard in LINtools. The
resulting Program Template file can then be used by the Programmer Editor to create the Setpoint Program. The
Programmer Wizard creates blocks that can only control Programs produced using the Programmer Editor.
Remember
Use the Programmer Wizard in LINtools to generate or edit a .uyw file and create the PROG_WIZ compound. Make sure the require d
input values and output values to/from the plant/system are wired to the block in this compound.
To configure a Setpoint Program

1 Use the Programmer Wizard to generate or edit a .uyw file, defining the number of channels and segments
available to the Program in this instrument, and create all the blocks used to interface with this .dbf file.
2 Open the PROG_WIZ compound, and the PROGCTRL block to show the Object Properties pane.
IMPORTANT NOTE
To prevent erroneous Program Template file configuration always use the wizard to edit the blocks in the PROG_WIZ compound. Changing the number
of Profiled Channels, Digital Events, or User Values will invalidate any Program file created with the previous version.
i Wire specific blocks in the PROG_WIZ compound to other blocks in the .dbf file. To use the Program to control
the setpoint of a control loop,
Wire the control loop configuration (LOOP_PID block) to the Programmer configuration (PROGCHAN
block) and return the current setpoint from the Programmer configuration (PROGCHAN block) to the
control loop configuration (LOOP_PID block. This will provide the setpoint control for the control loop
configuration. Wire the input values (AI_UIO.PV) from the plant/system to the control loop
(LOOP_PID.Main.PV).
Wire the Digital Events and User Values defined using the Programmer Wizard to appropriate output
blocks.
Wire to the required Wait conditions and Exit conditions defined using the Programmer Wizard from
appropriate input blocks. When wiring is complete, save the .dbf file. Add the Program Template file and
the Program file to the List of files to be Downloaded.
ii Enter the name for the Program file in the ProgFile field, and click to reveal the context menu. Select the Open
Program file (.UYY) command. If the file already exists the .uyy file opens in the Programmer Editor, but if it
does not the .uyy file is created after pressing Yes to confirm that a new file is required.
Alternatively, launch the Programmer Editor to generate or edit the .uyy file, defining the control of the
Setpoint. Save the .uyy file. Select Tools > Programmer Editor, then open or create a .uyy file.
Note
To configure a .uyy file refer to the Programmer Editor help file.
If necessary, move the required .uyw and .uyy files from the Unused Files folder to the Instrument folder to
ensure the files will be downloaded to the instrument.
Remember
Use the context menu to display the Unused Files folder if it is not already shown in the Contents pane.
iii Create and/or open a Program file. This can be done by using the context menu available when selecting the
PROGCTRL.File.ProgFile (block.page.field) in the Object Properties pane after providing the Program name, or
by opening the Programmer Editor , and selecting File > New (Open), and choose the Program Template file that
matches the blocks of a PROG_WIZ compound in the database.
3 Configure the Program using the Programmer Editor, setting each Segment type, Duration, and Target Setpoint in
the Segment grid as required. Then configure the Digital Event Outputs, User Values, Exit and/or Wait conditions
in the Program Properties Pane.
Note
Refer to the Programmer Editor for full details.
4 Download all relevant files to the instrument using LINtools.

Note
Connect to the instrument from the Programmer Editor to control the running Program.
HA263001U055
Single Channel Program

A Single Channel Program is
suitable for applications where a
single Setpoint is profiled, i.e.
heat treatment or firing ceramics
materials.
The Program type is pre-defined
in a Program Template file that is
generated by the Programmer
Wizard in LINtools. A Single
Channel Program creates a single
Profile for the Name defined in the
Programmer Wizard.
Multi-Channel Program
A Multi-Channel Program is
suitable for applications where a
more than one Setpoint is profiled,
i.e. environmental chambers that
control temperature and humidity.
The Program type is pre-defined in
a Program Template file that is
generated by the Programmer
Wizard in LINtools. A Multi-
Channel Program creates a Profile
for each Name defined in the
Programmer Wizard.
Exit conditions can only be
configured to occur in segments
that are not moving the setpoint,
i.e. Dwell and Step. All Profiled
Channels must be Step or Dwell
segments in order to meet this
condition, see Seg03 below.
HA263001U055
16 Intellectual Property Protection

What is Intellectual Property Protection ?
This is the principle of preventing unauthorised access to or malicious use of configured strategy files. LINtools enables
you to protect your Intellectual Property by password protecting your files. Protected files can only be opened by users
who know the password and can only be used on authorised instruments.
A protected file is encrypted using a key. This is a public identifier and a private password. A key must be specified to
protect a file, but the same key can be used to protect multiple files. When opening a protected file a dialog is displayed
showing the key identifier, and asking for the password. The protected file will open if the correct password is used.
Beware...
LINtools cannot open a protected file without the correct password. Protection and storage of passwords is the your responsibility. We cannot recover
lost passwords or open protected files for you.
To use a protected file the instrument must be authorised with the correct key, as specified during instrument
configuration. The same key can be used by many instruments. You can authorise an instrument with up to seven keys,
which allows one instrument to use files protected with different passwords. A protected file cannot be used by an
instrument that is not authorised with the correct key. This prevents users copying and using the strategy on different
instruments without permission.
Note
The keys are managed using LINtools.
HA263001U055
17 Alarm Suppression
Alarm Suppression - Overview
For full details for implementing Alarm Suppression please refer to the 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272.
Alarm Suppression is the ability to suppress an active alarm condition for a specified time duration which can be
configured between 0-90days with a granularity of one second. This is achieved under strategy control via ST
(Structured Text), Cold Start Parameter File (CPF) or an operator HMI e.g. EurothermSuite and Eycon 10/20
Visual Supervisor. An alarm can be placed into suppression or removed from suppression, achieved by configuring the
time duration of the alarm suppression attribute, .Suppress. Specifying a time of zero removes suppression, a time
between 0-90days sets suppression and, where allowed, a value of -1 provides indefinite suppression. Excluding the
'Combined' and Software alarm, which can never be suppressed, Alarm Suppression can operate on all alarms
independently or the whole function block. Unsuppression of all local LIN blocks in an instruments database can be
achieved via the Header Block. Alarm Suppression only applies to Alarms set with a priority between 1-15.
Note:
Enabling Alarm Suppression impacts on database size; 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272 provides full details
Supported alarms
Alarm suppression cannot be applied to system alarms. Within LIN function blocks, there are only two true system
alarms - the 'Software' and 'Combined' alarms which are the first & last alarms in every function block type. All other
alarms are considered to be Process Alarms, e.g. Absolute High Alarm. Alarms referred to in this Help Guide
relating to Alarm Suppression are considered as Process Alarms unless otherwise stated.
Alarm suppression can be applied to all individual alarms independently and also to a block as a whole. In this case all
alarms in the block are suppressed together with a single time duration and applies to local blocks only. Although
effected as a single operation, it actually causes all alarms to be set individually, i.e. it has exactly the same effect as
setting the same suppression duration time to each of the individual alarms contained within the block.
Note:
The rarely used Function Block 'DREC_CHANNEL' has limited Alarm Suppression Functionality; 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272 provides
full details.
What is Alarm Suppression Configuration?

Alarm Suppression is configured by implementing Structured Text(ST) within an SFC (Sequential Flow Chart), the Cold
Start Parameter File (CPF) or user interface, e.g. Eycon 10/20 Visual Supervisor, EurothermSuite and LINtools. An
alarm can be placed into suppression or removed from suppression, achieved by configuring the time duration of the
alarm suppression sub field attribute, .Suppress. Specifying a time of zero removes suppression, a time between 0-
90days sets suppression and a value of -1 provides indefinite suppression. All standard user interfaces allow entry
of a time duration which must be a positive value. Consequently this inhibits standard user interfaces from applying
indefinite alarm suppression, however this can be achieved by implementing a user screen or mimic strategy as
discussed in the 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272.
HA263001U055
Addressing and Syntax

The alarm suppression attribute is addressed by the sub field attribute .Suppress for each individual alarm name or
alarms in the whole block, and conforms to the ST syntax as follows:
Block.Alarms.AlmName.Suppress
Block.Alarms.Suppress
Examples:
PID1.Alarms.HighAbs.Suppress=-1 - sets indefinite suppression for the PID1 Absolute High Alarm
PID1.Alarms.HighAbs.Suppress=0 - unsuppress the PID1 Absolute High Alarm
PID1.Alarms.Suppress=T#1d.12.2h - sets 36hrs suppression for PID1 All Process Alarms with priority 1-15.
The same syntax is used in all cases where access to alarm suppression is required as follows:
Writing non-zero places the alarm into suppression for the specified duration in seconds. T# format for specifying
times can be used.
Writing zero removes the alarm from suppression.
Writing the value -1 places the alarm into indefinite suppression.
Reading the value zero indicates the alarm is not currently in suppression (individual alarms only).
Reading positive non-zero values indicates the remaining time duration of suppression in seconds (individual alarms
only).
Reading the value -1 indicates the alarm is indefinitely suppressed (individual alarms only).
Invalid Entries
The time duration until suppression is automatically removed is specified in whole seconds and is limited to 90 days.
Attempting to write a value greater than this clips it to 90 days. If specifying indefinite suppression, only the value -1 is
accepted, any other negative number is ignored. If multiple writes are made to the suppression attribute, the last value
written is used.
Alarm Action on Suppression

When an alarm is suppressed the associated In_Alarm bit is seen as FALSE by strategy clients listed as follows:
1 Local and cached function blocks wired within the Function Block Diagram (FBD).
2 As read by Structured Text (ST) within an Action Block or SFC.
3 As viewed via block inspect using, e.g.Visual Supervisor FBM, EurothermSuite point page, LINtools monitor,
terminal configurator, etc.
4 Collection blocks such as GROUP and ALC.
Function Block Wiring Diagram (FBD)

FBD wiring access is not provided to the Alarm Suppression attributes.
Within the FBD the In_Alarm attribute of an alarm is referenced as the source of a wire using an identifier string of the
form:
Block.Alarms.AlmName
HA263001U055
Structured Text (ST)

When assigning a value, the T# form of specifying times can be used, however a simple or derived numeric argument
specifying seconds can also be used. When reading the value, it is always numeric in seconds.
LINtools Variable Pick-list
For configuring an action within an SFC or Ladder diagram a pop-up Picklist or Palette Variable list is presented for
use in the LINtools ST, SFC or Ladder diagram editor, all offering the alarm suppression attributes as shown below.
The required Suppress attribute must be selected first before placing it in the appropriate editor.
Written Statements
Structured Text(ST) can be written without the aid of a Picklist where alarm suppression can be implemented using ST
in the context of SFCs, user screen actions and the Cold Start Parameter File. ST applies alarm suppression using
the syntax as shown above and for conditional statements are applied as follows:
if(Block.Alarms.AlmName.Suppress > 0) THEN ........... conditional ST
Writing invalid or out-of-range values are treated as above.
Structured Text Versions and Errors
If ST is included in the configuration of a database (e.g. SFC), there are three possible conditions in which ST errors
could occur and LINtools indicates appropriate warnings as follows:
Usage of the .Suppress sub field attribute in ST and a SW version of LINtools that does not support alarm
suppression results in Save errors as shown below. For compatibility details refer to 'Alarm Suppression Supported
Products'
The target instruments version of firmware is pre Alarm Suppression, see 'Alarm Suppression Supported Products'
Alarm suppression is not enabled for the database being worked on, see TOC, <How to><configure Alarm
Suppression><Enable Alarm Suppression>.
Typical ST Save Error Message
HA263001U055
Alarm Suppression Supported Products

Alarm Suppression is supported by the following products and software. Upgrading a database to support this function
is detailed in 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272.
T2550 Version 7.0 onwards
Eycon 10/20 Visual Supervisor Version 5.0 onwards
EurothermSuite\NTSE Version 4.9 onwards
LINtools (Tactician) Version 4.9 onwards
User Screen Editor Version 2.5 onwards
T800 Not Supported
T940X Not Supported
T640 Not Supported
Does my existing Database Support Alarm Suppression

Open the DBF using the appropriate version of LINtools and establish if an Alarm Suppression Enabled checkbox is
available under the Database tab. If it is shown, this indicates that the DBF is already suitable for use with alarm
suppression by simply ticking the Alarm Suppression Enabled checkbox.
If the Alarm Suppression Enabled checkbox and wording is not shown, the DBF does not support alarm suppression
and requires upgrading, refer to the 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272 for further details.
HA263001U055
18 Raw Comms
Raw Comms - Overview
The RAW_COM Function Block provides the facility for LIN based products to directly control the transmission and
reception of messages and protocols over a serial link and can also facilitate multi-node applications if required. It is
available for applications where it is necessary to have low level control of the serial communications port to provide the
flexibility to construct or analyse messages and protocols exactly as transmitted or received via a serial link.
The block is based on the Eurotherm PC 3000 Raw Comms block but includes the additional ability to execute
structured text Actions. It performs basic functions first and then executes any ST Actions that have been created. The
ST is stored in a file and is handled in the same way as for an Action block and cannot access data outside the Raw
Comms block. For protocols that are to complex to be handled using the ST inside the block an SFC should be used
to drive the block which consequently provides considerable flexibility and is not limited by the constraints inherent in
the block.
The RAW_COM block can be assigned to any serial port if more than one port is available and is designed for use by
LIN instruments supporting serial communications, e.g. T2550 and Visual Supervisor. It provides a wide range of low
level facilities including:
Direct access to messages as transmitted or received via the serial link.
Independent control of message transmission and reception (limited to the same Baud rate).
Selectable echoing of received characters when required.
User selectable Delete sequence for character deletion when required.
Can be used in conjunction with SFCs for complex protocol support.
Additional wide string variable blocks to assist in processing long byte and character sequences.
Raw Comms Supported Products

Raw Comms is supported by the following products and software. Upgrading a database to support this function is
detailed in the Raw Comms user Guide, HA030511.
T2550 Version 7.0 onwards
Eycon 10/20 Visual Supervisor Version 5.0 onwards
EurothermSuite \NTSE Version 4.9 onwards
LINtools (Tactician) Version 4.9 onwards
T800 Not Supported
T940X Not Supported
T640 Not Supported
HA263001U055
Does my existing Database Support Raw Comms?

This is achieved by checking the Instrument Version that the DBF was created for. Referring to the figure below and
right click on the appropriate DBF (example 2550_14.DBF below) and select the LIN Database tab to establish the
Target version. With reference to the above Product/Version information, check that the Target version is compatible
to support Raw Comms.
If the Instrument is pre Raw Comms Version, the DBF does not support Raw Comms and by referring to the Raw
Comms user Guide, HA030511, can be upgraded.
Database Properties Dialog
HA263001U055
What is Raw Comms Configuration

This topic describes the setup decisions that need to be made prior to implementing a Raw Comms configuration, i.e.
whether to use just an associated Action or just an associated SFC or an associated SFC interacting with an
associated Action as discussed below. A decision on whether just an associated Action can be used on its own without
an associated SFC is determined by the required protocol complexity and bearing in mind that the maximum size of an
associated Action file object code is 1000 bytes.
Raw Comms is configured in two or three parts, determined by the complexity of the required protocol. The
RAW_COM block allows for execution of an associated Action which typically would be used for non-complex
protocols. For complex protocols an Action can also be used for 'common routine' tasks in association with an SFC.
For further information to aid configuration please refer to the LIN Blocks Reference Manual, HA082375 U003, Raw
Comms User Guide, HA030511 for implementation examples. For reference to Simple Variable Application Blocks to
assist in Raw Comms processing also refer to Chapter 9 of the Application & Control Modules Manual HA084012 U003.
Configuration of the RAW_COM function block fields

The RAW_COM block fields are configured prior to any associated Action or SFC creation. Refer to the LIN Blocks
Reference Manual, HA082375 U003, issue 18 onwards.
Note:
On Instruments where multiple user tasks are supported (e.g. T2550 PAC) the RAW_COM
block can be allocated to run on any of these tasks.
Associated Structured Text (ST) Action

For non-complex protocol applications an associated Structured Text (ST) Action can be used to facilitate the required
protocol processing. This requires that two fields are configured in the RAW_COM block. These fields are configured
with the associated Action itself and the Filename containing the Action and are ActName and FileName respectively.
The procedure to create an ACTION is described in the Raw Comms User Guide, HA030511. To force the RAW_COM
block to load a new associated Action refer to Raw Comms on-line reconfiguration below.
Associated SFC
For more complex protocols an SFC will be required to manage the overall protocol state processing requirements.
However in this case it may be possible to process 'common routine' tasks using an associated Action which interacts
with an SFC. The SFC manages the overall protocol 'state processing' tasks.
An associated SFC interacting with the RAW_COM block is considered just like any other SFC and the process for
creating and implementing the SFC is no different.
For further information relating to ST usage available to assist in Raw Comms processing it is strongly recommended to
also see under <Structured Text ><Structured Text reference>:
ST Constants
Operators and Functions
Raw Comms On-Line Reconfiguration

On instruments that support on-line reconfiguration (e.g. T2550 PAC), it is possible to create, remove or replace a
RAW_COM block as required. However, this will only be successful if the serial port protocol has already been
configured to 'Raw', via the Instrument Options Editor, refer to Raw Comms User Guide, HA030511.
If an associated action file has been specified for the created or edited block, when in TRY mode this file is read and
reloaded. This method can therefore be used to achieve an associated Action reload, which is not possible while under
normal running conditions.
For more information on associated Action files refer to Associated Structured Text (ST) Action above.
HA263001U055
19 How to...
Use LINtools
Use the Get Me Started wizard
This wizard offers the most common operations required when first opening LINtools. By default, it is displayed on
starting the LINtools, but this can be disabled by setting the Dont show at start up checkbox .
Note
Context help will be displayed when the Help checkbox is set .
To initiate any of the options displayed,

1 Select the radio button to define your choice of operation.
2 Progress through the wizard until all appropriate fields are complete, when the Finish button appears.
3 Press the Finish button to finalise the operation, and automatically Build the selected options.
HA263001U055
Add a new network/instrument

These commands are used to create additional Modbus or Profibus sub-networks and then, with a separate, Add New
Instrument command, create an instrument on a network.
To add a new network,
1 In the Contents pane, select a LIN instrument name to reveal a context menu, and select Add New Network to
reveal the New Network Wizard.
2 Complete the each field, including network type, Modbus or Profibus, and instrument I/O and OPC Port data,
pressing Next to continue to the next page of the wizard. Information relating to a selected field is displayed when
Help is set .
3 Finally, press Finish to accept the new network configuration.
Note
You will now be aware that the network contains an instrument indicated by the ' '. Using the Explorer command will open a window to display the
new network.
To add a new instrument,

1 select the File > Get Me Started command to display the Get Me Started dialog offering the most common
operations used when initially starting LINtools Engineering Studio
Alternatively, in the Contents pane, select a Network name to reveal a context menu, and select Add
Instrument to reveal the New Instrument Wizard.
2 Complete the each field, including instrument name, instrument type and version, Clone file Template, and Slave
address, pressing Next to continue to the next page of the wizard. Information relating to a selected field is
displayed when Help is set .
3 Finally, press Finish to accept the new instrument configuration.
Note
You will now be aware that the network contains an instrument indicated by the ' '. Using the Explorer command will open a window to display the
new network.
Ceate a New LIN Instrument Folder

A new LIN Instrument folder will be created to represent a specific Instrument on the 'live' Network. It is simply a way of
retaining any file in single location. Many of the files will be used to configure an instrument, but an Instrument Folder
can contain any files that may, or may not be relevant to this instrument. It will be appear in a specific Project Folder in
defined Network using the New LIN Instrument Folder command.
This command launches the New LIN Instrument Folder wizard allowing you to create a new Instrument Folder in new
or existing Projects, and new or existing Networks.
To create a new LIN Instrument folder
1 Select File > New LIN Instrument Folder command to launch the New LIN Instrument Folder wizard.
2 Complete each page of the wizard as required using the dynamic help displayed to the right of the dialog when
necessary.
Note
All Instrument Folder specifics entered here can be inspected at any time via the <Instrument Type> Instrument page in the Instrument Folder
Properties dialog. However, changing these parameters will NOT create default Instrument Folder files.
3 Press Finish to complete the wizard.

This will automatically create a LIN Instrument Folder and a Configuration (Header) block corresponding to the
Instrument type and version indicated using this wizard.
HA263001U055
Open the Editor window

A blank LINtools Engineering Studio window allows any LINtools related operations to be initiated. This includes
creating and editing LINtools files, e.g. Databases, Sequences, and Actions, creating a new Project Folder and
subsequent Network Folders, and even opening any Tools that are related to the operation of the LINtools file, i.e.
Setpoint Programmer, User Screen Editor, iTools Engineering Studio and Modbus tools.
Note
Each related Tool can be accessed via the Tools option in the Menu bar.
From this window you can access any of the editors.

To open a blank configuration window:
1 Select Start > Programs > > LINtools Engineering Studio.

Note
'' denotes the installation path.
The Get me started wizard is displayed if operated for the first time or the 'Dont show at start up checkbox is
set
This wizard tool offers the most common commands used in LINtools Engineering Studio, and can be launched a
any time.
Blank worksheet if the 'Dont show at start up checkbox in the wizard is set
What is the Get me started wizard?
Creating a LIN Database
Creating a LIN (Generic or Specific) Sequence
Creating a LIN Action
Creating a LIN Monitor Database

To edit an existing configuration:
1 In LINtools, click the Open toolbutton (or use File > Open) to display an Open dialog.
Alternatively, use the Get me started wizard.
The 'Open a recent file offers a list of recently saved files, any of which will be opened after selecting this radio
button. Other radio buttons offer the option to create or open another Instrument Folder.
If you have opened this file recently, you can click it directly, File > Recent Files list.
2 In the dialog, select a file and click Open. The corresponding editor opens, ready for you to start the configuration.
Alternatively, simply double-click the file icon in the Project instrument folder.
Note
Any currently unsaved LINtools configuration file MUST be saved before attempting to open another configuration file.
Open a file in a New Window

You may want to open a file of another application that is installed on the computer. This can save unnecessary delay
as this command can open a new window for the required application.
Note
If you open a new LINtools window it allows you to check the differences between download lists or drag function blocks from one window to another,
creating cached function blocks.
To open a file in a new window,

1 In the Contents pane, highlight the required file name, i.e. T800_04 [FBD], actset01 [SFC], <filename>.doc or
<filename>.bmp.
You may have to expand the networks, click the ' , to locate the file you require.
2 Select the highlighted file name by right-clicking on the highlighted file name to display a menu.
3 Click Open in New Window to open and display the selected file in the appropriate application window. If this new
file is a LINtools file, this will be the current LINtools window.
Note
If the file has been password protected, you will be required to enter the correct password before the file can be opened.
HA263001U055
Open a file in the current Window

You may want to open a LINtools file in the current LINtools window.
To open a file in the current window,
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the required file name, i.e. T800_04 [FBD], or actset01 [SFC].
You may have to expand the networks, click the , to locate the file you require.
3 Click Open to reveal the selected file in the current LINtools window.
Note
If the file has been password protected, you will be required to enter the correct password before the file can be opened.
Import a file
You may want to import a file from another folder into either of the Instrument folders. This can save unnecessary
repetition when the configuration you are working on is similar to an existing one.
To import a configuration from another configuration,
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the folder name for the destination of the imported file, i.e. Instrument, if you wish to
download the file to the instrument, or the Unused Files, for documents, and files not for downloading, etc..
2 Select the Instrument folder name to display the context menu.
3 Click Import File to reveal an Import File dialog appears, which lists files of the same type as the current file.
4 Navigate to the file you want to import and click Open.
The imported file is copied to the selected folder and immediately opened. If another worksheet is already open you
will be requested to save it before the continuing with the import operation.
Note
Imported Files having the same names as Files in the current Instrument folder displays an error message and are not imported.
Add to Configuration
This is only available from the Unused Files folder. If you have a file that is now needed for downloading, it can be put
in the Instrument folder using the Add to Configuration command via the context menu on the Unused Files folder.
Tip!
This can be simplified as, drag the required file from the Unused Files folder and drop in the Instrument folder.
To add a file,
1 In the Contents pane, show and open the Unused Files folder. Highlight the required file, i.e. <filename> [FBD],
<filename> [SFC].
3 Click Add to Configuration command to move the selected file into the Instrument folder.
Tip!
This process can also be initiated via the Add a file to the configuration button in the Contents Toolbar.
To view the Contents pane:

If the Contents pane is not visible, select View > Contents from the menu bar. It can be hidden using the same
command, or pressing the button.
Note
Each Pane can be shown in either a minimised and maximised position using the / buttons respectively.
You can cycle through the open sub-windows using the Back and Forward toolbutton commands.
List of items that can be selected for display in the window. The numbers indicate the order of creation of the items, and
are not significant.
Double-clicking an file type opens it up as a sub-window.
Right-clicking an item displays a context menu.
HA263001U055
To view Object Properties pane

During offline configuration the Object properties pane displays the characteristics of a selected item. However, when
displayed during Online Reconfiguration, it shows the online state of a selected item, such as an added block, or a
deleted wire.
Note
Each online state is indicated by symbol, colour, and line style.
In an Object properties pane, you can view the properties of a:

LIN Sequence STEP or TRANSITION.
LIN Database function BLOCK, and addition BLOCK pages, WIRE, or COMPOUND.
Update Rate field
Task field
To see an Objects properties pane you can do any of these:
double-click the object in the sub-window (or single-click it if a properties pane is already open).
highlight the object and click the Properties toolbutton.
highlight the object, then in the View menu, select Object Properties.
The / symbol can be used to minimise or maximise the Pane if more than one pane is docked in the same area of
the application, and the can be used to hide this pane.
Sow/hide the Report pane

During offline configuration of any LINtools file, the Report window (Results pane) displays any errors that may have
occurred when building the instrument strategy. This pane allows the inspection of any reported errors.
Tip!
Error codes are displayed in the Report pane as a Hex value. A description of the error code value can be shown using the Error lookup
utility available when selecting
Start > Programs > ... > Utilities > Error lookup
To show/hide the Report pane

Select the View menu, and then Report Window.
The / symbol can be used to minimise or maximise the Pane if more than one pane is docked in the same area of
the application, and the can be used to hide this pane.
Note
The Results information will also appear in a new Build window after pressing the Show Build window button when building the instrument folder.
HA263001U055
To show/hide the Status bar

During offline configuration of any LINtools file, the Status bar displays specific Editor information. However, when
displayed during Online Reconfiguration, it can also show the online state of a selected item, such as an added block,
or a deleted wire.
To show/hide the Status bar below the Object Properties pane, and/or Report pane
Select the View menu, and then Status Bar.
Note
This also applies to the Contents pane, Object Properties Pane, Palette pane, and Report window.
Function Block Diagram (FBD and FBD Monitor) Status bar

While editing and monitoring an FBD, the Status bar shows,
Tag information
the X, Y co-ordinates of the cursor in the active FBD window
the % (percentage) view (zoom in or zoom out) of the active FBD window
the particular Editor or Monitor in use (Database Editor or Database Monitor)
the current LINtools operating mode, e.g. connected to Live instrument, green led illuminated, or not connected to
Live instrument, green led extinguished
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Status bar
While editing a Specific or Generic SFC, the Status bar shows,
DB: The target LIN Database filename (if loaded)
Map: The current Map filename (if loaded)
the X, Y co-ordinates of the cursor if a chart Action window is active
the Ln, Col (line and column) position of the text cursor if a Structured Text Action window is active
the % (percentage) view (Zoom in or zoom out) if a chart Action window is active
the particular Editor or Monitor in use (Sequence Editor or Sequence Monitor)
the current LINtools operating mode, e.g. connected to Live instrument, green led illuminated, or not connected to
Live instrument, green led extinguished.
Sequential Function Chart (SFC Monitor) Status bar
While monitoring an SFC, the Status bar shows,
Seq <>: The filename of the remote Sequence.
the X, Y co-ordinates of the cursor if a chart Action window is active.
the Ln, Col (line and column) position of the text cursor if a text action window is active.
the particular Editor or Monitor in use (Database Editor or Database Monitor)
the % (percentage) view (Zoom in or zoom out) if a chart Action window is active.
Action Editor Status bar
While editing an Action, the Status bar shows,
the Ln, Col (line and column) position of the text cursor in the current LIN Action window.
To show the instrument properties:
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the instrument node name, i.e. T800_04.
You may have to expand the networks, click the +, to locate the instrument you require.
2 Select the highlighted file name by right-clicking on it to display a menu.
3 Click Properties to reveal the LIN (or Modbus) Instrument Properties dialog.
Click the LIN Instrument page to reveal the unique LIN instrument data entered when using the New LIN (or
Modbus) Instrument Wizard.
Note
Any changes made to fields in the Properties dialog may require additional configuration using other software applications which are not part of
LINtools.
HA263001U055
Open the Explorer

This displays an explorer window at the selected instrument and allows you to browse for files stored on local or
networked computers.
To open the Explorer,
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the top level node name, i.e. T800_04.
3 Click Explorer to reveal the explorer window.
Configure the Instrument Properties
This command is used to display the properties of the selected instrument. It reveals the information entered when
using the New LIN (or Modbus) Instrument Wizard.
The 'Upload current button initiates a wizard, that gathers specific parameters associated with an Instrument on the
defined Network and LIN Node address.
To show the instrument properties,
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the Instrument Folder name, i.e. T800_04.
You may have to expand the networks, click the , to locate the instrument you require.
2 Select the highlighted file name by right-clicking on it to display a menu.
3 Click Properties to reveal the LIN (or Modbus) Instrument Properties dialog.
Click the LIN Instrument page to
reveal the unique LIN instrument data
entered when using the New LIN (or
Modbus) Instrument Wizard.
Note
Any changes made to fields in the Properties dialog may
require additional configuration using other software
applications which are not part of LINtools.
Instrument Properties - example

This shows the various sections in the
Instrument Properties dialog.
Note
These fields are initially configured using the New LIN
Instrument Folder wizard from within the Project Folder.
HA263001U055
To download a configuration:
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the top level node name, i.e. T800_04.
2 Select the highlighted file name by right-clicking on the highlighted file name to reveal a menu.
3 Click the Download Configuration or the Download This command to reveal the confirmation dialog.
Download Configuration will attempt to download the files contained within the Instrument folder of the target
instrument and specified in the Files to be Downloaded dialog.
Download This will attempt to download the selected file to the target instrument.
4 To confirm select OK. The command is aborted if Cancel is selected.
Confirmation of downloading the configuration will display further Confirmation prompt stating that instrument files
will be overwritten. This will be followed by a request to Load and Run the latest downloaded Strategy.
To edit the list of LINtools' downloadable files:
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the required file name, i.e. T800_04, T800_04 [SFC], etc..
3 Click Files to Be Downloaded to reveal a dialog.
4 Now simply select each file you wish to download to the instrument. Each file set will be downloaded to the
instrument when requested by the Download Configuration or Download This commands.
Cose a LINtools file
You may want to close only the current LINtools application file, i.e. .dbf, .sdb, .stx, .udm, .uqd, or .upm. This can save
unnecessary delay as LINtools remains open allowing you to open another LINtools file.
To close a file,
1 Select File > Close
Save the file as required.
HA263001U055
Configure databases
To change the instruments Default .dbf:
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the required database, i.e. <filename> [FBD].
3 Click Set as Default DBF and accept the new configuration, press OK.
This command is unavailable (greyed out) if the selected file is already specified as the DefaultDBF.
Create a LIN Database file
The best place to create a Database file or a Monitor Database file is within LINtools using the 'Get me started wizard,
as it allows the Project and Network to be created as well. However, it can also be created using the New LINtools file
toolbutton or in the Project environment. That is, in the Explorer view of the Project file, inside the instrument folder that
will run the Database.
Note
You can also create a new LIN Database file elsewhere - e.g. on the desktop - but the file will need additional configuring to tell it the instrument type,
etc.
To create the new LIN Database file

These instructions pertain to all other LINtools application files.
1 Select the top level instrument file and right-click to reveal a context menu.
Use the New LINtools file toolbutton.
Use the 'Get me started' wizard.
2 Select New > LIN Database. An Add new file to Configuration dialog appears.
3 Enter a concise filename. The extension .dbf is added automatically.
4 Another dialog appears requesting the Target Instrument Type. Select the Instrument and version type required
and accept by pressing OK.
5 When the file is open, edit the LIN Database file, as required.
6 Finally, create or edit the Tags in the Tag table.
Tip!
Use Copy, Copy Block Parameters, Past e and Paste Block Parameters commands to reduce syntax error occurrences.
Access the LIN Database Editor

To access the LIN Database Editor:
1 Double-click the LIN Database file or its icon to launch LIN Database Editor.
Note
An automatically created LIN Database (_auto.dbf) may already exist in the instrument. This can be edited using the Online Reconfiguration toolbutton.
2 A Select Target Library dialog may appear, asking you to select a target instrument from the list.
If you choose a target and hit OK, only block templates that can run in the selected instrument will be offered
initially for configuration.
If you Cancel the dialog, you will normally cause the database load to be aborted.
3 The Database Editor window now appears, displaying the Contents pane (empty for a new database). The
Worksheet and Contents tabs at the left of the window list this Database as 'Main (ROOT), I/O (I/O configuration
including appropriate slots), and Tags.
HA263001U055
Create a new Layer

A single complete Strategy is generally created using a number of blended layers. Each layer (.dbf) of a Database file is
indicated in a hierarchical style in the Configuration folder, which can be ordered appropriately.
Order the Blended Database

This command allows you to create a new layer (.dbf) for the Database file of the selected node if the Use Blended
Database command is selected, indicated by the tick.
Note
The required PROGRAM or T600PROG (T600 Instrument specific) header block is automatically created during the build process.
To add a new layer,

1 In the Contents pane, open the Instrument folder. Highlight the required Database file, i.e. <filename> [FBD].
2 Select the highlighted file by right-clicking on the highlighted file name to reveal a menu.
3 Select Add New Layer. The Add new file to Configuration dialog appears.
4 Enter a concise filename. The extension .dbf is added automatically.
Note
A dialog requesting the Target Instrument Type may appear for if the parent instrument folder could not be found. Select the Instrument and version
type required and accept by pressing OK.
5 When the file is open, edit the Database file (or Monitor Database file) as required.
Change to and from a Blended Database
You may want to know which LIN Database configuration the selected LIN instrument currently is, and then
subsequently change the LIN Database configuration between Standard Database and Blended (or Layered) Database
configurations.
To change the Database configuration,
1 In the Contents pane, highlight the Instrument Folder, node name, i.e. T800_04.
2 Select the Use Blended Database command from the context menu.
If a Blended Database is in use the command is set .

Click Use Blended Database command to change the Database configuration.
Note
Existing layers are automatically removed from the configuration and held in the Unused Files folder.
If changing to a Blended Database configuration, either

the build list (build.ubl.old) is converted (to buildlst.ubl) and restored, re-establishing the Blended Database
configuration.
if no backup (build.ubl.old) exists, a new build list (buildlst.ubl) is created with the Default DBF installed as the
base layer.
If changing to a Standard Database configuration, the layers of the existing Blended Database are separated and
moved as individual files to the Unused Files folder. The Default DBF converts to a Standard Read/Write Database
file (.dbf).
Note
A backup of the Blended Databases configuration is automatically created by converting and renaming the buildlst.ubl to build.ubl.old. Therefore this
will not be recognized as a Build file.
HA263001U055
Ordering a Blended Database

A single complete Strategy is generally created using a number of blended layers. Each layer (.dbf or .ujc) of a Strategy
is indicated in a hierarchical style in the Instrument Folder, which can be ordered appropriately.
Note
The DefaultDBF and Auto generated layers are all Read Only files and do NOT require a graphics file, but each layer MUST contain a PROGRAM
(Header) block with the same name as the DefaultDBF.
To order a Blended Database,

1 In the Contents pane, highlight the required file name, i.e. T800_04 [FBD], or actset01 [SFC].
You may have to expand the file structure, click the ;+, to locate the file you require.
2 Select the highlighted layer name and drag to the layer it should follow.
You may also select other LIN Database files (.dbf) and drag to the layer it should follow.
Note
Auto generated layers are blended immediately after the Base Layer only.
3 Drop when the preceding layer is highlighted.

Import a Layer
A single complete Strategy is generally created using a number of blended layers. Each layer (.dbf) of a Database file is
indicated in a hierarchical style in the Configuration folder, which can be ordered appropriately.
This command reveals a dialog allowing you to search for the file you wish to include in the selected node if the Use
Blended Database command is selected, indicated by the tick.
To import a Layer,
1 In the Contents pane, open the Configuration folder. Highlight the required Database file, i.e. <filename> [FBD].
2 Select the highlighted file by right-clicking on the highlighted file name to reveal a menu.
3 Select Import Layer. An Open dialog appears, which lists files of the same type as the current file.
The imported file is copied to the specified instrument Database file and immediately opened. If another worksheet
is already open you will be requested to save it before the continuing with the import operation.
Note
An Imported File that has the same name as Files in the selected folder of the Contents pane displays an error message and are not imported.
Configure a PID Control Loop Strategy - Tutorial

To provide a basic introduction to what LINtools can achieve, use the following instructions to configure a PID control
loop strategy for a Visual Supervisor instrument, used for recording and visualization, connected to an I/O instrument,
used to control inputs and outputs in a plant/system.
The PID control loop is actually created in the two instruments, meaning that some blocks must be cached.
To configure a PID control loop strategy,
1 Place the Function blocks.
By placing the blocks on the worksheet, you are defining how the information will be processed through the
strategy.
2 Wire the Functions blocks.
By wiring the blocks together, you are defining the flow of information through the strategy.
Tip!
Use the filtering icons and drop-down menu on the picklist to ensure only the required data types are available when configuring
Variable Line tab parameters.
3 Edit the Function block fields.

By editing the required block fields, you are defining the limits applicable to the Strategy, that can be used to identify
and help diagnose problems that may occur in the strategy.
4 Test the Strategy.
By testing the Strategy, you are ensuring that PID control loop operates correctly.
HA263001U055
Work with function blocks

Place a Function block
To place a function block on the current worksheet:
1 To start placing function blocks, click the function Block toolbutton at the top of the window (or from the Make
menu, select Block...) to open up the Function Block Template Palette pane at the right of the window.
To open or close this palette at any time, from the View menu, select Function Block Template Palette.
2 In the palette, check that the Library is set to the appropriate target instrument. If necessary, select another target
from the pulldown Library menu, e.g. T940v1.1. A list of Header blocks supported by this target appears in the
palette. Each header block displays a head category symbol.
Note
With an empty worksheet, you cannot select a non-header function block.
There are three types of Header block (CONFIG blocks):

a Regular header block.
a Program header block.
a Monitor header block.
3 Click the required header block in the list, e.g. T940, to see help information on the block in the help pane below
the template palette.
4 To place the header block, either drag it onto the worksheet, or double-click it to load the cursor with the function
block, then position the loaded cursor on the worksheet and click to paste the function block down.
Note
An invisible grid determines the exact position of the pasted function block.
Tip!
To delete a function block, click on it once to highlight it, then click the PCs <Delete> key. To delete seve ral function blocks, multiple-
select them, then Delete as above.
5 To place other function blocks, click a function block category from the list at the left of the palette. A list of function
blocks in that category appears at the right of the palette.
Use the Template Palette tabs to change the blocks view

Note
A Strategy for the T2550 (Tactician) instrument must include one MOD_UIO block per I/O Module fitted in the instrument.
6 Place your chosen function block as described in step 4 - either by dragging or by loading the cursor.
Tip!
To place more than one instance of a function block via the loaded cursor, hold down the computer s <Ctrl> key as you paste the
function block down. This leaves the cursor still loaded and ready to paste more instances. Right -click the mouse to escape from this
mode.
Name a function block

To name a function block or group of blocks:
1 Start by highlighting the function block or group of function blocks required to be renamed.
2 Select the Rename command.
From the Editor window Edit menu, select Rename.
From the FBD sub-window, right-click on the function block (or any one of the selected function blocks) to
reveal a context menu. Select the Rename item to display a Rename dialog.
From the Find dialog, Block tab, right-click on the function block and select the Rename item to display a
Rename dialog.
3 If you have highlighted a single block only, you can simply type in a new function block name and click OK.
Alternatively, select a function block naming pattern from the pulldown menu in the dialog, then click OK.
If you are renaming a group of function blocks you should type in or select a suitable renaming pattern for the
whole group.
Note
The renaming process does not allow you to give invalid names to function blocks. You are advised of any problems via the Rename dialog, and asked
to select alternative names/patterns.
HA263001U055
Use the Find utility

In a large configuration it can be difficult to find a particular function block, text string, action, step, etc. This utility helps
you quickly locate a variety of objects.
To use the LINtools Find utility:
1 In the View menu click the Find item. The Find dialog appears, containing one or more tabbed pages,
depending on the context.
2 Click a tab to display the page you require
a Block page - finds function blocks.
a Field page - finds function block fields.
a Text page - finds text strings in Actions, comments, and ladder diagram fields.
an Action page - finds chart, ladder, and text Actions.
an Association page - finds Action associations.
a Step page - finds Sequence Steps.
a Tag page - finds Tags.
a Changes page - finds changes between the Strategy files on the Computer and the live Instrument.
Note
Some pages contain buttons that are identical to the commands available on the context menu.
Highlight a group of function blocks

You can select/highlight several function block in two ways:
<Ctrl> key selection
Click on the first function block in the group to highlight it. Then click further function blocks holding down the
computers <Ctrl> key to add them to the multiple selection.
Ring Selection
Position the cursor at one corner of an imaginary box surrounding the function blocks to be selected. Holding down
the left mouse button, drag out the box to enclose all the function blocks. Release the button to highlight the
function blocks.
Inspect fields in a function block
To inspect function block fields:
Double-click anywhere within the function block symbol (except over the template icon) to open the Object properties
pane at the foot of the worksheet. The white areas of the function block specification may be available for editing.
Tip!
You only need click the function block once if a pane is already open at the foot of the worksheet.
Specified Key field parameters of offline instruments only are displayed on a tooltip if the KeyFields toolbutton is
pressed or View > Show Key Fields is selected.
Existing Comment tab Text is displayed on a tooltip if the Show Comment Tooltip is enabled on the Editor tab in
the View > Options > Settings dialog.
Note
A Comment tab Text symbol in the upper right corner indicates that Comments are present.
HA263001U055
Inspect wire inputs to a field

To inspect a wired input to a function block field:
Inputs wired to fields are shown in the Block tab by an arrow to the left of the field name. Inputs to bitfields are
shown with a double arrow .
1 To trace the source of the input, right-click the arrow to display a menu.
2 Click the Goto Wire Source item. The function block sourcing the wire highlights and relocates to the centre of the
worksheet. The Block tab now displays the fields of the source function block.
Edit function block fields
To edit function block fields:
1 In the Object Properties Pane, select the Block page of the required function block.
2 For numeric and string fields, click once in the field to highlight it, then type in a new value to completely overwrite
the old one. Alternatively, double-click the field to insert a text cursor and use this to carry out additions or
deletions to the current value. Enter the new value by hitting the computers <Return> key.
Tip!
Double-click a field containing a text cursor to highlight all characters in the field, for replacement.
3 For menu fields (e.g. Mode), double-click the field to highlight it then pull down the menu of options. Select an item
then hit <Return> to enter it.
Tip!
With a menu field highlighted, type in the initial letter of the required option to select it quickly. If several options have the same initial
letter, typing the letter repeatedly cycles the selection round these options.
4 For bitfields and Alarms fields, click once to reveal a pane to the right of the function block specification pane, in
which you can edit the current values. Hit <Return> after each individual bit has been edited.
5 For the DBase field, double-click it to display a DBase dialog in which you can specify a remote function blocks
database and node address. Enter the new value by hitting OK.
To get help on an individual function block field:
Click on a field name or value and press <F1> to reveal a help window for that field.
Edit a function block's database
To edit a function blocks database:
1 Start by highlighting the function block or group of function blocks required to be edited.
2 Right-click on the function block (or any one of the selected function blocks) to reveal a context menu. Select the
Database item to display a DBase dialog.
3 Fill in the dialog, then click OK to enter the new data.
A cached function block displays a symbol in its lower left corner.
You can create a cached function block directly using drag-&-drop from another FBD.
Edit a function block's update rate
To edit a function blocks update rate:
1 Start by highlighting the function block or group of function blocks required to be edited.
2 Right-click on the function block (or any one of the selected blocks) to reveal a context menu. Select the Update
Rate item to display a Rate dialog.
3 Fill in the dialog, then click OK to enter the new data.
HA263001U055
Inspect a function block execution order

To inspect a function block execution order
Click the Order toolbutton to display the function block execution order (if available) as a set of numbered blue boxes
attached to the top right corner of each function block symbol. The numbering starts from 1.
In instruments with several tasks (e.g. T640), each Task has a separate and independent uniquely-coloured series of
execution order numbers, each starting from 1.
Grey-coloured numbers denote function blocks that have not yet been allocated to a Task, or that cannot for other
reasons show a meaningful execution order, e.g. cached function blocks.
Note
At runtime a T640 database puts all unallocated (task 0) function blocks into task 4, which may not be what was intended!
Create a cached function block

The purpose of using cached blocks is to provide communication of instrument data to another instrument.
It is recommended that
Wires are connected from the cached block to the block in the Local instrument database file.
To cache a function block from a Remote instrument database file:

1 Open Local instrument database file, .dbf.
2 Open the Remote instrument database file, .dbf.
3 In the Remote instrument database file, select the block, or several blocks, to be cached in the Local instrument
database file.
4 Drag these block from the Remote instrument database file, and place them in the Local instrument database file.
The block(s) are now cached, illustrated by the cached symbol.
Tip!
If the Local instrument database file is hidden on the desktop, drag the block(s) from the Remote instrument database file to hover
over the Local instrument database file in the taskbar. The Local instr ument database file will appear, allowing you to place the
block(s) from the Remote instrument database file.
Compound a group of function blocks

Several function blocks performing a single identifiable function may be advantageously grouped together into a
compound. This allows for easier re-use of the group of function blocks elsewhere in the strategy, and usually clarifies
the worksheet layout. The way the function blocks and wiring work is not affected by being in a compound function
block.
Note
The main (ROOT) FBD is itself a compound.
You can make a compound:

By creating an empty compound and then cutting and pasting function blocks into it, or
By creating an empty compound and then dragging and dropping function blocks into it, or
By first selecting some function blocks and then compounding them.
To cut-&-paste function blocks into an empty compound:
Note
Using cut-&-paste may break some of the function block wiring.
1 Click the Compound toolbutton (or pull down Make > Compound), then position the Compound cursor on the
worksheet and click left to paste it down.
The page number allocated to the compound shows in its lower left corner, and the new compound appears in
the worksheet 'Contents list.
2 To move function blocks into the compound, first highlight them, then right-click and select Cut from the context
menu.
3 Open up the compound by double-clicking it (or double-clicking its name in the Contents list). Then right-click in
the opened compound window and Paste down the function blocks.
Tip!
To see all opened worksheets at once, select Window > Tile Vertical or Tile Horizontal.
HA263001U055
To drag-&-drop function blocks into an empty compound:

Note
Using cut-&-paste may break some of the function block wiring.
1 Create an empty compound, as described in step 1 of the 'cut-&-paste method above.

2 Double-click the compound to open it, and position its window adjacent to the window containing the function
blocks you want to compound.
An easy way to do this is to select Window > Tile Vertical (or Horizontal).
3 Drag the function block(s) to be compounded into the open compound window and release the mouse button. The
dragged function blocks add to the compound, and any attached wiring remains intact.
To compound selected blocks:
1 Start by highlighting the function blocks you want to compound.
2 In the Edit menu, select Create Compound. The compound appears in the FBD, and its default name appears in
the Contents pane.
To name a compound:
1 Type a name for the compound into the Name field, visible in the Compound tab.
2 You can also edit the compound Type field if required.
The compounds Name, Type, Page number, and compound icon appear as shown:
To open and close a compound:

Open a compound to reveal its contents by double-clicking it in the worksheet.
To see external wiring into and out of the function blocks in the open compound, use the Editor tab of the Settings
dialog.
Close an open compound by clicking the Go Up toolbutton.
To delete a compound:
Highlight the compound and press the Delete button.
Add Comment tab text
Textual comment attached to a function block, step, or transition can be used to describe the purpose and action, or
any other information that may be helpful to control strategy developers. It can be configured to appear only when
selected or not at all, but the Comment tab Text symbol indicates that there is attached text.
To add Comment tab Text:
1 Double-click the object on the worksheet to see its Object Properties pane.
If necessary, click on the Comment tab to reveal the Comment text.
2 Click in the Comment tab to locate the text cursor and type in the text.
This is a What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG) tab.
HA263001U055
Import a configuration from another file

You may want to import a complete Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Function Block Diagram (FBD) configuration
from another file into the current worksheet window. This can save unnecessary repetition when the configuration you
are working on is similar to an existing one.
To import a configuration from another file:
1 From the editor window Edit menu, select Paste From File.
Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the current window and select Paste From File from the displayed
menu.
2 An Open dialog appears, which lists files of the same type as the current file.
For a LIN Database, the complete FBD layout is pasted down on the current worksheet window.
Note
Function blocks in the imported Database having the same names as function blocks in the current Database are imported, but their names are
automatically placed in "quotes" to force you to rename them.
For a LIN Sequence, the ROOT SFC is pasted down on the current worksheet, and all Actions associated
with Steps in the ROOT are also imported. You will see them listed in the Contents pane.
Note
Actions in the imported Sequence having the same names as actions in the current Sequence are not imported. Unassociated Actions are also not
imported.
4 The pasted-down layout may obscure part of the current layout. If necessary, while the imported layout is still
highlighted, drag it to a different position on the worksheet.
Wire the function blocks
Make wires
You can create two distinct types of 'wiring' using the Wire toolbutton, depending on which Editor you are in:
the LIN Database wiring - linking function blocks in a LIN Database.
the LIN Sequence wiring - linking the Steps in the Sequence..
Note
LIN Database wiring can also be made during Online Reconfiguration, and is indicated via the change of colour, unless configured otherwise by the
User.
HA263001U055
Create wiring between function blocks

Tip!
You can create and edit wires to and from fields displayed on the Blocks tab and Connections tab in the Object Properties pane using
the commands provided on the context menu.
To wire between block fields

It is recommended that
To keep network communication traffic to a minimum do NOT wire to cached function blocks.
All blocks in the primary control path should remain in the local database wherever possible to avoid complexity of consideri ng failure
modes.
1 Locate the cursor over the source Block category symbol, at the lower right corner of the function block. A
Database wire symbol appears below the regular arrow cursor.
For a compound, locate the cursor over the compound icon instead.
Do not open the compound!
2 Click the icon to reveal a picklist of available source fields for the connection. Fields with a ' in front contain
subfields. View these by clicking the ' , or double-clicking the fieldname.
Tip!
Close the picklist menu by pressing the computers' <Esc> key.
3 Double-click a source field. The menu closes and the cursor displays a single-wire symbol below it.
4 Now locate the cursor over any part of the destination block or compounds outline. A target symbol appears below
the cursor and a dashed line 'stretches from the source to the destination function block.
5 Click over the function block or compound to display a picklist menu of available destination fields. Double-click the
required destination field (or subfield) to close the menu and complete the wire connection.
Note
Closed loops. If a small red circle appears round a wire arrowhead, you have created a closed wiring loop. Use the Loopback facility to determine how
this loop executes.
6 If required, re-route or 'tidy up' the wire by dragging portions of it to new positions. You can move whole segments
of wire, or individual corners (which highlight as small black boxes).
Tip!
You may want to enlarge a part of the worksheet, i.e. to carry out function block wiring. Do this by clicking on a function b lock of
interest to highlight it, then click the Zoom in toolbutton at the top of the worksheet to zoom into the selected function block. The
Zoom out toolbutton reduces the view magnification.
Note
A short 'stub' of wire always remains adjacent to the function block symbol. This may be dragged to different positions but not removed. Wiring can
only be drawn vertically and horizontally.
Edit wiring between blocks

The Edit connection command on the context menu in the Connections tab is used to change the source (IN) or
destination (OUT) wired to/from the field after confirming that a break in the wire is accepted.
To edit a wire between blocks
1 Open the Object Properties pane and select the Connections tab to show the fields of the block.
2 Click the field that you want to change, and display the context menu.
3 Select the Edit connection command to display a picklist of all the blocks in the .dbf.
Tip!
Use the filtering icons and drop-down menu on the picklist to ensure only the required data types are available when configuring
Variable Line tab parameters.
4 Locate and expand the required block, then select the field. This displays a dialog.
5 Press Yes to confirm the break between the fields is accepted.
Note
The Undo command and Redo command can be used to reverse the last edit and reverse Undo command respectively.
HA263001U055
Inspect wiring connections

To inspect an existing wire:
1 Locate the cursor over the wire - which turns pink - and double-click it. A Connections tab appears at the foot of
the worksheet showing the source(s) in the first column and destination(s) in the second column of any wire(s) in
the connection.
You can use the Editor page of the Settings dialog to make a tooltip box appear showing the sources and
destinations in a highlighted wire.
2 If you want to force a 'break' in a looped wire, click the Loopback box to toggle its TRUE/FALSE value. With
Loopback TRUE, a black circle appears around the wires arrowhead, telling the block execution-order algorithm
where you prefer it to break the loop, i.e. that this function block input can use data that is one scan old.
What is a Loopback?
If a wire forms a closed loop between function blocks running in the same LIN Database (or assigned to the same user
task in a T600 database), one of the wires in the loop acquires a small red circle around its arrowhead, e.g.:
Function blocks in the LIN Database are updated at runtime in an automatically-determined order, designed to ensure
that the function block producing data at the source of a connection is updated before the function block that receives
this data. When a loop is formed, this rule cannot apply. One of the function blocks in the loop - the first one to be
updated at each scan - must use data from the preceding update scan of the user task, i.e. data that is one scan old.
You can inspect the function block execution order by clicking the Order toolbutton.
The connection going into this initially-updated function block is the one that is marked in red, to alert you to the
situation.
Note
If you add a wire that forms more than one loop, the corresponding number of red circles will appear.
Often, you will be happy with the function block execution order LINtools determines for a closed loop. But if the
function block shown with a red circled input is not the one you want updated first, you can 'break' the loop at another
point - i.e. re-define its 'beginning'.
To break a loop:
1 Click the wire going into the block you want to specify as the start of the loop. The wire highlights, and its
Connections tab appears.
2 In the Connections tab, click the Loopback checkbox to set it to TRUE. The selected wires arrowhead acquires a
black circle to show it has been manually selected as the start of the loop, and the red circle disappears.
Note
The black circle indicates to the target instrument that this function block input is permitted to use data that is one scan old, and the function block
update ordering will be calculated accordingly. A black circle does not force the data to be delayed, it just tells the function block execution-order
algorithm where you prefer it to break the loop. You can if you wish mark more than one wire in a loop with Loopback status, or mark wires that do not
at present contribute to loops.
HA263001U055
Delete a wire connection

You can delete an individual connection in a wire, or the whole wire bus.
To delete an individual connection in a wire
1 Click (or double-click) the wire to display its Connections tab.
2 Right-click the connections entry in the Connections tab to display a Delete Connection button, then click the
button.
To delete the whole wire bus
1 Locate the cursor over the wire - which turns pink - and click it once to highlight it.
Wire corners are marked with small black boxes - handles, used to re-route the wire.
2 Press the computers <Delete> key to delete the wire and all connections bussed within.
Tip!
To restore the deleted connection(s), click the Undo button.
Inspect a function block execution order

To inspect a function block execution order
Click the Order toolbutton to display the function block execution order (if available) as a set of numbered blue boxes
attached to the top right corner of each function block symbol. The numbering starts from 1.
In instruments with several tasks (e.g. T640), each Task has a separate and independent uniquely-coloured series of
execution order numbers, each starting from 1.
Grey-coloured numbers denote function blocks that have not yet been allocated to a Task, or that cannot for other
reasons show a meaningful execution order, e.g. cached function blocks.
Note
At runtime a T640 database puts all unallocated (task 0) function blocks into task 4, which may not be what was intended!
Create FBD Layout

To create a graphic function block layout from a block list view:
In the LIN Database Editor, select the Edit menu and then Create FBD layout. An auto-created Function Block
Diagram (FBD) appears.
Edit the layout and wiring if required.
Add text to the worksheet
Create and edit text items
This is used to insert and edit text items to the worksheet, but does not follow the same rules as the Comment tab Text.
To create textual items on the worksheet:
1 Click the Comment Text toolbutton (or pull down the Make menu and select Comment Text). Position the text
cursor on the worksheet and click to paste down a default text frame. It shows a 'No Text' legend, but is in fact
empty.
2 Double-click the highlighted text frame to display a free-format Text tab in the Object properties pane. Click in the
Text tab to locate the text cursor there and type in the required free-format text, which appears on the worksheet
auto-wrapped inside the text frame.
3 You can resize the text frame by highlighting it and dragging any of the handles.
4 You can drag the text frame to a new location on the worksheet.
HA263001U055
Save a LIN Database

Files to Be Downloaded dialog - example
This shows that only the t800_04\t800_04.dbf will be downloaded.
Save a LIN Database

Three files are generated when you save a LIN Database. They share the same root filename, but have different
extensions according to their function:
Database filename File Type
<filename>.dbf runtime source file
<filename>.dtf comment text file
<filename>.grf graphics layout file
You can save the LIN Database to disk at any time during its configuration.
Note
When saving a LIN Database these three files are combined as one file and stored in the Instrument folder.
To save a Database to its existing path/filename:

1 To save the LIN Database to its existing path/filename, click the Save toolbutton (or use the File > Save pulldown).
Note
The LIN Database cannot be saved if function blocks have "NoName". Use the " character in the Find dialog to locate any "NoName" function blocks.
2 This will display a warning that the LIN Database file has been modified, and requests confirmation to rebuild the
Strategy. Modifications include I/O and Tags changes.
Yes, will rebuild the Strategy.
No, will cancel the save command.
To save a LIN Database to a new path/filename:
1 To save the LIN Database to a new path/filename, select File > Save As..., and specify the new path/filename in
the Save As dialog.
LINtools automatic backup on save
HA263001U055
Test the Strategy

A simple way to get an idea of how the strategy will work in a Instrument, without having to configure and connect up
the I/O Subsystem, is to use a SIM block to simulate plant behaviour. In the slightly modified strategy, a SIM block
simulates a process variable and its response to the changing control output.
To simplify these instructions, the I/O blocks can be ignored. The I/O blocks are applicable to a system that includes an
I/O Subsystem. However, by locally adding the LOOP_PID block and wiring the SIM block in the Visual Supervisor
database as specified, a load can be simulated, and used to produce an output.
To test the strategy,
1 Delete the wire between the AI_UIO 'PV block and the LOOP_PID block.
To do this, simply click on the wire to highlight it then press the <delete> key.
2 Place a SIM simulation block on the worksheet.
SIM blocks are in the Control function block category.
3 Wire the SIM.OP field into the LOOP_PID.PV input, and LOOP_PID.OP into SIM.PV.
This forms a closed loop, indicated by the small red circle.
4 Name the SIM block, 'sim, and edit both its NoiseMax and Lag1 fields to 25.0.
Note
The SIM block generates pseudo-random noise at its output OP, which simulates a varying process variable input to the LOOP_PID control blocks PV
field. The LOOP_PID blocks resulting control output OP is fed back to the SIM blocks PV input, where it is delayed and added to noise to simulate the
plants response to the control input.
Tip!
Increasing the value in the NoiseMax and Lag1 fields will assert Alarms.
5 Save the modified strategy.
HA263001U055
Monitor remote databases

Create a Monitor Database from scratch
To create a Monitor Database from scratch:
1 Select Start > Programs > > LINtools Engineering Studio.

2 Click the New toolbutton. This reveals the File Types available in the New editing session dialog.
3 Select the Monitor Database option and press OK confirm.
An empty Database Monitor window is displayed, with just the PC_MON Monitor header block at the top left corner
of the FBD sub-window.
4 Now, place function blocks on the worksheet, corresponding to the function blocks you want to monitor. Give each
block the same Name as their remote equivalents, and set the DBase fields to the appropriate remote Database -
i.e. make them cached function blocks.
As soon as this is done for a function block, it starts monitoring the corresponding remote function block.
Note
You cannot wire up function blocks in a Monitor Database, and - apart from Name and DBase - it is pointless to configure any field values. These are
updated from the remote fields.
5 Configure and save any Watch Windows if required, to monitor groups of selected field values.
6 If required for future use, save the Monitor Database.
Note
To open a saved Monitor Database for monitoring use - i.e. in a monitor window - right-click its icon or filename and select Monitor from the context
menu.
Simply double-clicking the Monitor Database (or clicking Open in its context menu) opens it in a Database
Editor window, where it cannot be used to monitor a remote database.
To start the Online Monitoring
The Online Monitoring of a LIN Database can be started at any time during this process
1 Select the Connect toolbutton (or select Online > Monitor) to display the Port Select dialog appears.
2 Select the server computer and server port used to communicate with the remote LIN Database(s) on the
connected network.
A message appears telling you that an attachment is being made to the LINOPC Server - to allow remote
communications to occur.
HA263001U055
Create a Monitor Database from an existing database

The simplest means of creating a Monitor database is via the Convert to Monitor Database command. This temporarily
converts the currently active Database file to a Monitor Database file without changing the file format.
To create a Monitor Database from an existing database:
1 Right-click the icon representing the existing Database file, and select Monitor in New Window in the menu.
Alternatively, if you have already accessed the Database Editor, click the Connect toolbutton (or select Online
> Monitor).
2 A Port Select dialog may appear. Use the dialog to specify which server computer and server port is to be used to
communicate with the remote database(s) on the connected network.
If you are working within Project, the port may already be set-up in the network folder properties, and so this
dialog may not appear.
3 A message appears telling you that an attachment is being made to the LIN OPC Server - to allow remote
communications to occur.
If you are not working within Project, a Node Address dialog then appears, asking you to specify the node of
the remote instrument.
If the LIN Database file lacks embedded valid target directory information - e.g. it is outside the context of a
Project instrument folder, a Select Target Library dialog appears. You can use the dialog to specify the target
instrument function block template set for the Monitor Database.
4 The Database Editor window converts to a Database Monitor window, containing the function blocks and (non-
functioning) wiring that were in the original database. But the original header block is replaced with a PC_MON
monitor header block, and all the other function blocks are now cached function blocks.
5 You can place more function blocks in the Monitor Database, or delete existing function blocks, if you wish. If you
want the added function blocks to monitor remote function blocks, give them the same Names as their remote
equivalents, and set their DBase fields to the appropriate remote database - i.e. make them cached function
blocks as well.
As soon as this is done for a function block, it starts monitoring the corresponding remote function block.
Note
You cannot wire up function blocks in a Monitor Database. Field values are updated from the corresponding remote fields.
Beware
Editing field values in the Monitor Database writes the new values directly to the running remote database.
6 Configure and save any Watch Windows if required, to monitor groups of selected field values.
7 To save the Monitor Database simply close the main window or use the File > Save Special > Save Monitor
Database command.
Note
To open a saved Monitor Database for monitoring use - i.e. in a monitor window - right-click its icon or filename and select Monitor from the context
menu.
If required for future use, use the File > Save Special > Save Monitor Database pulldown.
Note
You cannot save the database unless all function blocks have been validly named. LINtools warns you of this situation.
Simply double-clicking the Monitor Database (or clicking Open in its context menu) opens it in a Database
Editor window, where it cannot be used to monitor a remote database.
To access the Database Monitor from the Sequence Monitor:
This is the simplest method if you are already monitoring an associated Sequence.
In the Sequence Action Monitor window, pull down the Online menu and select View Database.
If you are not working within Project, a Node Address dialog then appears, asking you to specify the node of the
remote instrument. Hit OK to open the Database Monitor window.
HA263001U055
Open the Monitor window

To access the Monitor window:
In the Start > Programs > Eurotherm > LINtools Engineering Studio.
1 Press the Open toolbutton to reveal the Open dialog.
2 Select the Monitor Database (.udm) file type from the Files of Type pulldown.
3 A Port Select dialog opens. Use this to specify the server and port to be used to communicate with a remote LIN
Database or Sequence.
4 The message "Making attachments to LIN OPC Server. Please wait" appears.
After a delay a LIN Monitor Database window appears, displaying the LIN Monitor Database or Sequence files
required for remote monitoring.
Monitor an instrument Database in a new Window
You may want to monitor an instrument Database file in a separate window. This can save unnecessary delay as this
command can open a new Monitor Database window for the required Database file.
Note
Opening a new Monitor Database window for each layer allows you to monitor numerous layers at the same time.
To monitor an instrument Database in a new window,

1 In the Contents pane, highlight the required Database (.dbf) file name, i.e. T800_04 [FBD].
You may have to expand the networks, click the +, to locate the file you require.
3 Click Monitor in New Window to open and display the selected file in a separate Monitor Database window.
Convert to Monitor Database
The simplest means of creating a Monitor database is using the Convert to Monitor Database command. This
temporarily converts the currently active Database file without changing the file format.
This can be edited by adding or removing further cached blocks ( ), and then finally saved in this form, as a .udm file
via
File > Save Special > Save Monitor Database
Use the Watch window
The Watch Window facility lets you select up to 100 remote LIN Database fields for continuous monitoring (and
editing) in a special window. Only one watch window can be displayed in the Monitor window at a time. But you can
configure and save individual Watch windows, and open any one of them up as the currently-displayed window.
To open/close the current Watch window:
Click the Watch toolbutton (or select View > Watch).
The current Watch window opens, or closes if already open.
You can also close the Watch window by right-clicking its banner and selecting Hide.
Adding a field to the current Watch window
You can add a field to the current watch window:
directly via the Watch window
from the required block's Block tab field
via the Find Field dialog
An attachment to the remote node is formed for a cached block field. The added field name appears under the Name
column of the Watch window, its value under the Value column, and a Description (if any) under the Description
column.
Note
The Watch window opens (if not already open) when a field is added to it.
HA263001U055
To remove a field from the current Watch window:

In the watch window, right-click on the field and select Remove Watch from the context menu.
To move and copy fields in the current Watch window:
Locate the cursor over the field to be moved and hold down the left mouse button. Drag the field to the row where you
want it moved, then release the mouse button to 'paste it in position.
To leave the original field in position - i.e. make a copy - hold down the PCs <Ctrl> key before you release the
mouse button.
To highlight the block associated with a watched field:
Right-click the field in the watch window and select Open Block.
The associated block highlights in the FBD, and its Block tab appears.
To change the displayed resolution of a watched analogue field:
Right-click anywhere in the field's row and click High Resolution to toggle the items display resolution.
By default the watch window displays floating-point numbers with a precision similar to the instrument front-panel
displays. Selecting high resolution format displays them with maximum precision (7 significant figures).
To edit the value of a watched field:
Numeric fields
Click a numeric Value field once to insert an edit cursor, and edit the field to the required value. Double-clicking
highlights the whole field.
Enumerated fields
Click the field to see a picklist, and select the required value from the menu.
Note
When you click an editable field a yellow 'tooltip appears over the Units cell showing the fields current value.
To clear the current Watch window:

Right-click the window's banner and select Clear from the menu.
Alternatively, select Online > Watch Window Setup > Clear.
Note
The current watch window clears - whether open or closed.
To save the current Watch window setup:

1 If the current Watch window is open, right-click in its banner and select Save... from the menu.
Alternatively, or if no watch window is open, in the Online > Watch Window Setup > Save....
2 Fill in the Save (Watch window) dialog.
To open a saved Watch window:
3 If the current Watch window is open, right-click its banner and select Open... from the menu. (Alternatively, or if no
watch window is open, select Online > Watch Window Setup > Open....)
4 Fill in the Open (Watch window) dialog.
Redo All Attachments
If attachments to any viewed points fail, the Redo All Attachments option attempts to restore all the attachments.
Example
If you access the LIN Monitor Database when an instrument is disconnected from the network, no attachment will be made even a fter
subsequent reconnection - until this option is selected.
To redo all attachments:

Select Online > Watch Window Setup > Redo All Attachments.
HA263001U055
Open / Save Watch Window dialogs

Use these dialogs to open a new/current Watch window, or to save the current watch window.
To access the dialogs, right-click in the Watch window banner and select Open... or Save..., respectively, from the
menu.
Alternatively - if no Watch window is open - in the Online menu, select Watch Window Setup > Open... or Save....
To open a saved Watch window:
In the Open dialog, click on a Watch window setup icon (or type its name in the Name box) and hit Open. The dialog
closes and the selected watch window opens, replacing any currently-opened window.
To save the current Watch window setup:
In the Save dialog, type a name for the window in the Name box and hit Save. The dialog closes and the current watch
window is saved under the specified name.
Choose a Block to Monitor
Use this dialog to select an Action block type and its associated LIN Action to monitor in the Sequence Action Monitor
window.
To access the dialog:
In the Monitor window, in the Online pulldown menu select View Action Block to show the Choose a Block to
Monitor dialog.
Use the dialog
The dialog lists all the Action-type function blocks in the LIN Database by name - and their corresponding Action names
and the filename(s) of the .sto Action file(s) in which they are stored.
Click an action function block name to highlight it, then click OK. The Action (Structured Text or Ladder Diagram)
appears in a sub-window, ready for monitoring.
Add a Block tab field to the Watch Window
This item is active only in Connect (monitor) mode.
To add a Block tab field to the Watch Window:

Right-click anywhere on the field to reveal a context menu - see above - then click the Add to Watch Window item.
When first adding a field to the Watch window, the Units of the field are copied into the Description. This field will not
change dynamically when editing the units of the field in the database.
Tip!
To update the Description field remove the field from the Watch window and exit Connect mode. Change the Units field
while offline and download the file to the instrument. Then add the field to the Watch window again.
Using the Watch Window
HA263001U055
Add a field directly to the Watch Window
To add a field directly to the currently-open watch window:
1 Double-click a Name cell in the row where you want the new field added. A button appears at the right of the
selected cell (see picture).
2 Click the button to see a menu of available fields, arranged in Windows tree style. Double-click a field. The
menu closes and the selected field appears in the watch window.
You can also overwrite existing fields in this way.
Note
If the Options.CommsDis bit of the Instrument Configuration (Header) block is set TRUE, UNCONFIRMED field writes not permitted. UNCONFIRMED
field writes result from connections into cached blocks. Values written using LINtools while online and connected to the instrument are CONFIRMED
field writes and are therefore unaffected by this bit.
When first adding a field to the Watch window, the Units of the field are copied into the Description. This field will not
change dynamically when editing the units of the field in the database.
Tip!
To update the Description field remove the field from the Watch window and exit Connect mode. Change the Units field
while offline and download the file to the instrument. Then add the field to the Watch window again.
Add an ST block field to the Watch Window

When monitoring a Sequence, you can add LIN function block fields - appearing as Structured Text in Transition or
Action windows - to the Watch Window.
To add an ST block field to the Watch Window:

1 Using the text cursor, highlight the complete field - including the block name but excluding any ST operators or
other characters.
2 Right-click in the window and click Add to Watch in the menu. The selected field appears in the Watch Window.
HA263001U055
Scan for changed parameters

While monitoring a remotely running LIN Database you can scan the Database to see if any field values have changed
from their initial cold-start values. If they have, you can capture selected changed values and upload them to the LIN
Database, .dbf, overwriting the original values.
The database from which the Monitor Database was created is the one that is overwritten.
To scan a Monitored Database:
1 In the Database Monitor window, from the Online pulldown menu select Scan For Changed Parameters. A
message tells you that the scan has started.
2 When the scan has finished a Changed Parameters window opens, listing the fields that have changed with their
cold start and live values - see image below:
3 Review the changed fields and select those you want to upload by clicking their checkboxes. Then click the Update
File button to start the upload. Progress is reported in an information pane, which tells you the number of
successfully updated fields, and also warns you if any fields have failed the update process.
Each updated field is verified against the snapshot live value. A write-fail occurs if the live and written values are
not the same for any reason - e.g. if the fields are read-only.
4 If all selected fields are written successfully, the Changed Parameters window closes. Otherwise it remains open
with the already written fields deleted from the list.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Due to the time it takes for all the live values to be scanned in the remote instrument, the values are not all recorded at the same time. Parameter
scanning is most useful for fields that change slowly, e.g. tuning parameters.
HA263001U055
Save a LIN Monitor Database

Three files are generated when you save a Monitor Database. They share the same root filename, but have different
<filename>.udm runtime source file
<filename>.udt comment text file
<filename>.udg graphics layout file
You can save the Database to disk at any time during its configuration.
Note
When saving a LIN Monitor Database these three files are combined as one file and stored in the Instrument folder.
To save a Monitor Database:

1 To save the Monitor Database to its existing path/filename, use the File > Save Special > Save Monitor Database
pulldown.
Note
You cannot save the Database unless all blocks have been validly named. LINtools warns you of this situation.
2 To save the Monitor Database to a new path/filename, select File > Save Special > Save Monitor Database, and
specify the new path/filename in the Save As dialog.
Automatic backup on save
HA263001U055
Configure the I/O

Note
The I/O Configurator is only available if the current file is part of a T2550 project, or a Tactician Header block is present. The I/O configuration will not
be displayed when in Monitor mode.
To configure the I/O, follow these stages.

Stages occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied, especially when editing an existing I/O instrument. Function
blocks (including I/O blocks), wiring, and parameter values can be added, modified, or deleted at any time using
LINtools' comprehensive toolkit.
Tip!
If the I/O Node already exists on the n etwork this process can be avoided by using the Match Hardware command. This command
attaches to the target instrument to create a database with blocks that match the hardware fitted exactly.
1 For a new I/O configuration, open the I/O configurator in the Contents tab to display the I/O table sub-window.
Alternatively, with the Content tab in Tree view, press the until the I/O sub-window is displayed.
Note
If editing an existing I/O instrument the I/O table cells and Content list I/O slots may already be complete, but can be deleted using the appropriate
Delete command from the context-sensitive menu.
Tip!
Pressing the PCs <Ctrl-F6> keys cycles the open sub-windows.
2 In the I/O table sub-window, configure the I/O Node.

i Enter the I/O Node Name in the appropriate cell.
ii Double-click the I/O Node Type cell and select the required I/O Node Type from the drop-down list.
3 Then, specify each of the I/O modules required.
As each of the following steps is completed, Module icons appear in the Contents list. This indicates that an I/O Slot
compound containing a MOD_UIO block has been successfully created.
i Enter the Module Names in the appropriate slot cells.
ii Double-click the corresponding Type cell and select the required Module Type from the drop-down list.
If the I/O hardware is present on the network, use the Match Hardware command to automatically complete
the I/O table.
Tip!
Existing Module configurations can be moved or copied (using the Ctrl key) by dragging and dropping a required Module in to a
different slot.
4 Now, configure the required Module Channels.

As each of the following steps is completed, icons appear in the Contents tab. This indicates that the specified
number of Channel blocks have been successfully created in the I/O Slot compound.
i Double-click a configured Module Slot number to reveal a list of available channels.
ii Enter the Channel Names in the appropriate channel cells.
Right click to display a context-sensitive menu and select Autocreate Channel blocks to create individual
Channel blocks or,
Right-click the Module Slot number to display a context-sensitive menu and select Autocreate Channel
blocks to create all Channel blocks.
Tip!
To move an existing I/O Channel to another location, change the MOD_UIO blocks SiteNo or Channel field as required .
5 Finally, save the I/O Configuration to disk.
HA263001U055
Use the I/O table

This table is used create the LINtools blocks of the I/O hardware. From this table the following I/O Node blocks can be
configured.
Modules
Channels
Note
The I/O Node parameters are automatically entered when the Header block is created.
To set up the I/O table:

Set up the I/O Node parameters
1 Right-click in any cell or column heading, to display a context-sensitive edit menu. E.g. :
2 Select one of the menu items.

Set up the I/O Module parameters
HA263001U055
Set up the I/O Channel parameters


Entering data into the I/O table
Entering Node data
1 Enter an appropriate name in the I/O table Name cell. This can be up to 16 characters long.
Entering Module data
1 Next, enter an appropriate name in the Module Name cell.
Create the Channel blocks.
2 Select the required Module Type from the drop-down menu in the Module Type cell.
Entering Channel data
1 To display the Channel configuration, simply double-click the required Module slot number. This will display the
Channel configuration of the selected Module Type.
2 Create the Channel Blocks in the Channel Name cell. This can be up to 16 characters long.
Note
Inappropriate blocks and nodes can be removed from the database, simply by selecting the required Delete command.
Editing data in a I/O table cell

Click once on the cell to insert a text cursor at the clicked point. Use this to edit the text.
Double-click the cell to highlight all its characters. These can now be deleted or overtyped.
Double-click the cell in the Type column to access the Node or Module types. Click the drop-down icon to reveal
available type options.
Note
Additional read only columns are displayed when editing Online I/O. The Name Running in DB column shows the name of the Database currently
running in the instrument, the Type in Running DB shows the Type currently running in the instrument. The Hardware Snapshot comparison cells
shows the results of comparing a Hardware Snapshot and the I/O Node at this address. If any items differ from the running database, the Online
Reconfigure symbol appears in the first column.
HA263001U055
Create Modules
Enter the Module Names
This field is used for editing the name of the Module fitted at the selected slot.
To edit the Module name
1 Double-click the Module name cell.
Click again to locate the text cursor if editing an existing Module name.
2 Enter maximum 16 characters for the name of the Module.
Tip!
Using the Module Type and Slot Number (AI4S01) as the Module name may assist when browsing the network.
Select the Module Type

This field is used for selecting the type of Module fitted at the selected slot.
To select the Module type
1 Double-click the Module Type cell that corresponds to the slot being edited.
2 Click the Picklist icon to reveal available Module type options.
3 Select the Module Type that matches the I/O Instrument hardware.
Create Channel blocks
The required Channel blocks can be created by 2 methods, either by
using the Autocreate Channel Blocks command.
typing the Channel Block name in the appropriate cell.
Tip!
Using the Slot Number then Channel Number, and Address (03M03_00) as the Channel name may assist when browsing the network.
This is the naming convention of automatically created Channel names.
To automatically create all the Channel blocks for the Module

1 Right-click the Module Slot number cell to display the context-sensitive menu.
2 Select the Autocreate Channel Blocks command. As the command comes to a conclusion the Module icon in the
Contents tab expands to reveal the Channel Blocks.
To automatically create an individual Channel blocks for the Module
1 Right-click the Channel Name cell to display the context-sensitive menu.
2 Select the Autocreate Channel Blocks command. As the command comes to a conclusion the Module icon in the
Contents tab expands to reveal the Channel Blocks.
To manually create an individual Channel blocks for the Module
1 Double-click the required Channel Name cell.
2 Type in a maximum of 16 characters.
HA263001U055
Configure Tags
Use the Tag table
This window is used create Tags and Aliases for Function Blocks and Ladder Programs on the function block instance.
A TagName can be created to alias any block, field or subfield.
To set-up, or validate a Tag table:
1 Right-click in any cell or column heading, to display a context-sensitive edit menu, e.g.,

Entering data into the Tag table
1 Enter an appropriate name in the TagName cells. This can be up to 16 characters long.
Tip!
When entering TagNames it may be quicker to use the Cut, Copy and Paste commands from the context -sensitive menu.
All Tags can be removed from the Database file by selecting the Clear ALL Entries command from the context
menu.
2 Next, double-click the cell in the Alias for column to access the Database blocks, etc.. Click the button to
reveal available Database name options.
Use standard Windows navigation to locate the block, field or subfield.
Tip!
An Alias can be entered as a placeholder, but this will cause syntax errors until TagName cell is complete. This will then cause a
specific name error the Alias For cell that can be cleared by selecting the required block, field, or subfield.
3 If the Alias is accepted by LINtools, the appropriate DataType is automatically entered in this field.
4 If required, enter a brief description for this Tag configuration in the Comment cell.
5 Finally, check this I/O instruments Tag configuration is correct by selecting Validate from the context-sensitive
menu.
Note
Any incomplete Tag reference is indicated by a blue Tag icon preceding the TagName.
Editing data in a Tag table cell

Double-click the cell to open it, then
click once to insert a text cursor at the clicked point. Use this to edit the text.
double-click the cell to highlight all its characters. These can now be deleted or overtyped.
double-click in the Alias for cell to access the Database blocks PickList, etc.. Click the button to reveal
available Database name options.
HA263001U055
Copying Tag rows to the clipboard

You can select one or more rows in the Tag table and copy them to the clipboard.
1 Locate the cursor on the row select button at
the left-hand end of the Tag row you want to
copy. A small arrow appears over the button.
2 Click the mouse to highlight the complete row.
To select a block of adjacent rows, dont
release the mouse button but hold it
down and drag up or down the table to
highlight more rows as required. Then release the mouse button.
3 Copy the highlighted row(s) to the clipboard using <Ctrl+C>.
Alternatively, right-click then select Copy from the context-sensitive menu - or use the Edit > Copy menu.
4 Paste the rows into the Tag table and edit as required.
Alternatively, paste as tab-separated text into a suitable text editor or word processor (e.g. Notepad).
Note
Duplicated TagNames pointing to identical blocks, fields, or subfields cause a error, indicated as red underline Tag Name text.
Create Tags and Aliasses

Enter a Tag Name
To enter a Tag Name in the Tag table:
1 Double-click the first available TagName cell.
Note
Generating Block Tags is not permitted.
2 Type in an appropriate name for the block, field or subfield you are about to alias.
By using the Settings dialog a TagName of upto either 8 or 16 characters can be configured. A TagName that
exceeds the usual 8 characters for a function block is indicated by a Block Tag (yellow Tag icon including a slightly
obscured square), and will inhibit (read-only) the Alias for field.
Note
Any incomplete Tag reference is indicated by a blue Tag icon in the column preceding the TagName. A successful Tag reference to a function block
field/subfield is indicated by a yellow Tag icon.
Select the Alias For

To select what the TagName is an alias for:
1 Double-click the cell in the Alias for column to access the LIN Database blocks, etc..
Note
Editing the alias for a Block Tag is not permitted. This is indicated by the colour change of the Block Tags Alias For field.
2 Click the button to reveal available LIN Database name options.

Use standard Windows navigation to locate the block, field, or subfield.
Tip!
An Alias can also be typed into the cell as a placeholder.
Edit the DataType

This DataType field shows the type of data recorded at the location indicated in the Alias for field. It cannot be
edited, however it will change if the Alias for field is changed.
Enter Comments
Comments are used to describe the purpose, or any other information that may be helpful to control strategy
developers.
To select what the Tag Name is an alias for:
1 Double-click the appropriate Comments cell to access the Database blocks, etc..
2 Type in any appropriate information as required.
HA263001U055
Configure sequences
Create a LIN Sequence file
The best place to create a LIN Sequence file is via the Contents Pane or using the File > Get me started command,
but it can also be created using the New LINtools file toolbutton or in the Project environment. That is, in the Explorer
view of the Project file, inside the instrument folder that will run the LIN Database.
Note
You can also create a new Sequence file elsewhere - e.g. on the desktop - but the file will need additional configuring to tell it the instrument type, etc.
To create the new LIN Sequence file:

1 To create a Specific Sequence file, select New > LIN Sequence. For a Generic Sequence, select New > LIN
Generic Sequence. A file is created with a default name. The filename extension is .sdb for a Specific Sequence,
or .uqd for a Generic Sequence.
Alternatively, select File > Get me started and select the create new LINtools file radio button. Context related
information that is displayed in the dynamic help window can be used to help decide the file type required.
2 Rename the LIN Sequence file if required.
Access the LIN Sequence Editor
Remember
The 'Get me started' wizard can assist when opening files that have recently been edited.
To access the Sequence Editor:

1 Double-click the sequence file or its icon to launch the Sequence Editor.
The Sequence Editor can also be launched be selecting the Open Sequence file (.sdb) command from the
context menu in the LIN Database, accessed from the .
Note
If the file specified in the FileName field of the LIN Database does not exist, it is automatically created as the Editor opens.
2 If the Sequence is already opened, the default DBF will automatically be chosen and LINtools will load the LIN
Database that was last used with this Sequence. If a LIN Database is not associated with the Sequence the Load
Database for Sequence Editing session dialog is displayed. Use this to open the LIN Database that you want
the Sequence to target. Select the required .dbf file and Open it.
Note
If you dont want to open a target database right now, click the dialogs Cancel button. You can always open one later, which will make configuring
specific Actions and Transitions much easier.
If accessing a Generic Sequence, you may be told No map file loaded and asked if you want to load one.
Click No if you are creating a new Generic Sequence, or if no relevant map exists. A new blank Map file will be
created, that can then be edited and saved.
Click Yes if a map exists that you want to use, e.g. for creating a Specific Sequence from a Generic Sequence.
Locate and open the map using the Load Map for Sequence Editing session dialog that appears.
3 The LIN Sequence Editor window now appears, displaying the Contents pane (empty for a new Sequence). The
Contents tab at the left of the window lists this worksheet as 'ROOT (Chart)' (FBD in List View), I/O (I/O
configuration including appropriate slots), and Tags.
Note
'Chart' refers to the Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
Customise the default colour coding
HA263001U055
Associate a Sequence with a Database

To make a Sequence operate in conjunction with a Database, you need to include a special function block in the
Database that associates it with the Sequence.
The function block required is the SFC_CON block (in the BATCH function block category). It includes two fields
(FileName and Filepath) that specify the Sequence to be loaded and run by the Database. Each Sequence to be run
must have its own SFC_CON block configured in the Database.
In multi-tasking instruments, e.g. T2550 and T940(X), each SFC_CON block (the interface between the Database and
the Sequence) and any blocks interfacing with a Sequence must always operate on User Task 4.
Note
The FileName field shows a page icon ( ) indicating a different file must be edited to ensure the correct operation of the Strategy.

Note
Configure steps
Place a step
To place a Sequence Step:
1 To place a Step, click the Step toolbutton at the top of the window (or pull down Make > Step) to 'load' the cursor
with a Step symbol.
2 Click the cursor on the worksheet to paste down a default (auto-numbered) Step. The highlighted Step is marked
with a Step wire symbol in its lower right corner.
Note
An invisible grid helps you align the pasted Steps.
Tip!
To place a series of steps via the loaded cursor, hold down the computer's <Ctrl> key as you paste a step down. This leaves the cursor
still loaded and ready to paste more steps.
To delete a step, click on it once to highlight it, then right -click and select Delete in the context menu. To delete several steps,
multiple-select them, then Delete as above.
HA263001U055
Configure a step name & initial state

To configure the name of a step and its initial state:
1 Double-click anywhere within the step symbol (except
over the 'wire' symbol) to open the Step tab at the foot of
the worksheet. The white areas are editable.
2 Click the white Name field and type in a name for the
step. Hit <Return> to enter the new name.
3 Click the Initial checkbox to toggle the setting between
TRUE and FALSE. 'TRUE' makes the step an initial step,
i.e. one that becomes active when the Sequence starts.
Associate an Action with a Step
When a Sequence step becomes active, each Action associated with the Step is executed in the order listed in the
Step tab on the Object properties pane, and with a timing specified by the action's qualifier.
To associate an Action with a Step:
1 Double-click the step to see the Step tab, normally at the
foot of the worksheet. Select the Step tab if necessary.
An empty white box appears at the foot of the Action
column in the Step tab.
If this is the first Action you are associating with this
Step, the white box is the only item seen in the table.
2 Double-click the white box and click on an existing Action
from the pulldown menu. The selected Action is added to
the table with a default Qualifier. The Type entry
automatically shows the type of Action selected (Text,
Ladder, or Chart) and is read-only.
3 Edit the default Action Qualifier entry if required, by clicking
it and selecting from the dropdown menu. Hit <Return> to
enter your choice.
4 For qualifiers needing a time specification, a default entry appears in the Duration column with the format T#.... Edit
the time value by double-clicking the entry to display the Step Time Setup dialog.
5 Type in as required the Days, Hours, Minutes, and Seconds values, and click OK to enter them. You can type
valid integer and/or decimal numbers into the fields; they are automatically rationalised and displayed in the most
economic format when entered.
6 To associate further Actions with the step, repeat steps 3 to 6 as required.
Note
The associated Actions are initiated in the order displayed in the Step tab,
starting at the top-most Action. The execution timing of each Action also
depends on its action qualifier.
7 To alter the execution order of the Actions, remove an

association from the Step, or open up an Action
window, right-click on the Actions row to display a
context menu, then click the required item:
Note
All Action Associations can be hidden or shown by pressing the Action
Associations toolbutton or View > Show Action Associations.
HA263001U055
Action Qualifiers
When you associate an Action with a LIN Sequence Step, you select a suitable Action Qualifier to specify how the
Action will be timed when the Step activates.
You can also associate a LIN Action with its controlling Action-type function block via an Action Qualifier.
The possible action qualifiers are:
P (Initial) - The Action runs once only, at the start of the step's activity.
N (Normal) - The Action runs repeatedly as long as the step is active.
L (Limited) - The Action runs repeatedly for a limited time from the start of the step's activity.
D (Delayed) - The Action runs repeatedly after a delay until the end of the step's activity.
E (Event) - The Action runs once only after a delay.
F (Final) - The Action runs once only, at the end of the step's activity.
S (Set) - The Action starts running at the start of the step's activity, and is left running repeatedly.
R (Reset) - The Action stops running at the start of the step's activity, and is left halted.

HA263001U055
Import a configuration from another file

You may want to import a complete Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Function Block Diagram (FBD) configuration
from another file into the current worksheet window. This can save unnecessary repetition when the configuration you
are working on is similar to an existing one.
To import a configuration from another file:
1 From the editor window Edit menu, select Paste From File.
Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the current window and select Paste From File from the displayed
menu.
2 An Open dialog appears, which lists files of the same type as the current file.
For a LIN Database, the complete FBD layout is pasted down on the current worksheet window.
Note
Function blocks in the imported Database having the same names as function blocks in the current Database are imported, but their names are
automatically placed in "quotes" to force you to rename them.
For a LIN Sequence, the ROOT SFC is pasted down on the current worksheet, and all Actions associated
with Steps in the ROOT are also imported. You will see them listed in the Contents pane.
Note
Actions in the imported Sequence having the same names as actions in the current Sequence are not imported. Unassociated Actions are also not
imported.
4 The pasted-down layout may obscure part of the current layout. If necessary, while the imported layout is still
highlighted, drag it to a different position on the worksheet.
Sequence wiring operations
Types of Sequence wiring
There are three ways in which you can configure a wire:
Step-to-Step wiring
Step-to-Transition wiring - to create a convergence
Transition-to-Step wiring - to create a divergence
Step-to-Transition wiring
This may be used to create a convergence.
To draw a wire from a Step to a Transition:
1 Locate the cursor over the source step's Step wire symbol. A Target symbol appears below the cursor.
2 Click the symbol then locate the cursor over the destination Transition bar. A Target symbol appears below the
cursor.
3 Click the Transition bar to complete the wire. A black double-line appears above the Transition to show
convergence. You can drag the highlighted Transition bar to a different position on the double-line if required.
4 If required, edit, re-route, or tidy up the wire.
Note
Although Transition bars are created automatically when you draw a wire from one step to another, you can place an isolated Transition bar on the SFC
using the Transition toolbutton.
HA263001U055
Edit Sequence wiring

Editing wiring layout
Re-route or 'tidy up' the wire by dragging portions of it to new positions. You can move whole segments of wire, or
individual corners (which highlight as small black boxes).
Note
A short 'stub' of wire always remains adjacent to the Step symbol. This may be dragged to different positions but not removed. Wiring can only be
drawn vertically and horizontally.
Deleting a wire segment

1 Click the wire segment to highlight it.
2 Right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
Deleting a Transition plus wires
1 Click the Transition bar to highlight it.
2 Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. The Transition and its wire(s) are deleted.
Configure Transitions
Create a Transition expression
1 In the SFC worksheet, double-click on a Transition bar to display a Transition tab in the Object properties pane,
normally at the foot of the worksheet. The Transition tab is entitled with the source and destination steps linked by
the Transition - e.g. STEP1 to STEP2.
Note
Pre-configured Transitions have brown bar symbols. When configured the bars appear black.
2 Type in the Structured Text expression for the Transition. You can right-click in the pane to see a context menu of
items to help you write valid Transition text.
Alternatively, to create the Transition as a Ladder Diagram, select Convert to Ladder from the context menu.
A single-rung ladder diagram appears in the main pane, with an output coil linked to the notional field
STEP<m> to STEP<n>. Configure this rung with the required elements to yield a TRUE/FALSE result.
Note
Coil Variable and Type values cannot be edited.
3 To check the validity of the Transition expression you can compile the Structured Text in the Transition.
Alternatively you can leave this to be done automatically when you save the LIN Sequence.
Note
All Transition Text can be hidden or shown on the Worksheet by pressing the Transition Text toolbutton or View > Show Transition Text.
Compiling Structured Text

HA263001U055
Create a Sequence Action

To create a new LIN Sequence Action:
1 Pull down the Make menu and select Action (or click the Make Action toolbutton). A Make Action dialog appears.
2 Type in a Name for the action and click the Chart, Structured Text, or Ladder Diagram radio button according to
the type of Action required. Click OK to close the dialog and open a new Action window. The Action now appears
in the Contents tab with its characteristic icon (in Tree view) or its page number (in Index view).
3 For a Text action, type in the required Structured Text statements. For a Chart action, configure as for the ROOT
(main) chart. For a Ladder diagram action, add rungs and ladder elements to specify the required Action.
For a Generic Sequence, Actions contain Generic names configured in the Map table Generic names cells
instead of specific Database function blocks and fields.
Tip!
Pressing the PCs <F9> key displays the Variable Picklist. A filtered Picklist may be expanded to show all available variable s by
pressing the <F8>.
4 You can now check the validity of the Sequence Action by running the Compile function.
Edit a Sequence Action
To edit a LIN Sequence Action
1 Double-click the LIN Sequence Action in the Contents tab to display its Action window.
2 Edit the LIN Sequence Action in the same way as you configure new Actions, by typing and entering Structured
Text in the Action window (Text actions), or by editing the SFC (Chart actions), or the Ladder Diagram (Ladder
actions).
Compile an Action or Transition
Compiling an Action or Sequence Transition converts it to object code. If LINtools encounters any errors during an
attempted compilation it reports them in a compiling pane. So compiling is a good way to check the validity of your
Structured Text or ladder diagrams.
To compile a single Action or Transition:
1 Right-click in the Action window or transition window and select the Compile [] item from the menu. A new pane
appears reporting the results of the compiling operation. Any errors found are listed.
Alternatively, in the Edit menu, click Compile [].
Note
Compiling does not save the object code - only File > Save does. But if you do save the Sequence or actions file you will see a compile report for all the
Actions in the file.
2 Double-click an error line in the report to highlight in the action window or transition window the portion of
structured text or ladder diagram that needs correcting. (The relevant Action window or Transition window appears
if not already on view.)
Sometimes in a ladder diagram an error relating to the whole rung (e.g. Bad label) highlights the end of the
rung. Similarly, an error due to a fault in the body of the diagram (e.g. Unresolved jump) is only highlighted at
the last item in the diagram.
3 When all errors have been corrected, recompiling the Action or Transition produces a 'No Errors' report.
Note
If you are configuring a Generic Sequence and your map is not completed, you can ignore any Cant find this name errors. You will correct these when
you come to make a Specific Sequence from this Generic Sequence. But you should try to correct any Structured Text syntax errors now.
HA263001U055
Convert sequences
Create a Specific from a Generic Sequence
You create a Specific Sequence from a Generic Sequence by converting the generic database block and field names
into their specific equivalents.
You use a map to determine the specific block/field that each generic block/field will convert to.
To create a Specific Sequence from a Generic Sequence:
1 Open up the LIN Sequence worksheet for the existing Generic Sequence you want to convert.
2 Access the Map pane.
If you want to start with a completely new empty map, select File > New Generic Map. An Error dialog
appears asking if you want to add extra names to the map. Hit Yes to insert all the generic names in the
Sequence into the Generic column of the map.
If you want to make use of an existing map, select File > Open Generic Map, then locate and open a map.
If the chosen map contains any syntax errors, a dialog tells you this. Otherwise, Validate the loaded map. An
Error dialog may appear asking if you want to add extra names to the map. Hit Yes to insert all the missing
generic names in the Sequence into the Generic column of the map.
3 Fill in any blank specific names in the map tables Field column.
4 Validate the map and correct any errors detected. Repeat this until all map errors have been removed, and you
see the Map validated OK message.
Note
The validation process often helps you by highlighting a map table cell with a syntax error.
5 Select File > Build Specific SFC File to display a Build Specific SFC File dialog. Type in a root .sdb filename in
the File name box and click Save.
6 The new Specific Sequence is compiled and saved as three files. Correct any errors the compile operation reveals.
Create a Generic from a Specific Sequence
You create a Generic Sequence from a Specific Sequence by converting the specific database block and field names
into their generic equivalents.
You use a map to determine the generic block/field that each specific block/field will convert to.
To create a Generic Sequence from a Specific Sequence:
1 Open the LIN Sequence worksheet for the existing Specific Sequence you want to convert.
2 Access the Map pane.
If you want to start with a completely new empty map, select File > New Generic Map. An Error dialog
appears asking if you want to add extra names to the map. Click Yes to insert all the specific fields in the
Sequence into the Field column of the map.
If you want to make use of an existing map, select File > Open Generic Map, then locate and open a map.
If the chosen map contains any syntax errors, a dialog tells you this. Otherwise, Validate the loaded map. An
Error dialog may appear asking if you want to add extra names to the map. Hit Yes to insert all the missing
specific fields in the Sequence into the Field column of the map
3 Fill in any blank generic names in the map tables Generic column.
4 Validate the map and correct any errors detected. Repeat this until all map errors have been removed, and you
see the Map validated OK message.
Note
The validation process often helps you by highlighting a map table cell with a syntax error.
5 Select File > Build Generic SFC File to displays a Build Generic SFC File dialog. Type in a root .uqd filename in
the File name box and click Save.
6 The new Generic Sequence is compiled and saved as three files. Correct any errors the compile operation reveals.
HA263001U055
Save a LIN Sequence

Three files are generated when you save a Sequence. They share the same root filename, but have different
Specific Sequence filename Generic Sequence filename File Type
<filename>.sdb <filename>.uqd Runtime & Structure Text source file.
<filename>.sdt <filename>.uqt Comment text file
<filename>.sgx <filename>.uqg Graphics (SFC) layout file
You can save the Sequence to disk at any time during its configuration.
To save a LIN Sequence:
1 To save the LIN Sequence to its existing path/filename, click the Save toolbutton (or use the File > Save
pulldown).
To save the LIN Sequence to a new path/filename, select File > Save As.
If you have edited the current map, you are asked Do you want to save the current Map? Click Yes, and
specify a map filename in the Save Map File dialog.
Note
If you are saving a Generic Sequence, the Map file has a .uqm extension. It is manipulated using the File > Open, Save, New or Validate Generic Map
commands.
2 The LIN Sequence is automatically compiled as well as saved, and a compiling report is displayed in a separate
pane.
3 You can trace and correct any errors using the compiling report displayed in the Compile Results pane.
Note
If you are saving a Generic Sequence and your map is not completed, you can ignore any Cant find this name errors. You will correct these when you
come to make a Specific Sequence from this Generic Sequence. But you should try to correct any Structured Text syntax errors now.
Compiling a Sequence
Saving a LIN Database
HA263001U055
Monitor remote sequences

Access the Sequence Action Monitor
You can access the Sequence Monitor in several ways, including direct access from the Database file icon associated
with the Sequence, or indirectly from the Database Monitor window.
Tip!
If you access the monitor within a Project instrument file, you will be able to skip several of the following steps. This is b ecause
LINtools will already know a lot about the Database, and have all the necessary files to hand.
To access the Sequence Action Monitor from the associated Database icon:
1 Right-click the icon of the Database file associated with the Sequence, and select SFC Monitor from the context
menu.
Note
If the Database Monitor window is already open, you can open a Sequence for monitoring directly from there.
If LINtools does not know the server port communicating with the LIN Sequence, a Port Select dialog appears,
enabling you to select a server and port to access the LIN Sequence to be monitored.
If LINtools is not already attached to the LIN OPC server, a "Making attachment to LIN OPC Server..."
message appears.
If LINtools does not know the node address of the remote instrument, a Node Address dialog appears, in
which you specify the node of the instrument running the Database associated with the Sequence.
2 A Choose a Sequence to Monitor dialog appears. Use this dialog to select the Sequence you want to monitor.
If LINtools cannot find the associated Sequence file (.sdb), a message tells you that the Sequence file selected
could not be loaded. In this case, hit OK to clear the message. An Open dialog then appears, letting you locate the
missing .sdb file. Do this, and click Open in the dialog.
3 The Sequence Action Monitor window opens, with the root SFC sub-window on display.
To access the Sequence Action Monitor from the associated Monitor Database:
This is the simplest method if you are already monitoring the Database.
In the Database Monitor window, pull down the Online menu and select View Sequence. The Choose a Sequence
to Monitor dialog appears. Click on the SFC_CON block controlling the Sequence you want to monitor, and hit OK to
open up the selected Sequence for monitoring.
To open the Sequence Monitor in a new window, tick the New window checkbox before you hit OK. You may be
asked to select the relevant LINtools port and also the instruments' node address - see steps 2 and 4 above.
Sequence monitoring operations
In the Sequence Monitors chart (SFC) window, you can operate on individual components in the remote Sequence as
follows:
See the currently-active step(s)
The currently-active Sequence Steps are highlighted with a green diamond symbol.
Hold Steps in the active state
Right-clicking on a Step reveals two states:
Hold - 'Holds the corresponding step in the remote Sequence. When a 'held step becomes active it stays active
indefinitely - even if the following Transition becomes TRUE - and so holds up the Sequence. A held step displays a
held symbol.
Normal - Returns a remote 'held step to normal.
Force Transitions to be TRUE or FALSE
Right-clicking on a Transition symbol reveals three menu items:
Hold - Forces the remote Transition expression to behave as if it were FALSE (even if TRUE), and so blocks the
remote Sequence from moving on to the next step(s). The Transition symbol turns red to show it is on 'hold - .
Continue - Forces the remote Transition expression to behave as if it were TRUE (even if FALSE), and so forces
the remote Sequence to move immediately on to the next step(s). The Transition bar symbol changes to a green
arrowhead to show it is on 'continue -
Normal - Returns a remote 'hold or 'continue Transition to normal. 'Normal Transition symbols are black.
HA263001U055
Sequence Control operations

From the Sequence Monitor window or while online to the instrument, you can control a remotely-running Sequence.
To reset, stop, hold, or run the remote Sequence:
In the Sequence Monitor windows Online menu, select Sequence. A menu of four items appears:
Reset - Stops all step activity and initialises the remote Sequence, i.e. all actions halt, and step timers are stopped
and zeroed. Highlighted steps on the display de-highlight. The associated remote SFC_CON function block's Run
parameter sets to FALSE, and Init sets TRUE.
Note
Values written to the database by the Sequence are not un-written.
Stop - Stops all remote step activity, i.e. all actions halt, and step timers are frozen (stopped but not zeroed).
Highlighted steps on the display remain so. (The remote SFC_CON function block's Run and Init parameters both
set FALSE.)
Hold - Disables all Transitions in the entire remote Sequence, i.e. they act as if FALSE, so blocking any progress.
Active steps remain so indefinitely, i.e. step timers and actions continue running, and timed qualifiers remain
effective. (The remote SFC_CON block's Hold and Run parameters set TRUE.)
Run - Restarts the remote Sequence from where it stopped, which is from the beginning if it was reset. (Run resets
to TRUE).
Monitor a Ladder Diagram Sequence Action
In the Sequence Action Monitor you can inspect and monitor Ladder Diagram Sequence Actions.
To do this:
1 In the LIN Sequence Action Monitor, locate the required action in the Contents pane and double-click it. The
Ladder Diagram representing the selected Action opens as a window in the main Monitor display.
Alternatively, use the Find utility to locate the required Action and open its window.
2 In the Ladder Diagram, (double-)click any element to open its Element tab, normally at the foot of the window. This
shows the elements parameters - Rung Label, Variable, Type - as read-only values.
3 Hover the cursor over or near an element in the Ladder Diagram to reveal a yellow 'tooltip box indicating the
attached Database point and its current value - e.g. pulse.In = FALSE.
4 Look at the colours of the different contact and coil elements in the Ladder Diagram. These tell you the current
TRUE/FALSE state of the associated variable.

Choose a Sequence to Monitor
Use this dialog to select a LIN Sequence to monitor in the Sequence Monitor window.
In the Monitor window, in the Online pulldown menu select View Sequence to display the Choose a Sequence to
Monitor dialog.
Use the dialog
The dialog lists all the SFC_CON blocks by name - and their corresponding Sequence filenames.
Highlight the SFC_CON block associated with the LIN Sequence to be monitored and hit OK.
Note
SFC_CON block names listed in the dialog are only those present in the Monitor Database. If there are no Sequences running on the selected node, a
"No Sequences Loaded" error message appears.
HA263001U055
Configure LIN Actions

Create a LIN Actions file
The best place to create an Action file is within the Contents Pane, but it can also be created using the New LINtools
file toolbutton or in the Project environment. That is, in the Explorer view of the Project file, inside the instrument folder
that will run the LIN Database.
You can also create a new Actions file elsewhere - e.g. on the desktop - but you will then need to select a Template
Library every time you open it, and the actions will not be associated with their target instrument.
Note
This first Action has been automatically made for use with an ACTION block template. If you want this Action file to contain methods for blocks from
another template library, delete the Action from Contents pane, change the instrument library in the template palette and Make new actions for
templates chosen from the selected template palette.
To create the LIN Action file:

1 Select the either Folder displayed in the Contents pane and right-click to reveal a context menu.
Alternatively, use the New LINtools file toolbutton to run the New LINtools file wizard.
2 Select New and the LIN Action required. An Add new file to configuration dialog appears.
3 Enter a concise filename. The extension is added automatically as defined by the selected File type.
4 This new Action file is created as a Structured Text window.
Now, any further LIN Actions can be created as either Structured Text or Ladder Diagrams using the ACTION
or DIGACT blocks.
5 Edit the Actions file as required.
Tip!
If the strategy does not require an Action associated with the ACTION block template, remember to delete the Action file before
creating a new Action for the templates chosen from the defined template palette.
Access the LIN Action Editor

To access the LIN Action Editor:
1 Double-click the Action file or its icon to launch the LINtools Engineering Studio with all Action Editor functions
available.
2 The Action Editor window now appears, displaying the Contents pane, including a Structured Text file ('untitled
(ACTION)' for a new Action) and all previously created ACTION or DIGACT configurations.

Make a LIN Action
To make a new LIN Action using the Action item:
Note
If the Function Block Template Palette is open, start at step 3.
1 Right-click in the Action Editors Contents pane - or click the Make icon - to display a menu.
2 Click Action. The Function Block Template Palette opens, listing available action function block types.
In the template palette, double-click the action function block type that is to run the new LIN Action. A Make
Action (block type) dialog appears.
3 Type in a name for the new action and press OK. The new blank Action window opens - ready to be configured -
and a new entry appears in the Contents pane.
Monitor a LIN Action
In the Sequence Action Monitor you can inspect and monitor LIN Actions (Structured Text or Ladder Diagram).
To do this:
1 In the Sequence Action Monitor, pull down the Online menu and select View Action Block to show the Choose
a Block to Monitor dialog. This lists the available LIN Actions by Action block name, Action name, and Action
filename.
2 Use the dialog to select an Action block and view its associated Action (Structured Text or Ladder Diagram).
HA263001U055
Monitor a Ladder Diagram Transition

In the Sequence Action Monitor you can inspect and monitor Ladder Diagram Transitions.
To do this:
1 In the LIN Sequence Action Monitor, locate the required Transition in the contents pane and double-click it.
In the Contents pane, Ladder Diagram Transitions appear as sub-windows of the ROOT chart, e.g.
Alternatively, double-click directly on the Transition bar in the chart - if you know where it is.
The single-rung Ladder Diagram representing the selected Transition opens up as a window in the main Monitor
display.
2 In the Ladder Diagram, (double-)click any element to open its Element tab, normally at the foot of the window. This
shows the elements parameters - Rung Label, Variable, Type - as read-only values.
3 Hover the cursor over or near an element in the Ladder Diagram to reveal a yellow 'tooltip box indicating the
attached Database point and its current value - e.g. pulse.In = FALSE.
4 Look at the colours of the different contact and coil elements in the Ladder Diagram. These tell you the current
TRUE/FALSE state of the associated variable.

Note
HA263001U055
Save a LIN Action

Save a LIN Action
When you carry out a save operation in the LIN Action Editor, LINtools saves all the Actions in the current configuration
as a pair of files - called filename.stx, and filename.sto.
filename is the Action file name you enter during the save.
Note
All the current Actions are saved at once as a group - not just the last one edited or created. If you want to exclude any current Actions from the save,
you must first delete them.
<filename>.stx Textual version of all Actions in the file.
<filename>.sto Compiled version of all Actions in the file.
The .stx file stores the as-entered structured text for all the Actions that were in the configuration when you carried out
the save. This file should be kept in case you wish to recall and edit an Action via the Action Editor later on, but is not
itself needed by the target instrument.
The .sto file contains the compiled (machine-readable) version of all the text Actions in the .stx file. This file must be
downloaded to the target instrument, where it will be needed at runtime to execute the Actions enabled by the special
'Action-type' blocks in the control Database.
Note
When saving a LIN Action these two files are combined and stored in the Configuration folder.
To save LIN Actions:

1 To save the Action files to their existing path/filename, click the Save toolbutton (or use the File > Save pulldown).
2 To save the Action files to a new path/filename, select File > Save As, and enter a new filename.
3 The Actions are automatically compiled as well as saved, and a Compile Results report is displayed in a separate
pane.
4 Trace and correct any errors using the compile report, and then re-save the files.
Note
You can if you wish leave error-correction to a later editing session. The Actions are saved regardless.
HA263001U055
Edit a Ladder diagram

Edit a Ladder Diagram
You configure a Ladder Diagram in either:
the Sequence Editor, if the Ladder Diagram is to be a Sequence Action or Transition, or
the Action Editor, if the Ladder Diagram is to be a LIN Action..
In either case the Ladder Diagram configuration procedure is the same.
To configure a Ladder Diagram:
1 Open the appropriate editor.
For LIN Actions you will be asked to select an Action block type from the Template Palette. Selecting one
displays the Make Action dialog directly - see next step.
2 If necessary, click the Make Action toolbutton to start the Make Action wizard and display the Make Action dialog.
3 Select the required Action type radio button and complete each section of the Wizard. Enter a Name for the action.
A blank Ladder Diagram editing window is displayed.
Note
Additional information is displayed on the right of the dialog if the Help checkbox is set .
4 Select a Ladder element by clicking on one of the eight Ladder Diagram toolbuttons, found usually at the top-right
of the editor window. This loads the cursor with the selected element (as shown by the cursor format adopted).
If you are selecting the Function toolbutton you may be asked to select a function type from the Template
Palette (Functions tab). Double-click the required function to load the cursor.
5 Locate the loaded cursor in the Ladder Diagram editor window, where you want the element to be inserted. A red
insertion marker appears if your chosen location is valid. Otherwise, a grey insertion marker appears with a
prohibited sign. Click to paste down the element, which automatically connects into any existing elements.
If you want the cursor to remain loaded with the current element, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you paste.
6 Continue building up the Ladder Diagram by selecting and placing elements and associating Variables.
You can drag existing elements see image below - to new positions in the diagram (hold down the left mouse
button), delete, cut, copy, and paste them via the Edit menu or standard Windows shortcuts, and undo/redo
edits using the standard toolbuttons.
HA263001U055
Parameterising the Ladder Diagram

Placed elements appear initially in their default format, and associated with the default 'NoName' field. Each element
and rung in the Diagram must be edited and associated with a database field as appropriate.
To parameterise a Ladder Diagram
1 Click (or double-click) an element to reveal the appropriate elements details, in the Object properties pane. The
white fields are editable.
2 If required - this is optional - type in a label for the rung in the Rung Label box. Labels appear in blue at the left of
the diagram above the relevant rung.
Labels act as targets for jump instructions. They can have up to 16 characters comprising 0-9, A-Z, a-z, and _
only.
The label - _End - appears after the last rung by default.
3 Associate the element with a Variable (for contacts, coils, and variables only).
Double-click the Variable field to see a button. Click the icon to display a Picklist of all available fields, then
double-click the required field. The Picklist closes and the selected field appears in the Variable box.
Alternatively, select the required Variable from the Variables tab on the Template Palette and move (drag)
to the element requiring an associated element.
4 To edit the elements 'type (contacts and coils only), click the Type white box and select a type from the pulldown
menu. You will see the elements icon change in the Ladder Diagram.
Associate a Variable
Variables can be associated with,
Ladder Diagrams elements in either a LIN Sequence or a LIN Action
an alias for a Generic name in the Sequence Map table
Structured Text of an action
LIN Reference in the Profibus Configurator
To associate Variables
1 Open the Palette. Press View > Palette to reveal the Palette pane.
2 Select the required Variable from the Variables pane on the Template Palette and move (drag) to the element/LIN
Reference requiring the variable.
Note
The Variable can also be typed directly in a field, using the block.field convention.
In a LIN Sequence double-click the Variable field in the Object Properties Pane to display the available
Variables.
Tip!
Pressing the PCs <F9> key displays the Variable picklist in a LIN Sequence. A filtered picklist may be expanded to show all available
variables by pressing the <F8>.
Note
Generic Sequence steps are displayed when associating Variables to Ladder Diagram elements.
In the Map table, double-click an Alias for... field to enter it into the Map table. Subfield context menus are
handled in the same way.
Save a Ladder Diagram
If your Ladder Diagram is a LIN Action, created in the Action Editor, save it like any other LIN Action.
Saving a LIN Action

If your Ladder Diagram is a Sequence Action or Transition, created in the Sequence Editor, save it like any other
Sequence Action or Transition.
Saving a LIN Sequence
HA263001U055

Note
Note
HA263001U055
Configure Structured Text

Edit Structured Text
Assuming the Structured Text window is open, right-clicking in a Structured Text Action window or Transition tab
reveals a context menu that allows configuration of .
To edit Structured Text (ST)
1 Associate a Variable to define the database block field to
be configured using the Variable command.
2 Select required default Structured Text syntax. Use the
required command to insert the default syntax at the
selected position to help you write Structured Text.
Tip!
Use these commands to prevent syntax errors.
3 Compile the Structured Text to check the validity of

Structured Text and report any errors in a Compile
Results pane
Associate a Variable
Variables can be associated with,
Ladder Diagrams elements in either a LIN Sequence or a
LIN Action
an alias for a Generic name in the Sequence Map table
Structured Text of an action
LIN Reference in the Profibus Configurator
To associate Variables
1 Open the Palette. Press View > Palette to reveal the Palette pane.
2 Select the required Variable from the Variables pane on the Template Palette and move (drag) to the element/LIN
Reference requiring the variable.
Note
The Variable can also be typed directly in a field, using the block.field convention.
In a LIN Sequence double-click the Variable field in the Object Properties Pane to display the available
Variables.
Tip!
Pressing the PCs <F9> key displays the Variable picklist in a LIN Sequence. A filtered picklist may be expanded to show a ll available
variables by pressing the <F8>.
Note
Generic Sequence steps are displayed when associating Variables to Ladder Diagram elements.
In the Map table, double-click an Alias for... field to enter it into the Map table. Subfield context menus are
handled in the same way.
Compile Structured Text
The Compile operation checks the validity of Structured Text and reports any errors in a Compile Results pane. Each
transition or action containing an error is listed on a separate line of the report, together with the (first instance of)
offending text, and the type of error.
Tip!
Select View > Compile Report to show and hide the Compile Results pane as requ ired.
You can compile Structured Text in several ways:

You can compile the Structured Text in an individual Action or Transition.
Compiling an Action or Transition

For Transitions, you can compile all the Transitions in an SFC in one operation.
Compiling all SFC Transitions

All the Structured Text in the Sequence is automatically compiled whenever you Save the Sequence, or select File
> Compile.
HA263001U055
Note
Note
Compile all Transitions in an SFC

To compile all the Transitions in an SFC:
1 In the SFC worksheet, right-click anywhere to reveal a context menu. Select the Compile [name] (Chart) item.
The results of the compilation are listed in a report pane.
2 Double-click an error line in the report to display the invalid transition text in a separate Transition tab, where it can
be corrected.
3 When all errors have been corrected, recompiling the SFC produces a 'No Errors' report.
Note
HA263001U055
Use the Online Reconfiguration

Online Reconfiguration - Overview
Online Reconfiguration is used for editing an existing Strategy currently operating in a Live LIN instrument. It allows
the user to make changes from individual block parameters to a complete Strategy change while the plant/system is still
running, therefore, reducing the overall downtime of the plant/system.
The functions for Online Reconfiguration are similar to editing an offline Strategy, but additional functions permit the
user to Try (test) the changes in the Live Instrument before all changes are finally Applied or discarded if the changes
are not required. If changes exist between the Live LIN Instrument and the LIN Database on the Computer, the Find
dialog can be used to locate the changes that match the configured criteria.
The Connect feature allows communications with a specific Instrument. Once LINtools has connected to the LIN
instrument, it can be reconfigured or will allow a limited degree of control via the Instrument Status dialog.
Connection to a Live LIN Instrument is via the Online Reconfiguration toolbutton on the toolbar or Online >
Reconfigure in the Menu bar. However this function is enhanced with the addition on the following toolbuttons.
Try toolbutton
Note
Operating this toolbutton again while Trying the strategy cancels the operation, returning to the Online Reconfiguration mode with all existing values.
Apply toolbutton
Note
Edited values will be discarded using the Online > Discard Changes command.
Connect to an Instrument
Connecting to an Instrument allows the Live Instrument Strategy files to be captured in readiness for monitoring or
reconfiguration. Once the Strategy files have been captured, they can be edited either online, only after the Online
Reconfiguration button is pressed, or offline, and then downloaded to the LIN Instrument. When connected selected
Watch lists can be created and saved via the Online > Watch Window Setup command, allowing specific LIN
Database block fields to be monitored.
This feature is useful when the system already exists, but the Instrument Folder in the Project is yet to be generated.
Note
If the LIN Database is already open in LINtools that will be used. If the LIN Database file is not open, the Strategy will be captured in memory from the
target LIN Instrument.
To connect to a 'Live Instrument

1 With LINtools open and without a LIN Database file, .dbf, press the Connect toolbutton.
Alternatively, select File > Get me started to run the wizard, then select the Connect Online without files
radio button.
Both offer the chance to locate the required Instrument by selecting the Network and then the Instrument itself.
Note
If a database is not open in LINtools, a dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to specify the Port and Node of the instrument required.
2 Once connected, as indicated by the Connect watermark and Connection Indicator, pressing the Online
Reconfiguration toolbutton allows the 'Live Instrument Strategy to be edited, but pressing the Connect toolbutton
again, the captured Strategy files can be edited offline.
Note
Pressing the Save toolbutton, after first disconnecting the 'live Instrument will save the Strategy files to the current Project.
HA263001U055
Access the Online Reconfiguration

Online reconfiguration permits the user to make changes to the database of a Strategy that exists on the Instrument
currently active in the plant/system.
To access the Online Reconfiguration:
1 With LINtools Engineering Studio open, press the Online Reconfiguration toolbutton.
Alternatively, select Online > Reconfigure from the Menu bar, or use select File > Get me started to offer the
option to connect to a LIN Instrument that is not open.
Note
While accessing a 'live LIN Instrument, LINtools will illuminate a small indicator in the lower right corner of the Status bar ( ).
2 The message 'Making attachments to LIN OPC Server. Please wait' appears.
3 After a delay the FBD including any Online Reconfiguration changes appear with a online reconfiguration
watermark indicating that LINtools is currently online.
Note
Under certain LINtools customised colour schemes, watermarks can become obscured. The intensity of the watermark can be adjusted by changing
the Watermark intensity value via the View > Options > Colour dialog.
At this point the LINtools program compares the instruments latest structural edits to assess the Alignment Options.
If differences between the LINtools and target instrument Strategy exist a prompt appears. Press OK to
continue.
4 Selecting Apply updates both the LINtools and target instrument Strategy with all current Online Reconfiguration
changes. If Discard is selected the changes are ignored and LINtools will show the target Instrument LIN
Database.
Pressing the Online Reconfiguration toolbutton again, reverts to offline editing.
Reconfigure an online strategy - Overview
The following stages may occasionally overlap, and their order can be varied when editing an existing Strategy.
Function blocks, wiring, parameter values and Sequences can be added, modified, or deleted at any time using the
Online Reconfiguration facility of this comprehensive toolkit.
Note
The Online Reconfiguration uses the same commands as the LIN Database Editor with the addition of the commands mentioned in the section.
To Reconfigure a Strategy, follow these stages.

1 Open and ensure the required LIN Database is the focus (selected file).
Note
If the Strategy files does not currently exist on the Computer use the Connect toolbutton to locate the required instrument on a network.
2 Press the Online Reconfiguration toolbutton.

Alternatively, select Online > Reconfigure from the menu bar.
At this point the LINtools program compares the instruments latest structural edits to assess the Alignment Options.
If configuration changes exist, a prompt appears describing the Online Reconfiguration options available.
3 Edit the required strategy as appropriate. Use the same LIN Database instructions for editing both Offline and
Online strategies.
i To be able to instantly undo changes to parameters, first Unlink the function block.
Beware
When a block is unlinked, not all data from a target instrument Strategy is captured. Unlinking the block replaces the existing block with the Tentative
unlinked block containing the Cold Start values.
If live target instrument data is required use the Scan for changed parameters command.
ii Make any changes required. These will automatically become Tentative changes, and will not yet affect the
target instrument strategy.
iii Press the Try toolbutton to test the target instrument Strategy.
If satisfied with the changes, press the Apply toolbutton to ensure both LINtools and Target instrument
strategies are the same.
Note
The physical properties of I/O blocks can only be changed after the block has been Unlinked. Once changes are complete the block can be Re-linked.
4 Try the changes in the target instrument. When the attempts at achieving a satisfactory strategy are complete,
Untry the changes.
HA263001U055
Tip!
Tries can continue while LINtools is Offline by exiting Online Reconfiguration without selecting the Untry command.
However, when next entering Online Reconfiguration, the previously existing changes appear after a prompt warning of changes to the
instrument strategy.
Repeat the previous instructions until satisfied with the complete control strategy.
Note
Edited values may be discarded using the Online > Discard Changes command.
5 When satisfied, Apply all the changes to the live instrument Strategy. This will ensure all previously pending
changes are saved directly to the live instrument Strategy and the LINtools strategy.
Try an Online Strategy
Trying an Online Reconfigured Strategy simply tests all pending changes in the live instrument Strategy. The results of
the values entered in the Strategy can be assessed before applying them to the system.
Note
Under certain LINtools customised colour schemes, watermarks can become obscured. The intensity of the watermark can be adjusted by changing
1 With Online Reconfiguration operating and all required values changed as appropriate, press the Try toolbutton.
The Try command is indicated by a change of watermark after momentarily displaying a Try Changes dialog.
Tip!
Tries can continue while LINtools is Offline by exiting On line Reconfiguration without selecting the Untry command.
When next entering Online Reconfiguration appropriate prompts appear warning of changes to the instrument strategy and reques ting
a user to select which strategy is required to operate in the instru ment.
Pressing the Try toolbutton again, cancels the Try operation after momentarily displaying an Untry Changes
dialog. The watermark reverts to the Online Reconfiguration indicator.

Apply an Online Strategy
Applying an Online Reconfigured Strategy confirms that all pending changes to a live Strategy in the system are as the
user requested.
Beware
Applying Online Reconfiguration changes is irreversible. You MUST always be SURE that the required Strategy is operating as required.
Failure to do so may result in serious consequences in the system after applying Online Reconfiguration changes.
1 With Online Reconfiguration operating and all values changed as appropriate, press the Apply toolbutton.
The Apply command momentarily displays an Apply Changes dialog.
2 Finally the Save dialog appears.
Saving Online Reconfiguration edits will have different results depending on the current state of LINtools.
The target instrument will not upload the changes if the Online Reconfiguration is cancelled without Trying.
Therefore a Save dialog is not displayed and the PC version will remain unchanged.
The target instrument will upload the changes if the Online Reconfiguration is cancelled after Trying. However,
this does display the Save dialog, which results in either,
Selecting No from the Save dialog will not save the changes to the PC.
Selecting Yes from the Save dialog will save the changes to the PC and display the Build window revealing
any errors or warnings that have been created when making the target instrument Online Reconfiguration
changes.
Beware
LINtools Online Reconfiguration only performs a local Build. It is recommended that a full build is performed to ensure all errors and warnings are
displayed in the Build window.
Failure to do so may result in for example, the deletion of cached blocks referenced in other instruments, or which is being displayed on a User Screen.
HA263001U055
Unlink a block
Unlinking an Online block permits the configuration of block parameters that cannot be changed in the live block, such
as,
parameters often used at start up of the database
parameters used to configure other sub-systems
physical properties of I/O blocks, i.e. the Module Type, SiteNo and Channel fields
An Online block can be unlinked either,
Automatically
Any blocks saved in the LINtools Strategy differing from the instrument strategy are detected when the Online
Reconfiguration toolbutton is pressed. These become unlinked blocks and are considered as Offline.
Manually
While performing Online Reconfiguration, the user can choose to unlink the block in the running Strategy via the
context menu.
Before an Online block is Unlinked, the inspected block displays live instrument data. When the block is Unlinked
from the running target Strategy, it displays the data that exists within the LIN Database, .dbf.
Note
To capture live values from the Instrument, use the Online > Scan for Changed Parameters command. This command compares and displays values,
allowing the required value to be configured in the appropriate fields.
To unlink an block
Assuming that the block is currently Online,
1 Select the block.
2 Right-click to display the context-sensitive menu and select the Unlink command.
The block is now Unlinked, as indicated by a change in block colour.
3 Edit the block as required.
4 When changes to an Unlinked block are complete,
Try the changes to ensure the required results.
If completely satisfied Apply the changes to the live instrument strategy.
Re-link the block to cancel changes made specifically to this block.
Select Online > Discard Changes to cancel ALL changes, including changes to other unlinked blocks, since
the last save.
To Re-link an Unlinked block
1 To Re-link the block, right-click to display the context menu and select the Re-link command.
The block is now linked, as indicated by a return to the original block colour.
Note
All changes made to the Unlinked block are cancelled if the Re-link command is selected.
HA263001U055
Use Profibus Configuration

Use the Profibus Master Configurator
The Profibus Master Configurator is used to declare the Profibus Slave devices and the installed modules. Parameters
from the LIN database of an instrument operating as the Profibus Master are referenced in the relevant Profibus Slave
pages of the Profibus Master Configurator. Placing a LIN database parameter in a LIN Reference field on a particular
page determines whether the parameter is written to (Output data) and/or read from (Input data) a Profibus Slave
device, at either cyclic or acyclic data exchange.
The Profibus Master Configurator uses a tree view structure to define the Profibus Network and Profibus Slaves, in
alphabetical order. Profibus Slaves can be Compact devices or Modular stations. Any Modular station will require
configuration of each module fitted the device.
Tip!
Each page that is made accessible when the Profibus Master is selected displays particular information related to the Profibu s Master,
including currently available address space for the Input data, Output data and Acyclic data, and currently used space for Extended
Diagnostics.
To use the Profibus Master Configurator,

1 Configure the LIN Profibus GateWay.
The LIN Profibus GateWay is the interface between the LIN instrument operating as the Profibus Master and the
devices communicating via the Profibus Network connected to this Profibus Master.
2 Configure the Profibus communications protocol for the Profibus Master.
The COM port Protocol is configured on the Instrument Option page of the Instrument Properties dialog. It defines
the communications Protocol used by the selected COM port, i.e. Profibus Master COM port should be configured
to ProfibusDvp1-M.
Remember
The Instrument Options in the Instrument Properties dialog of the Profibus Master must be configured to us e the Profibus Protocol,
ProfibusDvp1-M.
3 Configure the Profibus Slave, as required.

Each device is added using the New Instrument wizard. The wizard is used to define the Profibus Slave folder
properties, including the folder name, Instrument type, and Slave address. Once completed, the .gsd file must be
defined to ensure the Profibus Master can understand what data is expected. Modules can be added for each
modular device using the Insert button, and finally, the device data exchange can be configured.
Note
The New Instrument wizard supports the use of devices that are unknown by the Configuration system. Unknown devices can be selected using the
rd
"3 -party" option and defined using the relevant .gsd file. These files can be imported to the appropriate GSD library when required.
4 Save the Profibus configuration. Pressing the Save button launches the Build window displaying a record of each
operation it attempts and any warnings or errors that may have been detected. This also generates the GateWay
file, .gwf, and Profibus Binary file, .upb, and automatically adds them to the list of Files to be Downloaded.
5 Download the Instrument configuration to the LIN instrument operating as a Profibus Master.
The Instrument configuration contains all the files used by the Instrument to perform its required function.
HA263001U055
Configure the LIN Profibus GateWay

The LIN Profibus GateWay provides a communications interface between an Instrument on a Local Instrument
Network, LIN, operating as a Profibus Master and a selection of third-party devices on a Profibus network.
The interface between these communications protocols is defined via a GWProfM_CON block in the LIN database, .dbf,
of the LIN Instrument operating as a Profibus Master. Configuration of this block identifies a specific LIN Profibus
Master Configuration file, .upm, GateWay file, .gwf, and Profibus Binary File, .upb.
To configure the LIN Profibus GateWay,
1 Open the Function Block Template Palette, and expand the Comms category to reveal a list of compatible Comms
function blocks, including the GWProfM_CON.
2 Select and drag the GWProfM_CON block to
the worksheet to create a copy of it.
3 Open the Object Properties Pane to show the
block fields, and name the block.
Tip!
A indicates that an additional file is associated with this
block and the filename must be entered.
4 Select the FileName field and enter a name, 8

characters maximum i.e. ProfDP_1, for the
required LIN Profibus Master Configuration
file, .upm. If the required LIN Profibus Master
Configuration file, .upm, already exists, enter
this filename.
Tip!
Try using a version of the Profibus Network folder name.
This can simplify the identification of the related GateWay
file, .gwf, and Profibus Configuration file, upm in a specific
LIN instrument.
Tip!
Use the Build process liberally to ensure all information is accessible to other applications.
5 Select the FileName field to show the context menu, and select the Open Profibus Master file (.UPM) command.
If the LIN Profibus Master Configuration file, .upm, does not exist, this displays a dialog used to create the .upm file,
with the name configured in the FileName field. Press Yes to continue.
The Network wizard appears.
Tip!
Help relating to each specific page of the wizard is shown when the Help checkbox is set .
6 Complete each section of the wizard to create a new Profibus Network or determine which existing Profibus
Network will be used. Follow the instructions displayed in the wizard.
7 Press the Finish button to
complete the wizard, and
automatically launch the
Build process. This will add
the configured files to the
Project.
When the Build process
completes, LINtools launches
the Profibus Master
Configurator, automatically
defining the Instrument
containing the
GWProfM_CON block as the
Profibus Master.
HA263001U055
Configure the Profibus communications protocol

The Communications Protocol is used to define the Network Protocol connected to the specified COM port and used for
communications with the devices present on the network.
Note
If this is not configured correctly the Profibus data exchange will fail.
The COM port Protocol is configured on the Instrument Option page of the Instrument Properties dialog. It defines the
communications Protocol used by the selected COM port, i.e. Profibus Master COM port should be configured to
ProfibusDvp1-M.
To configure the Communications Protocol
1 Select the LIN Instrument Folder in the LINtools Contents pane to show the context menu.
2 Select the Properties command to launch the Instrument Properties dialog.
3 Select the Instrument Options page to show the hardware configuration of the instrument.
The Instrument Option page shows configuration data for various aspects of the instrument, e.g. HMI settings,
Modbus or Profibus ports configuration, etc..
i Select the Profibus category, to display the Hardware and Protocol parameters associated with Profibus
communications.
ii Press the Upload current options settings button. This will connect to the instrument and update the
instrument hardware configuration used by LINtools.
The message Making attachments to LIN OPC Server. Please wait appears.
Note
If this is not configured correctly the Profibus data exchange will fail.
iii When eventually connected, the Protocol parameter for the corresponding COM port, e.g. PROF 1, should
show ProfibusDvp1-M. This configures the PROF1 COM port of this LIN Instrument for use with ProfibusDvp1-
M protocol.
If the Protocol parameter does not show ProfibusDvp1-M, select it from the Picklist.
iv Save all changes. If the changes are made to an instrument, already within an instrument folder, a download
process is initiated via the Download new settings dialog.
If the Download new settings dialog appears, press Yes to attach to the instrument, and automatically download the
changes to the instrument. Press No to continue configuring the Instrument Option parameters.
Note
The instrument must be online before the download of the Instrument Option parameters can start.
HA263001U055
Configure the Profibus Master Properties

Configuration of the Profibus Master Properties parameters consists of editing the General Profibus Master device
details, Bus Parameter (Network) details, and Profibus Master Data exchange limitations.
To configure the Properties Master,
1 Select a Profibus Master to reveal the Properties page.
The parameters on this page relate to features that are supported by the Profibus Master. Only the parameters for
the selected Profibus Master are edited when any parameter on the Properties page is changed.
Most device Properties page parameters remain read only, but some can be edited by selecting a value from a
Picklist, changing the module type, or by changing the value.
Remember
The .gsd file relating a Eurotherm Profibus device can be edited using the Eurotherm Profibus GSD File Editor at
Start > Programs > > Profibus GSD File Editor
where ' denotes the installation path
2 Edit the parameters on the Properties page, as required.

Configure the General parameters. This section refers to the device.
If this section of parameters are condensed, press the button to show these parameters. The section can
be condensed using the ' ' button.
Tip!
Select the highest Baud Rate value that does not cause the Warning message to show that an unsupported Baud Rate has been
configured in the Profibus Master.
Configure the Bus Parameters. This section refers to the operation of the network.
The DP_Master parameters are read only and refer to the data exchange in the Master.
3 Configure the Profibus Slave.
Although the .gsd file provides detailed information about the Profibus Slave, the module configuration will not be
known, and will have to be configured.
Profibus Master configuration is now complete, and data exchange parameter configuration is required, see configure
the Profibus Slave Input data and Output data.
Configure the Profibus Slave
The .gsd file provides detailed information about the Profibus Slave to the Profibus Master Configurator, including the
modules that can be fitted. The Profibus Master Configurator is used to define the actual device configuration.
To configure the Profibus Slave,
1 Configure the Profibus Slave Properties. Edit these parameters to identify the operational details of the device.
2 Add a Profibus Slave Module. Profibus Slaves can be Compact devices or Modular stations. Modules are added to
represent each additional module fitted to the device communicating via the Profibus network connected to the
Profibus Master.
Tip!
Use Demand Data, if supported, to minimise the use of the communications bandwidth for parameters that require either occasi onal
read or write access to data, e.g. autotune or a three term value, or complex read or writes that require a lot of data excha nge, e.g.
setting up and running a programmer.
3 Configure the Profibus Slave Module Properties. Edit these parameters to identify the module type at a defined
position in the device.
4 Configure the Input data. This includes defining the address space for each required parameter in the device, and
configuring the related parameters.
HA263001U055
5 Configure the Output data. This includes defining the address space for each required parameter in the device,
and configuring the related parameters.
6 Configure the Extended Diagnostics. This includes defining the address space for each particular parameter in the
device, and configuring the related parameters.
7 Configure the Acyclic data. This includes adding individual records for each required parameter and configuring the
related parameters.
Note
Consult the manufacturers device handbook for device parameter information.
Tip!
Bits, Bytes and Words can be split or combined to provide sufficient address space for a device parameter, or to merge multiple device
parameters to provide a single Digital Output that can be referenced in the LIN database.
Configure the Profibus Slave Properties

Configuration of the Profibus Slave Properties parameters consists of editing the module configuration, and configuring
the General parameters, and the User Parameter Data if supported by the device.
To configure the device Properties parameters,
1 Select a Profibus Slave to reveal the associated Properties page.
Most device Properties page parameters are read only, but some can be edited by selecting a value from a Picklist,
changing the module type, or by changing the text value.
2 Edit the parameters on the Properties page, as required.
Configure the DP_Slave parameters. This section refers to the data exchange in the device.
The parameters in this section are read only.
Configure the User Parameter Data parameters. This section refers to the module parameter configuration in
the module.
3 Configure the Profibus Slave module. Compact or Modular stations are added one per slot, relating to the Profibus
Slave device.
As each module type is assigned, a new Free Slot appears ready for configuring the next module type.
Configure the module General parameters. This section refers to the module.
Configure the Module parameters. This section refers to the data exchange in the module.
The parameters in this section are read only.
the module.
Profibus Slave configuration is now complete, and data exchange parameter configuration is required, see configure
the Profibus Slave Data Exchange parameters.
HA263001U055
Configure the Profibus Slave Module

Profibus Slaves can be Compact devices or Modular stations. Modules are added to represent each additional module
fitted to the device communicating via the Profibus network connected to the Profibus Master.
Beware
Depending on the device, some Module types must be allocated to specific Module location, e.g. the Demand Data of a T2550 must be located at
Module 1. This may be restricted by the .gsd file, therefore the Profibus Master Configurator will not allow the module to be configured in another
position.
Failure to do so may result in the loss of Input data and Output data exchange.
To resolve this problem,
The user will have to configure the position of the Module manually, if the .gsd file and Profibus Master Configurator have not restricted this. Consult
manufacturers documentation.
To configure modules,
1 Expand the Profibus Slave that is to be configured. This is the device with modules that need to be configured.
Tip!
Use Demand Data, if supported, to minimise the use of the communications bandwidth for parameters that require either occasio nal
read or write access to data, e.g. autotune or a three term value, or complex read or w rites that require a lot of data exchange, e.g.
setting up and running a programmer.
2 Select the next available free slot in the relevant Profibus Slave device. This reveals a Module Unassigned field
on the Module Properties page to the right of the tree view.
Note
Demand Data will only operate correctly when configured to Module 1.
3 Select the Module Unassigned field and use the drop arrow to reveal a Picklist of Module types applicable to this
device.
4 Select the appropriate Module type. This must correspond to the Module type that is fitted to this device.
Once the Module type has been selected the tree view is automatically refreshed, showing the latest addition.
The Properties page of the Module type shows the parameters used to define this Module, providing access to
the Module name field. This field may be edited to allow a more useful name to be applied to the Module.
Some modules offer further parameter configuration, used to edit the details of a module.
The Inputs page and Outputs page show the total number of Bytes allowed in this Module.
The Split Rows button and Combine Rows button enable the configuration of the parameter address space.
Bit, Byte, 16-bit Word and 32-bit Word Rows can be split or combined to provide adequate address space
required for transferring data.
5 Insert or remove modules.
Additional modules can be added, using the available buttons across the top of the Profibus Master Configurator or
the Context menu commands, to represent the modules that exist in the device.
HA263001U055
Configure the Profibus Slave Module Properties

Configuration of the Profibus Slave Module Properties parameters consists of configuring the General parameters, and
the User Parameter Data if supported by the device.
To configure the Module Properties parameters,
1 Select a Profibus Slave to reveal the associated Properties page.
The parameters on this page identify the supported features of the device.
2 Select the Module to reveal the associated Properties page.
The parameters on this page identify the supported features of the module.
3 Edit the parameters on the Properties page, as required
All other sections are device dependant.
The Module parameters are read only, and refer to the data exchange in the module.
the module.
Profibus Slave Module configuration is now complete, and data exchange parameter configuration is required, see
configure the Profibus Slave Input data and Output data.
Configure the Profibus Slave Input data and Output data
Configuring the device Input data defines the parameters that will be read from and written to the Profibus Slave by the
Profibus Master. Parameters added to these pages automatically appear on the Total Inputs page and Total Outputs
page of the Profibus Master.
The size of each device parameter is dependant on the specific Profibus Slave. The Profibus Master Configurator has
been designed to allow Words, Bytes, and Bits to be split and/or combined, providing precise access to the address
space for allocating device parameters.
Tip!
The tab at the top of the Inputs page and Outputs page shows the amount of address space used by the device. Th is value can be used
to calculate the available address space.
To configure the Input data or Output data parameters,

Note
The following instructions apply equally to the configuration of Output data.
1 Expand the Profibus Slave and the required module that is to be configured from the Profibus Master Configurator
tree view. This is the device and module with parameters that are to be read from or written to the Profibus Slave. It
may show modules already configured for this device.
Note
Compact devices will show the pre-defined Module configuration. During device configuration there is no opportunity to change the module
configuration.
2 Select the Inputs icon if configuring the Inputs, or Outputs icon if configuring the Outputs, from the Profibus Master
Configurator tree view. This displays a table used to assign LIN database block fields to device parameters that
are to be read from or written to the Profibus Slave, as appropriate.
The Inputs page and Outputs page show the total number of Words, and corresponding Bytes and Bits available in
the Module.
i Decide which parameter from the Profibus Slave is required. This will require information sourced from the
manufacturers documentation. The documentation should provide a list of parameters and the related address
space required by the selected device parameter.
ii Configure the Input page or Output page rows to provide adequate address space for the required device
parameter. Split or combine rows of Words, Bytes and Bits, to configure the required address space.
HA263001U055
Tip!
Words, Bytes and Bits can also be split and combined using the context menu commands.
iii Configure the Data Type of the device parameter.

Use the Data Type feature to configure the format of a returned value.
iv Configure the Scaling of the device parameter.
Use the Scaling feature to define and scale Profibus and LIN range limits of a returned value.
v Configure the Decimal Place feature of the device parameter.
Use the Decimal Place feature to configure the dividing factor for a returned value.
vi Associate a variable, database field, to the device parameter. This links the value from the device parameter to
a specific field in the database.
The associated variable is validated as it is inserted. A successfully validated variable is indicated by the .
An unsuccessfully validated variable is indicated by the .
vii Add or edit the description. This is used to help explain the configuration of the Extended Diagnostics
parameter.
Configure the Profibus Slave Acyclic data
Configuration of Acyclic data exchange is based on a Modular theory. All Input data and Output data is regarded as
assigned to a Module that can be addressed using Slot number and Index, as shown on the Acyclic page.
The device parameters added to the Acyclic page are read from or written to the Profibus Slave to the Profibus Master
in Slot number order, when available time, gap, remains in the programmed cycle. The gap time allows the Profibus
Master to set up an acyclic connection to any device and exchange data.
Note
The acyclic data exchange will continue until the remaining time has elapsed.
To configure an Acyclic data record,

1 Select the Acyclic icon from the Profibus Master Configurator tree view associated with the Profibus Slave. This
shows a window that is used to list each device parameter that is to be read from or written to the Profibus Slave in
parallel to the cyclic data.
The Profibus Master Configurator reveals context related buttons used to add, remove, and order acyclic records,
as appropriate.
HA263001U055
2 Add an Acyclic record. Each record represents a device parameter at a defined Slot number (Module address), and
Index (Word, Byte, or Bit address).
i Press the Add record button to create a record. Records are appended to the end of the list if the Add Record
button is used, but can be ordered appropriately using the buttons available.
Note
The buttons shown above are also available in a context menu that appears when selecting a Record in the Acyclic page. The context menu provides a
duplicate set of commands, used to control and prioritise each Acyclic record.
ii Configure the Slot number and Index address. This is used to identify a value at a specific address space.
iii Configure the data exchange direction. This is used to define the direction the data will be transferred.
Select Output to write the data to the Profibus Slave.
Select Input to read the data from the Profibus Slave.
iv Configure the Data Type of the device parameter.
Use the Data Type feature to define the format of the value.
v Configure the Scaling of the device parameter.
Use the Scaling options to define and scale Profibus and LIN range limits.
vi Configure the Decimal Place feature of the device parameter.
Use the Decimal Place feature to configure the dividing factor for a returned value.
vii Associate a variable, database field, to the device parameter. This links the corresponding Profibus Data Type
parameter to a specific field in the database.
Note
A T2550 can only operate as a Profibus Slave when communicating via a Profibus network and must be configured using the Modbus Tools.
viii Add or edit the description. This is used to help explain the configuration of the device parameter.
Tip!
Use this field as much as possible to help describe the Profibus data exchang e configuration.
HA263001U055
Configure the Profibus Slave Extended Diagnostics

The configuration of Extended Diagnostics is dependant on the Profibus Slave. Some devices do not support these
additional related Alarm and Status messages.
To configure the Extended Diagnostics parameters,
1 Expand the Profibus Slave that is to be configured from the Profibus Master Configurator tree view. This is the
device with additional Alarm and Status message parameters that are to be read from the Profibus Slave in the
event of a device alarm or change of state.
2 Select the Extended Diagnostics icon from the Profibus Master Configurator tree view. This shows the list of
Extended Diagnostics parameters that are supported by this device.
Note
A Description of each supported Extended Diagnostics parameter may already exist. This can be used to simplify the configuration of the block field in
the database.
3 Configure the address space for the required device parameter.

Tip!
Combining individual Extended Diagnostics parameters can help reduce the number of required Digital channels, but additional
configuration may be required to ensure correct operation.
i Select the row corresponding to the Extended Diagnostics device parameter that is to be configured.
ii Configure the rows to provide adequate Byte and Bits, address space, for the required device parameter.
iii Associate a variable, database field, to the device parameter. This links the value from the device parameter to
a specific field in the database.
The associated variable is validated as it is inserted. A successfully validated variable is indicated by the .
An unsuccessfully validated variable is indicated by the .
4 Add or edit the description. This is used to help explain the configuration of the Extended Diagnostics parameter.
Configure the Slot number and Index address
The Slot number and Index address of our instruments can determined using a calculation based on a known
Canonical Modbus address or actual Modbus address of a device to define a specific block a data.
Note
The Slot number and Index values of third-party products are determined using methods applicable to the device only.
To configure the Slot number and Index address,

1 Configure the Slot number. This is used to identify the Profibus Slave Module associated with an individual block of
data that will be transferred.
2 Configure the Index address. This is used to identify an individual block of data assigned to a Module that will be
transferred.
Note
Each individual block of data will not exceed 244 Bytes.
HA263001U055
Use the Data Recording Configuration

Use the Data Recording Configurator
The Data Recording Configurator is used to declare the parameters to be recorded, and configure the appearance in
the Review software. Parameters from the LIN database of an instrument are added to a Data Recording Group.
A data Recording icon appears in the Contents pane in LINtools when a database of an instrument that supports Data
Recording is opened. It appears after the first parameter is specified and the required DataRec compound has been
generated. When the Data Recording Configurator is started, pages are displayed that provide a means of visualising
each parameter, assigning additional parameters to a group, and configuring the particular display of a selected
parameter.
Note
An FTP Server can be configured at any time, but Data Recording files will not be archived unless it is configured. An FTP Server(s) provides an
archive destination for the Data Recording file, .uhh produced by a specified instrument. The file can then be accessed by the Review software.
Tip!
Configuring a computer to oper ate as an FTP Server should be attempted by an experienced computer engineer, and should comply
with local company policies. This is beyond the remit of this document.
To use the Data Recording Configurator,

1 Configure the Data Recording configuration. This requires indepth knowledge of the plant/system to ensure that all
the relevant information is recorded and saved to the .uhh file. Parameters are defined simply by selecting the Add
to Data Recording command from the context menu of a block or block field in LINtools.
Remember
The Header block identifies the software version, that indicates the supported instrument functionality. If the Header block software
version does not support the required functionality it must be changed when editing an existing da tabase.
i Open the Data Recording Configurator. This is used to generate the Data Recording Configuration file, .uxg.
This file must be downloaded to the instrument to ensure the correct Data Recording strategy is used.
ii Edit the Group configuration. This is used to control and manage Groups in the Data Recording Configuration.
New Data Recording Groups can be added, and the Data Recording of existing groups can be enabled and
disabled.
iii Edit the Block configuration. This provides information about the blocks selected for Data Recording. Further
block Alarm fields can be selected, and added to a selected Data Recording Group, and included in the Data
Recording Configuration.
iv Edit the Field configuration. This provides information about each block field selected for Data Recording.
Further block fields can be added to a selected Data Recording Group, customised for display in Review, and
included in the Data Recording Configuration. If this page shows only the Field Name and Group columns,
Show Visualisation Parameters for fields on the Options page is .
Specific configuration of individual block fields can be enabled by setting the Show Visualisation Parameters
for fields on the Options page .
Note
The Options page contains editable parameters that control the Data Recording configuration.
v Edit the Option configuration. This provides parameters used to customise the block fields selected for Data
Recording and that can be displayed in Review.
2 Save the Instrument configuration. This saves the Data Recording Configuration file, .uxg, and automatically adds
them to the list of Files to be Downloaded.
3 Download the Instrument configuration to the LIN instrument. Pressing the Download button connects to the
instrument and copies the specified files.
The Instrument configuration folder contains all the files used by the Instrument to perform its required function.
HA263001U055
To ensure successful data recording and archiving

Upgrade the Licence. Data Recording is Licence protected, and requires a D10 to D90 Licence that supports
function block codes K to T.
Note
This is not applicable if a Licence was ordered when the instrument was purchased.
Use the Tactician Licence Tool from the Tools menu to request a Licence upgrade.
Define the FTP Server. This ensures that all .uhh files will be saved to a secure environment.
Tip!
You can use the Store and Forward tool to replace periods of lost data in InSQL and the Alarm databases with recorded data fr om the
.uhh files in LIN instruments and 5000/6000 recorders.
To display data recording files

Configure the Review software. This software can be configured to gather the .uhh files on the FTP Server at a
determined period or on-demand.
Note
Ensure the Review software, Review, is installed on a computer used to access the .uhh files gathered from the FTP Server. Review is supplied on a
separate CD.
Configure the Data Recording configuration

This is the process of configuring each of the block fields selected for Data Recording. Block fields can be configured
individually to change the
block, field and/or group configuration
display in the Review software
To configure Data Recording
1 Define the parameters for Data Recording. Add block fields to data recording groups.
2 Configure the block, field and/or group, and visualisation. When the required block fields have been defined,
individual block fields can be configured.
i Open the Data Recording Configurator. This is used to generate the Data Recording Configuration file, .uxg.
This file must be downloaded to the instrument to ensure the correct Data Recording strategy is used.
ii Edit the Group configuration. This is used to control and manage Groups in the Data Recording Configuration.
iii Edit the Block configuration. This provides information about the blocks selected for Data Recording.
iv Edit the Field configuration. This provides information about each block field selected for Data Recording. If
this page shows only the Field Name and Group columns, Show Visualisation Parameters for fields on the
Options page is .
Specific configuration of individual block fields can be enabled by setting the Show Visualisation Parameters
for fields on the Options page .
Note
The Options page contains editable parameters that control the Data Recording configuration.
v Edit the Option configuration. This provides parameters used to customise the block fields selected for Data
Recording and that can be displayed in the Review software.
To ensure successful data recording and archiving
Define the FTP Server. This ensures that all .uhh files will be saved to a secure environment.
Upgrade the Licence to provide data recording support for the configured instrument. Data Recording is Licence
protected. Data Recording requires a D10 to D90 Licence, and supports function block codes K to T.
To update the Licence launch the Tactician Licence Tool from the Tools menu.
Note
This is not applicable if a Licence was ordered when the instrument was purchased.
HA263001U055
Define the parameters for Data Recording

To define the values of parameters to be recorded is simply an exercise of selecting the required parameter and
selecting the Add to Data Recording command from the context menu in LINtools.
Tip!
A indicates that the parameter has been selected for Data Recording.
To define the parameters for Data Recording

1 Locate and select the block containing the parameter that is required for Data Recording, to display the block field
in the Object Properties Pane.
A context menu including the Add to Data Recording command is displayed when a Block, Field, Compound, or
multiple Blocks are selected. If a Block, Compound, or multiple Blocks are added to the data recording, a default
selection of fields are automatically added to the Data Recording configuration.
Note
When using a layered database, block fields can be added or removed from any layer.
2 Select the required parameter to reveal the context menu and select the Add to Data Recording command.
If a Group does not exist, select the New Group command to display the Add New Group dialog.
If a Group does exist, simply select the required group.
Note
This Group name appears in the Name field of the associated RGROUP, and is used as a reference in the Review software.
Tip!
Use the Find utility to locate and select multiple block fields for Data Recording. The Add to Data Recording co mmand is available from
the context menu.
3 When this command is completed a DataRec compound is automatically created.

This compound contains a RGROUP block, a RARCDIAG block, and a RMEMDIAG block. As further Data
Recording Groups are added, a single RGROUP block is automatically created for each new group.
Note
Parameters can also be added to a specified group using the Block Name field on the Blocks page, or the Field Name field on the Field page available
in the Data Recording Configurator.
Additional commands available on the context menu provide the option to

go to the RGROUP block that controls the selected Data Recording Group
Remove the selected block field, without deleting the block, from the defined Data Recording Group
HA263001U055
Edit the Group configuration

This provides a tabular way to add, delete, enable and disable individual Data Recording Groups in the Data Recording
Configuration.
Tip!
A maximum of 8 groups can be configured, each supporting a maximum of 128 data record points. If MinMax on the Fields page is On,
the associated value accounts for 2 (two) data record points in the Review software.
Note
When using a layered database, Groups can only be added from the base layer.
To edit the Group configuration

1 Select the Group Name field, and enter an appropriate name for the group, i.e. group1. The Group Name is a
maximum of 20 characters. When selected the associated RGROUP block appears in the Object Properties pane.
Note
Any changes to time period between recording values, UpdateA or UpdateB, if SelectB is TRUE, automatically changes the Est. Memory Duration.
2 Consider Enable Recording for the group.

If Enabled, the parameters assigned to this group will be recorded
If Disabled, the parameters assigned to this group will not be recorded
3 Observe the Est. Memory Duration field. This provides an estimate of the Data Recording memory available in
the instrument. This calculation is based on the number of parameters in the group, and the number of groups in
the Data Recording strategy.
Tip!
The RMEMDIAG block will assist with diagnosing flash memory faults when recording values from selected parameters, and the
RARCDIAG block will help diagnose faults when archiving .uhh files from the instrument to the specified FTP Servers.

go to the RGROUP block that controls the selected Data Recording Group
Delete the selected Data Recording Group
Edit the Block configuration
This provides a tabular way to add, delete, and manage blocks assigned to Data Recording Groups in the Data
Tip!
To configure the Blocks

1 Select the Block Name field, and select the required block from the Picklist displayed. Adds a default selection of
the blocks fields to the data recording.
When the required block is selected, the Recorded Alarms shows All. This indicates that all Alarms for this block
will be recorded. Recorded Alarms is set to All by default because recording Alarms does not consume much
memory, but recording specific alarms can be configured by editing the Recorded Alarms field.
2 Select the relevant Group field, and select the required Group Name from the Picklist displayed. This is used to
assign the block, identified in the Block Name field, to the Data Recording group, identified in the Group field.
3 Select the relevant Recorded Alarms to reveal the Select alarms to record dialog. This dialog provides the
selection of individual Alarm parameters from the selected block.
Set Record All to indicate that all Alarms will be recorded.

Set individual Alarm parameters to indicate that only the defined Alarms recorded.
This column shows the Alarm parameters that will be recorded for this block.
go to the specified block in the database
Remove the defined parameter from the specified Data Recording Group
HA263001U055
Edit the Field configuration

This provides a tabular way to add, delete, and manage block fields assigned to Data Recording Groups in the Data
Tip!
To configure the Fields

1 Select the Field Name field, expand the required block and select the field from the Picklist displayed. This is used
to specify the parameter selected for Data Recording.
When the required field is selected, it appears in the Field Name column, with a default configuration. This indicates
that this field will be recorded.
2 Select the relevant Group field, and select the required Group Name from the Picklist displayed. This is used to
assign the field, identified in the Field Name field, to this Data Recording group.
Note
Further configuration of a selected Field is optional and only available if the Show Visualisation Parameters for fields on the Options page is . The
configuration of the following parameters apply to the display of a Trend when shown in the visualisation software, Review.
3 Select the relevant Description field, and enter a unique description for the field using up to 16 characters. This
description is shown in the Review software, and is used to identify the associated block.field value.
4 Select the relevant Format field, and, if required, select a format from the Picklist displayed. This indicates the
format of the defined value when displayed in the Review software. The format selection is dependant on the
block.field type.
5 Select the relevant Colour field, and, if required, change the default colour. This is the colour of the defined value
when displayed in the Review software.
6 Select the relevant MinMax field, and enable (On) or disable (Off) the adaptive recording functionality.
Note
When MinMax is On, the associated value accounts for 2 (two) trends in the Review software.
7 Configure the SpanLow and SpanHigh fields. These are used to define the limits of the zone shown in the
visualisation software. SpanLow values will be displayed closer to ZoneLow, and SpanHigh values will be
displayed closer to ZoneHigh.
Note
If an inverted 0 is required then set SpanLow larger than SpanHigh.
8 Configure the ZoneLow and ZoneHigh fields. This is used to define the area of the chart showing the defined
value when displayed in the Review software, e.g. settings of 50 and 100 cause the trace to appear in the top half
of the chart.
9 Configure the Active and Inactive fields. This is used to define a text string using up to 16 characters to represent
the digital zero (0) or non-zero (1) recorded value.
i Select the relevant Active field, and, if required, change the default text, TRUE, to a description that
represents the recorded non-zero value.
ii Select the relevant Inactive field, and, if required, change the default text, FALSE, to a description that
represents the recorded zero value.
go to the specified field in the database
Remove the defined parameter from the specified Data Recording Group
HA263001U055
Edit the Option configuration

This provides a selection of parameters used to allow customisation of individual values in the Data Recording
Configuration.
To configure the Options
1 Configure the Show Visualisation Parameters for fields. This is used to display additional parameters that
provides control of visualisation parameters that appear on the Fields page.
Set Show Visualisation Parameters for fields to allow individual customisation of a defined parameter
selected for data recording.
Set Show Visualisation Parameters for fields to prevent individual customisation of the defined
parameter selected for data recording.
2 Configure the Instrument name area fields. These fields provide options used to identify the Data Recording
Groups configured in this instrument.
When Use default name for instrument area is selected, the data recording group name shown in the Name
field in the RGROUP block remains as the name entered when the data recording group was created.
When Use custom name is selected, the associated entry preceeds the data recording group name shown in
the, Name field in the RGROUP block, and the name entered when the data recording group was created.
This provides a greater level of identification of the parameters selected for data recording when using a
Review software.
Define the FTP Server
Defining the required FTP servers provides the destination of .uhh files in the instrument. Configuring the Archiving
category in the Instrument Properties allows the .uhh files to be pushed to all configured FTP Servers.
Each required FTP server is specified via the Archiving section of the Instrument Options page in the Instrument
Properties dialog.
To configure the FTP servers,
1 Select the LIN Instrument Folder in the LINtools Contents pane to show the context menu.
2 Select the Properties command to launch the Instrument Properties dialog.
3 Select the Instrument Options page to show the hardware configuration of the instrument.
The Instrument Option page shows configuration data for various aspects of the instrument, e.g. HMI settings,
Modbus or Profibus ports configuration, Archiving, etc..
4 Select the Archiving icon. This reveals parameters that are used to configure the archiving of .uhh files.
5 Select the Intervals field and enter or use the spin button to define the total number of minutes between transfers
of .uhh files to the FTP server.
6 Define the FTP servers. Up to 3 FTP servers can be configured to provide adequate backup when archiving .uhh
files.
i Decide which FTP server will be configured as FTP Server 1, FTP Server 2, and/or FTP Server 3, as
indicated by related FTP Server titled field.
Note
One or more FTP Servers can be configured, but a minimum of 2 must be configured to provide redundant operation.
ii Set Enabled field TRUE. This enables communication between this instrument and the related FTP Server.
iii Enter the archive Host IP address of the related FTP Server. This identifies a specific Computer or instrument
in the network.
Note
Not all instruments can be configured to operate as an FTP server, see specific instrument documentation.
iv Enter the destination Directory path in the related FTP Server. This defines the directory (folder) on the FTP
Server where the .uhh files are to be stored.
Note
For security reasons FTP servers normally only permit access to a limited area of their host computer by re-mapping the directories. It is the re-
mapped name that must be entered here.
v Enter the User Name, and corresponding Password. This is used to provide a level of security to prevent
unauthorised write access to the specified FTP Server.
HA263001U055
A Password dialog appears when the Password is selected. This Password dialog provides User name
confirmation.
Enter and confirm the Password used to access the archive directory on the FTP Server defined by the
Host IP.
Tip!
If an incorrect User Name or Password is entered, relevant error fields in the RARCDIAG block will be set TRUE when attemptin g to
archive the .uhh files.
An example of Archiving Configuration
HA263001U055
Configure Review
The Review software allows the display and printing of archived Data Recording files, .uhh, from suitable recorders,
data acquisition units, etc.. The Recorded Data is transferred from the .uhh files to a database on the computer. The
database stores the recorded data by instrument tag, group name and point identifier.
Tip!
Recorded data from multiple archive files from the same group and the same instrument are stored together on the database, so that
data can be viewed across files.
Note
Refer to the Review help file for full details.
To configure Review software

1 Install Review using the appropriate CD.
Remember
The computer will require rebooting when Review has finished installing.
2 Launch Review. Further configuration is required to define the relationship between the FTP Server and the
Review software, and to display the recorded values in the .uhh files.
The Review software can be launched from
Start > Programs > > Review
Note
'' denotes the default path.
If a Master Archive Folder has not been configured already a prompt appears. Select Yes to confirm that a Master
Archive Folder is required. Select OK to confirm that the Master Archive folder is required at the location defined in
the Master Archive Folder field.
3 Configure Data Transfer requirements. This defines when the .uhh files are transferred from the identified FTP
Server to the Review database.
Note
If Security Manager has been installed additional security parameters must be configured and a Login and Password may be required.
i Select File, Transfer, then Scheduled Transfer to display the Scheduled Transfer from Folders dialog.
ii Define the Source Archive Folder. This is the folder on the FTP Server that retains the .uhh files.
iii Select Enabled. This is used to specify that Data Transfer is allowed.
4 Create or open a chart. This is used to display the .uhh files in a chart form.
HA263001U055
Use the Programmer wizard

Use the Programmer Wizard
The Programmer Wizard is used to generate or edit a Program Template file and create a PROG_WIZ compound in the
database. It will define individual channels that can be profiled alongside digital events and user values and the
maximum number of segments available to the Program.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The Programmer Wizard creates blocks that can only control Programs produced using the Programmer Editor.
Note
Context help will be displayed when the 'Help' checkbox is set .
To generate or edit a Program Template file, .uyw,

1 Launch the Programmer Wizard. Select Tools > Programmer Wizard.
2 Progress through the wizard until all appropriate fields are complete, The Finish button appears on the last page.
3 Press the Finish button to finalise the operation, and automatically generate the PROG_WIZ compound.
The PROG_WIZ compound contains, 1 PROGCTRL block, up to 8 PROGCHAN blocks one for each profiled
channel, and up to 8 SEGMENT blocks per channel, providing a maximum of 32 program segments (each
SEGMENT block offering 4 program segments).
It will automatically layout the blocks in a logical order. Any changes to this default layout will be cancelled when the
compound is closed.
HA263001U055
Configure Alarm Suppression

Enable Alarm Suppression
To enable Alarm Suppression functionality, select the Loaded File Properties item from the LINtools File menu to
open the database properties dialog box as below. Tick the Enable Alarm Suppression box by clicking within it and
note the Icon that appears to denote Alarm Suppression has been enabled for that database. This icon is shown in
the bottom right hand corner of the LINtools window unless on-line connection mode or on-line configuration
mode(T2550 PAC only) is being used. If you are trying to enable Alarm Suppression on a database previously created
pre Alarm Suppression, the enable checkbox and associated wording is not shown. The database requires upgrading
before Alarm Suppression can be enabled, please see the 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272.
Note:
Enabling Alarm Suppression impacts on database size. Refer to the 'Alarm Suppression User Guide', HA030272 for further details
HA263001U055
Layered and Blended Databases

For Layered and Blended databases, enabling Alarm Suppression from the Loaded File Properties dialog box as
shown below can only be performed when the base layer is the current database loaded into the LINtools FBD
configurator.
When other associated layers are loaded into the LINtools FBD configurator it is not possible to enable or disable Alarm
Suppression as the tick box is greyed out as shown below and is always the case when viewing the Blended
Database tab.
HA263001U055
Alarm Suppression and SFCs

This is the primary implementation method for applying Alarm Suppression configurations and strategies. This section
only covers the additional ST attributes supported within SFCs to apply Alarm Suppression.
Example SFC Steps and associated ST
The example below is based on two function blocks and an SFC(TC_Break) and implements' a strategy that in the
normal process operating mode, all alarms in the PID block tagged TIC-001 are unsuppressed, and when the process
is being steam cleaned, PID(TIC-001) alarms are suppressed as follows:
Absolute High Alarm - Indefinite
High Deviation Alarm - Indefinite
Low Deviation Alarm - 6hours
Absolute Low Alarm - 36hours and 12 minutes
Noting the Picklists showing the Alarm Suppress attributes, the ST for each of the two SFC Actions, Not_SupA and
Suppress are shown respectively as below:
Example of Unsuppressing all block alarms
Example of Suppressing individual alarms
HA263001U055
Alarm Suppression and Ladder Diagrams

The same Picklist attributes are available for developing a Ladder diagram in the same manner as for creating an SFC.
Using the example below and noting the Palette Picklists showing the Alarm Suppress attributes, the Ladder diagram
for each of the conditions, L_Supp and L_Unsup are shown respectively as follows:
Example Ladder Rungs and associated ST
The example below is based on two function blocks and implements a strategy that in the normal process operating
mode, all alarms in the PID block tagged TIC-001 are unsuppressed, and when the process is being steam cleaned,
PID(TIC-001) alarms are suppressed as follows:
Absolute High Alarm - Indefinite
High Deviation Alarm - Indefinite
Low Deviation Alarm - 6hours
Absolute Low Alarm - 36hours and 12 minutes
Ladder Diagram for unsuppressing all alarms in TIC-001
Ladder Diagram for suppressing individual alarms within TIC-001
HA263001U055
Header Block Unsuppression

Referring to the figure below, it is possible to wire to the UnSupAll bit within the Options field as shown in the Picklist.
When set TRUE it unsuppresses all alarms in that instruments local database, regardless of whether they have been
set to indefinite or with a time duration. The UnSupAll bit then auto-resets to FALSE, i.e. the UnSupAll bit reacts only
to a rising edge. Wiring out from the UnSupAll bit serves no purpose.
Note:
The UnSupAll bit reacts only to a rising edge. If held TRUE, Alarm Suppression continues to function as normal
until the next rising edge
UnSupAll item in header block wiring picklist
HA263001U055
Alarm Suppression and On-line Connect

When using the online connection or on-line configuration mode(T2550 PAC only) within LINtools, a facility for
managing Alarm Suppression of each block is available to the user as shown in the figure below. Alarms can be
suppressed regardless of whether they are active or inactive. Setting indefinite Alarm Suppression from this facility is
prohibited.
To access the on-line Alarm Suppression facility, select the required block by single or double clicking within it, locate
the Alarms field and place the mouse cursor within it and then right click. From the drop down menu shown below,
select the Alarm Suppression item.
Using the example as shown below, the Absolute High Alarm(HighAbs) and High Deviation Alarm(HighDev) have been
suppressed for the time period shown in the Suppression Period pane. This was achieved by selecting both alarms by
ticking the associated boxes, setting the Alarm Suppression Period and finally clicking on the Suppress button. The
icon denoting alarms in suppression is shown adjacent to each current suppressed alarm and also the Alarms field.
Both alarms are in an Unacknowledged state (section 2.4 provides further information). The Low Deviation
Alarm(LowDev) is suppressed indefinitely, achieved via an SFC and denoted by --/--/-- --:--:--.
Note:
Alarm Suppression only applies to Alarms set with a priority of 1-15.
On-line Alarm Suppression facility

To unsuppress alarms, simply select the required alarms by ticking the associated boxes and click on the Unsuppress
button. By ticking the Help box, a help dialog pane opens giving further details.
HEADER BLOCK - SAVING CURRENT DATABASE
The database header block contains a facility to save the current database, normally located in the Options menu. It
should be noted that when using this facility the current Alarm Suppression timers are not saved.
HA263001U055
Alarm Suppression and ACTION Blocks

ACTION blocks are prohibited from supporting Alarm Suppression in the context of ST written within them, however
alarm suppression can be applied to ACTION block alarms via, for example an SFC, i.e. An ACTION block can have
its alarms suppressed but cannot suppress them itself. This also applies to the RAW_COM block which is capable of
supporting an associated ACTION.
HA263001U055
Customise LINtools
Customise LINtools Printed Page Setup
Use the Page Setup dialog to configure the title block that appears at the foot of printouts produced via the Print
command. In the image below - the legends shown in red are the ones you can configure via the corresponding fields in
the dialog:
To access the Page Setup dialog,

1 In the window File menu, select Page Setup.
The dialog fields are:
Text 1, Text 2, Text 3
Free-format text strings. The image above shows where each string appears in the title block.
Issue
This string appears in the Issue cell, after Issue: (see image above)
Title (Override)
Free-format text string appearing in the leftmost cell.
Bitmap path and filename
Enter the full path and filename of a Bitmap (*.bmp file). It will appear in the leftmost cell below the title (see image
above).
Printed Border Layout
This image shows where each string appears in the title block.
Print LINtools configurations
You can produce two kinds of printout of your LINtools configurations:
Page-based printouts with each compound, chart, ladder, ST action, etc., on a separate page, as listed in the
Contents pane. Pages may include graphics, and every page has a set of customised title blocks at its foot. You
can opt to print selected pages or page-ranges.
An exportable single text-only file of your configuration.
To print a LINtools configuration in page-based format:
1 Set up a customised title block for the hardcopy, using the Page Setup dialog.
2 Click the Print toolbutton, or select File > Print from the menu.
3 Specify the printing parameters in the Print dialog, then click OK.
Tip!
It is worth looking at a preview of the printout first - click File > Print Preview.
To generate a LINtools configuration text-only file:

1 In the File pulldown menu select Save Special > Text Listing. A Save As dialog appears.
2 Edit the default File name and the Save in destination, if required, then click the Save button. The configuration is
saved as a text file.
The text file layout corresponds (approximately) to the IEC1131-3 standard.
HA263001U055
Customise LINtools colour coding

LINtools permits the user to edit various colour coding properties, allowing the user to add a more personal feel to the
application.
Note
These instructions apply to many of the items in the LINtools editors.
To edit Colour coding properties

1 In the View > Options menu, click the Colours option to display the Colours dialog.
2 To change a default colour adopted by LINtools item, locate and click the required item and select a colour via the
Custom button.
Note
Default colour red adopted by Active Ladder diagram elements, default colour black adopted by Inactive Ladder diagram elements.
3 Click OK. The new colour shows in the Colour window.

4 Finally, click OK in the Colours dialog to apply your customised colour scheme.
Note
The Defaults button restores all the items to the default colour scheme.
To edit Watermark Intensity settings

The watermark colour is only a more intense form of the same colour selected for the worksheet colour coding property.
Use the Watermark Intensity buttons to adjust the intensity of the watermark to suit the selected worksheet colour.
Note
Under certain LINtools customised colour schemes the watermarks can become obscured. The intensity of the watermark can be adjusted by changing
1 In the View > Options menu, click the Colours option to display the Colours dialog.
2 To change intensity of the colour adopted by a watermark, locate and click the Worksheet item.
3 Press the Spin button to increase or decrease the intensity of the watermark. As the number in the field increases
the watermark intensifies, while as the number decreases the watermark progresses towards matching the
selected worksheet colour.
Note
The watermark will never become totally obscured, however, different colours are better suited to displaying the watermark.
Customise LINtools Toolbars

LINtools permits the user to customise the Toolbars, allowing the user to create, edit and inspect the Commands and
Toolbars or add functionality to existing Toolbars.
Select View > Options > Customize Toolbars.
Toolbars page
The Toolbars page of this dialog specifies the appearance of the Toolbars.
Commands page
The Commands page of this dialog specifies the appearance of the Toolbars.
HA263001U055
Customise Toolbars dialog - Toolbars page

The Toolbars page of this dialog specifies which Toolbars are displayed and permits the user to create new Toolbars.
Select View > Options > Customize Toolbars in the editor window.
Click the Toolbars tab.
Toolbars
Lists all LINtools, both default and customer created, Toolbars.
Menu bar
Set the checkbox to include this toolbar in this, and all further LINtools windows.
File
Make
View
Misc
Tools
Appearance
Show ToolTips
Set the checkbox to hide ToolTips when the cursor hovers over a button.
Cool Look
Set the checkbox to show each button as an individual entity.

Large Buttons
Set the checkbox to show each button as twice the size with the text caption.
New
HA263001U055
To create a custom Toolbar,

1 Click to show the New Toolbar name dialog.
2 Click the New button.
3 In the Toolbar name box, type the name you want and confirm (press OK). The Toolbar appears, context over the
LINtools window.
4 To add a Command icon or Menu to the new Toolbar, click the Commands tab. In the Categories box, click a
category for the command. Select the Command or Menu you want from the Commands box and drag to the
displayed toolbar.
5 When you have added all the buttons and menus you want, click Close.
Reset/Delete
To delete a custom Toolbar,
1 On the Tools menu, click Customise, and then click the Toolbars tab.
2 Select the custom toolbar you want to delete.
3 Clicking a Toolbar name in the Customise dialog box shows or hides the Toolbar.
4 Click Delete.
Note
You cannot delete a built-in Toolbar. When you select a built-in Toolbar, the Reset button appears, which restores the Toolbar to its default buttons,
menus, and submenus.
OK
Click to close the Customise Toolbar dialog saving any changes.
Cancel
Click to close the Customise Toolbar dialog without changing anything.
Help
Click to see help topic.
Customise Toolbars dialog - Commands page
The Commands page of this dialog specifies which Commands are displayed and permits the user to arrange the
Command Icons as required. To access the dialog:
Select View > Options > Customize Toolbars in the editor window.
Click the Commands tab.
Categories
Lists all LINtools default Command categories.
File
Select to show all buttons associated with this category.
View
Make
Misc
Tools
Menu
Buttons
Shows all buttons associated with the selected category.
HA263001U055
Select a button the reveal a brief description of its function, or drag to any Toolbar for use in LINtools.
Description
Shows a brief description of the selected button.
OK
Click to close the Customise Toolbar dialog saving any changes.
Cancel
Click to close the Customise Toolbar dialog without changing anything.
Help
Click to see help topic.
Customise LINtools Settings
Use the Settings dialog to specify what the Editors and the Template Palette will display, and the required effect on
Tags and TagNames.
To access the dialog,
1 Select View > Options > Settings.
Alternatively, click in the Block Template Palette to display the context menu and select Settings.
2 Click the appropriate tab.
The Editor page of this dialog specifies some wiring and display features of the function block Editor window.
The Palette page of this dialog specifies the style and features of the Block Template Palette.
The Tags page of this dialog specifies a required effect on Tags with unresolved aliases and changed block
TagNames.
The Advanced page of this dialog is used to enable Intellectual Property Protection.
Settings dialog - Editor page
The Editor page of this dialog specifies some wiring and display features of the function block Editor window. To
access the dialog:
Select View > Options > Settings in the Editor window.
Click in the Block Template Palette to display the context menu and select Settings.
Click the Editor tab.
Show Compound Block External Connections
Set the checkbox to display external connections when viewing the contents of a compound. All external
connections appear as lollipop symbols attached to the connected function blocks - at the top left corner for inputs and
the lower right corner for outputs (see image below). Hovering the cursor over the end of a lollipop opens a window
listing the connection sources and destinations.
HA263001U055
Show Tooltips on Wires offline
Set the checkbox to display a yellow tooltips window listing all connection sources and destinations in a wire,
when the cursor is hovered over the wire.
Note
Only works for offline displays. In the Database Monitor, the tooltip shows the name(s) and current value(s) of the field(s) being transmitted by the
wire.
Show Comment Text Tooltips

Check the box to display a yellow tooltips window containing the Comment Text associated with the selected block or
step. This is indicated by the Comment tab Text symbol in the upper right corner of the function block or step.
Wire: Right out - Left In
This option specifies how you want wiring to appear as it enters and leaves a function block.
Set the checkbox to force wires to leave a function block from its right-hand edge, and enter a function block via
its left-hand edge see image below:
Leave the box unchecked to allow wires to enter and leave blocks at the most convenient edges - see image below:
New File Options

Use Large Worksheets
This option specifies the Worksheet size you want.
Set the checkbox to specify the use of an extended worksheet.

OK
Click to apply your Editor selections.
Cancel
Click to close the Settings dialog without changing anything.
Help
Click to see this help topic.
Settings dialog - Tags page
The Tags page of this dialog specifies a required effect on Tags with unresolved aliases and changed block
TagNames.
To access the dialog
Click the Tags tab.
Unresolved Aliases
Leave Tags
Click the radio button to specify that no action will be taken with any unresolved Tag in the Tag Table.
HA263001U055
Detach Tags
Click the radio button to specify that any unresolved Tag in the Tag Table will be unattached from the current point, and
can be re-attached to another point in the system.
Delete Tags
Click the radio button to specify that any unresolved Tag in the Tag Table will be deleted and removed.
When block Tag Name is changed
Match LIN Name if possible
Click the radio button to permit a TagName of up to 8 characters, that will allow the unique network LIN Name to match
the TagName.
Do not change LIN Name
Click the radio button to permit a TagName of up to 16 characters, that will retain the unique network LIN Name.
OK
Click to apply your Template Palette selections.
Cancel
Help
Settings dialog - Palette page
The Palette page of this dialog specifies the style and features of the Block Template Palette.
Select View > Options > Settings in the editor window.
Click the Palette tab.
Categorised Tab style
Tree
Click the radio button to select the Tree view of the block templates. Block categories and function blocks are
displayed in a Windows Explorer style hierarchy. Click the + and - boxes to reveal or hide individual function blocks.
List
Selects the Llist view of the block templates. Categories and function blocks are displayed in separate sub-windows,
which can be configured to show as large or small icons. Right-click in a sub-window to reveal a context menu for
selecting options.
Enable Tabs
Alphabetical
Check the box to include an Alphabetical tab in the Template Palette. Clicking this tab displays all the function blocks
in the template in alphabetical order (for both Tree and List views).
Recent
Check the box to include aRecent tab in the Template Palette. Clicking this displays a list of function blocks placed this
session, (for both Tree and List views).
OK
Click to apply your Template Palette selections.
Cancel
Help
Settings dialog - Advanced page
HA263001U055
The Advanced page of this dialog provides the ability to prevent an individual database files, sequence files and action
files from being duplicated. To access the dialog:
Click the Advanced tab.
Intellectual Property Protection
Offer option to encrypt files on Save As
Set the checkbox to enable the Save as password encrypted file checkbox on the Save As dialog.
Customise LINtools Worksheet
In a configuration the strategy can become quite complex and may require many different Database function blocks
and/or Sequence Steps. If you find that the default size worksheet is becoming to cluttered and it is difficult to read the
processing required by the LIN Database or a route through a Sequence this command will increase the size of the
worksheet. For FBD and SFC this means the height and width are doubled, and for Ladder Diagrams [LD] the number
of rungs are doubled from 24 to 48, but the width remains at 8 elements per rung.
Note
New large worksheet graphics files will not be compatible with the previous versions of LINtools.
To convert to a large worksheet:

Simply select the Convert to a Large Worksheets command from the View > Options menu to increase the size of
the currently opened worksheet.
Note
If you want all future Worksheets to be created on a large worksheet configure the Use Large Worksheets option in the Settings dialog.
See Also: Settings dialog, Use Large Worksheets

Editing KeyFields.ini file
KeyFields are defined in the KeyFields.ini file in the Program Files > Eurotherm > LINtools > libs directory. This
contain entries for each Function Block Type in the following form.
Where sections are of Function Block Type ([Block Type]), and KeyFields (fieldn=..n), list the fields to be displayed.
To edit the KeyFields.ini file:
1 Open the KeyFields.ini file using Notepad or any other text editor.
2 Find the Function Block Type you wish to edit.
Add or delete the references as required.
Add KeyFields using the fieldn=<field name> format.
Delete KeyFields by removing the line of text and renumbering the field<n>=Options.
3 Save and close to complete these instructions.
HA263001U055
Protect the Intellectual Property

Protect your Intellectual Property
LINtools permits you to password protect database files, sequence files and action files. Recipe files can be password
protected using the Recipe editor.
To password protect files:
1 Select View > Options > Settings.
2 Click the Advanced page. This is used to manage the Intellectual Property Protection configuration.
Set the Offer option to encrypt files on Save As checkbox and close the dialog. This will enable the
Save as password encrypted file checkbox on the Save As dialog allowing password protection to be
configured for this and any further file.
Note
Intellectual Property Protection will remain enabled until the Offer option to encrypt files on Save As is disabled ( ).
3 Select File > Save as command to display the Save as dialog. The Save as password encrypted file checkbox is
now available.
Beware...
LINtools cannot open a protected file without the correct password. Protection and storage of passwords is the your responsibility. We cannot recover
lost passwords or open protected files for you.
i Set the Save as password encrypted file checkbox and press Save. This will launch the Set encryption
key dialog. This dialog is used to configure the identifier and password for this file.
ii Enter the key identifier and Password. A key identifier can be a keyword (or memorable word) that is used to
help associate the encrypted file with the corresponding password. It is also used by the instrument to identify
which password is required to access the protected file.
A new key identifier can be configured or an existing key identifier can be used. When the Use a new
encryption key is selected, enter the required key identifier. The configured password must then be
confirmed to ensure that it the password used is as intended.
If Use an existing encryption key is selected, all existing key identifiers that have already been used this
session are available from the drop-down list. This will automatically assign the corresponding password.
Tip!
The same key can be used by multiple files. Files in the strategy can be encrypted individually with different keys but a single
instrument is limited to storing 7 keys.
iii Press OK to accept the key identifier and corresponding Password configuration.
Tip!
Select Online > Manage Instrument Passwords command to connect to the instrument and display a dialog listing all the keys currently
stored in the instrument. Use this dialog to manage the keys currently stored in the instrument.
HA263001U055
Manage the instrument passwords

A maximum of 7 keys are permitted per instrument. When connected to the instrument, the Instrument Passwords
dialog provides a method of managing the available keys.
To manage the passwords of a 'Live' Instrument
1 With a Database file, .dbf, open select Online > Manage Instrument Passwords command. The Instrument
Passwords dialog appears, displaying a message that LINtools is attempting to connect to the instrument.
Note
If a database is not open in LINtools, a dialog is displayed. Use this dialog to specify the Port and Node of the instrument required.
2 Once connected the dialog shows the general instrument information including Instrument type and Version, Port,
and Node address and lists the keys currently stored in the instrument. Only key identifiers are shown, not
Passwords.
3 Use the buttons below the listed key identifiers to manage the keys configurations.
Press the 'Add' button to add a key to the instrument. A dialog is displayed allowing a new key to be created
or a key that has already been used during this session to be selected.
Note
If more than 7 keys have been downloaded to the instrument, at least one key must be deleted before a new key can be added.
Select a key Identifier that is not required and press the 'Remove' button to delete that key from the
instrument. Confirmation is required before the key is deleted.
Beware...
A key cannot be retrieved after it has been deleted. Deleting a key prevents the instrument from opening files encrypted with that key. This may stop
the instrument from operating correctly.
HA263001U055
20 Getting specific help

LINtools windows help
To get help on using LINtools Editor and Monitor windows, click the shortcuts:
Database Editor
Database Monitor
Specific Sequence Editor
Generic Sequence Editor
Sequence Action Monitor
Action Editor
I/O Configurator
Profibus Master Configurator
Data Recording Configurator
Click on a LINtools window to get help!

To get help on individual function block fields:
In the relevant Block tab, click on a field name or value and press<F1> to display a help window for that field.
You can see a Block tab:
by highlighting the function block and opening the Object properties pane, or
by using the Find function block facility.
Getting Whats This help:
Sometimes you can see more specific help by clicking the Help toolbutton, then clicking on the object of interest.
Note
Be sure to click inside a window, not on its banner or docking bar.
LIN Function Block help

You can get help with a particular LIN function block in two ways:
a concise description of what the function block does, or
a comprehensive description of the function block and all its parameters, via a link to the relevant section of the
LIN Blocks Reference Manual in Online Books.
Getting concise function block help
When you highlight a Function block in the Function Block Template Palette, a summary of what the function block
does normally appears in the help pane below the palette.
To hide or see this help information, right-click the template palettes banner, docking bar, or borders and select
Show Help from the menu - see image below.
HA263001U055
Viewing the LIN Blocks Reference Manual

To access the Online Manual at the section dealing with a particular function block:
1 In the Database Editor (or Monitor) window, click on a field name or value in the relevant Object properties pane
and press <F1> to display a help window for that field.
Editor and Monitor windows
2 At the bottom left corner of the help window is a Books Online button. Click the button to open a window showing
the LIN Blocks Reference Manual opened at the section dealing with the selected function block. You can
navigate around the section, and indeed view any part of the manual.
If the function block is not covered in your installed edition of the manual, it opens at the title page instead. Contact
your supplier for the latest version.
HA263001U055
Index LINtools Engineering Studio User Guide

limits to resources ........................................................ 29
. LIN Action .................................................................... 30
.dbf file ............................... 15, 66, 67, 77, 78, 93, 116, 119 LIN Sequence .............................................................. 30
.dtf file ............................................................................. 77 Minutes ........................................................................ 95
.grf file ....................................................................... 76, 77 Move Down association ............................................... 95
.gsd file .................................................. 116, 119, 120, 121 Move Up association ................................................... 95
.gwf file .................................................. 116, 119, 121, 122 names .......................................................................... 31
.ini file ........................................................................... 142 qualifiers ................................................................ 95, 96
KeyFields .................................................................. 142 Seconds ....................................................................... 95
.sdb file ............................................................93, 101, 102 text ............................................................................... 30
.sdt file .......................................................................... 101 types ............................................................................ 31
.sgx file ......................................................................... 101 validate ........................................................ 99, 109, 111
.sto file .......................................................................... 106 Action qualifier ..................................................... 44, 95, 96
.stx file ...................................................................104, 106 D-Delayed .................................................................... 96
.ubl file ............................................................................ 66 Duration ....................................................................... 95
build.ubl.old ................................................................. 66 E-Event ........................................................................ 96
.udg file ........................................................................... 86 F-Final ......................................................................... 96
.udm file .................................................................... 15, 86 L-Limited ...................................................................... 96
.udt file ............................................................................ 86 N-Normal ..................................................................... 96
.ujc file ...................................................................... 19, 67 P-Initial ......................................................................... 96
.ujw file ..................................................................... 18, 67 R-Reset ....................................................................... 96
.upb file .................................................. 116, 119, 121, 122 S-Set............................................................................ 96
.upm file ........................................................................ 116 T# .......................................................................... 44, 95
.uqd file ....................................................................93, 101 Active ............................................................................ 102
.uqg file ......................................................................... 101 symbol ....................................................................... 102
.uqm file ........................................................................ 101 Add extra names dialog ................................................. 100
.uqt file .......................................................................... 101 dialog ......................................................................... 100
.uyw file .......................................................................... 53 Add extra names error................................................... 100
.uyy file ........................................................................... 53 dialog ......................................................................... 100
Add new file to Configuration .................................... 65, 66
A dialog ..................................................................... 65, 66
Action .......... 26, 29, 30, 31, 95, 96, 99, 104, 107, 109, 111 Add to Configuration........................................................ 60
Association.................................................................. 95 dialog ........................................................................... 60
Chart ..................................................................... 26, 95 Analog ............................................................................. 32
Compile ........................................................99, 109, 111 read - variable .............................................................. 32
Compile Results pane ..................................99, 109, 111 write - variable ............................................................. 32
contents item............................................................. 104 AND................................................................................. 32
Days ............................................................................ 95 function ........................................................................ 32
downloading files .................................................. 15, 30 wired ............................................................................ 32
Duration ...................................................................... 95 Apply Strategy ............................................................... 112
edit an ......................................................................... 99 Online Reconfiguration .............................................. 112
errors ...........................................................99, 109, 111 Association ................................................ 29, 95, 108, 110
execution order ........................................................... 95 Limits ........................................................................... 29
Function block ............................................................. 31 Step ............................................................................. 95
Hours .......................................................................... 95 Variable ............................................................. 108, 110
Ladder diagram ....................................................30, 107
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Index Page I
Attach ..................................................... 72, 81, 96, 98, 99 Category ................................................18, 22, 78, 94, 145
Comments ................................................. 72, 96, 98, 99 BATCH .................................................................94, 145
Remote node............................................................... 81 CONDITION .............................................................. 145
Auto-generated layer ................................................ 19, 67 CONFIG ...............................................................18, 145
CONTROL ...........................................................78, 145
B CONVERT ................................................................ 145
Blended Database ........................................ 17, 66, 67, 71 DCM - Devolved Control Modules............................. 145
Auto generated layers ................................................. 67 DIAG ....................................................................18, 145
Base Layer ............................................................ 66, 67 Function block ............................................................. 18
Cached Function block ................................................ 71 HEADER ................................................................... 145
Drag and Drop............................................................. 67 HISTORIAN .............................................................. 145
Block ............. 15, 20, 28, 30, 31, 61, 68, 69, 70, 71, 74, 75, I/O ..................................................................18, 22, 145
78, 79, 80, 83, 110, 113, 115 LOGIC ....................................................................... 145
BlockLock .................................................................... 28 MATHS ..................................................................... 145
locked .......................................................................... 28 OPERATOR .............................................................. 145
View ............................................................................ 61 ORGANISE ............................................................... 145
Build .............................................................................. 101 PROGRAMMER ....................................................... 145
Build Specific SFC File dialog ................................... 100 RECORDER ............................................................. 145
Build Window ............................................................ 101 S6000 ....................................................................... 145
Generic SFC File dialog ............................................ 100 SELECTION.............................................................. 145
TAN ........................................................................... 145
C TIMING ..................................................................... 145
Cached Function block ........................... 17, 67, 70, 71, 78 Chart............................................................................... 93
Drag and Drop............................................................. 71 Action .......................................................................... 31
symbol ......................................................................... 71 Choose a Block to Monitor ......................................83, 104
Capture ........................................................................... 85 dialog ...................................................................83, 104
live parameter values .................................................. 85 Choose a Sequence to Monitor .............................102, 103
parameter .................................................................... 85 dialog .................................................................102, 103
Coil ..........................................................................32, 107
Normally-closed .......................................................... 32
Normally-open............................................................. 32
Reset .......................................................................... 32
Set .............................................................................. 32
Comment Text ................................... 26, 72, 76, 96, 98, 99
add to a Function block ..............................72, 96, 98, 99
add to worksheet..................................72, 76, 96, 98, 99
Comments ...................................................................... 37
Compile ........................................... 99, 101, 109, 110, 111
a Report .................................................................... 101
a Transition ..................................................99, 109, 111
all Transitions in an SFC ........................................... 111
an Action ......................................................99, 109, 111
Structured Text ......................................................... 110
HA263001U055
Index Page II Issue 12 Nov 09
Compound ...............................................................71, 126 Create .............. 31, 65, 67, 71, 74, 76, 79, 80, 93, 98, 100,
Cut and paste.............................................................. 71 104, 125, 126
Delete ......................................................................... 71 .gwf file ...................................................................... 125
Drag and drop ............................................................. 71 .upb file ...................................................................... 125
Function block ............................................................. 71 .upm file ..................................................................... 125
Make ........................................................................... 71 .uxg file ...................................................................... 126
Name .......................................................................... 71 a cached Function block ........................................ 67, 71
Open ........................................................................... 71 a Compound ........................................................ 71, 126
Toolbutton ................................................................... 71 a Data Recording configuration file ............................ 126
type ............................................................................. 71 a Data Recording Group ............................................ 126
View ............................................................................ 71 a LIN Action file............................................................ 31
CONFIG category ..................................................4, 18, 22 a LIN Database file ...................................................... 65
Configure ...... 18, 22, 26, 63, 67, 88, 91, 95, 107, 113, 125, a LIN Generic Sequence file ........................................ 93
126, 127, 129, 130, 131, 135, 139 a LIN Sequence file ..................................................... 93
a Data Recording Block ............................................ 129 a LIN Specific Sequence file ........................................ 93
a Data Recording Field ............................................. 130 an Actions file ............................................................ 104
a Data Recording Group ........................................... 129 Comment text items ..................................................... 76
a LIN Database ..............................................18, 67, 113 Database wiring ........................................................... 74
a LIN Sequence .......................................................... 26 Function block graphics file ......................................... 76
a Tag table .................................................................. 91 Generic from a Specific Sequence ............................ 100
a target Instrument .................................................... 113 Monitor Database from existing Database ................... 80
I/O ......................................................................... 22, 88 Monitor Database from scratch .................................... 79
ladder diagram action ............................................... 107 Specific from a Generic Sequence ............................ 100
LIN Instrument ...................................................... 63, 67 Transition expression ................................................... 98
LINtools Page Setup ................................................. 135 Customise ............................................. 131, 135, 136, 139
LINtools settings ....................................................... 139 Colour Coding ............................................................ 136
Profibus ..................................................................... 125 Printed Page Setup.................................................... 135
step name & initial state .............................................. 95 Settings ...................................................................... 139
Connect .............................................................52, 75, 112 Toolbars ..................................................................... 136
Wire ............................................................................ 75 Cut and Paste.................................................................. 71
Constants ....................................................................... 44 To make a Compound ................................................. 71
Integer ......................................................................... 44
Real ............................................................................ 44
String .......................................................................... 44
Time ............................................................................ 44
Contact ....................................................................32, 107
normally-closed ........................................................... 32
normally-open ............................................................. 32
CONTENTS pane ........................................................... 30
Action Editor................................................................ 30
Control .......................................................................... 103
a Sequence ............................................................... 103
Convergence .................................................................. 97
step ............................................................................. 97
Copy ......................................................................... 65, 81
Fields in watch window ............................................... 81
Function block values ................................................. 65
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Index Page III
D Target Instrument Type ............................................... 66

Data Archiving Update Rate ................................................................ 70
.uhh file........................................................................ 52 Divergence ..................................................................... 97
Data Recording ......................................................... 51, 52 step ............................................................................. 97
.uhh file........................................................................ 52 Drag and Drop .............................................67, 71, 81, 125
Database . 18, 19, 20, 24, 66, 67, 73, 74, 76, 78, 79, 80, 81 Compound .................................................................. 71
Blend layer ............................................................ 66, 67 Field ............................................................................ 81
Blended ....................................................................... 67 File .............................................................................. 67
Configure..................................................................... 18 Function block ............................................................. 71
Drag and Drop............................................................. 67 Function block field ................................................... 125
free space ................................................................... 20 Variable ..................................................................... 125
Graphics file ................................................................ 76
interacting with remote ................................................ 19 E
Monitor ............................................................ 19, 80, 81 Edit .............................. 31, 70, 81, 88, 91, 98, 99, 110, 113
name ........................................................................... 20 a LIN Action ................................................................ 31
Overview ..................................................................... 19 a LIN Database ..............................................18, 70, 113
properties dialog.......................................................... 20 a Sequence Action ...................................................... 99
resource limits ............................................................. 20 Fields .................................................................... 70, 81
Standard...................................................................... 66 Function block ............................................................. 70
Watch window ............................................................. 81 I/O ............................................................................... 88
wire ....................................................................... 73, 74 sequence wiring .......................................................... 98
DBase ............................................................................. 70 Structured Text ......................................................... 110
dialog........................................................................... 70 Tags ............................................................................ 91
editing field .................................................................. 70 Editor tab ...................................................................... 139
Delete ........................................................... 68, 71, 94, 98 Element tab ...................................................103, 105, 107
compound ................................................................... 71 Error .................................. 91, 99, 100, 101, 103, 109, 111
Function block ............................................................. 68 Actions and Transitions ................................99, 109, 111
Step ............................................................................. 94 Add extra names dialog ............................................ 100
Transition .................................................................... 98 'Bad Label' ...................................................99, 109, 111
Wire ....................................................................... 76, 98 'Can't find this name' ............................99, 101, 109, 111
DIAG category ................................................................ 18 No errors report............................................99, 109, 111
Dialog ..... 21, 60, 63, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 71, 79, 80, 81, 83, No Sequences Loaded ............................................. 103
93, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 125, 135, 139 Specific name ............................................................. 91
Add .................................................. 60, 65, 66, 100, 104 Syntax error ................................... 91, 99, 100, 109, 111
Build .......................................................................... 100 'Unresolved jump' .........................................99, 109, 111
Choose ................................................ 83, 102, 103, 104 Event .............................................................................. 24
Instrument Properties .................................................. 63 Transition .................................................................... 24
Load Map for Sequence Editing Session .................... 93 Explorer .......................................................................... 63
Make Action .............................................................. 104
Node address ...................................................... 80, 102 F
Open ................................................. 60, 67, 81, 83, 102 Field...............................................................70, 78, 83, 85
Page Setup ............................................................... 135 Capture ....................................................................... 85
Port Select....................................................... 79, 80, 81 Function block ....................................................... 70, 78
Save .............................................................. 81, 83, 101 Watch window ............................................................. 83
Select Target Library ............................................. 65, 80
Settings ................................................... 21, 69, 71, 139
HA263001U055
Index Page IV Issue 12 Nov 09
Function Block .......... 15, 20, 30, 31, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 74, G
75, 78, 79, 80, 83, 96, 98, 99, 110, 113, 115, 145
Generic............................................................................ 24
ACTION ...................................................................... 31
Names ......................................................................... 24
action type................................................................... 31
Sequence .................................................................... 24
adding Comments tab text .........................72, 96, 98, 99
Generic names ........................................................ 26, 110
Cached ............................................................70, 71, 78
Filtered ....................................................................... 110
Category ................................................................... 145
List ............................................................................. 110
compound ................................................................... 71
Picklist ......................................................................... 26
CONFIG category ................................................. 79, 80
specificity of mapping .................................................. 25
DBase field.................................................................. 70
Generic Sequence......................................................... 100
deleting ....................................................................... 68
create a Specific Sequence ....................................... 100
DIGACT ...................................................................... 31
from a Specific Sequence .......................................... 100
drag and drop to cache ............................................... 71
specificity of name mapping ........................................ 25
Edit.............................................................................. 70
Get Me Started ................................................................ 57
execution order ........................................................... 75
dialog ........................................................................... 57
Header block ............................................................... 20
Go Up toolbutton ............................................................. 71
help ......................................................................68, 145
Goto ................................................................................ 70
highlighting .................................................................. 69 Wire ............................................................................. 70
inspecting fields .......................................................... 69 Grey .............................................................................. 107
list view ..................................................................... 113 insertion marker ......................................................... 107
Monitor ........................................................................ 83
name ........................................................................... 68 H
PC_MON block ..................................................... 79, 80
Header block ............................................................. 15, 24
Picklist ..................................................................74, 110
Category ................................................................ 15, 24
Place ........................................................................... 68
CONFIG category ........................................................ 15
Relink ........................................................................ 115
DBase field .................................................................. 15
Template palette ......................................................... 30
Monitor ......................................................................... 15
Unlink .................................................................113, 115
PC_MON Function block ............................................. 15
Update rate ................................................................. 70
Program Function block ............................................... 15
Function Block Diagram ........................................... 16, 76
Regular Function block ................................................ 15
Auto-create ................................................................. 76
Held Step ...................................................................... 102
Cached ....................................................................... 16
symbol ....................................................................... 102
Comment text symbol ................................................. 16
Help ............................................................................... 145
CONFIG category ....................................................... 16
Function block............................................................ 145
Function block category symbol .................................. 16
High Resolution ............................................................... 81
Function block name ................................................... 16
Hold ....................................................................... 102, 103
Header block ............................................................... 16
a Sequence................................................................ 103
Hidden Function block ................................................ 16
a Step ........................................................................ 102
Local Function block ................................................... 16
a Transition ................................................................ 102
PC_MON block ........................................................... 16
Wire ............................................................................ 16
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Index Page V
I saving ....................................................................... 107

I/O ..................................................................... 22, 88, 113 Set coil ........................................................................ 32
Blocks.................................................................... 18, 22 Toolbuttons ............................................................... 107
Configure....................................................... 22, 88, 113 Transition .........................................................26, 28, 98
Editing ................................................................. 88, 113 What is? ...................................................................... 32
Overview ..................................................................... 22 wired AND ................................................................... 32
Use the I/O table ................................................. 88, 113 LIN .........................................................15, 24, 30, 49, 113
Identifiers ........................................................................ 43 Action .................................................................... 15, 30
Initial ......................................................................... 24, 95 Database..............................................................15, 113
checkbox ..................................................................... 95 Function block ......................................................15, 113
state ............................................................................ 24 Instrument ............................................................15, 113
step ............................................................................. 95 Sequence .................................................................... 24
Inspect ................................................................ 69, 70, 75 LIN Action ..........................................................30, 31, 104
Function block fields .................................................... 69 .stx file ....................................................................... 104
Wire ....................................................................... 70, 75 ACTION block ........................................................... 104
Instrument Properties ..................................................... 63 create a ....................................................................... 31
dialog........................................................................... 63 DIGACT block ........................................................... 104
Intellectual Property ........................................................ 56 edit a ........................................................................... 31
Manage ..................................................................... 144 Monitor ...................................................................... 104
Protection .................................................................. 143 saving ....................................................................... 106
What is ........................................................................ 30
K LIN Database................................... 15, 18, 65, 67, 77, 113
Key identifier ................................................................. 144 Configure .............................................................. 18, 67
KeyFields.ini ................................................................. 142 Create ......................................................................... 65
edit ............................................................................ 142 Open ........................................................................... 65
Save ............................................................................ 77
L What is? ...................................................................... 15
Ladder diagram ................26, 28, 32, 33, 98, 103, 105, 107 LIN Sequence ..............................................24, 26, 93, 101
Action ...................................................... 26, 28, 31, 107 Configure .................................................................... 26
Coil .............................................................................. 32 Open ........................................................................... 93
Constant ...................................................................... 32 Save .......................................................................... 101
Contact ........................................................................ 32 Specific & Generic ...................................................... 24
Element ..................................................................... 107 What is? ...................................................................... 24
Function ...................................................................... 32 LINOPC Server........................................................79, 113
grey insertion marker................................................. 107 Load Map for Sequence Editing session ........................ 93
Jump ..................................................................... 32, 33 dialog .......................................................................... 93
monitoring sequence action ...................................... 103 Loopback .................................................................. 74, 75
monitoring transition .................................................. 105 set start manually ........................................................ 75
Normally-closed coil .................................................... 32 understanding ............................................................. 75
normally-closed contact............................................... 32 What is? ...................................................................... 75
Normally-open coil ...................................................... 32

normally-open contact ................................................. 32
OR function ................................................................. 32
red insertion marker .................................................. 107
Reset coil .................................................................... 32
Rung label ................................................................. 107
HA263001U055
Index Page VI Issue 12 Nov 09
M New ..................................................................... 31, 65, 93

Make ........................................................................73, 104 LIN Action .................................................................... 31
Action ........................................................................ 104 LIN Database ............................................................... 65
dialog ........................................................................ 104 LIN Generic Sequence ................................................ 93
Wire ............................................................................ 73 LIN Sequence .............................................................. 93
Map ............................................. 24, 93, 99, 100, 109, 111 LIN Specific Sequence ................................................ 93
Action ...........................................................99, 109, 111 Normal Transition .......................................................... 102
adding extra names .................................................. 100 symbol ....................................................................... 102
block.field.subfield....................................................... 25 Normalise ...................................................................... 102
Compile ........................................................99, 109, 111 a Step ........................................................................ 102
File ........................................................................ 24, 93 a Transition ................................................................ 102
Open ......................................................................... 100 Normally-closed............................................................... 32
Specific Sequence .................................................... 100 coil ............................................................................... 32
Validate ..................................................................... 100 Normally-open ................................................................. 32
Message Bar .................................................19, 26, 28, 30 coil ............................................................................... 32
Action Editor................................................................ 30 Notation ........................................................................... 46
Database Monitor........................................................ 19
Sequence Action Monitor ............................................ 28 O
Sequence Editor ......................................................... 26 Object code ..................................................... 99, 109, 111
Monitor ........................................ 19, 52, 81, 103, 104, 105 Object properties pane .............................................. 61, 67
a Database - Overview ............................................... 19 Block tab ...................................................................... 67
Ladder diagram Sequence Action ............................. 103 Toolbutton .................................................................... 61
Ladder diagram Transition ........................................ 105 View ............................................................................. 61
LIN Actions................................................................ 104 Online Monitor ................................................................. 80
Watch window ............................................................. 81 Toolbutton .................................................................... 80
Monitor Database ....................................19, 79, 80, 85, 86 Online Reconfiguration .............. 47, 52, 112, 113, 114, 115
access Sequence Monitor ........................................... 80 Apply Strategy ................................... 112, 113, 114, 115
capture live field values ............................................... 85 Delete blocks ............................................................. 115
create new .................................................................. 79 Live changes........................................ 47, 113, 114, 115
from existing Database ............................................... 80 Pending changes ................................. 47, 113, 114, 115
LINOPC server............................................................ 80 Try Strategy ....................................... 112, 113, 114, 115
open ............................................................................ 79 Undelete blocks ......................................................... 115
Overview ..................................................................... 19 Untry Strategy .................................... 112, 113, 114, 115
Save ............................................................................ 86 Open ..................................................... 59, 60, 67, 81, 102
Monitor window............................................................... 81 dialog ....................................................... 60, 67, 81, 102
Open ........................................................................... 81 in current window ......................................................... 60
Move files ....................................................................... 60 in new window ............................................................. 59
Add to Instrument folder .............................................. 60 Monitor window dialog ................................................. 81
Import .......................................................................... 60 Watch window dialog ............................................. 81, 83
Operators and Functions ................................................. 41
N Structured Text ............................................................ 41
Name .............................................................67, 68, 71, 95 OR ................................................................................... 32
Compound .................................................................. 71 function ........................................................................ 32
Field ............................................................................ 95 wired ............................................................................ 32
Function block ....................................................... 67, 68 Order ............................................................................... 75
Step ............................................................................ 95 Function block execution ............................................. 75
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Index Page VII
P
R
Page Setup ................................................................... 135
Rate ................................................................................ 70
dialog......................................................................... 135
edit .............................................................................. 70
Parameter values.................................................... 85, 113
Reconfigure ...........................................112, 113, 114, 115
capture live .................................................................. 85
Delete Function block ............................................... 115
scanning changed ............................................... 85, 113
Online LIN Instrument ........................112, 113, 114, 115
uploading live .............................................................. 85
Online Strategy ..........................................113, 114, 115
Password ...................................................................... 144
Undelete Function block ........................................... 115
Paste .............................................................................. 65
Red ..........................................................................75, 107
Function block parameters .......................................... 65
circle ........................................................................... 75
Picklist............................................. 74, 84, 88, 91, 92, 108
insertion marker ........................................................ 107
Icon ................................................... 84, 88, 91, 92, 108
Remote ....................................................................19, 103
Menu ............................................................. 74, 88, 108
Database..................................................................... 19
Place ................................................................... 26, 68, 94
Sequence .................................................................. 103
Function block ............................................................. 68
Rename .......................................................................... 68
step ....................................................................... 26, 94
dialog .......................................................................... 68
Port Select .......................................................... 79, 80, 81
Reset .......................................................................32, 103
dialog............................................................... 79, 80, 81
a Sequence ............................................................... 103
Profibus............ 49, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 125
coil .............................................................................. 32
Acyclic data ............................................... 119, 123, 125
Resources ...................................................................... 20
Demand Data ............................................................ 121
highest ........................................................................ 20
Extended Diagnostics................................................ 119
max ............................................................................. 20
GWProfM_CON block ....................................... 117, 119
used ............................................................................ 20
Input data .......................................................... 119, 122
ROOT ................................................................26, 65, 102
Master ....................................................... 118, 119, 122
comments ................................................................... 26
Module .............................................. 119, 120, 121, 122
sub-window ............................................................... 102
Output data ....................................................... 119, 122
worksheet.................................................................... 65
ProfibusDvp1-M ........................................................ 118
Run ............................................................................... 103
Protocol ..................................................................... 118
a Sequence ............................................................... 103
Slave ..................................118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123
Slot number and Index ...................................... 123, 125
What is? ...................................................................... 49
Profibus Binary file ................................................ 122, 125
Profibus Master Configurator .................................. 50, 116
Tree view................................................................... 116
Programmer .................................................................... 53
Programming .................................................................. 54
Properties ........................................................... 20, 29, 61
Database Editor .......................................................... 20
Sequence Editor.......................................................... 29
viewing object.............................................................. 61
HA263001U055
Index Page VIII Issue 12 Nov 09
S
Save ............................................ 77, 81, 86, 101, 108, 110 Sequence Editor ........ 24, 26, 29, 73, 93, 97, 101, 102, 103
Ladder Diagram ........................................................ 108 Actions ......................................................................... 29
LIN Actions................................................................ 106 Associations................................................................. 29
LIN Database .............................................................. 77 Configure ..................................................................... 26
LIN Monitor Database ................................................. 86 Control operations ..................................................... 103
LIN Sequence ....................................................101, 110 free space .................................................................... 29
Map File .................................................................... 101 hold ............................................................................ 103
Watch window ............................................................. 81 message bar ................................................................ 26
Scan ........................................................................85, 113 Open ............................................................................ 93
Changed Parameters ...........................................85, 113 Overview ...................................................................... 26
Select Target Library ................................................ 65, 80 program name ............................................................. 29
dialog .................................................................... 65, 80 properties dialog .......................................................... 29
Sequence Action Monitor ................................28, 102, 103 Reset ......................................................................... 103
Chart Action window ................................................... 28 Run ............................................................................ 103
Choose a Sequence to Monitor dialog ...................... 103 SFC ............................................................................. 29
Contents pane............................................................. 28 Specific & Generic ................................................. 24, 93
Ladder diagram Action window ................................... 28 status bar ..................................................................... 93
message bar ............................................................... 28 Steps ........................................................................... 29
Open ......................................................................... 102 Stop ........................................................................... 103
Operations ................................................................ 102 Structured Text ............................................................ 29
Overview ..................................................................... 28 Transitions ................................................................... 29
Step tab....................................................................... 28 Wire ....................................................................... 73, 97
Text Action window ..................................................... 28 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ..... 24, 27, 29, 31, 45, 93,
94, 102, 103
Transition tab .............................................................. 28
Actions ......................................................................... 45
Window ..................................................................... 102
associating with a Database ........................................ 94
error message............................................................ 103
limits to resources ........................................................ 29
Monitor Sequence...................................................... 103
Overview ...................................................................... 27
Requirements .............................................................. 27
SFC_CON block ............................................ 27, 94, 103
SFC_DISP block .......................................................... 27
Setpoint ..................................................................... 53, 54
Overview ...................................................................... 54
Setpoint Programming..................................................... 53
Programming ............................................................... 54
Settings dialog ............................................. 21, 69, 71, 139
Editor tab ................................................................... 139
Palette tab ................................................................. 139
Tags tab ..................................................................... 139
Specific Sequence................................................... 93, 100
creating from a Generic Sequence ............................ 100
Editor ........................................................................... 93
Standard Database ................................................... 17, 66
Default DBF ................................................................. 66
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Index Page IX
Statements...................................................................... 37 notation ....................................................................... 46

For... ............................................................................ 38 operators and functions .............................................. 41
If 38 punctuation ................................................................. 46
If...else......................................................................... 38 Repeat... statements ................................................. 110
If...else...if... ................................................................. 38 SFC step ..................................................................... 42
Repeat...Until... ........................................................... 39 Spaces ........................................................................ 36
While... ........................................................................ 39 Statements .................................................................. 37
States ............................................................................. 24 Transitions .................................................................. 45
Step ...............................29, 72, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 102 Variable ................................................................42, 110
Comments tab text .................................... 72, 96, 98, 99 what is? ....................................................................... 36
Convergence ............................................................... 97 While... statements ................................................... 110
Divergence .................................................................. 97 Symbol ...................................... 67, 69, 74, 94, 95, 97, 102
grid .............................................................................. 94 Active step ................................................................ 102
hold ........................................................................... 102 Comment tab Text ...................................................... 69
initial ............................................................................ 95 Database wire ....................................................... 67, 74
limits to resources ....................................................... 29 Green diamond ......................................................... 102
name & initial state ...................................................... 95 Held step ................................................................... 102
normal state .............................................................. 102 Normal transition ....................................................... 102
placing ......................................................................... 94 Step ...................................................................... 94, 95
step-to-transition wiring ............................................... 97 Step Wire .............................................................. 94, 97
symbol ................................................................... 94, 95 Target ......................................................................... 97
tab ............................................................................... 95
time setup.................................................................... 95 T
toolbutton .................................................................... 94 T# ............................................................................. 44, 95
wire ............................................................................. 94 Action qualifier ...................................................... 44, 95
Step Wire .................................................................. 94, 97 Tab ..........................................................95, 103, 105, 107
symbol ................................................................... 94, 97 Element ......................................................103, 105, 107
Stop .............................................................................. 103 Step ............................................................................ 95
a Sequence ............................................................... 103 Tag ...................................................... 21, 91, 92, 113, 139
Strategy .......................................................................... 67 Block ........................................................................... 21
Structured Text (ST) 29, 36, 37, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 110 Common ..................................................................... 21
Actions ........................................................................ 45 Configure .............................................................. 21, 91
aliases ......................................................................... 42 Editing ......................................................................... 91
Assignments................................................................ 37 Field ............................................................................ 21
bitfields ........................................................................ 42 I/O ............................................................................... 21
Comments ................................................................... 37 icon - block .................................................................. 92
compile ...................................................................... 110 icon - blue ................................................................... 92
Constants .................................................................... 44 icon - yellow ................................................................ 92
Database names ......................................................... 42 Overview ..................................................................... 21
editing........................................................................ 110 tab ............................................................................. 139
Example .................................................................... 110 Use the Tag table.................................................91, 113
Expressions................................................................. 40
For... statements ....................................................... 110
free space ................................................................... 29
Function .................................................................... 110
Identifiers..................................................................... 43
If... statements..................................................... 37, 110
HA263001U055
Index Page X Issue 12 Nov 09
Target ................................ 20, 65, 66, 80, 93, 97, 110, 113 V
Database............................................................110, 113 Var................................................................................. 107
DBase icon.................................................................. 80 read ........................................................................... 107
Directory information ................................................... 80 write ........................................................................... 107
Instrument Type .................................................... 66, 80 Variable ................................................................... 98, 110
Library select dialog .................................................... 65 Generic Sequence ..................................................... 110
Symbol ........................................................................ 97 LIN Action .................................................................. 110
Template .....................................................20, 26, 30, 139 Specific Sequence ..................................................... 110
free space ................................................................... 20 Structured Text
Palette ............................................................26, 30, 139 ST ............................................................................ 42
Text .....................................................................45, 76, 95 View ................................................................ 61, 102, 145
Action .................................................................... 31, 45 Contents Pane ............................................................. 60
Time ............................................................................... 44 LIN Blocks Reference Manual ................................... 145
Constants .................................................................... 44 Object properties pane ................................................ 61
Timing ............................................................................. 95 Status bar .................................................................... 62
Tools ............................................................................... 14 Steps ......................................................................... 102
Transition24, 29, 72, 96, 97, 98, 99, 102, 105, 109, 110, 111
Comments text ...........................................72, 96, 98, 99
Compile ................................................99, 109, 110, 111
Errors ................................................... 99, 109, 110, 111
Event ........................................................................... 24
Expression .................................................................. 98
Isolated Transition bar ................................................ 97
Ladder diagram ......................................................... 105
Limits .......................................................................... 29
Object properties pane ................................................ 98
State ......................................................................... 102
Validate ........................................................99, 109, 111
Tree View ..................................................................... 116
Profibus Configurator ................................................ 116
Try strategy................................................................... 112
Tutorial ........................................................................... 67
U
Untry Strategy............................................................... 112
Update Rate ................................................................... 70
Rate Dialog ................................................................. 70
Use ....................................................................81, 88, 134
Contents pane............................................................... 6
Find Dialog .....................................................69, 94, 105
I/O table ...................................................................... 88
Programmer Wizard .................................................. 134
Watch Window ............................................................ 81
HA263001U055
Issue 12 Nov 09 Index Page XI
W Loopback? .................................................................. 75
Watch window..................................................... 81, 83, 84 Profibus Configuration? .............................................. 49
add from Block tab ...................................................... 83 Profibus? ..................................................................... 49
add from Find Field dialog ........................................... 81 Structured Text? ......................................................... 36
add from ST ................................................................ 84 Tag configuration? ...................................................... 21
add to .......................................................................... 84 Wire .....................................................................32, 67, 75
Open dialog ................................................................. 83 OR .............................................................................. 32
Resolution ................................................................... 81 Wiring (Database)....................................67, 70, 73, 74, 75
Save dialog ................................................................. 83 black circle on arrowhead ........................................... 75
What is ............. 5, 15, 21, 22, 24, 30, 32, 36, 49, 51, 56, 75 Database............................................................... 67, 74
.uhh file........................................................................ 51 goto source ................................................................. 70
.uxg file ........................................................................ 51 Inspect .................................................................. 70, 75
a Contents tab? ............................................................. 5 loop ..................................................................67, 74, 75
a Database? ................................................................ 15 red circle on arrowhead ........................................ 67, 75
a ladder diagram? ....................................................... 32 Re-routing ................................................................... 67
a Sequence? ............................................................... 24 Wiring (Sequence) .........................................73, 95, 97, 98
an Action? ................................................................... 30 Re-routing ................................................................... 98
Data Recording Configuration ..................................... 51 Step-to-transition......................................................... 97
I/O configuration? ........................................................ 22 Symbol ........................................................................ 95
Type ............................................................................ 97
HA263001U055
Index Page XII Issue 12 Nov 09
Inter-Company sales and service locations
AUSTRALIA Sydney FINLAND Abo NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd. Eurotherm Finland Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099 Telephone (+358) 2250 6030 Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288 Fax (+358) 2250 3201 Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail info.fi@eurotherm.com E-mail info.nl@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.au@eurotherm.com
NORWAY Oslo
AUSTRIA Vienna FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm A/S
Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone (+47 67) 592170
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+33 478) 664500 Fax (+47 67) 118301
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
Fax (+33 478) 352490 E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
E-mail info.fr@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.at@eurotherm.com
POLAND Katowice
GERMANY Limburg Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone (+48 32) 218 5100
Eurotherm S.A/N.V. Telephone (+49 6431) 2980 Fax (+48 32) 218 5108
Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Fax (+49 6431) 298119 E-mail info.pl@eurotherm.com
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 E-mail info.de@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.be@eurotherm.com
SPAIN Madrid
Eurotherm Espaa SA
HONG KONG Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001
BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm Hongkong Fax (+34 91) 661 9093
Eurotherm Ltda. Telephone (+85 2) 2873 3826 E-mail info.es@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Fax (+85 2) 2870 0148
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345 E-mail info.hk@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.br@eurotherm.com SWEDEN Malmo
Eurotherm AB
INDIA Chennai Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Eurotherm India Limited Fax (+46 40) 384545
CHINA Telephone (+91 44) 2496 1129 E-mail info.se@eurotherm.com
Eurotherm China Fax (+91 44) 2496 1831
Shanghai Office E-mail info.in@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188 SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Fax (+86 21) 6145 2602
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com IRELAND Dublin Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
Eurotherm Ireland Limited E-mail info.ch@eurotherm.com
Beijing Office Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800
Telephone (+86 10) 8458 5757 Fax (+353 1) 469 1300
Fax (+86 10) 8458 4521 E-mail info.ie@eurotherm.com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
ITALY Como Fax (+44 1903) 265982
Guangzhou Office E-mail info.uk@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+86 20) 3810 6506 Eurotherm S.r.l
Telephone (+39 031) 975111 Web www.eurotherm.co.uk
Fax (+86 20) 3810 6511
Fax (+39 031) 977512
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.it@eurotherm.com
U.S.A Leesburg VA
Eurotherm Inc.
Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000
DENMARK Copenhagen KOREA Seoul Fax (+1 703) 669 1300
Eurotherm Danmark AS Eurotherm Korea Limited E-mail info.us@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+45 70) 234670 Telephone (+82 31) 2738507 Web www.eurotherm.com
Fax (+45 70) 234660 Fax (+82 31) 2738508
E-mail info.dk@eurotherm.com E-mail info.kr@eurotherm.com ED58
invensys
EUROTHERM
EUROTHERM LIMITED
Faraday Close, Durrington, Worthing, West Sussex, BN13 3PL
Telephone: +44 (0)1903 268500 Facsimile: +44 (0)1903 265982
e-mail: info.uk@eurotherm.com
Website: http://www.eurotherm.co.uk
Specification subject to change without notice. Eurotherm Limited. HA263001U055/12

Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, EPower, Eycon, Eyris and Wonderware (CN25797)
are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
User Screen Editor
Custom screen configuration software
Help Manual
E U ROT H E R M

2008 Eurotherm Limited
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modi-
fied, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval sys-
tem other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which
the document relates, without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improve-

ment. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice.
The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance
only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors
in this document.
USER SCREEN EDITOR HELP MANUAL
Table of Contents
1 USER SCREEN EDITOR ....................................................................................................................................................................1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS.....................................................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 LINtools Online Help....................................................................................................................................................1
1.1.2 LIN Blocks Reference Manual....................................................................................................................................1
1.1.3 Application And Control Modules Operator Manual..........................................................................................1
1.2 USER SCREEN EDITOR - OVERVIEW ..............................................................................................................................2
1.2.1 Page Sets, Pages, and Targets ....................................................................................................................................2
1.2.2 Panes ................................................................................................................................................................................2
1.2.3 Page Items ......................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2.4 Page Item Properties dialogue ..................................................................................................................................3
2 GETTING STARTED ..........................................................................................................................................................................4
2.1 DESIGNING A USER SCREEN............................................................................................................................................4
2.2 OPEN THE USER SCREEN EDITOR ..................................................................................................................................4
2.2.1 To open the User Screen Editor: ..............................................................................................................................4
2.3 USE THE USER SCREEN EDITOR......................................................................................................................................5
2.3.1 To use the User Screen Editor:..................................................................................................................................5
3 MAIN DISPLAY REGIONS ...............................................................................................................................................................6
3.1 MAIN DISPLAY ....................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.1 Page set ...........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1.2 Pages and Panes ............................................................................................................................................................7
3.1.3 Page items.......................................................................................................................................................................9
3.1.4 To Define customised colours................................................................................................................................ 10
3.2 REPORT WINDOW........................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.3 LIN DATABASE BROWSER ............................................................................................................................................. 12
3.3.1 Associating a LIN Database with the Page Set ................................................................................................... 12
3.3.2 Instrument browser................................................................................................................................................... 13
4 TARGET DEFINITION.................................................................................................................................................................... 14
4.1 HOW TO CREATE A TARGET SCREEN TYPE .............................................................................................................. 14
4.2 HOW TO EDIT THE TARGET SCREEN TYPE ............................................................................................................... 15
5 MENUS ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
5.1 FILE MENU ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16
5.2 EDIT MENU ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18
5.3 VIEW MENU...................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.4 PAGESET MENU ............................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.5 PAGE MENU...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.6 WINDOW MENU.............................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.7 HELP MENU....................................................................................................................................................................... 22
HA260749U005 Contents Page i

Issue 4 Mar 08
6 TOOLBARS...................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.1 MAIN TOOLBAR............................................................................................................................................................... 23
6.1.1 New Page Set command.......................................................................................................................................... 23
6.1.2 Open Page Set command ........................................................................................................................................ 23
6.1.3 Save Page Set command.......................................................................................................................................... 23
6.1.4 New Page command ................................................................................................................................................. 23
6.1.5 Open Page command ............................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.6 Close Page command ............................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.7 Build Output (OIFL) Files command ..................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.8 Verify Page Set command ....................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.9 Find command............................................................................................................................................................ 24
6.1.10 Open Database command....................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.11 Back Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.12 Cut command ............................................................................................................................................................. 24
6.1.13 Copy command .......................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.14 Paste command.......................................................................................................................................................... 24
6.1.15 Undo command ......................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.1.16 Redo command .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.1.17 Zoom Factor command............................................................................................................................................ 25
6.1.18 Whats This? command ............................................................................................................................................. 25
6.2 STATUS BAR ..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.3 TEXT BAR........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
6.3.1 Font style command ................................................................................................................................................. 26
6.3.2 Align Text Left command ........................................................................................................................................ 26
6.3.3 Align Text Left-biased Centre command............................................................................................................. 26
6.3.4 Align Text Right-biased Centre command .......................................................................................................... 26
6.3.5 Align Text Right command...................................................................................................................................... 26
6.4 PLACEMENT BAR............................................................................................................................................................. 27
6.4.1 Grid settings dialogue............................................................................................................................................... 28
6.5 DRAW BAR........................................................................................................................................................................ 29
7 HOW TO... ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1 SPECIFY/CONFIGURE A TARGET SCREEN TYPE........................................................................................................ 31
7.2 SPECIFY CHARACTER MAPPINGS ................................................................................................................................ 31
7.3 ASSOCIATE A LIN DATABASE WITH A PAGE SET.................................................................................................... 32
7.4 SHOW COLD START VALUES ....................................................................................................................................... 32
7.5 VERIFY A PAGE SET......................................................................................................................................................... 32
7.5.1 To verify a Page Set................................................................................................................................................... 33
7.6 USE THE FIND DIALOGUE ............................................................................................................................................. 33
7.6.1 To find all occurrences of a text string................................................................................................................ 33
7.7 SET DEFAULT OFF SCREEN FUNCTION KEY (OSFK) PANE ................................................................................... 34
7.8 WRITE PAGE ITEM ACTIONS......................................................................................................................................... 34
Contents Page ii HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
7.8.1 Example ........................................................................................................................................................................ 34

7.8.2 Structured Text syntax.............................................................................................................................................. 34
7.8.3 Action Lists .................................................................................................................................................................. 34
7.8.4 Actions.......................................................................................................................................................................... 34
7.8.5 Action qualifiers ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
7.9 USE THE TEXT BAR COMMANDS TO... ...................................................................................................................... 36
7.9.1 Edit Text ....................................................................................................................................................................... 36
7.9.2 Edit the Font Style ..................................................................................................................................................... 36
7.9.3 Align Text to the left................................................................................................................................................. 36
7.9.4 Align Text to the centre with Left-Bias ................................................................................................................ 37
7.9.5 Align Text to the right .............................................................................................................................................. 37
7.9.6 Align Text to the centre with Right-Bias.............................................................................................................. 37
7.10 USE THE DRAW BAR COMMAND TO... ..................................................................................................................... 38
7.10.1 Select or Edit a Page Item ....................................................................................................................................... 38
7.10.2 Add a Bar Chart.......................................................................................................................................................... 38
7.10.3 Add a Bitmap .............................................................................................................................................................. 38
7.10.4 Add a Button............................................................................................................................................................... 39
7.10.5 Add a Text Variable................................................................................................................................................... 39
7.10.6 Add a Touch Area...................................................................................................................................................... 39
7.10.7 Add a Trend Graph.................................................................................................................................................... 40
7.10.8 Add a Program Profile.............................................................................................................................................. 40
7.10.9 Add an OIFL Object................................................................................................................................................... 40
7.10.10 Draw a Line ............................................................................................................................................................ 41
7.10.11 Draw a Rectangle.................................................................................................................................................. 41
7.10.12 Draw a Rounded Rectangle ............................................................................................................................... 41
7.10.13 Draw a Triangle ..................................................................................................................................................... 41
7.10.14 Draw an Ellipse or Circle..................................................................................................................................... 42
7.10.15 Select a Line/Text Colour ................................................................................................................................... 42
7.10.16 Select a Fill/Background Colour ....................................................................................................................... 42
7.11 USE THE PLACEMENT BAR COMMANDS TO... ........................................................................................................ 43
7.11.1 Activate the Snap object(s) to nearest gridline ................................................................................................. 43
7.11.2 Align the bottom edges of objects ....................................................................................................................... 43
7.11.3 Align the left edges of objects ............................................................................................................................... 43
7.11.4 Align the right edges of objects............................................................................................................................. 43
7.11.5 Align the top edges of objects ............................................................................................................................... 43
7.11.6 Bring an object forward by one layer .................................................................................................................. 43
7.11.7 Bring an object to the front.................................................................................................................................... 43
7.11.8 Send an object backward by one layer................................................................................................................ 43
7.11.9 Send an object to the back..................................................................................................................................... 43
7.11.10 Flip object(s) horizontally................................................................................................................................... 43
7.11.11 Flip object(s) vertically ........................................................................................................................................ 44
HA260749U005 Contents Page iii

Issue 4 Mar 08
7.11.12 Group multiple objects ....................................................................................................................................... 44

7.11.13 Ungroup a grouped object ................................................................................................................................ 44
7.11.14 Show/Hide the gridlines ..................................................................................................................................... 44
8 CUSTOMISING THE USER SCREEN EDITOR............................................................................................................................ 45
8.1 DEFINE CUSTOMISED COLOURS................................................................................................................................. 45
8.2 SELECT THE COLOUR OF THE GRIDLINES................................................................................................................. 45
8.3 CUSTOMISE THE GRID SETTINGS................................................................................................................................ 45
8.4 CUSTOMISE THE USER SCREEN BACKGROUND COLOUR.................................................................................... 45
9 STRUCTURED TEXT (ST).............................................................................................................................................................. 46
9.1 WHAT IS STRUCTURED TEXT? ..................................................................................................................................... 46
9.1.1 Structured Text - Example....................................................................................................................................... 46
9.2 EDITING STRUCTURED TEXT ........................................................................................................................................ 47
9.3 COMMENTS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)................................................................................................................... 47
9.4 CONSTANTS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST).................................................................................................................. 47
9.4.1 Integer constants ....................................................................................................................................................... 47
9.4.2 Real constants............................................................................................................................................................. 48
9.4.3 Time constants ........................................................................................................................................................... 48
9.4.4 String constant ........................................................................................................................................................... 48
9.4.5 String constants & T1000/T100 fields................................................................................................................... 48
9.5 EXPRESSIONS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST) ................................................................................................................ 49
9.5.1 Arithmetical................................................................................................................................................................. 49
9.5.2 Logical........................................................................................................................................................................... 49
9.6 IDENTIFIERS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)................................................................................................................... 49
9.6.1 Valid Structured Text identifiers............................................................................................................................ 49
9.6.2 Invalid Structured Text identifiers......................................................................................................................... 49
9.7 OPERATORS AND FUNCTIONS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST) ................................................................................ 50
9.8 SPACES IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST) ........................................................................................................................... 53
9.8.1 Mandatory spaces...................................................................................................................................................... 53
9.8.2 Illegal spaces ............................................................................................................................................................... 53
9.8.3 Optional spaces .......................................................................................................................................................... 53
9.9 STATEMENTS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST) ................................................................................................................ 53
9.9.1 Assignment .................................................................................................................................................................. 53
9.9.2 IF-statement ................................................................................................................................................................ 54
9.10 TRANSITIONS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)................................................................................................................ 54
9.11 VARIABLES IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)..................................................................................................................... 54
9.12 LIN DATABASE FIELD/SUBFIELD NAMES................................................................................................................... 55
9.12.1 Bitfields......................................................................................................................................................................... 55
9.12.2 Aliases ........................................................................................................................................................................... 55
9.12.3 LIN Sequence step variables ................................................................................................................................... 55
10 GETTING SPECIFIC HELP ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
10.1 OPEN ONLINE HELP FILE ............................................................................................................................................... 56
Contents Page iv HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
10.2 SHOW CONTEXT-SENSITIVE HELP .............................................................................................................................. 56

10.2.1 Dialogue Help ............................................................................................................................................................. 56
10.2.2 Menu Help................................................................................................................................................................... 56
10.2.3 Toolbutton Help......................................................................................................................................................... 56
11 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE......................................................................................................................................... 57
11.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 57
11.2 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - BITMAPS PAGE................................................................................................. 58
11.2.1 Bitmaps list .................................................................................................................................................................. 58
11.2.2 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 58
11.2.3 Edit................................................................................................................................................................................. 58
11.2.4 Remove......................................................................................................................................................................... 58
11.3 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - CAPABILITIES PAGE......................................................................................... 59
11.3.1 Capabilities .................................................................................................................................................................. 59
11.4 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - COLOURS PAGE............................................................................................... 60
11.4.1 Table list....................................................................................................................................................................... 60
11.4.2 Setup ............................................................................................................................................................................. 60
11.4.3 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 60
11.4.4 Edit................................................................................................................................................................................. 60
11.4.5 Remove......................................................................................................................................................................... 60
11.5 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - DRAWING PAGE .............................................................................................. 61
11.6 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - FILENAME PAGE .............................................................................................. 61
11.6.1 Target filename .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
11.7 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - FONTS PAGE..................................................................................................... 62
11.7.1 Table list....................................................................................................................................................................... 62
11.7.2 Setup ............................................................................................................................................................................. 62
11.7.3 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 62
11.7.4 Edit................................................................................................................................................................................. 62
11.7.5 Remove......................................................................................................................................................................... 62
11.8 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - GENERAL PAGE ................................................................................................ 63
11.8.1 Target Name ............................................................................................................................................................... 63
11.8.2 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................................. 63
11.8.3 Character Dimensions............................................................................................................................................... 63
11.9 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - GRID PAGE ........................................................................................................ 63
11.9.1 Default Major Grid Settings .................................................................................................................................... 63
11.9.2 Default Minor Grid Settings .................................................................................................................................... 63
11.9.3 Default Zoom.............................................................................................................................................................. 64
11.10 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - INSTRUMENTS PAGE ...................................................................................... 64
11.10.1 Instruments list...................................................................................................................................................... 64
11.10.2 Add........................................................................................................................................................................... 64
11.10.3 Edit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 64
11.10.4 Remove ................................................................................................................................................................... 64
HA260749U005 Contents Page v

Issue 4 Mar 08
11.11 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - MAPPINGS PAGE ............................................................................................. 65

11.11.1 Character drawing capabilities.......................................................................................................................... 65
11.11.2 Graphical symbol-character mappings............................................................................................................ 65
11.11.3 Browse .................................................................................................................................................................. 65
11.12 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - MISCELLANEOUS PAGE ................................................................................. 65
11.12.1 Miscellaneous features........................................................................................................................................ 65
11.12.2 Database ................................................................................................................................................................. 65
11.13 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - OSFK PAGE........................................................................................................ 66
11.13.1 Off Screen Function Keys................................................................................................................................... 66
11.14 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - PANES PAGE ..................................................................................................... 67
11.14.1 Table list.................................................................................................................................................................. 67
11.14.2 Setup........................................................................................................................................................................ 67
11.14.3 Add........................................................................................................................................................................... 67
11.14.4 Edit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 67
11.14.5 Remove ................................................................................................................................................................... 67
11.15 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - UNDERLINES PAGE ......................................................................................... 68
11.15.1 Special underline characters.............................................................................................................................. 68
11.15.2 Underline colours................................................................................................................................................. 68
11.16 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - VARIABLES PAGE............................................................................................. 69
11.16.1 Target Specific System Variables list ............................................................................................................... 69
11.16.2 Add........................................................................................................................................................................... 69
11.16.3 Edit ........................................................................................................................................................................... 69
11.16.4 Delete ...................................................................................................................................................................... 69
11.16.5 Export ...................................................................................................................................................................... 69
11.16.6 Import...................................................................................................................................................................... 69
12 WHAT IS .................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
12.1 A LIN DATABASE? ........................................................................................................................................................... 70
12.2 A LIN FUNCTION BLOCK?............................................................................................................................................. 70
12.3 A USER SCREEN EDITOR ACTION?.............................................................................................................................. 70
12.3.1 Supported Actions..................................................................................................................................................... 71
12.4 A VARIABLE?..................................................................................................................................................................... 74
12.4.1 LIN Variable................................................................................................................................................................. 74
12.4.2 Instrument Variable .................................................................................................................................................. 74
12.5 AN AGENT?....................................................................................................................................................................... 74
12.6 AN INSTRUMENT VARIABLE BROWSER?................................................................................................................... 75
12.6.1 Using the Instrument Variable Browser window ............................................................................................... 75
12.7 AN OPERATOR INTERFACE LANGUAGE (OIFL)?...................................................................................................... 75
12.8 A LIN DATABASE BROWSER? ....................................................................................................................................... 75
12.8.1 Using the Browser window...................................................................................................................................... 75
12.9 A REPORT WINDOW?..................................................................................................................................................... 75
13 OTHER ITEMS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 76
Contents Page vi HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.1 3D STYLING PROPERTIES PAGE ................................................................................................................................... 76

13.1.1 Bordering ..................................................................................................................................................................... 76
13.1.2 OK.................................................................................................................................................................................. 76
13.1.3 Apply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 76
13.1.4 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 76
13.2 ACCESS PROPERTIES PAGE............................................................................................................................................ 76
13.2.1 Visibility ........................................................................................................................................................................ 76
13.2.2 Writability .................................................................................................................................................................... 77
13.2.3 OK.................................................................................................................................................................................. 77
13.2.4 Apply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 77
13.2.5 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 77
13.3 ADD/EDIT BITMAP DIALOGUE..................................................................................................................................... 77
13.3.1 Bitmap name............................................................................................................................................................... 77
13.3.2 Bitmap filename......................................................................................................................................................... 77
13.3.3 Description .................................................................................................................................................................. 77
13.3.4 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 77
13.3.5 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 77
13.4 ADD/EDIT COLOUR DIALOGUE ................................................................................................................................... 78
13.4.1 Colour details.............................................................................................................................................................. 78
13.4.2 Colour ........................................................................................................................................................................... 78
13.4.3 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 78
13.4.4 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 78
13.5 ADD/EDIT FONT DIALOGUE......................................................................................................................................... 78
13.5.1 Font name.................................................................................................................................................................... 78
13.5.2 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................................. 78
13.5.3 Font properties........................................................................................................................................................... 78
13.5.4 Font filename (under Targets Font directory): .................................................................................................. 78
13.5.5 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 78
13.5.6 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 78
13.6 ADD/EDIT PANE DIALOGUE ......................................................................................................................................... 79
13.6.1 Pane type and name ................................................................................................................................................. 79
13.6.2 Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................................. 79
13.6.3 Description .................................................................................................................................................................. 79
13.6.4 Support Default Pages.............................................................................................................................................. 79
13.7 ADD/EDIT TARGET VARIABLE DIALOGUE................................................................................................................. 79
13.7.1 Target Variable ........................................................................................................................................................... 79
13.7.2 Add ................................................................................................................................................................................ 79
13.7.3 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 79
13.8 APPEARANCE PROPERTIES PAGE................................................................................................................................. 80
13.8.1 Line/Text ...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
13.8.2 Fill/Background .......................................................................................................................................................... 80
HA260749U005 Contents Page vii

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.8.3 OK.................................................................................................................................................................................. 80
13.8.4 Apply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 80
13.8.5 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 80
13.9 BAR CHART PROPERTIES PAGE.................................................................................................................................... 80
13.9.1 Fill direction ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
13.9.2 Underline used for bar chart.................................................................................................................................. 80
13.9.3 OK.................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
13.9.4 Apply ............................................................................................................................................................................. 81
13.9.5 Cancel ........................................................................................................................................................................... 81
13.10 BITMAP ENUMERATION PROPERTIES PAGE............................................................................................................. 81
13.10.1 Enumerated............................................................................................................................................................ 81
13.10.2 Variable selection ................................................................................................................................................. 81
13.10.3 Bitmap selection ................................................................................................................................................... 82
13.10.4 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 82
13.10.5 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 82
13.10.6 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 82
13.11 BITMAP PROPERTIES PAGE ........................................................................................................................................... 83
13.11.1 Bitmap ..................................................................................................................................................................... 83
13.11.2 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 83
13.11.3 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 83
13.11.4 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 83
13.12 BROWSER BLOCK ............................................................................................................................................................ 84
13.12.1 Browser Field (no subfields) .............................................................................................................................. 84
13.12.2 Browser Field (with subfields)........................................................................................................................... 84
13.12.3 Browser Multi-bit field ........................................................................................................................................ 84
13.12.4 Browser Selection box......................................................................................................................................... 84
13.12.5 Browser Subfield................................................................................................................................................... 84
13.12.6 Browser Type box................................................................................................................................................. 85
13.13 BUTTON TOOL PROPERTIES PAGE.............................................................................................................................. 85
13.14 COLOUR PALETTE ........................................................................................................................................................... 85
13.15 CHARACTER BASED SCREEN TYPES............................................................................................................................ 86
13.16 COLOUR ATTRIBUTE PROPERTIES PAGE ................................................................................................................... 86
13.16.1 Colour Change....................................................................................................................................................... 86
13.16.2 Variable selection ................................................................................................................................................. 86
13.16.3 Colour selection.................................................................................................................................................... 87
13.16.4 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 87
13.16.5 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 87
13.16.6 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 87
13.17 COLOUR LIMITS PROPERTIES PAGE............................................................................................................................ 87
13.17.1 Colour Limit Minimum........................................................................................................................................ 87
13.17.2 Colour Limit Maximum ....................................................................................................................................... 88
Contents Page viii HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.17.3 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 88
13.17.4 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 88
13.17.5 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 88
13.18 COLOUR SETUP DIALOGUE .......................................................................................................................................... 88
13.18.1 Default colours...................................................................................................................................................... 88
13.18.2 Colour options ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
13.19 CONFIGURE PAGE ITEM ACTIONS.............................................................................................................................. 88
13.19.1 Enabling Actions ................................................................................................................................................... 88
13.20 CONFIRMATION PROPERTIES PAGE........................................................................................................................... 89
13.20.1 Required Confirmation Type ............................................................................................................................. 89
13.20.2 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 89
13.20.3 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 89
13.20.4 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 89
13.21 DATA TYPES...................................................................................................................................................................... 90
13.22 DEFAULT T2900 AGENTS............................................................................................................................................... 91
13.23 ENUMERATION PROPERTIES PAGE............................................................................................................................. 92
13.23.1 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 92
13.23.2 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 92
13.23.3 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 92
13.24 FILL STYLE PROPERTIES PAGE....................................................................................................................................... 93
13.24.1 Fill style ................................................................................................................................................................... 93
13.24.2 Fill mode ................................................................................................................................................................. 93
13.24.3 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 93
13.24.4 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 93
13.24.5 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 93
13.25 FONT SETUP DIALOGUE................................................................................................................................................ 93
13.25.1 Default Font ........................................................................................................................................................... 93
13.25.2 Font options........................................................................................................................................................... 93
13.25.3 Font dialogue......................................................................................................................................................... 93
13.26 FORMAT PROPERTIES PAGE ......................................................................................................................................... 94
13.26.1 Number accuracy ................................................................................................................................................. 94
13.26.2 Real Number format............................................................................................................................................ 94
13.26.3 Integer Number format ...................................................................................................................................... 94
13.26.4 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 94
13.26.5 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 94
13.26.6 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 94
13.27 GRID SETTINGS DIALOGUE........................................................................................................................................... 95
13.27.1 Major grid settings ............................................................................................................................................... 95
13.27.2 Minor grid settings ............................................................................................................................................... 95
13.27.3 General grid settings............................................................................................................................................ 95
13.27.4 Configure using default font ............................................................................................................................. 95
HA260749U005 Contents Page ix

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.27.5 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 95
13.27.6 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 95
13.28 LIMITS PROPERTIES PAGE ............................................................................................................................................. 96
13.28.1 Low Limit ................................................................................................................................................................ 96
13.28.2 Maximum................................................................................................................................................................ 96
13.28.3 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 96
13.28.4 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 96
13.28.5 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 96
13.29 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES PAGE.......................................................................................................................... 97
13.29.1 Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................................................ 97
13.29.2 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 97
13.29.3 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 97
13.29.4 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 97
13.30 NEW PAGE SET DIALOGUE ........................................................................................................................................... 97
13.30.1 Name of new Page Set........................................................................................................................................ 97
13.30.2 Target panel........................................................................................................................................................... 97
13.30.3 Status Pane OIFL file ............................................................................................................................................ 98
13.30.4 Location of DB file for Page Set ....................................................................................................................... 98
13.30.5 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 98
13.30.6 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 98
13.31 OIFL PROPERTIES PAGE ................................................................................................................................................. 98
13.31.1 Display ..................................................................................................................................................................... 98
13.31.2 OIFL .......................................................................................................................................................................... 99
13.31.3 OK............................................................................................................................................................................. 99
13.31.4 Apply........................................................................................................................................................................ 99
13.31.5 Cancel ...................................................................................................................................................................... 99
13.32 PAGE ................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
13.32.1 Page Item Actions - Example............................................................................................................................. 99
13.32.2 Page Item Properties dialogue ........................................................................................................................ 100
13.32.3 Page Properties dialogue - Names page....................................................................................................... 100
13.32.4 Page Properties dialogue - OSFK page ......................................................................................................... 101
13.32.5 OSFK Pane list...................................................................................................................................................... 101
13.32.6 Page Properties dialogue - Target page........................................................................................................ 102
13.33 PAGE SET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE ............................................................................................................................ 102
13.33.1 Name of Page Set............................................................................................................................................... 102
13.33.2 Location of DB file for Page Set ..................................................................................................................... 102
13.33.3 Status Pane OIFL file .......................................................................................................................................... 102
13.33.4 Target panel......................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.33.5 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.33.6 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 103
13.34 PANE SETUP DIALOGUE .............................................................................................................................................. 103
Contents Page x HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.34.1 Default Pane ........................................................................................................................................................ 103

13.35 PASSWORD PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................... 103
13.36 PROGRAM PROFILE PROPERTIES PAGE ................................................................................................................... 104
13.36.1 Program profile................................................................................................................................................... 104
13.36.2 Program Profile appearance ............................................................................................................................ 104
13.37 TARGET INSTRUMENT DIALOGUE ............................................................................................................................ 105
13.37.1 Instrument............................................................................................................................................................ 105
13.38 TARGET PANEL DIALOGUE ......................................................................................................................................... 105
13.38.1 Currently defined Target Panels ..................................................................................................................... 105
13.38.2 New ........................................................................................................................................................................ 105
13.38.3 Edit ......................................................................................................................................................................... 105
13.38.4 Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 105
13.38.5 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 105
13.38.6 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 105
13.38.7 Set Password ........................................................................................................................................................ 105
13.39 TEXT PROPERTIES PAGE............................................................................................................................................... 106
13.39.1 Font ........................................................................................................................................................................ 106
13.39.2 Alignment & Underlining.................................................................................................................................. 106
13.39.3 Text......................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.39.4 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.39.5 Apply...................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.39.6 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.40 TEXT VARIABLE PROPERTIES PAGE........................................................................................................................... 107
13.40.1 Text Tab ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
13.40.2 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 107
13.40.3 Apply...................................................................................................................................................................... 107
13.40.4 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 107
13.41 TOUCH AREA PROPERTIES PAGE .............................................................................................................................. 108
13.41.1 Touch Area Type................................................................................................................................................. 108
13.41.2 Destination Page ID & Name ........................................................................................................................... 108
13.41.3 Action .................................................................................................................................................................... 108
13.41.4 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 108
13.41.5 Apply...................................................................................................................................................................... 108
13.41.6 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 108
13.42 TREND GRAPH PROPERTIES PAGE ............................................................................................................................ 109
13.42.1 Growth direction ................................................................................................................................................ 109
13.42.2 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 109
13.42.3 Apply...................................................................................................................................................................... 109
13.42.4 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 109
13.43 TREND GRAPH VARIABLE PROPERTIES PAGE ........................................................................................................ 109
13.43.1 Variable ................................................................................................................................................................. 109
HA260749U005 Contents Page xi

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.43.2 Channel selection ............................................................................................................................................... 109

13.43.3 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 109
13.43.4 Apply...................................................................................................................................................................... 109
13.43.5 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 110
13.44 VARIABLE......................................................................................................................................................................... 110
13.44.1 Variable Properties page .................................................................................................................................. 110
13.44.2 Variable Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 111
13.44.3 OK........................................................................................................................................................................... 111
13.44.4 Apply...................................................................................................................................................................... 111
13.44.5 Cancel .................................................................................................................................................................... 111
14 DEFAULT PASSWORD........................................................................................................................................................... 112
15 INDEX ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Contents Page xii HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
1 USER SCREEN EDITOR

The purpose of the User Screen Editor Online Help File is to explain the principles required to understand the
User Screen Editor and its available functions.
The document describes how the Tools, as part of the Editor, are used to create a pictorial arrangement of
Screens that represent your plant by dividing it into logical sections that display all appropriate runtime
information.
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.1.1 LINtools Online Help
The LINtools Online Help file describes the use of the LINtools software program. It is a powerful multi-purpose
Windows-based software package for performing both off- and on-line configuration of a Target Instrument
control strategy.
Offline LINtools creates and modifies LIN-based process control strategies, sequences, and actions
for a range of target instruments.
Online it lets you monitor and interact with control and sequence strategies running in remote
instruments across the LIN, ELIN, or ALIN, providing a versatile commissioning and strategy
debugging toolkit.
1.1.2 LIN Blocks Reference Manual

The LIN Blocks Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003) describes the available instruments function blocks
that can be connected to this manufacturers Local Instrument Network (LIN). The purpose and workings of
each block are explained, specification menu parameters are defined and inputs and outputs indicated giving
enough detailed information needed to configure the block in a control strategy.
1.1.3 Application And Control Modules Operator Manual

This Application And Control Modules Operator Manual (Part no. HA084012U003) describe the application
(Section 1) and control modules (Section 2) available within the LIN environment. These modules can be used
in conjunction with existing LIN function blocks to perform a wide range of control tasks. Application modules
can be utilised for specific activities such as combustion control, load management and pump set control, while
Control modules consist of common devices such as motors and valves.
NOTE
Contact your distributor if these documents are unavailable.
HA260749U005 Page 1
Issue 4 Mar 08
1.2 USER SCREEN EDITOR - OVERVIEW

The User Screen Editor is a Windows-style PC standalone graphical Editor that allows the design of custom
screens for products, otherwise described as Target Instruments, with operator panels (Target Instrument
Screen types). It outputs the Page designs in the Operator InterFace Language (OIFL) format, ready for
downloading to defined Target Instruments.
NOTE
The User Screen Editor Version 1.9 is NOT compatible with previous releases of the User Screen Editor and
will ONLY run on Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems.
Windows 95, 98, and ME are not supported.
The purpose of the User Screen Editor is to simplify the creation of interactive and inactive screens that can be
displayed on a specific Target Instrument Screen type, Target Panel. Each Target Panel contains a combination
of Pages (Page Sets), each Page representing a Pane on the Target Panel screen.
Beware
User Screen Editor project files (.uxp) should be edited using the appropriate User Screen Editor version.
Failure to do so will result in the Page Set becoming incompatible with previous versions of the User
Screen Editor. To resolve this problem, Open and Save each Page Set in turn using the latest User Screen
Editor version, available from the manufacturer.
1.2.1 Page Sets, Pages, and Targets

Using the User Screen Editors comprehensive set of tools, you design the screens as individual Pages in a group
of pages, called a Page Set. Page Sets must be designed for downloading to a specific Instrument Panel, whose
capabilities are pre-specified in a Target Definition File, called a Target.
All Page Sets, Pages, and Targets are configured using the appropriate Properties dialogue.
See also:
Page Set Properties dialogue
Page Properties dialogue - Name page
Page Properties dialogue - Target page
1.2.2 Panes
The Main pane is used to display the most significant information. It occupies most of the Target Instruments
screen, but other types of smaller pane are also configurable, e.g. 'Pop-up' panes that overlay the Main pane,
and a permanently visible 'Status' pane, often used as an alarm banner.
Page 2 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
1.2.3 Page Items

Graphical objects, Page Items, available for use in the designs include lines, geometric shapes, text, buttons,
touch-sensitive areas, bitmaps, etc. Three-dimensional relief effects can be applied to some Page Items.
Page Items may be left static or linked to variables in the associated LIN Database so that they change
appearance dynamically with changes in the variable's value. These Page Items include dynamic bar charts,
trend plots, and variable text legends. For Target Instruments supporting colour, dynamic colour-scheme
changes can also be configured to enhance operator awareness of the state of the LIN Database variables.
1.2.4 Page Item Properties dialogue

The properties of each Page Item differ, i.e. the Touch Area Page Item includes an, Access page, Fill Style page,
Touch Area page, and a Miscellaneous page, whereas the Rectangle Page Item includes the Access page,
Appearance page, Fill Style page, Colour Attribute page, Colour Limits page, and Miscellaneous page.
A confirmation page appears where applicable.
HA260749U005 Page 3
Issue 4 Mar 08
2 GETTING STARTED
2.1 DESIGNING A USER SCREEN
Before starting to use to User Screen Editor to produce the required screens for the Target Instrument, try to
understand how all the appropriate information can be displayed on each Page, including any specific
information that is required at all times.
Start by analysing the process or instrument. To help with the analysis, it is very useful to sub-divide the process
or instrument into smaller groups of related functionality or equipment.
NOTE
These smaller groups are the equivalent to the Pages of the User Screen Editor.
Information only relevant to a specific process or instrument could be displayed in the Main or User Panes.
Information that requires immediate attention, and therefore needs to be constantly displayed, such as Alarms,
could be displayed in a Status Pane.
Specific function block information could be displayed on both the Point and Faceplate Panes. The Point Pane
is a full size image, while the Faceplate Pane is a thumbnail version.
Tip!
Creating a storybook or description of what is to appear on each of the Pages required is usually of help in
later stages of generating the User Screens, for the definition of Pop-up Panes, or Point Panes.
When satisfied with what is required on each Page, open the User Screen Editor and continue to generate the
required Pages using the Panes.
2.2 OPEN THE USER SCREEN EDITOR

The User Screen Editors starting window permits Target Instruments to be specified, Page Sets to be created,
and generally initiate the design process.
2.2.1 To open the User Screen Editor:

Press Start > Programs > LINtools Advanced. This reveals a menu of the installed tools.
Finally, click on User Screen Editor to launch the application. The blank User Screen Editor window appears.
NOTE
If LINtools is currently open, simply select and open the Page Set file (.uxp) using the File > Open
command or double-click the selected Page Set file (.uxp). Alternatively, create a new Page Set file (.uxp)
using the File > New command. The Location of DB file for Page Set may still need to be configured.
Page 4 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
2.3 USE THE USER SCREEN EDITOR

The User Screen Editors starting window permits a Target Instrument and Screen type to be specified, a Page
Set to be created, and to generally initiate the design process.
2.3.1 To use the User Screen Editor:

1. Open the User Screen Editor
2. Select, Start > Programs > LINtools Advanced > User Screen Editor.
3. Create and/or edit a Page Set for the Target Instrument Screen Type
4. Create Page Sets that associate with a LIN Database, or open an existing Page Set using the command
and dialogue windows to show Pages applicable to the Target Instrument.
5. Specify and/or configure Target Screen type.
6. Create and/or edit a Page for the Target Instrument Screen Type
7. Create, or open existing Pages using the appropriate command and dialogue windows to show the
Page Items used, including Touch Areas, Bar Charts and Drawing tools.
8. Find and replace specific text strings.
9. Save and verify the Target Instrument User Screen configuration
10. All edits can now be displayed at the Target Instrument defined in the New Page Set dialogue.
11. The Error: No Database Defined error message appears if attempting to verify a Page Set before a LIN
Database has been associated.
NOTE
Customised Target Screen types can be created. This is not recommended as each file (.uxt) contains the
unique pre specified configuration of the selected Target Screen type.
HA260749U005 Page 5
Issue 4 Mar 08
3 MAIN DISPLAY REGIONS

The Main Display region of the Editor can be divided into design, and information regions.
3.1 MAIN DISPLAY

Page Set
Page (Pane)
Page Item
3.1.1 Page set

A Page Set is a group of Pages associated with an application designed to be run in a Target Instrument with a
particular Target Instrument Screen type. A Page Set is similar to a folder, and only one is required per Target
Instrument.
NOTE
Page Set filenames are assigned a .uxp extension when saved.
Before generating the individual screens for the Target Instrument, first create an 'empty' Page Set to
accommodate them. When the Pages are complete and ready to download to the Target Instrument, the whole
Page Set is downloaded, rather than the individual Pages.
TO CREATE OR EDIT A PAGE SET
NOTE
If LINtools is currently open, simply select the File > New Page Set command to open the User Screen
Editor and display the New Page Set dialogue.
With the User Screen Editor open, simply select File > New Page Set command to display the Page Set dialogue.
Alternatively, click the New Page Set button.
Enter a name in the Name of new Page Set field that matches the LIN Database (.dbf) filename. The Target
Instrument uses the Page Set that matches the LIN Database (.dbf) filename.
From the Target Panel field, click the drop-down menu and select the required Target Panel type.
Enter the filename of the OIFL file (.ofl), in the Status Pane OIFL file field, needed for display in the Status Pane.
NOTE
This field should remain unchanged unless an alternative Status Pane is required.
Finally, locate and select the LIN Database file (.dbf) that is to be associated with this Page Set Use the Browse
button to display the Open dialogue, which will assist with locating the required LIN Database file. Confirm
using the OK button.
NOTE
New Page Sets created within the Project environment are automatically associated with the default LIN
Database filename (.dbf) in the same the Instrument folder.
Page 6 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.1.2 Pages and Panes

Pages are individual WYSIWYG ('What You See Is What You Get') Panes created and edited on the User Screen
Editor worksheet. Each Page corresponds to each specific Pane used by the Target Instrument.
Individual Pages, or group of Pages are combined to create a set of screens displayed by the Target Instrument.
NOTE
Pages are stored in a Page Set, which is associated with a particular Target Instrument.
A Page must be configured with a Page Name, ID number, and Page Title, and the particular Pane in the
associated Target Instrument that the Page will be displayed on.
NOTE
After opening the required Page, the colour of the User Screen background can be customised using the
Page > Panel Colour command.
A Pane is part of the User Screen Editor displaying specific types of information. Each Pane has unique
dimensions, applicable to the Target Instrument it is configured for, but other types of smaller pane, see below,
can be included in the Page Set.
NOTE
Each Target Panel has a specific default set of Panes.
Main Pane This Pane occupies most of the Target Instrument screen, except for a narrow strip along the
top where the Status pane is located. It is used for a specific area of the system. Only one
Main Pane is configurable for a given target display. (In general, the location of the main
pane is target-dependent).
User Pane This is similar to the Main Pane occupies most of the Target Instrument screen.
Pop-up Pane This Pane will overlay the Main and User panes, but not the Status Pane, until closed by the
User. Several differently-sized Pop-up Panes can be configured.
Status Pane This Pane is a narrow strip located at the top of the Target Screen that is permanently visible,
i.e. 'always on top'. It is often used to show alarm status information. There can only be one
Status Pane in a display. (In general, the location of the status pane is target-dependent).
Point Pane This Pane has dimensions of 320 170 (VGA) and 800 450 (SVGA). It can be used to
display a graphical representation for a specific block and its parameters. This is a Panel size
version of a Faceplate Pane.
Faceplate Pane This Pane has dimensions of 132 40 (VGA) and 172 80 (SVGA). It can be used to display
a graphical representation for a specific block and its parameters. This is a thumbnail version
of a Point Pane, allowing multiple Faceplate Panes to be displayed on one screen.
Off Screen Function Key (OSFK) Pane
This Pane has dimensions that are dependent on the size of the Target Screen. It is used to
configure the operation of the function keys (Fn) for Target Screen types that support off
screen keys, and is displayed below the pane when viewing or editing a page.
Dialogue Box Pane This is similar to a Pop-up pane, but is invoked by the system rather than by the operator. It
is often used to display warnings and system messages.
HA260749U005 Page 7
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.1.2 PAGES AND PANES (Cont.)

CREATE/EDIT A PAGE
Pages are the individual displays that correspond to the actual panel screens or part of the panel screen in the
Target Instrument depending on the Pane selected in the New Page dialogue.
12. Click the New Page button to display the New Page dialogue. Alternatively, select the Page Set > New
Page command.
13. Edit the Page Name and ID parameters.
Enter a concise name in Name field to describe the function of this Page. This Page Name is displayed
in the Title bar for use in the User Screen Editor only, as the Page icon name. An ID number entered
in the ID field to the right must accompany the Name field. Any value between 1 and 999 can be
used.
NOTE
The 'home page' is normally assigned an ID of '1'. This is usually the power-up and timeout page, and is
accessible from the top-level menu. 'Built-in' pages have IDs > 999.
14. Edit the Page Title parameters. This is title of the Page as it appears on the instrument display.
For a fixed title, simply type the required character string into the Title field. Check the Use
Dictionary box if you want the title to change if the language is changed. Enter the corresponding
user-dictionary reference number in the Dictionary Entry No field, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the current
user dictionary is consulted and the string referred to by the specified reference is displayed as the
title.
15. Edit the Target field. Only the Pane field can be edited.
Select the required Pane type from the drop-down list. All other fields were defined when the Page
Set was created.
NOTE
These fields become Read Only when the New Page dialogue is complete and accepted.
16. Edit the Legend parameters.

For a fixed legend, simply type the required character string into the Legend field. Check the Use
Dictionary box if you want the legend to change if the language is changed. Enter the corresponding
user-dictionary reference number in the Dictionary Entry No field, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the current
user dictionary is consulted and the string referred to by the specified reference is displayed as the
title.
17. Edit the Access Level parameters.
Always Accessible is selected by default. It indicates that this Page is unrestricted. Accessible if the
Operator Level is >= indicates that only Operators assigned to an Access Level greater than or equal
to the value specified can interact with this Page. The value can be changed using the up/down
buttons or simply by typing in the required Access Level number, 1 to 4.
18. Edit the Description parameter.
Enter a Page Description. This is user-information only, and is intended as an aid to maintainability,
and is not transferred to the runtime system.
19. Press, OK to confirm the Page parameters and close the dialogue, or Cancel to ignore the Page
parameters and close the dialogue.
The (blank) Page now appears on the Editor worksheet in its own window, entitled with the Page Set Name, and
ID and the Page name that was configured in this dialogue.
Page 8 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.1.3 Page items

A Page Item is defined as any WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) element, textual or pictorial, that can
be placed on a Page. By WYSIWYG is meant that the Page Item on the Editor worksheet page closely resembles
the corresponding display in the Target Instrument.
Page Items have a variety of configurable attributes - 'properties' - associated with them, that determine the
on-screen appearance and how they behave dynamically in the Target Instrument display.
Example property types include: appearance (line weight, colour, etc.), text (font, flashing, etc.), variable (linked
variable name, cold start value, etc.), and format (decimal places, date format, etc.)
After creating a Page Item, it must be configured using the appropriate values. The subset of properties
associated with each type of Page Item differs from item to item. Help topics describe the complete set of
properties currently offered by the User Screen Editor.
You can create two types of Page Item on a Page: Static and Dynamic.
STATIC PAGE ITEMS
A Static Page Item is one that has not been linked to the LIN Database and does not change its appearance in
the display. Such Page Items usually include text, lines, rectangles, etc. They are used to construct the static
parts of the screen display.
NOTE
These Page Items can be configured to change colour dynamically if required.
DYNAMIC PAGE ITEMS

A Dynamic Page Item is a Page Item that is linked to a point in the LIN Database running in the Target
Instrument, and responds in a specified way to the value of that point.
Some Dynamic Page Items change appearance continuously with the value of the linked point (e.g. bar graphs,
text variables) and so can give an indication of its current value at any time.
Others may alter only when the linked variable moves into or out of default value ranges.
All Page Items (except OIFLs and Touch Areas) can be configured to change colour or brightness with changes
in a LIN Database variable.
CREATE/EDIT A PAGE ITEM
Page Items are configured using the Page Item Properties dialogue for that particular Page Item type.
Every Page Item Properties dialogue contains a number of pages, each page applying to one of the properties
applicable to the Page Item selected.
NOTE
After opening the required Page, the colour of the User Screen background can be customised using the
Page > Panel Colour command.
CUSTOMISE THE USER SCREEN BACKGROUND COLOUR

The Panel colour palette permits selection of a colour for the screen of the Target Panel. A range of colours is
displayed on the Color palette dialogue.
HA260749U005 Page 9
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.1.3 PAGE ITEMS (Cont.)

TO SELECT A PANEL COLOUR:
20. Open the required Page.
21. Select Page > Panel Colour to reveal the Color dialogue.
22. Select the colour and confirm using the OK button.
3.1.4 To Define customised colours

All colours can be customised using the colour editing palette displayed when the Define Custom Colors button
is pressed.
23. Open the Colors palette dialogue.
24. Select the required colour and confirm using the OK button. Alternatively, define a customised colour
palette using the Define Custom Colors button to reveal additional colour editing palette.
25. Select a vacant custom colour slot, and adjust the colour using the numeric fields or the cross-hair on
the colour spectrum screen beside.
26. When satisfied, press the Add to Custom Colors button.
27. Now, select the required colour and confirm using the OK button.
NOTE
Up to sixteen customised colours can be stored using the vacant Custom colors slots.
TO EDIT PAGE ITEM PROPERTIES:

28. Double-click the Page Item with the left mouse button to display the Page Item Properties dialogue.
29. Alternatively, to display the Page Item Properties dialogue, select the Page Item on the worksheet,
then right-click the Page Item and select Properties from the pop-up menu,
or click Edit > Properties > Page Item
NOTE
To select a Page Item click anywhere on or within its outline. This applies to unfilled as well as to filled
shapes.
30. The Page Item Properties dialogue appears, displaying all the pages applicable to the selected Page
Item.
31. Select each page in-turn, editing the parameters as required. Individual text strings can be found
and/or replaced using the Search command to reveal the Find dialogue.
32. Press OK to confirm the parameter changes and close the dialogue, or Cancel to ignore the changes
and close the dialogue.
Page 10 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.2 REPORT WINDOW

This window records the operation it attempts and displays any validation warnings or errors it may have found.
Validation involves checking that the data is complete and that it is consistent with the LIN Database file (.dbf),
i.e. the referenced LIN fields exist in the LIN Database file (.dbf) and are of the correct type.
Validation is carried out when,
the Verify Page Set command is selected
a Page Set file is loaded
a Page Set file is saved
a Page Set file is closed
Tip!
Double-click an error or warning record to access the application needed to correct the problem.
HA260749U005 Page 11
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.3 LIN DATABASE BROWSER

Use the LIN Database Browser dialogue to select a Variable or function block in the associated LIN Database,
for linking to a Dynamic Page Item.
3.3.1 Associating a LIN Database with the Page Set

The reason for associating a LIN Database with Page Set is to allow Dynamic Page Items to display defined
points in the LIN Database running in the during runtime.
NOTE
LIN Databases are associated with a Page Set using either the New Page Set or the Page Set Properties
dialogues.
33. A LIN Database can be associated when first creating a Page Set. Select the File > New Page Set
command to display the New Page Set dialogue. Alternatively, select File > Properties > Page Set to
display the Page Set Properties dialogue.
34. The required LIN Database filename can be entered in the Location of DB file for Page Set field. If the
LIN Database filename (. dbf) is unknown, press the Browse button to reveal the Open dialogue to
help locate the LIN Database filename. If the LIN Database functions are unavailable because the LIN
Database file (.dbf) failed to load, the LINDBIF.dll could be missing.
35. Press OK to confirm LIN Database selection.
Page 12 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
3.3.1 ASSOCIATING A LIN DATABASE WITH THE PAGE SET (Cont.)

USING THE BROWSER WINDOW
The action of the LIN Database Browser is context-sensitive. It displays only the LIN function blocks and fields
relevant to the current page item property.
3.3.2 Instrument browser

This is an example of a partially designed Page Set for a defined Target Screen type.
HA260749U005 Page 13
Issue 4 Mar 08
4 TARGET DEFINITION
A Target is an Instrument manufactured with a specific screen type. The screen type capabilities are pre
specified in a Target Definition file. All existing Target Screen type templates can be edited using the Target
Panels dialogue.
Each Target Definition file contains all relevant information about the screen type, i.e. overall screen size, what
Panes, Drawing tools, Capabilities (such as, Signing (21CFRpt11), or Touch Areas) are supported.
NOTE
unique default configuration of the selected Target Screen type.
Beware
Target Definition (.uxt) files should NOT be created or edited by users who are not fully competent to do
so. Otherwise, Target Definition files may be created that are NOT compatible with any of the
manufacturers Target Screen types. In such as case, pages using incompatible Target Definition files will
have to be redrawn in their entirety using the appropriate Target Definition file.
4.1 HOW TO CREATE A TARGET SCREEN TYPE

Select the Target Definitions command, File > Target Definitions, to display the Target Panels dialogue.
Alternatively, press <Crtl + T>.
NOTE
The Target Definition may be password protected. If either the Default Password or changed Password is
configured any attempt to open this dialogue will request a password to continue.
Press New to initiate the Target Panel wizard. The first dialogue of the Target Panel wizard appears.
Enter an appropriate template name for the Target Screen type being created. Select the Target Instrument
and Target Screen type (Pixel based or character based).
Select the type of database the Target Instrument uses (LIN Database or SIB, (not supported - greyed out)).
Press Next to continue.
Enter the required Target Screen type size in pixels. Enter the width of the Target Screen type. Enter the
height of the Target Screen type.
If the Character based screen type was selected previously, additional width and height characters parameters
are requested. Press Next to continue.
Select the colour capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select a radio button to specify the colour capabilities supported by the Target Screen type.
Select the interactive capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select the appropriate checkboxes to specify the interactive capability supported by the Target Screen type.
Page 14 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
4.1 HOW TO CREATE A TARGET SCREEN TYPE TEMPLATE (Cont.)

Select the screen indication capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select the appropriate checkboxes to specify the indication capability supported by the Target Screen type.
Select the screen Chart Drawing capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select the appropriate checkboxes to specify the Chart Drawing capabilities supported by the Target Screen
type. Press Next to continue.
Select the General Drawing capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select the appropriate checkboxes to specify the Drawing capabilities supported by the Target Screen type.
Select the Object Drawing capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select the appropriate checkboxes to specify the Object Drawing capabilities supported by the Target Screen
If the Pixel based display was selected previously in step 2 continue from step 12.
If the Character based display was selected previously in step 2 the additional parameters must be completed.
Select the Character Drawing capabilities of.
Select the appropriate checkboxes to specify the Character Drawing capabilities supported by the Target Screen
Select the Character Underline capabilities of Target Screen type.
Select the first checkbox to specify the Character Underline capabilities supported by the Target Screen type.
Enter the number of special underline sections the Target Screen type has and the height of the character cells
in pixels.
Select the last checkbox to permit the use of underline section in Bar Charts. Press Next to continue.
Enter an appropriate filename for the Target Screen type being created.
Press Finish to save the Target Screen type to the User Screen Editor > Targets directory.
The Target Screen type is created, however it must now be selected to define the Target Screen type.
4.2 HOW TO EDIT THE TARGET SCREEN TYPE

All Target Screen type templates can be edited via the Target Properties dialogue. Either press the Edit button
on the Target Panels dialogue or double-click the required Target Screen type.
NOTE
The Set Password button is used to restrict access to the Target Panels dialogue. If a Password is configured any
attempt to open this dialogue will request a password to continue.
Select the Target Screen type.

Press Edit to display the Target Properties dialogue. Edit each page in turn as required. Press the appropriate
button to continue: OK to accept the changes and close the dialogue, Cancel to ignore any changes and close
the dialogue. Apply to accept the changes, but continue to edit the Target Properties.
HA260749U005 Page 15
Issue 4 Mar 08
5 MENUS
The Menu Bar is a special toolbar at the top of the screen that contains 7 pulldown functions. Each pulldown
displays a list of commands.
5.1 FILE MENU
The File pulldown enables the User to manage the User Screen Editor by offering the following commands.
NOTE
Some commands are only available in certain circumstances. When unavailable, commands are greyed out.
New Page Set Click this to display the New Page Set dialogue allowing the Page Set Properties to be
configured in readiness for the required Target Instrument Pages.
Open Page Set Click this to display the Open/Browse dialogue in order to locate an existing Page Set. If
another instance of the selected file is already open, a message appears asking if a new
instance of the page set is to be opened, or if the existing instance should be switched to.
Where several instances are open, Switch to always opens the first instance.
Close Page set Click to close the selected Page Set window. A prompt dialogue may appear if there are
unsaved changes.
Import Page set Click this to display the Open dialogue. This allows a Page Set from another source to be
included in the current Target Instrument.
Save Click to save the currently open file with its current file name, location, and file format,
overwriting the existing file.
Save As Saves the active file with a different file name, location, or file format.
Page 16 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
5.1 FILE MENU (Cont.)
Target definitions Click this to display the Target Panels dialogue. This allows the Target Panel type to be
specified.
Options Click this to display the Options dialogue. This allows the user to change the destination of
the Target Panel type files and Portmap files using the Browse button.
Build Output (OIFL) files
Click this to open the Report Window and build the current Page Set, listing any errors and
warnings that may cause the Target Instrument to function incorrectly.
Configure automatic building of output files
Click this display the Save OIFL dialogue. This allows the configuration of a default response
to saving an OIFL to be specified.
Print Setup Click this to display the Print Setup dialogue. This configures the paper source, paper size,
page orientation, and other layout options for the active file.
Print Preview Click this to display an impression in the Print Preview window of the selected Page when
printed.
Print Click this to display the Print dialogue. This prints the active file or selected items.
HA260749U005 Page 17
Issue 4 Mar 08
5.2 EDIT MENU

The Edit pulldown enables the User to manipulate the current objects by offering the following commands.
NOTE
Some commands are available only in certain circumstances. Unavailable commands are greyed out.
Undo Click this to reverse the last command or deletes the last entry you typed. To reverse more
than one action at a time, click the arrow next to the Redo tool command, and then click
the actions you want to undo.
Redo Click this to reverse the action of the Undo command. To redo more than one action at a
time, click the arrow next to the Undo tool command, and then click the actions you want
to redo.
Cut Click this to remove the selected object from the active document and place it on the
Clipboard.
Copy Click this to copy the selected object to the Clipboard.
Paste Click this to insert the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point, and replaces any selection.
This command is available only if you have cut or copied an object, text, or contents of a
cell.
Delete Click to remove the selected object from the currently open window.
Select All Click to select all objects in the currently open window, either Pages in the Page Set or Page
Items in the Page
NOTE
Multiple objects or files can be selected individually while pressing the <Ctrl> key, or a consecutive group of
files by selecting the first file, then while pressing the <SHIFT> key, click the last file.
Save to Library Click this to store a copy of the selected object or grouped objects to the User Screen Editor
library. The Library can store commonly used Page Items.
Load from Library...Click this to display the library of commonly used Page Items.
Find Click this to display the Find and Replace dialogue. This dialogue permits the User to search
for specific sequence of characters. When located the results can be sorted in alphabetical
ascending or descending order.
Properties Click to reveal a further menu, allowing selection of the Page Set, Page or Page Item.
Selection displays the appropriate Properties dialogue.
Page 18 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
5.2 EDIT MENU (Cont.)
FIND DIALOGUE
Use this to search for a specific text string within a Page Set, and if required, to replace it with another defined
text string. The fields are:
Find what Enter the text string that is to be searched for.
Incremental searching
Indicates that the search for the specific text string will commence immediately, refining the
search as characters are added to the text string.
Exact match Indicates that the search for the specific text string will list only those occurrences that
match the Find what text exactly.
Match case Indicates that the search for the specific text string will list only those occurrences that
match the case as entered in the Find what field. For example, Type in AcSource, not
Acsource to find the LIN Variable, AcSource.
Replace Enables the Replace with field, and indicates that any occurrence of the specific text string
being searched for can be replaced with the text string in the Replace with field.
Replace with This is the LIN Variable, Instrument Variable, or specific text string that will replace the text
string entered in the Find what field. Use the Browse button to display the LIN Database or
the Instrument Browser dialogue, may assist in locating the required Variable.
LIN Variable Use this radio button to select to search the LIN Database Variable. Use the Browse button
to display the LIN Database Browser dialogue, to assist with locating the required Variable.
Instrument Variable
Use this radio button to select to search the Instrument Variable. Use the Browse button to
display the Instrument Browser dialogue, to assist with locating the required Variable.
Start search Initiates the search for the text string specified in the Find what field.
Replace Replaces the selected occurrence of the text string specified in the Find what field with the
text string in the Replace with field.
Replace all Replaces all occurrences of the text string specified in the Find what field with the text string
in the Replace with field.
Done Closes the dialogue.
Table Lists all occurrences of the text string specified in the Find what field.
HA260749U005 Page 19
Issue 4 Mar 08
5.3 VIEW MENU

The View pulldown enables the User to control the appearance of Pages displayed in the Page Set window, and
to select and indicate which toolbars are currently displayed.
Toolbar The Toolbar hosts icon buttons that enable quick access to a limited amount of Edit and
View commands. It is displayed by default and located at the top of the User Screen Editor.
Drawbar The Drawbar tools allow the user to create new graphical and text items on the active Page.
The items may be static, or if linked to an instrument or LIN database can be made to
change colour, to fiil or empty etc. according to the value of the variable.
Textbar The Textbar permits quick access to the Text tools provided, which are used to modify the
attributes and appearance of Text Page Items on the currently open Page.
Statusbar The Status Bar displays specific User Screen Editor information, such as, current editor action
or status, and various properties of the Page Item(s) selected on the page. It is displayed by
default and located along the foot of the User Screen Editor.
Large Icon Click to show the contents of the selected Page Set in a standard size icon format.
Small Icons Click to show the contents of the selected Page Set in a small size icon format.
List Click to show the contents of the selected Page Set in list format, alphabetically and
numerically.
Details Click to show the contents of the selected Page Set in list format, but including further
specific information for each Page.
Page 20 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
5.4 PAGESET MENU

The PageSet pulldown enables the User to manage the Page Set.
New Page Click this to display the New Page dialogue allowing the Page Properties to be configured.
Open Page Click this to open the Page currently selected in the Page Set.
Close Page Click this to close the currently open Page.
Verify Page Set Click this to immediately open the Report Window and build the current Page Set, listing any
errors and warnings that may cause the Target Instrument to function incorrectly.
On-line to panel Click this to create a communications link from the current Page Set to the Target
Instrument, defined in the Location of DB for Page Set in the Page Set Properties dialogue,
in a live system.
Show Page Set OIFL Strings
Click this to display all OIFL Strings used in the current Page Set in a Read-Only OIFL Strings
for window.
5.5 PAGE MENU

The Page menu allows the User to control the Page Items on the Page.
Show OIFL Strings Click to display the OIFL Strings used on the current Page. The OIFL strings are displayed in a
Read-Only window.
Show Cold Start Values
If this item is selected, the User Screen representation shows the Show Cold Start Value if
possible, or a series of question marks ( ? ) if the value does not fit the graphic. If not
selected, or if the values are not available for a particular Variable, the value appears as a
series of asterisks ( * ). The number of asterisks displayed is equivalent to the number of
display characters allocated to the variable, which can edited on the worksheet.
Panel Colour... Click to display the Colour palette dialogue. This allows the user to select the required
colour for the User Screen of the Target Instrument, defined in the Location of DB for Page
Set field of the Page Set Properties dialogue, in a live system.
HA260749U005 Page 21
Issue 4 Mar 08
5.6 WINDOW MENU

The Window menu allows the User to the Page Set, and Page locations on the pc screen.
Cascade Click this to display the currently open windows one on top of the other, but in such a way
that title bar for each window remains visible.
Tile Click this to display the currently open windows equally in the main User Screen Editor, so as
to display as much of the window as possible.
Arrange Icon Click this to display all open files in separate windows on the screen. The Arrange Icon
command makes it easier to drag between files.
Current Window Click the required entry to display it as the main window.
5.7 HELP MENU
Help Opens the on-line help file including Contents, Index, and Search facilities. <F1> help also
opens this help file, but at a topic appropriate to the cursor position.
About User Screen Editor
This displays the program details including the name, version number, and description.
Page 22 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
6 TOOLBARS
6.1 MAIN TOOLBAR
6.1.1 New Page Set command
Click this to display the New Page Set dialogue allowing the Page Set Properties to be configured in readiness
for the required Target Instrument Pages
6.1.2 Open Page Set command
Click this to display the Open/Browse dialogue in order to locate an existing Page Set. If another instance of the
selected file is already open, a message appears asking if a new instance of the page set is to be opened, or if
the existing instance should be switched to. Where several instances are open, Switch to always opens the
first instance.
6.1.3 Save Page Set command
Click this to overwrite the current Page Set information with the current changes.
6.1.4 New Page command
Click this to display the New Page dialogue allowing the Page Properties to be configured.
HA260749U005 Page 23
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.1.5 Open Page command
Click this to open the Page currently selected in the Page Set.
6.1.6 Close Page command
Click this to close the currently open Page.
6.1.7 Build Output (OIFL) Files command

Click this to open the Report Window and build the current Page Set, listing any errors and warnings that may
cause the Target Instrument to function incorrectly.
6.1.8 Verify Page Set command
Click this to immediately open the Report Window and build the current Page Set, listing any errors and
warnings that may cause the Target Instrument to function incorrectly.
6.1.9 Find command

Click this to display the Find and Replace dialogue. This dialogue permits the User to search for specific
sequence of characters. When located the results can be sorted in alphabetical ascending or descending order.
6.1.10 Open Database command

Click this to open the associated LIN Database using the LINtools configurator.
6.1.11 Back Command

This command returns the user to the calling application. For example, if this instance of User Screen Editor
has been launched from LINtools by double-clicking on User Screen Editor in the Tools menu, then clicking on
this icon returns the focus to LINtools.
6.1.12 Cut command

Click this to removes the selected object from the active document and place it on the Clipboard.
6.1.13 Copy command

Click this to copy the selected object to the Clipboard.
6.1.14 Paste command

Click this to insert the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point, and replaces any selection. This
command is available only if you have cut or copied an object, text, or contents of a cell.
Page 24 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.1.15 Undo command

Click this to reverse the last command or deletes the last entry you typed. To reverse more than one action at a
time, click the arrow next to the Redo tool command, and then click the actions you want to undo
6.1.16 Redo command

Click this to reverse the action of the Undo command. To redo more than one action at a time, click the arrow
next to the Undo tool command, and then click the actions you want to redo.
6.1.17 Zoom Factor command

Click this to display the top left corner of the Page at the Zoom Factor indicated.
6.1.18 Whats This? command

Click this to display a simple explanation of the next selected User Screen Editor command.
6.2 STATUS BAR

The Status Bar displays specific User Screen Editor information, such as, current editor action or status, and
various properties of the Page Item(s) selected on the page. It is displayed by default and located along the foot
of the User Screen Editor.
VIS: This field shows the Access State of the selected Page Item as defined in the objects
Properties dialogue.
WRI: This field shows the Variable State of the selected Page Item as defined in the Page Item
MAX: This field shows the High Limit, if supported by the selected Page Item, as configured in the
Limit Page of the Page Item Properties dialogue.
MIN: This field shows the Low Limit, if supported by the selected Page Item, as configured in the
Limit Page of the Page Item Properties dialogue.
X: Y: This field shows the page co-ordinates in Pixels of the most upper left point of the selected
Page Item.
W: H: This field shows the Width and Height in Pixels of the selected Page Item.
total items This shows the total number of Page Items used and how many are currently selected on
this Page.
Communications Status
This indicates the communication status of the User Screen Editor, e.g. that it is
communicating with the Target Instrument in a live system.
Time This indicates to current time according to the location of the User Screen Editor.
HA260749U005 Page 25
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.3 TEXT BAR

The Text bar permits quick access to the Text tools provided, which are used to modify the attributes and
appearance of Text Page Items on the currently open Page.
6.3.1 Font style command
Click this to select a font type for the currently selected Text Page Item.
6.3.2 Align Text Left command
Click to align the selected Text Page Item within the available text frame, to the left.
6.3.3 Align Text Left-biased Centre command
Click to align the selected Text Page Item, within the available text frame, to the centre with a left-hand bias.
Text is aligned to the nearest character width. Left-biased Centre biases the alignment one character-width to
the left when the string cannot be positioned in the exact centre.
6.3.4 Align Text Right-biased Centre command
Click to align the selected Text Page Item within the available text frame to the centre with a right-hand bias.
Text is aligned to the nearest character width. Right-biased Centre biases the alignment one character-width to
the right when the string cannot be positioned in the exact centre.
6.3.5 Align Text Right command
Click to align the selected Text Page Item within the available text frame to the right.
Page 26 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.4 PLACEMENT BAR

The Placement bar tool icons allow the user to manipulate the position and orientation of a selected Page Item.
The default position for this toolbar is vertically, against the right-hand side of the screen. For convenience, it
is shown here detached and horizontal.
Not all tools are enabled for all page items. Disabled tools are greyed out.
Bring to front. Click to bring the selected Page Item to the front of the page, i.e. to the top layer.
Send to back. Click to send the selected Page item to the back of the page, i.e. to the bottom layer.
Bring Forward. Brings the selected item forward (up) one layer.
Send backward. Sends the selected item back (down) one layer.
Group. Places all selected items in a group.
UnGroup. Ungroups one level of grouping.
Flip horizontal. Flips item or group left-right.

Flip vertical. Flips item or group up/down
Rotate clockwise. Rotates item 90 degrees clockwise.

Custom rotate. Allows the user to enter an absolute angle for the item.
Increasing angle rotates clockwise.
Align objects left. Aligns left edges of all selected items.
Align objects right. Aligns right edges of all selected items.
Align objects top. Aligns top edges of all selected item.

Align objects bottom. Aligns bottom edges of all selected item.
Toggles gridline visibility on and off. If enabled, Snap to Gridlines still operates when grid lines off.
Gridlines do not appear at the target screen.
Grid Colour. Allows the user to select a colour for the gridlines.
Grid settings. Allows the grid and snap to grid characteristics to be edited. See Grid settings, below,
for further details.
Snap object(s) to grid. If Snap to grid is disabled in Grid settings, then this button can be used to
snap individual items to the grid if required. Aligns the top and left edges to the nearest grid line.
HA260749U005 Page 27
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.4.1 Grid settings dialogue
Accessed by clicking on the grid settings icon in the Placement bar. The tool is disabled for character-based
targets, where settings are fixed (based on target character cell size).
Tip!
Turning the Grid on will help when attempting to align Page Items.
NOTE
A Grid will have the same effect when displayed or hidden.
MAJOR GRID SETTINGS

These fields specify the major grid horizontal and vertical spacing.
MINOR GRID SETTINGS
The minor grid settings are relative to the top-left corner of each major grid cell (0, 0).
General grid settings
Snap to grid Check this to cause the vertices (or bounding-box corners) of Page Item being drawn to
snap to the grid (whether hidden or not).
Use minor grid lines for item alignment
Check this to make the snap to grid (if selected) and nudge items alignment action work
on the minor grid lines. If left unchecked, only the major grid lines are used.
Nudge items to nearest grid line
Check this to cause highlighted item(s) to jump one grid spacing in the selected direction
each time a keyboard cursor key is pressed. If unchecked, they jump one pixel only. This
works even if snap to grid is not selected.
Use dotted lines for grid lines
Check this to make the grid lines appear dashed. If unchecked, the grid lines are solid.
CONFIGURE USING DEFAULT FONT
Click this button to set the major grid spacing to match the default font cell size -- convenient for laying out
text.
Page 28 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.4.1 GRID SETTINGS DIALOGUE (Cont.)

OK
Click to close the dialogue and enable the grid settings.
CANCEL
Click to close the dialogue without altering the existing grid settings.
6.5 DRAW BAR

The Draw bar tool icons allow the user to create new and edit existing Page Items. Generally items are
positioned on the page by clicking on the tool icon, clicking on the screen to define the top left-hand corner,
and then without releasing the left mouse key, dragging the bottom right-hand corner of the item to the
required position. The size, and aspect ratio of an item on the screen can subsequently be edited using the
item's handles. The position on the screen is adjusted by click / dragging on the item outline (or if filled, within
the item).
The properties of an item (colours, assignment of variables and so on) are set in the properties page associated
with the item. This is most readily accessed by double clicking on the item, but it can also be opened by right
clicking on the item and selecting 'Properties...' or by using the shortcut <Alt> + <Enter>.
Selection tool. Used to select an object, or a group of objects for editing.
Text tool. Allows new text to be entered or existing text to be edited.
Line tool. Allows straight lines to be drawn on the screen.
Rectangle tool. Allows rectangles to be drawn. Squares are deemed to be rectangle with sides of equal
length.
Rounded Rectangle Tool. Not applicable with this version of software. Always 'greyed out' (disabled).
Ellipse tool. Allows ellipses to be drawn. A circle is an ellipse having minor axes the same length as the
major axis.
Triangle tool. Triangles are drawn with the base horizontal: the corner positions must be edited if any
other orientation is required.
Bitmap tool. Allows a bitmap image to be placed on the screen. Initially, this item is drawn with the text
'Bitmap undefined' inside its area. The bitmap is defined, by selecting it using the Browse key, as described in
the Bitmap Properties page topic.
Barchart tool. Allows the inclusion of a barchart display on the screen. Initially, this is drawn containing a
question mark to indicate that there is no source defined for the item. Once a suitable source has been
selected the question mark disappears. One way of doing this is to double click on the bar chart and then to
use the browse key in the resulting 'Bar Chart Item Properties' page to navigate to a suitable variable which is
then clicked-on to select it. See 'Bar Chart Properties page' for more details.
HA260749U005 Page 29
Issue 4 Mar 08
6.5 DRAW BAR (Cont.)
Trend Graph tool. Allows a Trend Graph to be incorporated in the user screen. As described for 'Barchart',
above, it is initially drawn with a question mark within it, and this remains until a variable has been assigned to
the trend. See 'Trend Graph Properties page' for more details.
Program Profile tool. Similar to the Trend Graph tool, this allows a set point programmer profile to be
added to the screen. This can either be static or dynamic as selected from the Program Profile properties page.
The item is initially drawn containing a question mark which remains until a program block has been assigned
to it..
Text Variable tool. This allows a 'dynamic' text string (a process variable value for example) to appear on
the user screen, by linking the text to a database variable. Initially the item appears as a string of question
marks, but once linked to the database, the question marks change to a asterisks (*). If a suitable variable is
selected, the Enumerations area of the Text Variable Properties page can be used to change text strings
according to the value of the variable. Further, for supporting instruments only, if a suitable variable is
selected, then the text variable can be configured such that the actual text string displayed at the instrument's
operator interface can be selected, by the user, from a drop down (combo) list.
Touch Area tool. This allows an area of the screen to become touch sensitive. The action(s) to be carried
out when this area of screen is touched are defined in the Touch Area properties page, described in a separate
topic. The touch area is invisible at the Operator interface, but it can be overlaid by another suitable item if
required, Alternatively other page items, such as triangles, rectangles etc. can be made touch sensitive by
configuring the 'Touch Area' tab of their properties page appropriately.
Button Tool. Allows a 'button' to be positioned on the screen. Buttons are items that are touch sensitive;
the action(s) to be carried out being configured in the 'Touch Area' tab of the Button Tool Properties page.
OIFL tool. This allows an area containing Operator Interface Language text to be positioned on the screen.
See the 'OIFL properties page' topic for further details.
Line / Text Colour. This defines the default colour for Text and Line page items. Text
appears on a background colour defined in the Fill / Background, but line items such as rectangles, triangles
etc. are filled only if 'Object is filled' is enabled in the item's properties. The required colour is selected from a
pull down palette which appears when the down arrow is clicked-on.
Fill/Background colour. This defines the default background colour for text (which appears
in the Foreground colour), and the fill colour for any line item which has 'Object is filled' enabled in its
properties page. The required colour is selected from a pull down palette which appears when the down arrow
is clicked-on
Page 30 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7 HOW TO...
7.1 SPECIFY/CONFIGURE A TARGET SCREEN TYPE
This indicates the specific Screen type, including the supported capabilities, fitted in the Target Instrument. To
configure a target screen:
This dialogue shows a list of pre-defined Target Screen types. Either:
Press New to initiate the Target Panel wizard and create a Customised Target Screen type template,
Click a pre-defined Target Screen type and press Edit to reveal the Target Properties dialogue allowing these
properties to be edited, or
Click a pre-defined Target Screen type and press Remove to delete the Target Screen type template after
confirmation.
Click a Target Screen type and press OK to accept.
NOTES
The Target Definition may be password protected. If a Password is configured any attempt to open this dialogue
will request a password to continue.
Customised Target Screen types can be created. This is not recommended as each file (.uxt) contains the unique
default configuration of the selected Target Screen type.
See also: Create a Target Screen type, Edit a Target Screen type
7.2 SPECIFY CHARACTER MAPPINGS

To allow the User Screen Editor to draw realistic character-based lines in a similar way, the required characters
must be mapped to each of these special line-segment symbols. The mapping is configured via a graphical
character-symbol map as follows:.
Access the Target Properties dialogue for the character-based Target Screen type and click the Mappings tab
to see the Mappings page.
Click the Character drawing capability checkboxes according to whether the Target Screen type has characters
for drawing straight lines and/or 45 lines.
In the Character description field, select a character from the dropdown menu, and type in the corresponding
ASCII code (0-255). This code maps the particular character to its image in the font bitmap that will be active
when character lines are drawn on the User Screen Editor worksheet.
Map the remaining graphics characters to their ASCII codes, then click 'OK' to store your entries and return to
the Target Panels dialogue.
HA260749U005 Page 31
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.3 ASSOCIATE A LIN DATABASE WITH A PAGE SET

Associating a LIN Database with a Page Set allows Page Items to display LIN database points, dynamically, during
runtime.
NOTE
LIN Databases are associated with a Page Set using either the New Page Set or the Page Set Properties
dialogues.
A LIN Database can be associated when first creating a Page Set. Select the File > New Page Set command to
display the New Page Set dialogue. Alternatively, select File > Properties > Page Set to display the Page Set
The required LIN Database filename can be entered in the Location of DB file for Page Set field.
If the LIN Database filename (. dbf) is unknown, press the Browse button to reveal the Open dialogue to help
locate the LIN Database filename.
If the LIN Database functions are unavailable because the LIN Database file (.dbf) failed to load, the LINDBIF.dll
could be missing.
Press OK to confirm LIN Database selection.
7.4 SHOW COLD START VALUES

If the LIN Database for the current Page Set is configured and specified at the Page Set Properties dialogue in
the Location of DB file for Page Set field, selecting Show Cold Start Values command will display actual Cold
Start Values instead of asterisks ( * ) in screen Page Items incorporating a Variable (e.g. Text Variables).
With Show Cold Start Values selected, the User Screen representation shows the Show Cold Start Value if
possible, or a series of question marks ( ? ) if the value does not fit the graphic.
If Show Cold Start Values is not selected, or if the values are not available for a particular Variable, the value
appears as a series of asterisks ( * ). The number of asterisks displayed is equivalent to the number of display
characters allocated to the variable, which can edited on the worksheet.
7.5 VERIFY A PAGE SET

This command starts the verification process ensuring the currently open Page Set has been correctly
configured and builds the Target Instrument screens. It can be performed at any time, giving an up to date
report of the Page Set.
Beware
You MUST verify a Page Set and eliminate all problems before downloading to the Target Instrument.
Failure to do so will result in downloading Pages (screens) to the instrument, which may be incorrect.
This could cause problems with the operation of the instrument.
Follow the instructions below.
(Continued)
Page 32 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.5.1 To verify a Page Set

Initiate Page Set verification by clicking the Verify Page Set button or by selecting Page Set > Verify Page Set
The Report Window is revealed and verification of the Page Set is started. This window records the operations it
attempts and any warnings or errors it may have found. These can be used to help diagnose and correct
problems.
Tip!
EXAMPLES
Warning: Database Not Defined. Variable references will not be verified.
This indicates that one or more Variables have been specified incorrectly.
Build finished: no errors and no warnings.

This indicates a completely successful result.
7.6 USE THE FIND DIALOGUE

The Find dialogue permits the User to search for a specific text string within a Page Set, and if required, replace
with a LIN Variable, Instrument Variable, or another defined text string.
7.6.1 To find all occurrences of a text string

Select the Search command, Edit > Search, to display the Find dialogue.
In the Find what field, enter the text string to be located.
Tip!
Use wildcard characters or enter only part of the required sequence of characters to broaden the results.
By using the % wildcard character any single character is found; a search for s?t finds sit and set and
the * wildcard character finds any multiple characters in a string of text, a search for s*t finds seat,
sent and settlement.
Refine the search criteria, if required.

Use the Incremental Searching checkbox to start searching the Page Set as the first character is entered. As
characters are added the occurrences that match the text string appear in the table.
Use the Exact match checkbox to find only occurrences that are identical to the text string in the Find what
field.
Use the Match case checkbox to find only occurrences that are identical to the text string in the Find what
field.
NOTE
Incremental searching can improve response time when searching for a text string across many Pages.
If the text string in the Find what field must be replaced, select the Replace checkbox to enable Replace with
field. Use the LIN Variable radio button, Instrument Variable radio button and Browse button to specify what
the text string in the Find what field must be changed to.
Press the Start search button to initiate the search for the text string entered in the Find what field. As each
occurrence is located it is listed in the table below the Replace with field.
HA260749U005 Page 33
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.6.1 TO FIND ALL OCCURENCES OF A TEXT STRING (cont.)

Edit the occurrences as appropriate.
Move directly to an occurrence by double-clicking the list item.
Select a single list item and replace the selected text string occurrence with the text string in the Replace with
field by pressing the Replace button.
Replace all occurrences of the selected text string with the text string in the Replace with field by pressing the
Replace all button.
Press Done to close the Find dialogue.
7.7 SET DEFAULT OFF SCREEN FUNCTION KEY (OSFK) PANE

If more than 2 Off Screen Function Key (OSFK) Panes have been configured in the Page Set a default must be
specified.
Determine which Off Screen Function Key (OSFK) Pane is required.
Select the required OSFK Pane to reveal the context-sensitive menu and select the Set As Default command.
This is now the default OSFK pane, with a page ID of 998.
7.8 WRITE PAGE ITEM ACTIONS

Structured Text (ST) strings are limited to the form "<name>:=<value>;", where <name> is the name of a LIN
Database field or subfield enclosed in square brackets, and <value> is a string representing the value to be
assigned.
The value string may be enclosed in single quotes, and may then make use of standard Structured Text (ST) $
escape sequences.
Alternatively, it may be unquoted, in which case it is terminated by ; or a space.
Space characters are permitted either side of ":=" and before the ;. The effect of the assignment will be the
same as if the value string had been typed in via LINtools.
For numeric or Boolean variables, <value> may also be a limited form of Structured Text (ST) expression,
involving only fields within the function block being assigned.
7.8.1 Example
ST:"[PID1.SL]:=SL+10.0;" (increments SL when button pressed).
7.8.2 Structured Text syntax

Page Item Actions are written using Structured Text. When writing Page Item Actions the following Structured
Text syntax must be used.
[...] indicates optional,
{...} indicates one or more,
| indicates alternatives.
7.8.3 Action Lists

<Action List> ::= <Action> [{ , <Action> }]
7.8.4 Actions
<Action> ::= <Action Mnemonic> [{ : <Action Qualifier> }]
Page 34 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.8.5 Action qualifiers

The following syntax is generic, and depends on specific User Screen Editor action type:
<Action Qualifier> ::= <Decimal Number> | <String>
<Decimal Number> ::= [-] { <Digit> }
<Digit> ::= 0 | 1 | . . . | 9
<String> ::= " [{<Character>}] "
The possible values of <Character> are context specific. The character " is obtained using repeated double
quotes, e.g.:
ST:"[TimeDate.Date1]:=""18-07-05"";"
The permitted number and type(s) of qualifiers are action-specific.
HA260749U005 Page 35
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.9 USE THE TEXT BAR COMMANDS TO...

7.9.1 Edit Text
TO ADD A TEXT ITEM:
Click the Text Tool.
Position the text-cursor at the start of the proposed text item.
Type in the required text characters.
TO EDIT EXISTING TEXT ITEMS:
Click the existing text item at the required position to insert a text cursor.
Type in or delete (backspace) characters as required.
NOTE
The Text tool is disabled if the target has no Fonts specified.
7.9.2 Edit the Font Style

Select all the required text in the Text Frame.
Pull down the menu of fonts (from those configured for the target) and click your selection.
NOTE
A font can also be selected from the Page Items Text Properties page, or Text Variable Properties page.
7.9.3 Align Text to the left

This command is useful when attempting to align text that may vary in length, such as Variable value or
Language variant legends.
Select all text in the Text Frame.
Then, click the Align Text Left tool command.
NOTE
Text can also be aligned using the items Text Properties page, or Text Variable Properties page.
Page 36 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.9.4 Align Text to the centre with Left-Bias

Useful when attempting to align text that may vary in length, such as Variable value or Language variant
legends. Text is aligned one character to the left if it cannot be centred exactly.
Click the Text Tool to load the cursor with the Text Page Item.
Then, click the Align Text Left-Bias tool command.
NOTE
7.9.5 Align Text to the right

Language variant legends.
Then, click the Align Text Right tool command.
NOTE
7.9.6 Align Text to the centre with Right-Bias

Language variant legends. Text is aligned one character to the right if it cannot be centred exactly.
Then, click the Align Text Right-Bias tool command.
NOTE
HA260749U005 Page 37
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.10 USE THE DRAW BAR COMMAND TO...

7.10.1 Select or Edit a Page Item
This allows the User to select a Page Item or group of Page Items before editing to achieve the required effect.
Click the Selection tool, then
To select a Page Item: left-click on or within a Page Item.
To extend the selection: click more Page Items whilst holding <Ctrl> down.
To reduce the selection; click previously selected Page Items while holding <Ctrl> down. Each previously
selected Page Items Page Item is deselected.
To multiple-select: click the page background (not an item), drag out a box to surround the Page Items, then
release the mouse button. Surrounded Page items are selected.
To move selected Page Items: drag the selected Page Items to the new location.
To reshape a selected Page Item: drag a handle.
7.10.2 Add a Bar Chart

This allows the User to include a Bar Chart on the current Page in order to display a specific point in the LIN
Database and dynamically change its appearance to indicate varying point values.
Click the Bar Chart tool to load the cursor with the Bar Chart object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed Bar Chart.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the Bar Chart.
Release to fix the opposite corner.
The bar chart appears by default as a left-to-right fill Bar Chart labelled with ?.
NOTE
The Bar Chart tool is disabled for targets not supporting bar charts. Character targets using underline
characters for Bar Charts can draw them only within the underline character areas.
7.10.3 Add a Bitmap

This allows the User to include a Bitmap Page Item on the current Page to display a specific Bitmap graphic.
Click the Bitmap tool to load the cursor with the Bitmap object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed bitmap.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the bitmap.
The bitmap appears as a shaded area labelled <Bitmap Undefined>.
NOTE
The Bitmap tool is disabled for all character targets, and pixel targets not supporting bitmaps.
Page 38 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.10.4 Add a Button

This allows the User to include a Button Page Item on the current Page. This Page Item can be configured in
conjunction with Structured Text and/or the Touch Area Page Item in order to initiate a specified activity, e.g.
go to another display page, or execute an action.
Click the Button tool to load the cursor with the Button object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed Button.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the Button.
NOTE
The Button tool is disabled if the target has no Fonts specified.
7.10.5 Add a Text Variable

This allows the User to include a Text Variable Page Items on the current Page to display a specific LIN Database
value.
Click the Text Variable tool to load the cursor with the Text Variable object.
Position the cross-cursor at the start of the proposed text variable.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag rightwards.
Release to fix the length of the Text Variable.
The Text Variable appears as a row of ? characters.
NOTE
The Text Variable tool is disabled if the target has no Fonts specified.
7.10.6 Add a Touch Area

This allows the User to include a Touch Area Page Items on the current Page for the purpose of navigation
between Target Instrument Pages and/or Panes.
Click the Touch Area tool to load the cursor with the Touch Area object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed Touch Area.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the Touch Area.
The Touch Area appears as a shaded box labelled Touch Area.
NOTE
The Touch Area tool is disabled for targets not supporting touch areas.
HA260749U005 Page 39
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.10.7 Add a Trend Graph

This allows the User to include a Trend Graph Page Item on the current Page to display variable point values in
the LIN Database against time.
Click the Trend Graph tool to load the cursor with the Trend Graph object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed Trend Graph.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the trend.
The Trend Graph appears by default as a horizontal scroll trend labelled with ?.
NOTE
The Trend Graph tool is disabled for targets not supporting Trend Graphs.
7.10.8 Add a Program Profile

This allows the User to include a Program Profile Item on the current Page.
Click the Program profile tool (enabled only for instruments which support Program Profiles). .
Position the cross-cursor at the top left-hand corner of the proposed position.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the item.
The Profile appears by default labelled with ?. Once a variable has been assigned, the question mark
disappears.
7.10.9 Add an OIFL Object

This allows the User to include a OIFL Page Item for the purpose of adding specified OIFL code, generated from
other objects on the page. It allows any advanced or new features to be driven from a Page Set.
To add an OIFL object:
Click the OIFL tool to load the cursor with the OIFL object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed OIFL object.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag to define the size and shape of the object.
The OIFL object appears as a shaded box labelled OIFL.
Page 40 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.10.10 Draw a Line

This allows the User to draw a Line Page Item between two points on the current Page.
Click the Line tool to load the cursor with the Line object.
Position the cross-cursor at the start of the proposed line.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to size the line.
Release the mouse button to fix the line endpoint.
NOTE
The Line tool is disabled for character targets not supporting angled line draw characters. Character-based
targets approximate to the ideal line, in a rectangular bounding-box.
7.10.11 Draw a Rectangle

This allows the User to draw a Rectangle Page Item between a top-left point and a second bottom-right point
on the current Page.
Click the Rectangle tool to load the cursor with the Rectangle object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed rectangle.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to size the rectangle.
Release the mouse button to fix the opposite corner.
NOTE
The Rectangle tool is disabled for character targets not supporting straight line draw characters.
7.10.12 Draw a Rounded Rectangle

Not used with this issue of software
7.10.13 Draw a Triangle

This allows the User to draw a Triangle Page Item between a top-left point and a second bottom-right point on
the current Page. The dimensions of the Triangle Page Item can also be changed.
Click the Triangle tool to load the cursor with the Triangle object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed triangles bounding-box.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to size the triangle. Release the mouse button.
The result is an upright isosceles triangle with base defined by the base of the box, and peak located at the top-
centre of the box. The shape and orientation of the triangle can be edited.
To edit a Triangles shape and orientation:
Click the Selection tool.
Click anywhere on or inside the triangle to be edited and use the cursor to drag corners of the triangle to new
positions as required.
HA260749U005 Page 41
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.10.14 Draw an Ellipse or Circle

This allows the User to draw an Ellipse or Circle Page Item between a top-left point and a second bottom-right
point on the current Page.
Click the ellipse tool to load the cursor with the Ellipse/Circle object.
Position the cross-cursor at a corner of the proposed ellipses bounding-box.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to size the ellipse/circle.
Release the mouse button to fix the size and shape of the ellipse/circle.
NOTE
The Ellipse tool is disabled for all character targets, and pixel targets not supporting ellipses.
7.10.15 Select a Line/Text Colour

This Line/Text colour palette lets you select outline colours for line items (line, rectangle, ellipse, etc.), and for
the characters in text items.
Select the line or text object, e.g. using the Selection tool
Click the Foreground pulldown to reveal a list of available colours and select the required colour from the
palettes pulldown menu. The Foreground colour palette retains the colour of the last-selected item.
See also Define Customised colours.
7.10.16 Select a Fill/Background Colour

The Fill/Background colour palette lets you select fill colours for geometrical items (rectangles, ellipses,
triangles, etc.), and background colours for text items.
Select the item, e.g. using the Selection tool
Click on a background/fill colour from the palettes pulldown menu. The palette retains the background/fill
colour of the last-selected item.
See also Define Customised colours.
Page 42 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.11 USE THE PLACEMENT BAR COMMANDS TO...

7.11.1 Activate the Snap object(s) to nearest gridline
Select the object(s), using the Selection tool.
Click the Snap Object(s) to Grid tool. Each object snaps independently to the nearest gridline.
7.11.2 Align the bottom edges of objects

Select the objects, using the Selection tool.
Click the Align Objects Bottom tool.
7.11.3 Align the left edges of objects

Click the Align Objects Left tool.
7.11.4 Align the right edges of objects

Click the Align Objects Right tool.
7.11.5 Align the top edges of objects

Click the Align Objects Top tool.
7.11.6 Bring an object forward by one layer

Select the Page Item using the Selection tool.
Click the Bring Forward tool.
7.11.7 Bring an object to the front

Click the Bring to Front tool.
7.11.8 Send an object backward by one layer

Click the Send Backward tool.
7.11.9 Send an object to the back

Click the Send to Back tool.
7.11.10 Flip object(s) horizontally

Click the Flip Horizontal tool.
HA260749U005 Page 43
Issue 4 Mar 08
7.11.11 Flip object(s) vertically

Click the Flip Vertical tool.
7.11.12 Group multiple objects

Select the required Page Items, using the Selection tool.
Use the <Ctrl> key to select multiple Page Items on a worksheet.
Click the `Group' tool.
7.11.13 Ungroup a grouped object

Select the grouped Page Item, using the Selection tool.
Click the Ungroup tool.
7.11.14 Show/Hide the gridlines

Click the Toggle Gridlines tool change the current Grid state.
Repeat to revert to previous Grid state.
Page 44 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
8 CUSTOMISING THE USER SCREEN EDITOR

8.1 DEFINE CUSTOMISED COLOURS
Up to 16 custom colours can be stored in the Custom colors slots in the colour palette. To define a custom
colour:
Open the Colors palette dialogue.
Use the Define Custom Colors button to reveal the colour editing palette.
Select a vacant custom colour slot, and adjust the colour using the numeric fields or the cross-hair on the
colour spectrum screen beside.
When satisfied, press the Add to Custom Colors button.
To use a colour, click on it and confirm using the OK button.
8.2 SELECT THE COLOUR OF THE GRIDLINES

Click the Grid Colour toolbutton to display the Color dialogue.
Select the required colour and confirm using the OK button.
See also Define Customised colours
8.3 CUSTOMISE THE GRID SETTINGS

Click the Grid Settings tool to display the Grid Settings dialogue.
Configure the required grid settings in the dialogue.
Click OK to apply the settings.
NOTE
The Configure using default font button changes the Grid Settings to fit the Font Style selected in the Text
Bar.
8.4 CUSTOMISE THE USER SCREEN BACKGROUND COLOUR

Allows the background colour for the target screen to be selected.
Open the required Page.
Select Page > Panel Colour to reveal the Color dialogue.
Select the colour and confirm using the OK button.
See also Define Customised colours
HA260749U005 Page 45
Issue 4 Mar 08
9 STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

9.1 WHAT IS STRUCTURED TEXT?
Structured Text (ST) is the language used to write the statements and expressions that specify Actions in the
User Screen Editor.
NOTE
An Action is a set of instructions written in Structured Text (ST), specifying direct operations on the LIN
Database of the running control strategy.
Structured Text (ST) strings are limited to the form "<name>:=<value>;", where <name> is the name of a LIN
Database field or subfield enclosed in square brackets, and <value> is a string representing the value to be
assigned.
The value string may be enclosed in single quotes, and may then make use of standard Structured Text (ST) $
escape sequences. Alternatively, it may be unquoted, in which case it is terminated by ; or a space.
Space characters are permitted either side of ":=" and before the ;. The effect of the assignment will be the
same as if the value string had been typed in via LINtools.
For numeric or Boolean variables, <value> may also be a limited form of Structured Text (ST) expression,
involving only fields within the function block being assigned.
Example:
ST:"[PID1.SL]:=SL+10.0;" (increments SL when button pressed).
With the use of the instruction categories below, the User Screen Editor can achieve a specific response to a
User Screen action, or changes of a value at a specified point.
(*ADJUST TEMP SETPOINT*) TIC_100.SL:= REC1.A4;(*A statement*)
Dig_A.Out AND 64 (*An expression*)
9.1.1 Structured Text - Example
Page 46 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.2 EDITING STRUCTURED TEXT

Structured Text can be edited only in the Action field of a Page Item Properties dialogue. It allows a structured
string of text consisting of a sequence of paragraphs to achieve a specific response to a User Screen action, or
to changes of a value at a specified point.
Variable In a LIN Database Variable, a list of LIN Database blocks, including fields and subfields,
derived from the current target LIN Database (.dbf). In an Instrument Variable, a list of
System blocks derived from the current (validated) Target Instrument.
Operator This is a list of mathematical and logical operators.
Outline This is a list of ready-made formats, e.g. time, hex, and comment.
Function This is a list of mathematical functions.
If Statements These three items insert the corresponding multi-line 'If' statement structures, with dummy
Variables for subsequent editing.
9.3 COMMENTS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

Example: (*character string*)
Non-executing character strings can be added as 'comments' in the Structured Text of an Action or Transition,
e.g. to clarify its purpose. Comments can occupy separate lines, or precede or follow a statement/expression on
the same line, or be inserted anywhere that an optional space can go.
Example: (*ADJUST TEMP SETPOINT*) TIC_100.SL:= REC1.A4;(*RECIPE #5*)
See also Notation Formats.
9.4 CONSTANTS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

Structured Text (ST) supports four types of constant: Integer. Real. Time. String.
9.4.1 Integer constants

Decimal constants have the format: {sign} digit {digit}
Example: 45
Example: -12345
Hexadecimal constants have the format: 16#hexdigit {hexdigit}
Example: 16#FF (represents 255 decimal)
Example: 16#00ff (represents 255 decimal - padding zeroes OK)
Example: 16#03e8 (represents 1000 decimal)
NOTE
Hexadecimal digits are not case-sensitive.
Binary constants have the format: 2# binarydigit { binarydigit }

Example: 2#1100 (represents 12 decimal)
Example: 2#0010 (represents 2 decimal)
HA260749U005 Page 47
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.4.2 Real constants

These have the format: {sign} integer.integer
Example: 3.6
Example: -0.0033
9.4.3 Time constants

These have the format: T# {integer unit} real unit
Units are d (days) h (hours) m (minutes) or s (seconds). Time constants evaluate to seconds if assigned or
compared with real constants. E.g. In the assignment Recipe.A3:=T#1h; Recipe.A3 takes the value 3600.
Example: T#3s (3 seconds)
Example: T#4m13.0s (4 minutes, 13 seconds)
Example: T#5.6h (5 hours, 36 minutes)
Example: T#1d12.2h (36 hours, 12 minutes)
NOTE
Time units may be input as upper or lower case.
9.4.4 String constant

String constants can be up to eight characters long and must be enclosed in double quotation marks.
Example: "MANUAL"
Example: "P"
9.4.5 String constants & T1000/T100 fields

At software Issue 3/2, certain T1000/T100 block fields can be written to from Structured Text (ST) only by using
the string constant format, e.g.
Example: Total.Target:="10230890";
Example: TimeDate.Date1:="18-07-04";
The table below lists the fields requiring this format:
Block Field(s)
COUNT SetCount
TOTAL Target
TIMEDATE Time_1 Time_8, Date_1 Date_4, CurrTime, CurrDate
NOTE
Any Field that cannot be written to via a screen readout cannot be written to by Structured Text.
Page 48 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.5 EXPRESSIONS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

Expressions can contain operators, functions, variables, and constants. Brackets are allowed and can be nested
to any level. The evaluation order of an expression is shown in the Operators & Functions table.
9.5.1 Arithmetical
Example: (Block_5.PV + 3.5) / Const.A7 + Const.A6
Example: COS(Block_6.PV)**1.5
Example: Dig_A.Out AND 64
9.5.2 Logical
Example: Recipe.A0 < 4
Example: Dig_B.Out.Bit5 = Dig_A.Out.Bit3
vSTEP3.T >= T#4m
See also Notation Formats
9.6 IDENTIFIERS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

An identifier is a blockname, fieldname, or stepname. A valid identifier must have the format:
letter | _ {letter | digit | _ }... that is, one letter or underscore, followed by any number (including zero) of
letters, digits or underscores, up to a maximum of eight characters.
NOTE
'_' is the underscore (underline) character, not the hyphen or minus sign.
9.6.1 Valid Structured Text identifiers

A1
act_4
FlowMetr
_Pump
X__3Y (consecutive underscores)
z567931
9.6.2 Invalid Structured Text identifiers

1A (digit first)
Pump 3 (space)
Flow-Mtr (minus sign)
x*y*z (multiply sign)
6366 (digit first)
T1.2 (dot)
Pulserate (too long)
NOTE
Variable names containing bad Identifiers can be made recognisable as Variables by enclosing the whole
Variable name in square brackets:
Example: [6366.MN]
Example: [DG_CONN3.W Field2.Bit6]
Example: [x*y*z.OP]
HA260749U005 Page 49
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.7 OPERATORS AND FUNCTIONS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

In the table below, A, B, C etc., are appropriate operands or arguments. Use the correct number format in
Structured Text (ST) expressions, and the correct trigonometric Trigonometric units.
NOTE
In an Expression, the evaluation order of operators follows the table, with the earliest-evaluated operators at
the top.
Some operators are effective only with the appropriate operand types. E.g. the power operator (**) requires A
to be positive; the MOD operator must have positive integer operands, etc.
Page 50 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.7 OPERATORS AND FUNCTIONS IS ST (Cont.)
Operator Purpose Format
() Brackets (alter precedence) (A+B)*(C+D)
- Negate -A
NOT Logical invert NOT(A)
TRUNC Truncate (to an integer) TRUNC(A)
FLOAT Convert to Floating Point FLOAT(A)
ROUND Round (up or down) ROUND(A)
ABS Absolute ABS(A)
DEG Degrees (from Radians) DEG(A)
RAD Radians (from degrees) RAD(A)
SIN Sine (Radians) SIN(A)
COS Cosine (Radians) COS(A)
TAN Tangent (Radians) TAN(A)
ASIN Arc Sine (Radians) ASIN(A)
ACOS Arc Cosine (Radians) ACOS(A)
ATAN2 Arc Tangent (Radians) ATAN2(A,B) [Tangent=A/B]
SQRT Square Root SQRT(A)
LN Natural Logarithm (base e) LN(A)
LOG Logarithm (base 10) LOG(A)
EXP Exponentiation (eA) EXP(A)
MIN Minimum value MIN(A,B,C,...)
MAX Maximum value MAX(A,B,C,...)
AVG Average (arithmetic mean) AVG(A,B,C,...)
RANDOM Random value RANDOM(A) [A=max modulus]
SWITCH Selects A (integer C<1) else B SWITCH(A,B,C)
** Exponentiate (Power AB) A**B[1]
* Multiply ( ) A*B
/ Divide ( ) A/B
MOD Modulo (remainder of A/B) TRUNC(A) MOD TRUNC(B)[2]
+ Add A+B
- Subtract A-B
= Equals A=B
< Less Than A<B
HA260749U005 Page 51
Issue 4 Mar 08
> Greater Than A>B
<= Less Than Or Equal To A<=B
>= Greater Than Or Equal To A>=B
<> Not Equals A<>B
AND Logical AND A AND B
XOR Logical XOR (exclusive OR) A XOR B
OR Logical OR A OR B
[1] A must exceed zero. [2] A and B must be integers.
Page 52 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.8 SPACES IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

9.8.1 Mandatory spaces
Space characters must separate logical operators from their operands.
Example: LEV.OP>15 AND TEMP.OP<55.5 is correct.
9.8.2 Illegal spaces

Spaces must not be left anywhere inside operators, database names, identifiers, or constants.
Example: HEAT_PID. SL:=REC1. A3; is incorrect.
9.8.3 Optional spaces

Spaces other than mandatory or illegal spaces may be inserted at will to improve the clarity of the expression
or statement.
Example: TIC_100.PV := 45.5; needs no spaces but may be clearer with the two shown.
NOTE
Space characters occupy the same amount of memory as other characters.
9.9 STATEMENTS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

A statement can be an Assignment or an IF-statement.
NOTE
Statements must be terminated by a semicolon.
9.9.1 Assignment
variable := expression;
Various types of assignment are possible, including the following examples:
Assign a constant to a real variable.
Example: PIC_004.PV:=35.5;
Assign a calculation to a real variable.
Example: ANOP_3.PV:=Const.A6 + (Block_5.PV+3.5) / Const.A7;
Assign a constant to a digital variable. Example: Dig_B.Out.Bit0:=1;
Assign a calculation to a digital variable. Example: SEQ4.Hold:=(PIC_005.PV > 30) AND Dig_B.Out.Bit5;
Assign a string to a mode. Example: PIC_004.Mode:="CASCADE";
Assign an integer to a bitfield. Example: Dig_A.Out:=96;
Assign a bitwise calculation to a bitfield. Example: Dig_A.Out:=Dig_B.Out XOR 96;
HA260749U005 Page 53
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.9.2 IF-statement
IF expression THEN statement-list
{ELSIF expression THEN statement-list}
{ELSE statement-list}
END_IF;
NOTE
The IF-statement allows zero or more ELSIF clauses, and zero or one ELSE clause. IF-statements can be nested.
Example:
IF PIC_004.PV < 10 THEN
RECORD.A4 := ANIN_004.HR;
ELSE
END_IF;
Example:
IF LEVEL.OP < REC1.A0
THEN Dig_B.Out.Bit1 := 0;
END_IF;
See also Notation Formats
9.10 TRANSITIONS IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

Transitions are Structured Text (ST) expressions that may be either TRUE (evaluate to logic or integer 1) or
FALSE (evaluate to logic or integer 0).
A Transition is used in an Sequence Action to test for a condition in the control strategy. A TRUE Transition
following an active step (or parallel steps) causes the Sequence to move on to the next step(s). That is, the
active step(s) preceding the Transition de-activate(s), and the step(s) following the Transition activate(s).
Test a real variable against a constant. Example: Recipe.a0 < 4
Test a digital for TRUE. Example: Dig_B.Out.Bit5
Test a digital for FALSE. Example: NOT Dig_B.Out.Bit5
Test a step time. Example: STEP6.T >= T#2m
Test a step time in seconds. Example: waitstep.t > 95
Test if an SFC Action end-step reached. Example: Act4_end.X
Logical combination of tests. Example: Dig_B.Out.Bit5 AND (Rec.A0<4 OR Rec.A0>5) OR step6.T>=T#4s
See also Notation Formats.
9.11 VARIABLES IN STRUCTURED TEXT (ST)

The source of a Variable can be from either the LIN Instrument via the Instrument Variable Browser or the LIN
Database via the LIN Database Browser.
Page 54 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
9.12 LIN DATABASE FIELD/SUBFIELD NAMES

blockname.fieldname Example: PIC_004.PV
blockname.bitfield.bit Example: Dig_A.Out.Bit3
blockname.bitfield Example: TIC_100.Options
blockname.Alarms.alarmname Example: ANIN_005.Alarms.HiLevel
NOTE
Database names are not case-sensitive, i.e. capital or small letters may be freely used or mixed in the names.
Example: Dig_A.OUT.BIT3 is equivalent to Dig_A.Out.
9.12.1 Bitfields
8-bit bitfields may be referred to as decimal integers in the range 0 to 255 (i.e. binary 00000000 to 11111111).
Example: Dig_A.Out:=96; assigns the binary value 01100000 to the bitfield.
16-bit bitfields may be referred to as decimal integers in the range -32768 to +32767 (i.e. binary 1000 0000
0000 0000 to 0111 1111 1111 1111, in 2's complement format).
9.12.2 Aliases
TagName aliases can be used in Structured Text.
9.12.3 LIN Sequence step variables

stepname.X Example: END_STEP.X
stepname.T Example: STEP5.T
Stepname.X is TRUE when the step called Stepname is active, or when the step timers have been stopped but
not initialised (Run and Init = FALSE, in the SFC_CON block). Otherwise Stepname.X is FALSE.
Stepname.T is the elapsed time in the step called Stepname, in seconds. Stepname.T is frozen when Stepname is
exited, and zeroed when Stepname starts or when the SFC is reset.
NOTE
Identifiers contained in a Variable must be valid.
HA260749U005 Page 55
Issue 4 Mar 08
10 GETTING SPECIFIC HELP

10.1 OPEN ONLINE HELP FILE
To access the User Screen Editors help file, pull down the Help menu and click Help Topics. The help file opens
at the Welcome to the User Screen Editor! topic.
If already open, the help topic last accessed is displayed instead.
Use the help windows Contents, Index, or Search tabs to get help on any topic.
If you want to step from one topic to the next in a logical order, click the browse buttons in the required
direction.
10.2 SHOW CONTEXT-SENSITIVE HELP

10.2.1 Dialogue Help
To get help with filling in dialogues, press the PCs <F1> key while the dialogue is active. This opens up the User
Screen Editor Help file at the relevant topic.
The Help file open can remain open, ready to display the relevant topic the next time <F1> is clicked.
10.2.2 Menu Help

To get help with menu items, highlight the item and press the PCs <F1> key. This opens up the User Screen
Editor Help file at the relevant topic (if available).
10.2.3 Toolbutton Help

To get help with using any of the editors toolbuttons, first click the Help mode button then locate the Help
cursor over the toolbutton to be queried. Note that it does not matter if the required toolbutton is inactive
(greyed out). Click to display the relevant help topic.
Alternatively, locate the ordinary cursor over the toolbutton and hold down the left mouse button. Click the
PCs <F1> key to display the relevant help topic in the Online Help.
Page 56 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE

11.1 INTRODUCTION
This dialogue is used to edit either Pixel-based or Character-based Target Screen types.
To access the dialogue, either, press the Edit button on the Target Panels dialogue, or double-click the required
Target Screen type
To simplify editing Target Screen type properties, this dialogue is divided in pages. Each page displays the
properties of a selection of the pre-specified parameters stored in the Target Definitions file.
The Target Properties dialogue pages are as foillows,
Bitmaps This page shows the Bitmaps configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the User
to configure and edit the User Screen Editor Bitmaps parameters.
Capabilities If displayed, this page shows the Capabilities configured for this Screen type. It also permits
the User to configure and edit the Capabilities supported by this Screen type.
Colours If displayed, this page shows the Colours configured for this Screen type. It also permits the
User to configure and edit the Colours supported by this Screen type.
Drawing This page shows the Drawing features configured for this Screen type. It also permits the
User to configure and edit the Drawing features supported by this Screen type.
Filename This page shows the Filename (.uxt) configured for this Screen type. It also permits the User
to edit the Filename of this Screen type.
Fonts This page shows the Fonts configured for this Screen type. It also permits the User to
configure and edit the Fonts supported by this Screen type.
General These are Screen type name and the Screen size parameters. It also permits the User to
configure and edit the Fonts supported by this Screen type.
Grid This page shows the Grid parameters of the selected Target Screen type. It also permits the
User to configure and edit the Grid parameters supported by this Target Screen type.
Instruments This page shows the Instruments configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the
User to configure and edit the User Screen Editor Instruments parameters supported by this
Target Screen type.
Mappings If displayed, this page shows the Character Drawing and Symbol Mapping capabilities
configured for this Target Screen type.
Miscellaneous If displayed, this page shows the Miscellaneous features configured for this Screen type. It
also permits the User to configure and edit the Miscellaneous features supported by this
Screen type.
OSFK If displayed, this page shows the default capabilities of the Off Screen Function Keys
configured for this Target Screen type.
Panes This page shows the Panes configured for this Screen type. It also permits the User to
configure and edit the Panes supported by this Screen type.
Underlines If displayed, this page shows the Underlining parameters configured for this Target Screen
type. It also permits the User to edit the Underlining parameters of this Target Screen type.
Variables This page shows all specific system Variables associated with the selected Target Screen type.
It also permits the User to configure and edit other required System Variables supported by
this Target Screen type.
HA260749U005 Page 57
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.2 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - BITMAPS PAGE

This page shows the Bitmaps configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the User to configure and
edit the User Screen Editor Bitmaps parameters supported by this Target Screen type.
11.2.1 Bitmaps list

The list display the properties of each Bitmap for this Target Screen type as configured via the Add Font
dialogue displayed when the Add or Edit button is pressed.
Name Shows the name of the Bitmap, as it will appear on the User Screen Editor worksheet during
Page configuration. Select a particular Bitmap using this name.
Filename Shows the Windows bitmap (.bmp) file name for the Bitmap, as stored in the target/bitmaps
directory.
Description Use this to enter a concise description of the Bitmap file, as stored in the target/bitmaps
directory.
11.2.2 Add
Use this button to display the Add Bitmap dialogue. The Add Bitmap dialogue allows the configuration of a new
Bitmap in the list of the required Bitmap properties.
11.2.3 Edit
Use this button to display the Edit Bitmap dialogue revealing the properties of the Bitmap selected in the Table
list. The Edit Bitmap dialogue allows the properties, as displayed in the Table list, of the selected Bitmap to be
edited.
11.2.4 Remove
Use this button to remove the selected Bitmap from the Table list.
Beware
The selected Bitmap is removed without requesting confirmation. This may the cause the User Screen
page to display incorrectly.
Page 58 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.3 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - CAPABILITIES PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Capabilities configured for this Screen type. It also permits the User to
configure and edit the Capabilities supported by this Screen type.
11.3.1 Capabilities
This series of checkboxes define the resources supported by the Target Screen type.
Supports display agent driven sub-panes
If enabled, the Target Screen type will display sub-panes requested from an Agent.
Supports flashing If enabled, a configured Page Item continuously alternates its appearance, e.g. flashes on and
off, or switches between two different colours.
Supports highlighting
If enabled,, a configured Page Item is displayed differently from non highlighted objects, e.g.
with increased colour brightness, or with swapped foreground and background colours.
Supports touch areas
If If enabled, the Target Screen type will respond to an operation originating from a Touch
Area. Touch areas are intrinsically invisible, but can be identified to the operator by
overlapping them with suitable graphics.
Supports buttons If If enabled, the Target Screen type will respond to an operation originating from a Button.
Further configuration may be required if a Target Screen type requires a Button to have an
internal border, see next point.
Buttons have a VT220-style single character border
If enabled, the Target Screen type Button will have an single character internal border. This
is disabled if the Supports buttons capability is not enabled (not ticked).
Supports signing (21CFR11)
If enabled, the Target Screen type will request Confirmation when the configured Action is
operates.
NOTE
The Confirmation Properties page will appear on the appropriate Page Item Properties dialogues to configure
the required confirmation.
HA260749U005 Page 59
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.4 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - COLOURS PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Colours configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the User to
configure and edit the Colours supported by this Screen type.
11.4.1 Table list

This list displays the properties of each Pane for this Target Screen type as configured via the Add Colour and
Edit Colour dialogues displayed when the Add or Edit button, respectively (see below), is pressed.
Number A User defined numeric reference assigned to the configured Colour.
Name A User defined name reference assigned to the configured Colour.
Colour This shows a list of the Target Screen type colours corresponding to the colour's Number.
NOTE
These colour specifications are not downloadable to the Target Instrument. Their purpose is simply to
ensure that the colours seen on the User Screen Editor worksheet match as closely as possible those
appearing on the Target Screen when the configurations are downloaded and run.
11.4.2 Setup
Use this button to display the Colour Setup dialogue. This allows the default background and foreground
colours to be defined and to specify that the Target Screen type can support Colour change commands.
11.4.3 Add
Use this button to display the Add Colour dialogue. The Add Colour dialogue allows the configuration of a
new colour in the Table list of the required Colour properties. Customised Colours can also be defined.
11.4.4 Edit
Use this button to display the Edit Colour dialogue revealing the properties of the Colour selected in the Table
list. The Edit Colour dialogue allows the properties, as displayed in the Table list, of the selected Colour to be
edited and customised Colours to be defined.
11.4.5 Remove
Use this button to remove the selected Colour from the Table list.
Beware
The selected Colour is removed without requesting confirmation. This may the cause the User Screen page
to display incorrectly.
Page 60 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.5 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - DRAWING PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Drawing features configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the
User to configure and edit the Drawing features supported by this Target Screen type.
Supports bar charts If enabled, the Target Screen type will display bar charts.
Supports trend graphs If enabled, the Target Screen type will display trend graphs.
Supports drawing of bitmaps
If enabled, the Target Screen type permits new bitmap graphic Page Items to be created
on a Page.
Supports drawing of circles
If enabled, the Target Screen type permits circle Page Items to be created on a Page.
Supports drawing of rounded rectangles
If enabled, the Target Screen type permits rectangles with filleted corner Page Items to
be created on a Page.
Supports drawing of polylines
If enabled, the Target Screen type permits multiple segment line Page Items to be
created on a Page.
11.6 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - FILENAME PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Filename (.uxt) configured of this Target Screen type. It also permits the User
to edit the Filename of this Target Screen type.
11.6.1 Target filename

Filename (under Targets directory):
A name assigned to the configured Target Screen type file used.
NOTE
Change the Filename field, and the Target name field on the General page, to create a duplicate set of
Target Screen type properties.
HA260749U005 Page 61
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.7 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - FONTS PAGE

This page shows the Fonts configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the User to configure and edit
the Fonts supported by this Target Screen type.
11.7.1 Table list

This list displays the properties of each Font for this Target Screen type as configured via the Add Font dialogue
displayed when the Add button (see below) is pressed.
Number This number corresponds to a particular font resident in the Target Instrument. It must be
understood by the Target Instrument to represent that font. (There could be only one Font
resident in the Target Instrument). It is used by the Operator InterFace Language (OIFL)
output files, downloaded to the Target Instrument, to specify display of that Font at runtime.
Name This is the name of the Font as it will appear on the User Screen Editor worksheet during
Page configuration. Select a particular Font using this name.
Dimensions This shows the width by height dimensions (in pixels) of the configured character cell.
Proportional This shows that the configured Font is either a Proportional or Fixed width font. Yes
indicates that the configured Font has characters of differing widths. No shows that the font
has a fixed width.
Filename The Windows bitmap (.bmp) file name for the Font, as stored in the target/fonts directory.
11.7.2 Setup
Use this button to display the Font Setup dialogue. This allows the default Font to be specified, and indicate
that the Target Screen type can support Font change configuration.
11.7.3 Add
Use this button to display the Add Font dialogue. The Add Font dialogue allows the configuration of a new Font
in the Table list of the required fonts properties.
11.7.4 Edit
Use this button to display the Edit Font dialogue revealing the properties of the Font selected in the Table list.
The Edit Font dialogue allows the properties, as displayed in the Table list, of the selected Font to be edited.
11.7.5 Remove
Use this button to remove the selected Font from the Table list.
Beware
The selected Font is removed without requesting confirmation. This may cause the User Screen page to
display incorrectly.
Page 62 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.8 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - GENERAL PAGE

These are the Screen type name and the Target Screen size parameters. It also permits the User to configure
and edit the type of Fonts supported by this Target Screen type. The fields are:
11.8.1 Target Name

Name Use this field to specify an appropriate Target Screen Type name.
11.8.2 Dimensions
Width Use this field to specify the width, in pixels, of the designed Target Screen Type.
Height Use this field to specify the height, in pixels, of the designed Target Screen Type.
11.8.3 Character Dimensions

Width Use this field to specify the width, in pixels, of the required characters.
Height Use this field to specify the height, in pixels, of the required characters.
Hide target from new Page Set configurations
If enabled, the specified Target Screen type will not be available for any future Page Set
designs.
NOTE
Height and width fields are omitted for configuration of Pixel-based Target Screen types.
11.9 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - GRID PAGE

This page shows the default Grid parameters of the selected Target Screen type. It also permits the User to
configure and edit the Grid parameters supported by this Target Screen type.
11.9.1 Default Major Grid Settings

This displays the default intervals of each visible grid line for this Target Screen.
Horizontal (pixels): Use the spin button to change, increase or decrease the intervals in pixels between each
visible grid line. Type in the required value if necessary.
Vertical (pixels): Use the spin button to change, increase or decrease the intervals in pixels between each
visible grid line. Type in the required value if necessary.
NOTE
A maximum of 9999 pixel intervals can be configured.
11.9.2 Default Minor Grid Settings

This displays the default intervals between the Major Grid Settings, of each invisible grid line for this Target
Screen.
Horizontal (pixels): Use the spin button to change, increase or decrease the intervals in pixels between each
invisible grid line. Type in the required value if necessary.
Vertical (pixels): Use the spin button to change, increase or decrease the intervals in pixels between each
invisible grid line. Type in the required value if necessary.
NOTE
A maximum of 9999 pixel intervals can be configured.
HA260749U005 Page 63
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.9.3 Default Zoom

Zoom Show the default zoom factor, when using the User Screen Editor. Select the required
default zoom factor from the list.
11.10 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - INSTRUMENTS PAGE

This page shows the Instruments configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the User to configure
and edit the User Screen Editor Instruments parameters supported by this Target Screen type.
11.10.1 Instruments list

This list displays the properties of each Instrument for this Target Screen type as configured via the Add
Instrument dialogue displayed when the Add or Edit button is pressed.
Type This is the Type of the Instrument manufactured with this Target Screen type. Select a
particular Instrument type.
Version This is the V rsion of the Type of the Instrument manufactured with this Target Screen type.
11.10.2 Add
Use this button to display the Add Instrument dialogue. The Add Instrument dialogue allows the
configuration of a new Instrument in the list of the required Instrument properties.
11.10.3 Edit
Use this button to display the Edit Instrument dialogue revealing the properties of the Instrument type
selected in the Table list. The Edit Instrument dialogue allows the properties, as displayed in the Table list, of
the selected Instrument to be edited.
11.10.4 Remove
Use this button to remove the selected Instrument from the Table list.
Beware
The selected Instrument type is removed without requesting confirmation. This may prevent the display of
the User Screen page.
Page 64 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.11 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - MAPPINGS PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Character Drawing and Symbol Mapping capabilities configured for this Target
Screen type.
11.11.1 Character drawing capabilities

Has characters for drawing straight lines
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit text to be used to draw straight lines as
defined in the Graphical symbol-character mappings list and ASCII Key code field.
Has characters for drawing angled lines
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit text to be used to draw angled lines as defined
in the Graphical symbol-character mappings list and ASCII Key code field.
11.11.2 Graphical symbol-character mappings

Character description
Use the list to select the orientation of the line being configured. If a character has already
been defined, the ASCII key code field will automatically show it.
ASCII key code This shows the ASCII key code already defined for the selected line type displayed in the
Character description list.
11.11.3 Browse
Use this button to reveal the Open dialogue. This can then be used to locate an existing file containing all
required ASCII Codes.
11.12 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - MISCELLANEOUS PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Miscellaneous features configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits
the User to configure and edit the Miscellaneous features supported by this Target Screen type.
11.12.1 Miscellaneous features

Supports action lists
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit Structured Text actions.
Supports 3D styling
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit the drawing of bevelled edges on appropriate
Page Items.
Supports different draw modes (e.g. COPY, OR, XOR, etc.)
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit new bitmap graphic Page Items to be created
on a Page.
Supports different fill patterns (e.g. chequered, etc.)
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit pattern filled Page Items to be created on a
Page. This will fill the Page Item with a selected chequered pattern, not a simple solid colour
fill.
11.12.2 Database
LINDB This shows the type of Database used by the Target Screen type.
HA260749U005 Page 65
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.13 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - OSFK PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the default capabilities of the Off Screen Function Keys configured for this Target
Screen type.
11.13.1 Off Screen Function Keys

Always display default Off Screen Function Keys image
If enabled, the Target Screen type will only display the default Off Screen Function Keys
Bitmap image, as defined in the Default Off Screen Function Keys image field.
Default Off Screen Function Keys Image
Shows the path and filename of the Bitmap (.bmp) file, required as the default.
Browse Use this button to reveal the Open dialogue. This can then be used to locate an existing
Bitmap (.bmp) file for use in the OSFK pane.
Define Function key image cropping area.
Imported bitmaps are scaled according to the setting in the Panes dialogueue. The values
entered in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right fields of the Define Function Key image
cropping area define a rectangle, within this scaled bitmap, to appear in the function keys
pane. Setting all values to 10, for example, would define a rectangle as follows: the top left-
hand corner would be 10 pixels down from the top of the scaled image and 10 pixels in
from its left edge; the bottom right-hand corner would be 10 pixels up from the bottom and
10 pixels in from the right.
Buttons and Touch areas on OSFK panes
If enabled, all functions from the OSFK Pane will require Confirmation.
Off Screen Function Keys area cannot
If enabled, configuration of the OSFK Pane is not permitted by the user.
User configurable area disabled from
Shows the highest point of the Target Screen type, in pixels, where configuration is not
permitted.
User configurable area disabled to
Shows the lowest point of the Target Screen type, in pixels, where configuration is not
permitted.
Page 66 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.14 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - PANES PAGE

This page shows the Panes configured for this Target Screen type. It also permits the User to configure and edit
the Panes supported by this Target Screen type.
11.14.1 Table list

This list displays the properties of each Pane for this Target Screen type as configured via the Add Pane and
Edit Pane dialogues displayed when Add or Edit, respectively, is pressed.
Pane Type A list of the types of Pane used by this Target Screen type.
Name A name assigned to the configured Pane type as displayed in the Page Properties and Pane
Setup dialogues, e.g. the Status Pane might be named 'Status Area'.
Dimensions This shows the width by height dimensions in characters or pixels according to the
configured Pane type of the Target Screen type.
Description This shows information that is relevant to the selected Pane type, e.g. the status pane might
be described as 'Constant date/time display'.
11.14.2 Setup
Use this button to display the Pane Setup dialogue. This allows a default Font to be defined.
11.14.3 Add
Use this button to display the Add Pane dialogue which allows the configuration of a new Pane type in the
Table list of the required Pane properties.
11.14.4 Edit
Use this button to display the Edit Pane dialogue revealing the properties of the Pane selected in the Table list.
The Edit Pane dialogue allows the properties, as displayed in the Table list, of the selected Font to be edited.
11.14.5 Remove
Use this button to remove the selected Pane from the Table list.
Beware
The selected Pane is removed without requesting confirmation. This may cause prevent the display of a
User Screen page.
HA260749U005 Page 67
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.15 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - UNDERLINES PAGE

If displayed, this page shows the Underlining parameters configured for this Screen type. It also permits the
User to edit the Underlining parameters of this Screen type.
11.15.1 Special underline characters

Special underline characters below character cells
If enabled, the Target Screen type will permit text to be used to draw straight lines as
Number Use the spin button to change, increase or decrease User defined number of the intervals in
pixels between each invisible grid line. Type in the required value if necessary.
Height Shows the Height of the specified Font type, in pixels.
Use underline sections for bar charts
If enabled, the target Screen type will permit text to be used to draw straight lines as
11.15.2 Underline colours

Number Use the spin button to change, increase or decrease User defined number of the intervals in
pixels between each invisible grid line. Type in the required value if necessary.
Colour swatch Shows a colour sample for the Colour specified by the User defined Name and Number
fields.
Edit Use this button to reveal the Colour editing palette. This will allow the User to change the
colour shown in the colour swatch, that will eventually be defined by the User defined Name
and Number fields.
Page 68 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
11.16 TARGET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE - VARIABLES PAGE

This page shows all specific system Variables associated with the selected Target Screen type. It also permits the
User to configure and edit other required System Variables supported by this Target Screen type.
11.16.1 Target Specific System Variables list

This list displays the System Variables for this Target Screen type. Additional Variables can be configured via the
Target Variable dialogue displayed when the Add or Edit button is pressed.
Name This is the name of System Variable, as it will appear in the Instrument Browser dialogue
when attempting to display an Instrument Variable on the User Screen page.
Mnemonic This is the short sequence of letters used by the software to easily recognise the System
Variable supported by this Target Screen type.
Type This is the Variable data type, i.e. String, Boolean, Integer, etc..
11.16.2 Add
Use this button to display the Target Variable dialogue. The Target Variable dialogue allows the configuration
of a new Variable in the list.
11.16.3 Edit
Use this button to display the Target Variable dialogue revealing the properties of the Variable selected in the
Table list. The Target Variable dialogue allows the properties, as displayed in the Table list, of the selected
Instrument to be edited.
11.16.4 Delete
Use this button to remove the selected Variable from the Table list.
Beware
The selected System Variable is removed without requesting confirmation. This may the cause the User
Screen page to display incorrect information.
11.16.5 Export
Use this button to display the Save As dialogue and generate a Text file (.txt) of the selected Variable from the
Table list.
11.16.6 Import
Use this button to display the Open dialogue and locate a Text file (.txt) of a required Variable instance.
Tip!
Use the Import and Export buttons to generate a Text file (.txt) of System Variables that are used
consistently throughout the System.
HA260749U005 Page 69
Issue 4 Mar 08
12 WHAT IS
12.1 A LIN DATABASE?
A LIN Database (.dbf) is a software program that runs in a LIN Instrument. The running LIN Database takes in
signals from sensors in an outside entity (e.g. an industrial plant), processes them in specified ways, and then
outputs signals to actuators in the entity to control its behaviour in the required manner.
The cycle of signal input to the LIN Database, signal processing, and signal output to the entity is repeated
continuously while the LIN Database runs.
More than one LIN Instrument can be involved in controlling a single entity, but only one LIN Database can run
in a single LIN Instrument at a time.
A LIN Database can work in conjunction with one or more LIN Sequences running in the LIN instrument. It can
also make use of LIN Actions stored in action files in the LIN instrument.
12.2 A LIN FUNCTION BLOCK?

LIN Instruments use a block-structured approach to a control strategy, where various Function Block Categories
of ready-made LIN function blocks perform the processing required.
A LIN function block is an instance of a reusable module of program code, called a template, dedicated to a
particular type of processing operation, e.g. the ADD2 template adds two numbers. In general, function blocks
take in analogue and/or digital signals via their inputs, process them in a variety of methods and then pass the
results on via their outputs. These function blocks are then wired together so that the signals can flow
between them to execute the control strategy.
12.3 A USER SCREEN EDITOR ACTION?

A User Screen Editor action is script (Structured Text) comprising a comma-separated list of one or more User
Actions, which can be configured to execute when a touch-enabled object is activated. These objects include
touch areas, rectangles, ellipses, bitmaps, and buttons.
Typical user actions might include,
setting a function block field to a specified value
acknowledging alarms
changing the programmer state (RUN/HOLD/SKIP/ABORT)
Page 70 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
12.3.1 Supported Actions

This table lists the action mnemonics, action qualifiers, and functions of the actions currently supported.
Mnemonic Qualifier(s) Action
ABORT None Abort the currently executing SPP program.
ACK_ALL None Acknowledge all alarms.
BREAK Boolean Make this the final action in the list, if true. Example:
ST:"[COND.In_1]:=TRUE;",BREAK:"[COND.In_2]",ST:"[COND.In_3]:=TRUE;"
means that the "COND.In_3" action is not carried out whilst the break
condition (IP_2 status) is true. See also CONTINUE
CONTINUE Boolean Go to the next action in the list only if true. Example:
ST:"[COND.In_1]:=FALSE;",CONTINUE:"[COND.In_2]",ST:"[COND.In_3]:=TRUE;"
means that the "COND.In_3" action is carried out only whilst the continue
condition (IP_2 status) is true. See also BREAK
DESC Integer Descend to the Agent with the specified ID number. A subsequent use of the
escape key will return to the current Main page. Example: DESC;50
DICT_ADD String, integer Moves the specified dictionarys pointer by the value of the integer. Example:
DICT_ADD:"W":-2 decrements the dictionary W pointer by 2.
Omission of the integer results in an OIFL error.
DICT_SET String, integer Sets the specified dictionarys pointer to the value of the integer. Example:
DICT_SET:"W":1 sets the dictionary W pointer to location 1.
DICT_PUT String,[integers] Replaces the dictionary entry, or entries, in the location(s) specified by the
String integer(s) with a new value. Example:
DICT_PUT:"W":1:5:"Help" places the word Help into locations 1 to 5 of
dictionary W.
DISABLE Boolean Disable button/area if true. Example:

(or DIS) DISABLE:"[Door.Status.Intlcked]" See also ENABLE
ENABLE Boolean Enable button/area if true. Example:

(or ENA) ENABLE:"[Temp.ModeAct.ManAct]" See also DISABLE
EVENT String,[Integer] Generate an event in the Event Log with string (max 16-characters) and
priority indicator (default = 1). Example:
EVENT:"Filling Started"
GOTO Integer Go to the Agent with the specified ID number. Example:

GOTO:50
HOLD None Hold the currently running SPP program.
NOTE String,[Integer] Generate a note (max. 24 characters) in the Event log with a priority indicator
as specified by the integer (default =1). Example: NOTE:"Agitator started".
NULL None No Action, always disabled.
REPEAT None If this action is present in the list, the action is repeated for as long as the
button or touch area is touched. The repetition rate depends on the screen
update rate.
RUN None Run the currently loaded SPP program.
HA260749U005 Page 71
Issue 4 Mar 08
SKIP [Integer] Skip the current SPP program segment. If the integer qualifier is included then
this action will only be enabled for the specified segment number.
ST String(s) Perform assignment(s) defined in Structured Text.
Page 72 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
12.3.1 SUPPORTED ACTIONS (Cont.)
NOTES
The total length of all text in a list of actions must not exceed 200 Characters.
The action text specified may be a list of comma-separated variables, with each action being performed in
sequence starting with the leftmost and proceeding rightwards to the end unless an exit condition such as
BREAK is detected.
Within the limit above, there is no restriction on the number of Enables and Disables in a string.
An action is enabled only when all relevant enables are True and all relevant disables are False. An action is
disabled if any relevant enable is false and /or any relevant disable is true.
HA260749U005 Page 73
Issue 4 Mar 08
12.4 A VARIABLE?
A Variable is a list of LIN function block, or System block, fields or subfields currently used in the LIN Database
(.dbf) (LIN Variable) or in the Target instrument itself (Instrument Variable), respectively.
12.4.1 LIN Variable

A LIN Variable is a list of LIN function blocks, including the field/subfields in each block, currently used in the
LIN Database (.dbf) of a Target Instrument.
A LIN Variable, (LIN function block field or subfield) can be located and selected via the LIN Database Browser
dialogue. LIN block field or subfield names, can be inserted into dedicated fields of a Page Item Properties
dialogue, and used along with Structured Text to achieve a specific response to a User Screen operation or to
changes of a value at a specified point. The LIN Database Browser dialogue displays a list of those LIN block or
field names that can be inserted. The LIN block and field names are derived from the target LIN Database.
NOTE
Each LIN Block has a specifically associated Data type.
12.4.2 Instrument Variable

An Instrument Variable is a list of system blocks used in the Target Instrument.
An Instrument Variable can be located and selected via the Instrument Variable Browser dialogue. System
blocks can be inserted into dedicated fields of a Page Item Properties dialogue, and used along with Structured
Text to achieve a specific response to a User Screen operation or to changes of a value at a specified point. The
Instrument Variable Browser dialogue displays a list of System blocks that can be inserted. The System blocks
names are derived from the target Instrument.
NOTE
Each System block has a specifically associated Data type.
12.5 AN AGENT?
An 'Agent' is a software module that encapsulates User Screen functionality and 'drives' an area of the screen.
Agents are given names and IDs for reference.
A user-configured Page is an example of an Agent.
Target Instruments may have in-built default agents for commonly required displays, e.g. Alarm History, Clock
Set-up, etc. These have IDs of 1000 and upward.
IDs 1 - 999 is reserved for user generated Pages created using the User Screen Editor.
NOTE
Some instruments may contain built-in Agents (e.g. T2900). These are generally accessible via User Screen
touch-enabled objects.
Page 74 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
12.6 AN INSTRUMENT VARIABLE BROWSER?

Use the Instrument Variable Browser dialogue to select a Variable System function block in the associated LIN
Instrument, for linking to a Dynamic Page Item. The dialogue appears when you press the Browse Instrument
button in Page Item Properties dialogue that let you configure these links, e.g. Colour Attributes, Colour
Limits, Limits, Trend Graph Variable, Variable, etc.
12.6.1 Using the Instrument Variable Browser window

The Action of the Instrument Variable Browser is context-sensitive. It displays only the system blocks supported
by the current Page Item property.
12.7 AN OPERATOR INTERFACE LANGUAGE (OIFL)?

Operator InterFace Language (OIFL (.ofl)) is a software language used by the User Screen Editor and is stored
as an .ofl text file containing instructions for the Target Instrument. The .ofl file indicates what is in the Page Set
and how to build the runtime User Screens.
The Operator InterFace Language (OIFL) of a Page Set or an individual Page can be displayed.
12.8 A LIN DATABASE BROWSER?

Use the LIN Database Browser dialogue to select a Variable or function block in the associated LIN Database,
for linking to a Dynamic Page Item.
The dialogue appears when you press the Browse button in Page Item Properties dialogue that let you
configure these links, e.g. Colour Attributes, Colour Limits, Limits, Trend Graph Variable, Variable, etc.
12.8.1 Using the Browser window

The action of the LIN Database Browser is context-sensitive. It displays only the LIN function blocks and fields
relevant to the current page item property.
12.9 A REPORT WINDOW?

This window records the operation it attempts and displays any validation warnings or errors it may have found.
Validation involves checking that the data is complete and that it is consistent with the LIN Database file (.dbf),
i.e. the referenced LIN fields exist in the LIN Database file (.dbf) and are of the correct type.
Validation is carried out when,
the Verify Page Set command is selected
a Page Set file is loaded
a Page Set file is saved
a Page Set file is closed
Tip!
HA260749U005 Page 75
Issue 4 Mar 08
13 OTHER ITEMS
13.1 3D STYLING PROPERTIES PAGE
This dialogue applies only to the rectangle page object. Use it to add a 3-dimensional 'bevel' effect at the edges
of a rectangle drawn with the rectangle tool, making it appear either raised or lowered (recessed).
This effect is particularly useful if the rectangle is to act as a push-button (via the Touch Area Properties page).
To access the dialogue, right-click the object and select Properties, from the context menu to pop up the
relevant Page Item Properties page. Then click the 3D Styling page.
The fields are:
13.1.1 Bordering
Style Select either the Bevelled, Raised or the Bevelled, Lowered styling from this list. In these
effects, the rectangle appears to be lit from the top-left of the display.
Depth Specify the depth of the bevel in this field, i.e. the amount by which the rectangle appears to
lie above or below the plane of the screen. Use the scrollable box to select a value from 0 to
10 (maximum depth). Entering zero, (the default) removes the 3D-bevel effect completely.
13.1.2 OK
Accepts the parameter changes and closes the dialogue.
13.1.3 Apply
Accepts the changes, and allows further configuration.
13.1.4 Cancel
Closes the dialogue without making any changes to the Page Item Properties.
13.2 ACCESS PROPERTIES PAGE

This dialogue applies only to Dynamic Page Items. Use this dialogue to specify the visibility of the Page Item, i.e.
by what criteria, in terms of operator access level you want it to be seen on the display.
It can also specify the Variable's writability, i.e. the conditions under which the operator is allowed to alter the
Variable value via the display.
NOTE
By default, Variables are 'always visible' and 'never writable'. These settings can be edited via the
appropriate radio buttons and input fields.
13.2.1 Visibility
Always visible Use this radio button to indicate that the Page Item must always visible to any operator.
Visible if operator level is
Use this radio button, in conjunction with the additional fields beside, to indicate that the
Page Item can only visible to an operator with privileges that correspond to the defined
parameters. Use the relationship (=, >=, <) from the pull-down menu, and an access level (1-
4) from the spin button. The Page Item will only be visible to operators whose access level
corresponds to these parameters.
Page 76 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.2.2 Writability
Never writable Use this radio button to indicate that the Variable linked to the Page Item is Read-Only.
Always writable but unreadable (Password)
Use this radio button to indicate that the Variable linked to the Page Item can be written to
if visible, but is only displayed as a series of asterisks (*), e.g. for password-entry use.
Always writable Use this radio button to indicate that the Variable linked to the Page Item can be written to
if visible.
Writable if operator level is
Use this radio button, in conjunction with the additional fields beside, to specify a minimum
operator access level for writing to the Variable linked to the Page Item, if visible. The Page
Item will be writable only by operators whose access level equal or exceed the level
specified in the field beside.
13.2.3 OK
13.2.4 Apply
13.2.5 Cancel
13.3 ADD/EDIT BITMAP DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the user to include a defined Bitmap in this Page Set.
13.3.1 Bitmap name

Name The User defined name of the Bitmap, as recognised in the list.
13.3.2 Bitmap filename

Filename The Bitmap filename, as selected via the Browse button or, if known, simply typed in.
Browse Use the Browse button to display the Open dialogue allowing selection of the required
Bitmap.
13.3.3 Description
Description A concise description of the Bitmap file, as stored in the target/bitmaps directory.
13.3.4 Add
Use this button to accept the changes and close this dialogue.
13.3.5 Cancel
Use this button to ignore the changes and close this dialogue.
HA260749U005 Page 77
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.4 ADD/EDIT COLOUR DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the user to permanently include a defined Colour in this Page Set.
13.4.1 Colour details

Number Shows the User defined number of the Colour, as recognised in the list.
Name Shows the User defined name of the Colour, as recognised in the list.
13.4.2 Colour
Colour swatch Shows a colour sample for the Colour specified by the User defined Name and Number
fields.
Edit Use this button to reveal the Colour editing palette. This will allow the User to change the
colour shown in the colour swatch, that will eventually be defined by the User defined Name
and Number fields.
13.4.3 Add
13.4.4 Cancel
13.5 ADD/EDIT FONT DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the user to permanently include a defined Font style in this Page Set.
13.5.1 Font name

Number The User defined number of the Font, as recognised in the list.
Name The User defined name of the Font, as recognised in the list.
13.5.2 Dimensions
Width Shows the Width of the specified Font type, in pixels.
Height Shows the Height of the specified Font type, in pixels.
13.5.3 Font properties

Is the Font proportional?
If enabled, all characters in this configured Font will be of an identical width.
13.5.4 Font filename (under Targets Font directory):

Filename Shows the Windows bitmap (.bmp) file name for the Font, as stored in the target/fonts
directory.
Browse Use the Browse button to display the Open dialogue allowing selection of the required
Font.
13.5.5 Add
13.5.6 Cancel
Page 78 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.6 ADD/EDIT PANE DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the user to permanently include a defined Pane in this Page Set.
13.6.1 Pane type and name

Pane Type Shows the type of the Pane, as recognised in the list. Use this list to select the required
default Pane.
Name Shows the User defined name of the Pane, as recognised in the list.
13.6.2 Dimensions
Width Shows the Width of the specified Pane type, in pixels.
Height Shows the Height of the specified Pane type, in pixels.
13.6.3 Description
Description A concise description of the Pane, as stored in the target/bitmaps directory.
13.6.4 Support Default Pages

Description If enabled, this Pane allows the default Pages to be displayed.
13.7 ADD/EDIT TARGET VARIABLE DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the user to include a defined Target Instrument Variable in this Page Set.
13.7.1 Target Variable

Description A concise description of the Target Variable, as stored in the target/bitmaps directory.
Mnemonic This is the short sequence of letters used by the software to easily recognise the System
Variable supported by this Target Screen type.
Type This is the Variable data type, i.e. String, Boolean, Integer, etc..
13.7.2 Add
13.7.3 Cancel
HA260749U005 Page 79
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.8 APPEARANCE PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to specify the graphical appearance of the Page Item.
To access the dialogue, right-click the object and select Properties from the context menu to pop-up the
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Appearance tab. The fields are:
13.8.1 Line/Text
Weight Applies only to pixel-based Target Screen types. Used to change the line thickness (in pixels).
Foreground colour Used to change the line/text colour for the specified Target Screen type.
13.8.2 Fill/Background
Object is filled Use this checkbox to specify the fill parameters of the selected Page Item.
Background/Fill Use this pull-down menu to specify the background colour for the selected Text Page Items
or a fill colour for the selected geometrical Page Item.
NOTE
For lines, background colour applies only for character-based Target Screen Type.
13.8.3 OK
13.8.4 Apply
13.8.5 Cancel
13.9 BAR CHART PROPERTIES PAGE

This properties page applies only to Bar Chart Page Items. It lets you specify the fill direction of the chart, and
for charts drawn with underline cells, whether single or double underline. To access this Properties page, right-
click the object and select Properties from the context menu to display the relevant Page Item Properties
dialogue. Then click the Bar Chart page. The fields are:
13.9.1 Fill direction

Set the required radio button to specify the fill direction:
Left to right Bar Chart fills from left to right as the linked value increases.
Right to left Bar Chart fills from right to left as the linked value increases.
Top-down Bar Chart fills from top to bottom as the linked value increases.
Bottom-up Bar Chart fills from bottom to top as the linked value increases.
13.9.2 Underline used for bar chart

Underline number Select the number of underlines required (1 or 2)
Flash bar when negative
Check the box to make the Bar Chart flash when the linked value goes out of range.
NOTE
Underline Bar Chart types can grow only horizontally.
Page 80 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.9.3 OK
13.9.4 Apply
13.9.5 Cancel
13.10 BITMAP ENUMERATION PROPERTIES PAGE

This page applies only to the Bitmap Page Item. Use it to specify up to three bitmaps that will be displayed
alternately by the bitmap object, depending on the value of the linked LIN Database variable.
To access the dialogue, right-click the bitmap object and select Properties from the context menu to pop up
the Bitmap Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Enumeration tab. The fields are:
13.10.1 Enumerated
Tick this checkbox to enable the enumeration action of the bitmap object. If left unchecked, the bitmap
displayed will be the one specified in the Bitmap Properties dialogue. If ticked, the Bitmap Properties dialogue
is partially disabled to avoid conflicts.
13.10.2 Variable selection

LIN VARIABLE
Click this radio button if you want the bitmap enumeration to be controlled by a LIN Database Variable. Then
enter the required point name in the Name box, or use the Browse button to find the point.
INSTRUMENT VARIABLE
Click this button to link an Instrument Variable to the Page Item.
Name Type in the name of the variable to be linked (or use Browse). The Variable type (e.g.
Integer) is automatically entered for you from list to the right of the Name box. Use the
standard LIN formats for the variable name, i.e. blockname.fieldname (e.g. TIC001.PV) or
blockname.bitfield.bit format (e.g. Dig_A.Out.Bit3).
Browse Click this button to pop up a LIN Database Browser window. This lets you to select the
required block and point from the database you associated with the Page Set (via the
PageSet Properties dialogue), or the New PageSet dialogue.) The variable type is
automatically entered for you when you use Browse.
NOTE
The Editor auto-validates entries, a red cross indicating an invalid field; a green tick a valid field.
HA260749U005 Page 81
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.10.3 Bitmap selection

Filename Click this button for a fixed bitmap specified by its filename (entered in the Bitmap box).
Dictionary Click this button if you want the enumerated bitmap to be language-dependent. Use the
Bitmap box (see below) to enter the relevant dictionary entry.
Value With floating-point variables, select one of the three conditions from this list, for individual
configuration. You can configure for when the linked variable is less than lo_limit, is on or
between the lo and hi limits, and when it is greater than the hi_limit. These low and high
limits are specified in the items Limits Properties page.
With Integer or Boolean variables, use the small scroll buttons in the Value box to select one
of the possible values from the menu for individual configuration.
Browse Click this button to search for a suitable bitmap file to enter in the Bitmap box.
Bitmap Use this box to associate a bitmap with the condition or value you specified in the Value
box. For language-dependent bitmaps, enter the correct user-dictionary reference number
in this box, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the current user dictionary is consulted and the bitmap
referred to by the specified reference is displayed. For fixed bitmaps, enter the full path and
filename of the required bitmap file.
In-Place Toggle This checkbox is active only if the linked variable is an operator-writeable Integer or
Boolean. Tick the box if you want to allow the operator to cycle (or toggle, in the case of
Boolean values) round the possible values by simply touching the bitmap item on-screen.
Leave it unticked if you instead want a menu of values to pop-up for selection when the
operator touches the bitmap.
13.10.4 OK
13.10.5 Apply
13.10.6 Cancel
Page 82 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.11 BITMAP PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to specify the bitmap to be displayed on-screen by the Bitmap page object.
NOTE
.bmp, .pcx, .emf, .gif, .png bitmaps can be used. Bitmap filenames must be in standard DOS 8.3 format,
(i.e. the 8-character filename is restricted to characters A .. Z, a .. z, 0 ..9, and _. No other
characters are permitted as they could cause OIFL (. ofl) file-parsing problems in the target instrument.)
To access this Properties page, right-click the object and select Properties, from the context menu to pop-up
the relevant Page Item Properties page. Then click the Bitmap page.
NOTE
If bitmap enumeration has been enabled (in the Bitmap Enumeration Properties dialogue), all fields and
buttons are disabled except for the Monochrome and Transparent checkboxes, which remain
effective.
The fields are:
13.11.1 Bitmap
Dictionary Click this radio button if the bitmap is language-dependent. The correct user-dictionary
reference number must be entered in the Bitmap field, see below).
Filename Click this button for a fixed bitmap specified by its filename (entered in the Bitmap field).
Bitmap For language-dependent bitmaps, enter the correct user-dictionary reference number in this
field, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the current user dictionary is consulted and the bitmap
referred to by the specified reference is displayed. For fixed bitmaps, enter the full path and
filename of the required bitmap file.
Monochrome Tick this checkbox if you want the bitmap to display in black-and-white only, even if the
original bitmap is in colour.
Transparent Tick this checkbox to make the bitmap appear transparent, i.e. other page objects overlaid
by the bitmap will remain partially visible.
Browse Click this button to search for a suitable bitmap file to enter in the Bitmap box.
13.11.2 OK
13.11.3 Apply
13.11.4 Cancel
HA260749U005 Page 83
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.12 BROWSER BLOCK

The icon represents the LIN function block category that the block belongs to.
The block name (e.g. t800) is shown to the right of the category icon.
Click the blocks expand box on the left of the icon (initially labelled +) to see the individual block fields
within as a tree diagram.
NOTE
When only LIN Function Blocks can be selected (e.g. a GROUP block in the Trend Graph Variable properties
dialogue), expand boxes are absent.
If the browser lets you select a block, click the required block icon or name to select it. The block name and
block category appear in the Selection and Type boxes, respectively, at the foot of the Browser window.
13.12.1 Browser Field (no subfields)

This icon represents a single block field in the (expanded) LIN function block.
The absence of an expand box next to the field icon means that the field contains no subfields.
Select the field by clicking on it. Its full LIN name appears in the Selection box at the foot of the Browser
window, in the blockname.fieldname format. Its data type appears in the Type box.
13.12.2 Browser Field (with subfields)

This icon represents a single block field in the (expanded) LIN function block. The field cannot be selected
directly, only the expanded contents. (An expand box next to the field icon means that the field contains
subfields. Click the + box to see the subfields.)
13.12.3 Browser Multi-bit field

A data type enclosed in angle brackets e.g. <Subfield16> -- represents the entire multi-bit field above it.
You can select this item if you want to link to the whole field, rather than just an individual bit.
Click the field icon or name to select it. Its full LIN name appears in the Selection box at the foot of the
browser window, in the blockname.bitfield format. Its data type appears in the Type box.
13.12.4 Browser Selection box

This shows the full LIN address of the selected block, field, or subfield.
For a LIN block, the selection is displayed as a block name e.g. Group1.
For a field, the selection is displayed in blockname.fieldname format e.g. t800.Date.
For a whole multi-bit field, the selection is displayed in blockname.bitfield format e.g. t800.IP_type.
For a subfield, the selection is displayed in blockname.bitfield.bit format e.g. t800.IP_type.Imperial.
13.12.5 Browser Subfield

This icon represents a single subfield in a multi-bit field.
Click the subfield icon or name to select it. Its full LIN name appears in the Selection box at the foot of the
browser window, in the blockname.bitfield.bit format. Its data type appears in the Type box.
If you want to link to the whole field -- rather than just this individual bit click the multi-bit field icon or name
<in angled brackets> instead.
Page 84 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.12.6 Browser Type box

This shows the variable type or function block category for the selection.
For a LIN block, the LIN function block category of the selected block is shown.
For block fields, subfields, and multi-bit fields, the data type is shown.
13.13 BUTTON TOOL PROPERTIES PAGE

The button tool properties page is accessed as follows:.
1. Double clicking on the Button
2. Right-clicking on the item and selecting 'Properties...' in the resulting pop-up (context) menu,
3. Via Properties/Page item... in the Edit menu
4 Using the shortcut <Alt> + <Enter>.
The properties page opens:
Access See separate topic 'Access Properties page'.

Confirmation. See separate topic 'Confirmation Properties page'.
Miscellaneous. See separate topic 'Miscellaneous Properties page'.
Text. See separate topic 'Text Properties page'.
Touch area. See separate topic 'Touch Area Properties page'.
13.14 COLOUR PALETTE

(Foreground shown - Background similar)
HA260749U005 Page 85
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.15 CHARACTER BASED SCREEN TYPES

In Character based Screen types, straight lines at various angles are drawn on the Target Screen type using
special graphics characters that fit together to produce a best approximation to what is required. Line-segment
characters include points, corners, horizontal, vertical, and 45 elements. At runtime these Line-segment
characters are assembled by the Target Instrument to construct the required lines.
To allow the editor to draw realistic character-based lines in a similar way, the required ASCII key code
characters must be mapped to each of these special Line-segment symbols. The mapping is configured via a
graphical character-symbol map.
13.16 COLOUR ATTRIBUTE PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to configure the item to change colour as the value of a linked variable in the LIN Database
changes. Suitable variable types for linking to colour-change items are shown in the Data Types table.
To access the dialogue, right-click the object and select Properties from the context menu to pop up the
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Colour Attribute tab. The fields are,
13.16.1 Colour Change

Tick this box to enable colour-change for the selected page item.
13.16.2 Variable selection

LIN Variable
Click this radio button if you want a LIN Database variable to control the colour changes. Enter the required
point name in the Name box, or use the Browse button to find the point, see below.
Instrument Variable
Click this button if you want an Instrument variable to control the colour changes.
Name Type in the name of the controlling variable (or use Browse, see next). The Variable type
(e.g. Integer) is automatically entered for you from the list to the right of the Name box.
Use the standard LIN formats for the variable name, i.e. blockname.fieldname (e.g.
TIC001.PV) or blockname.bitfield.bit format (e.g. Dig_A.Out.Bit3).
required block and point from the database you associated with the Page Set (via the Page
Set Properties dialogue), or the New Page Set dialogue.) The variable type is automatically
entered for you when you use Browse.
NOTE
Page 86 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.16.3 Colour selection

Value Select one of the three colour-change conditions from this pulldown menu, for individual
configuration. You can configure for when the selected variable is less than lo_limit, is on
or between the lo and hi limits, and when it is greater than the hi_limit. These low and
high limits are specified in the Colour Limits Properties dialogue.
Change Foreground
Tick this box if you want to specify a Foreground colour-change when Value enters the
selected condition. Click the required colour from the pulldown palette of colours
configured for this target.
Change Background/Fill
Tick this box if you want to specify a Background/Fill colour-change when Value enters the
selected condition. Click the required colour from the pulldown palette of colours.
13.16.4 OK
13.16.5 Apply
13.16.6 Cancel
13.17 COLOUR LIMITS PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to define the low and high limits used in the Colour Attributes Properties dialogue.
To access the dialogue, right-click the object and select Properties from the context menu to pop up the
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Colour Limits tab. The fields are:
13.17.1 Colour Limit Minimum

None Click this radio button if you do not require a low limit.
Constant Click if you want the low limit to be a fixed value. Type the required constant in the Value
box.
LIN Variable Click if you want the low limit to be equal to a LIN Database variable. Type in the name of
the variable in the Name box (or use Browse, see next). Use the standard LIN formats for
the variable name, i.e. blockname.fieldname (e.g. TIC001.PV) or blockname.bitfield.bit
format (e.g. Dig_A.Out.Bit3).
NOTE
The variable type must be the same as that of the Colour Attribute controlling variable.
Instrument Variable [Not implemented].

Browse Click this button to pop-up a LIN Database Browser window. This lets you to select the
required block and point from the Database you associated with the Page Set (via the Page
Set Properties dialogue), or the New Page Set dialogue).
NOTE
HA260749U005 Page 87
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.17.2 Colour Limit Maximum

Use these fields in the same way as the corresponding Colour Limit Minimum fields.
13.17.3 OK
13.17.4 Apply
13.17.5 Cancel
13.18 COLOUR SETUP DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the Colour setup for the current Target Screen type.
13.18.1 Default colours

Default foreground colour
Use this list to select the required default foreground colour.
Default background colour
Use this list to select the required default background colour.
13.18.2 Colour options

Target supports Colour change commands
If enabled, the Target Screen type will allow the default Colour to change at the request of a
configured Action.
13.19 CONFIGURE PAGE ITEM ACTIONS

To configure a suitable object to execute a User Screen Editor Action enter the Action script into the specific
Page Item Action edit box. This appears in the Touch Area Properties dialogue. Up to 200 characters can be
used to specify a comma-separated list of Actions.
13.19.1 Enabling Actions

Individual Actions may be 'enabled' or 'disabled' according to the state of the Target Instrument. For example:
ACK_ALL is disabled if there are no unacknowledged alarms present.
GOTO:4 is disabled if there is insufficient Operator Access Level to permit viewing of this particular User
Screen, etc.
NOTE
If one or more Actions in a list is in the disabled state, then none of the actions execute when the object
is activated, even the enabled ones. For Button Page Items, the 'disabled' state is indicated by the button
legend being 'greyed out'.
Page 88 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.20 CONFIRMATION PROPERTIES PAGE

This dialogue is available for non-variable Text-based Page Items (buttons and text). It allows the User to specify
any confirmation characteristics required.
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Confirmation tab. The fields are:
13.20.1 Required Confirmation Type

No Confirmation Use this radio button to specify that confirmation is not required to initiate the action
configured for this Page Item.
Confirmation Only Use this radio button to specify that only confirmation is required to initiate the action
Signature Use this radio button to specify that only one signature is required to initiate the action
Sign and Authorise Use this radio button to specify that two signatures are required to initiate the action
13.20.2 OK
Accepts the changes and closes the dialogue.
13.20.3 Apply
13.20.4 Cancel
HA260749U005 Page 89
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.21 DATA TYPES

When linking a Variable to a Page Item to make it Dynamic, the User Screen Editor displays the relevant data
type for the Variable.
NOTE
If the Variable is not recognised by the User Screen Editor, it may have to be entered manually.
Data Type Description
CharacterNC Single 8-bit character
BooleanEN Bit (0 or 1)
IntegerBC EN Signed 16-bit integer
LongBC EN Signed 32-bit integer
SingleBC EN 32-bit floating-point value
DoubleBC EN 64-bit floating-point value
StringNC String of 8 characters
EnumerationEN List of strings representing values
BlockRefNC LIN Block TagName (8 character max)
UIntegerBC EN Unsigned 16-bit integer
UlongBC EN Unsigned 32-bit integer
Alarm LIN Block Alarm State

(0=Inactive, 1=Active, 2=Inact Unack, 3=Act Unack)
TimeNC Time-of-Day
(hh:mm:ss or hh:mm:am/pm)
Date Date
(dd:mm:yyyy) [plus International formats]
Subfield8 8-bit Subfield
Subfield16 16-bit Subfield
Normalised Normalised floating-point value
NormLow Low value used for normalisation
NormHigh High value used for normalisation
NOTE
NC = Not Compatible Colour Change Data Type.
BC = Compatible Bar Chart Page Item Data Type.
EN = Enumeration compatible Text Variable Page Item Data
Type (via the Enumeration Properties dialogue).
Page 90 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.22 DEFAULT T2900 AGENTS

The table below lists the IDs and names of the default T2900 built-in Agents.
ID Agent Name
1000 Top Level Menu
2000 System Menu
2010 System Summary
2020 Application Summary
2030 Startup Setup
2040 Communications Setup
2050 Clock Setup
2060 Internationalisation Setup
2070 Panel Setup
2080 Cloning
2200 Application Menu
2210 Application Manager
2300 Setup Menu
3000 Programmer Menu
3010 Programmer - Monitor
3011 Programmer - Program Selection
3012 Programmer - Scheduling
3013 Programmer - Preplot
3014 Programmer - Editor
3015 Programmer - Preview
3016 Programmer - Run form
4000 Security Access
5000 Logging Menu
5010 Logging - Monitor
5011 Logging - Offline
5012 Logging - Archive Management
5013 Logging - Groups
9000 Alarm Menu
9010 Alarm History
HA260749U005 Page 91
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.23 ENUMERATION PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to specify what enumeration, i.e. text string, a Text Variable Page Item is to display as the
value of the linked variable changes.
A suitable linked Variable must first be specified via the Variable Properties dialogue.
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Enumeration tab. The fields are:
No enum Use the radio button if an enumeration is not required, i.e. the actual linked variable value is
displayed.
Text Use this radio button in conjunction with the Value and Enumeration fields to indicate a
set of text strings are to be displayed, dependent on the value of the linked Variable.
Dictionary Use this radio button in conjunction with the Value and Enumeration fields to indicate the
enumeration strings are language-dependent.
Value Floating-point Variables
These are Variables that can be configured when the linked Variable is less than lo_limit,
is on or between the lo and hi limits, and when it is greater than the hi_limit. These low
and high limits are specified in the items Limits Properties dialogue.
Integer or Boolean Variables
Use the Value field to specify one of the possible values from the menu for individual
configuration.
Enumeration Text
Use this field to specify the text string that is to be displayed when the linked Variable
obeys the condition, or adopts the value selected in the Value box.
Dictionary
Use this field to specify the correct user-dictionary reference number in this field, e.g.
'U123'. At runtime, the current user dictionary is consulted and the string referred to by
the specified reference is displayed as the text enumeration.
In-Place Toggle This checkbox is active only if the linked Variable is an operator-writeable integer or
Boolean. Use it to allow the operator to cycle (or toggle, in the case of Boolean) round the
possible values by simply touching the Page Item on-screen.
If the check box remains blank, a list of values is revealed in a pop-up when the operator
touches the Page Item.
13.23.1 OK
13.23.2 Apply
13.23.3 Cancel
Page 92 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.24 FILL STYLE PROPERTIES PAGE

This dialogue applies to Page Items that possess a solid border, such as a Rectangle, Ellipse, or Triangle. Use this
dialogue to specify how the selected Page Item should appear on the Target Screen type. The fields are:
13.24.1 Fill style

Fill style/pattern Use this list to select the fill pattern required for the selected Page Item.
13.24.2 Fill mode

Fill mode Use this list to select the how the fill pattern should react.
13.24.3 OK
13.24.4 Apply
13.24.5 Cancel
13.25 FONT SETUP DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the Font setup for the current Target Screen type.
13.25.1 Default Font

Default Font Use this list to select the required default Font.
13.25.2 Font options

Target supports Font change commands
If enabled, the Target Screen type will allow the default Font to change at the request of a
configured Action.
13.25.3 Font dialogue

Use this dialogue to configure the parameters for the selected Font Page Item. This dialogue permits changes to
the,
Font Select the Font required. Select from any Windows Font currently installed in the Fonts
directory.
Font Style Select the style required, i.e. Regular, Bold, Italic, or Bold Italic.
Font Size Select the Font Size required. This is generally in the range of 8 to 72, but some Fonts may
only support limited Font Sizes.
Effects Select the effects required. This includes Strikeout, a single line through the centre of the
text, Underline, a single line below the text, and Color, a picklist to specify the colour
required for the selected Text.
Script Select the Script required. This is used to assist with the display of Fonts that may be used in
other regions throughout the world.
Sample Shows an example of the defined parameters.
HA260749U005 Page 93
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.26 FORMAT PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to specify the precision and format of real number Page Item, and the format of integer
number Page Items.
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Format tab. The fields are:
13.26.1 Number accuracy

Decimal places For real numbers, select the required number of decimal places using the scrollable menu in
the box.
13.26.2 Real Number format

Fixed point Selects decimal format e.g. 123,456,000.00
Engineering notation
Selects an exponent format, where the exponent value must be 3, 6, 9, 12 etc (i.e. a
multiple of three). This is in order that the value be represented in terms of thousands,
millions, billions, trillions etc. There may be up to three digits before the decimal point, e.g.
123.456E+6. [Not implemented]
Scientific notation Selects standard exponent format (only one digit before the decimal point, e.g. 1.234E+8.
13.26.3 Integer Number format

Decimal Value is displayed as a base 10 value, e.g. 239.
HEX Use this radio button to indicate that hexadecimal display of the value (base 16) is
required, e.g. 1E4F.
HEX (lowercase) Use this radio button to indicate that hexadecimal with lower-case characters display of the
value (base 16) is required, e.g.1e4f.
Binary Use this radio button to indicate that binary display of the value (base 2) is required, e.g.
11101111.
Pad with Leading Zeroes
Use this checkbox to indicate that zeroes will automatically be inserted in front of the
displayed number, to completely fill any spare character spaces in the field, e.g. for a 6-
character field width, the decimal display might be 000239.
13.26.4 OK
13.26.5 Apply
13.26.6 Cancel
Page 94 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.27 GRID SETTINGS DIALOGUE

Use this dialogue to configure the snap-to points of the User Screen Editors grid.
Tip!
Turning the Grid on will help when attempting to align Page Items.
NOTE
A Grid has the same effect when displayed or hidden.
Access the dialogue by clicking the Grid Settings button in the Placement Bar. The dialogue fields are:
13.27.1 Major grid settings

These fields specify the major grid horizontal and vertical spacing.
13.27.2 Minor grid settings

The minor grid settings are relative to the top-left corner of each major grid cell (0, 0).
13.27.3 General grid settings

Snap to grid Check this to cause the vertices (or bounding-box corners) of Page Item being drawn to
snap to the grid (whether hidden or not).
Use minor grid lines for item alignment
Check this to make the snap to grid (if selected) and nudge items alignment action work
on the minor grid lines. If left unchecked, only the major grid lines are used.
Nudge items to nearest grid line
Check this to cause highlighted item(s) to jump one grid spacing in the selected direction
each time a keyboard cursor key is pressed. If unchecked, they jump one pixel only. This
works even if snap to grid is not selected.
Use dotted lines for grid lines
Check this to make the grid lines appear dashed. If unchecked, the grid lines are solid.
13.27.4 Configure using default font

Click this button to set the major grid spacing to match the default font cell size -- convenient for laying out
text.
13.27.5 OK
Click to close the dialogue and enable the grid settings.
13.27.6 Cancel
Click to close the dialogue without altering the existing grid settings.
HA260749U005 Page 95
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.28 LIMITS PROPERTIES PAGE

Use this dialogue to apply minimum and maximum limits to Page Item Variable. Limits can perform several
functions:
They specify high/low ranges for a Page Item (e.g. the 0% and 100% display values on a Bar Chart).
They set operator input limits for writeable linked Variables.
They define the three zones for enumerated Instrument Variable (i.e. less than the low limit, on or between the
limits, greater than the high limit).
NOTE
Limits do not affect the linked LIN Database Variables, only their display.
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Limits tab. The fields are:
13.28.1 Low Limit

None Use this radio button if a minimum limit is not required.
Constant Use this radio button if the minimum limit must be the constant (fixed) value, as entered in
the adjacent Value field.
LIN Variable Use this radio button if the minimum limit must be equal to a LIN Database Variable. Use
the standard LIN formats for the variable name, i.e. blockname.fieldname (e.g. TIC001.PV)
or blockname.bitfield.bit format (e.g. Dig_A.Out.Bit3). Use the Browse button to
display the LIN Database Browser dialogue, to assist with locating the required Variable.
NOTE
The Variable type (i.e. boolean) must be the same as that of the linked Variable (i.e. boolean).
Instrument Variable
Use this radio button to select to link the Page Item with a Instrument Variable. Use the
Browse button to display the Instrument Browser dialogue, to assist with locating the
required Variable.
NOTE
13.28.2 Maximum
Use these fields in the same way as the corresponding Minimum fields see above.
13.28.3 OK
13.28.4 Apply
13.28.5 Cancel
Page 96 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.29 MISCELLANEOUS PROPERTIES PAGE

This properties page applies to all Page Items. It is used it to generate an OIFL string, contained in an OIFL file
(.ofl). To access the dialogue, right-click the object and select Properties from the context menu to pop-up
the relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Miscellaneous tab. The fields are,
13.29.1 Miscellaneous
Generate OIFL string for this page
A ticked check box indicates an OIFL string will be immediately generated for the selected Page Item and
appended to the OIFL file (that ultimately will be downloaded to the Target Instrument).
An empty check box indicates an OIFL string is either not generated, or, is deleted if the string for that Page
Item already exists in the file.
13.29.2 OK
13.29.3 Apply
13.29.4 Cancel
NOTE
The OIFL for the whole page can be inspected using the Page > Show OIFL Strings drop-down menu.
13.30 NEW PAGE SET DIALOGUE

Use this dialogue to create a new Page Set required to store all Pages used by the Target Instrument, defined in
the Location of DB file for Page Set field. The fields are:
13.30.1 Name of new Page Set

The Name of new Page Set is used within the User Screen Editor to identify the Target Instrument or Project,
e.g. 'T2900_0f'. This field will automatically include the .uxp extension when saved.
Beware
The Page Set name MUST match the LIN Database (*.dbf) filename so the correct screens are displayed
when downloaded.
Failure to ensure this will result in downloading a Page Set to the Target Instrument, which may be
incorrect. This could cause problems with the operation of the instrument.
Rename the Page Set. Select Edit > Properties > Page Set to display the Page Set Properties dialogue.
13.30.2 Target panel

Lists all the Target Instrument Panes type currently configured in the Targets directory.
HA260749U005 Page 97
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.30.3 Status Pane OIFL file

This field specifies a path to the .OFL file that is added automatically to User Screen Editor output, to define the
required Status pane.
NOTE
If left in its pre-configured default value (blank) the default Status pane will be specified.
13.30.4 Location of DB file for Page Set

Shows the full path and filename of the LIN Database file (*.dbf, control strategy) that Dynamic Page Items in
the Page Set will be linked to.
Use the Browse button to help locate the LIN Database file, if required.
NOTE
This field can initially be left blank.
13.30.5 OK
Accepts and closes the configured Page Set dialogue. An empty Page Set window appears on the worksheet
entitled with the name entered in the Name of new Page Set field.
NOTE
A Page Set can also be saved using the Save commands.
13.30.6 Cancel
Closes the dialogue without making any changes to the Page Set properties.
13.31 OIFL PROPERTIES PAGE

This page applies only to the OIFL Page Item. Use it to directly specify any OIFL (.ofl) (Operator InterFace
Language, .ofl) code that you want added to the code generated by other objects on the page. This is a way to
add functionality to the User Screen that is not currently provided by standard User Screen Editor Page Items. It
is not likely to be required by most developers.
The added code is inserted in the OIFL output, located by default according to when the OIFL Page Item was
created. You can alter its position using the layer-ordering tools (Bring to Front, Send to Back, etc.).
To view the OIFL code generated by the page, in the Editors Page menu, select Show OIFL Strings. The OIFL
for the current page is displayed in a pop-up window.
NOTE
The OIFL Page Item is not shown as an object on the actual Target Screen.
To access the page, right-click the OIFL Page Item and select Properties from the context menu to pop up
the Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the OIFL page. The fields are,
13.31.1 Display
Label Enter a suitable identifying legend to appear on the OIFL Page Item. This is not seen in the
OIFL code or anywhere else.
Page 98 HA260749U005
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.31.2 OIFL
Type in the OIFL code you want added to the output for the page.
OIFL code syntax is not described in this help file. Contact the manufacturer for further information.
13.31.3 OK
13.31.4 Apply
13.31.5 Cancel
13.32 PAGE
13.32.1 Page Item Actions - Example
RUN
This action runs the currently loaded SPP program.
ACK_ALL,GOTO:4
This list causes all alarms to be acknowledged, then jumps to the User Screen with an ID of 4. (It could also
jump to a built-in page if its ID is correctly specified, e.g. the Alarm History page, which has a default ID of
9010.)
ST:"[PID1.SL]:=12.34;"
This Structured Text Action sets the function block input PID1.SL to 12.34.
ST:"[PID1.IN]:=NOT[IN];"
This Structured Text Action creates a Toggle button. It causes a configured Page Item to toggle between the
Background colour and original appearance when activated. Add this text to the Touch Area page of the Page
Item Properties dialogue and ensure the Action radio button is defined.
ENA:"[MTR01.MODEACT.MANACT]"
This provides an Enable instruction, used to enable an action. It causes a configured Page Item to remain
disabled until a specified condition is achieved. Add this text to the Touch Area page of the Page Item
Properties dialogue and ensure the Action radio button is defined.
When entering the 'Action' text, add the Enable instruction and Structured Text Action, separated with a
comma (,). The following example shows a motor start button, that will remain disabled unless the motor is in
manual mode.
Example
ENA:"[MTR01.ModeAct.ManAct]",ST:"[MTR01.Demand]:=1;"
HA260749U005 Page 99
Issue 4 Mar 08
13.32.2 Page Item Properties dialogue

The properties of each Page Item differ, i.e. the Touch Area Page Item includes an, Access page, Fill Style page,
Touch Area page, and a Miscellaneous page, whereas the Rectangle Page Item includes the Access page,
Appearance page, Fill Style page, Colour Attribute page, Colour Limits page, and Miscellaneous page.
NOTE
A Confirmation page appears if an appropriate Target Panel type was selected, e.g. svga v4.0 Auditor
(Pixel).
13.32.3 Page Properties dialogue - Names page

Use this dialogue to inspect and edit the name properties of an existing Page. To access the dialogue from the
Page Set window, right-click the Page icon and select Properties from the context menu, or highlight the
Page icon, then pull down the Edit menu and click Properties > Page
Click the Names tab to see the Names page of the dialogue. The fields are:
PAGE NAME & ID
Inspect/edit the Page Name. It is used within the User Screen Editor for information only. E.g. it appears in the
Page Set window as an icon label.
Inspect/edit the ID number for the page. This must be a positive integer, 1-999.
'Built-in' pages have IDs > 999.
The ID is used in the OIFL file to refer to the page, and in other pages, e.g. for a button jumping to this page or
a built-in page. The 'home page' is normally assigned an ID of '1'. This is usually the power-up and timeout
page, and is accessible from the top-level menu.
PAGE TITLE
Inspect/edit the title to appear on the instrument display for the page, as a fixed string or a dictionary
reference.
Check the Use Dictionary box if you want the title to change if the language is changed. Enter the
corresponding user-dictionary reference number in the Dictionary Entry No field, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the
current user dictionary is consulted and the string referred to by the specified reference is displayed as the title.
For a fixed title, simply type the required character string into the Title field.
NOTE
User dictionaries have filenames such as _user.uyl (for single-language systems), or _user n.uyl (for
multilingual systems, where n = 0 to 9).
Page 100 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.30.3 PAGE PROPERTIES DIALOGUE NAMES PAGE (Cont.)

LEGEND
Inspect/edit the page Legend. This is normally a very brief (typically 8 characters max.) description of the page
that can appear in a displayed selection-menu in the Target Instrument. In use, the operator selects or 'clicks'
the legend, which may often be displayed as a 'button' marked with the legend, and the page pops up on-
screen.
Check the Use Dictionary box if you want the legend to change if the language is changed. Enter the
corresponding user-dictionary reference number in the Dictionary Entry No field, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the
current user dictionary is consulted and the string referred to by the specified reference is displayed as the
legend.
For a fixed legend, simply type the required character string into the Legend field.
ACCESS LEVEL
Inspect/edit the Access Level for the whole page, by clicking the required radio button:
Always accessible, (i.e. for any operator level) or
Accessible if operator level is >= (greater than or equal to). Select an operator level (1 to 4).
DESCRIPTION
This is for user-information only as an aid to maintainability, and is not transferred to the runtime system.
13.32.4 Page Properties dialogue - OSFK page

Use this dialogue to specify the OSFK pane associated with a particular pane, if more than one OSFK pane is
configured. To access the dialogue from the Page Set window,
right-click the Page icon and select Properties from the context menu, or
highlight the Page icon, then pull down the Edit menu and click Properties > Page
NOTE
The Off Screen Function Key (OSFK) pane is only available if the Target Screen type supports Off Screen
Function Keys.
Click the OSFK tab to see the OSFK page of the dialogue.
13.32.5 OSFK Pane list

Use the list to select the required OSFK pane. The selected OSFK Pane is then associated with this Page.
HA260749U005 Page 101

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.32.6 Page Properties dialogue - Target page

Use this dialogue to inspect the target associated with an existing Page. To access the dialogue from the Page
Set window right-click the Page icon and select Properties from the context menu, or highlight the Page icon,
then pull down the Edit menu and click Properties > Page Click the Target tab to see the Target page of the
dialogue. The (read-only) fields are:
TARGET PANEL
This field shows the target panel associated with the current Page Set, which was selected via the New Page
Set dialogue when the Page Set was created.
PANE
This field shows the type of pane selected for this Page. If a Pop-up Pane was selected, the Width and Height
of the pane are also displayed.
WIDTH AND HEIGHT
These fields show the dimensions of the selected Pane.
13.33 PAGE SET PROPERTIES DIALOGUE

Use this dialogue to inspect and edit the properties of an existing Page Set. You can access the dialogue from
the Edit menu by clicking Properties > Page Set. The fields are:
13.33.1 Name of Page Set

The Name of new Page Set is used within the User Screen Editor to identify the Target Instrument or Project,
e.g. 'T2900_0f'. This field will automatically include the Page Set file (.uxp) extension when saved.
Beware
The Page Set name MUST match the LIN Database (*.dbf) filename so the correct screens are displayed
when downloaded. Failure to ensure this may result in downloading a Page Set to the Target Instrument,
which may be incorrect. This could cause problems with the operation of the instrument.
To resolve this problem rename the Page Set: Select Edit > Properties > Page Set to display the Page Set
13.33.2 Location of DB file for Page Set

Shows the full path and filename of the LIN Database file (*.dbf, control strategy) that Dynamic Page Items in
the Page Set will be linked to.
Use the Browse button to help locate the LIN Database file, if required.
NOTE
This field can initially be left blank.
13.33.3 Status Pane OIFL file

This field specifies a path to the .ofl file that is added automatically to User Screen Editor output to define the
required Status pane.
NOTE
If left in its pre-configured default value (blank) the default Status pane will be specified.
Page 102 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.33.4 Target panel

Lists all the Target Instrument Panes type currently configured in the Targets directory.
13.33.5 OK
Accepts and closes the configured Page Set dialogue. An empty Page Set window appears on the worksheet
entitled with the name entered in the Name of new Page Set field.
NOTE
A Page Set can also be saved using the Save commands.
13.33.6 Cancel
13.34 PANE SETUP DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the Pane setup for the current Target Screen type.
13.34.1 Default Pane

Default Pane Use this list to select the required default Pane.
13.35 PASSWORD PROTECTION

This password can be used to prevent unauthorised personnel from viewing or editing Target definitions. To
change (or disable) the password, click 'Set Password' in the Target Panels dialogue, to pop-up the Change
Password dialogue. Type the new password into both fields and click 'OK' to effect the change.
To disable the password, simply leave both fields completely blank before hitting 'OK'.
NOTE
Space characters are valid password characters.
HA260749U005 Page 103

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.36 PROGRAM PROFILE PROPERTIES PAGE

The Properties page allows a 'PROGCTRL' block to be assigned to the item. The page is accessed by:
1. Double clicking on the Program profile.
3. Via the Properties/Page item... in the Edit menu
4. Using the shortcut <Alt> + <Enter>.
Access. See separate topic 'Access Properties page'.

Appearance. See separate topic 'Appearance Properties page'.
Colour attribute See separate topic 'Colour attribute Properties page'.
Colour limits. See separate topic 'Colour limits Properties page'.
Miscellaneous. See separate topic 'Miscellaneous Properties page'.
13.36.1 Program profile

VARIABLE
This tab allows the user to browse the associated database and to select that profile block which is to appear
on the screen.
TREND TYPE
Preview Shows the program profile as a static profile.
Monitor As Preview (above) but with a moving indicator showing which segment is currently running.
13.36.2 Program Profile appearance

The Program Profile window is drawn on the User Screen Editor page containing a question mark until a
'PROGCTRL' block has been assigned to it using the properties page.
Once such a block has been assigned, the question mark disappears.
Page 104 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.37 TARGET INSTRUMENT DIALOGUE

This dialogue permits the user to permanently include a defined Instrument Type and Version in this Page Set.
13.37.1 Instrument
Type Enter the required Instrument type name, i.e. T800, T820, T940, etc., used in the system.
Version Enter the Version of the Instrument type specified in the Type field, i.e. v4.7, v4.8, etc., used
in the system.
Tip!
Use existing table entries as a guide to clarifying the Instrument Type and Version.
13.38 TARGET PANEL DIALOGUE

Use this dialogue to create or edit, either Pixel-based Target Screen types or Character-based Target Screen
types. To access the dialogue, from the Editor window pull down the File menu and click Target Definitions.
The fields are:
13.38.1 Currently defined Target Panels

Select the required Target Screen type from the list. This is a list of all the Target Screen types currently
configured in the Targets directory.
13.38.2 New
Initiates the Target Panel wizard. This wizard makes creating a Target Screen type easy.
NOTE
unique default configuration of the selected Target Screen type.
13.38.3 Edit
Displays the Target Panel dialogue after selecting the Target Screen type that requires editing.
13.38.4 Remove
Deletes the selected Target Screen type.
13.38.5 OK
Stores the new Target Screen type specifications and closes the dialogue.
13.38.6 Cancel
13.38.7 Set Password

Click this button to display the Change Password dialogue. This allows a password to be configured that will
restrict access to the Target Panels dialogue.
NOTE
Use the Set Password button to restrict access to the Target Panels dialogue. Any attempt to open this
dialogue will request a password to continue.
HA260749U005 Page 105

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.39 TEXT PROPERTIES PAGE

This dialogue is available for non-variable Text-based Page Items (buttons and text). It allows the User to specify
the characteristics of the text, and a dictionary entry number for international text languages.
relevant Page Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Text tab. The fields are:
13.39.1 Font
Use Windows Fonts Use this checkbox to indicate that the defined Target Screen type supports Windows Fonts,
installed in the Fonts directory.
Font name Use this list to specify a required Font type for the specified Target Screen type.
Flashing Use this checkbox to specify a flashing text is required. Predetermined colour-pairs in the
instrument palette provide the flashing. The Editor shows only one of an alternating pair of
colours, i.e. does not flash.
Highlighting Use this checkbox to specify a highlighting text is required.
Select Font Shows the Font dialogue. This dialogue permits the selection of a specific Font already
installed in the Fonts directory.
13.39.2 Alignment & Underlining

Alignment Use this list to align the selected Text to the nearest character width.
NOTE
Left Centre and Right Centre bias the alignment one character-width in the specified direction when the
string cannot be positioned in the exact centre.
Underlining Click this button to access the targets underline options. (Only for targets supporting
underlining.)
13.39.3 Text
Use Dictionary Use this checkbox if you want the text to change if the language is changed.
Dictionary Entry No Enter the correct user-dictionary reference number in this field, e.g. 'U123'. At runtime, the
current user-dictionary is consulted and the string referred to by the specified reference
number is displayed as the text.
NOTE
User dictionaries have filenames such as _user.uyl (for single-language systems), or _user n.uyl (for
multilingual systems, where n = 0 to 9).
13.39.4 OK
13.39.5 Apply
13.39.6 Cancel
Page 106 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.40 TEXT VARIABLE PROPERTIES PAGE
The Properties page is accessed by:

1. Double clicking on the relevant page item
13.40.1 Text Tab

This is available for Text Variable page items and is used to specify the font, alignment, and underlining
characteristics of the text.
FONT
Font name Select a font from the list of fonts (specified for the target).
Flashing Tick the checkbox to specify flashing text. If the box is disabled, the instrument does not
support flashing text.
Highlighting Tick the checkbox to specify highlighting text. If the box is disabled, the instrument does
not support highlighting text.
ALIGNMENT & UNDERLINING
Alignment Select a horizontal alignment from the list. (Text is aligned to the nearest character width.
Left Centre and Right Centre bias the alignment one character-width in the specified
direction when the string cannot be positioned in the exact centre.)
Underlining Click this button to select an underline option. If the box is disabled, the instrument does
not support text underlining.
13.40.2 OK
13.40.3 Apply
13.40.4 Cancel
HA260749U005 Page 107

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.41 TOUCH AREA PROPERTIES PAGE

This is a defined area on a touch-sensitive screen that responds to pressure in a specific way, e.g. by screening a
new Page. Touch areas created with the Touch Area tool are invisible, but can be identified to the operator by
overlapping them with suitable graphics.
Alternatively the Touch Area Properties page of several other page objects (rectangles, ellipses, bitmaps, and
buttons) can be configured to make them touch-sensitive.
To access this Properties page, right-click the object and select Properties, from the context menu. This
displays the relevant Page Item Properties page. Then click the Touch Area page. The fields are:
13.41.1 Touch Area Type

No Touch Click this radio button to disable the touch-sensitivity of the object.
Go to page Click this button to cause the specified destination agent display (see below) to appear when
the object is touched, with no return to the original page via the <Escape> or <Exit> button
being available automatically.
Go to page with EXIT
Click this button to cause the specified destination agent display to appear on touch, and to
give the operator the ability to return to the original page via a target-specific <Escape> or
<Exit> button, e.g. on a keypad.
Action Click this button to allow a User Screen Action to be configured in the Action box (see
below).
13.41.2 Destination Page ID & Name

Destination ID Enter the ID number of the required go to destination Agent, or use the Browse button
(see below).
Name Enter the name of the go to destination agent, or use the Browse button.
Browse Click this button to pop up a Display Page IDs dialogue. This lists the IDs and Names of all
the pages you have configured in the current Page Set. Click the required ID number and hit
the dialogues OK button to select that Page. Its details appear in the properties dialogue.
13.41.3 Action
In this edit box, type a comma-separated list of User Screen Actions to be executed when the object is
activated. Up to 200 characters may be entered.
Typical user screen actions might include, setting a function block field to a specified value, acknowledging
alarms, and changing the programmer state.
13.41.4 OK
13.41.5 Apply
13.41.6 Cancel
Closes the dialogue without making any changes to the Page Item Properties
Page 108 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.42 TREND GRAPH PROPERTIES PAGE

This properties page applies to the Trend Graph Page Item only, and lets you specify the growth direction of
the trended value.
To access the dialogue, right-click the trend graph object and select Properties from the context menu to
display the Trend Graph Page Item Properties page. Then click the Trend Graph tab. The fields are:
13.42.1 Growth direction

Horizontal Value (Vertical Scroll)
Click this radio button to make values grow horizontally in a rightwards direction, with the
trend 'paper' scrolling down the display (like a conventional chart recorder).
Vertical Value (Horizontal Scroll)
Click this button to make values grow vertically upwards, with the trend 'paper' scrolling
leftwards across the display.
13.42.2 OK
13.42.3 Apply
13.42.4 Cancel
13.43 TREND GRAPH VARIABLE PROPERTIES PAGE

This properties page applies to the Trend Graph Page Item only. Use it to assign up to six LIN Database points
for trending on the Trend Graph. For LIN Databases, points to be trended must each be allocated a channel
number (from 1-16) within a single GROUP LIN function block. This LIN function block type is in the ORGANISE
category of LIN function blocks.
To access the dialogue, right-click the trend graph object and select Properties from the context menu to
pop up the Trend Graph Item Properties dialogue. Then click the Trend Graph Variable tab. The fields are:
13.43.1 Variable
Group FB Name Enter the tagname of the relevant GROUP LIN function block in this box, or click the
'Browse' button to locate the LIN function block name in the associated LIN Database if
needed (see next).
NOTE
required GROUP LIN function block tagname from the LIN Database associated with the
Page Set (via the Page Set Properties dialogue), or the New Page Set dialogue.)
13.43.2 Channel selection

Channel In this box, enter up to six valid channel numbers separated by commas (no spaces) e.g.
1,3,4,5,7,16. These channels will be trended at runtime in the selected item.
13.43.3 OK
13.43.4 Apply
HA260749U005 Page 109

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.43.5 Cancel
13.44 VARIABLE
The types of Variable that can be used are:
LIN Database field names. Example: PIC_004.PV
LIN Database Bitfields. Example: Dig_A.Out;
Aliases. Example: Dig_A.Out;
LIN Sequence step variables. Example: END_STEP.X
13.44.1 Variable Properties page
The Properties page is accessed by:

1. Double clicking on the relevant page item
Page 110 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
13.44.2 Variable Tab

This allows the user to select a link between a LIN Database, or Instrument Variable and the selected Page
Item, so that it can be displayed dynamically (that is, the item reacts in real-time to the value of the variable).
The fields are,
VARIABLE
LIN Variable This radio button is used to link the Page Item to a LIN Database Variable. The 'Browse'
button can be used to display the LIN Database Browser to assist in locating the required
Variable.
Instrument Variable
This radio button is used to link the Page Item to an Instrument Variable.
Name This field is used to identify the name of the Variable to be linked. The Variable Type (e.g.
Integer) is automatically entered from the list to the right of the Name box. Standard LIN
formats should be used for the Variable name, i.e.' blockname.fieldname' (e.g. TIC001.PV) or
'blockname.bitfield.bit' (e.g. Dig_A.Out.Bit3).
Browse... Clicking on this button opens the LIN database browser as an aid to locating the relevant
variable.
NOTE
DATA ENTRY
For those instruments which support the facility, if a variable is selected which takes a file name as its value, the
'Data Entry' configuration area appears.
Offer file picklist when editing this variable
If this is enabled (ticked), then all the files on the instrument which match the search string
defined in the 'Filter' field (below), appear in a drop-down list at the instrument's operator
interface, when the associated text is touched.
Filter Allows the user to define the types of file which are to appear in the drop-down list on the
user screen. Multiple filters can be specified separated by commas. The '?' and '*' wildcards
can be used in the filter.
13.44.3 OK
13.44.4 Apply
13.44.5 Cancel
HA260749U005 Page 111

Issue 4 Mar 08
14 DEFAULT PASSWORD
The default Password is,
kjsneckjn
Page 112 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
15 INDEX
.bmp file .......................................................................62, 83 Agents ................................................................................. 74
.dbf file................................................................ 74, 97, 102 Alarm................................................................................... 74
.emf file............................................................................... 83 Align
.gif file ................................................................................. 83 left/right centre biased............................................. 107
.ofl file...........................................................75, 97, 98, 102 Text ................................................................................ 106
.pcx file ............................................................................... 83 Align .................................................................................. 106
.png file............................................................................... 83 Align .................................................................................. 107
.txt file ................................................................................. 69 Appearance
.uxp file .........................................................................2, 102 Properties dialog .......................................................... 80
.uxt file ....................................................................... 2, 5, 31 Appearance........................................................................ 80
.uyl file ..................................................................... 100, 106 ASCII key code .................................................................. 65
3D Styling Properties dialog .......................................... 76 Background colour .......................................................... 29
ABORT................................................................................. 34 Background/Fill colour ................................................... 29
Access level Bar Chart
page ............................................................................... 100 fill direction ................................................................... 80
Access level...........................................................................8 linkable data types....................................................... 74
Access level...................................................................... 100 Properties dialog .......................................................... 80
Access Properties dialog................................................. 76 underline characters.................................................... 80
ACK_ALL.......................................................................34, 99 Bar Chart ............................................................................ 74
Action Bar Chart ............................................................................ 80
Example .......................................................................... 99 Barchart tool ..................................................................... 29
execute via touch area.............................................. 108 Bevel effects
supported....................................................................... 34 depth ............................................................................... 76
syntax .............................................................................. 34 Bevel effects ...................................................................... 76
writing ............................................................................. 34 Binary format .................................................................... 94
Action.................................................................................. 34 Bitmap
Action.................................................................................. 99 Enumeration Properties dialog................................. 81
Action................................................................................ 108 language-dependent ................................................... 81
Action qualifier Properties dialog .......................................................... 83
T# ..................................................................................... 47 selection ......................................................................... 81
Action qualifier ................................................................. 47 Bitmap................................................................................. 81
Add/Edit Bitmap dialog .................................................. 77 Bitmap................................................................................. 83
Agents Bitmap tool........................................................................ 29
Alarm history................................................................. 74 BlockRef.............................................................................. 74
built-in............................................................................. 74 Boolean.........................................................................74, 81
Clock setup .................................................................... 74 Bordering effects.............................................................. 76
default............................................................................. 74 Browser
preconfigured ............................................................... 74 'expand' box.................................................................. 84
HA260749U005 Page 113

Issue 4 Mar 08
LIN Database window.................................................. 75 New Page...........................................................................8

selection box ................................................................. 84 New Page Set ................................................................ 97
type box.......................................................................... 84 Page Properties.................................................. 100, 102
Browser............................................................................... 75 Dialog .....................................................................................8
Browser............................................................................... 84 Dialog .....................................................................................9
Build Window.................................................................... 32 Dialog .................................................................................. 80
Button Tool........................................................................ 29 Dialog .................................................................................. 83
Channel selection for trending................................... 109 Dialog .................................................................................. 86
Character............................................................................ 74 Dialog .................................................................................. 95
Colour Dialog .................................................................................. 97
Attribute Properties dialog........................................ 86 Dialog ................................................................................ 100
change............................................................................. 86 Dialog ................................................................................ 102
change (hi/lo limits) .................................................... 87 Dictionary
change items ................................................................. 74 refence number...............................................................8
selection ......................................................................... 86 Dictionary..............................................................................8
Colour ................................................................................. 29 Double ................................................................................ 74
Colour ................................................................................. 74 Draw bar............................................................................. 29
Colour ................................................................................. 86 Edit
Colour Limits Properties dialog .................................... 87 Page Item Properties ......................................................9
Comments in ST ............................................................... 47 Edit..........................................................................................9
Constants Editing
Integer............................................................................. 47 Structured Text............................................................. 47
Real .................................................................................. 47 Editing ................................................................................. 47
String ............................................................................... 47 Editor project files ..............................................................2
Time................................................................................. 47 Editor Regions ......................................................................6
Constants............................................................................ 47 Ellipse tool ......................................................................... 29
Control strategy................................................................ 97 Engineering notation....................................................... 94
Data Entry......................................................................... 110 Enumeration
Data type......................................................................74, 85 bitmap............................................................................. 81
Date ..................................................................................... 74 linkable data types....................................................... 74
Decimal places .................................................................. 94 Enumeration ...................................................................... 74
DESC .................................................................................... 34 Enumeration ...................................................................... 81
Description Enumerations Properties dialog ................................... 92
page ....................................................................................8 Error
Description............................................................................8 messages......................................................................... 32
Dialog Error..................................................................................... 32
Appearance Properties ............................................... 80 Example
Bitmap Properties ........................................................ 83 of User Actions ............................................................. 99
Colour Attribute Properties....................................... 86 Example .............................................................................. 99
Find .....................................................................................9 Field selection ................................................................... 84
Grid Settings .................................................................. 95 Field Type........................................................................... 85
Page 114 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
Fill direction (bar chart) ................................................. 80 Legend ...................................................................................8

Fill Style Properties page................................................ 93 Legend .............................................................................. 100
Fill/Background colour ................................................... 29 Limits Properties dialog.................................................. 96
Filter................................................................................... 110 LIN Database
Find address............................................................................ 84
Dialog .................................................................................9 block name .................................................................... 84
Find .........................................................................................9 browser block icon ...................................................... 84
Fixed decimal point ......................................................... 94 Browser Field (with subfields) .................................. 84
Flashing text............................................................ 106, 107 browser multibit field ................................................. 84
Font name............................................................... 106, 107 browser selection box................................................. 84
Format Properties dialog ............................................... 94 browser type box ......................................................... 85
Function Block browser window ......................................................... 110
category .......................................................................... 84 Database Browser dialog............................................ 75
select ............................................................................... 84 file location........................................................... 97, 102
understanding ............................................................... 70 function block............................................................... 70
Function Block .................................................................. 47 linking variable to page item .................................. 110
Function Block .................................................................. 70 points trending ........................................................... 109
Function Block .................................................................. 84 select a field with no subfields................................. 84
Go to page (touch area)............................................... 108 selecting a function block.......................................... 84
GOTO.............................................................................34, 99 variable ......................................................................... 110
Grid LIN Database ..................................................................... 70
Settings dialog............................................................... 95 LIN Database ..................................................................... 74
Grid ...................................................................................... 95 LIN Database ..................................................................... 75
GROUP block associated with trend graph ............. 109 LIN Database ..................................................................... 84
Hexadecimal format ........................................................ 94 LIN Database ..................................................................... 84
High & low limits for colour changes ......................... 87 LIN Database ..................................................................... 97
High/low display ranges for page items..................... 96 LIN Database ................................................................... 102
HOLD ................................................................................... 34 LIN Database ................................................................... 109
Horizontal trend ............................................................. 109 LIN Database ................................................................... 110
ID ........................................................................................ 100 LIN Variable ..........................................................19, 33, 74
Identifiers in ST................................................................. 49 Line / Text Colour ............................................................ 29
In-place toggle .................................................................. 92 Line tool ............................................................................. 29
Instrument Variable............................................19, 33, 74 Line/Text
Integer...........................................................................74, 81 background colour ...................................................... 80
Integer number formats................................................. 94 colour.............................................................................. 80
ISE....................................................................................... 102 weight.............................................................................. 80
language systems............................................................ 106 Line/Text............................................................................. 80
Legend Maximum & minimum limits......................................... 96
dictionary ..................................................................... 100 Minimum & maximum limits......................................... 96
fixed ............................................................................... 100 Miscellaneous Properties dialog................................... 97
page ...........................................................................8, 100 Monitor............................................................................. 104
HA260749U005 Page 115

Issue 4 Mar 08
Multi-bit field selection (whole field)......................... 84 Properties dialog ............................................... 100, 102
Name title.............................................................................8, 100
Page Set ................................................................. 97, 102 Page ........................................................................................8
Name ................................................................................... 97 Page ................................................................................... 100
Name ................................................................................. 102 Page ................................................................................... 102
New Page Page Item
dialog..................................................................................8 Edit ......................................................................................9
New Page...............................................................................8 high/low display ranges .............................................. 96
Normalised......................................................................... 74 linking variable to ...................................................... 110
NormHigh........................................................................... 74 Properties dialog .............................................................9
NormLow............................................................................ 74 visibility ........................................................................... 76
NULL .................................................................................... 34 writability........................................................................ 76
Number accuracy ............................................................. 94 Page Item ..............................................................................9
Offer file picklist when editing this variable ........... 110 Page Item ........................................................................... 76
OIFL tool............................................................................. 29 Page Item ........................................................................... 96
Operator access level...................................................... 76 Page Item ......................................................................... 110
Operator InterFace Language Page Properties dialog - OSFK page.......................... 101
.ofl file .......................................................................97, 98 Page Set
adding code................................................................... 98 associated target panel............................................. 102
Properties dialog .......................................................... 98 creating new.................................................................. 97
Status pane .................................................................. 102 DB file location ........................................................... 102
string generation .......................................................... 97 name.............................................................................. 102
viewing strings............................................................... 98 Properties dialog ........................................................ 102
What is? .......................................................................... 75 verify................................................................................ 32
Operator InterFace Language ....................................... 75 Page Set .............................................................................. 32
Operator InterFace Language ....................................... 97 Page Set .............................................................................. 97
Operator InterFace Language ....................................... 98 Page Set ............................................................................ 102
Operator InterFace Language ..................................... 102 Pane
Operators and Functions associate with page.................................................... 102
Structured Text............................................................. 50 popup........................................................................8, 102
Operators and Functions................................................ 50 select ..................................................................................8
Padding with leading zeroes.......................................... 94 Pane ........................................................................................8
Page Pane ................................................................................... 102
access level ..............................................................8, 100 Panel
built-in........................................................................... 100 Target ............................................................................ 102
decription..........................................................................8 Panel.................................................................................. 102
description ................................................................... 100 Password entry format.................................................... 76
home ............................................................................. 100 Preview.............................................................................. 104
legend........................................................................8, 100 Program profile .............................................................. 104
name & ID ................................................................8, 100 Program Profile tool........................................................ 29
new .....................................................................................8 Properties
Page 116 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
.ofl file ............................................................................. 98 Report Window................................................................. 75

3D styling........................................................................ 76 Rounded Rectangle Tool................................................ 29
bar chart ......................................................................... 80 RUN ...............................................................................34, 99
bitmap............................................................................. 83 Scientific notation............................................................ 94
bitmap enumeration ................................................... 81 Scroll direction of trend............................................... 109
colour limits................................................................... 87 Selection tool .................................................................... 29
enumerations ................................................................ 92 Single................................................................................... 74
limits ................................................................................ 96 SKIP...................................................................................... 34
miscellaneous dialog ................................................... 97 Statements in ST............................................................... 53
Page ............................................................................... 100 Status pane
PageSet ......................................................................... 102 .ofl file............................................................................. 97
text................................................................................. 106 default............................................................................. 97
touch areas .................................................................. 108 Status pane ........................................................................ 97
trend graph.................................................................. 109 String ................................................................................... 74
trend graph variable.................................................. 109 Structured Text (ST)
variable ......................................................................... 110 aliases .............................................................................. 54
Properties ........................................................................... 76 assignments ................................................................... 53
Properties ........................................................................... 80 bitfields ........................................................................... 54
Properties ........................................................................... 81 comments in.................................................................. 47
Properties ........................................................................... 83 constants in.................................................................... 47
Properties ........................................................................... 96 Database names............................................................ 54
Properties ........................................................................... 97 editing ............................................................................. 47
Properties ........................................................................... 98 expressions in................................................................ 49
Properties ......................................................................... 100 Function.......................................................................... 47
Properties ......................................................................... 102 identifiers in................................................................... 49
Properties ......................................................................... 106 If... statements.........................................................47, 53
Properties ......................................................................... 108 operators and functions............................................. 50
Properties ......................................................................... 109 Reference ....................................................................... 34
Properties ......................................................................... 109 SFC step .......................................................................... 54
Properties ......................................................................... 110 spaces in ......................................................................... 53
Pushbutton using rectangle........................................... 76 statements in................................................................. 53
Ranges transitions in.................................................................. 54
display ............................................................................. 96 Variable........................................................................... 47
Ranges ................................................................................. 96 variables in ..................................................................... 54
Real number format........................................................ 94 what is? ........................................................................... 46
Rectangle Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 34
3D styling........................................................................ 76 Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 46
Rectangle............................................................................ 76 Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 47
Rectangle tool................................................................... 29 Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 47
Report Window Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 47
What is ............................................................................ 75 Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 49
HA260749U005 Page 117

Issue 4 Mar 08
Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 49 Target Properties dialog - Grid page........................... 63

Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 50 Target Properties dialog - Instruments page ............ 64
Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 53 Target Properties dialog - OSFK page ........................ 66
Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 53 Target Properties dialog - Variables page ................. 69
Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 54 Target Screen
Structured Text (ST) ........................................................ 54 See Target Panel..............................................................5
Style of bevel effect ........................................................ 76 Target Screen .......................................................................5
Subfield Text
select ............................................................................... 84 align ............................................................................... 106
Subfield............................................................................... 84 enumerated string display ......................................... 92
Subfield16 .......................................................................... 74 flashing................................................................. 106, 107
Subfield8 ............................................................................ 74 font name............................................................ 106, 107
System Variables ..................................................... 69, 110 highlighting .................................................................. 107
T# Properties dialog ........................................................ 106
Action qualifier ............................................................. 47 underlining................................................................... 106
T# ......................................................................................... 47 Variable......................................................................... 107
Tab Variable Properties dialog........................................ 107
Name ............................................................................. 100 Text .................................................................................... 106
Target ............................................................................ 102 Text .................................................................................... 107
Tab ..................................................................................... 100 Text Colour ........................................................................ 29
Tab ..................................................................................... 102 Text Tab.............................................................................. 85
Target Text tool ............................................................................. 29
associated with page ................................................. 102 Text Variable tool ............................................................ 29
LIN Database ................................................................. 47 Time
panel....................................................................... 97, 102 constants ........................................................................ 47
panel associated with PageSet................................ 102 Time..................................................................................... 47
specify ........................................................................... 102 Time..................................................................................... 74
Tab ................................................................................. 102 Touch Area
Target .................................................................................. 47 Properties dialog ........................................................ 108
Target .................................................................................. 97 screens .......................................................................... 108
Target ................................................................................ 102 understanding ............................................................. 108
Target ................................................................................ 102 Touch Area ...................................................................... 108
Target Definition Touch Area tool................................................................ 29
.uxt file ...............................................................................2 Trend
File.......................................................................................2 assigning database points ........................................ 109
Target Definition .................................................................2 channel selection ....................................................... 109
Target Definition .............................................................. 31 Graph Properties dialog ........................................... 109
Target Panel Graph Variable Properties dialog........................... 109
dialog............................................................................... 31 horizontal scroll.......................................................... 109
Templates....................................................................... 31 vertical scroll ............................................................... 109
Target Panel....................................................................... 31 Trend ................................................................................. 109
Page 118 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
Trend ................................................................................. 109 Variable............................................................................... 74

Trend Graph tool ............................................................. 29 Variable............................................................................. 104
Trend type........................................................................ 104 Variable............................................................................. 107
Triangle tool ...................................................................... 29 Variable............................................................................. 110
UInteger.............................................................................. 74 Variables in ST .................................................................. 54
ULong .................................................................................. 74 Verify PageSet ................................................................... 32
Underline characters for bar chart.............................. 80 Vertical trend .................................................................. 109
Underlining ...................................................................... 106 Warning messages............................................................ 32
User Screen Actions What is
Example .......................................................................... 99 a LIN Database? ............................................................ 70
writing ............................................................................. 34 a LIN function block?.................................................. 70
User Screen Actions ........................................................ 34 a Report Window ......................................................... 75
User Screen Actions ........................................................ 99 a Variable? ..................................................................... 74
Variable an Operator InterFace Language?............................ 75
LIN.................................................................................. 110 Structured Text? ........................................................... 46
name.............................................................................. 110 the Operator InterFace Language (OIFL) ............... 75
Properties dialog ........................................................ 110 What is ................................................................................ 46
system ........................................................................... 110 What is ................................................................................ 70
text................................................................................. 107 What is ................................................................................ 70
Text Action..................................................................... 47 What is ................................................................................ 74
type .................................................................................. 85 What is ................................................................................ 75
types ................................................................................ 74 What is ................................................................................ 75
Variable............................................................................... 47 Windows bitmap file ....................................................... 62
HA260749U005 Page 119

Issue 4 Mar 08
This page is deliberately left blank
Page 120 HA260749U005

Issue 4 Mar 08
AUSTRALIA Sydney HONG KONG & CHINA NORWAY Oslo
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd. Eurotherm Limited North Point Eurotherm A/S
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099 Telephone (+85 2) 28733826 Telephone (+47 67) 592170
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288 Fax (+85 2) 28700148 Fax (+47 67) 118301
E-mail info.au@eurotherm.com E-mail info.hk@eurotherm.com E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com
AUSTRIA Vienna Guangzhou Office POLAND Katowice

Telephone (+86 20) 8755 5099 Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
Eurotherm GmbH
Fax (+86 20) 8755 5831 Telephone (+48 32) 218 5100
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com Fax (+48 32) 217 7171
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
E-mail info.pl@eurotherm.com
Beijing Office
Telephone (+86 10) 6567 8506
Fax (+86 10) 6567 8509 SPAIN Madrid
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com Eurotherm Espaa SA
Eurotherm S.A/N.V. Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001
Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Shanghai Office Fax (+34 91) 661 9093
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188 E-mail info.es@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.be@eurotherm.com Fax (+86 21) 6145 1187
SWEDEN Malmo
BRAZIL Campinas-SP INDIA Chennai Eurotherm AB
Eurotherm Ltda. Eurotherm India Limited Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Telephone (+9144) 2496 1129 Fax (+46 40) 384545
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345 Fax (+9144) 2496 1831 E-mail info.se@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.br@eurotherm.com E-mail info.in@eurotherm.com
SWITZERLAND Wollerau
IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
DENMARK Copenhagen
Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
Eurotherm Danmark AS
Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
Telephone (+45 70) 234670 Telephone (+353 1) 4691800
E-mail info.ch@eurotherm.com
Fax (+45 70) 234660 Fax (+353 1) 4691300
E-mail info.dk@eurotherm.com E-mail info.ie@eurotherm.com
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Eurotherm Limited
FINLAND Abo ITALY Como Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Eurotherm Finland Eurotherm S.r.l Fax (+44 1903) 265982
Telephone (+358) 22506030 Telephone (+39 031) 975111 E-mail info.uk@eurotherm.com
Fax (+358) 22503201 Fax (+39 031) 977512 Web www.eurotherm.co.uk
E-mail info.fi@eurotherm.com E-mail info.it@eurotherm.com
U.S.A Leesburg VA
FRANCE Lyon KOREA Seoul Eurotherm Inc.
Eurotherm Automation SA Eurotherm Korea Limited Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000
Telephone (+33 478) 664500 Telephone (+82 31) 2738507 Fax (+1 703) 669 1300
Fax (+33 478) 352490 Fax (+82 31) 2738508 E-mail info.us@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.fr@eurotherm.com E-mail info.kr@eurotherm.com Web www.eurotherm.com
ED54
GERMANY Limburg NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+49 6431) 2980 Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+49 6431) 298119 Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail info.de@eurotherm.com E-mail info.nl@eurotherm.com
E U ROT H E R M
EUROTHERM LIMITED
Specification subject to change without notice. Eurotherm Limited. HA260749U005/4 (CN24207)

Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, EPower, Eycon, Eyris and Wonderware
are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respec-
tive owners.
e
T2550
Din-rail mounting controller
invensys
E U R O T H E R M
User Guide
2009 Eurotherm Limited
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in
any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an
aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of
Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifi-
cations in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is
given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for
any losses arising from errors in this document.

E U ROT H E R M
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's name: Eurotherm Limited
Manufacturer's address: Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,

BN13 3PL, United Kingdom
Product type: T2550 Modular Control System
Models: AI1, AI3, AI4,

AO2,
DI4, DI6, DI8,
DO4, DO8, Including terminal
FI2, units and accessories
RLY4,
ZI,
T2550 IOC
T2550 backplane
Safety specification: EN61010-1: 2001
EMC emissions specification: EN61326-1: 1997 Class A

(including amendments A1, A2 and A3)
EMC immunity specification: EN61326-1: 1997 Industrial locations

(including amendments A1, A2 and A3)
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC
specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply
with the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, and also with the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
Signed: Dated:
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited.
Mark Green
(VP (acting) R&D)
IA249986U690 Issue 3 Feb 08 (CN24196)

E U ROT H E R M
T2550 HANDBOOK
Contents T2550 Handbook
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 MANUAL CONTENTS ..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 OTHER INFORMATION SOURCES ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 THE T2550 INSTRUMENT ............................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1 Typical applications .......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.2 Features ............................................................................................................................. 1-3
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Installation requirements for EMC ................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Installation safety requirements ........................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3 Keeping the product safe .................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 UNPACKING ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Handling precautions ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.2 Package contents ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 MECHANICAL LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Layout drawings ................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.2 Mount a Base Unit ............................................................................................................ 2-7
2.3.3 Fit a Terminal Unit ............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.3.4 Fit a Module ...................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.5 Setting the IP Address ..................................................................................................... 2-10
2.4 TERMINAL UNIT SWITCHES ....................................................................................................... 2-12
2.4.1 Switch Location .............................................................................................................. 2-12
2.4.2 Switch and Link functions .............................................................................................. 2-12
2.5 CONNECTIONS AND WIRING ..................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.1 Communications ............................................................................................................. 2-17
2.5.2 Configuration Tools ........................................................................................................ 2-20
2.5.3 Power .............................................................................................................................. 2-21
2.5.4 Safety Earth ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.5.5 Watchdog Relay .............................................................................................................. 2-22
2.6 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................................... 2-23
2.7 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................................. 2-23
HA028898 Contents
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page- 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 3 USER INTERFACE ............................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 STATUS LEDS AND SWITCHES ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 (Status) LED ............................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 X (Fault) LED ................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3 (Battery) LED ............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.4 (Communications) LED .............................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.5 IP (IP Resolution) LED ..................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.6 Duplex LED (Redundant systems only) ....................................................................... 3-4
3.2.7 Watchdog Switch .............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.3 CHANGEOVER AND COMMUNICATIONS LEDS, AND SWITCHES ........................................ 3-5
3.3.1 Primary LED ..................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2 Standby LED ..................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.3 Sync switch ....................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.4 Desync switch ................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.5 Ethernet (Speed) LED ....................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.6 Ethernet (Activity) LED .................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.7 Ethernet Communications Port ......................................................................................... 3-6
CHAPTER 4 START-UP ....................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 REDUNDANCY MODES ................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 START-UP MODES ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hot start (LIN Terminal Unit Only) .................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Cold start ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.3 Hot/cold start .................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.4 Start-up routine ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.3 STARTING A SINGLE (SIMPLEX) T2550S Module ....................................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 Start-up routine ................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4 STARTING A PAIR OF (DUPLEX) T2550R MODULES ................................................................. 4-6
4.4.1 Start-up routine ................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4.2 Two Processor Non-redundant (Simplex) mode ............................................................... 4-8
CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 TOOLS: THE AUTOMATIC I/O BUILD AND CONFIGURATION TOOLS ................................... 5-1
5.2 AUTOMATIC I/O BUILD .................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1 Preparing for the Automatic I/O Build .............................................................................. 5-2
5.3 LINTOOLS ......................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 On-line Reconfiguration ................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.2 Preparing to run LINtools ................................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.3 Running LINtools ............................................................................................................. 5-6
5.4 TERMINAL CONFIGURATOR ........................................................................................................ 5-7
5.4.1 On-line Reconfiguration ................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5 MODBUS TOOLS ............................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.5.1 Preparing to run Modbus Tools ......................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.2 Running Modbus Tools ..................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.3 Configuring Modbus-TCP Slave Communications .......................................................... 5-9
5.5.4 Configuring Profibus Communications using Modbus Tools ......................................... 5-10
5.5.5 The Gertestammdaten.gsd File ...................................................................................... 5-12
Contents HA028898
Page - 2 Issue 10 mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 6 CONTROL AND AUTOTUNING ......................................................................... 6-1

6.1 WHAT IS A CONTROL LOOP ? ....................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 LOOP_PID FUNCTION BLOCK ...................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Main page ......................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Set Up page ....................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 PID page ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.4 Tuning Page .................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.5 SP page ........................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.6 OP page ........................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.7 Diag page ........................................................................................................................ 6-24
6.2.8 Alarms page .................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.3 EFFECT OF CONTROL ACTION, HYSTERESIS AND DEADBAND ......................................... 6-25
6.3.1 Control Action, Setup.CtrlAct ........................................................................................ 6-25
6.3.2 Hysteresis, Alarms.Hyst .................................................................................................. 6-25
6.3.3 Deadband, OP.CH2DeadB .............................................................................................. 6-26
CHAPTER 7 TASK ORGANISATION AND TUNING ............................................................... 7-1

7.1 TASK SCHEDULING ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Tasks ................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Priorities ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.3 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 USER TASKS ..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Terminology ...................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Execution times ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.2.3 User task block servers ..................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3 USER TASK TUNING ....................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 Initiating repeat rates ......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.2 Automatic dynamic tuning ................................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.3 Manual tuning ................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 DATA COHERENCE ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.4.1 Data flow between tasks ................................................................................................... 7-7
CHAPTER 8 EVENT LOG .................................................................................................. 8 - 1

8.1 THE EVENT LOG ........................................................................................................................... 8 - 1
CHAPTER 9 DATA MANAGEMENT ..................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 DATA RECORDING .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Data Recording File, .uhh ................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.2 Data Recording Groups .................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 DATA ARCHIVING ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.1 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) ............................................................................................. 9-2
9.3 DATA MANAGEMENT CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 9-2
CHAPTER 10 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER ............................................................................. 10-1

10.1 SETPOINT PROGRAMMING ........................................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.1 Programs ......................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 10-3
HA028898 Contents
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 11 ERROR CONDITIONS AND DIAGNOSTICS ....................................................... 11-1

11.1 ERROR INDICATION TYPES ........................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 LED ERROR DISPLAYS ................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.2.1 LEDs ............................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Instrument failure modes ................................................................................................ 11-4
11.2.3 Power failure ................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.2.4 Watchdog failure ............................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.5 Inter-processor Communications Mechanism for redundancy failure ............................ 11-5
11.2.6 LIN failure ...................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.2.7 Decoupled Instruments ................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.8 Desynchronisation .......................................................................................................... 11-6
11.3 POWER-UP FAILURE ..................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.3.1 Power-up routine ............................................................................................................. 11-7
11.4 POWER ON SELF TESTS (POSTs) ................................................................................................ 11-9
11.5 DIAGNOSTIC BLOCKS ............................................................................................................... 11-10
CHAPTER 12 SERVICE ..................................................................................................... 12 - 1

12.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ............................................................................ 12 - 1
12.2 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ................................................................................................. 12 - 2
12.2.1 Firmware upgrade ......................................................................................................... 12 - 2
12.2.2 Live T2550R Module replacement ............................................................................... 12 - 3
12.2.3 Battery replacement (Simplex only) .............................................................................. 12 - 3
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATION AND COSHH ........................................................................... A-1

A.1 INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE ......................................................... A-1
A.1.1 Installation category II ..................................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Pollution degree 2 ............................................................................................................ A-1
A.2 SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................................................. A-2
A.2.1 General specification ....................................................................................................... A-2
A.2.2 T2550 Terminal Unit specification .................................................................................. A-3
A.2.3 T2550 IOC Module hardware specification ..................................................................... A-4
A.2.4 T2550 LIN IOC Module software specification .............................................................. A-5
A.3 COSHH - BATTERY SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................... A-9
APPENDIX B POWER ON SELF TESTS (POSTS) AND ERROR NUMBERS .................................. B - 1

B.1 POWER ON SELF TESTS (POSTs) ............................................................................................... B - 1
B.2 ERROR NUMBERS ........................................................................................................................ B - 4
B.2.1 Error number structure ................................................................................................... B - 4
B.2.2 Error messages ............................................................................................................... B - 4
Contents HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX C TERMINAL CONFIGURATOR .......................................................................... C - 1

C.1 THE CONFIGURATOR .................................................................................................................. C - 1
C.1.1 Configurable Items ........................................................................................................ C - 1
C.2 RUNNING THE CONFIGURATOR ............................................................................................... C - 2
C.2.1 Initial menu access ......................................................................................................... C - 2
C.2.2 The Initial menu ............................................................................................................. C - 3
C.2.3 Quitting the Terminal Configurator ............................................................................... C - 3
C.3 LIN DATABASE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................ C - 4
C.3.1 MAKE command ........................................................................................................... C - 4
C.3.2 COPY command .......................................................................................................... C - 10
C.3.3 DELETE command ...................................................................................................... C - 11
C.3.4 INSPECT command ..................................................................................................... C - 11
C.3.5 NETWORK command ................................................................................................. C - 12
C.3.6 UTILITIES command .................................................................................................. C - 13
C.3.7 ALARMS command .................................................................................................... C - 15
C.4 MODBUS CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... C - 16
C.4.1 GWindex command ..................................................................................................... C - 16
C.4.2 MODE command ......................................................................................................... C - 16
C.4.3 INTERFACE command ............................................................................................... C - 17
C.4.4 SETUP command ......................................................................................................... C - 17
C.4.5 TABLES command ...................................................................................................... C - 19
APPENDIX D I/O MODULES .............................................................................................. D - 1

D.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... D - 1
D.2 ISOLATOR LINKS AND FUSES (OPTIONAL FOR I/O TERMINAL UNITS ONLY) ................ D - 1
APPENDIX D1 2500P - 24V POWER SUPPLY .......................................... D1 - 1

D1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................. D1 - 1
D1.2 MODULE IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................................................... D1 - 1
D1.3 CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................... D1 - 1
D1.4 LOCATION ................................................................................................................................... D1 - 1
D1.5 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... D1 - 2
D1.6 STATUS INDICATION ................................................................................................................. D1 - 3
D1.7 SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................................... D1 - 3
D1.8 MOUNT THE POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................................. D1 - 4
D1.8.1 DIN Rail Mounting ........................................................................................................... D1 - 4
D1.8.2 Demounting ................................................................................................................. D1 - 4
APPENDIX D2 AI2 - TWO CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE .............. D2-1

D2.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... D2-1
D2.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................ D2-2
D2.3 ANALOGUE INPUTS .................................................................................................................... D2-4
D2.3.1 Isolation Diagram ........................................................................................................... D2-4
D2.3.2 Equivalent Circuits ........................................................................................................ D2-4
D2.4 STATUS INDICATION ................................................................................................................... D2-6
D2.5 SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... D2-7
D2.5.1 AI2 TC Module .............................................................................................................. D2-7
D2.5.2 AI2 DC Module ............................................................................................................. D2-8
D2.5.3 AI2 mA Module ........................................................................................................... D2-10
HA028898 Contents
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D3 AI3 - THREE CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE ............. D3-1

D3.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... D3-1
D3.3.1 Isolation Diagram ............................................................................................................... D3-3
D3.4 HART COMPATIBILITY ................................................................................................................ D3-4
D3.6.1 AI3 Module .................................................................................................................... D3-6
APPENDIX D4 AI4 - FOUR CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE ............. D4-1

D4.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... D4-1
D4.5.1 AI4 TC Module .............................................................................................................. D4-6
D4.5.2 AI4 mV Module ............................................................................................................. D4-7
D4.5.3 AI4 mA Module ............................................................................................................. D4-8
APPENDIX D5 AO2 - TWO CHANNEL ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULE .......... D5-1

D5.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................... D5-1
D5.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................. D5-1
D5.3 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS ...................................................................................................................... D5-2
D5.3.2 Equivalent Diagram ............................................................................................................ D5-2
D5.4 STATUS INDICATION ......................................................................................................................... D5-3
D5.5 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................ D5-4
D5.5.1 AO2 Module ....................................................................................................................... D5-4
APPENDIX D6 DI4 - FOUR CHANNEL DIGITAL INPUT MODULE ................... D6-1

D6.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................... D6-1
D6.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................. D6-2
D6.3 DIGITAL INPUTS ................................................................................................................................ D6-3
D6.3.2 Equivalent Circuits ............................................................................................................. D6-4
D6.4 STATUS INDICATION ......................................................................................................................... D6-5
D6.5 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................ D6-6
D6.5.1 DI4 Module ......................................................................................................................... D6-6
Contents HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D7 DI6 - SIX CHANNEL AC DIGITAL INPUT MODULE ................. D7-1

D7.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... D7-1
D7.2.1 V-I CURVES FOR INPUTS .......................................................................................... D7-3
D7.3 DIGITAL INPUTS ........................................................................................................................... D7-4
D7.5.1 DI6 Module .................................................................................................................... D7-6
APPENDIX D8 DI8 - EIGHT CHANNEL DIGITAL INPUT MODULE ................... D8-1

D8.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... D8-1
D8.3 DIGITAL INPUTS ........................................................................................................................... D8-3
D8.5.1 DI8 Module .................................................................................................................... D8-6
APPENDIX D9 DO4 - FOUR CHANNEL DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE ............... D9-1

D9.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... D9-1
D9.3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ....................................................................................................................... D9-3
D9.5.1 DO4 Module .................................................................................................................. D9-6
APPENDIX D10 DO8 - EIGHT CHANNEL DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE ............... D10-1
D10.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................. D10-1
D10.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................... D10-2
D10.3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................................ D10-3
D10.3.2 Equivalent Circuits ......................................................................................................... D10-4
D10.4 STATUS INDICATION ..................................................................................................................... D10-5
D10.5 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................ D10-6
D10.5.1 DO8 Module ................................................................................................................... D10-6
HA028898 Contents
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D11 RLY4 - RELAY MODULE ....................................................... D11-1

D11.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................. D11-1
D11.1.1 Snubber Circuits ............................................................................................................. D11-1
D11.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................... D11-2
D11.3 RELAY OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................................... D11-3
D11.3.1 Isolation Diagram ............................................................................................................ D11-3
D11.5.1 RLY4 Module ................................................................................................................. D11-5
D11.6 RELAY MODULE SNUBBER CIRCUITS REMOVAL .................................................................. D11-6
D11.6.1 Instructions ..................................................................................................................... D11-6
APPENDIX D12 FI2 - TWO CHANNEL FREQUENCY INPUT MODULE ............... D12-1
D12.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................. D12-1
D12.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................................... D12-2
D12.3 APPLICATION DETAILS ................................................................................................................ D12-4
D12.4 FREQUENCY INPUTS .................................................................................................................... D12-5
D12.6 FAULT DETECTION ........................................................................................................................ D12-8
D12.6.1 Fault Diagnostics ............................................................................................................ D12-8
D12.7.1 FI2 Module ..................................................................................................................... D12-9
D12.8 CONFIGURE CHANNEL VOLTAGE SETTING .......................................................................... D12-11
D12.8.1 Instructions ................................................................................................................... D12-11
APPENDIX D13 ZI - ZIRCONIA INPUT MODULE ........................................... D13-1

D13.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................. D13-1
D13.2 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................... D13-2
D13.3 APPLICATION DETAILS ................................................................................................................ D13-3
D13.3.1 Temperature Control ....................................................................................................... D13-3
D13.3.2 Carbon Potential Control ................................................................................................ D13-3
D13.3.3 Soot Alarm ...................................................................................................................... D13-3
D13.3.4 Probe Cleaning ............................................................................................................... D13-3
D13.3.5 Endothermic Gas Correction .......................................................................................... D13-3
D13.4 ANALOGUE INPUTS ...................................................................................................................... D13-4
D13.6 FAULT DETECTION ........................................................................................................................ D13-6
D13.6.1 Fault Diagnostics ............................................................................................................ D13-6
D13.7.1 ZI Module ....................................................................................................................... D13-8
INDEX .............................................................................................................. INDEX-1
Contents HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
The T2550 instrument is a high integrity controller and can be used stand-alone or part of a complete control system
which includes communications to I/O modules and Human Machine Interfaces (HMI).
1.1 MANUAL CONTENTS

This manual is divided into the following chapters:
Chapter 1. Introduction
Chapter 2. Installation
Chapter 3. User Interface (explaining the Module LEDs and switches)
Chapter 4. Start-Up (step-by-step instrument start-up or re-start instructions, Automatic I/O build instructions)
Chapter 5. Configuration (basic overview of using LINtools to modify control strategy and communications
protocols on site, usually to match changes in the plant being controlled). (Initial configuration, to
Customer Specification, is normally carried out prior to delivery.)
Chapter 6. Control and Automatic Tuning (explaining Control Loop configuration)
Chapter 7. Task Organisation and Tuning (explaining tasks and tuning)
Chapter 8. Event Log (explaining the Event Log facility)
Chapter 9. Data Management (explaining the data recording and archiving of Data Recording files, .uhh)
Chapter 10. Setpoint Programming (explaining Setpoint Programming tools and files)
Chapter 11. Error Conditions and Diagnostics (how to diagnose faults that develop in the instrument, by
recognising fault indications)
Chapter 12. Service
Appendix A. Technical Specification and COSHH (Batteries contain a hazardous substance, the Control of
Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations 2002 (COSHH) require employers to control exposure
to hazardous substances to prevent ill health.)
Appendix B. Power On Self Tests (POSTs) and Error Numbers. A list of applicable POSTs and error numbers that
may help to diagnose faults that develop in the instrument.
Appendix C. Terminal Configurator (overview of the instructions for connecting and using the Terminal
Configurator)
Appendix D. I/O Modules. Individual chapters for each of the compatible I/O modules, including Technical
Specification and details for both standard and Fast I/O Task modules.
1.2 OTHER INFORMATION SOURCES

For details of Local Instrument Network (LIN) based Function Blocks, their parameters and input/output connections
refer to the LIN Blocks Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003) which explains how control strategy function
blocks are selected interconnected etc. The creation, monitoring and On-line Reconfiguration of LIN Databases and
LIN Sequential Function Charts (SFCs) is described in the LINtools Help (Part no. RM263001U055). The ELIN User
Guide (Part no. HA082429) gives full details of installation, and how to configure an ELIN network, including setting
the IP address using the instruments internal configurator.
The future development of the Modbus and Profibus implementations will be discussed in the Communications
Manual (Part no. HA028014).
Note If you do not possess any documents stated please contact your distributor.
HA028898 Chapter 1
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page 1 - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
1.3 THE T2550 INSTRUMENT

The T2550 instrument comprises the Base Unit (T2550B), holding up to 16 I/O modules (2500M), and either a single
(Simplex) module (T2550S) or a pair of (Duplex) modules (T2550R).
Processor module(s) I/O modules
(T2550S or T2550R) (2500M)
Note Simplex configuration uses 1 T2550S

module that can be fitted to either a
Simplex (single width) or Duplex
(double width) Terminal Unit. A
blanking plate should be fitted in the
vacant right-hand position.
Redundant configuration uses 2
T2550R modules. Terminal Units
(2500T)
Base Unit
(T2550B)
Figure 1.1 Redundant (T2550R) Modules configuration with I/O Modules (16) on the Base Unit
1.3.1 Typical applications

The T2550 instrument is designed to control plants using local input/output modules, refer to the I/O Module
Appendix. A number of these instruments can be networked together, allowing thousands of I/O points to be monitored
and controlled.
Slow I/O Task Fast I/O Task

Type Description (110ms) (10ms)
AI2 Analogue I/P 2 channels (universal; 3 Terminal Unit options) 9 -

AI3 Analogue I/P 3 channels (4-20mA, with transmitter PSU) 9 -
AI4 Analogue I/P 4 channels (TC, mV, mA Terminal Unit options) 9 -
AO2 Analogue O/P 2 channels (0-20mA or 0-10V output) 9 -
DI4 Digital I/P 4 channels (logic) 9 -
DI8_LG* Digital I/P 8 channels (logic) 9 9
DI8_CO* Digital I/P 8 channels (contact closure) 9 9
DI6_MV Digital I/P 6 channels (ac mains input, 115V rms) 9 -
DI6_HV Digital I/P 6 channels (ac mains input, 230V rms) 9 -
DO4_LG* Digital O/P 4 channels (externally powered, 10mA) 9 9
DO4_24* Digital O/P 4 channels (externally powered, 100mA) 9 9
DO8 Digital O/P 8 channels 9 9
RLY4* Relay O/P 4 channels (2 amp; 3 n/o, 1 change-over) 9 9
FI2 Frequency I/P 2 channels (logic, magnetic, and contact closure) 9 9
ZI Zirconia Probe I/P 2 channels (mV (TC), high impedance 0-2V) 9 -
Note. * indicates the Module upgraded, refers to Version 2 modules.
Table 1.3.1 Module compatibility
Chapter 1 HA028898
Page 1 - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
1.3.2 Features
The main features of the T2550 instrument are as follows:
LIN
The Local Instrument Network (LIN) is a collection of LIN instruments, and LIN communications, etc. that together
form the control system.
LIN COMMUNICATION
The Local Instrument Network (LIN) communications is our proprietry communications system used to connect each
LIN instrument in the network.
ELIN COMMUNICATION
ELIN communication is the LIN communications system transported via Ethernet. It allows peer-to-peer
communications between T2550s and the wider network via a standard Ethernet infastructure, see Connections and
Wiring.
PROFIBUS COMMUNICATION
The Profibus communications is an industry standard open network and can be used to connect a T2550 Profibus
Slave to a Profibus Master in the network.
Note Profibus Slave communication parameters are configured using Modbus Tools.
REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

The Duplex Terminal Units supports Redundant Power Supply Connection. This is two power connectors, ORed
together at the Terminal Unit that permits connection of a redundant power supply.
The Duplex Terminal Unit supports data in SRAM and the Real-Time Clock for a minimum of 12 hours with an
internal supercapacitor.
The Simplex Terminal Unit will support data in SRAM and the Real-Time Clock for a minimum of 72 hours with an
additional battery.
Note Provision has been made for the connection of an external battery to extend this time via a socket sited
between the Serial Communication ports on the Duplex Terminal Unit.
REDUNDANT INSTRUMENT
The instrument can be set up for redundant (Duplex - LIN or Profibus) or non-redundant (Simplex) operation. When
operating in redundant mode, a high speed data link (Inter-processor Communications Mechanism - ICM) between the
primary and secondary T2550R modules provides exact tracking of the control database, allowing bumpless
changeover by the secondary module should the primary module fail.
LIVE T2550(R OR S) REPLACEMENT

Live replacement of a failed T2550(R or S) module can be carried out, without wiring disconnections. Full hardware
and software status indication allows rapid verification and diagnostics. When operating in Simplex mode ALL I/O
modules power down when the T2550S is extracted. However, during Redundant mode operation either T2550R
module can independantly drive the I/O modules allowing the replacement T2550R to load its control strategy and
current status from the active T2550R.
AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER
Changeover of control by the secondary module in the event of primary module failure is automatic and seemingly
bumpless to the I/O. There is no loss of I/O states and no need to re-initialise I/O points. Revalidation of all attached
LIN nodes is automatic.
HA028898 Chapter 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
1.3.2 FEATURES (Cont.)
TIME LOCALISATION SUPPORT

Time zone and SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) support provides a means of configuring the instrument to use
the time zone according to the installation and the method used to process the time through a network. This is
configured in the Instrument Properties dialog.
DATA MANAGEMENT
Automatic data recording and archiving, providing Data Recording files, .uhh, to store recorded values from defined
parameters selected from the database in the instrument. The .uhh files can be automatically archived to defined FTP
Servers, and then displayed as a charts using the Review software.
SETPOINT PROGRAM
Configuration of the Setpoint Program is a 2 stage process. The LIN Programmer Editor is used to generate the
required Program file, .uyy, and the Programmer Wizard, available from LINtools Engineering Studio, is used to insert
and automatically link all the blocks needed to produce the generated Setpoint Program.
EVENT LOGGING
Automatic event logging, providing an ASCII text file to record and store individually time stamped events generated
in the instrument, and provide a means of indicating the impact of an event on the system.
HEALTH MONITORING
Automatic health checks, self-testing, and initialisation on power-up, with continuous checking of I/O status and
external communications.
FRONT PANEL ANNUNCIATION

Instrument LEDs are provided for communications and module status. Control switches are also fitted on each T2550R
module.
WATCHDOG
Watchdog switch for each T2550R module to manually initiate a restart in the event of a watchdog failure of a T2550R
module, see Switch and Link functions. If required, the Watchdog Relay connections can be wired, see Connections
and Wiring.
CONFIGURATION
Continuous strategies and Sequences are configured/downloaded/monitored with LINtools, the recommended
configuration tool.
IP (INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY) PROTECTION

Specific application file types can be encrypted (password protected). This will prevent the lose of the Intellectual
Property to mis-use and duplication, i.e. using files on an instrument that they were not originally intended and copying
or editing files for an identical or similar instrument or process.
AUTOMATIC CONFIGURATION
The instrument is capable of automatically creating its own LIN Database (_auto.dbf and _auto.run), including all
necessary module and I/O Function Blocks based on the I/O detected in the Base Unit.
Automatic Configuration is attempted after the instrument has determined the Hot/Cold Start switch configuration. A
Duplex Unit uses Switch 2 (SW2:S2 and SW2:S3 are set to OFF). A Simplex Unit has only 1 bank of switches
Switch 1 (SW1:S9 and SW1:S10 are set to OFF). This instructs the instrument to detect the installed I/O, and when
complete, an operational database is created and run automatically.
Chapter 1 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
BLOCK STRUCTURE
Continuous strategies are built up by interconnection of fixed function blocks from a comprehensive library of
analogue and logic elements, common to all LIN based instruments.
BLOCK SUPPORT
Most LIN Database function blocks are supported in redundant mode. Special diagnostic blocks are available for
hardware and software status reporting, refer to Diagnostics blocks section for a list of typically required diagnostic
blocks, and the LIN Blocks Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003) for a full description of each individual
block.
Blocks are license protected into categorises that define an increasing level of instrument control. Foundation license
blocks define a basic level of instrument control that will simply provide an output derived from a given input.
Standard license blocks define a level of instrument control that provides an output derived from a given input using
simple blocks. Control license blocks define a level of instrument control that provides an output derived using more
complex blocksthat can reduce the total number of blocks needed in the database.
Note Generally, a combination of Standard license blocks can be used to provide a level of instrument
control equivalent to a single Control license block, bu this will impact on the total number of
available blocks remaining.
Advanced license blocks define a level of instrument control that provides an output derived from a given input by
using market applicable blocks. Loggin license blocks define a level of instrument control that provides Data
Management functionality to outputs derived from a given input.
SEQUENTIAL FUNCTION CHART (SFC)

The Sequential Function Chart (SFC) is the graphical way LINtools (the recommended Configuration tool) represents
a LIN Sequence (.sfc). A Sequence is employed when the process being controlled by the LIN Database (.dbf) can
adopt several distinct states - e.g. Starting Up, Full Running, Shutting Down, etc. A LIN Sequence is a
program that runs in a LIN instrument, in conjunction with a LIN Database. It interacts with its associated LIN
Database by writing new values to specified LIN Database fields, in response to changes in the values of other
specified LIN Database fields.
Note If loading and unloading Sequences is not kept to a minimum when redundant instruments are
synchronising the secondary may fail to load an Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and may cause the
redundant instruments to desynchronise.
LADDER CONFIGURATION
A ladder diagram is a type of Action represented graphically by a column of rungs. Rungs are equivalent to program
statements, with icons along them representing digital or analog fields, constants, and logical or arithmetic functions.
Each rung has only one output or objective - at its right-hand end - which is either a coil (digital field), variable
(analogue field), or a jump to another labelled rung.
Note A single rung that evaluates TRUE or FALSE can also be used for a Sequence Transition.
Rungs can include any number of input elements and use any complexity of wired or explicit functions to perform the
rung operation - subject only to screen space limitations.
ST USER ALGORITHMS
Special ACTION blocks support user-algorithms written in Structured Text (ST) and are well-suited to implement
plant logical devices
HA028898 Chapter 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
ENCLOSURES
These instruments can be supplied in a range of enclosures, both wall-mounted and floor-standing. Power supplies,
standard terminations, transmitter power supplies, and I/O modules can all be fitted within these enclosures, and if
required, a Human Machine Interface (HMI - contact distributor) can be supplied to allow a visual representation of
process variables among many other features.
Note This instrument can be mounted vertically as shown in the sides of the single bay enclosure, or
horizontally as shown in the two-bay version.
I/O Racks
(multiple)
Battery
Units
PSUs
Figure 1.3.2c Typical installations
Chapter 1 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
This chapter presents safety and EMC information and describes the mechanical and electrical installation of the
instrument.
The main topics covered are as follows:
Safety and EMC information (section 2.1)
Unpacking (section 2.2)
Mechanical layout (section 2.3)
Set-up switch definition (section 2.4)
Connections and wiring (section 2.5)
Modbus communications (section 2.6)
Profibus communications (section 2.7)
2.1 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION

Please read this section before installing the T2550 instrument.
This T2550 instrument is designed to meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC. It is,
however, the responsibility of the installer to ensure the safety and EMC compliance of any particular installation.
2.1.1 Installation requirements for EMC

This T2550 instrument conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC,
amended by 93/68/EEC. It also satisfies the emissions and immunity standards for industrial environments.
To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary as follows:
General guidance. For general guidance refer to the EMC Installation Guide (Part no. HA025464).
Relay outputs. When using relay outputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable for suppressing conducted
emissions. The filter requirements will depend on the type of load.
Routing of wires. To minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, low voltage DC connections and sensor input
wiring should be routed away from high-current power cables. Where it is impractical to do this, shielded cables
should be used, with the shield grounded at both ends.
Power supply connections. The instrument must be powered from a local power supply and must not be
connected to a DC distribution network. The power supply must be earthed according to manufacturers
instructions in order to give best EMC perfomance for the system.
2.1.2 Installation safety requirements
Caution
In order to comply with the requirements of BS EN61010, the voltage applied across I/O terminals may not exceed
those terminals isolation voltage. For terminals specified as having no isolation, the maximum permissible voltage is
30V ac or 50 V dc. Refer to individual I/O Module sections for isolation details.
PERSONNEL
Installation must ONLY be carried out by qualified personnel.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.1.2 Installation safety requirements (Cont.)
POWER ISOLATION
The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker. This device should be in close proximity
(1 meter) to the controller, within easy reach of the operator and marked as the disconnecting device for the
instrument.
ENCLOSURE OF LIVE PARTS

To prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live, the controller must be installed in an
enclosure.
BLANK TERMINAL UNIT

Base Units are supplied to hold up to 16 modules. In the event that a Base Unit is not fully populated a blank Terminal
Unit, Part no. 026373, will be supplied with the system. It is important that this is fitted into the position immediately
to the right of the last module in order to maintain IP20 rating.
Caution: Live sensors

The controller is designed to allow operation with the temperature sensor connected directly to an electrical heating
element. However you must ensure that service personnel do not touch connections to these inputs while they are live.
With a live sensor, all cables, connectors and switches for connecting the sensor must be mains rated.
CONDUCTIVE POLLUTION
Electrically conductive pollution (e.g. carbon dust, water condensation) must be excluded from the cabinet in which
the controller is mounted. To secure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution, fit an air filter to the
air intake of the cabinet. Where condensation is likely, include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet.
VENTILATION
Ensure that the enclosure or cabinet housing the T2550 instrument provides adequate ventilation/heating to maintain
the operating temperature of the instrument.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
Caution
Circuit boards inside the instrument contain components which can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before
any circuit board is removed or handled it should be ensured that the handler, the instrument and the circuit board are
all at the same potential.
2.1.3 Keeping the product safe

To maintain the units in a safe condition, observe the following instructions.
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified in this handbook or by the distributor, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
SERVICE AND REPAIRS

Except for those parts detailed in the Service section, the T2550 IOC Module has no user-serviceable parts. Contact
the nearest manufacturers agent for repair.
Some Terminal Units, I/O modules (2500M), may contain fuses and must be replaced by the correct type of fuse in
compliance to EN60127.
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.2 UNPACKING
The instrument and accessories should be carefully unpacked and inspected for damage. The original packing
materials should be retained in case re-shipment is required. If there is evidence of shipping damage, the supplier or
the carrier should be notified within 72 hours and the packaging retained for inspection by the manufacturers and/or
carriers representative.
2.2.1 Handling precautions
Caution
Circuit boards inside the units contain components which can be damaged by static electrical discharge. Before any
circuit board is removed or handled it should be ensured that the handler, the instrument and the circuit board are all
at the same potential.
2.2.2 Package contents

The T2550 instrument may form part of a larger assembly, and/or may be housed in a floor or wall-mounted enclosure.
If so, the documentation that accompanied those items should be referred to.
The package contents should be checked against the order codes, using the labels on the components.
PRODUCT LABELLING
Product labelling includes:
1. Sleeve label. On the outside of the T2550 IOC Module sleeves, showing the model number, serial number, and
hardware build level.
2. Backplane label. On the edge of the backplane, showing the model number, serial number, and hardware build level.
3. Software labels showing version and issue numbers.
4. Compact Flash memory card label showing firmware version, issue number, initial software licence and
Ethernet-Mac Address.
5. Safety earth symbol adjacent to safety earth stud.
MODULE LABELLING
All I/O modules are identified by means of labels on the side and front of the case. The side label includes details of
the product code, serial number and module version.
SYMBOLS USED IN THE LABELLING

One or more of the symbols in the table below, may appear on the labelling of the unit:
Label Function
! Caution, refer to the accompanying documents
Functional (Ground/Safety) earth
Protective earth terminal
Risk of electric shock
40 Year Environmently Friendly Usage Period
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3 MECHANICAL LAYOUT AND INSTALLATION

Figure 2.3.1a shows a Base Unit with the T2550R Modules and Terminal Units removed for clarity. I/O modules
(refer to I/O Module Appendix) communicate with the T2550 IOC Modules via the internal communications bus.
Figure 2.3.1b and Figure 2.3.1c show front and side views of the T2550 IOC Modules, and Terminal Units.
The T2550 instrument can operate either independently (Simplex), or in redundant (Duplex) mode in which case one
of the T2550R Modules act as a primary, backed up by the other T2550R Module (the secondary). This can take over
from the primary at any time.
When only a single T2550S module is fitted, it is recommended that the blanking plate supplied be fitted to the vacant
slot, to maintain safety specifications. The Simplex T2550S module supports data in SRAM and the Real-Time Clock
(RTC) for a minimum of 72 hours with an internal battery.
Note If using an external battery with the T2550R, refer to the accompanying documentation.
Power is supplied to a Duplex T2550 instrument by two external 24V (nom.) power supplies (redundant power
connections). The two supplies are effectively ORd together within the Duplex Terminal Unit, so they can run in
parallel, ensuring that the T2550R modules continue to operate even if one of the supplies fails.
2.3.1 Layout drawings
A
Illustration Key
(1) Retention Screws (4)
(4)
(2) Base Retention Clip

(3) DIN Rail
(4) Side Cover (7) (3)
(7)
(5) Terminal Unit Retention Clip
B
(6) Support for Terminal Unit
D (6)
(7) EMC Earthing
(1)
(8) Protective Earth Terminal (1)
(1)
(2)
Strip (* - Optional)
E (2) (2)
(9) Safety Earth connection (one C
per Protective Earth
(5)
Terminal Strip)
(9) (8) (*8) (8)
Note Always ensure a 25mm clearance for ventilation.
Figure 2.3.1a Base Unit mounted horizontally
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.1 Layout Drawings (Cont.)

114mm
25mm 81mm
Backplane
PCB Flash
memory card
110mm
Module
retaining
lever
422/485
Jumpers
External Battery Internal Battery

connector holder
25mm
50mm
Note The dimensions shown for the Duplex Terminal Unit also apply to the Profibus Terminal Unit.
Model Dimensions (mm) Weight (Kg)

Width A Height B C D E No Modules All Modules
T2550B - 00S 36.0 180.0 68.0 15.0 5.0 0.6 1.0

T2550B - 04R 164.0 180.0 68.0 15.0 5.0 0.7 1.1
T2550B - 06R 214.0 180.0 68.0 15.0 5.0 0.9 1.3
T2550B - 08R 264.0 180.0 68.0 15.0 5.0 1.2 1.8
T2550B - 16R 467.0 180.0 68.0 15.0 5.0 2.5 3.0
Figure 2.3.1b Dimensions (mm)
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.1 Layout Drawings (Cont.)
Status
Fault
Battery
Communications (Serial)
Condition IP Resolution
indicators
Duplex
Watchdog switch
Primary
Standby
Sync switch
Status and Desync switch

Switching
Ethernet Communications Port
Ethernet
Ethernet (Speed)
Communications
indicator Ethernet (Activity)
Serial Watchdog Relay (if fitted)

Communications, Serial Communications Port
Watchdog Relay, External Battery connector
and Power
(Terminal Unit) 24V dc
PROFIBUS DUPLEX TERMINAL UNIT
External Battery connector

Profibus 9-Way D-Type
Communications Port
24V dc
Note The Simplex Unit does not support the external battery supply, but does support battery backup via an
internal battery mounted on the Simplex Terminal Unit.
Figure 2.3.1c Front panel layout (Redundant Configuration)
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.2 Mount a Base Unit

This Base Unit is intended to be mounted within an enclosure, or in an environment suitable for IP20 rated equipment.
It can be DIN rail or bulkhead mounted.
For DIN rail mounting, use symmetrical DIN rail to EN50022-35 X 7.5 or 35 X 15 mounted horizontally or vertically.
Caution
Do not operate the equipment without a protective earth conductor connected to one of the earth terminals on the
Base Unit .
The earth cable should have at least the current rating of the largest power cable used to connect to the instrument.
Connect the protective earth with a suitable tinned copper eyelet, and use the screw and washer supplied with the base
unit, tightened to a torque of 1.2Nm (10.5lbin).
This connection also provides a ground for EMC purposes.
DIN RAIL MOUNTING

Note Refer to Figure 2.3.1a.
Caution
It is acceptable to mount the T2550B (Base Unit) vertically up the sides of an enclosure. If it is mounted up the sides
of an enclosure, it is advisable to fit a fan in the cubicle to ensure a free flow of air around the modules.
To mount on a DIN rail:

1. Mount the DIN rail, using suitable bolts.
2. Ensure that the DIN rail makes good electrical contact with the metal base of the enclosure.
3. Loosen screws (1) in the Base Unit, and allow them, and the associated Base Unit retention clips (2) to drop to the
bottom of the screw slot.
4. In the back of the Base Unit is an extruded slot which locates with the DIN rail (3).
5. Fit the top edge of this into the top edge of the DIN rail (3)
6. Slide the screws (1) with the associated clips (2) upwards as far as they will go towards the top of the screw slots.
The angled edge of the base retaining clip (2) must locate behind the bottom edge of the DIN rail.
7. Tighten the screws (1).
DIRECT PANEL MOUNTING
To mount direct on the bulkhead:
1. Remove the screws (1) and base retention clips (2).
2. Hold the Base Unit horizontally or vertically on the panel and mark the position of the two holes on the panel.
3. Drill two 5.2 mm holes in the panel.
4. Using M5 bolts supplied, secure the Base Unit to the metal panel.
Caution
If a bolt other than the one supplied is used, the depth of the bolt head should not exceed 5mm. This is to ensure that
there is sufficient isolation between the bolt head and any module mounted above it which is connected to 230V.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.3 Fit a Terminal Unit

It is recommended that power be isolated, before the Terminal Unit is removed from the Base Unit.
Note This procedure is identical for all Terminal Units .
To fit a Terminal Unit:

1. Locate the tag on the Terminal Unit printed circuit board with slot in Base Unit.
2. Press the bottom of the Terminal Unit to secure it in place, confirmed by a click as the retention clip springs back
into position. Wiring of the T2550 instrument can take place with only the Terminal Units fitted or after the
modules have been fitted, as preferred. Wiring is described in following chapters.
Notes
1 In Redundant operation the two left-hand positions are always reserved for the T2550R modules, and
is identified by the larger connector on the Backplane interconnection bus.
2 All other Terminal Units can be fitted in any other position on the Base Unit.
3 In the event that the Base Unit is not fully populated a blank Terminal Unit must be fitted,
Part no. 026373. To maintain IP20 rating it is important that this blank Terminal Unit is mounted
immediately to the right of the final module position.
Terminal Unit Backplane

Retention clip 2 Terminal Unit Connector
1
DIN Rail EMC

Earthing Strap
Figure 2.3.3 Fitting a Terminal Unit (Side View)
To remove a Terminal Unit:

1. Remove the I/O module, if fitted.
2. If required, remove all relevant wiring to the Terminal Unit.
3. Press the Retention clip at the bottom of the Terminal Unit.
4. Carefully remove the Terminal Unit from the Base Unit.
ISOLATOR LINKS AND FUSES (OPTIONAL FOR I/O TERMINAL UNITS ONLY)
Up to four isolator links or fuses are available as options for certain I/O modules.
Isolator links disconnect plant connections from the module (for testing and commissioning).
If isolator links or fuses are not fitted then a dummy fuse cover is fitted.
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.4 Fit a Module

Modules may be changed on a live system, in which case the following recommendations apply:
To avoid indeterminate readings when changing an input module, use the configuration tools to place the relevant
channel blocks in MANUAL Mode before the module is removed.
To prolong the life of the connectors, remove any external power before an output module is removed.
Note The following procedure is identical for ALL modules.
To fit a Module:
1. Pull the Module retaining lever forwards into the unlocked position ( ), as shown in Figure 2.3.4.
2. Line up the Module in the correct Terminal Unit and slide into place using the Plant/Process connection case as
guides as appropriate. The plugs on the module should align with the sockets on the Terminal Unit and module
interconnection bus. The module retaining clip should align with the corresponding hole in the Terminal Unit.
Note A polarising key is provided on the module which is designed to prevent a module from being inserted
into the incorrect Terminal unit.
3. When the module is correctly aligned, push the module retaining lever back to lock ( ) the module into place.
Wiring of the instrument can take place with only the Terminal Units fitted or after the modules have been fitted,
as preferred. Wiring is described in following chapters.
Base Unit
Use Plant and Process

Connections as guide
Figure 2.3.4 Module fitting/removal

To remove a Module:
1. Pull the Module retaining lever forwards into the unlocked position ( ), as shown below.
2. Carefully withdraw and remove the module from the Terminal Unit using the Plant and Process connection casing
as a guide as appropriate.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.5 Setting the IP Address
Note For a more comprehensive description of IP Addresses, refer to the ELIN User Guide
(Part no. HA082429) for details.
An instrument (IP host) will always need an IP Address, this can be allocated either automatically or manually. Which
method (and the allocated IP Address used) will depend on any existing (or planned) networks.
Each instrument uses a one-to-one mapping of, LIN Node Number to a single IP Address, defined in the
network.unh file.
IP ADDRESS
ELIN runs over Ethernet using IP (Internet Protocol). Instruments (IP hosts) are identified by an IP Address,
Expressed in dotted decimal notation
Example 192.168.111.222
Actually represents a 4 byte (32-bit) number
Example 0xC0 A8 6F DE
PORT NUMBER
By default, all ELIN instruments automatically use Port Number 49152.
Note For a more comprehensive description of Port Numbers, refer to the ELIN User Guide
(Part no. HA08242) for details.
ALLOCATION OF IP ADDRESS
DHCP
This is a method whereby the instrument (IP host) will ask a DHCP server to provide it with an IP Address. Typically
this happens at start-up, but can be repeated during operation. DHCP includes the concept of leases (i.e. the assigned
value will expire).
A DHCP server is required that can respond to the request. The DHCP server will need to be configured to correctly
respond to the request. This configuration will depend on the company network policy.
Link-Local
Link-Local is used as a fallback to either DHCP or BootP, or can be used on its own as the only IP Address
configuration method. Link-Local will always assign an IP Address in the range 169.254.X.Y. This IP Address range
is reserved for use by Link-Local and is explicitly defined as private and non-routable.
The Link-Local algorithm ensures that an instrument (IP host) on a network will chose a unique IP Address from the
Link-Local range.
This is supported by Windows 98 and onwards, and was originally specified as a fallback from DHCP.
Manual
The IP Address is explicitly defined in the network.unh file.
BootP
BootP or Bootstrap Protocol (Internet (TCP/IP protocol)) is used by a network computer to obtain an IP Address and
other network information such as server address and Default Gateway. Upon startup, the client station sends out a
BOOTP request to the BOOTP server, which returns the required information. A BootPtimeout period can be
configured. If this period elapses before the IP Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway address are obtained, the
values will automatically reset to 0.0.0.0.
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.3.5 Setting the IP Address (Cont.)
EDITING THE NETWORK SETTINGS

Each instrument uses a one-to-one mapping of, LIN Node Number to a single IP Address, defined in the Instrument
Properties dialog.
Note The Compact Flash card is accessed using a standard Compact Flash card reader. The network.unh
file must be edited using the Instrument Properties dialog. It can be edited using a text editor
program, e.g. notepad.exe, but this is not recommmended.
When despatched from the factory, the instrument is configured using DHCP with Link-Local Fallback, and a default
LIN Protocol Name, NET.
However, if the instrument is to have a fixed IP Address,
i.e. 192.168.111.2, and use the LIN Protocol Name,
PLANT, the Instrument Properties dialog must be used
to modify these parameters.
Note The IP Address must correspond to the

local company Network Policy.
To display the Instrument Properties dialog, select the

Properties command after selecting the Instrument
Folder in an appropriate Explorer view.
When the applicable parameters have been edited, the
operation of the OK button will display a request to
update the Instrument parameters.
Note When connected to a T820 via Serial

commnications, the Instrument Options,
COM port Protocol field MUST be set to
Panel820.
RECOVERY FROM UNKNOWN IP ADDRESS CONFIGURATION

To reset the IP Address, and Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0) of an Instrument with an unknown IP Address when a
Compact Flash card reader is not available, set the LIN Address switches as denoted below.
IOC Unit LIN Address Switches In Position For IP Address
Simplex Unit ALL (SW1:S1 to SW1:S8) OFF 192.168.111.222 Note The IP LED will remain OFF
Duplex Unit
until a valid IP address is
Simplex Mode ALL (SW1:S1 to SW1:S8) OFF 192.168.111.222
Duplex Mode ALL (SW1:S1 to SW1:S8) ON Left - 192.168.111.222
configured, even though the IP
Right - 192.168.111.223
interface is operating.
A Computer with a fixed IP Address on this Subnet can then be connected directly to the instrument and used to
inspect and edit the IP Address of the IOC module.
Note In this instance only, the Terminal Configurator must be used to edit the IP Address, see Terminal
Configurator. However, in all other circumstances the Instrument Properties dialog should be used.
To change an IP Address using the Terminal Configurator, start a Telnet session and define the connections settings,
see Terminal Configurator. Once the settings are configured, connect to the required instrument and access the Initial
menu. After selecting the Database option, choose the Utilities command and then the ELIN option. This will show
the ELIN Setup page, used to edit and inspect the LIN parameters of the connected instrument.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.4 TERMINAL UNIT SWITCHES
2.4.1 Switch Location

The Terminal Unit switches and links for setting communications addresses and for selecting options on and off are
revealed (Figure 2.4.1) when the T2550R modules or the cover plate is removed from the Terminal Unit.
2.4.2 Switch and Link functions
LIN ADDRESS SETTING SWITCH

Figure 2.4.2a below shows the LIN address setting switch, SW1, (located on the Terminal Unit as shown in
Figure 2.4.1). The figure shows a sample set up for address pair 7A/7B.
In a Simplex (T2550S) configuration, the cold start primary always adopts the left-hand position in the Base Unit
(even address).
Note A second module is not supported in a Simplex configuration.
SW1: LIN Address

On (1)
7 A/B Binary Hex
Backplane O
HS
PCB F 0 1 1 1 101X 0000 0
CS F
Bit 7 0001 1
L 128 0 0010 2
I
1 N 64 0011 3
1 A
32 0100 4
1 D 16 0101 5
Terminal D
0110 6
1 R
8
Unit E 4 0 0111 7
PCB S Bit 1 1000 8
LK2 1 S 2
1001 9
SW1 Not Used
1010 A
1011 B
1100 C
1 1101 D
1110 E
LK1 SW1: Function 1111 F
S10 Hot/Cold Start switches
S9 (See Hot/Cold Start Switches)
1 S8 Addr. bit 7 (MSB, value 128)
S7 Addr. bit 6
S6 Addr. bit 5
Internal Battery S5 Addr. bit 4
holder S4 Addr. bit 3
S3 Addr. bit 2
S2 Addr. bit 1 (value 2)
S1 Not Used
Caution
Addresses 00, FE and FF are reserved, do NOT use.
Figure 2.4.1a Location of Simplex Terminal Unit switches
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.4.2 Switch and Link functions (Cont.)

When working in a Redundant configuration, the primary (cold start primary) is initially the left-hand position (even address)
and the secondary (cold start secondary) is initially the right-hand position (odd address) in the Base Unit. Should it prove
necessary for the secondary to changeover and become the primary, it will also take over the even address.
Example of how to set LIN address 7A/7B SW1: LIN Address 7 A/B Binary Hex
On (1) 0 1 1 1 101X 0000 0
Bit 7 0001 1
Backplane MSB L 128 0 0010 2
I
PCB 1 N 64 0011 3
1 A
32 0100 4
1 D 16
0101 5
D 0110 6
1 R
8
0111 7
LSB
E 4 0 1000 8
S Bit 1
1 S 2
1001 9
Terminal Unit
DUP SIM 1010 A
PCB Duplex/Simplex 1011 B
SW2 Mode 1100 C
1101 D
SW1: Function 1110 E
8 Addr. bit 7 (MSB, value 128) 1111 F
SW1 7 Addr. bit 6
6 Addr. bit 5
5 Addr. bit 4
LK1 LK2 4 Addr. bit 3
3 Addr. bit 2
2 Addr. bit 1 (value 2)
1 On = Duplex, Off = Simplex
1 1 SW1:S1 - On = Two T2550 modules fitted, Off = Only left-hand

T2550 module fitted.
External Battery
connector Caution
Addresses 00, FE and FF are reserved, do NOT use.
Figure 2.4.1b Location of Duplex Terminal Unit switches Figure 2.4.2a LIN address setup example
Backplane
PCB
Profibus
Terminal Unit
PCB SW2
SW1
LK1 LK2
1 1
External Battery
connector
9-Way D-Type
connector
Figure 2.4.1c Location of Profibus Duplex Terminal Unit switches
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
LIN OPTIONS SWITCH

Figure 2.4.2b, below, shows the Options switch located on the Terminal Unit as shown in Figure 2.4.1, Duplex Unit -
SW2, Simplex Unit - SW1:S9 and SW1:S10.
Duplex Unit
Off (0)
HS
OFF
CS
WR
Duplex Unit Simplex Unit
SW2: Bit SW1: Bit Function
Simplex Unit
Off (0) S4 N/A
S3 S9 Hot/cold start switches
O
HS
F S2 S10 (See Hot/Cold Start Switches)
CS F
L
S1 N/A On = Restart after Watchdog, Off = Remain in Reset
I
N
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
Figure 2.4.2b Options switches setup
Watchdog Retry (Duplex Unit - SW2:S1, Simplex Unit - Not Applicable)

Setting this switch segment (SW2:S1) on (slide to the left) causes the T2550R module to try to start again after any
watchdog failure. Setting the segment off (slide to the right) disables the retry and the T2550R module will need
manual restart after a watchdog failure.
Hot/Cold Start (Duplex Unit - SW2:S2 and SW2:S3, Simplex Unit SW1:S9and SW1:S10)
Setting these switch segments in the appropriate combination will define how the T2550 IOC module attempts to start
(see below).
Duplex Unit Simplex Unit

SW2:S2 SW2:S3 SW1:S9 SW1:S10
Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 9 Bit 10 Function
Off Off Off Off Automatically generate a LIN Database.

On Off On Off Attempt to cold start, halt if unsuccessful.
Off On Off On Attempt to hot start, halt if unsuccessful.
On On On On Attempt to hot start, if unsuccessful attempt to cold start, halt if unsuccessful.
An automatically generated LIN Database is created when the instrument is powered up with both these switch
segments set OFF, see Automatic I/O Build section.
Cold start is an attempt to start the instrument using the previously loaded database, but with parameters and
values set to starting values appropriate to the process.
Hot Start is an attempt to start the instrument from where it stopped running.
Hot/Cold start is an attempt to start the instrument from where it stopped running, however if this fails the Cold
start is attempted.
Note Any unsuccessful start-up sequence will halt the T2550 instrument.
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
LINKS
Below is a representation of the Links located on the Terminal Unit as shown in Figure 2.4.1, above.
Duplex Unit LK1 LK2
Link Position Function
Ethernet Terminal Unit

LK1 and LK2 1-2 RS485 3-wire Modbus communications.
1 1
LK1 and LK2 2-3 RS485 5-wire Modbus communications.
Simplex Unit LK2 Note Modbus communications via the Ethernet can be configured
using the Instrument Properties dialog, see Instrument Properties
help (Part no. HA029278).
1 Profibus Terminal Unit
LK1 and LK2 1-2 Profibus Network Terminated.
LK1
LK1 and LK2 2-3 Profibus Network Unterminated.
Note The Links are used to terminate the Profibus network and must be
1 fitted to the devices on either end only.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5 CONNECTIONS AND WIRING

T2550 Instruments may be supplied mounted in an enclosure, together with the appropriate termination assemblies,
either fitted in the enclosure or supplied in kit form. Please refer to the documentation that was supplied with the
enclosure for details of the connections and wiring.
If you are assembling the system yourself, refer to the I/O Modules Appendix, or the Installation and Wiring Sheet
(Part no. HA028901) supplied with the instrument, the LIN/ALIN/ELIN Installation & User Guide
(Part no. HA082429U005), the ELIN User Guide (Part no. HA082429) and the Communications Manual
(Part no. HA028014) for advice on connections and wiring to the I/O modules.
Figure 2.5a and Figure 2.5b below show simplified overall connection diagram for a Simplex or Duplex control system
using an Ethernet hub/switch. Category 5 cables may be used for individual line lengths of up to 100 metres. For line
lengths greater than this one or more pairs of hubs with fibre-optic connections is recommended.
Note Profibus Communications is supported using the dedicated Profibus Terminal Unit and IOC module.
T2550
PC -
Simplex connection Ethernet Hub or
(operating Configuration Tools) Switch
HMI
Profibus Master To/From Process
(Third-Party product) T2550 - Profibus Slave
Profibus
To/From Process
Figure 2.5a Typical overall Simplex connection diagram

PC - PC -
Duplex connection Duplex connection
(operating Configuration Tools) (operating Configuration Tools)
HMI
Network Switch
(Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol
(RSTP))
Network Switch
(Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol T2550
(RSTP))
Eycon-10/Eycon-20
To/From Process
T2500 I/O Subsystems -
HMI Duplex connections
Modbus
Profibus Master To/From Process
(Third-Party product) T2550 - Profibus Slave
Profibus
To/From Process
Figure 2.5b Typical overall Duplex connection diagram
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5.1 Communications
The RJ45 connector on the T2550 IOC Module is designed for Ethernet LIN network (ELIN), whereas the RJ45
connector on the Terminal Unit supports Serial communications. The dedicated Profibus Terminal Unit provides a
9-Way D-Type connector to support Profibus communications.
The Ethernet RJ45 connectors on the T2550 IOC Module support Modbus-TCP Communications with optional master
and slave, simultaneously with the ELIN Communications.
The Profibus 9-Way D-Type connector on the T2550 IOC Module support Profibus Communications as a Profibus
Slave only, simultaneously with the ELIN Communications.
DUPLEX ETHERNET UNIT DUPLEX PROFIBUS UNIT
ELIN (10/100Mbps
Ethernet) and
Modbus-TCP
Communications
(RJ45 connectors)
Serial Communications
(RJ45 connectors) on
the Terminal Unit
Profibus
Communications
Figure 2.5.1a Communication ports

ELIN CONNECTORS
Each T2550 IOC Module contains a 10/100base T port for Ethernet communications via a standard RJ45 type
connector.
Connection with an Ethernet hub/switch is made using a Category 5 RJ45-to-RJ45 cable assembly. When connecting
to the Ethernet hub/switch, a straight-through cable is used. When connecting directly to another device supporting
10/100base T Ethernet, a cross-over cable is required. Figure 2.5.1b shows the RJ45 pinout connections.
ETHERNET AND MODBUS-TCP COMMUNICATIONS

Figure 2.5.1b and Figure 2.5.1c show the connector pinouts for the Ethernet communications.
ELIN
Pin Signal
Pin 8 8 Not Used
7 Not Used
6 RX-
5 Not Used
Pin 1 4 Not Used
3 RX+
2 TX-
1 TX+
Plug shroud to Cable screen
RJ45 plug: View on underside
Note Modbus-TCP Communications will be supported using these pinouts.
Figure 2.5.1b Ethernet Pinouts for RJ45 type plugs
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5.1 Communications (Cont.)
ETHERNET HUBS/SWITCH
The use of standard industrial off-the-shelf Ethernet switch is recommended, using Straight-through cables
(Figure 2.5.1c). For further details, the LIN/ALIN Installation and User Guide (Part no. HA082429U005) should be
referred to.
SHROUD/SCREEN
White/Orange
Tx+ 1 1
Tx- 2 2
Orange
Rx+ 3 White/Green 3
Blue
4 4
White/Blue
5 5
Rx- 6 6
Green
White/Brown
7 7
8 8
Brown
(8-Way RJ45) (8-Way RJ45)

SCREEN
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown
8 1 View on rear of connectors 8 1
a) Straight-through Cable
SHROUD/SCREEN
White/Orange
Tx+ 1 1
Tx- 2 2
Orange
Rx+ 3 White/Green 3
Blue
4 4
White/Blue
5 5
Rx- 6 6
Green
White/Brown
7 7
8 8
Brown
(8-Way RJ45) (8-Way RJ45)

White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Blue
White/Blue
Green
White/Brown
Brown
View on rear of connectors

8 1 8 1
b) Cross-over Cable
Figure 2.5.1c ELIN connection details

CABLING
Shielded RJ45 connectors and screened Category 5 cables are widely available, however, specifications vary and not
all components may be suitable for reliable operation. In view of the problems that can arise with inadequate cabling,
it is strongly recommended that ready-made interconnecting cables are ordered from the manufacturer.
Note The Profibus Terminal Units supports Line A and Line B Profibus cable types, see Communications
Manual (Part no. HA028014).
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5.1 Communications (Cont.)
SERIAL CONNECTORS
Each Terminal Unit contains RS485 RJ45 connector(s) for Serial communications.
A single connector on the Simplex Terminal Unit.
Two connectors on the Duplex Terminal Unit.
The Serial connection may be used to connect to an operator interface unit, create a Modbus network or communicate
with a variety of third-party serial devices. Figure 2.5.1d shows the RS485 RJ45 pinout connections.
Figure 2.5.1d shows the connector pinouts for Serial communications. These must be configured in conjunction with
the Links (LK1 and LK2).
EIA 485 Serial

Pin 3-wire Signal 5-wire Signal
8 N/A RxA
Pin 8 7 N/A RxB
6 Cmn Cmn
5 N/A N/A
4 N/A N/A
Pin 1 3 Cmn Cmn
2 A TxA
1 B TxB
RS485 RJ45 plug: View on underside
Figure 2.5.1d Modbus Pinouts for T2550 module RS485 RJ45 type plugs
PROFIBUS CONNECTORS
The Profibus Terminal Unit is dedicated to Profibus communications via the single 9-Way D-Type connector. The
Links are used to terminate the Profibus Network and MUST be fitted to the devices on either end only. All other
switches, connectors and links are identical to the Duplex Terminal Unit, including the power supply connections that
are fitted to the lower left of the Profibus Terminal Unit.
Figure 2.5.1e shows the connector pinouts for Profibus communications.
9-Way D-Type
Pin Signal Description
9 Not Used N/A

Pin 5 8 A Receive/Transmit A
Pin 9
7 Not Used N/A
6 VP 5V
5 Cmn Signal Common
4 Not Used N/A
Pin 6 3 B Receive/Transmit B
Pin 1 2 Not Used N/A
1 Shield Shield (ground)
Female 9-Way D-Type: View on Profibus Terminal Unit
Figure 2.5.1e Profibus Pinouts for T2550 module 9-Way D-Type connectors
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5.2 Configuration Tools
CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL STRATEGIES AND SEQUENCES

Each T2550 IOC Module contains an RS485 RJ45 Ethernet socket allowing on-line monitoring and configuration
editing using LINtools (the recommended configuration tool), or the simpler inbuilt Configurator via the Ethernet
network. To automatically generate a LIN Database from existing hardware use the Automatic I/O Build capability.
LINtools and the Terminal Configurator
The Strategy and the sequences to be run in the T2550 instrument may be configured and downloaded using the external
PC-based graphical software package, LINtools, which is fully described in the LINtools Help (Part no. RM263001U055) or
with the simpler inbuilt Configurator and a dumb terminal, Terminal Configurator. In both scenarios the LIN Block
Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003) should be consulted for details of the function blocks.
Note It is possible to configure a whole system using the Terminal Configurator, but is not recommended
because of the complexity of most systems.
LINtools RESTRICTIONS
The use of LINtools is restricted only by the requirement of a Project folder containing appropriate Network and
Instrument folders. The creation of these folders assist LINtools with the management of the control strategy, that
ensures the Workspace is easy to use.
A New Project folder is created via the Start > Program > ... > New Project, and thereafter using the context-
sensitive menus to create the required Network and Instrument folders. For more information see Configuration
section.
Note ... indicates the file path of the installed software.
Terminal Configurator RESTRICTIONS

The use of the Configurator is restricted according to the operating mode of the T2550 IOC Module in the following
ways:
It can only be used on the current primary module.
The LIN Database must not be running if you want the full capability to create function blocks, LIN Databases,
edit function block field values, and modify pool data (e.g. engineering units). If it is running, the Configurator
can write only to the normally runtime-writeable fields, e.g. block names cannot be edited, but new function blocks
may be added and new wires can be made on-line. However this is only allowed if the secondary is
unsynchronised. When editing the LIN Database is complete it must be saved, and then the T2550 IOC Module
re-synchronised.
Note These restrictions prevent files or edits occurring in the primary LIN Database that cannot be tracked
by the secondary LIN Database.
Automatic I/O Build (See Automatic I/O Build section)

With the correct Options Switch configuration, see Hot/Cold Start Switches, a simple LIN Database including
appropriate I/O channel blocks is created in memory. Before editing the LIN Database can commence it must be
stopped if currently running, and saved, requiring it to be named. If wishing to edit the LIN Database using LINtools
it can be uploaded in to the LINtools software as a Function Block List.
Note Use the LINtools software package to open the *.dbf. Additional commands can be used to generate
the finished Function Block Diagram.
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5.3 Power
DC SUPPLY WIRING
Each T2550 IOC Module supports 24V supply. The Simplex Unit has only one 24V supply connection at the bottom
of the Terminal Unit to permit 24V power supply, whereas the Duplex Unit has two, this permits 24V power supply
redundancy. The T2550 instrument will operate on any dc voltage between 18V and 30V at a maximum power
requirement of 50W per T2550 IOC Module.
Note The Duplex T2550R also has an additional connector to allow an external battery of between 2.5V and
3.5V to be connected to maintain the Real-Time Clock (RTC). Typical drain currents are <0.1 mA.
A Lithium Maganese Dioxide battery is supplied on the Simplex Terminal Unit. When fully charged this will maintain
the Real-Time Clock (RTC) data for a minimum of 72 hours. If the T2550 IOC Module is removed from the Terminal
Unit the Real-Time Clock data is retained for a maximum of one hour via an internal super capacitor.
Figure 2.5.3 shows the locations of the connectors and gives recommended conductor sizes based on current carrying
capability and connector capacity.
Caution
1 Neither the positive nor the negative supply line may exceed 40V peak, with respect to Safety Earth potential.
2 Should the supply voltage fall below 18 Volts during startup (caused, for example by current limiting on the Power
supply unit), the instrument will fail to start successfully. It will then attempt to restart, and enter a repeating
cycle.
FUSES
All positive supply lines must incorporate a fuse. Suitable types are 4A Type T for 24 Volt supplies and 0.5A Type T
for each external battery fitted.
Recommended wire sizes

DC supply (single wire): 0.2mm2 to 2.5mm2 (20 awg to 14 awg)
Relays/battery (single wire): 0.14mm2 to 1.5mm2 (25 awg to 16 awg)
Fuse types (fuses to be fitted in positive supply line)

24V dc supply = 4A Type T.
+-
External Battery
supply
P+ P+ P- P- P+ P+ P- P-
Positive Negative Redundant P+ P- 24V dc supply

24V dc supply 24V dc supply Redundant
P+ P-
24V dc supply
Figure 2.5.3 DC and relay connection details
2.5.4 Safety Earth

As shown in Figure 2.3.1a, an M4 earth stud connection is provided on the Base Unit. This stud
should be bonded to a good local earth using multistrand tri-rated 1.5mm2 (21A) green/yellow earth
cable, with ring terminals for security.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.5.5 Watchdog Relay Relay

(Power off state)
A Watchdog Relay is associated with each T2550R Module. The common Com
and normally open terminals of each relay must be wired correctly, see NO
figure 2.5.4b and figure 2.5.4c.
Note This is not supported in the Simplex Unit. wdog
The contact ratings (resistive loads) for the relays are 30V ac/60V dc at 0.5A.
Coil energised under
The operation of Watchdog Relay is under hardware control, making a hardware control
number of health checks, before operating the relay. If during operation one
Figure 2.5.4a Relay Wiring
of the health check fails, the Watchdog Relay goes into its alarm (power-off)
state, see User Interface section.
The Watchdog Relay can be wired in series or in parallel. When in parallel, both T2550R modules have to fail,
before the alarm becomes valid. When in series, the alarm becomes valid if either module fails. Figure 2.5.4b shows
the relays wired in series to a 24V dc healthy lamp. Figure 2.5.4c shows a parallel configuration, using an auxiliary
relay to display both healthy and warning states.
Note The common and normally open contacts are open-circuit during power-off, and remain so for some
seconds at power-up, until hardware control has become established. After that, the contacts are
short-circuit when the relay coil is energised, and open-circuit when the coil is not energised.
Primary Secondary
Module Module
0V
+24V
Healthy Lamp
(12 watts max)
Figure 2.5.4b Watchdog Relay - Series Wiring
Primary Secondary
Module Module
Neutral
Fail
Healthy
0V 1 2
Com
+24V dc
+240V ac LINE
Figure 2.5.4c Watchdog Relay - Parallel Wiring
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
2.6 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

As Modbus is not the main method of communication, the instrument requires specific configuration in order to
communicate with other devices using the Modbus network, see Communications Manual (Part no. HA028014).
A Modbus network requires the selected Base Unit to be configured as either Modbus Master or Modbus Slave. If
configured as a Modbus Slave, it will appear at a configured slave address, i.e. fields of function blocks in the
Tactician LIN Database are available as registers in the Modbus address map, for read and write by a Modbus Master
device. If configured as a Modbus Master, it will collect data from Modbus Slave devices into fields of Tactician
function blocks.
Modbus data is configured using the Modbus Tools, see Modbus Tools Help (Part no. HA028988).
Note If communicating with a T820 via Modbus network , the Instrument Options, COM port Protocol field
MUST be set to Panel820.
2.7 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS

As Profibus is not the main method of communication, the instrument requires specific configuration in order to
communicate with other devices using the Profibus network, see Configuration.
Note If communicating via a Profibus network, specific Modbus registers must be configured using the
Modbus Tools, see Configuration.
HA028898 Chapter 2
T2550 HANDBOOK
Intentionally left blank
Chapter 2 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 3 USER INTERFACE

This chapter presents standard and Profibus IOC Module User Interface information and explains the front panel
LEDs and switches.
Introduction (section 3.1)
Status LEDs and Switches (section 3.2)
Changeover And Communications LEDs, and Switches (section 3.3)
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the functions of the instruments LEDs, switches and network ports.
As shown in Figure 3.1, the items are arranged in groups on the instruments front panel, and each group is described
in turn below. Table 3.1 is a concise list of the LEDs and their functions.
Status
Fault
Battery
indicators
Duplex
Watchdog switch
Primary
Standby
Sync switch
Status and
Switching Desync switch
Ethernet (Speed)
Ethernet Ethernet Communications Port
Communications
Ethernet (Activity)
Note The Simplex Unit does not support the external power supply, but does support battery backup via an
Figure 3.1 Front panel layout (Redundant Configuration)
HA028898 Chapter 3
T2550 HANDBOOK
3.1 INTRODUCTION (Cont.)
LED Colour Function
Status Green ........................ Main Power input valid

Off ............................. Main Power input failed
Fault Red ............................ Module missing/faulty, incorrect type/base, any H/W fault,
Watchdog Failure if ALL other LEDs are extinguished, including Status LED
Flashing .................... Database file unsaved, missing, or faulty. A *.dbf and corresponding *.run
file do not exist on the T2550
Off ............................. No H/W faults detected
Battery Green ........................ Battery OK

Flashing .................... Battery failed or not fitted
Off ............................. Battery deliberately not fitted
Communications Yellow ........................ T2550R module transmitting field communications
Off ............................. T2550R module not transmitting field communications
IP Resolution Yellow ........................ IP address resolved successfully
Flashing .................... IP address being resolved or the cable is broken/disconnected
Off ............................. IP address cannot be resolved, invalid IP address or DHCP failure
Duplex Green ........................ Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are coupled
Flashing .................... Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are decoupled
Off ............................. Not operating in Redundant mode
Primary Green ........................ This is the Primary T2550R module and a running strategy
Flashing .................... The Primary T2550R module is loading a strategy or idle
Off ............................. Not Primary T2550R module
Standby Yellow ........................ This is the Secondary T2550R module and is synchronised
Flashing .................... The T2550R modules are synchronising
Off ............................. Not the active Secondary T2550R module
Ethernet (Speed) Green ........................ 100 MB Ethernet (speed) configuration
Off ............................. 10 MB Ethernet (speed) configuration
Ethernet (Activity) Yellow ........................ Connected to live Ethernet network
Sporadic Flashing ..... Ethernet network traffic detected
Off ............................. Ethernet connection invalid
Notes
1 All LEDs flash at a rate of 600ms ON, 600ms OFF.
2 If ALL LEDs are extinguished, excluding the Fault LED, the instrument has Watchdogged. If the Options
Switch SW2:S1 is set OFF, press the Watchdog switch to reset the instrument. This has no effect when a
T2550R is not in a watchdog condition.
Table 3.1 LED functions
Chapter 3 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
3.2 STATUS LEDS AND SWITCHES

This group of six LEDs, located at the top of the front panel, shows the overall status of the IOC Module.
Status
Fault
Battery
Communications
IP Resolution
Duplex
Watchdog switch
Figure 3.2 Status LEDs
3.2.1 (Status) LED

This LED is illuminated green continuously if this IOC Module hardware is good and operating correctly.
The LED is off, if the IOC Module or the 24V power has failed.
3.2.2 X (Fault) LED

This LED is illuminated red continuously if any hardware fault exists with the IOC Module. It will also illuminate if
any I/O module is faulty.
The LED will flash on (600ms) and off (600ms) if the database file is unsaved, missing or faulty. A *.dbf and the
corresponding *.run file must exist on the T2550. This condition (flashing Fault LED) is overridden by the
existence of an I/O fault (steady Fault LED).
The LED is off, if the IOC Module is operating correctly, after the database is
saved, via the Options.SaveDbf field in the header block
Note This is used to save the LIN Database whilst running.
stopped and saved via the appropriate menu command in the Terminal Configurator
stopped and another is loaded from those present on the filing system
3.2.3 (Battery) LED

This maintains a (72 hours minimum) backup of the data in the SRAM and Real-Time Clock (RTC). Once the start-up
sequence is complete, this LED illuminates continuously green if the battery is healthy.
3.2.4 (Communications) LED

This LED indicates the status of the field communications systems associated with this instrument. This LED is
illuminated yellow if field communications are being transmitted.
The LED is off, if this the IOC Moduleis not transmitting field communications.
HA028898 Chapter 3
T2550 HANDBOOK
3.2.5 IP (IP Resolution) LED

This LED is illuminated yellow continuously if this IOC Module successfully establishes an IP address.
The LED will flash on (600ms) and off (600ms) whilst an IP address is being resolved or if the cable is broken or
disconnected.
The LED is off, if this IOC Module IP address cannot be resolved or a DHCP failure is detected. It will also remain
extinguished after creating a default IP address (set when powering up the instrument with all LIN Address Switches in
the on or off position), even though the IP interface is operating.
3.2.6 Duplex LED (Redundant systems only)

This LED is illuminated green, if the Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are coupled, and successful data
transfers are taking place between the two T2550R module.
This LED flashes on (600ms) and off (600ms) if the Primary and Secondary T2550R modules have failed or are
decoupled.
The LED is off if the system is not running in redundant mode, either the the IOC Module is running without a second
the IOC Module or is configured by the LIN Address Switch (SW1:S1, Off) for Simplex operation.
3.2.7 Watchdog Switch

Operation of the Watchdog switch on a T2550 IOC Module that is in a Watchdog failure condition causes it to reset
and attempt to re-boot if the Option switch (SW2:S1) is set OFF. If the Option switch (SW2:S1) is set ON, the T2550
IOC Module will automatically attempt to restart and any LED indication will be displayed momentarily.
Operation of this switch has no effect if the T2550R module has NOT watchdogged.
Note A watchdogged CPU is indicated by the loss of all LEDs, excluding the Fault LED.
Chapter 3 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
3.3 CHANGEOVER AND COMMUNICATIONS LEDS, AND SWITCHES

The Sync and Desync switches are set behind the panel, and should be operated, when necessary, by a blunt,
plastic tool such as the recessed end of a trim-pot adjuster.
Primary
Standby
Sync switch
Desync switch
Ethernet (Speed)
Ethernet (Activity)
Figure 3.3 Changeover LEDs and switches
This group of components is located in the lower half of the instrument front panel, and is used to monitor and control
the redundant / non-redundant mode selection. The group consists of four LEDs, Primary and Standby, Ethernet
(Speed) and Ethernet (Activity), and two switches Sync and Desync. The Module Synchronisation section,
below, gives a brief description of synchronisation.
3.3.1 Primary LED

This LED is illuminated green continuously if this IOC Module is currently the primary module and running a strategy.
During start up and also while idle, this LED flashes on (600ms) and off (600ms), until a database has been loaded and
is running successfully.
The LED is off, if this IOC Module is not the primary.
3.3.2 Standby LED

This LED is illuminated yellow continuously if this IOC Module is currently the secondary module of a synchronised
redundant system, and is thus able to changeover to the primary if required.
If this T2550 is the secondary, the LED will flash whilst the T2550R Modules are synchronising.
The LED is off, if this IOC Module is not the active secondary.
3.3.3 Sync switch

If the Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are unsynchronised, operation of the Primary T2550R modules Sync
switch starts synchronising the T2550R modules.
If the Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are synchronised, operation of the Primary T2550R modules Sync
switch has no effect.
If the Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are unsynchronised, operation of the Secondary T2550R modules
Sync switch has no affect.
If the Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are synchronised, operation of the Secondary T2550R modules Sync
switch causes Primary/Secondary T2550R module changeover.
HA028898 Chapter 3
T2550 HANDBOOK
3.3.3 Sync switch (Cont.)
MODULE SYNCHRONISATION
Applicable only to redundant systems, synchronisation means the bulk transfer of all relevant data from that T2550R
module which is designated the primary to that which is designated the secondary, followed by continuous
maintenance of this copied data. This allows the primary and secondary T2550R modules to changeover should the
primary module fail.
This synchronisation process takes place automatically, if both T2550R modules are powered-up together, and have
previously been run as a redundant synchronous pair. Should either of the above conditions not be met, then, at power-
up the primary and secondary T2550R modules adopt unsynchronised states. In such a case, the secondary module
cannot changeover to the primary in the event of failure.
To synchronise the T2550R modules, the primary T2550R modules Sync switch must be operated.
Once synchronisation has been achieved, the T2550R modules are said to be in primary synchronised state and
secondary synchronised state. The secondary is now able to changeover to the primary if required.
TIME TO SYNCHRONISE
The time taken to complete the synchronisation process varies according to the complexity of the control strategy and
on how heavily the Flash file system is used. Typically, the Load and Run part of the procedure takes a number of
seconds, however if the primary and secondary file systems are identical, synchronisation is almost instantaneous.
During this period, the primary runs the control process as normal.
Note The redundant instruments may desynchronise or the secondary T2550R module may fail to load a
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) if loading and unloading Sequences is not kept to a minimum during
the synchronising process.
3.3.4 Desync switch

Operation of the primary T2550R modules Desync switch causes synchronised T2550R modules to desynchronise,
while the Primary T2550R module remains in control.
Operation of the secondary T2550R modules Desync switch for longer than 3 seconds causes the secondary T2550R
module to shutdown. When successfully shutdown, indicated when all LEDs are extinguished, the T2550R can be
safely removed from the Terminal Unit.
3.3.5 Ethernet (Speed) LED

This LED is illuminated green continuously if this IOC Module is currently operating on a 100 MB Ethernet network.
The LED is off, if operating on a 10 MB Ethernet network.
3.3.6 Ethernet (Activity) LED

This LED is illuminated yellow continuously if this IOC Module is currently connected to hub, switch or other device
connected with cross-over cable.
If general Ethernet communications traffic is detected, the LED will flash irregularly as traffic is received.
The LED is off, if no valid Ethernet connection is detected.
3.3.7 Ethernet Communications Port

This RJ45 communincations port establishes communications for either 10 MB or 100 MB Ethernet network.
Chapter 3 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 4 START-UP
This chapter describes the start-up sequence for the T2550 IOC Modules. Topics covered include the differences
between redundant and non-redundant systems and start-mode (hot/cold etc.).
Redundancy Modes (section 4.1)
Start-Up Modes (section 4.2)
Starting A Single (Simplex) T2550S module (section 4.3)
Starting A Pair Of (Duplex) T2550R modules (section 4.4)
Note The Profibus communications supports Cold Start only.
4.1 REDUNDANCY MODES

Redundant (Duplex) mode is where two T2550R modules (Primary and Secondary) are fitted and required to act in
such a way that one can take over from the other in case of failure. In such a case, one T2550R module (normally the
left-hand one) is called the primary and the other the secondary. The secondary continuously tracks the primary so
that it can take over with minimum disturbance to the controlled system. It also monitors communications to other
nodes and the I/O modules.
Non-redundant (Simplex) mode is where there is only one T2550S module.
Note A second T2550S module is not supported in Simplex mode.
Redundant/Non-redundant mode is selected using the LIN Address Setting switch (SW1:S1) on the Duplex Terminal
Unit, as shown in the Terminal Unit Switches section.
4.2 START-UP MODES

The required start-up mode is selected using the Options switch (SW2), see Terminal Unit Switches section. This
allows Hot, Hot/Cold, or Cold to be selected. (Each start mode has a two switch configuration) Figure 4.2.1a,
below, shows a simplified flow diagram for the different modes.
Note The combination of SW2:S2 and SW2:S3 switches on the Duplex Terminal Unit and SW1:S9 and
SW1:S10 on the Simplex Terminal Unit, also allows the automatic generation of a basic strategy, that
will require further configuration.
4.2.1 Hot start (LIN Terminal Unit Only)

Hot start means that the T2550 instrument restarts from where it stopped running. A suitable time period (Cold Start
Time) is configured in the Header block of the control database, and if this period is exceeded after the database
stops running, then a hot start is not permissible. The Cold Start Time for any process can be defined as: A pre-set
duration, following power off or power failure (database stopped), after which a Hot Start is not possible, and a Cold
Start must be initiated instead.
A brownout time can be set in the Header block, and if power to the T2550 instrument is lost for this duration or
longer, the brownout alarm will be set (also in the Header block). This brownout time can be defined as a signal that
a power variation or partial power failure longer than the defined Brown out Time has occurred. Any power variation
or partial power failure shorter than the defined Brown out Time will continue without indication.
For this instrument, if the Hot start fails (because the database is corrupted or because the Cold Start Time has been
exceeded) the database will be cleared and the instrument will enter an Idle state and remain there until physically
restarted, see Hot/Cold start.
HA028898 Chapter 4
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.2.2 Cold start

Cold start means that the instrument re-starts with the previous database loaded, but with all parameters and values set
to starting values appropriate to the process (that is, re-initialised). If the cold start fails the database will be cleared
and the instrument enters an Idle state and remains there until physically restarted.
COLD START PARAMETER FILE

In the event of a cold start, the (* Production plant Cold Start Initialisation --- .CPF file *)
(* Ensure no automatic control until started *)
instrument searches for a file with the PIC-023.Mode := Manual;
same name as the .dbf file just loaded, XCV-124.Mode := Manual;
but with the extension .cpf. If such a
(* Ensure vent valves open *)
file is found it is executed. This file is a XCV-124.Demand := False; (* Open *)
parameter overlay file storing values XCV-123.Demand := False; (* Open *)
that are initialised when a cold start (* Reset profile to default *)

occurs. It is created using any text Profile.A0 := 23.4; (* Start temp Deg C *)
Profile.A1 := 34.5; (* First target temp Deg C *)
editor, and uses Structured Text (ST) Profile.A2 := 2.0; (* Ramp rate Deg C / min *)
style comment lines, e.g. (* Comment
(* Initialise totalisation block*)
*) and assignment statements (one >COUNT-01.NTotal := 10;
complete statement per line of text) that >COUNT-01.NTotFrac := 0.5;
allocate the current cold start parameter values to database block fields
define the Reset Data Set
Note LINtools can interrogate this file to determine the cold start parameters. An alarm will be asserted in
the instrument header block if any problem were encountered when executing the .cpf file.
The only syntax that is supported by the .cpf file is,

Block.Field[.Subfield]:=Value;
These are the defined default values used each time the instrument cold starts. The instrument uses the specified
value and overlays it on the defined (sub)field regardless of what the (sub)field value is in the database, e.g.
forcing a PID to start in manual mode.
>Block.Field[.Subfield]:=Value;
This is used in the same manner as above but overlays a value on a (sub)field which is normally read-only, e.g.
setting a totalisation to a specific value. The defined value is only used during the first scan of the database, after
which the (sub)field is updated at each block execution.
Block.Field[.Subfield];
This syntax adds the (sub)field to the Reset Data Set for this instrument. It is only used during runtime and
prevents the defined (sub)field being saved when Options.SaveDBF in the header block is set TRUE. When the
instrument next cold starts, the value of the defined (sub)field will be read from the database in EEPROM.
-Block.Field[.Subfield];
This syntax removes the (sub)field from the Reset Data Set for this instrument. It is only used during runtime to
allow the value from the defined sub(field) to be saved from RAM to EEPROM when Options.SaveDBF in the
header block is set TRUE.
Example
If the syntax reads -PIC-023.SL; the online value will be saved from RAM to EEPROM if Options.SaveDBF in
the header block is set TRUE during runtime.
Chapter 4 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.2 START-UP MODES (Cont.)

Reset Data Set
The Reset Data Set is a list of defined parameters that remain unaltered in the database when Options.SaveDBF in
the header block is set TRUE during runtime. Any parameter in the Reset Data Set can be omitted by preceding the
parameter with -, negative symbol. The Reset Data Set supports a maximum 2560 parameters but 3 parameters are
retained for Date, Time and Checksum, and used to validate the data. The local setpoint (SL), Mode (MODE) and
output (OP) from all PID, PID_LINK or PID_CONN blocks in the database are allocated by default, but additional
parameters can also be added to the .cpf file. This also applies to LOOP_PID block but additional default parameters
are included, i.e. AutoMan, SP1, SP2, AltSPEn, ManOP and ReStrtOP.
Note ReStrtOP is a hidden non-volatile parameter from which the volatile output parameters are derived
on power up. It is normally set to 0 (zero) is generally saved to the database as 0 (zero).
4.2.3 Hot/cold start

This setting causes the instrument to attempt a hot start. If the hot start fails, however, instead of going straight into
idle state as with hot start, the instrument attempts to carry out a cold start. If the cold start fails the database will be
cleared and the T2550 IOC Modules enter an Idle state and remain there until physically restarted.
4.2.4 Start-up routine

Power Up This flowchart graphically describes the start-up routine.
Switch set to Y
Auto Generate Database created
database?
N
Was this
unit secondary Y Unsynchronised
unsynch? Secondary
N
Valid N No database running
Shutdown last
last time
Time?
Switch N
set to hot or Hot start disabled
hot/cold?
Extract last known

status from memory
Does last N Database filing

loaded database match
mismatch
flash .RUN file?
Run Hot start routine Switch N

(fig 4.2.1b) set to cold or Cold start disabled
hot/cold?
Was Y
Hot start N
Get .DBF file
successful? that matches .RUN
file in Flash
Y
Apply values saved in
the Cold-start
Parameter file (.cpf)
Was
Cold start N Create empty
successful? database
Run database Run database Idle Run database

(Hot Start) (Cold Start) (Auto)
Figure 4.2.1a Simplified start-up flow diagram
HA028898 Chapter 4
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.2 START-UP MODES (Cont.)
Hot start called Entry from Hot or Hot/Cold start routine, see Figure 4.2.1a
Get .DBF file

that matches .RUN
file in Flash
Attempt N
successful?
N
RAM OK?
Is the root N
block valid?
Is the Real-Time N
Clock valid?
Is the root block N

clock healthy?
Extract last known

status from memory
Cold start Y
time exceeded?
Brownout Y
time exceeded?
N Set Brownout
alarm in root block
Return success Return fail
Figure 4.2.1b Hot or Hot/Cold start flowchart
Chapter 4 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.3 STARTING A SINGLE (SIMPLEX) T2550S MODULE

The Start-up routine is subject to the successful completion of the Power On Self Tests (POSTs). For further
information concerning the Power On Self Tests (POSTs), see Power On Self Tests (POSTs) and POSTs and Error
Number sections.
OFF STATE
In the Off state, all LEDs are extinguished.
STARTING STATE
When power is applied, the relevant Status LED illuminates green immediately.
The Primary and Standby LEDs flash intermittently until the T2550S Module is initialised, at which point the
Primary LED illuminates, see Error Conditions and Diagnostics section.
The start-up procedure concludes with the T2550S Module attempting to establish Ethernet (ELIN) communications.
During this period, the Primary LED flashes on (600ms) and off (600ms).
OPERATING STATE
When the start-up sequence is complete, then as a minimum, the Status LED is illuminated continuously green.
The Primary LED will be illuminated green continuously if a database is running, or it will flash if a database is
loading or the T2550S Module is idle.
The Communications LED will also be illuminated yellow if the associated communications links are operating
correctly. It will flash intermittently when receiving valid messages.
In addition, if any other communications are in progress, the appropriate Ethernet LEDs will be illuminated, either
continuously or intermittently, see User Interface section for more details of the Communications LEDs.
If the Simplex T2550S module is installed and back-up batteries are fitted, the Battery LED is illuminated green as
appropriate.
WATCHDOG RELAY
The Watchdog Relay is in its alarm state until the software has initialised correctly.
HA028898 Chapter 4
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.4 STARTING A PAIR OF (DUPLEX) T2550R MODULES

This start-up routine is similar to that described for a single T2550R module, see Starting a Single (Simplex) T2550S
Module section, except in the control and action of the Standby and Duplex LEDs. This is due to the modules
assessing the Primary/Secondary criteria.
POWERING UP DECISIONS
Figure 4.4.1 shows the states possible with a pair of T2550R modules in Redundant mode.
Off
Starting
Power down N
status availalble ?
N - Secondary
Primary ?
Auto N Auto N
Synchronise ? Synchronise ?
Y Y
Primary Synching Secondary Synching
Primary Synch Primary Unsynch Secondary Synch Secondary Unsynch Idle
LEDs: Status, Primary. LEDs: Status, Primary. LEDs: Status, Standby. LEDs: Status, Standby. LEDs: Status.
Figure 4.4.1 Power-up redundancy states for a pair of T2550R modules in Redundant mode
PRIMARY/SECONDARY CRITERIA
With T2550R modules in Redundant mode, it is necessary that one be defined as the primary; the other as the
secondary. As described in the Redundancy Modes section, the primary initially assumes control and the secondary
tracks the primary such that it can assume control should the primary T2550R module fail. Which T2550R module
powers-up as the primary is determined as follows:
Decisions are made on the basis of information held in battery-backed memory. This information contains data
relating to whether this T2550R module was primary or secondary prior to the last power off. If both T2550R
modules power-up as they last powered down, then the T2550R modules will attempt to power up with the same
primary and secondary assignments. If the power down information in the two modules is conflicting, or not
available, because the battery is not connected, both processor modules will enter an idle state (decoupled), and
will not load or run a LIN Database. The power down state is initialised so that the modules will start with default
primary and secondary assignment at the next power cycle.
Chapter 4 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.4.1 Redundant mode (Cont.)
REDUNDANCY DECISIONS
Normal Duplex (redundant) operation will take place only if the primary T2550R module believes that itself and the
secondary T2550R module have an equal view of the ELIN network, while accessing the health of the I/O.
When acting as a redundant pair, the primary and secondary T2550R modules independently derive a communications
status, indicated by the IP Resolution LED. If the LED is steady, the IP address is healthy. Should this LED flash, an
IP address fault has been detected, and, if the LED is extinguished, the IP address cannot be resolved or DHCP failure
has occurred.
The decision to remain synchronised, desynchronise or changeover, is always made by the current primary T2550R
module, and then only whilst the two units are synchronised, i.e. an attempt to synchronise will be allowed to
complete, and only after completion will the decision be made. It is dependant on which T2550R module has the best
view of the network. For example, if it is regarded by the primary T2550R module that;
both modules hold the same outlook of the network, the primary and secondary modules remain synchronised.
the primary T2550R module holds a better outlook of the network, the primary and secondary modules
desynchronise and a changeover will NOT occur.
the secondary T2550R module holds a better outlook of the network, the primary and secondary modules
desynchronise and a changeover occurs.
However, if the communications status is unstable, the decision is deferred. This prevents spurious desynchronise or
changeover decisions being made as faults are introduced to or removed from the network.
AUTOSYNCHRONISATION
Once the primary/secondary status of the T2550R modules has been determined, the system must decide whether
synchronisation of the primary and secondary should be automatic or whether it should proceed only after a request
from the operator (Sync switch). This decision is made as follows:
If the T2550R modules are powered-up within a short time of each other, AND they were running as a synchronised
pair prior to power-down (data held in memory), then synchronisation will take place without operator intervention.
If either of the above conditions is not met (or if the data held in memory is not available) then both units will enter
unsynchronised states in which case the secondary cannot take over from the primary. This state will continue until the
Sync switch on the primary T2550R module is operated.
SYNCHRONISATION
During synchronisation (automatic or manual), the primary T2550R module carries out the following:
It duplicates all primary T2550R modules strategy files on to the secondary T2550R module.
It instructs the secondary T2550R module to load the relevant database.
It transfers current block data to the secondary T2550R module.
During the synchronisation process, the Standby LED on the secondary T2550R module flashes (600ms ON,
600ms OFF). Once synchronisation is complete, it is continuously illuminated yellow, the Duplex LED on the
primary T2550R module is illuminated green and redundant operation starts, with the T2550 IOC Modules in their
synchronised states. In these states, the T2550 IOC Modules will remain synchronised.
Note In redundant operating mode, the secondary T2550R module will not permit any LIN database
messages or writing to its filing system. However it will respond to all other messages.
HA028898 Chapter 4
T2550 HANDBOOK
4.4.1 Redundant mode (Cont.)
TIME TO SYNCHRONISE
The time taken to complete the synchronisation process varies according to the complexity of the control strategy and
on how heavily the Compact Flash filesystem is used. Typically, the Load and Run part of the procedure takes a
number of seconds, however if the primary and secondary file systems are identical, synchronisation is almost
instantaneous. During this period, the primary runs the control process as normal.
Where primary and secondary filing systems have substantial differences (e.g. when attempting synchronisation for the
first time), multiple synchronisations may be required to copy all the files to the secondary T2550R module. When
such is the case, it can be detected from the Red_Ctrl block sync fields.
4.4.2 Two Processor Non-redundant (Simplex) mode

A two T2550S module non-redundant system is not supported, see Starting a Single (Simplex) T2550S Module
section.
Chapter 4 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURATION
This chapter presents and describes the recommended Configuration Tools and Configuration issues concerning this
instrument.
The main topics of this chapter are:
Tools: The Automatic I/O Build and Configuration Tools (section 5.1)
Automatic I/O Build (section 5.2)
LINtools (section 5.3)
Terminal Configurator (section 5.4)
Modbus Tools (section 5.5)
Note Modbus Tools is also used to configure T2550 Profibus Slave parameters.
5.1 TOOLS: THE AUTOMATIC I/O BUILD AND CONFIGURATION TOOLS

Most configuration will be done before despatch, using the LINtools configuration tool. However, at start-up a basic
LIN Database and the communications parameters can be automatically configured for this instrument using the
Automatic I/O Build switch configuration on the Terminal Unit. There is also a basic Terminal Configurator resident
within the instrument. (In redundant mode the program is resident only on the Primary T2550R module). It employs
the standard LIN block structured approach. The LIN Blocks Reference Manual (Part no. HA 082 375 U003) gives full
details of the software function blocks available for control strategies, and how to configure their parameters.
Using the recommended LINtools program also allows the creation of new LIN Databases, and the editing of existing
configurations on-site and on-line, usually to accompany modifications to the processing plant. The LINtools Help
(Part no. RM 263 001 U055) should be referred to for details of the reconfiguration procedures using the LINtools
program. It employs the standard LIN block-structured approach. The LIN Blocks Reference Manual
(Part no. HA 082 375 U003) gives full details of the function blocks available for control strategies, and how to
configure their parameters.
Note A user is not permitted to perform On-line Reconfiguration if the IOC Modules are synchronised.
All processed data collected in the LIN Database can also be transferred via Modbus communications protocol, see
Communications Manual (Part no. HA 028 014) and configured using the Modbus Tools, Modbus Tools Help
(Part no. HA 028 988).
Note The Modbus Tools MUST also be used to configure specific Modbus address registers, as described in
Configuring Profibus Communications using Modbus Tools, allowing this instrument to operate as a
Profibus Slave.
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.2 AUTOMATIC I/O BUILD

The instrument is capable of detecting what I/O hardware is currently fitted. This information is then used to
automatically create the appropriate I/O channel blocks in a LIN Database, and configure them to match the real
hardware. This automatically generated LIN Database does not result in a complete, usable control strategy, as all of
the I/O channel blocks (apart from the digital input function blocks) require further configuration, e.g. thermocouple
type requires a millivolt range, but it does provide the user with sufficient information on what I/O is present, forming
a good starting point for the user to begin building the strategy.
5.2.1 Preparing for the Automatic I/O Build

Before the Automatic I/O Build can be started, all power to the unit must be isolated, and the Terminal Unit Hot/Cold
Start switches must be configured correctly, see Terminal Unit Switches section, and all required I/O modules must be
fitted in the appropriate slots.
Note All existing *.run files will be deleted when this operation is executed.
Only then should power be applied to the instrument, initiating the automatic generation of a LIN Database, and a
corresponding _auto.run file. The automatically generated LIN Database includes appropriate Header, Module,
Calibration, I/O, and other Diagnostic function blocks, see Diagnostic Block.
Note Each automatically generated I/O channel block is automatically configured to match the real
hardware and assigned a unique meaningful 8-character name, see Table 5.2.1. I/O channel blocks
are assigned to the slowest I/O User Task, User Task 3.
The LIN Database will run automatically, it is unnamed (unsaved), and will remain so, unless
automatically saved, if the Options.SaveDBF bit in the TACTICIAN header block is set
the Save as command at the instrument level of the manufacturers Network Explorer is used
the Save command in the Terminal Configurator is used
the LIN Database is open in LINtools, then attached to the instrument via the Online Reconfiguration
command, see Uploading Instrument Control Strategy. The Save command can then be used to save the
instrument LIN Database.
Note The FAULT LED (red) will flash while an unsaved LIN Database or changes to a LIN Database exist
in the instrument. The only constraints on the name of the LIN Database is that it must be a unique
8-character string, although it is recommended that the name is the Instrument Type and the LIN
Address, i.e. T2550_0f.
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.2.1 Preparing for the Automatic I/O Build (Cont.)

The channel indices are affected by the type of the channel, e.g. 03X11_1A specifies the eleventh digital input
channel on the third module, not the eleventh channel on the module. A mixed-type module with three analogue inputs
and three digital inputs in the third slot on a rack at node address 01, results in I/O channel blocks named 03M01_01,
03M02_01, 03M03_01, 03X01_01, 03X02_01 and 03X03_01.
Block Type Naming Convention Description
Header Block T2550_xx xx is the node address

Module Block Modyy_xx Mod is the Module type, yy is the SiteNo, and xx is the node address
Diagnostic Block [block template name]_xx block template name may be condensed, xx is the node address
Calibration Blocks CALn_xx n is the Task number, and xx is the node address
Analogue Input Channel Index yyMzz_xx yy is the SiteNo, zz is the channel, and xx is the node address
Analogue Output Channel Index yyPzz_xx yy is the SiteNo, zz is the channel, and xx is the node address
Digital Input Channel Index yyXzz_xx yy is the SiteNo, zz is the channel, and xx is the node address
Digital Output Channel Index yyYzz_xx yy is the SiteNo, zz is the channel, and xx is the node address
Note All indices (SiteNo and Channel) start at 1, not 0. LIN node addresses less than 10 do not
contain a preceding 0.
Table 5.2.1 Naming Conventions of the automatically generated blocks
Hot/Cold Start
Switches set Off
(SW2:S2 and SW:S3)
All I/O modules fitted
Power up instrument
(I/O database and
.run files are
automatically created)
Configure and save

control strategy
Power down instrument
Hot/Cold Start
Switches set as required
(SW2:S2 and SW:S3)
Power up instrument
Database Runs
Automatically
Figure 5.2.1 Automatic I/O generation routine
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.3 LINTOOLS
IMPORTANT The recommended method of editing a Database is via the LINtools software.
The LINtools program provides the user with a view of the control strategy components that compose the
configuration of a single device, and an easy way to manage those components. There may be more than one of each
component, but not always all component types.
I/O Modules Database (file extension .dbf)
Databases (Function Block Diagram - FBD, file extension .dbf)
Sequences (Sequential Function Chart - SFC, file extension .sdb)
Action block methods (Structured Text - ST, and Ladder, file extension .stx and .sto)
Data Recording (file extension .uxg)
User Screen PageSets (file extension .uxp and .ofl)
Setpoint Programs (Programmer Editor, file extension .uyy, or Setpoint Program Editor, file extension .uys))
Modbus Gateway configurations (file extension .ujg and .gwf)
In summary, LINtools
Provides a simplified view of the instrument configuration
Provides Build and Download functions
Assigns LIN names and node addresses to external databases
Note External databases (EDBs) are LIN Databases running in other LIN instruments.
Provides On-line Reconfiguration to a running LIN Database only
Note On-line Reconfiguration does not apply to other files, i.e. Modbus Gateway file (.gwf), Sequential
Function Chart file (.sdb),or User Screen PageSets file (.ofl), etc..
5.3.1 On-line Reconfiguration

On-line Reconfiguration of an I/O system may involve adding and editing blocks and wires in a running strategy.
Changes, such as adding new function blocks and wires are automatically made as Tentative. However, when using
on-line reconfiguration, LINtools will not permit changes to certain fields of I/O channel blocks unless specific criteria
is met. To ensure that changes made to function block fields do not impact on the running strategy until the user
decides, comes in the form of detaching the function block from the strategy.
On-line Reconfiguration allows the user to make Tentative edits to a running control strategy before applying
changes. During on-line reconfiguration, the user can edit a LIN Database loaded in LINtools, and Try changes in the
instrument to ensure the changes have the desired affect. The user can then either Apply these changes, making them
permanent in both LINtools and the instrument; Discard the changes (restoring the last saved data); or Untry the
changes (removing the changes from the live instrument, but retaining them in the Computer, so that the changes can
be altered in LINtools before again using the Try command).
Caution
Any changes made directly to a running block cannot be Tried/Untried, but are applied immediately (e.g. changing
the value of a function blocks field).
In order to make Tentative changes to a running function block, the user must choose to Unlink that function block in
LINtools, so any changes are not directly applied to the function block in a running control strategy. The user can then Try
the changes as normal. The instrument creates a new copy of the function block, with all of the changes, and runs it in place
of the original. At this point the T2550 instrument will be running the altered LIN Database, however, the original function
block is still present in the LIN Database, so can be restored if Untry or Discard is selected). The user can also Re-link
the function block, discarding all changes made to it, by selecting Undo Unlink on the function block.
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.3.2 Preparing to run LINtools

Getting ready to run LINtools consists of two main topics:
Connecting the instrument to a Computer.
Creating a Project folder.
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER
The instrument can be accessed over the Ethernet network via an Ethernet hub/switch connected to the Ethernet
Communications port on the primary T2550R module and to the Ethernet port on the Computer.
Note To configure a redundant mode instrument (two synchronised T2550R modules), the Computer must be
linked to the primary T2550R module, not the secondary T2550R module.
CREATING A PROJECT FOLDER

The use of LINtools is restricted only by the requirement of a Project folder (or Project Database) containing
appropriate Network and Instrument folders. A New Project folder is created via the New Project wizard, started
from the Start > Programs > ... > New Project command. Thereafter use the context-sensitive menus to create
the required Network and Instrument folders.
Note ... indicates the file path of the installed software.
Each Network folder represents a network and type defined via the New Network wizard and contains all the
Instruments within that network.
Each Instrument folder represents a type of instrument defined via the New Instrument wizard and contains all the
files required for the successful operation of the control strategy by the instrument at the specified address.
Note Any automatically generated LIN Database can be saved to the correct Instrument folder using
LINtools.
If using the manufacturers Project structure software, when all the Networks and Instruments have been created, use
the Build Project Name command to enter all the configured project information into the Project database.
Note The Build command can be used at any time, but Networks must be built before Instruments.
Project Directory
Project Folder
Additional Directories
added for clarity
Network Folder
LINtools Functional
Instrument Folder Block Diagram (FBD)
Network Folder files
(contains ELIN2
networked instruments)
Figure 5.3.2 Project directory structure
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.3.3 Running LINtools

An empty LINtools instance can be started via the Start > Progams > ... > LINtools Engineering Studio
command.
Note ... denotes the file path of the installed software.
Use the Open command to locate an existing LIN Database on the Computer and then select the required file type and
finally open, or simply double-click the LINtools Database file (.dbf), see LINtools Help (Part no. RM 263 001 U003) for
details of Database configuration and Online Reconfiguration procedures using LINtools.
Note If the instrument is currently running an automatically created database (_auto.dbf) it can be copied to
a Computer using the commands in the manufacturers Network Explorer, see Uploading Instrument
Control Strategy section.
During operation, LINtools supports configuration of Data Recording and Setpoint Programming. Data Recording is
configured using commands available from the context menus that allow block fields to be added to new or existing
data recording groups, automatically creating any blocks as required, and the Data Recording Configurator in the
Contents pane. Setpoint Programming is configured using the Program Wizard available from the Tools menu in
LINtools to create the required blocks and the LIN Programmer Editor to configure the instrument Setpoint Program.
Note LINtools permits the user to encrypt (password protect) the Intellectual Property of application files,
i.e. database files, sequence files, action files and Recipe files.
UPLOADING INSTRUMENT CONTROL STRATEGY

When a LIN Database has been automatically generated it only exists within the instrument. However, using the
manufacturers Network Explorer running on a Computer allows the LIN Database to be stopped, and then saved, with
an appropriate filename. Then use the copy to command, to copy this LIN Database to an instrument folder, so it can
be edited using LINtools.
Once the automatically generated LIN Database has been copied and added to an instrument folder, it can be opened in
LINtools. LINtools can only display a list of function blocks in order of creation. This function block list can be
converted in to a graphical representation to clearly show the wiring between each function block. The .dbf file can
now be edited, and when satisfied, saved and downloaded to the instrument, see Downloading Instrument Control
Strategy. If the .dbf file was edited before it was downloaded, a dialog appears indicating that the LIN Databases are
not the same. This must be confirmed before the download can start.
Note Once the copied LIN Database has been opened in LINtools, sufficient information is available to
allow LINtools to perform On-line Reconfiguration of the instrument LIN Database.
IMPORTANT On-line Reconfiguration changes may seriously effect the operation of your system.
DOWNLOADING INSTRUMENT CONTROL STRATEGY

Any LIN Database currently running in an instrument can be edited using the On-line Reconfiguration, see On-line
Reconfiguration section. However, the .dbf file, and any other files on the Computer included in the download list,
can be downloaded at any time. Appropriate indication is displayed when the .dbf file on the Computer and the
Instrument LIN Database do not correspond, allowing the user to decide whether to continue.
RECONFIGURING INSTRUMENT CONTROL STRATEGY

During On-line Reconfiguration, using the Apply command will save changes in the running LIN Database, but any
other files, i.e. Modbus Gateway file (.gwf), Sequential Function Chart file (.sdb),or User Screen PageSets file (.ofl),
etc., that have been edited using the relevant Tools, or are dependant on the LIN Database at load, MUST be
downloaded. However, after files have been downloaded and the strategy is stable, either the application will have to
be stopped and then loaded again, or the power to the instrument must be isolated and then re-applied.
IMPORTANT On-line Reconfiguration only applies to LIN Database files, .dbf.
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.4 TERMINAL CONFIGURATOR

IMPORTANT This can be used to edit a LIN Database but is not recommended. The recommended method
of editing a LIN Database is via the LINtools software.
The Terminal Configurator provides the user with a basic program which can be used to configure and monitor a
control strategy. It can
Provide offline instrument configuration
Provide Build and Download functions
Assign LIN names and node addresses to external databases
Note External databases (EDBs) are LIN Databases running in other LIN instruments.
Provide On-line Reconfiguration to a running LIN Database
5.4.1 On-line Reconfiguration

On-line Reconfiguration of the I/O system involves edits to running blocks (e.g. to add I/O modules or extra channels
on the same I/O module), but changes are made as Tentative, i.e. capable of being Tried/Untried, since a change
made to one I/O block can potentially affect many others. Changing channel type, for example, could cause a status
error in all channel blocks assigned to it (i.e. non-zero value in the Status field). Therefore, when using on-line
reconfiguration the Configurator will not permit changes to certain fields of I/O channel blocks unless specific criteria
has been met.
On-line Reconfiguration allows the user to make Tentative edits, as indicated on the Configurator screen, to a
running strategy before applying these changes. In on-line reconfiguration mode, the user can edit a running LIN
Database using the Configurator, and Try the changes in the instrument. The user can then either Apply the tried
changes, making them permanent in the instrument; or Untry the changes (removing the changes from the live
instrument, but retaining them at the PC end, so that the changes can be altered using the Configurator before again
using the Try command).
Caution
Any changes made directly to a running block cannot be Tried/Untried, but are applied immediately (e.g. changing
the value of a function blocks field).
Note For further information refer to Terminal Configurator section.
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.5 MODBUS TOOLS

This instrument may be configured as a Modbus Master communicating to one or more Modbus instruments and may
alternatively be configured as a Modbus Slave instrument.
To provide continued support for an instrument configured as a redundant pair (duplex) the Modbus-TCP Master
must define the IP Address of both the primary and secondary modules, see Configuring Modbus-TCP Slave
communications.
Note This software application supports more than one (up to 3) Modbus Gateway facility configurations.
The Modbus Tools defines the communications between LIN and Modbus instruments, but with additional specific
configuration can be used to configure an instrument to communicate via the Profibus protocol, see Configuring
Profibus Communications using Modbus Tools.
The Modbus configuration data is defined in a Modbus GateWay File (.gwf). This is downloaded with the LIN
Database (.dbf) into a LIN instrument. The data in the .gwf is used to define the transfer of data between LIN and
Modbus instruments, or a T2550 operating as a Profibus Slave.
This data defines:-
The operating mode (i.e. Modbus Master, Modbus Slave, or Profibus Slave)
The serial line set-up (or TCP)
The mapping between fields in function blocks and the registers of a Modbus instrument
How field values are transferred between instruments. For example which Modbus functions to use, the addresses
of Modbus registers and the format in which data is to be transferred.
Note If communicating via a Profibus network this instrument can only operate as a Profibus Slave.
Specific communications parameters MUST be configured using the Modbus Tools, and the LIN
Database MUST contain the GWProfS_CON block. This block references a specified GateWay file,
.gwf, used to permit Profibus communications.
5.5.1 Preparing to run Modbus Tools

As the Modbus Tools can be accessed from within the LINtools program it requires the same preparation as LINtools,
consisting of:
Connecting the instrument to a Computer.
Creating a Project folder.
The Modbus Tools Help (Part no. HA028988) should be referred to for details of Modbus Configuration procedures
using the Modbus Tools.
5.5.2 Running Modbus Tools

An empty Modbus Tools window can be started via the Start > ... > LINtools Advanced > MODBUS Tools
command. Use the Open command to locate the required Instrument and then select the required file type and finally
open.
Alternatively, simply double-click the LIN MODBUS Database file (.ujg) from the required Instrument folder.
Note The Modbus Tools Help (Part no. HA028988) should be referred to for details of Modbus
configuration procedures using the Modbus Tools.
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.5.3 Configuring Modbus-TCP Slave Communications

When this instrument is configured as a redundant pair and communicating as a Modbus-TCP Slave the IP Address of
the primary and secondary modules must be configured in the Modbus-TCP Master instrument, e.g. if an Eycon is
configured as the Modbus-TCP Master , its .gwf must defined the IP Address of the primary and secondary modules.
The IP Addresses are defined in the TCP Properties dialog in Modbus Tools.
Example
Before the Modbus-TCP Master can successfully communicate with an instrument configured as a redundant pair the
Modbus Operating Mode must be configured appropriately.
The Modbus-TCP Master Operating Mode must be configured as shown.
Press the TCP button to display the TCP Properties dialog. This dialog is used to define the IP Address of each
Modbus-TCP Slave communicating with this Modbus-TCP Master.
This shows the default IP Address of both the primary and secondary modules of an instrument configured as a
redundant pair. The TCP Properties dialog shows that both IP Address are communicating with this Modbus-TCP
Master.
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.5.4 Configuring Profibus Communications using Modbus Tools

This LIN instrument can only operate as a Profibus Slave. It will only communicate via a Profibus network if
configured using the Modbus Tools.
The instrument uses designated Modbus registers in the Modbus GateWay File, .gwf that must be added and
configured with the required Profibus Input data, Output data, and Demand Data available from the database file. The
Input data, Output data, and Demand Data module configuration is defined in the instrument .gsd file. When the
Modbus registers have been configured, the GateWay file, .gwf, must be downloaded to the Instrument with the
database file, .dbf, allowing the instrument to communicate with a Profibus Master device via the Profibus protocol.
Note The Profibus Master uses the .gsd file during configuration to understand the Input data, Output data
and Demand data module configuration of the Profibus Slave.
If configuring this instrument as a Profibus Slave using a Profibus configuration tool, the Redundancy Status Word,
available in the User Parameter Data section must be set appropriately. When set Off, the cyclic data is returned as
configured. When set On, the first Word in the cyclic data is overwritten by the Redundancy Status Word.
If configuring this instrument to use standard Profibus Slave watchdog function when communicating with a T800, or
T940(X) Profibus Master, a copy of the T2550 .gsd file, euro0B29.gsd, must be edited, see also Modbus/Profibus
Communications Manual (Part no. HA028014). Open this file using a text editor, e.g. notepad, and add
Eurotherm_Watch_Dog_enable, Eurotherm_bWD_Fact_1, and Eurotherm_bWD_Fact_2 parameters to the end of the
file. Eurotherm_Watch_Dog_enable = 1 must be set to enable the Watchdog function. Eurotherm_bWD_Fact_1, and
Eurotherm_bWD_Fact_2 can be edited in the range 1 to 155, and are multiplied to determine the device Watchdog
Timeout value in 10mS units.
IMPORTANT Editing a copy of the .gsd file will invalidate Profibus compliance.
To ensure this instrument can successfully communicate with a Profibus Master,
1 Create a GWProfS_CON block in the instrument database,
and in the FileName field enter a name for a Modbus
Configuration file. This name refers to both the .ujg, and the
.gwf.
Use the context menu to open a related Modbus
Configuration file, .ujg. This file can be created and opened
now using the context menu, or can be automatically created
when the database is saved.
Note The Demand Data table will remain offline until

Demand Data is accessed.
2 When the Modbus Tools is open, configure the Operating Mode,

and Modbus registers and access the Instrument Options to
configure the Communications Protocol and Device Address.
The Operating Mode parameters on the Properties page must
be set to indicate the instrument is a Slave, communicating
via a Serial Network on COM port.
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.5.4 Configuring Profibus Communications using Modbus Tools (Cont.)

The Instrument Options must be set as shown, i.e.the
Serial COM port must be set to Modbus-S, and the
Address set appropriately.
Note This sets the Profibus device Address when the

Instrument is operating as a Profibus Slave.
The Modbus registers must be set at

the Offsets shown.
Note It is recommended that

Modbus register, Offset 1000,
remains unused. This address
register is used to transfer the
Status word associated with
the Profibus Slave device.
3 When this configuration is complete, the

list of files to download in LINtools
MUST include the database file, .dbf,
the GateWay file, .gwf, and any file used
to support the correct operation of the
instrument.
IMPORTANT To ensure successful
Profibus communications with this
instrument the Profibus Master must be
configured. The Profibus Master uses the
Profibus Slave devices .gsd file to
understand the Input data, Output data and
Demand data module configuration.
Modbus Register Description
1000 to 1121 Band of Modbus registers for inputs to Profibus Master from Profibus Slave. Actual size
determined by Input table size identified in the euro0B29.gsd file.
2000 to 2121 Band of Modbus registers for Outputs to Profibus Master from Profibus Slave. Actual size
determined by Output table size identified in the euro0B29.gsd file.
3000 to 3121 Band of Modbus registers for Profibus Demand Data. The Modbus table relating to Offset 3000
is offline unless Demand Data is actually being accessed.
IMPORTANT To ensure successful Profibus communications, the Demand data MUST be
configured as the first module in the Profibus Configurator.
Table 5.5.3 Modbus registers
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.5.5 The Gertestammdaten.gsd File

The instrument Gertestammdaten file (.gsd) is a readable text file defining general and device specific data for
communications of a Profibus device. When configuring the instrument as a Profibus Slave, the .gsd file identifies
device, adjustable parameters, corresponding data types, and permitted limit values for the configuration of the device.
Some parameters may need editing to support communications with a specific Profibus Master.
; GSD File for Eurotherm T2550 Series - Rev 1.03 27/06/08
#Profibus_DP
GSD_Revision = 3
Vendor_Name = "EUROTHERM Ltd"
Model_Name = "Eurotherm T2550"
Revision = "1.03"
Ident_Number = 0x0B29
Protocol_Ident = 0 ; PROFIBUS DP
Station_Type = 0 ; DP-slave
FMS_supp = 0 1
Hardware_Release = "V1.01"
Software_Release = "V1.01"
Redundancy = 0
Repeater_Ctrl_Sig = 0
24V_Pins = 0
Implementation_Type = "VPC3+C"
Slave_Family = 5 ; control family
Bitmap_Device = "EUR2550"
Bitmap_Diag = "EUR2550D"
Bitmap_SF = "EUR2550"
Max_Diag_Data_Len = 16
;Supported Communication Speed:
Auto_Baud_supp = 1
9.6_supp = 1 ; Max length = 1200m (line type A or B)
19.2_supp = 1 ; Max length = 1200m (type A or B)
45.45_supp = 1
93.75_supp = 1 ; Max length = 1200m (type A or B)
187.5_supp = 1 ; Max length = 1000m (type A)
500_supp = 1 ; Max length = 400m (type A)
1.5M_supp = 1 ; Max length = 200m (type A)
3M_supp = 1
6M_supp = 1 2
12M_supp = 1
MaxTsdr_9.6 = 60 ; unit = tbit
MaxTsdr_45.45 = 60
MaxTsdr_500 = 100 ; unit = tbit
MaxTsdr_1.5M = 150 ; unit = tbit
MaxTsdr_3M = 50
MaxTsdr_6M = 100
MaxTsdr_12M = 200
; DP_Slave Information:
Freeze_Mode_supp = 0
Sync_Mode_supp = 0
Set_Slave_Add_supp = 0 ; Set via instrument UI
Min_Slave_Intervall=6 ; 2ms
Modular_Station = 1 ; for use with several configurators
Max_Module = 3
Max_Input_Len = 244 3
Max_Output_Len = 244
Max_Data_Len = 488
Fail_Safe = 0
; Parametrization:
PrmText = 1
Text(0) = "OFF"
Text(1) = "ON"
EndPrmText
ExtUserPrmData = 1 "Redundancy Status Word"
Bit(0) 0 0-1
Prm_Text_Ref = 1 4
EndExtUserPrmData
Max_User_Prm_Data_Len = 4
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Const(0) = 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Ref(3) = 1
Module = "DEMAND_DATA" 0x73
1
Endmodule
Module = "INPUT_16_WORDS" 0x5F
2 5
EndModule
Module = "OUTPUT_122_WORDS" 0x6F, 0x6F, 0x6F, 0x6F, 0x6F, 0x6F, 0x6F, 0x69
11
EndModule
;Attention: Put "DEMAND_DATA" in the first slot if you want to use it
;Uncomment this section if your configuration tool can handle slot defintions
;SlotDefinition 6
;Slot(1) = "Slot 1" 1 1-11
;Slot(2) = "Slot 2" 2 2-11
;Slot(3) = "Slot 3" 3 2-11
;EndSlotDefinition
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5.5.5 The Gertestammdaten (.gsd) File (Cont.)

This table describes the parameter information available in the .gsd file.
Note Additional comments may be available for each parameter. For full information about each parameter
refer to the PROFIBUS Guideline, GSD-Specification for PROFIBUS-DP.
Number Function Explanation
1 Profibus_DP Parameters Shows device .gsd file and supported features.
IMPORTANT These parameters should not be edited.

Device definition - Shows manufacturers .gsd file details.
GSD_Revision = 3
Vendor_name = Eurotherm Ltd
Model_Name = Eurotherm T2550
Revision = 1.03
Ident_Number = 0x0B29 Number assigned by Profibus User Organisation
Protocol_Ident = 0 0: PROFIBUS DP, 16 to 255: Manufacturer-specific
Station_Type = 0 Shows device type. 0: DP Slave, 1:DP Master (Class 1)
FMS_supp = 0 Shows FMS/DP mixed device, i.e. the device supports Profibus Fieldbus
Messaging Specification and Profibus DP installaion. 1 = True, 0 = False.
Hardware_Release = "V1.01"
Software_Release = "V1.01"
Features supported
Redundancy = 0 Redundant transmission engineering support, 1 = True, 0 = False.
Repeater_Ctrl_Sig = 0 Connector signal CNTR-P level, 0: Not connected, 1: RS485, 2:TTL
24V_Pins = 0 Connector signal - M24V and P24V, 0: Not connected, 1: Input, 2: Output
Hardware supports
Implementation_Type = "VPC3+C" Manufacturer defined
Slave_Family = 5 Manufacturer defined device function class
Bitmap_Device = "EUR2550" Bitmap file name for standard symbolic representation.
Bitmap_Diag = "EUR2550D" Bitmap file name for diagnostic symbolic representation.
Bitmap_SF = "EUR2550" Bitmap file name for special operating mode symbolic representation.
Max_Diag_Data_Len = 16 Specifies maximum length of the diagnostic information (Diag_Data).
2 Supported Communication parameters Shows supported Profibus Baud rates. 1 = True, 0 = False.
Auto_Baud_supp = 1 Shows automatic Baud rate recognition is supported by the device.
9.6_supp = 1
19.2_supp = 1
45.45_supp = 1
93.75_supp = 1
187.5_supp = 1
500_supp = 1 Shows the Baud rates supported by the device.
1.5M_supp = 1
3M_supp = 1
6M_supp = 1
12M_supp = 1
MaxTsdr_9.6 = 60
MaxTsdr_19.2 = 60
MaxTsdr_45.45 = 60
MaxTsdr_93.75 = 60
Maximum Station Delay of Responder. Shows the maximum length of time
MaxTsdr_187.5 = 60
in ms the Profibus Slave will wait before generating a response for each
MaxTsdr_500 = 100
supported Baud rate.
MaxTsdr_1.5M = 150
MaxTsdr_3M = 50
MaxTsdr_6M = 100
MaxTsdr_12M = 200
continued
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
3 DP_Slave information Shows device features definition.
Freeze_Mode_supp = 0 If 1, the Profibus Slave will hold the inputs until the next data cycle after
the Freeze control command from the Profibus Master. More recent
changes are ignored. If 0 this control command is not supported.
Sync_Mode_supp = 0 If 1, the Profibus Slave will hold the outputs until the next Sync control
command or the Sync Mode is switched off by the Profibus Master. If 0
this control command is not supported.
Set_Slave_Add_supp = 0 If 1, the Profibus Slave Address may be configured via the Profibus
network. If 0 this is not supported.
Min_Slave_Intervall=6 Specifies minimum time interval between two Profibus Slave list cycles for
the device.
Modular_Station = 1 1 = Modular, 0 = Compact.
Max_Module = 3 Specifies maximum number of modules supported by device.
Max_Input_Len = 244 Specifies maximum number of bytes for the input data of a modular
station.
Max_Output_Len = 244 Specifies maximum number of bytes for the output data of a modular
station.
Max_Data_Len = 488 Specifies maximum number of bytes for input and output data of a
modular station.
Fail_Safe = 0 If 1, the Profibus Slave Address will enter a safe state when receiving a
data message with the length 0. If 0 it will enter a safe state when
receiving a data message with zero values.
4 Parameterization Manufacturer defined value parameterization definition.

The configuration specified between the key words PrmText and
EndPrmText describes the possible values of the defined parameter. This
shows Manufacturer defined keywords in this .gsd file.
PrmText = 1 Manufacturer defined text parameterization in the form <text definition list>
= <Index>, where this is the first entry in the Text Defintion List and is
indexed at 1. The index corresponds to the Prm_Text_Ref parameter in
ExtUserPrmData parameter, i.e. PrmText = 1 corresponds to
Prm_Text_Ref = 1.
Text(0) = OFF Shows the text value of 0 assigned to the text indexed by Prm_Text_Ref
parameter in the ExtUserPrmData parameter.
Text(1) = ON Shows the text value of 1 assigned to the text indexed by Prm_Text_Ref
parameter in the ExtUserPrmData parameter.
EndPrmText Text parameterization complete.
The configuration specified between the key words ExtUserPrmData and

EndExtUserPrmData, describes the parameter of the User_Prm_Data.
ExtUserPrmData = 1 Redundancy Status Word Manufacturer defined parameterization definition in the form <extra user
parameter data definition list> = <Index> <Value>, where Redundancy
Status Word is the first entry in the extra user parameter data definition
list and is indexed at 1.
Bit(0) 0 0-1 Shows the limits of the parameterization in the corresponding PrmText
parameter, where Bit is the data type, (0) is the default value and 0-1
indicates the 2 values corresponding to Text(0) = OFF and Text(1) =
ON.
Prm_Text_Ref = 1 Reference number corresponding to the Index in PrmText.
EndUserPrmText User text parameterization complete.
Max_User_Prm_Data_Len = 4 Specifies maximum number of bytes for the User_Prm_Data.

Ext_User_Prm_Data_Const(0) = 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00 Specifies the constant value for the User_Prm_Data.
Ext_User_Prm_Data_Ref(3) = 1 Specifies the reference to the description for the User_Prm_Data.
continued
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
5 Module identification The configuration specified between the key words Module and
EndModule describes the possible manufacturer defined module
definition.
Module = Demand Data 0x73 Module identification in the form, <module>=module name/type and
hexadecimal bit configuration. Specifies Module name in , i.e. Demand
Data as shown in the Slot configuration and the default data configuration
for each module in the device, i.e. 0x73.
A simple module identifier format is used for all module types.
DEMAND_DATA uses a 0x73 hexadecimal number to indicate the units for
the module are words, in both read and write data direction.
INPUT_16_WORDS and OUTPUT_16_WORDS use 0x5F and 0x6F
hexadecimal numbers respectively.
Example:
This shows the DEMAND_DATA module bit configuration.
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

C U O I L3 L2 L1 L0
0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 = 0x73
This shows the OUTPUT_16_WORDS module bit configuration.
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

C U O I L3 L2 L1 L0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 = 0x6F
Bit7 C: Consistency over Units if 0, or over module if 1.

Bit6 U: L3L2L1L0 bits are units of bytes if 0, or Words if 1.
Bit5 O: Write direction if 1.
Bit4 I: Read direction if 1.
Bit3
Bit2 L3L2L1L0: Add 1 to L3L2L1L0 to calculate the length of cyclic
Bit1 data in Units determined by Bit6.
Bit0
IMPORTANT Demand Data must always be configured in Module 1 as defined in the Module Number.
Note To configure Profibus communications with a T800 or T940(X) Profibus Master simply list the
hexadecimal numbers on a single line, e.g. Module = cyclic data 0x5F, 0x6F. This shows 16
Words of Input data and 16 Words of Output data is required. The combined total number of
bytes should not exceed the value specified in the Max_Data_Len parameter.
Module number Module type reference number.
EndModule Module identification is complete.
6 ;SlotDefinition The configuration specified between the key words ;SlotDefinition and
EndSlotDefinition describes the Modules that can be used.
;Slot(1) = "Slot 1" 1 1-11 Slot identification in the form, <slot(n)>= Slot name, module type in slot,
and the module types that may be used in this slot as defined in Module
identification above.
EndSlotDefinition Slot identification is complete.
Table 5.5.4 .gsd file details
HA028898 Chapter 5
T2550 HANDBOOK
Chapter 5 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 6 CONTROL AND AUTOTUNING

The instrument strategy can be configured to control and tune a control loop, via LINtools Engineering Studio. This
chapter discusses the use of the LOOP_PID block, but similar Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time,
PID, principles are also applicable to the 3_Term block and PID block.
Note Details of each block is described in the LIN Block Reference Manual, Part no. HA 082 375 U003.
Each single loop of control contains two outputs, Channel 1 and Channel 2, that can be configured for PID, On/Off or
Valve Position (bounded or unbounded) control. In a temperature control loop Channel 1 is normally configured for
heating and Channel 2 for cooling. Descriptions given in this chapter generally refer to temperature control but can
also apply to other process loops.
The main topics covered are:
What is a Control Loop ? (section 6.1)
LOOP_PID Function Block (section 6.2)
Effect of Control Action, Hysteresis and Deadband (section 6.3)
6.1 WHAT IS A CONTROL LOOP ?

This is an example of a heat only temperature control loop.
Simplified Loop Function Block Process Under Control
PID Tuning
(PID page)
Control Setup Control Output Power

(Setup page) (OP page) Regulator
PID/OnOff/VP
Error Control
SetPoint Loop
(SP page)
Generator
PV
Status Values
(Diag page)
Operating
Values Heater
(Main page) Measured
Temperature
Figure 6-1 Single Loop, Single Channel Control Loop Block schematic
The actual measured temperature, or Process Variable (PV), is connected to the input of the instrument. This PV
measurement is compared with a SetPoint (SP, or required temperature). If an error exists between the SP and
measured temperature the instrument calculates an output value to call for heating or cooling depending on the process
being controlled. In this instrument it is possible to select between a PID, On/Off, Boundless or Bounded Valve
Position algorithm. The output(s) from the instrument (OP) are connected to devices in the plant/system, and adjust
the heating, or cooling, that results in a change of the PV, that is again measured by the sensor, and the process is
repeated. This is referred to as closed loop control.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2 LOOP_PID FUNCTION BLOCK

The instrument control loop is configured using the Loop function block and up to 7 (seven) additional Tune_Set
blocks, allowing a total of eight sets of tuning parameters for an individual control loop.
Note Each set of PID tuning parameters, one additional set of tuning parameters per Tune_Set block,
provides specific tuning for different levels of temperature, particularly useful in control systems where
the response to the cooling power is significantly different to that of the heating power.
The LOOP_PID block consists of the following pages

Main
To setup the operating parameters of the Control Loop. These are an overview of the main parameters such as
Auto/Manual select, current PV, current output demand, selected SP value and working SP value.
Setup
To configure control type for each channel of the selected loop
Tune
To set up and run the Auto Tune function
PID
To set up 3 term, Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time (PID) control parameters
SP
To select and adjust different setpoints, setpoint limits, rate of change of setpoint
OP
To set up output parameters such as limits, sensor break conditions
Diag
To diagnose Control Loop problems, such as sensor break detection, loop break detection
Alarms
To setup alarm parameters used to indicate operational extents have been exceeded
Note Parameters are wired using the LINtools Engineering Studio, as part of a strategy, see LIN Block
Reference Manual, Part no. HA 082 375 U003, for full block parameter details.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.1 Main page

The Main page of the Loop block provides an overview of parameters used by the overall control loop. It allows,
Auto or Manual operation to be selected
To stop the loop from controlling for commissioning purposes
To hold the integral action
Read PV and SP values
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL MODE
Each type of control operates differently according to the current operating mode. Automatic indicates that PV is
continuously monitored and compared to the SP. The output power is calculated and used to minimise any difference.
Manual indicates that the operator controls the output power. The power delivered to the process may be edited
directly from the instrument via the User Screen or via the communications network. However, the loop continues to
be monitored, allowing a smooth change when Automatic mode is selected.
If On/Off control is configured the output power can be edited by the user but will only allow the power to be set to
+100%, 0% or -100%, representing, heat ON/cool OFF, heat OFF/cool OFF, heat OFF/cool ON.
If PID control is configured the output can be edited between +100% and -100%. The true output value is subject to
limiting and output rate limit.
If Valve Position control is configured the raise and lower buttons on a User Screen, configured using the User Screen
Editor, will directly control the raise and lower relay outputs during manual operation. By using digital
communications it is possible to control the valve by sending nudge commands. A single nudge command,
OP.NudgeUp or OP.NudgeDn, will move the valve by 1 minimum On-Time. In manual mode the natural state will be
rest.
Note If sensor break occurs while the control loop is in automatic operation, a configured sensor break
output power, OP.SbrkOP or OP.SafeOP if Main.Inhibit is configured, can be output. However, the
user can also switch to manual control. In this case manual will become active and the user can edit
the output power. On leaving manual, i.e. returning to automatic operation control, the controller will
again check for sensor break.
If Auto Tune is enabled, Tune.Enable set Yes, while in manual mode, the Auto Tune will remain in a reset state,
Tune.Stage shows Reset, until the control loop is switched to automatic control, automatically starting the Auto Tune
process.
Tip! To provide a strategy that enables sensor break action (OP.SbrkMode only supported when Mode is
AUTO) and the ability to write to the output (only supported when Mode is MANUAL) wire
ModeSel.FManSel to SelMode.SelMan. If a sensor break occurs this will cause the instrument to
operate in Forced Manual mode (ModeSel.FManSel is TRUE and Mode is F_Man) after the
configured sensor break action has been applied. The required output can then be written to
OP.ManOP while operating in Mode is F_Man.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.2 Set Up page

Set Up configures the type of control required for each channel.
TYPES OF CONTROL LOOP

The following control loop types can be configured,
On/Off Control
On/Off control is the simplest means of control and simply turns heating power on when the PV, is below SP and
off when it is above SP. As a consequence, On/Off control leads to oscillation of the PV. This oscillation can
affect the quality of the final product and may be used on non-critical processes. A degree of hysteresis,
Alarms.Hyst, must be set in On/Off control if the operation of the switching device is to be reduced and relay
chatter is to be avoided.
If cooling is used, cooling power is turned on when the PV is above SP and off when it is below.
It is suitable for controlling switching devices such as relays, contactors, triacs or digital (logic) devices.
PID Control
PID (Proportional Band, Integral time, and Derivative time), or 3 (Three) Term Control, is an algorithm that
continuously adjusts the output, according to a set of rules, to compensate for changes in the PV. It provides more
stable control but the parameters need to be set up to match the characteristics of the process under control.
The output from the control is the sum of the contributions from the PID terms. The combined output is a
function of the magnitude and duration of the error signal, and the rate of change of the PV.
It is possible to disable the Integral time and Derivative time terms and control the Proportional Band only (P), or
Proportional plus Integral (PI) or Proportional plus Derivative (PD).
Note PI control can be used, for example, when the sensor measuring an oven temperature is susceptible to
noise or other electrical interference where derivative action could cause the heater power to fluctuate
wildly. Whereas, PD control may be used, for example, on servo mechanisms.
In addition to the PID terms described above, there are other parameters that determine the control loop
performance. These include Cutback terms, Relative Cool Gain, Manual Reset.
Valve Position Control
Valve Position (Motorised Valve) Control is an algorithm designed specifically for positioning motorised valves.
It operates in boundless, Valve Positioning Unbounded or bounded mode.
Boundless VP (VPU) control does not require a position feedback potentiometer to operate. It is a velocity mode
algorithm that directly controls the direction and velocity of the movement of the valve in order to minimise the
error between the SP and the PV. It uses triac or relay outputs to drive the valve motor.
Tip! A potentiometer can be used in boundless mode but can only indicate the actual valve position, and is
not included in the control algorithum.
Bounded VP (VPB) control requires a feedback potentiometer as part of the control algorithm.
The control is performed by delivering a raise pulse, a lower pulse or no pulse in response to the control
demand signal via relay or triac outputs.
In manual mode operation, Bounded VP controls by the fact that the inner positional loop is still running against
the potentiometer feedback, so it is operating as a position loop.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.2 Set Up page (Cont.)

In manual mode operation, BoundlessVP control is an algorithm used as a velocity mode positioner. The
algorithm predicts where the valve will move to based on the edit of the manual power. Effectively, when the
raise or lower command is activated, the raise or lower output is turned on applying +100% or -100% velocity
respectively. It is essential that the motor travel time is correct, so the Integral time can be calculated correctly.
Note Motor travel time is defined as valve fully open valve fully closed, it is not necessarily the time
printed on the motor because if the mechanical stops have been set on the motor, the travel time of the
actual valve may be different. Also, if the travel time for the valve is set correctly, the position
indicated on the controller will accurately match the actual valve position.
Every time the valve is driven to its end stops, the algorithm is reset to 0% or 100% to compensate for any
changes that have occurred due to wear in linkages or other mechanical parts.
This technique makes boundless VP look like a positional loop in manual even though it is not, and enables
combinations of heating and cooling, e.g. PID heat, VPU cool and have the manual mode work as expected.
Note Motorised Valve Output configuration will automatically configure the second channel after the first
has been setup, e.g. if OP.Ch2Outpt is wired and configured as cooling, OP.Ch1Outpt is automatically
wired and configured as heating.
6.2.3 PID page

The PID parameters are used to optimize the control of the loop.
Note If the loop is configured for On/Off Control, only the PID.LBTn is available.
Proportional Band, PB
The Proportional Band, PB, or gain, delivers an output that is proportional to the size of the error signal in
engineering units or as a percentage of the range. It is the range over which the output power is continuously
adjustable in a linear fashion from 0% to 100%, for a heat only control. An error signal below the PB causes an
output of 100%, but an error signal above the PB causes an output of 0%.
The width of the PB determines the response to the error signal. If the error signal is too narrow (high gain) the
system oscillates by being over responsive, if it is too wide (low gain) the control is sluggish. A control loop is
operating at its optimum performance when the PB is as narrow as possible without causing oscillation.
The diagram below shows the effect of narrowing PB to the point of oscillation. A wide PB results in straight line
control but with an appreciable initial error between SP and actual temperature. As the PB is narrowed the
temperature gets closer to SP until finally becoming unstable.
Proportional Band
(PB) PB value before
oscillation occurs
Output Narrow Temperature
Wide
100%
SP
50%
PB value
decreasing
0% Temperature Time
SP
Figure 6-2-3a Proportional Band (PB) configuration
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.3 PID page (Cont.)

Integral Time, Ti
In Proportional only control, an error between SP and PV must exist for power to be delivered. Integral time, Ti,
is used to achieve zero steady state control error.
The Ti term slowly shifts the output level as a result of an error between SP and measured PV. If the measured PV
is below SP the Integral time action gradually increases the output in an attempt to correct the error. If it is above
SP the Ti action gradually decreases the output or increases the cooling power to correct the error. The diagram
below shows the result of introducing Ti action.
Temperature
Proportional
Control Only
SP
Proportional &
Integral Control
Time
Figure 6-2-3b Integral Time (Ti) configuration
The units for the Ti term are measured in time (1 to 99999 seconds). The longer the Ti constant, the more slowly
the output is shifted, resulting in poor response. If the Ti is set too small, it will cause the process to overshoot
and even oscillate. The Ti action can be disabled by setting PID.Tin Off.
Temporarily disabling the Ti term can be useful when a control loop is expected to open, i.e. it may be necessary
to turn heaters off for a short period or switch into manual at low power. In this case it may be an advantage to
wire it to a digital input that activates when the heaters are turned off. When the heaters are switched on again the
Ti term is already at its previous value minimising overshoot.
In a PID control (3-term control), the Ti term of the PID calculation can be frozen at the current value if
Main.IntHold is set Yes. It will hold the Ti term at its current value but will not integrate any disturbances in the
plant/system. Essentially, this is equivalent to switching to PD control with a manual reset value, Ti term value,
preconfigured.
When the control loop is configured to use PID control, changes between manual and automatic can cause abrupt
changes to the output value. By configuring Integral Balance, PID.IntBal, abrupt changes, bumps, can be
prevented, and the output power gradually changed in accordance with the demand from the PID algorithm or by
an user via a User Screen.
Note Output bumps can damage valves and destabilise the process.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

Derivative Time, Td
Derivative time, Td action, or rate, provides a sudden shift in output as a result of a rapid change in error, whether
or not this is caused by PV alone (derivative on PV) or on SP changes as well (derivative on error selection). If
the measured PV falls quickly, the Td provides a large change to the output in an attempt to correct the change in
error before it goes too far. It is most beneficial in recovering from small error changes.
Temperature Temperature
SP SP
Proportional & Integral Proportional & Integral

response response
Time Time
Response without configured Derivative action Response with configured Derivative action
Figure 6-2-3c Derivative Time (Td) configuration
Note A reduction to wear on valve control can be achieved by configuring Td to react to PV changes,
whereas, configuring the Td to react to changes to Error, difference between PV and SP, will redue
ramp overshoot, and allows rapid response to small SP changes in temperature control systems.
The Td modifies the output to reduce the rate of error changes. It reacts to changes in the PV by changing the
output to remove the errors . Increasing the Td will reduce the settling time of the loop after a change.
Td is often mistakenly associated with overshoot inhibition rather than error response. In fact, Td should not be
used to curb overshoot on start up since this will inevitably degrade the steady state performance of the system.
Overshoot should be configured using the High and Low Cutback control parameters.
Td is generally used to increase the stability of the loop, however, there are situations where Td may be the cause
of instability, e.g. if the PV is noisy, Td can amplify that noise and cause excessive output changes. In these
situations it is often better to disable the Td and re-tune the loop. The Td can be disabled by setting PID.Tdn Off.
Td can be calculated on change of PV or change of error. If configured on error, changes in the SP will be
transmitted to the output. For applications such as furnace temperature control, it is common practice to select Td
on PV to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of output as a result of a change in SP.
Relative Cool Gain, R2G
The Relative Cool Gain, R2G, is a tuning parameter corresponding to the gain of channel 2 control output, relative
to the channel 1 control output.
R2G compensates for the different quantities of power available to heat, as opposed to that available to cool, a
process, e.g. water cooling applications might require an R2G value of 0.25 because cooling is 4 times greater
than the heating process at the operating temperature.
Note This parameter is set automatically when the Autotune process is performed.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK

High and Low Cutback, CBHand CBL
The CutBack High, PID.CBH, and CutBack Low, PID.CBL, are values that modify the amount of overshoot, or
undershoot, that occurs during large step changes in PV, e.g. under start-up conditions, and are independent of the
PID terms. This means that the PID terms can be set for optimal steady state response, while the PID.CBH and
CBL are used to modify any overshoot that may be present.
PID.CBH and PID.CBL involves moving the PB towards a cutback point nearest the measured value whenever the
latter is outside the PB and the power is saturated, at 0 or 100% for a heat only controller. The PB moves
downscale to the lower cutback point and waits for the measured value to enter it. It then escorts the measured
value with full PID control to the SP. In some cases it can cause a dip in the measured value as it approaches SP,
see below, but generally decreases the time needed to bring the process into operation.
The action described above is reversed for falling temperature.
If PID.CBH and PID.CBL are set to Auto, the values are automatically configured to 3 x PB.
Temperature
CBH
0% output level
SP
100% output level
CBL
Time
Figure 6-2-3d High and Low Cutback (CBH and CBL) configuration
Manual Reset, MR
In a PID control (3 Term control), the Ti term automatically removes the steady state error from the SP. If the PID
control is changed to PD control, the Ti term will be set to OFF. Under these conditions the measured value
may not settle precisely at SP. The MR parameter represents the value of the power output that will be delivered
when the error is 0 (zero). To remove the steady state error, the MR value must be configured manually.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

Loop Break
The term Loop Break is used to show that the PV has not responded to changes in the output, generally within a
configured time. The time of response will usually vary between processes, but by configuring the LBT (Loop
Break Time) tuning parameter, the Diag.LpBreak will only show Yes if the PV does not respond before this time
limit expires.
The Diag.LpBreak attempts to detect loss of restoring action in the control loop by checking the control output,
the PV and its rate of change. If the PV has not responded to changes in the output within the configured time
limit, PID.LBTn, a Loop Break has occurred, setting Diag.LpBreak to Yes. The control action is not affected
unless it is specifically wired, in software or hardware, to the control.
Note This must not to be confused with Load Failure and Partial Load Failure. The loop break algorithm is
purely software detection.
It is assumed that while the requested output power is operating within the output power limits of a control loop,
the control loop is operating in linear control and therefore a Loop Break has not occurred. However, if the
output becomes saturated, the control loop is operating outside its linear control region, indicating a Loop Break
has occurred.
Note If the output power remains saturated at the same level for a significant duration, it could indicate a
fault in the control loop. The source of the Loop Break is not important, but the loss of control could
have serious consequences.
Since the worst case time constant for a given load is usually known, a worst case time can be calculated using the
minimum movement in temperature at the given load. This calculation corresponds to the rate of approach to the
SP, and is used to determine that the Loop control will fail at the chosen SP, i.e. if the PV was drifting away from
the SP or approaching the SP at a rate less than that calculated, the Diag.LpBreak will be set Yes.
If an Auto Tune is performed, LBTn is automatically set to Tin x 2 for PI or PID loop control, and alternatively 12
x Tdn for PD loop control. In On/Off control, loop break detection is also based on LBTn as 0.1 x SPAN where
SPAN = Range High - Range Low. Therefore, if the output is at limit and the PV has not moved by 0.1 x SPAN in
the time configured in LBTn, the Diag.LpBreak will be set Yes.
Note If the time configured in LBTn is 0(off), loop break detection will be disabled.
If the output is in saturation and the PV has not moved by >0.5 x Pbn in the time configured in LBTn, the
Diag.LpBreak will be set Yes.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK

Gain Scheduling
In some processes the tuned PID set can be very different at low temperatures from that at high temperatures
particularly in control systems where the response to the cooling power is significantly different from that of the
heating power. Gain Scheduling allows a number of PID sets to be stored and provides automatic transfer of
control between one set of PID values and another at different operating points of the process. The Loop block
includes one set of PID values, but up to an additional 7 (seven) PID sets, one per Tune_Set block can be used.
The total number of PID sets used by the control loop is defined in the PID.NumSets parameter.
PID.ShedType =
PV, SP, Error, OP, or Rem
Tune_Set 2/3 Boundary
Tune_Set 1/2 Boundary
Plant Operating Position
PID Set1 PID Set2 PID Set3
Figure 6-2-3e PID Set boundaries
Gain Scheduling is basically a look up table that can be selected using different strategies or types and provides
boundaries, configured in the Bound field of each Tune_Set block, that define when the next PID set is used. As
the boundary between PID sets is exceeded, under instruction from the Gain Scheduling type defined in
PID.ShedType, the next PID set is used. The transfer between both upper and lower boundaries of a PID set is
controlled to stop scheduling oscillation at the boundaries and provides a smooth change between PID sets using
an internally defined hysteresis ( 0.5% of the output span if PID.ShedType is set to OP, or 0.1% of the loop
span if PID.ShedType is set to Set, SP, PV, Error, or Rem). The next PID set will start,
when selected by the operator, if PID.ShedType is set to Set. This can also be controlled via the soft wiring
within the instrument to allow the operator to select the required PID set remotely.
when the SP, PV, Error, OP, or Rem value reaches the value configured in the Bound field of a Tune_Set
block, if PID.ShedType is set to SP, PV, Error, OP, or Rem respectively.
Note Auto tune will tune to the active scheduled PID.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.4 Tuning Page

This page is used to automatically configure parameters that are used to set up and run the Auto Tune function.
Tuning involves configuring the Proportional Band, PB, Integral Time, Ti, Derivative Time, Td, CutBack High, CBH,
CutBack Low, CBL, and Relative Cool Gain, R2G, parameters, applicable to heat/cool systems only.
The Loop block is added to the strategy with these parameters set to default values. In many cases the default values
will give adequate stable straight line control, however, the response of the loop may not be ideal. This is because the
process characteristics are fixed by the design of the process, and therefore it is necessary to adjust the control
parameters to achieve best control. To determine the optimum values for any particular loop or process it is necessary
to carry out a procedure called Loop Tuning.
Caution
If changes are made to the process that affect the Control Loop response significantly, it may be necessary to retune
the control loop.
Users have the choice of tuning the loop automatically or manually. Both procedures require the loop to oscillate to
provide a control signal.
LOOP RESPONSE
Excluding loop oscillation, loop performance can be described as,
Under Damped
In this situation the terms are set to prevent oscillation but do lead to an overshoot of the PV followed by decaying
oscillation to finally settle at the SP. This type of response can give a minimum time to SP but overshoot may
cause problems in certain situations and the loop may be sensitive to sudden changes in Process Value. This will
result in further decaying oscillations before settling once again.
Critically Damped
This represents an ideal situation where overshoot to small step changes does not occur and the process responds
to changes in control, e.g. PV does not oscillate close to SP.
Over Damped
In this situation the loop responds in a controlled but sluggish manner that will result in a loop performance that is
not ideal and unnecessarily slow. The balancing of the P, I and D terms depend totally on the nature of the process
to be controlled.
Example
In a plastics extruder, a barrel zone will have a different response to a die, casting roll, drive loop, thickness control
loop or pressure loop. In order to achieve the best performance from an extrusion line all loop tuning parameters must
be set to their optimum values.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.4 Tune Page (Cont.)
INITIAL LOOP BLOCK SETTINGS

In addition to the tuning parameters, there are a number of other parameters that can effect the loop response. Ensure
that the following parameters, but not exclusively, are set before any tuning is initiated.
Setpoint
Before starting a tuning process, the control loop conditions should be set as closely as practicable to the actual
conditions that will be met in normal operation, e.g. in a furnace or oven application a representative load should
be included, an extruder should be running, etc.
Heat/Cool Limits
The minimum and maximum power delivered to the process can be limited by the parameters OP.OutputLo and
OP.OutputHi. In heat only control the default values are 0 and 100%, but in heat/cool control the defaults are
100 and 100% only. Although it is expected that most processes will be designed to work between these limits it
is possible to limit the power delivered to the process, e.g. if driving a 220V heater from a 240V source the heat
limit may be set 80% to ensure that the heater does not dissipate more than its maximum power.
Remote Output Limits
The OP.RemOPL and OP.RemOPH parameters must be set within the Heat/Cool Limits, if used.
Heat/Cool Deadband
In heat/cool control, use the OP.Ch2DeadB to set the distance between the heat and cool PBs. The default value
is 0%, indicating that the heating will turn off at the same time as cooling turns on. The deadband must be set to
ensure that the heat and cool channels will not run at the same time, particularly when cycling output stages are
installed.
Minimum On-Time
If either or both of the output channels is fitted with a relay, triac or logic output, the OP.NudgeUp and
OP.NudgeDn parameters apply the On-Time, for the cycling time of a time proportioning output and should be
configured correctly before tuning is started.
Output Rate limit
This parameter, OP.RateOP, is active during tuning and can affect the tuning results.
Valve Travel Time
If an output is connected to a motor valve positioner, OP.C1TravT and OP.C2TravT must be configured according
to the application.
Before the Tuning process begins, it is recommended
the tuning process is always started when PV and SP are not in close proximity. This allows start up conditions to
be measured and CutBack High, CBH, and CutBack Low, CBL values to be calculated more accurately.
the tuning should only be attempted during dwell periods and not during ramp stages. If a control loop is tuned
automatically, set Main.IntHold to Yes during each dwell period while Auto Tune is active. It may be worth
noting that tuning, carried out in dwell periods that are at different extremes of temperature can give different
results owing to non linearity of heating or cooling. This can provide a convenient way to establish values for
Gain Scheduling.
the OP.OutputHi and OP.OutputLo parameters are configured, as required. These overall output limit parameters
apply during tuning and normal operation.
the Tune.HiOutput and Tune.LoOutput parameters are configured, as required. These output power limit
parameters apply during the Auto Tune function.
Note The tighter power limit will always apply, e.g. if Tune.HiOutput is set to 80% and OP.OutputHi is set
to 70%, the output power will be limited to 70%. The measured value must oscillate to some degree
for the tuner to be able to calculate values. The limits must be set to allow oscillation about the SP.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.4 Tune page (Cont.)
AUTOMATIC TUNING
Automatic tuning operates by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in the PV, and calculates the PID
tuning parameter values from the amplitude and period of the oscillation. This automatically configures each of the
PID parameters with default values.
Proprtional Band, PB
This parameter is not tuned using this process.
Integral time, Ti, and Derivative, Td
If using PI, PD or P only control, i.e. if Ti and/or Td is set to OFF, disabled, relevant parameters will not be tuned.
CutBack High, PID.CBH, and CutBack Low, PID.CBL
These parameters can only be automatically tuned if a specific value, not AUTO, is configured before Auto Tune
is started. If PID.CBH and/or PID.CBL is set to Auto, these parameters will remain at the default value 3 x PB.
Note Auto Tune will never return PID.CBH or PID.CBL values less than 1.6 x PB.
Relative Cool Gain, PID.R2G

This parameter can only be automatically tuned if the control is configured as heat/cool. The tuning will always
limit the calculated PID.R2G value to between 0.1 and 10. If the calculated value is exceeds this limit, R2G
remains at its previous value but all other tuning parameters are changed.
Loop Break Time, PID.LBT
The tuning of this parameter depends on the Ti configuration. If Ti is set to OFF, disabled, this parameter is set to
12 x Td, but if Ti is enabled, PID.LBT is set to 2 x Ti.
Caution
During automatic tuning faults may occur. If a sensor break occurs, Diag.SensorB shows On and Alarms.SensorB
shows TRUE, the Auto Tune will abort and the instrument will deliver the output power configured in OP.SbrkOP.
Once the fault has been repaired and the fields cleared, the Auto Tune must be re-started.
Automatic tuning can be performed if more than one PID set is used in the control loop. The calculated PID values
will be written to the PID set that is active on completion of the tune. Therefore, the user can tune and write the PID
values within the boundaries of the appropriate PID set.
Note If the boundaries are close at the completion of the tune, it is not guaranteed the PID values will be
written to the correct set, particularly if PID.ShedType shows PV or OP. In this situation the
PID.ShedType should be set to Set and the Active Set chosen manually.
The Auto Tune algorithm reacts depending on the initial conditions of the plant, i.e. from where PV starts. In a
heat/cool, or heat only control loop, automatic tuning can start when PV is,
below the SP
at the same value as the SP, i.e. within 0.3% of the range if Setup.PB_Units is set to % or 1 engineering unit, 1 in
1000, if Setup.PB_Units is set to Eng.
outside the OP.OutputHi and OP.OutputLo or Tune.HiOutput and Tune.LoOutput as determined by the tightest
parameter values.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK

Tuning from below SP - Heat/Cool control loop
The point that automatic tuning is performed, Tune Control Point, is designed to operate just below the Target SP,
LOOP_PID block - Main.TargetSP, the expected operating value of the process. Using a Tuning Control Point
configured below the Target SP ensures the process is not significantly overheated or overcooled and is calculated as,
Tune Control Point = Initial PV + 0.75 (Target SP Initial PV)
Note The Initial PV is the PV measured after a settling period of 1 minute.
Example
If Target SP = 500C and Initial PV = 20C, the Tune Control Point is calculated at 380C.
If Target SP = 500C and Initial PV = 400C, the Tune Control Point is calculated at 475C.
Note An overshoot is likely to be less in the second example because the process temperature is already
close to the Target SP.
When automatically tuning a heat/cool control loop and the Initial PV is below the SP, a number of cycles are run to
calculate the PID tuning parameters.
i Auto Tune is started, Tune.Enable set On (A), but both heating and cooling power remain off for 1 minute (A - B)
to allow the algorithm to establish steady state condition, then calculate the Initial PV.
ii First heat/cool cycle (B - D) establishes the first overshoot used to calculate PID.CBL if it is not set to Auto.
iii Two cycles of oscillation (B - F) are produced to measure the peak to peak response, the true period of oscillation,
and calculate the PID terms.
iv An extra heat stage (F - G) is applied and all power is turned off to allow the plant to respond naturally. During
this period the PID.R2G is calculated, then PID.CBH is calculated using the sum PID.CBL x PID.R2G.
v Auto Tune is complete, Tune.Enable set Off (H). The control loop is now operating at the Target SP using the
automatically tuned PID term values.
Note This operation also applies if the Initial PV is above SP, but will start with full cooling applied from
(B), and not full heating, as below.
Temperature
Target SP First Overshoot peak to peak

(Main.TargetSP)
PV
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890 Hysteresis
Tune Control Point 12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890
(Alarms.Hyst)
OP
Initial PV
High Output
(Tune.HiOutput)
Zero Output
Low Output
(Tune.LoOutput) 1 min
A B C D E F G H
Time
Figure 6-2-4a Tuning from below SP - Heat/Cool control loop
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

Tuning from below SP - Heat only control loop
When automatically tuning a heat only control loop and the Initial PV is below the SP, a number of cycles are run to
calculate the PID tuning parameters. The operation is similar to the heat/cool control loop, but because a cooling
channel does not exist, it completes prematurely, ignoring the PID.R2G.
Note PID.R2G is set to 1.0 for heat only control loop
i Auto Tune is started, Tune.Enable set On (A), the heating power remains off for 1 minute (A - B) to allow the
algorithm to establish steady state condition, then calculate the Initial PV.
ii First heat cycle (B - D) establishes the first overshoot used to calculate PID.CBL if it is not set to Auto and
PID.CBH is set to the same value.
iii Two cycles of oscillation (B - F) are produced to measure the peak to peak response, the true period of oscillation,
and calculate the PID terms.
iv Auto Tune is complete, Tune.Enable set Off (F). The control loop is now operating at the Target SP using the
Note This operation also applies if the Initial PV is above SP, but will start with full cooling applied from
(B), and not full heating, PID.CBH is calculated, not PID.CBL, and PID.CBL is set to the same value
as PID.CBH.. The operation is similar to the heat/cool control loop, but because a cooling channel
does not exist, it completes prematurely, ignoring the PID.R2G.
Temperature
Target SP First Overshoot peak to peak

(Main.TargetSP)
PV
Tune Control Point 12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890
12345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890
Hysteresis
(Alarms.Hyst)
Initial PV
OP
High Output
(Tune.HiOutput)
Zero Output
Low Output
(Tune.LoOutput) 1 min
A B C D E F
Time
Figure 6-2-4b Tuning from below SP - Heat only control loop
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK

Tuning at SP - Heat/Cool and Heat only control loop
When automatically tuning either type of control loop and the Initial PV is configured at the same value as the SP, a
number of oscillations are produced to calculate the PID tuning parameters. This operation does not calculate
PID.CBH and PID.CBL because there is not an initial start up response to the application of heating or cooling.
Note PID.CBH and PID.CBL will never return a value less than 1.6 x PB.
i Auto Tune is started, Tune.Enable set On (A). The output is frozen at the current value for 1 minute (A - B), and
SP must remain within 0.3% of the range of the control if Setup.PB_Units is set to %, Percent, or 1 engineering
unit (1 in 1000) if set to Eng. Range is defined using the SP.RangeHi, and SP.RangeLo parameters. If during this
period the PV drifts outside these conditions Auto Tune will be aborted, and resumed from above or below SP
depending on which way the PV has drifted.
Note A Tune Control Point is not used because the loop is already at SP.
ii Cycles of oscillation (C - G) are produced by switching the output between the output limits, and are used to
measure the peak to peak response, the true period of oscillation, and calculate the PID terms.
iii An extra heat stage (G - H) is applied and all power is turned off (H) to allow the plant to respond naturally.
During this period the PID.R2G is calculated.
iv Auto Tune is complete, Tune.Enable set Off (I). The control loop is now operating at the Target SP using the
Temperature
peak to peak PV
Target SP 1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890 Hysteresis
(Main.TargetSP) 1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789012123456789012345678901234567890121234567890 (Alarms.Hyst)
OP
High Output
(Tune.HiOutput)
Zero Output
Low Output
(Tune.LoOutput)
C D E F G H I
1 min
A B
Time
Figure 6-2-4c Tuning from below SP - Heat/Cool and Heat only control loop
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
MANUAL TUNING
If automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results, the control loop can be tuned manually. There are a number of
standard methods for manual tuning, this is the Ziegler-Nichols method.
Note In a heat/cool control loop, channel 2 must be correctly configured for cooling before tuning is started
to allow accurate tuning of the PID.R2G.
i Adjust SP to the normal operating condition. It is assumed this will be above the PV so that heat only is applied.
ii Set the Integral Time, PID.Ti, and the Derivative Time, PID.Td, to OFF.
iii Set CutBack High, PID.CBH, and CutBack Low, PID.CBL, to Auto. These can be changed later, if required.
Note It is not important that PV does not settle precisely at the SP.
iv Depending how PV is reacting edit the PID.PB value. If PV is stable, reduce and keep reducing PID.PB until
just before PV starts to oscillate, allowing the loop to settle between each change. Record the PID.PB value and
the time taken for PV to oscillate. If PV is already oscillating, measure the time taken for PV to oscillate, then
increase the PID.PB until it just stops oscillating. Record the PID.PB value.
Note The measured time taken for PV to oscillate is used to calculate the PID.Ti and PID.Td values for
manually tuning the control loop, see table below.
v Configure the PID values according to the type of control used, see below.
Type of Control Proportional Band Integral Time Derivative Time

PID.PB PID.Ti PID.Td
Proportional Only 2 x PB OFF(Disabled) OFF(Disabled)

Proportional and Integral 2.2 x PB 0.8 x measured time OFF(Disabled)
Proportional, Integral and Derivative 1.7 x PB 0.5 x measured time 0.12 x measured time
Tuning the Relative Cool Gain, PID.R2G

The PID.R2G parameter is used to compensate for the different quantities of energy needed to heat, as opposed to that
needed to cool a process.
i Observe the oscillating PV, an uneven waveform indicates the energy needed for each process is not compensated
correctly.
ii Adjust the PID.R2G value to produce a symmetrical waveform showing the energy needed for each process is
compensated correctly.
iii When the waveform is symmetrical, configure the PID values according to the type of control used, see above.
Temperature
time taken for PV to oscillate
SP PV
PID.R2G value is correct
PID.R2G value is too large
PID.R2G value is too small
Time
Figure 6-2-4d Relative Cool Gain waveform tuning
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK

Tuning the CutBack High, PID.CBH, and CutBack Low, PID.CBL
The PID.CBH, and PID.CBL parameters are used prevent unacceptable overshoot and undershoot at startup or large
step changes in PV.
i Adjust SP to the normal operating condition. It is assumed this will be above the PV so that heat only is applied.
ii Set the Integral Time, PID.Ti, and the Derivative Time, PID.Td, to provide the optimum steady state control.
iii Set CutBack High, PID.CBH, and CutBack Low, PID.CBL, to one proportional bandwidth converted into display
units. This is calculated using PID.PB defined as a %, percentage, value in
PB
PID.CBH and PID.CBL = x Span of control
100
Example
If PB = 10% and the Span of the control is 0 - 1200C, then
10
PID.CBH and PID.CBL = x 1200 = 120
100
If overshoot is observed following the correct settings of the PID terms increase the value of PID.CBL by the value of
the overshoot in display units. If undershoot is observed increase the value of the parameter PID.CBH by the value of
the undershoot in display units
Display Units
Adjust PID.CBH to
Initial reduce undershoot when
Overshoot tuning from above SP
Main.SP
Adjust PID.CBL to
reduce overshoot when Initial
tuning from below SP Undershoot
Time
Figure 6-2-4d CutBack High, PID.CBH, and CutBack Low, PID.CBL waveform tuning
6.2.5 SP page
The SetPoint, SP, page of the Loop block provides parameters for configuring the SP used by the control loop.
The control SP, defined as the Working SetPoint (Main.WSP), is the value ultimately used to control the PV in a
control loop, and can be derived from,
SP.SP1 or SP.SP2, can be configured by the user and switched into use by an external signal or via a user interface
SP.AltSP, an external (remote) analogue source
SP.RateDone
SP.SPSelect SP.AltSPEn SP.SPRateDs
Yes
SP.RangeHi/ Value used in

SP.SP1 No SP.RateSP No
SP.RangeLo, Yes control algorithum
SP.SP2 SP.SPHiLim/
SP.SPTrim No
Yes SP.SPLoLim,
SP.AltSP SP.SPTrimHi/
SP.SPTrimLo
Ramp Max
Main.TargetSP Main.WSP
Ramp Ramp Min
Other Inputs, i.e. PV, Ramp Ramp Status

rate, Servo, SP changed
Figure 6-2-5a SetPoint, SP, page block diagram
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.5 SP page (Cont.)

When the control loop is configured, changes to the Main.TargetSP can cause abrupt changes to the output value. By
configuring Setpoint Integral Balance, SP.SPIntBal, abrupt changes, bumps, can be prevented, and the output power
gradually changed in accordance with the demand by an user via a User Screen.
This page also provides the facility to limit the rate of change of the SP before it is applied to the control algorithm. It
will also provide upper and lower SP limits, SP.SPHiLim and SP.SPLoLim, for the local SPs, SP.SP1 and SP.SP2.
Tip! SP.RangeHi and SP.RangeLo provides range information for the control loop in the control calculation
to generate the Proportional Bandwidth, Span = SP.RangeHi - SP.RangeLo. These parameters
ultimately affect all SP values.
User configurable methods for tracking are available, providing smooth transfers between SP values and between
operational modes.
Maximum
Display Units +Span
SP.RangeHi
SP.SPTrimHi
SP.SPHiLim
SP.AltSP SP.SP1 SP.SP2 Main.TargetSP Main.WSP Alarms.all SP.SPTrim
SP.SPLoLim
SP.SPTrimLo
SP.RangeLo
-Span
Minimum
Display Units
Figure 6-2-5b Setpoint Limits
Setpoint Rate Limit, SP.RateSP

The Setpoint Rate Limit, SP.RateSP, allows the rate of change of SP to be controlled and prevents step changes in
the SP. It is a simple symmetrical rate limiter including any configured Setpoint Trim, SP.SPTrim, applied to the
Working SP, Main.WSP. SP.RateSP is controlled by Setpoint Rate Limit Disable, SP.SPRateDS. If SP.SPRate is
set Off, any change made to the SP will be effective immediately, but when a value is set any change in the SP will
be effected at the value set in units per minute. SP.RateSP applies to SP.SP1, SP.SP2 and SP.AltSP.
When SP.RateSP is active SP.RateDone will display No. When the SP has been reached the value configured in
this parameter, SP.RateDone will change to Yes, but will be cleared if the Target Setpoint, Main.TargetSP, is
changed.
When SP.RateSP is set to a value, not Off, SP.SPRateDS can be used to control, disable and enable, the
SP.RateSP. This avoids constantly switching this parameter between Off and a value.
Note SP.RateSP is suspended and Main.WSP is set to 0 (zero) if the PV is in sensor break, Diag.SensorB set
Yes and Alarms.SBreak set TRUE. When the sensor break is cleared, Main.WSP returns to the defined
SP at the configured SP.RateSP.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.5 SP page (Cont.)

Setpoint Tracking, SP.SPTrack
Setpoint Tracking, SP.SPTrack, ensures the Local SP, SP.SP1 or SP.SP2, adopts the Alternate Setpoint, SP.AltSP,
value when switching from SP.SP1 or SP.SP2 to SP.AltSP to maintain bumpless transfer when returning to SP.SP1
or SP.SP2. Bumpless transfer does not take place when changing from Local to Remote.
Note If a SP.RateSP value is configured, the SP will be effected at the value set in units per minute when
changing from SP.SP1 or SP.SP2 to SP.AltSP.
The SP used by the control can be derived from,

local SPs, SP.SP1 or SP.SP2. These can be selected via SP.SPSelect, digital communications or by a digital
input that selects SP.SP1 or SP.SP2, e.g. to switch between normal running conditions and standby conditions.
If SP.RateSP is set OFF, the new SP value is adopted immediately when the switch is changed.
a Remote analogue source. The source could be an external analogue input into an analogue input module
wired to SP.AltSP or a User Value wired to SP.AltSP. The Alternate Setpoint, SP.AltSP, is used when the
SP.AltSPEn shows Yes.
Manual Tracking
When the control loop is operating in manual mode the currently selected SP, SP.SP1 or SP.SP2, tracks the PV.
When the control loop resumes automatic control there will be no step change in the resolved SP. Manual
tracking does not apply to the Alternate Setpoint, SP.AltSP.
Servo to PV Value
Main.WSP
After power cycling the instrument, the time taken to
Main.PV
obtain the Main.WSP can be increased by configuring
SP.ServToPV. When SP.ServToPV shows On, the Main.TargetSP
measured PV, Main.PV, is used as a start point for the
Main.WSP. This decreases the time required for the ServToPV ServToPV
Main.WSP to arrive at the Main.TargetSP. set Off set On
Time
Figure 6-2-5c PV starting point
6.2.6 OP page
The Output, OP, page of the of the Loop block provides parameters for output control algorithms and manages the
output in exception conditions, i.e. start up and sensor break. It selects the correct output sources to be used,
determines the heat or cool operation and then applies limits. Power FeedForward and non-linear cooling are also
applied. The outputs, OP.Ch1Outpt and OP.Ch2Outpt, are normally connected to an output module and converted into
an analogue or time proportioned signal for electrical heating, cooling or valve movement. These parameters are
limited using the upper and lower output limits, OP.OutputHi and OP.OutputLo. The following additional
configuration may also be required,
Individual output limits can be configured for each set of PID parameters when gain scheduling is used.
The Diag.SchdOPHi and Diag.SchdOPLo can be set to values that override the gain scheduling output values.
A limit can be applied from an external source, derived from OP.RemOPH and OP.RemOPLo, Remote output high
and Remote output low. These parameters are wireable, e.g. they can be wired to an analogue input module so
that a limit can be applied through some external strategy. However, if these parameters are not wired, 100%
limit is applied every time the instrument is powered up.
The tightest set, between Remote and PID, is connected to the output if an overall limit is applied using
parameters OP.OutputHi and OP.OutputLo.
Diag.WrkOPHi and Diag.WrkOPLo read only parameters showing the overall working output limits.
Note The tune limits are a separate part of the algorithm and are applied to the output during the tuning
process. The overall limits OP.OutputHi and OP.OutputLo always have priority.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.6 OP page (Cont.)

PID page Diag page

PID.OPHi1 OP page Diag page

Diag.SchdOpHi (read only)

Diag.SchdOpLo

(not wireable) OP.OutputHi
Min
Diag.WrkOpHi

PID.OPLo1 Working

Output
Diag.WrkOpLo

Tune_Set block OP page OP.OutputLo

OPHin OP.RemOpL

Output

limiting to +ve
OPLon OP.RemOpH

Tune page

Tune.HiOutput

Tune.LoOutput

Note Each OPHin and OPLon are derived from a Tune_set block identified by the n, where n equals the PID
set number.
Figure 6-2-5a Output Limits
Output Rate Limit, OP.RateOP
The Output Rate Limit, OP.RateOP, allows the rate of change of OP to be controlled and prevents step changes in
the OP. It is a simple symmetrical rate limiter applied to the Working OP, Main.WrkOP, and remains active while
the control loop is operating in manual mode. The OP.RateOP is performed by determining the direction the
output is changing, and incrementing or decrementing the Working Output, Main.WrkOP, until Main.WrkOP is
equal to the required Target Output, Diag.TargetOP.
The incremental or decremental value is calculated based on the sampling (update) rate of the algorithm, i.e.
110ms, and the configured OP.RateOP value. Any change in output less than the rate limit increment will take
effect immediately. The direction and increment is calculated on every execution of the rate limit. Therefore, if
the rate limit is changed during execution, the new rate of change will take effect immediately. If the output is
changed while rate limiting is taking place, the new value will take effect immediately in the direction of the rate
limit and in determining whether the rate limit has completed.
Note The OP.RateOP is self-correcting, i.e. if the increment is small and is lost in the floating point
resolution, the increment will be accumulated until it takes effect.
OP.RateOP is controlled by Output Rate Limit Disable, OP.RateDis. If OP.RateOP shows Off, any change made
to the OP will be effective immediately, but when a value is set any change in the OP will be effected at the rate
set in %, per cent, per second.
When OP.RateOP is set to a value, not Off, OP.RateDis can be used to control, disable and enable, the
OP.RateOP. This avoids constantly switching this parameter between Off and a value.
Sensor Break Mode, OP.SbrkMode
The Sensor Break Mode, OP.SbrkMode, determines the response of the control loop when a Sensor Break occurs.
When a Sensor Break is detected by the measurement system, Diag.SensorB shows On and Main.Alarms.Sbreak
set TRUE, the output can be configured to go to a pre-set value, defined by OP.SbrkOP, or remain at its current
value, OP.SbrkMode set Hold.
When OP.SbrkMode shows SbrkOP, the output will ramp to the OP.SbrkOP value at the rate defined in
OP.RateOP, unless OP.RateOP shows Off causing the output to step to the OP.SbrkOP value. When
OP.SbrkMode shows Hold, the output of the loop will stay at its last good value. If an OP.RateOP value, not Off,
has been configured a small step may be seen, because the Main.WrkOP will limit to the 2 second old value.
When a Sensor Break has been cleared, the power output will ramp from the current value and transfer smoothly
to the control value.
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK

Forced Output, OP.ForcedOP
A Forced Output, OP.ForcedOP, is a manually defined control loop output value adopted when switching from
automatic control, Main.AutoMan shows Auto, to manual control, Main.AutoMan shows Man. By default, the
output power is maintained and can be edited by the user. An OP value can be automatically applied after power
cycling by defining the source using the OP.ManStart. When the OP.ManStart parameter is set On, OP.ManMode
is used to define the source of power applied at startup, but if set Off the source of power applied depends on
Main.AutoMan.
When the control loop output switches to manual mode, Main.AutoMan shows Man, the current Diag.TargetOP
value steps, OP.ManMode shows Step, to the output value derived from OP.ForcedOP. If OP.ManMode shows
Track or LastMop, the OP.ForcedOP value is not affected.
Note If OP.ManMode shows Track, and OP.TrackEN shows On, OP.ManOP is derived from a value tracking
the Main.WrkOP during automatic control, providing a bumpless transfer to manual mode. Any
subsequent edits to the Diag.TargetOP are tracked back into OP.ManOP. If OP.ManMode shows
LastMOP, the OP.ManOP value uses the last value configured by the user.
Power FeedForward, OP.PwrffEnb

Power FeedForward is used to drive a heating element. It monitors the line voltage and compensates for
fluctuations before they affect the process temperature, providing better steady state performance when the line
voltage is not stable. It is mainly used for digital type outputs that drive contactors or solid state relays.
Power FeedForward is only applicable to a heating application and can be controlled by Power FeedForward
Enable, OP.PwrffEnb shows On.
Note OP.PwrffEnb can be set Off, for any non-electric heating process or when analogue thyristor control is
used because compensation for power changes is included in the thyristor driver..
Example
Consider a process running at 25% power, with zero error and then the line voltage falls by 20%. The heater
power would drop by 36% because of the square law dependence of power on voltage. A drop in temperature
would result. After a time, the thermocouple and control loop would detect this fall and increase the On-Time of
the contactor just enough to bring the temperature back to SP. Meanwhile, the process would be running a bit
cooler than optimum that can cause some imperfection in the product.
With Power Feed Forward enabled, OP.PwrffEnb shows On, the line voltage is monitored continuously and
On-Time increased or decreased to compensate immediately. This prevents any temperature disturbance caused
by a line voltage change.
Note Power FeedForward and Feed Forward are not the same.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

Cooling Algorithm, OP.CoolType
Cooling Algorithm, OP.CoolType, is used to define the method of cooling a system that can vary between
applications.
Example
An extruder barrel can be cooled by forced air from a fan, or by circulating water or oil around a jacket. The
cooling effect is different depending on the method. The cooling algorithm can be set to linear where the control
output changes linearly with the PID demand signal, or it can be set to water, oil or fan where the output changes
non-linearly against the PID demand. The algorithm provides optimum performance for these methods of cooling,
Oil Cooling. Being non-evaporative, oil cooling is pulsed in a linear manner. It is a deep and direct cooling
method and needs a lower heat cool gain, PID.R2G, than fan cooling
Water Cooling. Water cooling does not operate well in areas running well above 100C. The first pulses of
water will flash off into steam giving a greatly increased cooling capacity due to the latent heat of
evaporation. When the area settles down, less or even no evaporation is possible and the cooling is less
severe. The Water cooling algoritm compensates for the transition out of the initial strong evaporative
cooling.
Fan Cooling. This is much gentler than water cooling and not so immediate or decisive because of the long
heat transfer path through the finned aluminium cooler and barrel. With fan cooling, a heat cool gain,
PID.R2G, setting of 3 upwards would be typical and delivery of pulses to the blower would be linear, i.e. the
On-Time would increase proportionally with percentage cool demand.
FeedForward,
FeedForward is a scaled value that is added to the PID output, before any limiting. It can be used for the
implementation of cascade loops or constant heat control. FeedForward is implemented such that the PID output
is limited to trim limits, OP.FFTrimLm, and acts as a trim on a FeedForward value, OP.FFOP. The OP.FFOP is
derived from the PV or SP, OP.FFType shows PV or SP, by scaling the PV or SP by the OP.FFGain and
OP.FFOffset. Alternatively, if OP.FFOP shows Remote, a remote value will be used for the OP.FFOP, this is not
subject to any scaling. The resultant OP.FFOP is added to the limited PID OP and becomes the PID output as far
as the output algorithm is concerned. The feedback value that is generated must have the OP.FFOP removed
before being used again by the PID algorithm, as shown below.
OP.FFType
OP.FFOffset
OP.FFType
Remote
SP
+
PV OP.FFGain +
- Feedback
+
SP.SP1 or OP.FFTrimLm
SP.SP2 Hi
+ Output
PV PID + Output
Algorithm
Lo
Figure 6-2-5b FeedForward block diagram
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.2.7 Diag page

The Diagnostic, Diag, page of the Loop block provides parameters that assist the commissioning of the control loop.
These parameters are generally read only, but can be wired from to produce an application specific strategy, e.g.
Diag.LpBreak can be wired to an output module to produce a physical output if the Loop Break Time, PID.LBT, is
exceeded.
Additional gain scheduling parameters are also provided. These display the current values of the control time
constants as set by the active PID list and determined by Gain Scheduling.
6.2.8 Alarms page

The Alarms page of the Loop block provides parameters that define the alarm limits applied during the operation of
the control loop and will help during commissioning.
High High Absolute, High Absolute, Low Absolute and Low Low Absolute, Alarms.HiHi,Alarms.Hi, Alarms.Lo,
and Alarms.LoLo
A High High Absolute, High Absolute, Low Absolute and Low Low Absolute value, displayed in engineering
units, define the limits of the process. If the configured value is exceeded the correpsonding alarm field is set
TRUE, i.e. Main.Alarms.Hi shows TRUE, if PV exceeds an Alarms.Hi set at 90. The action of these four
multipurpose parameters depends on which type of alarm function is selected (via the Type parameter):
HiHighAl = TRUE when PV > HiHigh
HighAl = TRUE when PV > High
LowAl = TRUE when PV < Low
LoLowAl = TRUE when PV < LoLow
An alarm is not reset immediately PV returns to the alarm level - PV must be inside the level by a margin equal to
the Hyst parameter before the alarm resets. This hysteresis permits clean transitions into and out of the alarm
condition. The configured Hysteresis value will be applied.
High Deviation and Low Deviation, Alarms.DevHi,and Alarms.DevLo
A High Deviation and Low Deviation (Error) value, displayed in engineering units, define the limits that PV can
deviate from SP before asserting an alarm, Main.Alarms.DevHi or Main.Alarms.DevLo. The high alarms are set
when the positive deviation exceeds the defined levels. The low alarms are set when the negative deviation exceeds
the levels:
HiHighAl = TRUE when (PVSetPoint) > HiHigh
HighAl = TRUE when (PVSetPoint) > High
LowAl = TRUE when (SetPointPV) > Low
LoLowAl = TRUE when (SetPointPV) > LoLow.
Hysteresis is applied to deviation values as it is to PV in absolute alarms.
Hysteresis, Alarms.Hyst
A hysteresis value, displayed in engineering units, is applicable to the High Absolute and Low Absolute Alarm
limits and the High Deviation, Low Deviation (Error) Alarm limits. This value provides a band that defines when
the alarm limits are set TRUE. Once an alarm has been annunciated, it is not cleared until the value causing the
alarm has returned inside the limit by an amount specified by this parameter.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.3 EFFECT OF CONTROL ACTION, HYSTERESIS AND DEADBAND
6.3.1 Control Action, Setup.CtrlAct

When configuring temperature control Setup.CtrlAct should be set to Rev. If using PID control this means the heater
power decreases as the PV increases, but if using on/off control, output 1, usually heat, will be on, 100%, when PV is
below the SP and output 2, usually cool, will be on when PV is above the SP.
6.3.2 Hysteresis, Alarms.Hyst

Hysteresis applies to on/off control only and is set in the units of the PV. In heating applications the output will turn
off when the PV is at SP. It will turn on again when the PV falls below SP by the hysteresis value, see below.
Hysteresis is used to prevent the OP from oscillating at the control SP. If Hysteresis is set to 0, any change in the PV
when operating at SP will change the OP, possibly causing unacceptable oscillations. Hysteresis should be set to a
value that provides acceptable life for the output contacts, but does not cause unacceptable oscillations in the PV.
Note If this performance is unacceptable, it is recommended that you try PID control.
Display Units
Hyst.C (Cooling Strategy Configuration

Hysteresis) Heat/Cool type On/Off Control
Setpoint (SP) 300C
SP 300C
Control Action Reverse
Hyst.H (Heating Heating Hysteresis 8C
Hysteresis) Cooling Hysteresis 10C
Channel2 Deadband Off
Timing
OP1 On A SP + Hyst.C = 300C,
(Heating 100%) Heating turned off
B SP + Hyst.C = 310C,
Cooling turned on
No OP
C SP - Hyst.H = 300C,
Cooling turned off
OP2 On
D SP - Hyst.H = 292C,
(Cooling 100%)
Heating turned on
A B C D
Time
Figure 6-2-6a Hysteresis applied, Deadband not applied
Display Units
Hyst.C (Cooling Strategy Configuration

Hysteresis) Heat/Cool type On/Off Control
Deadband Setpoint (SP) 300C
SP 300C
Control Action Reverse
Hyst.H (Heating Heating Hysteresis 8C
Hysteresis) Cooling Hysteresis 10C
Channel2 Deadband 50%of cooling
Timing
A SP + Hyst.C = 300C,
OP1 On Heating turned off
(Heating 100%) B SP + Hyst.C = 310C,
Cooling turned on
No OP C DeadBand = 305C,
OP.Ch2DeadB set to 20,
OP2 On Cooling turned off
(Cooling 100%) D SP - Hyst.H = 292C,
Power
Heating turned on
A B Deadband C D
Time
Figure 6-2-6b Hysteresis applied at 5%, Deadband applied at 50%
HA028898 Chapter 6
T2550 HANDBOOK
6.3.3 Deadband, OP.CH2DeadB

Channel 2 Deadband, OP.CH2DeadB, can operate on both on/off control or PID control. When used in these control
types it has the effect of widening the period when no heating or cooling is applied. However, in PID control its effect
is modified by both the PID.Ti and PID.Td.
OP.CH2DeadB is expected to be used in on/off control only. However, it can be used in PID control when actuators
take time to complete their cycle, ensuring that heating and cooling are not being applied at the same time, see
previous diagram.
Chapter 6 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 7 TASK ORGANISATION AND TUNING

The first section of this chapter describes these various software functions (tasks) and their scheduling within the
instrument. The next section describes user tasks and their associated block servers. User Task software structure and
block server operation is also outlined, as is User Task Tuning, by varying minimum repeat rates, is described.
Task Scheduling (section 7.1)
User Tasks (section 7.2)
User Task Tuning (section 7.3)
Data Coherence (section 7.4)
7.1 TASK SCHEDULING

All in-built and user-programmed instructions are performed serially, i.e. one at a time.
7.1.1 Tasks
A Task is a unit of software that is responsible for carrying out particular duties at certain times, usually while the
Database is running. There are 24 recognisable Tasks in the instrument. Most Tasks are fixed and cannot be varied by
the user. Others, the user tasks, are programmable, see User Tasks.
7.1.2 Priorities
Each task has a priority based on its importance to efficient and safe operation. Priorities are numbered from
1 (highest) to 24 (lowest). A task, once started, will run to completion unless it is interrupted at any time by a task of
higher priority. In this case the lower priority task suspends activities until the higher priority Task has finished, at
which point it resumes running. These interruptions are hierarchical; several Tasks may be held in suspension by
higher priority Tasks at any one time.
7.1.3 Functions
A list of Task functions is given in Table 7.1.3, below.
The following 6 tasks are the block servers and are under the control of the configuration engineer.
USER TASKS 1 TO 4
These are responsible for running up to four user tasks. User Task 1, Fast I/O task (10ms) and User Task 3, Slow I/O
Task (110ms) are synchronised to the I/O modules and are module type specific, see Table 1.3.1. The associated I/O
blocks can be assigned to User Task 1 or User Task 3, as applicable.
IMPORTANT Any blocks added to the database are automatically assigned to User Task 3 by default.
However, the SFC_CON block and all Sequences must always operate on User Task 4. The configured strategy
must take into account that data may be missed when reading and writing values between Sequences and the I/O
blocks. For example, consider the case where User Task 3 is updated at 110ms intervals and User Task 4 is updated
at 250ms intervals. A possible order of task execution is,
Other Tasks
User Task 3
User Task 4
Data from this execution of User task 3 is not

available for the next execution of User Task 4
HA028898 Chapter 7
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.1.3 TASK FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
CACHE SYNC SERVER

This Task is used to maintain synchronisation of cached blocks. The task is repeat driven every 110 msec, but this may
be extended depending on the available CPU time available after servicing User Tasks.
CACHE CONN SERVER

This Task is responsible for processing LIN field writes into and out of cached blocks. The task is repeat driven every
110 msec, but this may be extended depending on the available CPU time available after servicing User Tasks.
Task Schedule Function
1 Tick Every 5 msec Provides system check.

2 Rx_ICM Event driven Processes messages received over the ICM.
3 Rx_LIN Event driven Processes messages received over the LIN.
4 ICM_Mgr Every 50 msec Monitors ICM link low level status.
Applies timeouts to transmitted messages.
Reprograms ICM hardware if errors are detected
5 PRMT Event driven (<100msec) Process Redundancy Management Task.
Responsible for effecting and maintaining synchronisation between
redundant processors.
6 Pr_Rx Every 100 msec (approx.) Processes message received using ELIN via Port Resolution Protocol
(PRP).
7 EDBserv (X2) Every 10 msec (approx.) Manages ELIN communications with external databases via cached
blocks.
8 Network Event driven 'Housekeeping' for all transactions over the LIN.
9 File Sync Event driven Responsible for maintaining synchronisation of filing systems on redundant
systems.
10 Mod_Rx Event driven Processes messages received via GW Modbus.
11 ModServ Periodic Modbus database management.
12 User Task (x4) Every TaskRptn secs Runs User Task 1 and User Task 3 synchronised to the fast and slow I/O
task modules respectively. Both User Tasks run at an integer multiple (1)
of the repeat rate, i.e. User Task 1 runs at N * 10ms, and User Task 3 runs
at M * 110ms, where N and M are 1. User tasks 2 to 4 run at a repeat rate
set in header block.
13 Cache Sync Server Min. default 100 msec Responsible for maintaining synchronisation of cached blocks.
14 Cache Conn Server Min. default 100 msec Responsible for connections into cached blocks (i.e. LIN network field
writes)
15 LLC Every 100 msec (approx.) Monitors LIN link low level status.
Applies timeouts to transmitted messages.
Re-programs LIN hardware if errors are detected.
16 NFS Event driven Network Filing system. Processes LIN filing requests.
17 TTermcfg Event driven Runs the Terminal Configurator accessed via a Telnet session.
18 Pr_Maint Every 500 msec (approx.) PRP database management.
19 Load Event driven Loads a database on remote request.
20 Panel Event driven Runs the Human Machine Interface.
21 Config Event driven Runs the Terminal Configurator via the serial port
22 BatLoad Event driven Responsible for batch load operations (e.g. loading or unloading an SFC).
23 Bgnd (scan) Event driven Collates alarm information. Performs database checksum testing.
24 Idle Event driven 'Null task'. Provides environment for CPU execution, whilst no other tasks
run.
Table 7.1.3 Task scheduling
Chapter 7 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.2 USER TASKS
7.2.1 Terminology
USER TASK
A User Task is a defined set of function blocks in a database that are updated at a specific tick rate. This is normally
associated with instrument control.
BLOCK SERVER
A Block Server is a fixed software task, within this instrument, that executes a User Task, or processes cached blocks.
7.2.2 Execution times

User Task execution times are repeat driven, User Task 1, and User Task 3 are synchronised to the fast and slow I/O
task modules respectively. Both running at an integer multiple (1) of the repeat rate, i.e. User Task 1 runs at
N * 10ms, and User Task 3 runs at M * 110ms, where N and M are 1.
User task 1 has the highest priority, followed (in descending order) by User Task 2, User Task 3 and User Task 4
(lowest priority).
Note All I/O blocks for any I/O module must be configured to User Task 1 or User Task 3.
Each of the 4 User Tasks has a requested repeat rate. This can be configured using LINtools (Task n Period dialog)
or the Terminal Configurator (Block Full Description page).
All function blocks have a Task field, used to allocate each function block to one of the four available User Tasks.
This field may also be used to configure the requested repeat rate of the User Tasks. If the requested repeat rate is
changed via a function block allocated to a particular User Task, this change is made to the User Task, NOT the
function block, and affects all other function blocks assigned to that User Task.
If using the LINtools Database Editor, selecting the Task field from the function block Object Properties Pane reveals
the Task dialog. This dialog permits changes to the Task No. allocated to the function block. To enable changes to
the Task Period, which is changes to the requested repeat rate, click the right (next) arrow button to display the Task
Period dialog.
If the requested repeat rate is not configured (LINtools Task n Period dialog or Terminal Configurator Rate ms field
set to 0) the default request repeat rate is applied, 10ms for User Task 1 and User Task 2, and 110ms for User Task 3
and User Task 4.
Note Do not configure any Task to a faster requested repeat rate than any higher priority task. Any such
configuration will be ignored by the instrument, but will be run according to the rules stated in
Initiating repeat rates section.
HA028898 Chapter 7
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.2.3 User task block servers
BLOCK SERVER INTERACTIONS

There are six block servers in this instrument, one for each of the User Tasks, and two for the cached blocks (see
Table 7.1.3). The block servers are prioritised, repeat-rate driven, and fully coherent, see Data Coherence section.
The instruments block structured LIN Database supports cached blocks by showing local image of a remote function
block, i.e. a function block running in another instrument on the LIN. The cached function block allows interaction
with the remote function block. In a cached function block, the DBase field specifies the name of the remote LIN
Database containing the real function block.
Block Server 1 has the highest priority, and block server 6 the lowest. Interruption of one block server by another of
higher priority, see Priorities section. The User Task block servers will only start at intervals specified by the
corresponding Task repeat rate. If the task continues beyond the task repeat time, it will be suspended until the next
task repeat time, e.g. User Task 1 is set to repeat every 10 ms, but lasts 10.25 ms, it will start again at the next
scheduled repeat time.
Note User Task 3 is synchronised with the I/O modules and will start every 110ms. Refer to Table 1.3.1.
Figure 7.2.2a shows schematically how the block servers interact with each other according to their priorities. The
darker bars represent running tasks and the paler bars represent suspended tasks.
User Task 1
Synchronised to start every 10ms
Task running User Task 3
Synchronised to start every 110ms
Task suspended
T1used T3used
User Task 1
User Task 2
Priority
User Task 3
User Task 4
Cached sync server
Cached conn server
Time
Figure 7.2.2a User task block server interactions
Chapter 7 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.2.3 User task block servers (Cont.)
USER TASK BLOCK SERVER OPERATION

A higher priority user task block server always interrupts the running of a lower priority user task block server. Thus,
whenever a given user task is running, all higher priority user tasks must have run to completion.
Figure 7.2.2b shows, schematically, the sequence of events that occurs during the running of a user task block server.
These are as follows:
1. The user task is marked as busy. During this busy period lower priority tasks are suspended.
2. All connections sourced from higher priority tasks are copied into their destination blocks in this user task. This
occurs as a single, indivisible, operation.
3. The blocks and their associated intra-task connections are then executed in order.
4. All connections sourced from this user task are now copied into their destination blocks in all higher priority user
tasks, as a single, indivisible, operation.
5. The task busy flag is removed.
Note This structure results in the least work being carried out by the highest priority task.
Connections Connections
Mark task Input connects Output connects Mark task

as from higher from higher as
busy priority tasks priority tasks unbusy
Execute blocks
Coherent task body
Figure 7.2.2b User task block server operation
HA028898 Chapter 7
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.3 USER TASK TUNING
7.3.1 Initiating repeat rates

At Database start-up, various checks are performed on the requested task repeat rates. Starting with the highest
priority task, each block server initiates the following regulations,
Firstly, ensuring any requested repeat rate is NOT faster than any higher priority block server task. Any lower
priority block server task configured with a higher repeat rate is adjusted to match the next highest priority task.
Then, ensuring that the requested repeat rate of the I/O synchronised block servers (User Task 1 and User Task 3
only), is an integer multiple of the I/O repeat rate value.
7.3.2 Automatic dynamic tuning

To compensate for the variable nature of user task execution times, the spread of CPU loading across user tasks and
system tasks is monitored and user task repeat rates are altered, dynamically, to ensure a fair spread of CPU allocation.
The USERTASK block allows execution times and repeat times for all the user tasks and the cached block server to be
monitored. The TACTTUNE block shows the percentage CPU usage by the various user and system tasks in the
instrument. The prioritised nature of the user tasks should be allowed for when adjusting repeat rates (1 is the highest
priority, 4 the lowest). The reported execution time for a user task may include a period of suspension whilst higher
priority tasks execute.
Rapidly fluctuating repeat times for the lower priority tasks or a higher or unstable value of Stretch usually indicates an
attempt to allocate too much total CPU time to the user tasks.
7.3.3 Manual tuning

The Stretch value in the USERTASK block indicates how much the dynamic tuning has had to slow the Database.
During normal operation the Stretch value should show a value of 1, indicating that the User Tasks are running at the
requested rate, as configured in the Task Period field. Any small increases in the Stretch value, or occasional
fluctuations caused by the abnormal loading of the User Tasks are acceptable. However, if the Stretch value increases
significantly or is fluctuating erratically, the requested repeat rate will not be attained, causing the dynamic tuning to
be inadequate. Examination of the USERTASK block and TACTTUNE block will allow the identification of the CPU
with the highest usage. Simply adjust the requested repeat rate to reduce the CPU load.
Note Some aspects of Database execution can dynamically change the CPU usage, e.g. enabling an
ACTION block or starting a Sequential Function Chart (SFC). These do not run continuously but
affect the CPU loading when starting and while running.
Chapter 7 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.4 DATA COHERENCE
7.4.1 Data flow between tasks

Data coherence is an important aspect of control strategies involving more than one user task. Data flow is defined as
being coherent if during any single execution of a task the data input into it from outside the task is a snapshot -
unchanging during the execution of the task - and represents the values output from other tasks that have completed
their execution.
Data coherence, by definition, refers to connections that are remote (i.e. linking different tasks). Connections that are
limited to within a task (i.e. local), are simply dealt with by being copied from source to destination immediately
before executing the destination function block.
For any task, there are three important types of remote connection. These types, and the way in which data coherence
is ensured, are as follows.
CONNECTIONS INTO TASKS (FROM OTHER TASKS IN THE SAME INSTRUMENT (NODE))
In order to ensure that multiple uses (in this task) of the same value (from another task) always use the same iteration
of the value, such values are copied prior to the execution of all the executable blocks of this task - i.e. a snapshot is
taken of all values external to this task.
Two types of connection apply - those from higher priority tasks to lower priority tasks, and those from lower priority
tasks to higher priority tasks:
Higher to lower priority. For coherence, whenever connections out of a task are used, all their values must result
from the same iteration of that task. Owing to the priority structuring of the tasks, any connections from a higher
priority task into a lower priority task meet this requirement. This is because a lower priority task cannot interrupt
a higher priority task, which therefore always runs to completion. Hence, these connections are dealt with by a
snapshot copying at the start of the lower priority task.
Lower to higher priority. A low priority task may be interrupted by a higher priority task before completion, and
so be caught with an incoherent set of output values. To avoid such invalid values being passed on, the last
action of task execution is for the lower priority task to copy its set of coherent connections as a snapshot to the
higher priority task. In this way, the values passed on are always the last set of coherent values from a complete
task execution.
CONNECTIONS INTO THIS TASK (FROM OTHER TASKS IN ANOTHER INSTRUMENT)

Connections between nodes are effected by the use of cached blocks. The process of cached block transmission, and
reception at the destination end, is coherent for all the data within that function block.
At the destination end, the cached block exists on a cached block server. Connections from this cached block to other
blocks effectively become inter-server connections within the same node, the coherence of which is guaranteed (as
described in 'Connections into tasks...', immediately above).
HA028898 Chapter 7
T2550 HANDBOOK
7.4.1 DATAFLOW BETWEEN TASKS (Cont.)
CONNECTIONS OUT OF THIS TASK TO ANOTHER NODE

This type of connection results in data flow that is not coherent, because the data is transmitted across the network as
individual field writes, rather than complete block updates. If coherence is required, the block(s) can be cached in the
opposite direction, via an AN_CONN block for example. This is illustrated in Figure 7.4, where block A coherently
connects to block B across the LIN via the AN_CONN block (bold lines), but the connection is non-coherent when
routed via cached block B.
NODE 1 NODE 2
Coherent Block
Update
A Coherent AN_CONN AN_CONN
<local> <local> <cached>
Non-coherent
Non-coherent field write
B B
<cached> <local>
Figure 7.4 Coherent and non-coherent data flow across network
Chapter 7 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 8 EVENT LOG

This section describes the Event Log facility supported by this instrument.
The purpose of the Event Log is to record and store individually time stamped, Real-Time Clock, RTC, and instrument
internal time, events generated in the instrument, and provide a means of indicating the impact of an event on the
system.
Note This file is used to assist with diagnosing problems in the system.
8.1 THE EVENT LOG

Each event record is stored in a ASCII text file, using a single line for each event record. An I/O Subsystem with
provision for two Processors use two Event Log files, event_l.udz and event_r.udz for left and right processors
respectively. The event_l.udz file is also used in Simplex I/O Subsystem. Eventually, as more event records are
automatically added, the oldest event records are removed from the file. The file indicates the impact of the event on
the system using the ! character. Status, Warning, Error, and Major Error, are represented by 0, 1, 2 or 3 !
characters respectively.
The following example shows a typical file resulting from the power-up and start-up of a database on the primary
module of a duplex pair containing two GateWay instances.
Event Impact Real-Time Clock Instrument Internal Event Record
level time stamp time stamp Message
08/01/00 01:42:11 (0x0000028A) Power On / Reset

08/01/00 01:42:11 (0x000002DC) PRMT initial mode PRIMARY
08/01/00 01:42:34 (0x000014B8) Attempting Hot Start
! 08/01/00 01:42:34 (0x00001528) GW System failed to Hot Start
08/01/00 01:42:34 (0x00001528) GW System started from GWF file
08/01/00 01:42:34 (0x00001528) GW Load from file = TMC.GWF
08/01/00 01:42:34 (0x0000152C) GW Load from file = TMCM.GWF
08/01/00 01:42:35 (0x0000153C) Database Started
08/01/00 01:42:35 (0x00001543) GW Start GWCON block = gwcon1
08/01/00 01:42:35 (0x0000156D) PRMT block servers to PRIMARY
08/01/00 01:42:35 (0x00001579) Changeover state machine complete
08/01/00 01:43:52 (0x00005166) Locally generated Sync Request
08/01/00 01:43:57 (0x000055F9) Sync Completed Successfully
!! 08/01/00 01:44:22 (0x0000695D) Secondary has inferior LIN status
08/01/00 01:44:22 (0x0000695D) Locally generated Desync Request
08/01/00 01:44:22 (0x0000695D) Desync Completed Successfully
08/01/00 01:44:42 (0x000078FD) GW Reload GWCON block = gwcon2
08/01/00 01:44:42 (0x0000790B) GW Stop GWCON block = gwcon2
08/01/00 01:44:42 (0x00007910) GW Load from file = TMCM.GWF
Note The failure to Hot Start event record is a Warning, but Desync event record due to the disconnected
LIN cable is an Error.
Figure 8.1 Typical EventLog file, .udz, - example
HA028898 Chapter 8
T2550 HANDBOOK
8.1 The Event Log (Cont.)

The Event Log file, supports the recording of the following events,
Status
Status records, no ! characters, indicate normal operation events, e.g. power up, database start (hot start, cold start
Hot/Cold start, Terminal Configurator, Network), database stop, Online Reconfiguration operations, normal
synchronisation of a duplex pair, etc.
Warning
Warning records, one ! character, indicate minor abnormalities, e.g. hot start fails due to power off time exceeded,
controlled changeover of a duplex pair, etc.
Error
Error records, two ! characters, indicate real faults on the system, e.g. automated changeover of a duplex pair due to a
detected fault, running serial communications on unsupported versions of this instrument causing corruption of
communications bus on power-up. If any Error is written to the Event Log file, the Alarms.EventLog and
Status.EventLog fields of the database Tactician header block are setTRUE. This offers an output that can be linked
a display to provide immediate identification of a problem that can have an effect on the system.
Major Error
Major Error records, three ! characters, indicate real faults in the execution of the instrument that must be
investigated before continuing. If any Major Error is written to the Event Log file, the Alarms.EventLog and
Status.EventLog fields of the database header block are setTRUE. This offers an output that can be linked a display
to provide immediate identification of a problem that can have a serious effect on the system.
Chapter 8 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 9 DATA MANAGEMENT

This section describes the Data Management functionality supported by this instrument. Data Management
functionality will only operate on hardware status level 4 or later, e.g. Hardware J4, Software Version 4, and a valid
Licence, D10 to D90.
IMPORTANT Hardware status level 4 and later contains flash memory that supports Data Management, but
this will only be functional if the relevant licence is present. Use the Tactician Licence Tool to request a licence
upgrade.
The purpose of Data Management is to record, archive and visualise data values derived from a strategy during
run-time. The data values are recorded to a file stored in the flash memory of the instrument, and can then be archived
to a maximum of three FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Servers.
Data Recording (section 9.1)
Data Archiving (section 9.2)
Data Management Configuration (section 9.3)
Note Refer to the T2550 PAC Tutorial/User Guide, Part no. HA 029 723, for full details about Data
Management configuration.
9.1 DATA RECORDING

Data recording is the process of writing data values derived from selected parameters in the instrument strategy to a
Data Recording file, .uhh, see Data Recording File, .uhh. To simplify the organisation of the recorded fields, they are
configured in to groups, see Data Recording Groups, and held in the internal flash memory of the instrument. The
instrument can be configured to automatically push the .uhh files via the network to a defined FTP Server for
archiving, see Data Archiving.
Data recording is configured using LINtools, see LINtools help file (Part no. RM 263 001 U055), and downloaded to
the instrument with the database file, .dbf.
Note Instrument flash memory problems can be resolved by inspecting the RMEMDIAG block , see LIN
Block Reference Manual, Part no. HA 082 375 U003.
9.1.1 Data Recording File, .uhh

The Data Recording file, .uhh, is an electronic tamper-resistant file that is used to record the values derived from the
instrument during run-time. It is a non human-readable file format, that can only be interpreted by Review software.
9.1.2 Data Recording Groups

A Data Recording Group is a set of LIN block fields that are recorded to one sequence of files providing a method of
organising recorded data, e.g. a single group can be created for each area of the plant/system. This provides the ability
to group fields to best suit the process requirements. Each field is assigned to a group, identified by an RGROUP
block. Each group records the configured field value at a specified rate. Fields may be assigned to multiple groups
simultaneously, allowing the defined field to be recorded at different rates.
It is possible to record up to eight groups simultaneously, i.e. one RGROUP block per recording group, with a
maximum of 127 data values per group.
HA028898 Chapter 9
T2550 HANDBOOK
9.2 DATA ARCHIVING

Data archiving applies to the process of copying recorded data from the instruments internal flash memory to .uhh files
on a defined FTP Server across a network via FTP, see File Transfer Protocol (FTP). The archived .uhh file can then
be replayed using an off-line tool, Review software.
A maximum of three FTP servers can be defined in the Instrument Options page in the Instrument Properties dialog
to provide a back-up service for archiving the .uhh files. When multiple FTP Servers are configured the .uhh files are
archived to all defined FTP Servers.
Note Archiving problems can be resolved by inspecting the RARCDIAG block, see LIN Block Reference
Manual, Part no. HA 082 375 U003.
9.2.1 File Transfer Protocol (FTP)

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used Server/Client transfer mechanism. It allows the instrument to act as a FTP
client to up to three FTP Servers for the purpose of transferring recorded files from the flash memory to a remote computer.
9.3 DATA MANAGEMENT CONFIGURATION

Data Management is configured using LINtools. Groups of recorded fields are defined in the instrument database, and
can be individually customised using the Data Recording Configurator. Configuring individual fields provides a clear
identification of each recorded field when displayed in Review. LINtools also provides the facility to define the FTP
Servers used to archive the .uhh files, via the Instrument Properties dialog. Once the files are archived to the defined
FTP Servers, Review can be configured to display .uhh files from the different groups and instruments.
To configure data management,
1 Define the data recording configuration using LINtools.
2 Define the data archiving configuration using the Instrument Properties in LINtools.
3 Define the data visualisation configuration using Review.
Note Review can pull files directly from the instrument. It is not recommended but can be configured using the
Auto-Backup + Transfer dialog in Review, and requires a User Name, history, and a Password, history.
4 Configure the FTP Servers.
LINtools operating on PC
Configure, Download
and Monitor Strategy
using LINtools
T2550
Review operating on PC
To/From Process
Data Recording
Visualise files archived to
recorded data FTP Server
using Review FTP Server
configured on
computer
Figure 9.3 Data Management Configuration
Chapter 9 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 10 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER

This section describes the Setpoint Programmer facility supported by this instrument.
The purpose of a Setpoint Programmer is to create a program that will control and manage the changing target values
that an automatic control system, e.g. PID controller, will aim to reach.
Example
A boiler control system might have a temperature Setpoint, that is a temperature the control system aims to attain in the
system.
Setpoint Programming (section 10.1)
Program Configuration (section 10.2)
Note Refer to the T2550 PAC Tutorial/User Guide, Part no. HA 029 723, for full details about Setpoint
Programming configuration.
10.1 SETPOINT PROGRAMMING

The Program Template file (.uyw) decribes the structure of a Programmer, the number of Channels and corresponding
names, the number of Digital Events, Wait Conditions, Exit Conditions, and User Values, and how each Channel is
presented in the Programmer Editor. The description contained in the Program Template file is then used to ensure the
Program file (.uyy) corresponds to each Programmers structure. The names of individual process variables (Profiled
Channels), digital event outputs and user values defined in the Program Template file are all shown in the Programmer
Editor used to generate the Program.
The Program Template file must be modified using the Programmer Wizard in LINtools.
The Program Template file can be referenced by a local instrument or any other instrument on the same network. This
allows the same Program Template file to apply to multiple instruments.
The following diagram shows all system configuration components required for a Programmer application.
T2550
Computer
Download to
Instrument Folder
instrument
Instrument Folder
LINtools
Engineering Studio
Database
file
(.dbf) To/From Process
Programmer
Wizard
Download to T2550
instrument
Program
Template
Programmer
file
Editor Program
(.uyw)
file
(.uyy)
To/From Process
HA028898 Chapter 10
T2550 HANDBOOK
10.1 SETPOINT PROGRAMMING (Cont.)

The Setpoint Program is a set a values stored in a Program file that is used to control a specified process variable over a
defined period of time. The configured Program values produce a pattern of control for a single wired process variable value
(Profiled Channel) typically derived from an AI_UIO block connected to the plant/system. The output or current setpoint
(PROGCHAN.Monitor.CurrSP) of the channel is the demand value, and should be wired to the setpoint of a control loop,
i.e. LOOP_PID.SP.AltSP, together with the loop PV itself, so the loop can control an output, typically via an AO_UIO block,
to achieve the desired process value. The Program file is generated by the Programmer Editor within the constraints of a
Program Template file generated using the Programmer Wizard.
The Programmer Wizard is launched from LINtools Engineering Studio and simplifies the generating or editing of a
Program Template file. It also automatically creates a PROG_WIZ compound in the Database file (.dbf). This
compound contains
1 PROGCTRL block, used to control the overall execution of the Setpoint Program
up to 8 PROGCHAN blocks, one for each profiled setpoint per PROG_WIZ compound,
up to 8 SEGMENT blocks per channel maximum, each SEGMENT block offering 4 program segments
While using the Programmer Wizard to configure the Program Template file, the individual process variables (Profiled
Channels) will be titled for identification in the Programmer Editor. The wizard can also be used to specify the maximum
number of digital event outputs, user values and segments allowed in the Program. The total number of digital event outputs,
user values and Wait/Exit conditions is only limited by the size of the Database file and the remaining number of
PROGCHAN blocks available. Additional PROGCHAN blocks will be automatically created if more than 16 digital event
outputs and 4 user values are requested, but only up to 8 PROGCHAN blocks can exist in a PROG_WIZ compound.
10.1.1 Programs
This instrument supports single and multi-channel Programs. This is defined by the number of Name entries in the
Profiled Channels page of the Programmer Wizard. The Chart pane in the Programmer Editor shows a maximum of
three Profiled Channels, the first two Name entries in the Programmer Wizard correspond to the two most upper
Profiled Channels the other Profiled Channel displayed in the lowest Chart position is the one selected in the Segment
grid. The lowest Chart position can also show a Digital Event Output, or User Values by selecting it from the
Properties pane, see below.
A single channel Program, i.e. the control of one input value from the plant/system, supports Step, Dwell,
RampRate, RampTime, and End Segment types. The Profiled Channel appears in the upper most Chart position,
allowing Digital Event Output, and User Values to be displayed in the remaining Chart positions.
Chart Pane Program Properties Pane
A multi-channel Program, i.e. the
control of more than one input
value from the plant/system over
an identical time period, supports
Step, Dwell, RampTime, and End
Segment types, but does not
support RampRate Segment type.
The first two Profiled Channels
always appear in the upper most
Chart positions in the order
defined in the Programmer
Wizard, and in the lowest Chart
position displays the selected
information as stated above.
Segment grid
Chapter 10 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
10.2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

A Setpoint Program is configured using LINtools and the Programmer Editor. LINtools provides the Programmer
Wizard to generate and/or edit a Program Template file and create a PROG_WIZ compound containing the required
PROGCTRL block, PROGCHAN blocks and SEGMENT blocks. The Programmer Editor is used to configure a
Program, the pattern of control for each profiled setpoint, Digital Event Outputs, User Values, Wait conditions and Exit
conditions. Any Program Template file can be used to construct many different Programs that can be run by each
Programmer instance.
The PROGCTRL block is an interface between the Programmer Editor and the Database file. It provides control and
management of the Program. The number of PROGCHAN blocks is equal to the number of Profiled Channels plus
sufficient blocks to support the requested number of Digital Event Outputs and User Values. Any PROGCHAN blocks
that have been automatically created simply to add further Digital Event Outputs or User Values have their Profiled
Channels disabled (PROGCHAN.Config.Options.DisChan set TRUE). Each SEGMENT block supports 4 segments. It
uses pages to distinguish between segments and each page shows a segment configured in the Programmer Editor.
To configure a Setpoint Program,
1 In LINtools, create (edit) the instrument Program Template file using the Programmer Wizard on the Tools menu.
IMPORTANT To prevent erroneous Program Template file configuration always use the wizard to edit the
blocks in the PROG_WIZ compound. Changing the number of Profiled Channels, Digital Events, or User Values
will invalidate any Program file created with the previous version.
2 Wire the control loop configuration (LOOP_PID block) to the Programmer configuration (PROGCHAN block)
and return the current setpoint from the Programmer configuration (PROGCHAN block) to the control loop
configuration configuration (LOOP_PID block). This will provide the setpoint control for the control loop
configuration.Wire the input values (AI_UIO.PV) from the plant/system to the control loop (LOOP_PID.Main.PV).
z Wire the Digital Events and User Values defined using the Programmer Wizard to appropriate output blocks.
z Wire to the required Wait conditions and Exit conditions defined using the Programmer Wizard from
appropriate input blocks.
When wiring is complete, save the Database file. Add the Program Template file and the Program file to the List
of files to be Downloaded.
Note Refer to the T2550 PAC Tutorial/User Guide, Part no. HA 029 723, for full details about setpoint
control wiring.
3 Create and/or open a Program file. This can be done by using the context menu available when selecting the
PROGCTRL.File.ProgFile (block.page.field) in the Object Properties pane in LINtools after providing the
Program name, or by opening the Programmer Editor , and selecting File > New (Open), and choose the Program
Template file that matches the blocks of a PROG_WIZ compound in the database.
4 Configure the Program, setting each Segment type, Duration, and Target Setpoint in the Segment grid as required. Then
configure the Digital Event Outputs, User Values, Exit and/or Wait conditions in the Program Properties Pane.
Note Refer to LINtools and Programmer Editor for full details.
5 Download all relevant files to the instrument.

Note Connect to the instrument from the Programmer Editor to control the running Program.
HA028898 Chapter 10
T2550 HANDBOOK
10.2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Programmer Editor operating on PC
LINtools operating on PC
Configure Program file

using Programmer Editor
Configure, Download and Monitor

Strategy using LINtools
T2550
To/From Process
Figure 10.3 Setpoint Program Configuration
Chapter 10 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 11 ERROR CONDITIONS AND DIAGNOSTICS

This chapter describes the various ways to tell if a fault has occurred in the T2550 instrument, (not in the process being
supervised).
Error indication types (section 11.1)
LED error displays (section 11.2)
Power-up failures (section 11.3)
Power On Self Tests (POSTs) (section 11.4)
Diagnostic blocks (section 11.5)
11.1 ERROR INDICATION TYPES

Error indications include:
LEDs. The LEDs are the most immediate source of error and instrument status information concerning
Basic I/O System (BIOS) start, watchdog functions and normal running. During BIOS start, the
LEDs are momentarily illuminated to indicate the BIOS status. If a T2550 IOC Module start
fails, the pattern that these LEDs adopt prior to the failure is helpful to service engineers, so it is
recommended that this pattern is recorded (along with the unit serial number) before a service
call is made.
POSTs. The results of Power On Self Tests (POSTs) can be used to pinpoint error conditions in the
instrument. Refer to Power On Self Tests (POSTs) And Error Numbers section.
Diagnostic blocks. A range of function blocks can be included in the running Strategy Database to provide
diagnostic information on various topics, including the redundancy mechanism, the ICM
(Inter-processor Communications Mechanism), the I/O interface, and others.
HA028898 Chapter 11
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.2 LED ERROR DISPLAYS

The LEDs are the primary method of displaying errors.
11.2.1 LEDs
Figure 11.2.1 shows the T2550 IOC Module front panel LEDs. Table 11.2.1 specifies their functions.
Status
Fault
Battery
indicators
Duplex
Watchdog switch
Primary
Standby
Sync switch
Status and Desync switch

Switching
Ethernet
Ethernet (Speed)
Communications
indicator Ethernet (Activity)
Serial Watchdog Relay (if fitted)

Communications, Serial Communications Port
Watchdog Relay, External Battery connector
and Power
(Terminal Unit) 24V dc
PROFIBUS DUPLEX TERMINAL UNIT
External Battery connector

Profibus 9-Way D-Type
Communications Port
24V dc
Note The Simplex Unit does not support the external battery supply, but does support battery backup via an
Figure 11.2.1 Front panel layout (Redundant Configuration)
Chapter 11 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.2.1 LEDs (Cont.)
LED Colour Function
Status Green ........................ Main Power input valid

Off ............................. Main Power input failed
Fault Red ............................ Module missing/faulty, incorrect type/base, any H/W fault,
Watchdog Failure if ALL other LEDs are extinguished, including Status LED
Flashing .................... Database file unsaved, missing, or faulty. A *.dbf and corresponding *.run
file do not exist on the T2550
Off ............................. No H/W faults detected
Battery Green ........................ Battery OK

Flashing .................... Battery failed or not fitted
Off ............................. Battery deliberately not fitted
Communications Yellow ........................ T2550R module transmitting field communications
Off ............................. T2550R module not transmitting field communications
IP Resolution Yellow ........................ IP address resolved successfully
Flashing .................... IP address being resolved or the cable is broken/disconnected
Off ............................. IP address cannot be resolved or DHCP failure
Duplex Green ........................ Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are coupled
Flashing .................... Primary and Secondary T2550R modules are decoupled
Off ............................. Not operating in Redundant mode
Primary Green ........................ This is the Primary T2550R module and a running strategy
Flashing .................... The Primary T2550R module is loading a strategy or idle
Off ............................. Not Primary T2550R module
Standby Yellow ........................ This is the Secondary T2550R module and is synchronised
Flashing .................... The T2550R modules are synchronising
Off ............................. Not the active Secondary T2550R module
Ethernet (Speed) Green ........................ 100 MB Ethernet (speed) configuration
Off ............................. 10 MB Ethernet (speed) configuration
Ethernet (Activity) Yellow ........................ Connected to live Ethernet network
Sporadic Flashing ..... Ethernet network traffic detected
Off ............................. Ethernet connection invalid
Notes
1 All LEDs flash at a rate of 600ms ON, 600ms OFF.
2 IIf ALL LEDs are extinguished, excluding the Fault LED, the instrument has Watchdogged. If the Options
Switch SW2:S1 is set OFF, press the Watchdog switch to reset the instrument. This has no effect when a
T2550R is not in a watchdog condition.
Table 11.2.1 LED functions
HA028898 Chapter 11
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.2.2 Instrument failure modes

The LEDs directly indicate the following T2550 IOC Module failure or potential failure modes:
Loss of Power
Watchdog
Communications failure
Loss of primary status
Decoupling
Desynchronisation
When either or both T2550R modules, running as one of a redundant pair, fail, it usually changes its redundancy state
in response to the failure, e.g. from primary to secondary, or from synchronised to unsynchronised and sometimes,
coupled to decoupled.
LEDs are illuminated to assist with identifying the state each T2550R module is in, as well as the nature of any failure.
(The Standby, Communications and/or Duplex LEDs will be on, off or flashing as indicated in Table 11.2.1.)
11.2.3 Power failure

In the event of a power failure, the affected T2550 IOC Module enter a Power fail state. This occurs when the 24V
supply cannot power the T2550 instrument.
In the event of a 24V power failure the Status LED on the T2550 IOC Module will be extinguished. If an external
battery is fitted power will remain to allow Hot Start operation, but the cause must be located and repaired within the
life span of the battery. An internal supercap will support the Hot Start facility for up to 24 hours.
11.2.4 Watchdog failure

In the event of a Watchdog failure, the affected T2550R Module enters a Watchdog fail state.
If the Watchdog Retry switch (Duplex Unit - SW2:S1) is set ON, the T2550R module will automatically attempt to
restart the CPU. If the Watchdog Retry switch is set OFF, ALL LEDs are extinguished excluding the Fault LED, and
the CPU will only restart after operating the Watchdog switch on the T2550R module.
On watchdog failure in redundant mode, the surviving T2550R module adopts (or maintains) the PRIMARY
UNSYNCHRONISED state. The database can only run if synchronised before changeover, halting it otherwise.
Chapter 11 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.2.5 Inter-processor Communications Mechanism for redundancy failure
Note An Inter-processor Communications Mechanism (ICM) failure is not associated with any single T2550
IOC Module, and so is not classed as either primary or secondary fault.
An Inter-processor Communications Mechanism (ICM) failure occurs when the primary and secondary T2550R
modules can no longer communicate with each other across the internal high-speed link, making database
synchronisation impossible to maintain. An ICM failure causes the primary and secondary modules to decouple, but
does not permit a changeover.
ACTION IN THE EVENT OF ICM FAILURE

In the event of an ICM failure the T2550 IOC Module will decouple. Decoupling is indicated by the flashing
Duplex LED on the modules, see Decoupled Instrument section. The strategy must be designed to send the
supervisory system an appropriate alarm to annunciate this ICM failure state, (e.g. use the RED_CTRL blocks
PrHWstat.ICM_Ok and SeHWstat.ICM_Ok bits).
If the ICM does fail, elimate the cause of the failure, by first replacing the secondary T2550R module. If this solves
the problem re-synchronise the T2550R modules. If the fault persists, the running, primary T2550R module is the
most likely cause and should be replaced. Initially the original secondary should be re-fitted within 12 hours as it is
unlikely to be faulty. The faulty primary T2550R module, should now be removed, causing the secondary to take over
as sole primary but with a stopped database. If appropriate, restart the existing database by powering down and then
up again. Otherwise, reload a default database and restart it in the new primary T2550R module.
This last option is a Cold Start and requires manual supervision of the plant during the transition.
Note A fault in the Terminal Unit is a possible but unlikely cause of ICM failure.
11.2.6 LIN failure

This occurs when a T2550 IOC Module is not communicating over the LIN, because the cable is damaged or
disconnected or there is a hardware (electronics) failure.
An interconnection failure causes the relevant Ethernet (Activity) LED associated with the affected T2550 IOC
Module to extinguish and the yellow IP LED to flash.
A LIN failure in a synchronised primary T2550R Module causes primary/secondary changeover and loss
of synchronisation, i.e. Primary synchronised adopts Secondary unsynchronised, and Secondary synchronised adopts
Primary unsynchronised.
If an unsynchronised primary T2550R module suffers a LIN failure no changes of state occur.
In the event of a LIN failure in a synchronised secondary T2550R module, it adopts the Secondary unsynchronised
state (Standby LED off), and the primary T2550R module correspondingly desynchronises to the Primary
unsynchronised state. If the secondary was unsynchronised at the time of the failure, no change of state occurs.
EFFECT OF LIN FAILURE ON REDUNDANCY MODE CONTROL

LIN failure affects the ability to synchronise Primary and Secondary T2550R modules, for example, a LIN-failed
secondary T2550R module cannot successfully be synchronised with the primary by pressing the primarys Sync
switch. Attempts to do this are inhibited by the redundancy control software, and is indicated by the yellow Standby
LEDs lack of response.
HA028898 Chapter 11
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.2.7 Decoupled Instruments

This occurs when communications between unsynchronised primary and secondary modules are aborted because of a
conflict regarding the unsynchronised state. This causes the two T2550R modules to become decoupled. There are
various reasons for this decoupling, but generally it is due to a serious error, causing the modules to assume they
should be more than unsynchronised.
A decoupled state is indicated by the flashing Duplex LEDs on both T2550R modules. It can occur on a dual power
up if the two T2550R modules wildly conflict in their outlook of how they both powered down, i.e., if the two modules
power down, both as synchronised secondary modules, when powered up together, they may decouple - because the
dual power up cannot resolve the differences between them.
Primary
Duplex LED Flashing green Decoupled Instrument
Secondary
Duplex LED Flashing green Decoupled Instrument
ACTION IN THE EVENT OF DECOUPLED INSTRUMENTS

In the event of the primary and secondary modules becoming decoupled, the T2550R modules are already
unsynchronised, so rectify this by pressing the Sync switch on the primary module. The strategy must be designed to
send the supervisory system an appropriate alarm to annunciate this state, (e.g. use the RED_CTRL blocks
PrSWstat.Decoupld and SeSWstat.Decoupld bits).
Caution
The decoupled T2550R modules may not always re-synchronise after using the Sync switch, so further investigation
MUST ensure the cause is located and eliminated. If successful, both Duplex LEDs illuminate steady.
11.2.8 Desynchronisation
Desynchronisation is generally caused when the Database is stopped. If the database in the primary T2550R module
stops running, the green Primary LED flashes and the two T2550R modules desynchronise. No changeover occurs
and attempts to resynchronise are inhibited by the redundancy control software until the primary T2550R module starts
running again.
Only when the decision to changeover has been accepted, see Start-up Routine section, can the secondary (example,
right-hand) T2550R module assume control. Before the changeover can occur, the yellow Standby LED of the
secondary module is extinguished, and the green Primary LED starts to flash while loading the strategy from the
primary (example, left-hand) T2550R module. When the strategy has finished loading the previously secondary
(example, right-hand) T2550R module assumes control indicated by the continuously illuminated green Primary
LED. The changeover is completed when the database on the previously primary (example, left-hand) T2550R module
is stopped.
Chapter 11 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.3 POWER-UP FAILURE
11.3.1 Power-up routine

A number of error conditions can occur during the power-up phase. This power-up routine is described earlier, and
should be referred-to for detailed information. Various messages are generated by the T2550 IOC Module during
power-up. These messages can be displayed by running a Telnet session on a Computer via the ELIN network.
Figure 11.3.1a charts the power-up routine in a simplified schematic form, and Figure 11.3.1b shows the hot start
subroutine that may be called by the main power-up routine. The two flow diagrams also show various error
conditions.
Power Up
Switch set to Y
Auto Generate Database created
database?
N
Was this
unit secondary Y Unsynchronised
unsynch? Secondary
Valid N No database running

Shutdown last
last time
Time?
Switch N
set to hot or Hot start disabled
hot/cold?
Extract last known

status from memory
Does last N Database filing

loaded database match
mismatch
flash .RUN file?
Run Hot start routine

(fig 11.3.1b)
Was
Hot start N Switch N
successful? set to cold or Cold start disabled
hot/cold?
Y Y
Get .DBF file

that matches .RUN
file in Flash
Apply values saved in

the Cold-start
Parameter file (.cpf)
Was
Cold start N
successful? Create empty
database
Y
Run database Run database Idle Run database

(Hot Start) (Cold Start) (Auto)
Figure 11.3.1a Power-up routine flowchart - simplified
HA028898 Chapter 11
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.3.1 POWER-UP ROUTINE (Cont.)
Hot start called Entry from Hot or Hot/Cold start routine - see Figure 11.3.1a
Get .DBF file

that matches .RUN
file in Flash
Attempt N
successful?
N
RAM OK?
Is the root N
block valid?
Is the Real-Time N
Clock valid?
Is the root block N

clock healthy?
Extract last known

status from memory
Cold start Y
time exceeded?
Brownout Y
time exceeded?
N Set Brownout
alarm in root block
Return success Return fail
Figure 11.3.1b Hot/Cold Start routine flowchart - simplified
Chapter 11 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.4 POWER ON SELF TESTS (POSTS)

Whenever a T2550 instrument is powered-up, it automatically performs the Power On Self Tests (POSTs). These are a
series of diagnostic tests used to assess the installed instrument.
At switch on, the Basic I/O system (BIOS) starts running and checks that the Central Processor Unit (CPU)* is
operating correctly. This stage of power-up is apparent by the lighting of all LEDs shown in Figure 11.2.1.
Note * This CPU is a part of the internal electronics of the T2550 IOC Module.
The start-up process initiates the Power On Self Tests (POSTs) with the loading of the application and system code
from the Compact Flash card (accessible at the rear of the T2550 IOC Module). Firstly the Boot ROM is checked,
running each POST to ensure the Compact Flash Card (accessible at the rear of the T2550 IOC Module) is functioning
correctly, then the T2550 IOC Module is checked, again running each POST to ensure the application is operating
correctly. Each POST is initiated, however this may not always be in the same sequence.
Should any POST fail, the LEDs display a pattern that may be of use to service engineers, but these are not fully
interpretable by the user. The pattern is displayed for approxiately 11 seconds before the instrument enters a watchdog
state. However, the location of the POST failure is indicated by the Standby LED, if illuminated, an Application
POST has failed, whereas if it remains extinguished a Boot ROM POST has failed.
Note For full list of Power On Self Tests refer to the Power On Self Tests (POSTs) And Error Numbers
section.
The T2550 instrument now attempts to start the software, determining first whether the Options switch (SW1:S1) on
the Terminal Unit is set for redundant or non-redundant operation.
If redundant working is required, the primary/secondary status of each T2550R module is decided according to a
specific criteria, see Start-up routine section, if necessary, using signature data relating to last-times power down,
automatic synchronise states and so on.
A check is made to ensure that the ICM communications are valid, and if so, the primary T2550R module continues -
its power up sequence, according to the mode selected. If synchronisation is permitted the Standby LED starts
flashing on and off when the primary T2550R module starts to download data to the secondary T2550R module .
If the ICM test fails, or if non-redundant working is required, the T2550R module continues the power up sequence,
according to the mode selected.
HA028898 Chapter 11
T2550 HANDBOOK
11.5 DIAGNOSTIC BLOCKS

Several diagnostic function blocks are available from the DIAG category, that can be installed in the LIN Database at
configuration time to help in diagnosing any error conditions that may arise in the running strategy. The LINtools
program can then be used, via the LIN network, to look at the fields in these blocks to find out what is happening.
The table below shows a list of diagnostic blocks that are automatically generated as part of the automatically created
LIN Database, when the Options switches are set correctly, see Terminal Unit Switches section.
Note All function blocks are described in the LIN Block Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003).
BLOCK FUNCTION
DB_DIAG Database diagnostics block. Shows actual and maximum resource levels of the database by the current
software. Displayed parameter values are only valid at runtime.
EDB_DIAG External database diagnostics block. Shows connection information to one external database running in
remote instruments and monitors the cached block update rate tuning algorithm.
EIO_DIAG Ethernet I/O system diagnostic block. Shows the current state (Healthy/Unhealthy) of the expected and
actual I/O modules at each site. It can display a maximum of 16 I/O sites on one screen.
ELINDIAG ELIN diagnostics block. Statistics on the operation of the Ethernet Local Instrument Network (ELIN).
ICM_DIAG ICM diagnostics block. Statistics on numbers and types of message passing between redundant
T2550R modules.
IDENTITY IDENTITY diagnostics block. Identifies the instrument containing this block.
LIN_DEXT LIN High-level diagnostics extension block. Statistics on the operation of the Local Instrument Network
(LIN).
OPT_DIAG Options/Licence Control System diagnostics block. This block shows the user system attributes that may
impose some limit of operation, or cause a licence violation alarm. The block is not essential to the LIN
Database, and can be added while on-line.
RED_CTRL Redundancy Control block. If Duplex systems are configured, this block shows Processor Redundancy
Management Task (PRMT) parameters. It can also be used to trigger processor module
synchronisation, desynchronisation, and primary/secondary processor swap.
SFC_DIAG Sequence diagnostics block. If SFC is enabled, this block shows actual and maximum resource levels
of the sequence by the current software. It displays parameter values that are only valid at runtime.
TACTTUNE Tactician tuning block. System task monitoring in priority order.
USERTASK User Task diagnostic block. Strategy task performance monitoring.
Table 11.5 Typical diagnostic blocks required
Chapter 11 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
CHAPTER 12 SERVICE
This section describes the regular preventive changing of back-up batteries etc., and shows how to replace the
Compact Flash Memory card and live operating Modules.
Preventive Maintenance Schedule (section 12.1)
Replacement Procedures (section 12.2), including Compact Flash Memory card, Live T2550R Module, and
Battery Replacement (Simplex Only).
For details of how to update and change the instruments system software, boot ROM and libraries, please contact the
nearest manufacturers service centre.
Caution
All circuit boards associated with this unit are susceptible to damage due to static electrical discharges of voltages as
low as 60V. All relevant personnel must be aware of correct static handling procedures.
12.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following periods are recommended to guarantee maximum availability of the instrument, for use in what the
manufacturer considers to be a normal environment. Should the environment be particularly dirty, or particularly
clean, then the relevant parts of the schedule may be adjusted accordingly.
The following are recommended:
1. Every two to four years, the service consumables listed below should be replaced. The recommended
replacement period is a function of the average ambient temperature in which the instrument operates. At an
ambient of 50 degrees Celsius, the recommended replacement period is two years. For an ambient of 20 degrees
Celsius the recommended period is four years.
Service consumables are:
a) Battery (Simplex T2550S module only) - Part no. PA250983.
Whenever preventive maintenance is performed, it is recommended that a visual inspection of the instrument be made,
and any deposits of dirt or dust removed using a low-pressure compressed air duster such as are available from most
electronics distributors.
HA028898 Chapter 12
T2550 HANDBOOK
12.2 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
12.2.1 Firmware upgrade

The manufacturer can supply replacement Compact Flash Memory cards pre-programmed with the latest firmware
version. This allows the user to upgrade the T2550 IOC Module just by replacing the card. In such cases, the user is
responsible for reloading configuration files in the T2550 IOC Module. Alternatively, the manufacturers agents can
upgrade the firmware version with the card in situ thus retaining the user configuration.
COMPACT FLASH CARD REPLACMENT PROCEDURE

Figure 12.2.1 shows the replacement of the Compact Flash (CF) card fitted to current units. This procedure allows
databases, user configurations, IP address and Network name, to be transferred from one module to another, allowing
the Mean Time to Replace to be reduced to a minimum.
Note The Node address is set using the base unit switches and is therefore not transferred when replacing the
CF card.
1. Remove the relevant IOC Module from the Terminal Unit, see Installation.
2. At the rear of the T2550 IOC Module, grasp the edge of the card, and pull it out of its connector.
3. Fit the replacement card by inserting it into the slot and pushing carefully home.
4. Re-fit the Module to its terminal unit.
MAC ADDRESS
Slide Compact Flash

memory card in or out
Figure 12.2.1 Replacing the Compact Flash Memory Card
COMPACT FLASH (CF) CARD PRECAUTIONS

The Compact Flash card supplied with this unit contains data (such as the instruments MAC address, instrument
licence etc.), which, if lost cause the instrument to malfunction. These items cannot be replaced by the user, so if they
are lost they have to be replaced by the Controller manufacturer, and the cost of this replacement may include the full
charge for the licence.
The following rules should therefore be observed:
1. The card must not be reformatted.
2. Folders and / or system files must not be deleted.
3. The card must not be removed from the reader without the correct removal procedure having first been followed.
This procedure varies according to the version of Windows being used.
4. It is also recommended that a backup copy of all files and folders be made so that they may be restored in the
event of accidental removal. (This does not allow recovery from card reformatting or the loss of instrument
licence etc.)
For software updates, follow the published update procedure. This copies files to the Flash card, overwriting files
where necessary. Files should not first be deleted.
Chapter 12 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
12.2.2 Live T2550R Module replacement

Live replacement of a failed T2550 IOC Module can be carried out, without wiring disconnections. When operating in
Redundant mode either T2550R module can independantly drive the I/O modules allowing the replacement T2550R to
load its strategy and current status from the current primary T2550R Module.
Note It is recommended that a backup of the strategy is made before replacing any T2550R module.
LIVE T2550R MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1. Ensure the T2550R Module to be replaced is NOT the current primary module.
Note Always ensure the module being replaced in a redundant system is operating as the secondary T2550R
module. If the failed T2550R Module is the primary T2550R Module, press the Sync switch to
initiate the synchronisation process. This will ensure that both modules are synchronised allowing the
primary and secondary T2550R module to changeover.
Operation of the primary T2550R modules Desync switch may be required to desynchronise the
T2550R modules and ensure the failed module is operating as the secondary. See User Interface
section for details.
2. Shutdown the secondary T2550R module. To shutdown the secondary module, press and hold the Desync
switch for longer than 3 seconds.
3. When successfully shutdown, indicated when all LEDs are extinguished, the T2550R can be safely removed from
the Terminal Unit.
4. Fit the replacement T2550R module, see Fit a Module section. When the module has automatically initialised,
indicated by the secondary T2550R module LEDs, press the Sync switch on the primary T2550R module to
resynchronise both T2550R modules, which will permit redundancy changeover.
12.2.3 Battery replacement (Simplex only)
WARNING
The battery being replaced is likely to be partially charged, and must not be short-circuited, intentionally or
inadvertently, as to do so carries a risk of explosion with possible emission of dangerous and corrosive materials.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1. Remove the relevant T2550S module from the Simplex Terminal Unit, see Installation.
2. Carefully pull the battery from the socket.
3. Dispose of the battery according to local regulations regarding batteries.
4. Fit the new battery, in the appropiate position.
5. Re-assemble the unit.
HA028898 Chapter 12
T2550 HANDBOOK
Chapter 12 HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX A SPECIFICATION AND COSHH
A.1 INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE

This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree 2. These are
defined as follows:
A.1.1 Installation category II

The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V ac mains is 2500V.
A.1.2 Pollution degree 2

Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused by
condensation shall be expected.
HA028898 Appendix A
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page A - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
A.2 SPECIFICATION
This specification defines the T2550 instrument components:
General, including the Base Unit (section A.2.1)
T2550 Terminal Unit (section A.2.2)
T2550 IOC Module Hardware (section A.2.3)
T2550 LIN IOC Module Software (section A.2.4)
T2550 Profibus IOC Module Software (section A.2.5)
A.2.1 General specification

Physical
Dimensions
Base Unit: 162 mm wide x 180 mm high to 467 mm wide x 180 mm high depending on Base Unit option
Base Unit fixing centres: Dependant on Base Unit option
Weight
Base Unit without modules: 0.6kg to 2.5kg max depending on Base Unit option
Base Unit with modules: 1.0kg to 3.0kg max depending on Base Unit option
Safety earth connections By 2 M4 earth stud on lower flange of the Base Unit.
Plus optional protective earth terminal strip
Environmental
Temperature Storage: -25 to +85C
Operation: 0 to + 50C
Humidity Storage/Operation: 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
RFI EMC emissions: BS EN61326 2002-02
EMC immunity: BS EN61326 2002-02
Safety Specification BS EN61010-1/A2:1993
Vibration To IEC1131-2 section 2.1.3
(0.075mm peak amplitude10 to 57 Hz; 1g 57 to 150 Hz)
Protection Panel: IP20
Altitude 2000m
Appendix A HA028898
Page A - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
A.2.2 T2550 Terminal Unit specification

Physical
Shows the physical properties of both LIN Terminal Units and Profibus Terminal Units.
Dimensions (approx.)
Duplex, LIN and Profibus: 50 mm wide x 110 mm high
Simplex: 25 mm wide x 110 mm high
Weight (approx.)
Duplex, LIN and Profibus: 0.1kg
Simplex: 0.1kg
General
Switches
Duplex - SW1, segment 1: Redundant/Non-redundant mode select (duplex)
Duplex - SW1, segment 2 to 8: Instrument Address
SW2, segment 1: Watchdog retry (trip and try again mode)
SW2, segment 2 and 3: Hot/Cold restart and Automatic Database Generation
Simplex - SW1, segment 1: Not Used
Simplex - SW1, segment 2 to 8: ELIN address (simplex)
Simplex - SW1, segment 9 to 10: Hot/Cold restart and Automatic Database Generation
Links
LK1 and LK2: Protocol selection. LK1 and LK2 must be fitted as stated
LIN Terminal Unit
Pins1-2 RS485 3-wire Modbus TCP/IP communications.
Pins2-3 RS485 5-wire Modbus TCP/IP communications.
Profibus Terminal Unit
Pins1-2 RS485 Profibus Network terminated.
Pins2-3 RS485 Profibus Network unterminated.
Power Requirements
Main supply: 24V dc nom. (18 to 36Vdc) at 50W per module, maximum. Two supplies ORed together to provide Redundant
power supply on Duplex LIN or Profibus Terminal Unit. One supply on the LIN Simplex Terminal Unit.
Surge Current: 8A max.
Caution
If the supply voltage drops below 18V during start-up (as a result of current limiting for example) the instrument will fail to start. It will then attempt a
re-start, causing the unit to enter a repeating cycle. Damage will be caused to the instrument if it is left in this state for more than 30 mins.
Backup supplies
External (option) (Duplex): 3Volt on Duplex LIN or Profibus Terminal Unit. Typical drain per processor = 300 A at <3.3V
Internal (Simplex): LIN Simplex Terminal Unit ONLY, Lithium Manganese Dioxide battery. Maintains the Real-Time Clock for 1.5 years
continuous use.
Other connections
Modbus Connection
Duplex, Ethernet: Two RJ45 connectors per Terminal unit.
Simplex, Ethernet: One RJ45 connector per Terminal unit.
Profibus Connection
Duplex, Profibus: 9-Way D-Type, supporting Profibus communications
Note Relay connections available on an optional Terminal Unit. For each T2550R Module there is one Watchdog relay and two
alarm relays (operation configured by the user). For each relay, only the common and normally open contacts are used,
these being short circuit under normal operating conditions, and open circuit under alarm or power-off conditions.
HA028898 Appendix A
T2550 HANDBOOK
A.2.3 T2550 IOC Module hardware specification

General
Ethernet and Profibus Module
T2550R: 50mm wide x 90 mm high x 81mm deep - locked, 114 mm - unlocked
T2550S: 25mm wide x 90 mm high x 81mm deep - locked, 114 mm - unlocked
Flash memory
Removable flash memory: 32 MByte removable flash card
Hardware status: J4 and later (J1and later for Profibus) 7 MByte Internal Flash memory used for Data Recording.
Note The modules internal flash memory has a total of 8 MBytes, but 1 MByte is reserved for operation.
Panel Indicators
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) for: Status (24V dc nom - Main supply)
Fault indicator, Battery, Communications, IP Resolution, Duplex (redundant mode), Primary processor, Standby
processor, Ethernet (speed), Ethernet (activity)
Control switches
Switches for: Watchdog Reset
Synchronise/changeover
Desynchronise
Ethernet Communications port(s)

Ethernet communications support
Connectors: One RJ45 connector per IOC Module.
Network medium: Ethernet Category 5 cables.
Protocols: LIN over Ethernet / IP (ELIN), Modbus-TCP RTU slave, FTP.
Speed: 10/100 Mbps
Network Topology: Star connection to a hub
Line length (max): 100 metres, extendable by repeater
Allocation of IP address: Manual, DHCP, Link-Local or BootP
Isolation: 50V dc; 30V ac.
Modbus Communications port

Modbus communications support
Connector: RJ45 connector on Terminal unit.
Network medium: EIA485 (3-wire and 5-wire).
Protocols: MODBUS/JBUS RTU master and slave.
Isolation: Functional.
Profibus Communications port

Profibus communications support
Connector: One 9-way D-Type connector per Terminal unit.
Network medium: Standard Profibus cables.
Protocols: Profibus slave.
Isolation: 50V dc; 30V ac.
Note Profibus IOC module only.
Other connections
Watchdog Relay: Common and normally open contacts used
Note For each T2550 module there is one Watchdog relay. For each relay, only the common and normally open contacts are used,
these being short circuit under normal operating conditions, and open circuit under alarm or power-off conditions.
Appendix A HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
A.2.4 T2550 LIN IOC Module software specification

LIN Block libraries (continuous database function block categories)
Batch: Sequencing recipe/record and discrepancy checking
Communications: Instrument Communication blocks. Specific blocks MUST be included in the database to permit communications
Conditioning: Dynamic signal-processing and alarm collection
Configuration (Header): Instrument identity (Header) blocks
Control: Analogue control, simulation and communications
Convert: Convert dissimilar database field types, particularly enumerated values
Diagnostic: Diagnostics
I/O: Analogue and digital input output manual override
Logic: Boolean, latching, counting and comparison
Maths: Mathematical functions and free-format expressions
Organise: Organise system screens and grouping data for logging
Programmer: Control, monitor and schedule programs generated by the SetPoint Programme Editor
Recorder: Control and manage data recording
Selector: Selection, switching, alarm and display page management
Timing: Timing, sequencing, totalisation and events
Continuous database resources
Number of function blocks (maximum) 630
Number of templates (maximum) 50
Number of libraries (maximum) 32
Number of EDBs (maximum) 32
Number of FEATTs (maximum) 1260
Number of TEATTs (maximum) 315
Number of Servers (maximum) 6
Number of connections 1260
Control database size (maximum) 210 kByte
Notes
1. Apart from database memory sizes, these figures are default maximums and are the maximum recommended limits for typical
situations using version 6 hardware. Subject to note 2, below, it is possible to exceed some of the above maxima, although if
a database with more resources than the default maximum is loaded, then the maximum is set to the new value and there may
then be insufficient memory to load the entire database, allow Online Reconfiguration or achieve the configured task rate. In
such a case, the connections disappear first. (FEATTs are not subject to this problem, since when a database is saved, there
are not normally any FEATTs present, so the default maximum cannot be overridden.
2. If the EDB maximum is exceeded, some EDBs will malfunction. This is likely to affect the LINtools facility.
HA028898 Appendix A
T2550 HANDBOOK
A.2.4 T2550 LIN IOC Module software specification (Cont.)

LIN Block software license categories
Native LIN block types
Category
Block Type Foundation Standard Control Advanced Description
Batch Batch control and management
RECORD, DISCREP,
SFC_DISP, SFC_MON. 9
SFC_CON. 9
Communications Communications control
GW_CON, GW_TBL,
GWPROFS_CON. 9
Condition Signal processing control
AN_ALARM, DIGALARM
CHAR, UCHAR, FILECHAR. 9
FIITER, LEAD_LAG, LEADLAG,
FLOWCOMP, INVERT, RANGE,
TC_SEL. 9
TC_LIFE. 9
AGA8DATA, GASCONC,
ZIRCONIA. 9
Control Loop control and management
AN_CONN, DG_CONN. 9
ANMS, DGMS, MAN_STAT,
MODE, SETPOINT,
PID_LINK, SIM. 9
3_TERM, LOOP_PID,
PID, TUNE_SET. 9
Convert Conversion control and management
REALTIME. 9
Diagnostic Fault control and management
All blocks. 9
I/O I/O control and management
AI_UIO, AO_UIO,
DI_UIO, DO_UIO,
FI_UIO, MOD_UIO, TPO_UIO
MOD_DI_UIO, MOD_DO_UIO
CALIB_UIO. 9
Logic Logical calculation control
AND4, OR4, XOR4, NOT
COMPARE, COUNT
LATCH, PULSE. 9
Maths Mathematical calculation control
ACT_2A23WT,
ACTION, DIGACT. 9
ADD2, SUB2, MUL2,
DIV2, EXPR. 9
Organise Screen and Data management
AREA, GROUP. 9
Programmer Setpoint control and management
PROGCTRL, SEGMENT. 9
SPP_RAMP, PROGCHAN. 9
Recorder Data recording control and management
RGROUP. 9
DR_ANCHP, DR_DGCHP 9
Selector Signal selection control and management
ALC 9
2OF3VOTE, SELECT, SWITCH. 9
Timing Time control and management
SEQ, TIMER, TIMEDATE, TPO. 9
DELAY, DTIME, RATE_ALM,
RATE_LMT, SEQE, TOT_CON,
TOTAL, TOTAL2. 9
Appendix A HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

LIN Control Module Block software license categories
Supported Control Module block types
Category
Block Type Foundation Standard Control Advanced Description
Batch Batch control and management
IB_PLI. 9
Condition Signal processing control
AN_ALM_2. 9
Control Loop control and management
ANMANST, DGMANST,
CMBNXLIM. 9 9
Duty Motor demand control and management
DUTYSTBY. 9
Logic Logical calculation control
AND16, BITWISE_AND16,
BITWISE_OR16, BITWISE_XOR16
DT_COMPARE, OR16. 9
Maths Mathematical calculation control
ACT15A3W, ACTUI818,
WORD_ACT
ACTION, DIGACT. 9 ACTION and DIGACT available as LIN Blocks
Motors Motor control and management
MTR3IN. 9
Simple Var Data type variables control and management
BOOLEANS, BYTES, DATES,
INTEGERS, LONGS, SINGLES,
STRINGS, SUBFIELD16S,
SUBFIELD8S, TIMES, UBYTES,
UINTEGERS, ULONGS. 9
Timing Time control and management
DGDELAY8. 9
Valves Valve control and management
VLV1IN, VLV2IN, VLV3WAY. 9
HA028898 Appendix A
T2550 HANDBOOK

Sequence Control Resources
Sequence memory
Program data: 105 kBytes
N of independent sequence tasks: 136 simultaneously active
SFC Roots: 31
Steps: 420
Action associations: 1680
Actions: 840
Transitions: 630
Modbus
Modbus communications support
Configuration Tools: The Serial parameters of the instrument must be configured using the Computer based Modbus Tools software. The
instrument parameters can be configured using the Computer based Instrument Properties dialog
Memory Size: 14 kBytes
Maximum Tables: 80 Diagnostics Registers = 16 general purpose registers + 1 register for each table
Operating Mode: Master, Slave
Transparent Modbus Access
(TMA/TalkThru): Via Modbus Gateway file
Format: Direct 32 bit, Reverse 32 bit (D, and S)
Tick Rate: 5ms
Number of facilities: 3 Modbus Gateway facilities
Redundancy: Full control
Interface: 2 (Serial (COM1/COM2) + TCP/IP (TCP)). Serial interfaces are electrically limited to communicate with a maximum of
64 slave devices, 1 per register in the .gwf. TCP can communicate with 16 slave devices and 16 additional master
devices, via the ENET3 and ENET4 ports.
Profibus
Profibus communications support:
Configuration Tools: The Profibus parameters of the instrument must be configured using the Computer based Modbus Tools software. The
instrument parameters can be configured using the Computer based Instrument Properties dialog
Note To support communications via a Profibus Network, the dedicated Profibus hardware, Terminal Unit and IOC Module, MUST
be used and specific Modbus Address registers MUST be configured appropriately, see Configuration.
Memory Size: 14 kBytes

Maximum Tables: 80 Diagnostics Registers = 16 general purpose registers + 1 register for each table
Operating Mode: Slave
Baud Rate: Determined by Profibus Master device, 12000000 max.
Format: Cyclic and Acyclic, Input data and Output data
Tick Rate: 5ms
Redundancy: Full control
Interface: 1 (Serial (9-Way D-Type)). The Serial interface can communicate with a maximum of 126 devices including a single
Profibus Master device.
Appendix A HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
A.3 COSHH - BATTERY SPECIFICATION

Lithium Manganese Dioxide batteries are only fitted to the Simplex Terminal Unit.
Product: Back-up Batteries

Part Number:
PA250983 (mounted on circuit board assembly)
HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS
Name % Range TLV Toxicolological Data
Manganese Dioxide 65-75 Not Established Toxic if ingested
Propylene Carbonate 10-25 Not Established
Lithium 5-10 Not Established Highly toxic, Flammable
1, 2-Dimethoxythane 1-10 Not Established
PHYSICAL DATA
Boiling point Not applicable Specific gravity Not applicable
Vapour pressure Not applicable Solubility in water Not applicable
Odour Not applicable Colours Dark
FIRE AND EXPLOSIVE DATA

Flash point (deg C) (Method used) Not applicable Fammable Limit
LEL UEL
Extinguishing media As surrounding area Not applicable Not applicable
Special tire-tighting procedures Not applicable
Unusual fire and explosion hazards Batteries might explode due to excessive pressure build-up
which might not be self-venting. Toxic fumes might be
generated.
HEALTH HAZARD DATA

Threshold limit value Not applicable
LD 50 Oral Not applicable LD 50 Dermal Not applicable
Skin and eye irritation Should cells leak, the leak material will be a caustic solution. Avoid contact.
Over-exposure effects Not applicable
Chemical nature See above. There are no risks in normal use.
FIRST AID PROCEDURES

Eyes and skin If leakage occurs, wash the affected area with tepid water for at least 15 minutes. If eyes
are affected, wash with tepid water for at least 30 minutes. Seek medical assistance.
Ingestion If ingestion of leak material occurs, DO NOT induce vomiting. Give plenty of milk to drink.
Obtain immediate medical assistance, stating Lithium Manganese Dioxide battery.
Inhalation Not applicable.
REACTIVITY DATA
STABILITY Conditions to avoid
Mechanical damage, overcharging, short circuiting terminals,
Stable Yes Unstable charging temperatures outside the range 0 to 65 C, direct soldering.
Contact with strong oxidising agents.
Hazardous
decomposition Thermal degradation may produce hazardous fumes of Manganese and
products Lithium; oxides of carbon and other toxic by-products.
Hazardous
polymerisation Will not occur
SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES
In normal use there is no risk of leakage. If batteries are abused, this may lead to the
leaking of a caustic solution which will corrode aluminium and copper. The leaking
material should be neutralised using a weak acidic solution such as vinegar , or washed
away with copious amounts of water.
Contact should be avoided
DISPOSAL
Batteries must be disposed of according to current local regulations. Batteries should

not be discarded with normal refuse.
SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION

Respiratory Not applicable
Ventilation If batteries are leaking increase ventilation
Protective Clothing Use Butyl gloves and safety glasses when handling leaking batteries.
Other
HA028898 Appendix A
T2550 HANDBOOK
Appendix A HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX B POWER ON SELF TESTS (POSTS) AND ERROR NUMBERS

This chapter presents Power On Self Tests (POSTs) applicable to this instrument and all Error Numbers, that may be
displayed if a PC is connected to the instrument. The main topics covered are as follows:
Power On Self Tests (POSTs) (section B.1)
Error Numbers (section B.2)
B.1 POWER ON SELF TESTS (POSTS)

The results of Power On Self Tests (POSTs) can be used to pinpoint error conditions in the instrument.
This section lists, see Table B.1, the Power On Self Tests (POSTs) that may be displayed via the LEDs, see Figure B.1
below, on the instrument following the illumination of ALL LEDs, to signify the start of the tests.
Note If a POST failure occurs, the failed POST state will be displayed for several seconds (approximately 10
seconds) before the T2550 instrument watchdogs.
Firstly the Boot ROM is checked, running each POST to ensure the Compact Flash Memory card is functioning
correctly. Each POST is then repeated checking the operation of the T2550.
Note Some POSTs are run by the Boot ROM (indicated by an extinguished Standby LED). When
completed the POSTs are then run by the T2550 loaded from the Compact Flash Memory card
(indicated by an illuminated Standby LED).
Status
Fault
Battery
LEDs used for IP Resolution

POST indication
Duplex
Primary
Standby
Figure B.1 Power On Self Test (POST) LEDs
HA028898 Appendix B
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page B - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
B.1 Power On Self Tests (POSTs) (Cont.)
LED Pattern Explanation LED Pattern Explanation LED Pattern Explanation
1 ALL illuminated indicates 8 Illuminated to show 15 Illuminated when Console

failure to use SDRAM. Redundancy Hardware Driver Device is initialised.
Possible cause of failure: is being enabled.
SDRAM failure.
P P P
S S S
2 Illuminated when Serial Port 9 Illuminated to show SPI Driver 16 Illuminated indicates
Hardware is initialised. is being initialised. interrogation of Compact Flash
Card.
Possible cause of failure:
Compact Flash Card fault/
missing, or T2550 fault.
P P P
S S S
3 Illuminated when Network 10 Illuminated to show SPI 17 Illuminated indicates the

Hardware is initialised. Message Scheduler is being interrogation of Card
enabled. Information structures on the
Compact Flash Card.
Compact Flash Card fault, or
T2550 fault.
P P P
S S S
4 Illuminated to show Periodic 11 Illuminated when i2c Driver is 18 Illuminated when ATA Interface
Timer Interrupt is being being initialised. is being initialised.
enabled. Possible cause of failure:
T2550 fault.
P P P
S S S
5 Illuminated to show Power Fail 12 Illuminated when RTC Driver 19 Illuminated when ATA Driver is
Interrupt is being enabled. is being initialised. initialised.
T2550 fault.
P P P
S S S
6 Illuminated to show Serial Port 13 Illuminated indicates failure to 20 Illuminated when the ATA
Interrupt is being enabled. match LIN addresses on Block Device Driver is
consecutive reads. generated.
Possible cause of failure: Possible cause of failure:
Terminal Unit fault, or T2550 Compact Flash Card fault, or
fault. T2550 fault.
P P P
S S S
7 Illuminated to show Network 14 Illuminated when the hw_init_2 21 Illuminated when Compact
Hardware is being enabled. process is complete. Flash Card Serial Number is
extracted.
Compact Flash Card not
supplied by manufacturer.
P P P
S S S
Appendix B HA028898
Page B - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
B.1 Power On Self Tests (POSTs) (Cont.)
LED Pattern Explanation LED Pattern Explanation LED Pattern Explanation
22 Illuminated when Disk Cache 25 Illuminated indicates the 28 Illuminated to show interrupts
for the Compact Flash Card is Filesystem in the partition on for the Ethernet interface are
initialised. the Compact Flash Card has being enabled.
Possible cause of failure: been mounted.
Compact Flash Card fault, or Possible cause of failure:
T2550 fault. Compact Flash Card fault, or
T2550 fault.
P P P
S S S
23 Illuminated when the Partition 26 Illuminated when Sectors on

Manager for the Compact the Compact Flash Card are
Flash Card is generated. being read or written to or
Possible cause of failure: from.
Compact Flash Card fault, or Possible cause of failure:
T2550 fault. Compact Flash Card fault, or
P P
T2550 fault.
S S
24 Illuminated when the Low 27 Illuminated indicates the

Level Block Driver for the Various Drivers and
master partition is called. Filesystem Drivers for the
Possible cause of failure: Compact Flash Card have
Compact Flash Card fault, or been mounted.
T2550 fault. Possible cause of failure:
P P
T2550 fault.
S S
Table B.1 Power On Self Test (POST) LED patterns
HA028898 Appendix B
T2550 HANDBOOK
B.2 ERROR NUMBERS

This section lists the error messages that may be seen during the running of the instrument connected to a terminal, via
the Ethernet port.
B.2.1 Error number structure

All error conditions have an associated 4-digit number, and usually a corresponding text message as well. Error
numbers are hexadecimal 4-digit groups. The first two digits show the package that was running when the error
occurred, and the last two specify the particular error associated with that package.
RUNNING PACKAGES
Packages are defined as:
81 Base error codes (81xx) (table B.2.2a) 92 Process Redundancy Management error codes (92xx)
82 File system (table B.2.2b) (table B.2.2n)
83 Database system (table B.2.2c) 99 External database (table B.2.2p)
85 Objects system (table B.2.2d) 9A MODBUS codes (table B.22r)
86 Trend system (table B.2.2e) 9B Xec codes (table B.2.2s)
87 Control config (table B.2.2f) 9C Kernel items (table B.2.2t)
89 Network error (table B.2.2g) 9D Objects (table B.2.2u)
8B Sequence database system (table B.2.2h) 9E Locks (table B.2.2v)
8C Sequence runtime system (table B.2.2i) A0 Machine Architecture Library (MAL) (table B.2.2w)
8D Structured text system (table B.2.2j) A1 Application Master Comms (AMC) (table B.2.2x)
8F PCLIN/PC I/F package (table B.2.2k) A4 Modbus Master Comms (MMC) (table B.2.2y)
90 T1000 menu system (table B.2.2l) A6 Asynchronous I/O (table B.2.2z)
91 Configuration files (table B.2.2m) AD Profibus (table B.2.2aa)
B2 Socket error codes (B2xx) (table B.2.2ab)
B.2.2 Error messages

Table B.2.2 lists error messages package by package.
Note. This is a complete list of all error messages generated by LIN-based systems, and therefore includes
errors that are additional to those which can be generated by the instrument.
The error code FFFF means unknown.
8110 Timeout 8120 RTC invalid time.

8111 Received string too long (lost data) 8130 Licence Key is for different machine type
8112 Multiple tasks waiting for CIO 8131 No Licence Key in file
8113 Illegal initialisation parameters 8132 Wrong size Licence Key
8114 Rx message buffer overrun 8133 Corrupt Licence Key Header
8115 Comms hardware break detected 8134 Invalid character in Licence Key
8116 Rx character framing or parity error 8135 Error decrypting Licence Key
8117 Rx character buffer overrun 8136 Checksum error in Licence Key
8118 Tx Buffer full 8137 Licence Key not for this unit
Table B.2.2a Base error codes (81xx)
Appendix B HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
B.2.2 Error messages (Cont.)
8201 Not mounted 8212 File cannot be modified

8202 Invalid device 8213 Failed to duplicate file operation
8203 Physical error 8214 No handle to duplicate queue
8204 Not implemented 8215 File systems no longer synchronised
8205 Format error 8216 Synchronisation aborted
8206 Not present 8217 Response length error
8207 Device full 8218 File system timeout
8208 File not found 8219 File synchronisation not requested
8209 No handle 821A Duplicate on secondary rejected
820A Bad filename 821B Non specific error
820B Verify error 821C Sync fail due to .DBF check
820C File locked 821D Sync fail due to .DBF load file name error
820D File read-only or No key fitted 821E Drive letter already assigned
820E Unable to perform file check 821F Filing out of memory
820F Unable to defer another file during synchronisa- 8220 Illegal link drive letter
tion 8221 No such link exists
8210 Illegal combination of open flags 8222 Read/write file transfer to large
8211 Couldn't complete file operation as synchronisa- 8223 Read file error
tion is in progress 8224 Write file error
8301 Bad template 834C Connection Destination not I/P

8302 Bad block number 834D No free connection resources
8303 No free blocks 834E Bad conn. src/dest block/field
8304 No free database memory 834F Invalid connection destination
8305 Not allowed by block create 8350 Hot/Cold start switch is disabled
8306 In use 8351 No database was running
8307 Database already exists 8352 Real-time clock is not running
8308 No spare databases 8353 Root block clock is not running
8309 Not enough memory 8354 Coldstart time was exceeded
8320 Bad library file 8355 Root block is invalid
8321 Bad template in library 8356 Too many control loops
8322 Bad server 8357 Coldstart switch is disabled
8323 Cannot create EDB entry 8360 Unsynchronised Block Types
8324 Bad file version 8361 DB/Filing system mismatch
8325 Bad template spec 8362 Unsynchronised Secondary
8326 Unable to make block remote 8363 Operation forbidden whilst
8327 Bad parent CPUs synchronising/changing over
8328 Corrupt data in .DBF file 8364 Pwr-up data inhibits run
8329 Corrupt block spec 8365 POST hardware failure
832A Corrupt block data 8366 Not fixed function strategy
832B Corrupt pool data 8367 Default strategy missing
832C No free resources 836A Not duplex instrument
832D Template not found 8370 On Line Reconfig in progress
832E Template resource fault 8371 No delta changes to try/discard
8330 Cannot start 8372 No delta changes to untry/apply
8331 Cannot stop 8373 On Line Reconfig not supported
8332 Empty database 8380 Duplicate block name whilst loading database
8333 Configurator in use or device busy 8390 This is an Invalid Unit (not permitted to run
8340 .DBF file write failed databases)
8341 More than one .RUN file found 8391 This unit does not support Licence Control System
8342 .RUN file not found 8392 Runtime save not supported on this unit.
834A Connection Source is not an O/P 8393 Reconfig not permitted for this block type.
834B Multiple connection to same I/P
Table B.2.2c Database system error codes (83xx)
HA028898 Appendix B
T2550 HANDBOOK

8501 Out of F RAM - DO NOT save file 8B01 Object Overload
8502 Out of N RAM - DO NOT save file 8B02 Text Overload
8B03 No Matching Step Name
Table B.2.2d Objects system error codes (85xx)
8B04 No Matching Action Name
8602 Bad channel number 8B05 Step already Exists
8603 Bad type code 8B06 Action already Exists
8611 Bad handle or not hist 8B07 Link already Exists
8613 File exists 8B08 Leave a Bigger Gap
8614 Exceeded global limit
8B09 Bad Time Format
8615 Unexpected end of file
8616 Read error 8B0A File Read Error
8617 Write error 8B0B File Write Error
8619 Bad filename 8B0C File doesnt Exist
861A Bad timestamp 8B0D File not Open
8B0E Create Action ?
Table B.2.2e Trend system error codes (86xx)
8B0F No Match with string
8701 Unnamed blocks 8B10 No More Matches
8702 Cannot save compounds 8B11 Match found in Transition
8703 No root block 8B12 Match found in Action
8704 .GRF file write failed 8B13 Changed - Are you sure ?
8705 Compounds too deep 8B14 Link Already Exists
8706 Unused GRF block - deleted 8B15 Illegal Chars in Name
8707 Unused GRF connection - deleted 8B16 Action Did Not Compile
8708 Missing GRF block - added 8B17 Fatal Memory Overflow - Quit Now!
8709 Missing GRF connection - added
8B18 Out of memory when compiling
870A Unknown DBF/GRF block mismatch
870B Unknown DBF/GRF connect mismatch 8B19 Root action must be SFC
870C DBF/GRF file mismatch - use FIX 8B1A Invalid actions found during compilation
8B1B Invalid DB name
Table B.2.2f Control config error codes (87xx) 8B1C No database loaded
8B1D Map is invalid
8901 Network timeout
8902 Rejected by local node Table B.2.2h
8903 Rejected by remote node Sequence data base system error codes (8Bxx)
8904 Not implemented
8905 Not active on local node
8906 Not active on remote node
8907 Transmit failure
8908 Failed to get memory
8909 Decode packet
890A Remote file system busy
890B Illegal TEATT
890C Wrong TEATT
890D NServer is busy
890E TEATT not owned
890F Duplicate block 8C01 Database not Running
8910 TEATT rejected 8C02 No Sequences Loaded
8911 Port disabled 8C03 Sequence is being displayed
8912 No port configuration 8C04 Cannot find an SFC_DISP block
8913 Bad network filename 8C05 Cannot find Source File
8999 Network node invalid 8C06 Sequence Not Loaded
Table B.2.2g Network error codes (89xx) Table B.2.2i Sequence runtime error codes (8Cxx)
Appendix B HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
8D01 Syntax Error 8D0F String > 8 chars

8D02 Statement expected 8D10 End quotes expected
8D03 Assignment expected 8D11 Bad Number
8D04 THEN expected
8D05 no ELSE or END_IF 8D20 Can't jump backwards
8D06 END_IF expected 8D21 Unresolved jump
8D07 ;expected 8D22 Too many jump labels
8D08 Bad bracket matching 8D23 Jump target is blank
8D09 Identifier too long 8D24 "," expected
8D0A Bad identifier 8D25 Transition must be single rung
8D0B Unrecognised symbol 8D26 Transition must be Normally Open coil
8D0C Code Buffer Full 8D27 Syntax error in literal
8D0D Expression expected 8D28 Incomplete Rung
8D0E Cant find this name 8D29 Bad label
Table B.2.2j Structured text error codes (8Dxx)
8F01 PCLIN Card not responding 9201 Unit is not currently synchronised
8F02 PCLIN Request failed 9202 Unit is currently synchronised
8F04 EDB not known or not external 9203 (De)Sync already initiated
8F07 Unknown EDB 9204 Secondary has inferior I/O status
8F0A Unable to delete ED 9205 Secondary has inferior LIN status
8F14 Bad block number 9206 Primary & Secondary have mismatched LIN
8F15 Template mismatch protocol versions
8F16 Block failed to attach 9207 Primary & Secondary have mismatched LIN
8F17 Block failed to detach types
9208 Primary & Secondary have mismatched DCM
Table B.2.2k PCLIN/PC I/F package error codes (8Fxx) libraries
9209 Primary & Secondary have mismatched ELIN
protocol names
9001 Invalid PIN 920A On-Line Reconfig changes are pending
9002 PINs do not match - unchanged 920B Timeout waiting for status from secondary
9003 Invalid PIN - reset to 1234 920C Timeout waiting for secondary's state machine to
9004 Access denied terminate
9005 Invalid default security info 920D Secondary failed to respond to sync start request
9006 Invalid DTU A security info 920E Secondary failed to achieve file synchronisation
9007 Invalid DTU B security info 920F Timeout waiting for file synchronisation
9210 Secondary failed to load database
9211 Secondary failed to run database
9212 Database sync cyle failed
Table B.2.2l T1000 menu system error codes (90xx)
9213 Secondary failed to complete synchronsation
9100 Couldnt open config file Table B.2.2n Process Redundancy Management error codes
9101 Section not found (92xx)
9102 Parameter not found
9103 Argument not found
9104 Config area too small
9105 Config file syntax error
9106 Config header corrupted 9901 No EDB's left
9107 Not a number 9902 EDB already exists
9108 Out of memory 9903 Invalid EDB
Table B.2.2m Configuration files error codes (91xx) Table B.2.2p External database error codes (99xx)
HA028898 Appendix B
T2550 HANDBOOK
9A01 Invalid Second Register 9D01 Object already exists

9A02 Not a 32 bit field type 9D02 Out of objects
9A03 Invalid Scan Count 9D03 Object does not exist
9A04 Incorrect Modbus function types 9D04 Bad invocation parameter
9A05 Invalid register position
9D05 Object handle is now stale
9A06 Second register of 32 bit pair
9D06 Object handle is invalid
9A07 Invalid register type
9D07 Too many users of object
Table B.2.2r MODBUS error codes (9Axx) Table B.2.2u Objects error codes (9Dxx)
9E01 Lock has entered an inconsistent state and

cannot be granted
9B01 Illegal unique task id 9E02 Lock was not granted in the required mode
9B02 Task id already being used 9E03 Timeout attempting to acquire
9B03 No more task control blocks 9E04 Unable to convert mode of lock
9B04 Out of XEC memory 9E05 Already hold a read lock
9E06 Already hold a writer lock
9B64 Task aborted
9E07 Do not hold a read lock
9B65 Task timeout
9E08 Do not hold a writer lock
9E09 Write lock detected during read unlock
Table B.2.2s Xec error codes (9Bxx) 9E0A Reader lock detected during write unlock
9E0B Unable to grant read to write conversion as a
conversion of this form is already in progress
9E0C Unable to represent user in lock control
structures
9E0D lck_Unlock invoked but not enabled
9E0E Nesting requested but lock not a mutex
9C01 Already registered
9E0F Overflow of nested mutex
9C02 Too many kernel users
9E10 Unable to convert a nested mutex
9C03 Couldn't allocate the local storage that was required
9C04 Error changing priority Table B.2.2v Locks error codes (9Exx)
9C05 Need to supply an instance name
9C06 Failed to get platform info A001 Could not create user's event (MAL)
9C07 Platform not known A002 Could not open user's event (MAL)
9C33 Feature not implemented (QUE) A003 Could not set user's event (MAL)
9C34 Insufficient memory supplied (QUE) A004 Unable to grant system wide mutex due to it be-
9C35 Size of data for read or write invalid (QUE) ing in an inconsistent state
9C36 Unable to write to queue A005 Unable to grant system wide mutex due to a
9C37 Unable to read from queue timeout
9C38 Unable to allocate memory (QUE) A006 Unable to grant system wide mutex reason unknown
9C65 No Kernel instance to make intra-signal unique A007 Unable to grant system wide mutex as not created
9C66 Signal already exists A008 Unable to suspend user (MAL)
9C67 Failed to create signal A009 Unable to allocate memory (MAL)
9C68 Failed to open signal A00A Unable to change priority (MAL)
9C69 Failed to close signal A00B Error waiting on signal (MAL)
9C6A Timeout waiting on signal A00C Error releasing signal waiters (MAL)
Table B.2.2t Kernel items (9Cxx) Table B.2.2w MAL error codes (A0xx)
Appendix B HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
A101 Cyclic comms enabled on node(s) A10A Conflict

A102 No memory left A10B Task not running
A103 Bad info given A10C Bug
A104 Data is referenced A10D Manual cyclic only (pmc reject)
A105 No data group installed A10E Cannot add cyclic request
A106 Pending message A10F Slave rejected cyclics
A107 Fault external to AMC A110 No pmc callback
A108 Not supported
Table B.2.2x AMC error codes (A1xx)
A401 Out of / Bad resource(s) A40F No Modbus TCP connection

A402 Bad info supplied A410 Asynchronous Modbus TCP buffer appears invalid
A403 Pending message A411 Cannot issue an asynchronous Modbus transaction
A404 Problem external to MMC over serial line
A405 Not supported A412 Asynchronous Modbus transaction in progress to
A406 Timeout this node
A407 Frame parity error A413 Modbus TCP device has disconnected
A408 Currupt message A414 Modbus TCP transaction mismatch
A409 Link protocol error A415 Modbus TCP error reading/writing socket
A40A Modbus exception recvd A416 Asynchronous Modbus TCP not supported
A40B Tx fail A417 Out of Modbus TCP sessions
A40C No Modbus TCP configuration file A418 TCP connection in progress
A40D Modbus TCP device already configured A419 No instrument number to Modbus node address
A40E Modbus TCP node not configured A41A Waiting to form Modbus TCP connection
Table B.2.2y MMC error codes (A4xx)
A601 Asynchronous I/O in progress

A602 No asynchronous I/O in progress
A603 Not yet implemented
A604 Tx operation complete but not all characters transferred
A605 Rx operation complete, but not all characters received
A606 Event not unique
A607 General CIO error
A608 No asynch. operation fetched
A609 Out of serial lines
A60A Unable to allocate the requested line
A60B Failed to submit asynchronous I/O
A60C Input/output timed out
A60D Indeterminate error during fetch
A60E I/O timed out but failed to cancel operation in progress
Table B.2.2z Asynchronous I/O error codes (A6xx)
HA028898 Appendix B
T2550 HANDBOOK
AD01 Cyclic data not available AD20 Not used

AD02 Cannot make cyclic into acyclic AD21 Unable to set master protocol params.
AD03 Profibus C1 not allowed AD22 Unable to set master comms params.
AD04 Profibus C2 not allowed AD23 Unable to set slave comms params.
AD05 Acyclic frag. limit exceeded AD24 Failed to start profibus line task
AD06 Comms line requested is not profibus AD25 Failed to stop profibus line task
AD07 Resource alloc failure AD26 Bad slave diagnostic
AD08 PMC not initialised AD27 Acyclics restarted
AD09 No more Cyclic data space AD28 Master rejected acyclic req.
AD0A No more cyclic tag space AD29 Master acyclic resp. error
AD0B Attempt to append while running AD2A Slave acyclic req. rejected
AD0C Data attribs. not set AD2B Slave acyclic resp error
AD0D Data group size / type mismatch AD2C Acyclic timeout
AD0E Data group size / type unknown AD2D No slave acyclic resp.
AD0F Data group wrong line number AD2E Failed to get diags.
AD10 Data group node addr. wrong AD2F Failed to get slave diags.
AD11 Data group addresses not contiguous AD30 No slave diags. available
AD12 Not in assembling mode AD31 Bad pointer parameter
AD13 Cyclics not configured AD32 Parameter out of range
AD14 Cyclics not running AD33 Slave cfg overflow
AD15 Attempt to change card state AD34 Slave prm overflow
AD16 Bad data group list AD35 C1 acyclic data too big
AD17 Changeover not complete AD3C C2 acyclic data too big
AD18 Acyclics not ready AD37 Slave not running
AD19 Too many diag. clients AD38 Pending acyclic
AD1A Line already initialised AD39 C2 RW not supported by slave
AD1B Comms attribs ptr failure AD3A C2 unexpected connection close
AD1C Comms attribs data failure AD3B Master card startup error
AD1D Cannot achieve cycle time AD3C Not used
AD1E Master baud rate not supported AD3D Could not get slave IO data
AD1F Cannot kill cards DB AD3E Slave not running at changeover
Table B.2.2aa Profibus error codes (ADxx)
B201 Error doing select B210 Record does not contain a valid length field
B202 Error accepting connection B211 Unable to read record as insufficient buffer was
B203 Out of connections supplied
B204 Error reading socket B212 Incomplete record encountered
B205 Failed to initialise sockets B213 Connection closed
B206 Connection has been reset B214 Timed out receiving on socket
B207 Unable to listen on socket B215 Error sendint over socket
B208 Could not allocate socket B216 Send would block on socket
B209 Could not get host information B217 Could not establish blocking mode
B20A Could not bind socket B218 Sockets out of memory
B20B Unable to connect socket B219 Peek buffer is full
B20C Reference is not a valid connection B21A Global initialisation failed
B20D Failed to send data over connection B21B Connection timed out
B20E Insufficient buffer for connection data B21C Socket session still active
B20F Cannot peek for records B21D The session name is being used
Table B.2.2ab Socket error codes (B2xx)
Appendix B HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX C TERMINAL CONFIGURATOR

This explains the complexities of using the Terminal Configurator program resident on the instrument.
The main topics of this chapter are:
The Configurator (section C.1)
Running the Configurator (section C.2)
LIN Database configuration (section C.3)
Modbus configuration (section C.4)
C.1 THE CONFIGURATOR

Most configuration will be done before despatch, using the LINtools software package. This chapter explains how
LIN Databases and communications parameters are configured for the instrument using the Configurator program
resident within the instrument.
The Configurator program is mainly for adjusting existing configurations on site, usually to accompany modifications
to the processing plant and can also be used to Load, Start, Stop, Save and Monitor LIN Databases, to
perform various filing operations and Try and Untry changes to the running control strategy.
It employs the standard LIN function block structured approach. The LIN Blocks Reference Manual
(Part no. HA082375U003) gives full details of the software LIN function blocks available for the control strategy, and
how to configure the parameters.
Note. Instruments operating in redundant configuration will not allow function blocks to be added or deleted
unless Primary and Secondary are synchronised.
C.1.1 Configurable Items

The configurable items are configured using a menu/item selection procedure. Configuration of the LIN Database
consists of carrying out one or more of the following:
Installing function blocks in the running control strategy (MAKE)
Creating duplicates of existing LIN function blocks (COPY)
Deleting function blocks (DELETE)
Inspecting and updating function blocks (INSPECT)
Test changes to the running control strategy (TRY)
Cancel the test, but keep the changes displayed on the Configurator (UNTRY)
Accept changes to the running control strategy (APPLY)
Cancel all changes to the running control strategy and return to last operational LIN Database (UNDO)
Accessing the Utilities menu (UTILITIES), from which the user can START and STOP programs, SAVE and
LOAD LIN Databases, and access the ELIN setup page
HA028898 Appendix C
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page C - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.2 RUNNING THE CONFIGURATOR

This section describes accessing and quitting the Configurator using a Telnet session with HyperTerminal. If a
different terminal program is used, its user documentation should be consulted (if necessary) for the equivalent
procedures.
Note. HyperTerminal is the only recommended method of accessing the Configurator. Other methods of
accessing the Configurator may result in unforeseen consequences.
C.2.1 Initial menu access

Using Windows XP as an example,
1. Power up the PC and start HyperTerminal
(Programs > Accessories > ... > HyperTerminal).
A new connection sign-on screen appears.
2. Enter a name for the link and accept using the OK
button. This will now reveal a Connect to dialog.
3. In the Connect using drop-down, select the
TCP/IP (Winsock) option. After selection the fields
above this drop-down now displays a Host and
Port number field.
Note. The Configurator will only operate correctly
if the VT100 is defined in the Emulation
field, File > Properties > Settings page.
4. After entering appropriate values to each of the required
fields and confirming the changes, the sign-on screen
will appear.
5. Press 1 to display the Initial menu, see Fig C.2.1b.
Telnet 149.121.165.188
Total Machine Control - 1/0 at 66 MHz

(Hardware Build: RS485)
Serial number = 1426
Ethernet (MAC) address = 00:E0:4B:00:45:DA
IP address = 192.168.111.222
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0
Default gateway = 0.0.0.0
POST result (0000) = SUCCESS
Last shutdown because: Successful Power Down
1 ANSI-CRT
>>>
Figure C.2.1a Typical sign-on screen

Ethernet (MAC) address Shows the address of the Ethernet interface. This value is unique and is permanently fixed for
an individual instrument.
IP address Gives the IP address currently assigned to this instrument.
Subnet Mask Gives the subnet mask currently assigned to this instrument. An IP host uses the subnet mask,
in conjunction with its own IP address, to determine if a remote IP address is on the same
subnet (in which case it can talk directly to it), or a different subnet (in which case it must talk
to it via the Default Gateway).
Default Gateway Gives the IP address of the Default Gateway. It is the address via which this instrument must
talk in order to communicate with IP addresses on other subnets. If undefined (0.0.0.0 or
blank) then this instrument can only talk to other IP hosts on this same subnet.
Note. Refer to the ELIN User Guide (Part no. HA082429) for full details.
Hyperterminal is a trademark of Hilgraeve Inc.
Appendix C HA028898
Page C - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.2.1 INITIAL MENU ACCESS (Cont.)

If Modbus is enabled, the Configurator Initial menu appears, see Figure C.2.1b. If Modbus is disabled, the Main menu
appears instead, as shown in Figure C.3.
INIT Choose option
>DATABASE - General configuration

GATEWAY - MODBUS configuration
Figure C.2.1b Initial menu
Note. If the Initial or Main menu appears, this indicates that the instrument has entered configuration mode.
Locate the cursor (>) at a menu item using the cursor keys, then press <Enter> to display the next level in the menu
hierarchy. This is called selecting an item. In general, to access the next lower level of the menu hierarchy <Enter> is
pressed. To return to the next higher level menu or close a pop-up options menu the <Escape> key is pressed.
<PageUp> and <PageDown> allow hidden pages in long tables to be accessed.
Note. The next lower level of menu hierarchy can be accessed directly by simply pressing the initial letter of
the menu item, e.g. on the Configurator initial menu above, pressing G will select the GateWay menu
item.
Function Key combination
Redraw screen <Ctrl> +W

Cursor Up <Ctrl> +U
Cursor Down <Ctrl> +D
Cursor Left <Ctrl> +L
Cursor Right <Ctrl> +R
Page Up <Ctrl> +P
Page Down <Ctrl> +N
Stop automatic update <Ctrl> +V
Table C.2.1a Cursor-control - equivalent key combinations
For keyboards without cursor-control keys, equivalent control character combinations may be used, as indicated in
Table C.2.1a. To use these, the <Ctrl> key is held down and the specified character typed.
Some tables allow a value to be entered directly, or via a called-up menu. For direct entry, the first character(s) of the
chosen option is (are) typed, followed by <Enter>. Alternatively, the menu can be accessed with <Enter> or <Tab> as
the first character after the field is selected.
C.2.2 The Initial menu

The Initial menu, Figure C.2.1b, lists two options - Database and Gateway. Database allows access to the Main menu
for configuring a LIN Database, see Database Configuration section. Gateway allows access to the GateWay menu,
for setting up a Modbus configuration.
C.2.3 Quitting the Terminal Configurator

The instrument automatically exits configuration mode when the Telnet session is closed.
Note. If the Configurator is left running but unused, the user will eventually be locked out of the online
operations, including Download, Start and Stop, and Online Reconfiguration.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3 LIN DATABASE CONFIGURATION

Most LIN Database configuration is completed before despatch, using the LINtools configuration tool. However, this
basic Terminal Configurator is resident within the instrument allowing configuration of a LIN database from an
appropriately configured PC.
When attempting to edit a control strategy that is running, only limited commands can be used, see Configurable Items
section. The commands are accessed from the Utilities menu, and permit Tentative changes in a running control
strategy. The Tentative changes can be tested (TRY command) and accepted (APPLY command) if the required
output is received. Continual changes can be attempted or discarded (UNTRY command) until the required value is
obtained.
START USING THE TERMINAL CONFIGURATOR

Following the successful start of a Telnet session, and access from the Initial Menu, the Main menu appears.
Figure C.3 shows the Main menu.
MAIN MENU Select option
>MAKE - Create block

COPY - Copy block
DELETE - Delete block
INSPECT - Inspect block
NETWORK - Network setup
UTILITIES - Engineering utilities
ALARMS - Current Alarms
Figure C.3 Configurator Main menu

C.3.1 MAKE command
Installs function blocks in the control strategy. Select MAKE to display the SET MENU, the instrument resident
library of function block categories, as detailed in the LIN Block Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003).
Figure C.3.1a shows part of the screen display when LOGIC is selected, as an example.
Note. Every control strategy must contain a header block, the only LIN function block initially available for
a new control strategy.
Select a category to list its function blocks. Select the function block to be installed. The function block Overview
appears listing the function block parameters, default values and units in a double 3-column format. Figure C.3.1b
shows the (default) overview for the PID block as an example.
Note. Any function blocks added while the control strategy is running, online, are made as Tentative. They
will not become part of the running control strategy until either TRY or APPLY is selected from the
Utilities menu.
LOGIC Select type
> PULSE
AND4
OR4
XOR4
LATCH
COUNT
COMPARE
Figure C.3.1a Logic category menu
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.1 MAKE command (Cont.)
BLOCK OVERVIEW
Refer to Figure C.3.1b, which shows the main features of a typical function block overview, used to monitor and
update function block parameters. (Overviews can also be accessed via the COPY and INSPECT main menu options.)
The overview is equivalent to a LINtools Object Properties pane and its fields have the same meanings, although data
entry is different.
Note. Parameters being updated by incoming connections from other function blocks are not specially
indicated in a function block overview.
Title Bar OVERVIEW Block: NoName Type: PID DBase:

Tentative
Tentative Mode AUTO Alarms
indication
FallBack AUTO
HAA 100.0 Eng
PV 0.0 Eng LAA 0.0 Eng
SP 0.0 Eng HDA 100.0 Eng
Data Fields
OP 0.0 % LDA 100.0 Eng
Data Fields SL 0.0 Eng
TrimSP 0.0 Eng TimeBase Secs
RemoteSP 0.0 Eng XP 100.0 %
Track 0.0 % TI 0.000
TD 0.000
HR_SP 100.0 Eng
Underline
Cursor LR_SP 0.0 Eng Options 00001100
HL_SP 100.0 Eng SelMode 00000000
LL_SP 0.0 Eng
ModeSel 00000000
HR_OP 100.0 % ModeAct 00000000
LR_OP 0.0 %
HL_OP 100.0 % FF_PID 50.0 %
LL_OP 0.0 % FB_OP 0.0 %
Figure C.3.1b Overview - PID block
TITLE BAR
Contains fields common to all overviews: Block, Type, and DBase. Details of these fields are to be found in the LIN
Blocks Reference Manual (Part no. HA082375U003). A blank DBase field denotes that the LIN Database is local.
Note. A function block is not added to the control strategy until (at the minimum) a block name has been
assigned, i.e. tagname, and either the LIN Database has been restarted or APPLY operated in the
Utilites menu. Using the TRY command will temporarily add the function block, until it is cancelled,
using the UNTRY command.
OVERVIEW DATA FIELD ENTRY

To update a parameter field, locate the flashing underline cursor (_) at the field using the arrow keys, then proceed as
described next for the different data field types. Some data fields display further nested levels of data when entered, as
detailed in the following sections. Press <Enter> to access a deeper level; press <Escape> to return to a higher level.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK

1 User-defined names.
Type in a name (8 characters max.) and press <Enter> to overwrite existing data. To insert characters, locate the
cursor at the character to follow and type the insertions. A beep warns that excess characters have been typed.
To abort the current entry and leave the LIN Database unchanged, move the cursor to a function block field above
or below the current field before pressing <Enter>, or press the <Escape> key.
Pressing <Enter> with the cursor on the first character of the Block or DBase fields (before starting to type)
accesses a Full Description page (Figure C.3.1c shows an example). This page gives general information about
the function block and has a common format.
FULL DESCRIPTION Block: INP01 Type: ANIN
Request refresh 0.1040

Actual refresh 0.105
Server number 3
DBase: =Alpha
Rate ms 10
Execute time 1234
Figure C.3.1c FULL DESCRIPTION page for block (example)
Block Block tagname (Read/write)

Type Block type (Read-only).
Request refresh Configured time period (secs) for running the LIN function block. (Read-only).
Actual refresh Time period (secs) since the function block was last run. (Read-only).
Server number Function blocks time scheduled task priority (Read/write). There are four User Tasks numbered
from User Task 1 (highest priority) to User Task 4 (lowest priority).
DBase: Name of the function blocks LIN Database. A blank field denotes the LIN Database is local,
i.e. is resident in this instrument. (LIN Database names and their LIN addresses are specified
via the main menu NETWORK option, see Network section) (Read/write).
Note. Remote LIN Database names entered in the DBase field must be prefixed by an equals sign (=).
Rate ms Rate is the minimum update period (i.e. maximum rate) at which an individual cached function
block is transmitted across the Local Instrument Network (LIN). The default is 10ms minimum,
i.e. 100Hz maximum. Rate can be set between 10ms and 64s.
Note. Rate values are minimum update times only. Heavily loaded networks may not be able to reach the
faster update rates.
Execute time This is the time taken in microseconds to execute a LIN function block (including connections
etc.).
Note. If the control strategy is running (online), the DBase and Rate ms fields cannot be edited. Only
local function blocks can be made.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

2 Parameter values.
Type in a value and press <Enter> to update the LIN Database. (Read-only parameters do not accept new values.)
The instrument automatically adds a following decimal point and padding zeros if needed, but before a decimal
point a zero must always be typed, e.g. 0.5, not .5.
Pressing <Enter> with the field selected, before starting to type, accesses a Full Description page for the parameter
(Figure C.3.1d shows an example).
FULL DESCRIPTION Field: PV Block: PID_1 Type: PID
Value 80.1 Real32

Input SIM 1.OP
Figure C.3.1d FULL DESCRIPTION page for parameter (example)
Field, Block, Type Read-only fields

Value Parameter value, editable as for the Overview. (Read/write)
Real32 Value type (Real32 = floating point number) (Read Only)
Input Defines the source of any connection to the parameter from another function block, as
Block Tagname.Output Mnemonic. A blank function block field means no connection. To
make or edit a connection, type in the source function block tagname and output mnemonic,
e.g. SIM 1.OP, or SEQ.DIGOUT.BIT3), then press <Enter>. Invalid data is beeped and is not
accepted. The field is not case sensitive. To delete a connection, type <space> then press
<Enter>. (Read/write)
Note. See CONNECTION TYPES... (below) for information and advice on types of LIN Database
connections.
3 Parameter units.
Type in a value and press <Enter>. All other related units in the LIN Database automatically copy the edited unit.
Pressing <Enter> with the field selected, before starting to type, accesses the parameter Full Description page (as
for the value field).
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK

4 Options menu fields
Press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu of options for the field. Figure C.3.1e shows an example (PID Mode) in
part of an Overview page.
OVERVIEW Block: PID_1 Type: PID DBase:
Mode AUTO Alarms

FallBack > MANUAL
AUTO HAA 100.0 Eng
PV REMOTE Eng LAA 0.0 Eng
SP F_MAN Eng HDA 100.0 Eng
OP F_AUTO % LDA 100.0 Eng
SL Eng
TrimSP Eng TimeBase Secs
RemoteSP 0.0 Eng XP 100.0 %
Track 0.0 % TI 0.00
TD 0.00
HR_SP 100.0 Eng
LR_SP 0.0 Eng Options 00101100
HL_SP 100.0 Eng SeMode 00000000
LL_SP 0.0 Eng
ModeSel 00000000
HR_OP 100.0 % ModeAct 00000000
LR_OP 0.0 %
HL_OP 100.0 % FF_PID 50.0 %
LL_OP 0.0 % FB_OP 0.0 %
Figure C.3.1e Pop-up options menu (example)
A quicker alternative to accessing the pop-up options menu is to type the required option, or enough of its initial
letters to uniquely specify it, directly into the selected field and then press <Enter>. E.g. entering just M selects
MANUAL; entering F_M selects F_MAN (Forced Manual).
5 Alarms field.
Press <Enter> to display a 4-column Alarms page listing alarm name (e.g. HighAbs), acknowledgement (e.g.
Unackd), status (e.g. Active), and priority (0 to 15). Update the acknowledgement or priority fields (the only
editable ones) by typing in a value and pressing <Enter>. (Any single letter can be used for the acknowledgement
field.) Figure C.3.1f shows an example Alarms page.
Alarms Block: PID_1 Type: PID
Software Unackd Active 15

HighAbs Unackd Active 15
LowAbs 0
HighDev Active 10
LowDev 2
Combined Unackd Active 15
Figure C.3.1f Alarms page (example)
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK

6 Bitfields
Contain eight (or sixteen) binary digits showing the logic states of a corresponding set of up to eight (or sixteen)
parameters. To edit the bitfield directly, type in a bit-pattern then <Enter> it. Alternatively, press <Enter> to
display a Full Description page listing the parameter TRUE/FALSE or HIGH/LOW states (in the same format
used for LINtools Object Properties pane bitfields). Figure C.3.1g shows an example. Alter a logic state by
locating the cursor on the state, typing in T(rue) or F(alse), and pressing <Enter>. (A bit may be read-only.)
FULL DESCRIPTION Field: ModeAct Block: PID_1 Type: PID
NotRem TRUE
HoldAct FALSE
TrackAct FALSE
RemAct FALSE
AutoAct TRUE
ManAct FALSE
FAutoAct FALSE
FManAct FALSE
Figure C.3.1g Full Description page for bitfield (example)
To connect an input to a bitfield, press the key and type in the LIN function block name/field name from which
the connection is to be made. A connection can be deleted simply by replacing the LIN function block name/field
name in the bitfield with a <space>.
Caution
Any connections deleted while the control strategy is running (online), are marked as DeleteReq. It can be edited
further by adding a different connection to the bitfield. However, this new connection will not be used, and the
existing connection remains part of the running control strategy until either TRY or APPLY is selected from the
Utilities menu.
Note: See CONNECTION TYPES... (below) for information and advice on types of LIN Database
connections.
7 Two- and four-digit combined hexadecimal status fields.

Hex fields are marked with a > sign and have the same format and significance as those found in LINtools
specification menus. The digits show the logic states of a corresponding set of parameters, up to four per hex
digit. To edit the field directly, type in new values then press <Enter>. Alternatively, press <Enter> to display a
Full Description page listing the parameter TRUE/FALSE states and edit this list (as described for Bitfields,
above).
CONNECTION TYPES IN A LIN INSTRUMENT DATABASE
There are three types of connection used in a LIN Database: local connections, connections writing to a cached
function block, and connections from a cached function block to a local function block. The following explains how
and when they are evaluated.
1 Local connections.
These are connections between two function blocks that are both local to the LIN Database. The connection is
always evaluated immediately prior to the execution of the destination LIN function blocks update procedure,
regardless of whether the source data has changed between iterations. With this sort of connection, any attempt to
write to the connection destination is immediately corrected by the next connection evaluation.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.1 CONNECTION TYPES IN A LIN DATABASE (Cont.)

2 Connections to cached function block.
These are connections whose destination function block is a cached copy of a function block in another
instrument. The source of the connection can be either a local function block or another cached function block.
Such connections are evaluated only if the source and destination data do not match. All cached function blocks
in the LIN Database are processed at regular intervals, and whenever a change is detected a single field write is
performed over the communications link.
3 Connections from cached function block to local function block
These are connections where the source function block is a cached copy of a function block in another instrument,
and the destination function block is local to the LIN Database. All cached function blocks in the LIN Database
are tested at regular intervals, and if a change in the function block data is detected, then all such connections out
of the cached function block into local function blocks are evaluated. The connections are not evaluated if the
source data has not changed. These connections minimise the load involved in synchronising the LIN Databases
of a duplex pair, whilst ensuring the coherence of the data between the primary and secondary instruments.
Caution
With this third type of connection, tasks are allowed to write to the connection destination, leaving the source and
destination of the connection with different values. You should ensure that your strategy does not write to connection
destinations.
C.3.2 COPY command

Creates duplicates of existing function blocks. Select COPY from the main menu to display all the function blocks in
the control strategy, in semi-graphical format as shown in Figure C.3.2. The function blocks are displayed from left to
right in order of creation. Move the cursor (>) to a function block and press <Enter>. The function block is
duplicated and added to the strategy, and its Overview page automatically appears ready for parameterising. The
duplicate retains all the original parameter values except for the Block field, which has the default tagname
NoName. Input connections are not copied; nor are I/O function block site numbers.
COPY Select block
>T2550 SIM_1 TIC_100 PID_1 FIC_101
Figure 8.3.2 COPY display (example)
Pressing <Escape> returns the COPY display, where the copied function block can be seen added to the list. Press
<Escape> again to return to the top level menu.
Note. Any function block copied while the control strategy is running, on-line, are made as Tentative. They
will not become part of the running control strategy until either TRY or APPLY is selected from the
Utilities menu.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.3 DELETE command

Deletes function blocks from the control strategy.
Note. Before deleting a function block all connections to and from it must be cleared. This is achieved simply by
clearing the source fields of each affected connection, including the source fields of any input connection.
Select DELETE from the main menu to display all the function blocks in the control strategy, in the same format as for
the COPY option, see Copy command section. Select a function block and press <Enter>. The function block and any
connections from it are deleted, and the main menu returns to the screen.
Note. Any function blocks deleted while the control strategy is running (online), are marked as DeleteReq.
They will not be removed from the control strategy until either TRY or APPLY is selected from the
Utilities menu.
C.3.4 INSPECT command

Allows function blocks in the control strategy to be inspected and updated. Select INSPECT from the main menu to
display all the function blocks in the control strategy, in the same format as for the COPY and DELETE options
already described. Select a function block and press <Enter> to display its overview page, ready for
monitoring/updating.
Pressing <Escape> returns the INSPECT display, where other function blocks can be selected for inspection. Press
<Escape> again to return to the top level menu.
Note. All function blocks can be inspected while the control strategy is running, online.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.5 NETWORK command

Allows a LIN database to be assigned to a specific LIN node address. This permits locally generated function blocks
to be configured as cached function blocks by changing the DBase field in the function block Title bar, see Make
command. (The overview page of the cached function block DBase field specifies the remote LIN Database name.)
Note. It is good practice when using cached function blocks, to cache at least one block in each direction.
This allows the status of the communications link between the nodes to be monitored from both ends
via the cached blocks software alarms. This bidirectional caching also eliminates the fleeting
software alarms that may otherwise be seen during changeover in a redundant mode system.
Select NETWORK from the main menu to display the Network setup page (initially blank). Figure C.3.5 shows the
top part of an example page with several LIN Databases already assigned.
Network setup
Alpha > 01
Beta > 02
dBase_1 > 03
Figure C.3.5 Network setup page (example)
To assign a new LIN Database name and address, locate the underline cursor at the left hand column of a blank row,
type in a unique name (7 characters max.) and press <Enter>. The name appears added to the list together with a
default node address >00. Move the cursor to the default address and type in the required node address (two hex
digits). Press <Enter> to assign the LIN Database to the specified node address.
Note. Non-unique or invalid names are beeped and not accepted. Do not use 00 or FF as node addresses.
To edit an existing name or address, locate the cursor at a field, type in the new value, and press <Enter>. Invalid
entries are not accepted.
To delete a complete name and address entry, edit its name field to a space character. Configurations downloaded
from LINtools will have a Network page set up automatically.
Note. External Databases (EDBs) cannot be created while the control strategy is running, online.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.6 UTILITIES command

Allows program control, I/O calibration, and filing. Select UTILITIES from the main menu to display the Utilities
Options page, shown in Figure C.3.6.
UTILITIES Select option
>START - Start runtime system

STOP - Stop runtime system
SAVE - Save database
LOAD - Load database
FILE - File page
TRY - Try Changes
UNTRY - Untry Changes
APPLY - Apply Changes
UNDO - Undo Changes
ELIN - Elin Setup
Figure C.3.6 UTILITIES options menu
START, STOP COMMAND

Select START or STOP from the UTILITIES options menu and press <Enter> to start or stop the control program
running in the instrument. If the control strategy program is in progress, Running appears below the first line in the
Configurator, but will change to Stopped if the control strategy is halted.
Note. When you START a LIN Database in RAM it is automatically saved to the file in E: drive called
filename.dbf, where filename is indicated in the filename.RUN file. It is then reloaded and started.
SAVE COMMAND
Names and saves a control program to a specified memory area. Select SAVE from the UTILITIES options menu - the
default filename specification, E:<filename>.DBF is displayed. (The prefix E: directs the save to the local E: drive
area of the instrument; this is the only available memory area. To save a database to a remote instrument, prefix the
filename specification by the node address of the instrument separated by a double colon, e.g. FC::E:<filename>.DBF).
Type in a new specification if needed, then press <Enter> to execute the save. After a short pause the T280 instrument
signals completion with the message: Type a key to continue. Typing any key returns the UTILITIES menu.
An invalid filename specification aborts the save, and an error message is sent, e.g. Save failed - Invalid device.
Notes.
1. When you START a LIN Database in RAM it is automatically saved to the file in E: drive called
filename.dbf, where filename is indicated in the filename.RUN file. It is then reloaded and started.
2. Modifications to a LIN Database are carried out on the RAM image only, not directly to the filename.dbf
file in E: drive. They are copied to E: drive (overwriting the existing filename.dbf file) automatically as
you restart the LIN Database, or when you do a SAVE operation.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.6 UTILITIES command (Cont.)
LOAD COMMAND
Retrieves a control program from a specified memory area and loads it to the instrument RAM.
Note. A LOAD operation can be performed using the Load option during online reconfiguration.
Select LOAD from the UTILITIES options menu - the default filename specification, E:<filename>.DBF is
displayed. Edit the specification if needed (to alter the filename or its source, as described in 'SAVE utility' above),
then press <Enter>. After a short pause the instrument signals completion as described for the SAVE option. Typing
any key returns the UTILITIES menu.
An invalid filename specification aborts the load, and an error message is sent, e.g. Load failed - File not found.
FILE COMMAND
Permits access to the instrument file page, allowing files to be deleted or copied, and the E: device to be formatted.
The file page displays files in the E-device and also in a configurable remote ??::?: device. To access a remote
device, move the cursor to the ??::?: field and type in the required node and device letter, e.g. FA::M:. Press <Enter>
to display its files (up to a maximum of 20). Press <Escape> to return to the UTILITIES menu.
Move the cursor up and down the file list and tag files with an asterisk (*) using <Enter>. Then move the cursor to the
top column-head field and press <Enter> to display the function menu: Copy, Delete, Find, and - for E-device only -
Format. Finally, select a function and press <Enter> to carry it out.
Note. The Find function has wild-card characters (?) to help you locate filenames containing known
character strings).
TRY/UNTRY CHANGES COMMAND

LIN Database changes can be Tried and Untried on a running LIN Database from the Configurator. If the control
strategy has Tentative' changes, Changes appears below the first line in the Configurator, but will change to
Trying when testing the strategy. Any such changes made whilst the LIN Database is running are Tentative',
as indicated on the Configurator screen and are not applied until APPLY is selected. These Tentative' changes
can be discarded by selecting UNTRY, before APPLY has been selected. UNTRY has no effect once APPLY has been
used.
Note. If changes have been applied, and a synchronisation is attempted, it will fail unless the LIN Database
running in the primary instrument has been saved using either the root LIN function block's full save
option, or it is stopped, saved and started from the Configurator program.
Select TRY or UNTRY from the UTILITIES options menu and press <Enter> to try or untry the Tentative'
changes to the control strategy running in the instrument.
APPLY/UNDO COMMAND
LIN Database changes can be executed online from the Configurator. Any such changes made whilst the LIN
Database is running are 'Tentative' and are not applied until APPLY is selected. These Tentative changes can
be discarded by selecting UNDO, before APPLY has been selected. UNDO has no effect once APPLY has been used.
Note. If changes have been applied, and a synchronisation is attempted, it will fail unless the LIN Database
running in the primary instrument has been saved using either the root function block's full save
option, or it is stopped, saved and started from the Configurator program.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.3.6 UTILITIES command (Cont.)
ELIN SETUP PAGE COMMAND

The ELIN Setup page allows the instruments network.unh file to be configured.
Note. The Network configuration can be edited using the Instrument Properties dialog via the Project
Environment or the instrument folder. The network.unh file can also be edited using an appropriate
text editor, e.g. notepad.exe.
Elin Setup (network.unh file)

|
LIN PROTOCOL SETUP | REMOTE SUBNET NODE LIST
|
Protocol Name RKN | 149.121.173.1
All Subnet Enable OFF |
Elin Only Enable ON |
|
|
LOCAL IP SETUP |
|
Get Address Method Fixed |
IP Address 149.121.128.209 |
Subnet 255.255.252.0 |
Default Gateway 149.121.128.138 |
|
| TELNET
| Login Id
| Password ********
Figure C.3.6 ELIN Setup page (example)
LIN PROTOCOL SETUP This area of the screen allows specification of the items in the [LIN] section of
the network.unh file.
LOCAL IP SETUP Allows the specification of those items in the [IP] section of the network.unh
file. The IP address etc. is entered using data obtained from the network
administrator.
REMOTE SUBNET NODE LIST Allows the user to enter the IP addresses of all the nodes with which it is required
to communicate. (The [PR] section of the network.unh file.)
Once all the required entries have been made, the ESC key should be operated. A confirmation message asks if the
network.unh file is to be updated. If Y, the file is updated and a power cycle is requested.
CROSS SUBNET WORKING With All Subnet Enable set OFF (default), the instrument will not communicate
ELIN cross subnet. This can be overridden in the network.unh file by setting All
Subnet Enable to ON. This defines the behavior when the instrument is
powered on. The ability to communicate cross subnet can be modified at run time
by using the Options.AllSubnt bit in the instruments header block. Set to
TRUE, this bit enables cross-subnet working. When set to FALSE, cross-subnet
working is disabled.
Note. This bit may be set FALSE, remotely, from a cross-subnet connection. If this is done, communications
will be lost, and it will thus not be possible to reset it to TRUE from the cross-subnet connection.
C.3.7 ALARMS command

Select ALARMS to view the currently active alarms in the instrument. Move the cursor up and down the list; press
<Enter> to acknowledge an individual alarm. Press I to inspect the LIN function block containing the alarm.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.4 MODBUS CONFIGURATION

Most Modbus configuration is completed before despatch, using the Modbus configuration tool. However, this basic
Terminal Configurator is resident within the instrument and permits both offline configuration and online
reconfiguration.
Following the successful start of a Telnet session, and access from the Initial Menu, the Gateway Modbus
Configuration menu appears, see Figure C.4.
GATEWAY MODBUS Configuration

>GWindex - Select GW index
MODE - Operating mode
INTERFACE - Select interface
SETUP - Configure interface
TABLES - Register and bit configuration
Figure C.4 Modbus Configurator Main menu
C.4.1 GWindex command

This command only appears in products that support multiple GW indices, see Figure C.4.1.
Select the GWindex number to be viewed by the Configurator. This is limited from 1 to the maximum number of GW
indices supported by the instrument, e.g. 3 for the T2550. The filename from where the GW index number was loaded
appears in the Filename field.
GWindex Select GWindex

GWindex 1
Filename ABCDEFGH
Figure C.4.1 GWindex menu
C.4.2 MODE command

Sets the operating state of the instrument to Modbus Slave or Modbus Master.
MODE Operating mode

Mode > Slave
Master
Figure C.4.2 OPERATING MODE menu
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.4.3 INTERFACE command

Sets the Interface Type and Interface Instance of the instrument via enumerated lists, see Figure C.4.3.
INTERFACE Select interface
Type Serial > Serial

Port COM1 TCP/IP
Figure C.4.3 INTERFACE menu
Select the Interface Type, Serial or TCP/IP, used to communicate with the Modbus instrument and then define the Port
it is connected to.
Note. Individual Modbus specifications are described in the appropriate instrument handbook.
C.4.4 SETUP command

Configures the selected Interface Type and Interface Instance of the instrument defined in the INTERFACE
menu. Selecting SETUP displays a menu that is dependant on the INTERFACE and MODE configurations.
Serial master
If the Serial is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Master is specified in the MODE menu this SETUP menu
will show the Baud rate, Parity, Stop bits, and Time out fields.
Serial slave
If the Serial is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Slave is specified in the MODE menu this SETUP menu
will show the Baud rate, Parity, Stop bits, Time out, and Slave No. fields.
SETUP Configure interface
Baud rate 2400

Parity Odd
Stop bits 2
Instr No >63
Time out 1.000 secs
Figure C.4.4 Typical TCP/IP Slave SETUP menu
TCP master
If the TCP/IP is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Master is specified in the MODE menu this SETUP menu
will show the Time out field only.
TCP slave
If the TCP/IP is selected in the INTERFACE menu and Slave is specified in the MODE menu this SETUP menu
will show the Port no, Instr No, Time out, and CNOMO fields.
Note. If the instrument supports CNOMO registers, this field indicates that Register Offset values 121, to 124
will display specific Manufacturer and Product details.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.4.4 SETUP command (Cont.)

This page gives general information about the Interface configuration.
Port no TCP/IP Interface and Slave Operating Mode only. It shows the TCP port via which this modbus-
TCP-slave instance communicates. 0 = default = 502.
Baud rate Highlight and enter this item to see a menu of the available baud rates, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Select and enter the required baud rate.
Parity Entering this item displays a menu of options, None, Odd, and Even. Select and enter the
required parity.
Stop bits Enter this item, type in the required number of stop bits, and press <Enter> to update the SETUP
menu, Only 1 or 2 stop bits are permitted.
Line type Shown only if both Serial Interface is selected and instruments supports software selection of
3-wire/5-wire operation.
Note. This is not currently supported.
Time out Enter a Time out value, in the range 0 to 65.5 seconds. In slave mode, this parameter specifies a
watchdog period for all tables. That is, if a table has not been accessed for Time out seconds, the
Online bit in the slave mode diagnostic register for that particular table resets to zero. In master
mode, Time out specifies a maximum period between the end of a masters request for data to the
start of the slaves response. If this time is exceeded, the Online bit in the master mode
diagnostic register for the particular table concerned resets to zero.
Instr No Slave Operating Mode only. Input an instrument number, i.e. the address on the Modbus Serial
link of the slave device being configured. Slave addresses are in the range 01 to FF hexadecimal,
but note that for some equipment FF is invalid.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.4.5 TABLES command

Shows the Tables List dependant on the MODE configuration. To view the tables list, highlight TABLES and press
<Enter>. Individual menus can be displayed by selecting the required Table number, see Table Menus.
TABLES LIST
The Tables List provides an overview of all the tables in the Modbus configuration. Each instrument will support a
maximum number of Tables as defined by the MAX_TABLES field in the instrument Configuration (Header) block.
The Tables List offers sixteen tables per page, therefore an instrument supporting 64 Tables, e.g. T2550, will cover 4
pages.
This menu allows tables to be created and the types, offsets, sizes, and for master mode, function codes, scan counts,
instrument numbers and tick rate to be specified. The Tables List also accesses individual Table Menus for detailed
configuration,i.e. LIN Database mapping, see Table Menus section.
The Tables List menu below, Figure C.4.5a, shows an example Tables List with Table 1 configured as a Register
Table. The first four columns, Table, Type, Offset, and Count, are common to both the Master and Slave Operating
Modes. The remaining, Functions, Scan count, Instr No, and TickRate appear only when Master Operating Mode is
configured.
Table Type Offset Count Functions Scan count Instr No TickRate
1 Register 0 16 3 4 6 16 16 >00 100

2 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
3 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
4 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
5 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
6 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
7 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
8 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
9 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
10 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
11 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
12 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
13 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
14 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
15 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
16 Unused 0 0 - - - - 0 >00 0
Figure C.4.5a Typical Master Mode Table menu
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
C.4.5 TABLES command (Cont.)

This page gives general information about the Modbus Table configuration.
Table This is the Table number, which is not editable. Highlight and <Enter> a Table number field to
display the information related to the selected Table number. For a table with a Type other than
Unused, the table menu for that table is displayed, see Table Menu.
Type This field, defaults to Unused, allows the Table Type to be created or edited. Enter a Type field
to see a menu of four options. Select one and press <Enter> to create a new table or convert an
existing one to a new type.
Note. Other fields in the Tables List associated with the selection automatically adopt default values.
The Type options are:

Unused The table does not exist.
Register This type of table maps LIN Database parameters to standard 16-bit Modbus
registers.
Digital This type of table maps LIN digital, boolean or alarm values to bits in the Modbus
address space.
Diagnostic This is a special table, similar to a Register Table, but the values in the table have
pre-defined values that are used to control the Modbus operation, or present
diagnostic information to the LIN Database.
Offset This field selects the start address of the table on the Modbus network. These values are the
actual values used in the address field of the Modbus messages, i.e. the protocol addresses.
Note. PLCs differ in the correspondence between their register or bit addresses and the protocol addresses.
Count This field shows the number of registers or bits in a table. It allows the size of register and
digital tables to be changed from their default values of 64 registers or bits, respectively, to
optimise the use of memory. Diagnostic tables are fixed at 32 registers.
Functions Master mode only. This field allows the default Modbus function codes that can be used with a
particular Modbus table type to be enabled or disabled. Modbus function codes define the type
of data exchange permitted between Master and Slave instruments via a particular table.
To disable a default function code, highlight it with the mouse and press <Enter> to see a menu of
- and the default code number. Selecting and entering - disables that code for the table
concerned. Select the code number again to re-enable it if required.
Scan count Master mode only. This sets the maximum number of registers (register table) or bits (digital
table) that can be read or written in a single Modbus transmission. Scan count defaults to the same
value as Count, i.e. as the table size, which results in the whole table being updated each polling
cycle. If Scan count is made less than Count for a particular table, it takes more than one cycle to
be updated but the overall polling cycle speeds up. This may be required for Modbus devices
with limited buffer sizes.
Instr No Master mode only. This specifies the hexadecimal Slave number value of the instrument on the
Modbus network in which the data registers or bits associated with this master table are located.
Tick Rate Each table of registers is assigned a Tick Rate, a value between 0 and 65535 ms, to define the
frequency at which it is scanned. The Tick Rate associated with each table can be configured. If
the LIN instrument does not support Tick Rates, and/or if the instrument is configured to operate
in Slave mode, the Tick Rate fields are disabled.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
TABLE MENUS
You access an individual table menu from the tables list by highlighting its table number (in the first column headed
Table) and pressing <Enter>. To highlight fields you can move the arrow cursor around a table menu using the mouse,
or the PCs <Home>, <End>, and cursor keys.
Table menus allow the mapping between the LIN Database fields and the Modbus addresses to be configured.
The Table Menu below, Figure C.4.5b, shows an example of the default Table Menu for a Register (or Diagnostic)
Table.
Note. Table headings differ between Register and Digital Tables, but some fields are common to both,
e.g. Field, DB Write, and MOD Write.
Register Field DP Format DB Write MOD Write Value
0 0 Normal Enable Enable >0000

Figure C.4.5b Typical Master Mode Table menu
This page gives detailed information about the selected table configuration.
Register Register and diagnostic tables only. This column shows the Modbus address of the particular
register. The first register in the table takes its address from the Offset value given to the table
via the Table List. The remaining (read-only) addresses follow on consecutively.
Digital Digital tables only. This column shows the Modbus address of the digital bit on the selected line
of the table. If the line contains a bitfield rather than a single bit, the address shown is that of the
first bit in the bitfield. Mappings may be made for a single bit, or for an 8- or 16-bit field,
according to the value defined in the Width parameter. The first bit address in the table takes its
value from the Offset given to the table via the Table List. The remaining (read-only) addresses
follow on according to the numbers of bits on each successive line of the table (1, 8, or 16).
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
Field This is the LIN Database field that the Modbus address is mapped to. It can remain blank. Select
a field with the cursor and type in and enter a LIN finction block name plus parameter (and
subfield if needed), separated by periods, e.g. PV1.Alarms.Software.
Note. If attempting to enter an analogue parameter into a digital table Field, the entry is ignored. However
any type of parameter can be entered in a register (or diagnostic) table. If attempting to enter or
overwrite a LINDatabase parameter that would force an entry lower down the table to change its
address (Digital value), the edit is ignored.
DP Register and diagnostic tables only. This column can be used for either of two functions:
specifying a decimal point position, or creating a 32-bit register.
Decimal point position DP can store a decimal point scaling factor that is used when converting
floating point numbers to 16-bit Modbus registers. For this purpose,
enter an integer from 0 to 4; the DP -value represents the number of
decimal places in the converted number.
32-bit register Register tables only. A 32-bit register is created by joining a
consecutive pair of 16-bit registers. The restrictions that are applied to
ensure that the 32-bit value created is transferred indivisibly:
1. The multiread function (3) and multiwrite function (16) must both
be enabled.
2. The scan count must be even.
3. The first register of the pair must be at an even offset within the table.
4. The first register of the pair must not be the last register in the table.
5. The second register of the pair must not already be assigned to a
LIN Database field.
6. The field type of the 32-bit register pair must be 32-bit long signed
or unsigned, 32-bit real or a string. For a string, only the first four
characters are transferred.
To create a 32-bit register pair, enter d (or D) in the DP field of
the first register of the pair. This causes the registers DP to adopt
the value D, and the following register the value d. To create a
reverse 32-bit register pair, enter s (or S) in the DP field of the
first register of the pair. If any of the above restrictions are violated,
your entry will be rejected.
When the first register of the 32-bit pair is assigned to a LIN
Database field, the second register automatically copies the same
field name; assigning the name and the DP can be done in either
order. To restore a 32-bit register pair to individual 16-bit registers
change the first registers DP to 0-4.
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
Format Register and diagnostic tables only. This column specifies the format of the data in the register,
normal or BCD (binary coded decimal). Normal format means that the data is a simple 16-bit
integer. In BCD format the value is first limited to the range 0-9999, and then stored as four 4-bit
nibbles in the register. The units are stored in the low order nibble, the tens in the second nibble,
the hundreds in the third, and the thousands in the high-order nibble. BCD format allows the data
to be used with certain devices such as displays.
Note. Format is ignored in 32-bit registers.
Width Digital tables only. This column indicates the number of bits contained in the associated
field. The default Width is 16, but it automatically updates when you allocate a parameter to the
field. Allocated field widths are read-only, but you can specify the width of an unallocated field
by highlighting its Width value and entering a valid number, in the range 1 to 16, but normally
only 1, 8, or 16.
Note. Editing a Width value is not permitted if this would force an entry lower down the table to change its
address (Digital value).
DB Write This column prevents the selected values in the LIN Database from being overwritten by values
received across the serial link. Highlight the required DB Write field and press <Enter> to see a
menu of options, Enable and Protect. Select Protect to write-protect the LIN Database
parameter, or Enable to allow overwriting.
Note. For a 32-bit register pair, DB Write applies only to the first register. The DB Write -value of the
second register is ignored.
MOD Write This column prevents the selected values in the LIN Database from being written to their
associated Modbus registers or bits. Highlight the required MOD Write field and press <Enter>
to see a menu of options, Enable and Protect. Select Protect to write-protect the Modbus
register/bit(s), or Enable to allow overwriting.
Note. The easiest way to globally protect an entire table, in a Modbus Gateway facility operating in Modbus
Master mode, is to disable its write function codes (5 and 15, or 6 and 16) in the Tables List.
For a 32-bit register pair, MOD Write applies only to the first register. The MOD Write -value of the
second register is ignored.
Value This column shows the current 16-bit value of the field in 4-digit hexadecimal representation.
Value is read-only.
HA028898 Appendix C
T2550 HANDBOOK
Appendix C HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D I/O MODULES

This chapter presents safety and EMC information and describes the mechanical and electrical installation of the
instrument. The main topics covered are as follows:
Introduction (section D.1)
Isolator links and Fuses (optional for I/O Terminal Units Only) (section D.2)
D.1 INTRODUCTION
The Base Unit is fitted with the I/O Controller Module(s) plus additional I/O Modules. These modules plug onto
Terminal Units, see Installation, which provide the wiring interface between the plant or machine and the I/O modules.
Each 16-way Base Unit uses approximately 1,800mA power consumption. Intercommunication between the I/O
modules is effected by the use of the internal module I/O bus. The signals on this bus are transferred between modules
through a series of connectors mounted on a printed circuit board running the full width of the base.
The following table shows a list of compatible I/O modules.
Slow I/O Task Fast I/O Task

Type Description (110ms) (10ms)
AI2 Analogue I/P 2 channels (universal; 3 Terminal Unit options) 9 -

AI3 Analogue I/P 3 channels (4-20mA, with transmitter PSU) 9 -
AI4 Analogue I/P 4 channels (TC, mV, mA Terminal Unit options) 9 -
AO2 Analogue O/P 2 channels (0-20mA or 0-10V output) 9 -
DI4 Digital I/P 4 channels (logic) 9 -
DI8_LG* Digital I/P 8 channels (logic) 9 9
DI8_CO* Digital I/P 8 channels (contact closure) 9 9
DI6_MV Digital I/P 6 channels (ac mains input, 115V rms) 9 -
DI6_HV Digital I/P 6 channels (ac mains input, 230V rms) 9 -
*
DO4_LG Digital O/P 4 channels (externally powered, 10mA) 9 9
DO4_24* Digital O/P 4 channels (externally powered, 100mA) 9 9
DO8 Digital O/P 8 channels 9 9
RLY4 * Relay O/P 4 channels (2 amp; 3 n/o, 1 change-over) 9 9
FI2 Frequency I/P 2 channels (logic, magnetic, and contact closure) 9 9
ZI Zirconia Probe I/P 2 channels (mV (TC), high impedence 0-2V) 9 -
Note. * indicates the Module upgraded, refers to Version 2 modules.
D.2 ISOLATOR LINKS AND FUSES (OPTIONAL FOR I/O TERMINAL UNITS ONLY)
Up to four isolator links or fuses are available as options for certain modules.
Isolator links disconnect plant connections from the module (for testing and commissioning).
The fuses supplied for the relay units are 4A (T type), 20mm to EN60127. Fuses of a lower rating may be fitted to suit
the application.
The label on the side of the fuse holder may be used to indicate the correct type of fuse. The label on the top of the
fuse holder may be used to identify or tag the protected circuit.
If isolator links or fuses are not fitted then a dummy fuse cover must be fitted.
HA028898 Appendix D
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page D - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
Appendix D HA028898
Page D - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D1 2500P - 24V POWER SUPPLY
D1.1 DESCRIPTION
The 2500P is a fully protected stabilised power supply unit which provides 24V DC to power the T2550 or 2500 DIN
rail controller, from a mains supply of 115 or 230V AC, 47 - 63 Hz. The maximum power rating of a T2550 or 2500
DIN rail controller is 90W, but the actual size depends upon the power rating of the modules in use. This can be
calculated from the Module Power Consumptions.
Note The 2500P power supply can also be used to supply external plant devices if required.
The power supply is designed to mount directly on to a DIN rail either next to or separated from the T2550 or 2500
base, and the following versions are available:
2500P/1A3 rated at 24V, 1.3amp, 30 watt, input 35VA.
2500P/2A5 rated at 24V, 2.5amp, 60 watt, input 70VA.
2500P/5A0 rated at 24V, 5.0 amp, 120 watt, input 140VA
2500P/10A rated at 24V, 10 amp, 240watt, input 275VA
Additional power supplies can be wired in parallel if currents greater than that available from an individual supply are
required or to provide power supply redundancy.
D1.2 MODULE IDENTIFICATION

The power supply module may be identified by means of labels on the side and front of the case. The side label
includes details of the product code and serial number.
D1.3 CONFIGURATION
There is no configuration requirement for power supplies.
D1.4 LOCATION
This module should be located on the DIN rail, immediately to the left of the Base Unit.
HA028898 Appendix D1
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page D1 - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
D1.5 TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
Warning
Warning! Always isolate the power before disconnection.
Note The PSU 24V connections should not be connected to earth since this will bias communications at an
elevated level. (A 10kOhm resistor is connected from RJ45 communications to earth which provides a
bleed for static).
Alarm Relay.
24 v Contacts closed in
output normal operation
+ -
RLY
Front View Front View

(2500P/2.5A and (2500P/10A)
2500P/5A0)
Line Voltage
selection
115 Vac
115 Vac
230 Vac
230 Vac
RLY
N L N L + -
Neutral Line Earth Neutral Line Earth 24 v Alarm Relay.

output Contacts closed in
normal operation
Pull connector to Pull connector to

disconnect disconnect
Figure 2500P-4 2500P Power Supply Terminal Connections
Appendix D1 HA028898
Page D1 - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
D1.6 STATUS INDICATION

The status of the module is shown by a single LED indicator as follows:
LED Colour ON OFF + -
Green Normal Operation Output Voltage >12V RLY
Figure 2500P-5 2500P Power Supply Status Indication
D1.7 SPECIFICATION
Input Specification
Nominal Input Voltage Range: 110-120/220-240V, 47-63Hz, 85- 132Vac/176-264Vac.
Note Voltage selected by front panel switch. When located in the 230V position the Power Supply Unit operates at low and
moderate loads at any input voltage between 95 and 275Vac (see Nominal Output Current).
Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
Nominal Input Current: 2A5 - <1.3A (switch in 115V position), <0.7A (switch in 230V position)
5A0 - <2.6A (switch in 115V position), <1.4A (switch in 230V position)
10A - N/A
In-rush Current: 2A5 - <25A
5A0 - <15A
10A - <30A
Note 2A5 and 5A0 - 10A, B-type circuit breaker is the recommended input fusing.
Output Specification
Nominal Output Voltage: 24Vdc. 0.5%
Ripple (including spikes): <30mV pp
Nominal Output Current: 2A5 - 2.5A (60W)

5A0 - 5A (120W)
10A - 10A (240W)
Voltage Regulation: Better than 1% Vout overall

Parallel Operation: Yes
Relay Contact: 1A, at 28Vdc
T2550 HANDBOOK
D1.8 MOUNT THE POWER SUPPLY
D1.8.1 DIN Rail Mounting

1. Tilt unit slightly backwards.
2. Put it onto the DIN rail.
3. Push downwards until stopped, then push at the lower front edge to lock.
k
Clic
D1.8.2 Demounting
Warning
Warning! Always isolate the power before disconnection.
1. Press the button on the top of the Power Supply Module downwards (to unlock) and carefully remove it from the
DIN Rail.
Note The PSU 24V connections should not be connected to earth since this will bias communications at an
elevated level. (A 10 KW resistor is connected from RJ45 communications to earth which provides a
bleed for static).
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D2 AI2 - TWO CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE
D2.1 DESCRIPTION
The analogue input module is used to measure analogue signals from a range of plant sensors.
These include:
Thermocouples
Platinum Resistance Thermometers (2-, 3- and 4-Wire)
Voltage +10V and +100mV
High Impedance (Zirconia)
Current +20mA.
The analogue input module consists of two input channels, isolated from each other and isolated from the system
electronics. For thermocouple inputs Cold Junction Temperature is measured by a RTD sensor fitted to the Terminal
Unit.
Typical parameters which can be configured or changed include:
Input Type
Range
Input Filter Time Constant
Sensor Break Action
User Calibration. This allows you to offset the permanent factory calibration to:
a. Calibrate the controller to your reference standards
b. Match the calibration of the controller to that of a particular transducer or sensor
c. Calibrate the controller to suit the characteristics of a particular installation
Note The Sensor Break Protection of the channel is controlled via an associated AI_UIO block.
T2550 HANDBOOK

Dual Thermocouple Dual 2-, 3-, 4-Wire Platinum
(TC) Resistance Thermometer (PRT)
and Potentiometer Input
AI2 AI2
H1 B1 H2 B2
I1 D1 I2 D2
1+ 1- 2+ 2- A1 C1 A2 C2
+ +
See Note 2
I1 C1 I1 A1C1 +I1 B1 A1C1
PRT or PRT or PRT
See Note 1 I2 C2 I2 A2C2 +I2 B2 A2 C2
PRT or PRT or PRT
Notes.
1 If the AI module is configured as thermocouple input on one channel and +mV input on the other, then
the thermocouple must be connected to Channel 1. Channel 2 can be used for the Zirconia probe
milli-volt source if required.
2 Channel 1 - PRT 2-wire connection uses I1 and C1 only. Channel 2 - PRT 2-wire connection uses I2
and C2 only.
WIRING REDUNDANT MODULES

This module does support redundant wiring operation , see 2500M I/O Module Redundant Configuration Handbook.
Figure AI2-1a Two Channel Analogue Input Terminal Connections
Page D2 - 2 Issue 9A feb 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.2 Terminal Connections (Cont.)
Dual Volts (V) or Dual milli-amps (mA) High impedence input

milli-volts (mV) Shunt Option (Zirconia probe)
SHUNT
AI2 AI2 AI2
H1 B1 H2 B2 H1 B1 H2 B2 H1 B1 H2 B2
I1 D1 I2 D2 I1 D1 I2 D2 I1 D1 I2 D2
A1 C1 A2 C2 A1 C1 A2 C2 A1 C1 A2 C2
See Note
+H1 -C1 +A1 -C1 +A1 -C1
V mV mA
or
+H2 -C2 +A2 -C2 +A2 -C2 +A2 -C2
V V mA Zr
or
+A2 -C2
mV
Channel HR_in to LR_in Terminal Note. The Shunt option has 5 resistors mounted on the
Limits Connections
rear of the PCB.
CH1 -150mV to +150mV A1 and C1
-10Vdc to +10Vdc C1 and H1
CH2 150mV to +150mV C2 and A2
0 to 1.8Vdc C2 and A2
-10Vdc to +10Vdc C2 and H2
Figure AI2-1b Two Channel Analogue Input Terminal Connections
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.3 ANALOGUE INPUTS
D2.3.1 Isolation Diagram

Transducers can be directly wired into any appropriate channel at the terminals, but introduces safety implications,
particularly risk of shock hazard. Electrical isolation minimizes such risks even when equipment goes faulty, and
particularly when some transducers have to be run live.
To provide effective operation a very simple isolation strategy is implemented in the form of a barrier separating all
I/O channels in any I/O module from the rest of the system. This prevents hazardous voltages on any I/O channel
introducing hazards on any wiring on another I/O module, or put at risk the rest of the system. Modules providing
isolation channel-to-channel ensure safety and good signal quality on all channels.
1+
Channel 1 ADC1
CJC
1-
I/O Bus
and IOC
2+
Channel 2 ADC2
2-
Figure AI2-2 Isolation Diagram
D2.3.2 Equivalent Circuits

The equivalent circuits below show details of analogue inputs, in particular sensor break circuits.
VRef
20M Up
None T/C Break
Action
Down
1+ or
2+
CJC High impedance
Thermocouple
input amplifier
1- or
2-
Gnd
Internal View
Figure AI2-3 Thermocouple Input
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.3 ANALOGUE INPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS (Cont.)
8K2
I1 or VRef
I2
20M Up
PRT None Sensor Break
Action
Down
A1 or
A2
High impedance
input amplifier
C1 or
C2
Gnd
Internal View
Figure AI2-4 3-Wire PRT Input
270K 20M Up
H1 or H2 None Sensor Break
Action
Down
Milli-Volt Source
A1 or A2
High impedance
input amplifier
C1 or C2
Internal View Gnd
Figure AI2-5 mV Input
Volt Source 270K Volt Source

H1 or H2 +A2
0 to 1.8Vdc
33K High impedance
input amplifier
C1 or C2 -C2
Internal View Internal View
Figure AI2-6 Voltage Input
Current Source
A1 or A2
High impedance
5
input amplifier
C1 or C2
Internal View
Figure AI2-7 mA Input
T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by three LED indicators as follows:
LED Colour ON OFF
Green Normal Operation Fault Condition -

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
LED Colour ON OFF

1 1
1 Red Ch1 sensor break or initialising Normal Operation
2
2 Red Ch2 sensor break or initialising Normal Operation 2
Flashing Blinking ON
1 Red Ch1 CJC fail or Ch1 bad cal data Calibrating

AI2
Definitions Approx ON time Approx OFF time Approx Flash rate
Flashing 0.5 secs 0.5 secs 1 sec

Blinking ON 0.2 secs 2 secs 2 secs
Figure AI2-8 Two Channel Analogue Input Status Indication
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Values given with respect to Vs, where Vs is an externally supplied voltage, nominally 24V. Plant Side Interface.
D2.5.1 AI2 TC Module

Input Types: Analogue voltage, 150mV (TC) or 2V (Zirconia probe)
mV Input Specification
Input Range: -150mV to +150mV.
Calibration Accuracy: 0.1% of MeasV parameter reading, 10V.
Noise: <4V p-p with 1.6s Filter, better with longer time constants.
<28V p-p, filter off.
Resolution: <2V with 1.6s Filter.
Linearity: Better than 5V
Temperature Coefficient: < 40ppm of reading per C
Sensor Break Protection: Switchable, 125nA break low or break high (or off).
Input Impedance: >100M (break detect circuit disabled)
Input Leakage Current: <100nA (break detect circuit disabled), 0.2nA typ.
HiZ Voltage Input Specification (Ch2 ONLY)

Input Range: 0.0V to +1.8V.
Input Impedance: >100 MW

Input Leakage Current: <100nA, 1nA typ.
Cold Junction Sensor Specification
Temperature Range: -10C to +70C
CJ Rejection: > 30:1
CJ Accuracy: 0.5C (Automatic cold junction compensation)
Sensor Type: Pt100 resistor, under the TU wiring terminals.
General Specifications
Module power consumption: 2W max.
Common mode rejection: >120db, 47 - 63Hz
Series mode rejection: >60db, 47 - 63Hz
Isolation channel - channel: Functional (basic insulation), 264Vac max
Isolation to system: Reinforced (double insulation), 264Vac max
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.5.2 AI2 DC Module

Input Types: 150mV, 2V, 10V, 600, 6k, and 5kPot inputs.
Sensor Break Protection: Switchable, 125nA break low or break high (or off).
Input Impedance: >100M (break detect circuit disabled)
Input Leakage Current: <100nA (break detect circuit disabled), 1nA typ.
HiZ Voltage Input Specification (Ch2 ONLY)

Input Range: 0.0V to +1.8V.
Input Impedance: >100 M

Input Leakage Current: <100nA, 1nA typ.
10 V Input Specification
Input Range: -10.3V to +10.3V.
Calibration Accuracy: 0.1% of MeasV parameter reading, 2mV.
Noise: <0.4mV p-p with 1.6s Filter, better with longer time constants.
<2mV p-p, filter off.
Resolution: <0.2V with 1.6s Filter.
Linearity: Better than 0.7mV
Input Impedance: 303K 1%
RTD and Ohms (3 and 4 wire) Input Specification

Input Range: 0 to 420 (RTD), 640 (Range)
Calibration Accuracy: 0.1% of MeasV parameter reading.
Noise: <0.05V p-p with 1.6s Filter, better with longer time constants.
Linearity: Better than 0.05V
continued...
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.5.2 AI2 DC Module (Cont.)
High Ohms Input Specification

Noise: <0.05V p-p with 1.6s Filter, better with longer time constants.
Linearity: Better than 0.1V
Pot Position Input Specifications

Input Range: 0 to 100% rotation
End to end Resistance: 100 to 7K
Noise: <0.01% p-p with 1.6s Filter, 5K Pot.
<0.3% p-p with 1.6s Filter, 100K Pot.
Resolution: <0.001% with 1.6s Filter, 5K Pot.
Linearity: Better than 0.01%
Note. Effective noise is related to filter and end-to-end resistance; higher resistance values are preferred.
T2550 HANDBOOK
D2.5.3 AI2 mA Module

Input Types: 4 - 20 mA Current Loop.
Note. V and ranges do not function when using the Shunt Terminal Unit.
Channel Specification
Input Range: -30mA to +30mA
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D3 AI3 - THREE CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE
D3.1 DESCRIPTION
The AI3 offers three, isolated, current-input channels. The module hardware provides fixed range capable of 20mA at
high resolution; configuration providing applications ranging. Each channel has an internal burden resistor requiring
less than 1 volt and in typical applications the inputs would be used for 4-20mA signals.
Each isolated channel has its own 24V supply available for external transmitter excitation.
Configurable parameters include:
Input Type
User Calibration. This allows the permanent factory calibration to be offset in order to:
a. Allow the controller to be calibrated to a particular reference standard
Note The Sensor Break Protection of the channel is controlled via an associated AI_UIO block.
T2550 HANDBOOK

Connections are shown below for inputs where the transmitter requires excitation, and for those generating their own
current. Each channel can be wired as required.
AI3 AI3
P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3
C1 C2 C3 C1 C2 C3
I1 I2 I3 I1 I2 I3 Note: C1 to C3 are positive
P1 P2 P3 C1 C2 C3
+ + +
mA mA mA mA mA mA
C1 C2 C3 I1 I2 I3
4-20mA Module powered inputs 4-20mA Self powered inputs
Figure AI3-1 Three Channel Analogue Input Terminal Connections

This module does not support redundant wiring operation.
T2550 HANDBOOK

Transducers can be directly wired into any appropriate channel but to do so may introduce safety problems, in
including shock hazards. Electrical isolation minimizes such risks even when equipment goes faulty, and is particularly
useful with live transducers.
Isolation is achieved by the incorporation of an isolation barrier to separate all channels in an I/O module from the rest
of the system. This prevents hazardous voltages on any I/O channel introducing hazards into other I/O modules, or
putting the rest of the system at risk. Modules providing isolation channel-to-channel ensure safety and good signal
quality on all channels.
P1
Channel 1 ADC1
CJC
C1
P2
I/O Bus
Channel 2 ADC2
and IOC
C2
P3
Channel 3 ADC3
C3
P1, P2 or
P3
Current Source 150
C1, C2 or
C3 24V
High impedance
Cut-Track 60 input amplifier
I1, I2 or
I3
Internal View
T2550 HANDBOOK
D3.4 HART COMPATIBILITY

The module does not directly support HART data extraction or injection functions.
The module is compatible with HART systems but with the following notes and provisos:
The PSU is specified with a low AC impedance, so permitting normal HART connections (e.g., with master
connected across the field device (near or far), or across the loop burden).
Each channel offers full galvanic isolation, easing wiring and preventing HART signals from becoming interfering
signals.
Power Supply noise and ripple at HART frequencies are at very low amplitude, thus minimising risk of
interference with HART signals.
For HART loops where the main burden resistor is that provided by the AI3, the resistor must be padded with an
external series resistor, normally by adding 150W in series with the Cn connection. This can be achieved by
cutting the track as shown in Figure AI3-2. The resistor can be wired using the spare terminals and wire-ended
resistors. Such padding does not affect the specification, except in that the excess input voltage would reduce the
headroom required to power external devices (as would all HART compliant loops).
T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by four LED indicators as follows:
Note. * - IOC firmware prior to software issue 2.21 will not recognise an AI3 module.
LED Colour ON OFF
Green Normal Operation Fault Condition

No Power or
No Comms or
Unrecognised Module Type*
Wrong Module Type
LED Colour ON OFF

1
1
1 Red Ch1 loop break or initialising Normal Operation 2 2
2 Red Ch2 loop break or initialising Normal Operation 3
3 Red Ch3 loop break or initialising Normal Operation 3
1 Red Ch1 bad calibration Calibrating

2 Red Ch2 bad calibration Calibrating AI3
3 Red Ch3 bad calibration Calibrating
Definitions Approx ON time Approx ON time Approx Flash rate

Figure AI3-4 Three Channel Analogue Input Status Indication
T2550 HANDBOOK
D3.6 SPECIFICATIONS
D3.6.1 AI3 Module

Input Types: 4 - 20 mA Current Loop with exciter PSU.
Calibration Accuracy: 0.1% of MeasV parameter reading
Noise: <1V p-p with 1.6s Filter
Resolution: <0.5V with 1.6s Filter
Linearity: Better than 0.7A
Temperature Coefficient: < 50ppm per C of reading per C
Burden Resistor: 60, 50mA max current
Channel PSU: 22V min to 29V max.
PSU Protection: 30mA (nom) current trip, auto reset.
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D4 AI4 - FOUR CHANNEL ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE
D4.1 DESCRIPTION
The analogue input module is used to measure analogue signals from a range of plant sensors.
These include:
Thermocouples
Voltage +100mV
Current +20mA.
The analogue input module consists of four input channels, isolated in pairs of channels (1 and 2 from 3 and 4) each
channel pair having independent termination but sharing a common connection and all channels isolated from the
system electronics.
For thermocouple inputs Cold Junction Temperature is measured by a RTD sensor fitted to the terminal unit.
Typical parameters that can be configured or changed include:
Input Type
Range
Note The Sensor Break Protection of the channel is controlled via an associated AI_UIO block. Channel 1
and Channel 3 support Up, None, or Down Sensor Break Action, and Channel 2 and Channel 4
support Up Sensor Break Action only.
AI4 MODULE

Connections are shown below for inputs where the transmitter requires excitation, and for those generating their own
current. Each channel can be wired as required.
Thermocouple Milli-volts Milli-amps
(TC) (mV) (mA)
Shunt Option
SHUNT
AI-TC AI-DC AI-mA
5
5
2+ 2- 4+ 4- 2+ 2- 4+ 4- 2+ 2- 4+ 4-
1+ 1- 3+ 3- 1+ 1- 3+ 3- 1+ 1- 3+ 3-
+ +
2+ 2- 4+ 4- 2+ 2- 4+ 4-
mV mV mA mA
+ +
1+ 1- 3+ 3- 1+ 1- 3+ 3-
mV mV mA mA
Note If the AI module is configured as Note The shunt option has 5 resistors
thermocouple input on one mounted on the PCB. The mV option
channel and + mV inputs on the may also be used for mA inputs if
others, the thermocouple must fitted with suitable 5 external
be connected to channel 1. burden resistors. It permits a
0-20mA input to provide a full scale
range of 0-100mV.
Page D4 - 2 Issue 9 Nov 08
T2550 HANDBOOK

1+
Channel 1 ADC1
CJC
1-
2+
Channel 2 ADC2
2-
I/O Bus
and IOC
3+
Channel 3 ADC3
3-
4+
Channel 4 ADC4
4-

The equivalent circuits below show details of analogue inputs, in particular sensor break circuits.
20M
VRef
1+ to 4+
CJC High impedance
Thermocouple
input amplifier
1- to 4-
Internal View
Figure AI4-3 Thermocouple Input
AI4 MODULE
D4.3 ANALOGUE INPUTs (Cont.)
20M
1+ to 4+
Milli-Volt High impedance

Source input amplifier
1- to 4-
Internal View
Figure AI4-4 mV Input
1+ to 4+
Current High impedance
Source 5
input amplifier
1- to 4-
Internal View
T2550 HANDBOOK

LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
LED Colour ON OFF
1 Red Ch1/2 sensor break or initialising Normal Operation 1

2 Red Ch3/4 sensor break or initialising Normal Operation 1 2
3
2 4
1 Red Ch1/2 CJC fail or Ch1 bad cal data Calibrating

2 Red Ch3/4 CJC fail or Ch2 bad cal data Calibrating
AI4

Figure AI4-6 Four Channel Analogue Input Status Indication
AI4 MODULE
D4.5 SPECIFICATIONS
D4.5.1 AI4 TC Module

Input Types: mVdc (optimised for thermocouples)

Linearity: Better than 5V.
Temperature Coefficient: < 40ppm of reading per C.
Input Impedance: >20M (break detect circuit to +2.5V).
Input Leakage Current: -125nA (break detect drive)
Cold Junction Sensor Specification
Cold Junction Range: -10C to +70C
CJ Rejection: > 30:1
CJ Accuracy: 0.5C (Automatic cold junction compensation)
Sensor Type: Pt100 resistor, under the TU wiring terminals.
Isolation channel - channel: Ch1 connected to Ch2, and Ch3 connected to Ch4 - Functional (basic insulation)
separates the CH1, CH2 pair from the CH3, CH4 pair, 264Vac max
T2550 HANDBOOK
D4.5.2 AI4 mV Module

Input Types: mV dc input (where CJC is not required).
Input Range: -150mV to +150mV

Input Impedance: >20M (break detect circuit to +2.5V)
Input Leakage Current: -125nA (break detect drive)

AI4 MODULE
D4.5.3 AI4 mA Module

Input Types: 4 - 20 mA Current Loop.
Calibration Accuracy: 0.1% of MeasV parameter reading, 2A.
Linearity: Better than 1V.
Burden Resistor: 5 0.1% (fitted to Terminal Unit)
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D5 AO2 - TWO CHANNEL ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULE
D5.1 DESCRIPTION
The analogue output module provides two analogue output channels, isolated from each other and isolated from the
system electronics. Each output may be configured as either voltage or current.
Typical operating outputs which can be configured include:
10V 5mA max
20mA 12V dc max
5V 10mA max
Output range limit 30V max, 40mA max.

Voltage
(mA)
AO2
1+ 1- 2+ 2-
Notes.
1+ 1- 2+ 2-
1. Voltage Mode. The input impedance Rv of the device
Rv Rv connected to the Analogue Output module must be
> 550 for 0Vdc to 10Vdc range and > 1500 for the
1+ 1- 2+ 2-
-0.1Vdc to +10.1Vdc range.
Ri Ri 2. Current Mode. The input impedance (or loop
mA mA impedance) Ri of the device connected to the
Analogue Output module must be < 550.
REDUNDANT OUTPUT WIRING

T2550 HANDBOOK
D5.3 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

1+
mA
V
I/O Bus 1-
and IOC
1+
mA
V
1-
Figure AO2-2 Isolation Diagram
D5.3.2 Equivalent Diagram
1+ or 2+ 1+ or 2+
550 (0Vdc to 10Vdc)

550
1500 (-0.1Vdc to +10.1Vdc)
1- or 2- 1- or 2-
Internal View Internal View
Figure AO2-3 Voltage Output Figure AO2-4 Current Output
T2550 HANDBOOK

LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
LED Colour ON OFF

1 1
1 Red Ch1 saturated or initialising Normal Operation
2
2 Red Ch2 saturated or initialising Normal Operation 2
1 Red Ch1 bad cal data Calibrating

2 Red Ch2 bad cal data Calibrating
AO2

Figure AO2-5 Two Channel Analogue Output Status Indication
T2550 HANDBOOK
D5.5 SPECIFICATIONS
Values given with respect to Vs, where Vs is an externally supplied voltage, nominally 24V.
D5.5.1 AO2 Module

Output Types: 4-20mA loop current or 0-10Vdc, software selected.
Current Output Specification

Output Range: 0mA to +20mA
Output Load Limits: 0 to 550
Calibration Accuracy: Better than 0.1% of reading
Linearity: 0.003% of range (0.7A)
Resolution: better than 1 part in 10000 (1A typical)
Voltage Output Specification

Output Range: 0Vdc to +10Vdc, -0.1Vdc to +10.1Vdc
Output Load Limits: 550 or higher, 1500 or higher respectively
Calibration Accuracy: Better than 0.1% of reading
Linearity: 0.003% of range (0.3mV)
Resolution: better than 1 part in 10000 (0.5mV typical)
General Specification
Module power consumption: 2.2W max.
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D6 DI4 - FOUR CHANNEL DIGITAL INPUT MODULE
D6.1 DESCRIPTION
The Four Channel Digital Input Module accepts four logic inputs which may be either from a voltage source or a
contact closure.
For voltage source inputs, the ON state requires between +10.8V and + 30V, and the OFF state requires < +5V.
For contact closure inputs, an external power supply of between +18V and +30V is required at a current rating suitable
for the size of the system (This module provides a transient current of 100mA for 1mS at the point of switching).
A suitable 24V DIN rail mounted power supply, is the 2500P/2A5 rated at 2.5 amps, 2500P/5A0 rated at 5 amps or
2500P/10A rated at 10 amps, - see 2500P module.
A limited number of parameters are required to be configured in this module, such as:-
Contact bounce suppression
T2550 HANDBOOK

Voltage Source Contact Inputs
Inputs Externally Powered
DI4 DI4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C C C C C C C C
V+ V+ C C V+ V+ C C
See Note 1 V+ V+ C C
1 C V+ C 2 C To Additional
+ Modules
*Voltage
Supply
- Note * - This supply is an
+ - + -
1 C 2 C external power supply to
3 C 4 C power plant devices.
3 C 4 C
+ - + -
Logic Inputs Contact Inputs
Notes.
1. A link must be fitted in place of external voltage supply.
2. Negative logic inputs can be connected if required. Reverse the
polarity of the input connections.
Figure DI4-1 Four Channel Digital Input Module Terminal Connections

T2550 HANDBOOK
D6.3 DIGITAL INPUTS

1 DI1
2 DI2
I/O Bus
and IOC
3 DI3
4 DI4
Figure DI4-2 Isolation Diagram
T2550 HANDBOOK

The equivalent circuits below show the input into the Four Channel Digital Input Module for purposes of determining
the source conditions.
V 4K
1, 2, 3
or 4
C
Internal View
Figure DI4-3 Logic Input Equivalent Circuit
V 2K
1, 2, 3
or 4
C
Internal View
Figure DI4-4 Contact Closure Input Equivalent Circuit
T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by five LED indicators as follows:
Note When the module is reset all LEDs are lit for 1sec for test purposes.
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
1 1
LED Colour ON OFF 2 2
3 3
1 Yellow Digital Input Ch1 ON Digital Input Ch1 OFF 4 4
2 Yellow Digital Input Ch2 ON Digital Input Ch2 OFF

DI4
Figure DI4-5 Four Channel Digital Input Module Status Indication
T2550 HANDBOOK
D6.5 SPECIFICATIONS
The DI4 offers four logic channels for voltage input or for switch contact input. For the latter a 24V supply is required;
for logic input the supply must be shorted. This configuration determines the function for all four channels.
D6.5.1 DI4 Module

Channel Types: On/Off, Pulse, Debounce.
Logic Input Specification
Input Logic 0 (Off): <5Vdc

Input Logic 1 (On): >10.8Vdc
Input Operating Range: -5Vdc to +30Vdc
Input Current: 2.5mA (approx) at 10.5V; 10mA max @ 30V.
Note Logic operation requires a short across V+ and C terminals, setting the mode for the whole module.
Contact Input Specification
Contact Mode PSU (Vcs): 18Vdc to 30Vdc, 24V nom.

Contact Input 0 (Off): >28K
Contact Input 1 (On): <100
Contact Current: 8mA typical at 200 contact, 16mA max s/c contact
Note Contact mode requires 24Vdc across the V+ and C terminals, setting the mode for the whole module.
Module power consumption: 0.45W max

Isolation channel - channel: N/A (Channels share common connections)
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D7 DI6 - SIX CHANNEL AC DIGITAL INPUT MODULE
D7.1 DESCRIPTION
This Six Channel Digital Input Module accepts six isolated mains ac, logic input signals and is available in two
variants for 230 volts AC. (DI6 230V AC) or 115 volts AC (DI6 115V AC). The two versions are factory assembled
options and cannot be converted in the field.
Inadvertent use of the wrong module is unlikely to cause damage. However, prolonged use of the 115 volt option at
230 volts will cause higher than recommended power dissipation and if working close to the maximum ambient
operating temperature, damage may occur. This mode of operation is NOT recommended.
Using a 230 volt unit on 115 volt AC, will not cause damage, but as 115 volt AC does not exceed the active state
minimum voltage for ON, there is no guarantee the ON state will be detected.
Contact bounce suppression.
T2550 HANDBOOK

115 and 230 Volt AC
Inputs
DI6
L5 N5 L6 N6
L3 N3 L4 N4
L1 N1 L2 N2
L5 N5 L6 N6
L3 N3 L4 N4
L1 N1 L2 N2
115V and 230Vac

Logic Inputs
This module does not currently support redundant wiring operation.
Figure DI6-1 Six Channel AC Digital Input Module Terminal Connections
T2550 HANDBOOK
D7.2.1 V-I CURVES FOR INPUTS

The graphs below show the minimum and maximum input voltages which will guarantee OFF and ON conditions
respectively for 230V and 115V operation. For the input to correctly indicate a transition the input must exceed the
voltage threshold and concurrently the source must be capable of supplying more than 2mA.
0 100 200 300

mA

Current taken by the input

against input switching 6

voltage assuming 230Vac

operation.

70 180 V ac rms
OFF ON
*
Note * - The threshold may vary between Vmaxoff and Vminon. Ioff is defined at the threshold.
Figure DI6-2a V-I curve for 230Vac operation
0 50 100 150

mA

Current taken by the input

against input switching 6

voltage assuming 115Vac

operation.

35 85 95 V ac rms
57Hz 47Hz
OFF ON
Note * - The threshold may vary between Vmaxoff and Vminon. Ioff is defined at the threshold.
Figure DI6-2b V-I curve for 115Vac operation
T2550 HANDBOOK
D7.3 DIGITAL INPUTS

L1
DI1
N1
L2
DI2
N2
L3
DI3 I/O Bus
N3
and IOC
L4
DI4
N4
L5
N5 DI5
L6
DI6
N6
T2550 HANDBOOK

The equivalent circuits below show the input into the Six Channel Digital Input Module for purposes of determining
68nF
L1 to L6 1K5
230V ac
N1 to N6
Internal View
Figure DI6-4 230V ac Digital Input Equivalent Circuit
68nF
L1 to L6 1K 500
15nF
115V ac
N1 to N6
Internal View
Figure DI6-5 115V ac Digital Input Equivalent Circuit
T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by seven LED indicators as follows:
Notes
1. * - Only applicable after software version 3.26.
2. When the module is reset all LEDs are lit for 1sec for test purposes.
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or 1 1
Unrecognised Module Type* 2 2
Wrong Module Type 3 3

4 4
5 5
6 6
LED Colour ON OFF

6 Yellow Digital Input Ch6 ON Digital Input Ch6 OFF DI6 DI6
230V AC 115V AC
Figure DI6-6 Six Channel AC Digital Input Module Status Indication
D7.5 SPECIFICATIONS
D7.5.1 DI6 Module

Channel Types: 115V and 230V - On/Off, Pulse, Debounce.
Input Logic 0 (Off): 115Vac - <35Vac, 47Hz - 63Hz.

230Vac - <70Vac, 47Hz - 63Hz.
Input Logic 1 (On): 115Vac - <95Vac, 47Hz - 63Hz.
230Vac - <180Vac, 47Hz - 63Hz.
Input Operating Range: 115Vac - 0 to 150Vac.
230Vac - 264Vac.
Maximum Input Current: 115Vac - 8mA rms @ 150Vac.
230Vac - 9mA rms @ 264V.
Minmum Input Current: 115Vac - Logic 0 forced for any current < 2mA rms.
230Vac - Logic 0 forced for any current < 2mA rms.

Detectable Pulse Width: 3 cycles min
Debounce Time: 20ms to 2.55s
Isolation channel - channel: Functional (basic insulation), 264 Vac max.
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D8 DI8 - EIGHT CHANNEL DIGITAL INPUT MODULE
D8.1 DESCRIPTION
The Eight Channel Digital Input Module accepts eight digital inputs which may be either from a voltage source
(DI8LOGIC) or contact closure (DI8CONTACT). The two versions are factory assembled options and cannot be converted in
the field.
For the DI8LOGIC option (voltage source inputs), the ON state requires between +10.8V to + 30V, and the OFF state
requires between -3V and +5V.
For the DI8CONTACT option (contact closure inputs), an internal supply is provided which provides an open circuit
wetting voltage of at least 9V. The input is ON if the contact resistance is < 100 , OFF if it is > 10k.
Contact bounce suppression.
T2550 HANDBOOK

Logic Contact
Input Input
DI8 DI8
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
1C2 3C4 5C6 7C8 1C2 3C4 5C6 7C8
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1 1C2 2 1 1C2 2
+ - - +
3 3C4 4 3 3C4 4
+ - - +
5 5C6 6 5 5C6 6
+ - - +
7 7C8 8 7 7C8 8
+ - - +
Logic Inputs Contact Inputs

REDUNDANT INPUT WIRING
T2550 HANDBOOK
D8.3 DIGITAL INPUTS

1 DI1
2 DI2
1C2
3 DI3
I/O Bus
and IOC
4 DI4
3C4
5 DI5
6 DI6
5C6
7 DI7
8 DI8
7C8
T2550 HANDBOOK

The equivalent circuits below show the input into the Eight Channel Digital Input Module for purposes of determining
1, 3, 5
or 7 5K
+
5V
- 1C2, 3C4, 5C6
or 7C8
-
5V
+ 2, 4, 6
or 8 5K
Internal View
Figure DI8-3 Logic Input Equivalent Circuit
2, 4, 6
or 8 3K6
1, 3, 5
or 7 3K6
+
5V
1C2, 3C4, 5C6 -

or 7C8
Internal View
Figure DI8-4 Contact Closure Input Equivalent Circuit
T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by nine LED indicators as follows:
Note
1. * - IOC firmware prior to software issue 2.10 will not recognise an AI3 module.
2. When the module is reset all LEDs are lit for 1sec for test purposes.
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Unrecognised Module Type*
Wrong Module Type
1 1
2 2
3 3
5 5

DI8
Figure DI8-5 Eight Channel Digital Input Module Status Indication
T2550 HANDBOOK
D8.5 SPECIFICATIONS
D8.5.1 DI8 Module

Channel Types: On/Off, Pulse, Debounce.
Input Types: Logic (24Vdc), Contact (switch resistance).
Input Logic 0 (Off): <5Vdc

Input Logic 1 (On): >10.8Vdc
Input Operating Range: -5Vdc to +30Vdc
Input Current: 2mA (approx) at 10.5Vdc; 10mA max @ 30Vdc.
Contact Input Specification
Contact Input 0 (Off): >28K

Contact Input 1 (On): <100
Contact current: 2mA nominal at 100, 10mA max short-circuit.
Module power consumption: 1W max

Detectable Pulse Width: 20ms min
Debounce Time: 20ms to 2.55s
Isolation channel - channel: Ch1 connected to Ch2 Functional (basic insulation)
Ch3 connected to Ch4 separates these pairs, 50V max
Ch5 connected to Ch6
Ch7 connected to Ch8
T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D9 DO4 - FOUR CHANNEL DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE
D9.1 DESCRIPTION
The Four Channel Digital Output Module provides four logic outputs, which are typically used for control, alarms or
events. There are two variants:
A logic output with 10mA capability, typically used for driving thyristor units or single phase Solid State Relays
(SSRs).
A 24V output with 100mA capability, typically used for driving solenoids, relays, lamp drives, small motors, fans
or some three phase SSRs.
The module requires an external power supply of between 18 and 30 volts which may be linked to any number of logic
output modules. The current rating of this power supply depends upon the number and type of modules in use and the
currents drawn from each digital output.
A suitable power supply is the type 2500P, described in 2500P Module.
Typical parameters which can be configured include:
On/Off or Time Proportioning output mode
High and low output limit.
T2550 HANDBOOK
DO4
1 2 3 4
C C C C
V+ V+ C C
V+ V+ C C
To Additional
*Voltage Modules
Supply
Note. * - This supply is an
external power supply to
power plant devices.
Logic Outputs
C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4
1 2 3 4
Figure DO4-1 Four Channel Digital Output Module Terminal Connections

T2550 HANDBOOK
D9.3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

V+
IL 1
IL 2
I/O Bus
and IOC
IL 3
IL 4
Note. IL indicates the current-limit mechanism.
Figure DO4-2 Isolation Diagram
T2550 HANDBOOK

The equivalent circuits below show the output drive from the Four Channel Digital Output Module for purposes of
determining the load conditions.
375mA V+
1, 2, 3
or 4
Customer
Load
Front Panel
C
Indicator
C
Internal View
Figure DO4-3 Logic Output Equivalent Circuit
1A
V+
1, 2, 3
or 4
Customer
Load
Front Panel
Indicator C
C
Internal View
Figure DO4-4 Voltage (24V) Switch Output Equivalent Circuit
T2550 HANDBOOK

Notes.
1. The digital outputs are physically measured at the output terminals. The channel LED, therefore,
represents the state at the terminal and not necessarily the drive from the module.
2. The operating LED is turned on for 1sec when the module is reset for test purposes.
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
1 1
3 3
1 Yellow Digital Output Ch1 ON Digital Output Ch1 OFF 4 4
2 Yellow Digital Output Ch2 ON Digital Output Ch2 OFF

DO4
Figure DO4-5 Four Channel Digital Output Module Status Indication
T2550 HANDBOOK
D9.5 SPECIFICATIONS
D9.5.1 DO4 Module

Channel Types: On/Off, TPO, Valve Raise/Lower.
Note. The 24V version is also capable of delivering 100mA with each channel. Thermal protection provides
safe operation even with difficult loads.
External Power Channel Specification
Channel Supply (Vcs): 18Vdc to 30Vdc, 24V nom.

Logic 1 Voltage Output: Vcs - 3V min. (5mA load).
Logic 1 Output (IL): 8mA, current limited to <16mA nom.
Off State Leakage: <0.1mA
24V Channel Specification

Channel Supply (Vcs): 12Vdc to 30Vdc
Logic 1 Voltage Output: Vcs - 3V min. (not in power limiting).
Logic 1 Current Output: 100mA max current limit (not in power limiting).
Channel Power Limiting: Output device temperature limiting capable of:
>60mA into 100, at Vcs = 24.0V (power limiting test)
>20mA driving short-circuit load, 12V < Vcs < 30V

T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D10 DO8 - EIGHT CHANNEL DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE
D10.1 DESCRIPTION
The Eight Channel Digital Output Module provides eight high-current logic drive outputs, which are typically used
for control and alarm applications.
A 24V output can switch up to 1A. A 4A self-resetting fuse is fitted in each module to protect this external supply.
Typically used to drive small motors, solenoids, lamps, and SSRs.
The channels are isolated as a block from the system, see Equivalent Circuits section. If this isolation barrier is to be
maintained then an appropriate isolated supply must be used.
An external supply is required (for load power).
A power supply from the 2500P range is appropriate for 24V applications, described in 2500P module.
On/Off or Time Proportioning output mode

T2550 HANDBOOK
Caution
When fitting a DO8 module to a currently powered system, outputs may turn on momentarily (typically less than
100ms) . Critical installations should disconnect V+ before the module is installed.
DO8
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
V+ V+ C C
V+ V+ C C
+ To Additional
*Voltage Modules
Supply
- Note. * - This supply is an
Logic Outputs external power supply to
power plant devices.
C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4
1 2 3 4
C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8
5 6 7 8
Figure DO8-1 Eight Channel Digital Output Module Terminal Connections


T2550 HANDBOOK
D10.3 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

V+
IL 1
IL 2
IL 3
I/O Bus
and IOC
IL 4
IL 7
IL 8
IL 7
IL 8
Note. IL indicates the current-limit mechanism.
Figure DO8-2 Isolation Diagram

T2550 HANDBOOK

The equivalent circuits below show the output drive from the Eight Channel Digital Output Module for purposes of
determining the load conditions.
Self-Resetting
V+ 4A Fuse V+
To other
channels
1, 2, 3, 4, External PSU
5, 6, 7 or 8 (Isolate as
required)
Customer
20 K Load
C
To other C
channels
C
Internal View External View
Figure DO8-3 Voltage (24V) Switch Output Equivalent Circuit

T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by nine LED indicators as follows:
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power
Unrecognised Module Type
Wrong Module Type

1 1

3 3
4 4
5 Yelow Digital Output Ch5 ON Digital Output Ch5 OFF
DO8
Figure DO8-4 Eight Channel Digital Output Module Status Indication

T2550 HANDBOOK
D10.5 SPECIFICATIONS
D10.5.1 DO8 Module

Channel Types: On/Off, TPO, VP.
External Power Supply Specification
Channel Supply (Vcs): 13.0Vdc to 28.8Vdc

Supply Protection: Internally limited to 4A, with over-temperature trip.
Fault Trip Time, 4ms max.
Fault Recovery, automatically reconnectswithin 150ms after fault is removed.
Note. The fitted PSU must be rated to support the maximum load. The internal 4A limit is to protect large system supplies
in case of a fault. The PSU MUST be isolated to maintain channel isolation.
24V Channel Specification

Logic 1 Voltage Output Drop: <3.0V full load, < 2.0V no load.
Logic 1 Current Output: 1.0A max current limit.
Logic 0 Voltage Output: <0.1V max.
Note. This shows the ratings for one channel only. The total current over all 8 channels must NOT exceed 4A.


T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D11 RLY4 - RELAY MODULE
D11.1 DESCRIPTION
The Relay Module provides four relay outputs, one relay with changeover contacts, and three with normally open
contacts.
On/Off mode, Time Proportioning mode, Valve Position mode (raise/lower)
Minimum pulse time for time proportioning outputs
D11.1.1 Snubber Circuits

Each relay is fitted with a snubber (22nF + 100) wired across the contacts. The snubbers are used to prolong
contact life and to suppress interference particularly when switching inductive loads such as mechanical contactors and
solenoid valves.
Snubbers pass a small current typically 1.0mA at 110V 60Hz and 1.7mA at 240V 50Hz, which may be sufficient to
hold in high impedance loads as, for example, found in some relay coils.
Should it be necessary to remove any of the snubbers, refer to D11.6 Relay Module Snubber Circuits Removal.
WARNING
When a relay contact is used in an alarm circuit, ensure that the current passing through the snubber when the relay
contact is open does not hold in low power electrical loads and thereby interfere with the fail-safe operation of the
alarm circuit.

T2550 HANDBOOK

Note. The fuses supplied for the Relay modules are 3.15A (T type), 20mm to EN60127.
Address label
Manufacturing
RLY4 information
Rating information
Space to record which

snubbers have been
removed
B1 B2 B3 B4
A1 A2 A3 A4
Note. Label fitted to the side of the Relay module with
C4
space to record which snubbers have been removed.
A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 B4 A4 C4
Note. Relays shown above in power off state.
Figure RLY4-1 Relay Module Terminal Connections


T2550 HANDBOOK
D11.3 RELAY OUTPUTS
A1
B1 Ch1
A2
B2 Ch2
I/O Bus
and IOC
B3
A3 Ch3
B4
A4 Ch4
C4
Figure RLY4-2a Isolation Diagram - Fused Option
A1
B1 Ch1
A2
B2 Ch2
I/O Bus
and IOC
B3
A3 Ch3
B4
A4 Ch4
C4
Figure RLY4-2b Isolation Diagram - Unfused Option

T2550 HANDBOOK

Note. When the module is reset all LEDs are lit for 1sec for test purposes.
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
1 1
3 3
4 4
1 Yellow Relay Output 1 ON* Relay Output 1 OFF
4 Yellow Relay Output 4 ON! Relay Output 4 OFF
Notes.
1. * - Contacts closed, ! - Changeover contacts.
2. ON - Relay energised, OFF - Relay De-engergised.
RLY4
Figure RLY4-3 Relay Module Status Indication

T2550 HANDBOOK
D11.5.1 RLY4 Module

Channel Types: On/Off, TPO, Valve Raise/Lower.
Channel: 3 N/O (normally open contacts), 1 C/O (changeover contact).
Note. wetting power: lower voltages or currents may be switched at reduced contact life.
Voltage Rating: <264V rms sine wave, <200Vdc

ac Current: 2A at 0 to 264Vac, resistive load
ac Derating: Reduce max current rating 10% for load factor of 0.5
dc Current: 2A at <50Vdc
dc Derating: Max current reduces to 0.5A at 200Vdc
Wetting Voltage: 12V min
Wetting Current: 100mA min
Snubber: 100W + 22nF (see note) across all N/O contacts.
Module power Consumption: 1.5W max

Output Channels 1 to 3 (N/O): Max switched voltage, 264 Vac rms, 120 Vdc, resistive
Min switched voltage, 12 Vdc resistive
Output Channel 4 (Changeover): Max switched voltage, 264 Vac rms, 120 Vdc, resistive
Min switched voltage, 12 Vdc
Output Channels 1 to 3 (N/O): Max switched current, 2A ac rms resistive
Min switched current, 100 mA ac rms or dc resistive
Output Channel 4 (Changeover): Max switched current, 2A ac rms
Min switched current, 100 mA ac rms or dc
Note. The Snubber circuit may be removed by cutting the resistors off the board.


T2550 HANDBOOK
D11.6 RELAY MODULE SNUBBER CIRCUITS REMOVAL

Each Relay is fitted with a snubber (22nF + 100) wired across the contacts. The snubbers are used to prolong
contact life and to suppress interference particularly when switching inductive loads such as mechanical contactors and
solenoid valves.
Snubbers pass a small current typically 1.0mA at 110V 60Hz and 1.7mA at 240V 50Hz, which may be sufficient to
hold in high impedance loads as, for example, found in some relay coils.
If this is found to be the case, the snubber can be removed by cutting all or any one of the snubber resistors from the
printed circuit board.
D11.6.1 Instructions
1. Remove the rear cover from the module:
i. Open the module retaining lever.

ii. Gently ease the rear cover out of the module by inserting
a small screwdriver in the slots at the top and bottom
of the cover.
iii. Gently ease the rear cover over the module retaining
catch. It may be necessary to use the screwdriver in
positions - to gently lever the cover over the catch.
2. Remove the printed circuit board from module case as follows:
i. Invert the module and support it securely on a bench or

table top.
ii. Squeeze the sides of the module so that the edge of the
module bows outwards.
iii. Very carefully insert a screwdriver into the slot in the
edge of the module.
Caution
Take care that the screwdriver does not slip which may cause
injury.
iv. Gently ease the PCB out of module case.
3. Remove the snubber resistors:

SN1

100
22n Relay 1 i. Using a suitable pair of wire cutters, snip out and remove
SN2 the 100 resistor to remove the required snubber circuit.

100 22n Relay 2
To SN3 ii. Record the removal of the snubber resistor on the side of
connector block
100 22n
Relay 3
the module in the place provided. This will provide easy
Relay 4 22n

100
100
identification of which snubbers have been removed in
SN4 the event that the module needs to be replaced.

T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D12 FI2 - TWO CHANNEL FREQUENCY INPUT MODULE
D12.1 DESCRIPTION
This module is used for data gathering and signal conditioning from a range of plant sensors. It has internal supplies
that provide loop or wetting current or can be used to power sensors.
These include:
Magnetic
Voltage
Current
Contact
It consists of two isolated input channels.
Input type: Magnetic, Voltage, Current, Contact
Supply output voltage
Logic threshold, Voltage or Current
Contact Debounce

T2550 HANDBOOK

Each Channel operates indepently, therefore the Link configuration for each Channel must be set accordingly.
Caution
Do not install more than 8 FI2 modules in a single Base Unit if the channel output load at 24V is more than 5mA per
channel. If more loads are required than this restriction permits, an external power supply must be used.
Magnetic Sensor Inputs Voltage Source Inputs Current Source Inputs
FI2 A FI2 A FI2 A
B B B
C C C
2 2 2
6 4 6 4 6 4
1 1 1
3 1 3 1 3 1
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 1+ 1- 2+ 2- 1+ 1- 2+ 2-
V1 C1 V2 C2 V1 C1 V2 C2 V1 C1 V2 C2
See Note 1 See Note 2 See Note 3, & 4

1+ 1- 2+ 2- 1+ C1 2+ C2 V1 1+ V2 2+
V V V V mA mA
Notes.
1 Links must be set to Voltage (position C), and corresponding FI_UIO block InType field must be set to
Magnetic. The Threshold is internally configured.
2 Links must be set to Voltage (position C), and corresponding FI_UIO block InType field set to V. If
using the output supply to power the sensor, set the output supply voltage as required, 8V, 12V, or 24V.
3 Links must be set to Current (position B) to select the internal current burden resistor, and the
corresponding FI_UIO block InType field set to mA. When the internal burden resistor is selected the
transducer must not exceed 12V. The output supply must be set to the requirements of the transducer,
8V, or 12V.
4 The Terminal Unit includes an internal 1K burden resistor. If using an external current burden
resistor, connect between 1+ and C1 (channel 1) and 2+ and C2 (channel 2). Links must be set to
Voltage (position C), and the InType field in the FI_UIO block set to Volts (V). The Threshold must be
set to the midpoint between the peak to peak voltage across the burden. The output supply must be set
to the requirements of the transducer, 8V, 12V, or 24V.
Figure FI2-1a Two Channel Frequency Input Terminal Connections

T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.2 Terminal Connections (Cont.)
Contact Inputs Contact Inputs

(PNP) or Volt-Free (NPN) or Volt-Free
FI2 A FI2 A
B B
C C
2 2
6 4 6 4
1 1
3 1 3 1
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 1+ 1- 2+ 2-
V1 C1 V2 C2 V1 C1 V2 C2
See Note 1, & 2 See Note 1, & 3

V1 1+ V2 2+ 1+ C1 2+ C2
Notes.
1 Links must be set to Contact (position A), and corresponding FI_UIO block InType field set to V. For
minimal temperature rise, an output supply of 8V is recommended.
2 Threshold must be set to 75% of the output supply Volts, i.e. 6V, 9V, 18V.
3 Threshold must be set to 25% of the output supply Volts, i.e. 2V, 3V, 6V.
Figure FI2-1b Two Channel Frequency Input Terminal Connections


T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.3 APPLICATION DETAILS

To prevent inappropriate noise and achieve the recommended EMC installation requirements all signal and channel
power supply connections MUST use a screened cable. It is recommended that the screen is braided and connected to
the Base Unit, but NOT connected to the Earth at the sensor, as this will create a ground loop.
Note It is recommended that sensor cabling does not exceed 30m, as high energy surges applied to the
module terminals, as defined in IEC61000-4-5, can be detected by the input circuit.
Measurement errors caused by noise interference and channel cross talk can be reduced by setting the Threshold
values greater than 1V or 1mA assuming this is compatible with the signal being measured.
When configuring the strategy, specific issues for each application must be addressed accordingly. However, all
configurations can apply a Debounce value of 0ms (if not required), 5ms, 10ms, 20ms, or 50ms, with the algorithm
ensuring that pulse edges closer than the set time, are excluded.
Caution
An OverRange warning is not displayed for signals approaching the maximum frequency allowed by the Debounce
algorithm. Control loops based on a frequency PV are NOT recommended when Debounce is applied without
provision for protecting against the consequences of the frequency passing this upper limit.
When the Links are set in the Voltage (position C) or Current (position B) position, to acheive good pulse detection,
and help prevent inappropriate detection of noise spikes and best repeatability, the Threshold must be set, as close as
possible to the midpoint between the peak to peak values of the Input. It may be necessary to disable the Sensor Break
and Sensor Short Circuit detection via the Options.SBreak and Options.SCct fields in the associated FI_UIO block
to prevent inappropriate alarms. The Sensor Break alarm is set if the Input value falls below 0.05V or 0.05mA. The
Sensor Short circuit alarms is set if the Input value rises above 91% of the output supply Volts (Volts or milli-amps).
A NAMUR Input on a module configured in the Current (position B), must be set to 8V output supply, and the
threshold must be set to 1.65mA. Sensor Break and Sensor Short circuit detection can be enabled, if required.
14
12
10
(Min to Peak)
Input Signal
Magnitude
8
6
4
2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Threshold Setting
Note To allow for Hysteresis and Threshold accuracy with temperatures and between modules that have
been swapped, the input signal MUST have sufficient amplitude. Use this graph as a guide to the size
of signal for a given Threshold setting.
When the Links are set in the Contact Inputs (position A) position, the 5k biasing resistors are connected that provides
a wetting current. If more wetting current is required, additional resistors can be fitted to the Terminal Unit, or an
external biasing supply can be connected, and the threshold configured for either accordingly. Sensor Break and
Sensor Short circuit detection must be disabled via the Options.SBreak and Options.SCct fields in the associated
FI_UIO block.

T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.4 FREQUENCY INPUTS

V1
1+
Channel 1 1-
C1
I/O Bus
and IOC
V2
Channel 2 2+
2-
C2
Figure FI2-2 Isolation Diagram

The equivalent circuits below show details of frequency inputs.
1+ or
2+
Sensor
1- or
2-
Internal View
Figure FI2-3a Magnetic Input

T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.4 FREQUENCY INPUT EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS (Cont.)
V1 or V2
V
1+ or 2+
Voltage
Source
Threshold
C1 or C2
Internal View
Figure FI2-4b Voltage Input
V1 or V2
Current
Source V
1+ or 2+
1K
Threshold
C1 or C2
Internal View
Figure FI2-5 Current Input
V1 or V2
5K
V
1+ or 2+
5K
Threshold
C1 or C2
Internal View
Figure FI2-6 Contact Inputs (PNP) or Volt-Free
V1 or V2
5K
V
1+ or 2+
5K
Threshold
C1 or C2
Internal View
Figure FI2-7 Contact Inputs (NPN) or Volt-Free

T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by the LED indicators as follows:
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
X X
1 Yellow See Note below 2 2
X Red Ch1 Fault, e.g. Normal Operation or
X
Hardware fault (Status.HwFlt) Frequency under range X
Invalid software configuration (Status.BadSetup)
Invalid hardware configuration (Status.BadHwSet)
2 Yellow See Note below
X Red Ch2 Fault, e.g. Normal Operation or
Hardware fault (Status.HwFlt) Frequency under range
Invalid software configuration (Status.BadSetup)
Invalid hardware configuration (Status.BadHwSet) FI2
Flashing Fast Flashing

X Red Ch1 Sensor break or Short circuit Frequency over range
X Red Ch1 Sensor break or Short circuit Frequency over range
Flashing Updating value (0.5 secs) Not updating value (0.5 secs) N/A
Fast Flashing 0.1 secs 0.1 secs 0.2 secs
Note. LED 1 and LED 2 show Channel 1 and Channel 2 activity respectively.
Figure FI2-8 Two Channel Frequency Input Status Indication

T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.6 FAULT DETECTION

Detected faults can be defined as Field, Setup, or Hardware faults, but any reaction will depend on the Input
configuration of the associated FI_UIO block. These faults are indicated via the LEDs on the Module, and the Status
and Alarms bits of the corresponding FI_UIO block.
D12.6.1 Fault Diagnostics

To locate the cause of a fault, inspect the Status and Alarms bits of the associated FI_UIO block. These bits indicate
the source of the fault, i.e. Hardware (Status.HwFlt), or invalid configuration (Status.BadSetup).
Block Field Description/To Resolve
Status.Missing The associated MOD_UIO block has not been found, caused by an incorrectly configured Strategy, i.e. the
MOD_UIO block does not exist in the Strategy.
This will set the Alarms.ModBlock field TRUE.
To resolve, ensure the Strategy contains the required MOD_UIO block.
Status.BadType The Channel configured in the block, does not correspond to the module.
To resolve, ensure the block and the module correspond.
Status.Ranging The Input value is not measurable by the hardware, but a fault is not detected, i.e. the Input is currently
being ranged or configured.
Status.BadSetup An invalid setup is detected, caused by an incorrect LR_in or HR_in field configuration.
This will set the Alarms.OutRange field TRUE.
To resolve, ensure LR_in or HR_in fields correspond to the range used by the installed hardware.
Status.HwFlt A fault in the output supply is detected, generally caused by output supply overload.
This will set the Alarms.Hardware field TRUE.
Status.NotAuto The module is not operating in Automatic mode.
This will set the Alarms.NotAuto field TRUE.
Status.OvrRng The Input value is greater than the measurement circuit range is detected, generally caused by an input
value greater than 40KHz, but less than 80KHz.
Status.UnderRng The Input value is less than the measurement circuit range is detected, generally caused by an input value
less than 10Hz, for a Magnetic Sensor configuration, and less than 0.01Hz for the Voltage, Current, or
Contact configuration.
Status.OpenCct An Open circuit fault in the Logic Sensor is detected.
This will set the Alarms.CctFault field TRUE.
For details, see Terminal Connections.
Status.ShortCct An Short circuit fault in the Logic Sensor is detected.
This will set the Alarms.CctFault field TRUE.
For details, see Terminal Connections.
Status.BadHwSet The hardware configuration does not correspond to the Input Type configured in the FI_UIO block.
To resolve, ensure the Link configuration, see Terminal Connections, on the Terminal Unit corresponds to the
InType field of the FI_UIO block.
Status.CutOff A measured frequency value below the low threshold value (CutOff) is detected.
This will set the Alarms.CutOff field TRUE, with the measured frequency value adopting the value defined in
the Default field.
Status.BadTask Task Rate configured in the block does not correspond to the Task Rate of the module.
This also asserts the Alarms.Hardware field TRUE.
To resolve, the Task rate of the module and the Task rate in the block MUST be configured to the slow task
(Task 3 - 110ms).
Table D12.1 Fault Indication

T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.7.1 FI2 Module

Input Types: Magnetic Sensor, Voltage, Current, and Contact.
Channel Specifications
Frequency measurment:
Range: Logic, 0.01Hz - 40kHz, debounce off

Magnetic, 10Hz - 40 kHz
Resolution: <60 ppm of reading for square wave input
Accuracy: 100 ppm, reference. 160 ppm, overall. 0.05% over 5 years, drift
Pulse counting:
Range: Logic, Vdc - 40kHz, debounce off

Magnetic, 10Hz - 40 kHz
Debounce applied (Voltage, Current, Contact):
Setting: Maximum Frequency
5ms 100Hz
10ms 50Hz
20ms 25Hz
50ms 10Hz
Resolution: <600 ppm of reading for square wave input
Magnetic Sensor Input Specification

Input Range: 10mV to 80V p-p
Absolute Maximum Input: 100V
Input Impedance: >30K

T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.7.2 FI2 DC Module (Cont.)
Minimum Pulse Width: 1.2S, debounce off (0ms).

Voltage:
Input Range: 0 - 20V
Absolute Maximum Input: 50V
Input Impedance: >30K
Threshold: 0 - 20V, 0.2V hysteresis,
0.4V or 7% , whichever is the greater
Sensor Break Level: 50mV - 310mV ( 10%), Active for Threshold settings between 200mV and 7.4V
Sensor Short Circuit: N/A
Current:
Input Range: 0 - 20mA
Absolute Maximum Input: 30mA
Input Impedance: 1K
Threshold: 0 - 20mA, 0.2mA hysteresis,
0.4mA or 7% , whichever is the greater
Sensor Break Level: 0.05mA - 0.31mA ( 10%) Active for Threshold settings between
Sensor Short Circuit: 100R - 350R 0.2mA and 7.4mA
Contact:
Input Range: N/A
Absolute Maximum Input: N/A
Input Impedance: 5K
Threshold: 0 - 20V, 0.2V hysteresis,
0.4V or 7% , whichever is the greater
Output Specifications
Voltage: Selectable, 8, 12 or 24 Vdc - 10mA
Maximum current: 25mA
Accuracy: 20%
Voltage drop: 1V @ 25mA
Note The module has current limit protection. Short circuit of the output will cause temporary failure of pulse input
circuit only.


T2550 HANDBOOK
D12.8 CONFIGURE CHANNEL VOLTAGE SETTING

The Terminal Unit is fitted with a break-out box containing dis-connects for isolating the power supply outputs and
input signals. It is also fitted with burden, and pull up resistors for the channel inputs and are configured using the
links, see Instructions section.
Note The links are only accessible when the module is removed.
D12.8.1 Instructions
1. Remove the module from the Terminal Unit.
Base Unit
i Modules are locked into position using the Retaining

lever on the face of the module.
ii The module must be fitted and removed with the
Retaining lever in the open ( ) position, as shown in
this side view.
iii Once fitted the lever must be closed ( ) to securely
lock the module in place.
Plant and Process

Connections
2. Set the 6-gang Link for each channel, as required, see Terminal Connections.
3. Replace the module, see above.

T2550 HANDBOOK

T2550 HANDBOOK
APPENDIX D13 ZI - ZIRCONIA INPUT MODULE
D13.1 DESCRIPTION
The Zirconia input module is used to measure analogue signals from a range of plant sensors.
These include:
Thermocouples
High Impedance (Zirconia)
The Zirconia analogue input module consists of two input channels, isolated from each other and isolated from the
system electronics. It is primarily used to measure High Impedance analogue signals from a Zirconia probe plant
sensor on Channel 2, although thermocouple inputs can still be measured on Channel 1. The thermocouple inputs
Cold Junction Temperature is measured by a RTD sensor fitted to the Terminal Unit.
Input Type
Range
Sensor Break Action

T2550 HANDBOOK

Each Channel operates indepently.
High impedence input

(Zirconia probe)
ZI
1+ 1- 2+ 2-
1+ 1- 2+ 2-
Zr
Figure ZI-1 Two Channel Zirconia Input Terminal Connections

T2550 HANDBOOK
D13.3 APPLICATION DETAILS

This module is used to control temperature of the process on one channel (loop) and carbon potential on the other. The
module, in conjunction with the strategy, generates temperature and carbon potential profiles synchronised to a
common timebase.
Channel 1 is dedicated for use with a thermocouple input, and supports Cold Junction Compensation and
linearisations, and output (PV) temperature. The Thermocouple input, Channel 1, automatically scans for the mV
input and the Cold Junction Compensation sensor, and can be set for fixed gain. The counts are internally calculated
and calibration-compensated to a mV (milli-volt) value. The Pt100 linearisation is then applied to get the Cold
Junction Temperature.
However, the primary use of this module is for the Zirconia probe, connected via Channel 2 only. This offers the
high-impedance low leakage 2V range used for source-impedance measurement (probe health monitor) on the Zirconia
probe channel. Channel 2 outputs a voltage measurement allowing a simple offset and scaling; both supporting PV
filter options.
Note To ensure good practice and comply with EMC regulations, it is adivsed that the Zirconia Probe is
connected to Channel 2 of the module using a maximum length of 30m screened cable.
D13.3.1 Temperature Control

The sensor input of the temperature channel (loop) may come from the Zirconia Probe but it is common for a separate
thermocouple to be used. The correct configuration of the strategy can control a heating output that can be connected
to gas burners or thyristors to control electrical heating elements. In some applications a cooling output may also be
connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper.
D13.3.2 Carbon Potential Control

The Zirconia probe generates a milli-volt (mV) signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations on the reference
side of the Probe (outside the furnace) to the amount of oxygen in the furnace. The temperature and carbon potential
milli-volt values (signals) read into the related block are used to calculate the actual percentage of carbon in the
furnace.
D13.3.3 Soot Alarm

In addition to other alarms which may be detected, an alarm can be raised when the atmospheric conditions are such
that carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace.
D13.3.4 Probe Cleaning

A Probe clean and recovery strategy can be configured to occur between batches or manually requested. A short blast
of compressed air is used to remove any soot and other particles that may have accumulated on the probe. Once the
cleaning has been completed, the time taken for the probe to recover is measured. If the recovery time is too long this
indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due. During the cleaning and recovery cycle, the
%C reading is frozen thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation.
D13.3.5 Endothermic Gas Correction

A gas analyser may be used to determine the CO or H2 concentration of the endothermic gas. If a 4-20mA output is
available from the analyser, it can be connected to the module and used to display the calculated % carbon reading.
Alternatively, this value can be entered manually via the GasRef.CO_Local and GasRef.H2_Local fields.

T2550 HANDBOOK

Transducers can be directly wired into any appropriate channel at the terminals, but this flexability introduces safety
implications, particularly risk of shock hazard. Electrical isolation minimizes such risks even when equipment goes
faulty, and particularly when some transducers have to be run live.
1+
Channel 1 ADC1
CJC
1-
I/O Bus
and IOC
2+
Channel 2 ADC2
2-
Figure ZI-2 Isolation Diagram

The equivalent circuits below show details of analogue inputs.
VRef
20M
Volt Source
2+
1+
10K
CJC High impedance Sensor 0 to 2Vdc
Thermocouple Health High impedance
input amplifier
Check input amplifier
1-
2-
Internal View
Figure ZI-3 Voltage Input

T2550 HANDBOOK

The status of the module is shown by the LED indicators as follows:
LED Colour ON OFF

No Power or
No Comms or
Wrong Module Type
LED Colour ON OFF

1 1
1 Red Ch1 sensor break or initialising Normal Operation
2
2 Red Ch2 sensor break or initialising Normal Operation 2

2 Red Calibrating
ZI

Figure ZI-4 Two Channel Zirconia Input Status Indication

T2550 HANDBOOK
D13.6 FAULT DETECTION

Detected faults can be defined as Field, Setup, or Hardware faults, but any reaction will depend on the Input
configuration of the associated Zirconia block. These faults are indicated via the LEDs on the Module, and the Status
and Alarms bits of the corresponding Zirconia block.
D13.6.1 Fault Diagnostics

To locate the cause of a fault, inspect the Fields and related Alarms bits of the associated block. These bits indicate
the source of the fault, i.e. Hardware (ProbeSt), or invalid configuration (Alarms.PrbImpHi).
ProbeSt The Probe Input value is not measurable by the hardware, possibly caused by a Probe failure.
This will set the Alarms.ProbeSt field TRUE.
TempSt The Probe Temperature Input value has failed, possibly caused by a Probe failure.
This will set the Alarms.TempSt field TRUE.
CarbPotSt The Carbon Potential value is not measurable by the hardware, possibly caused if the furnace temperature
is below the configured minimum calculation temperature value.
To resolve, wait until the furnace to acheive the configured minimum calculation temperature value,
MinCalcT.
DewPntSt The Dewpoint value is not measurable by the hardware, possibly caused if the furnace temperature is
below the configured minimum calculation temperature value.
MinCalcT.
OxygenSt The Oxygen value is not measurable by the hardware, possibly caused if the furnace temperature is below
the configured minimum calculation temperature value.
MinCalcT.
SootWrn The Probe has detected atmospheric conditions that will cause the deposit of soot on all surfaces inside
the furnace.
This will set the Alarms.SootWrn field TRUE.
To resolve, launch the probe clean sequence and ensure the Probe clean sequence completes
successfully.
ClnRcvWn The performance of the probe is degrading, by failing to obtain 95% of the original value in the permitted
time, possibly caused by the natural usage.
This will set the Alarms.ClnRcvWn field TRUE.
To resolve, launch the probe clean sequence and ensure it completes successfully. If alarms continues,
replace the probe.
LastClnmV The probe clean sequence failed, possibly caused by a fault in the probe.
CO_RemSt The Remote CO Gas value is not measurable by the hardware, possibly caused by a Probe failure.
This will set the Alarms.CO_Remte field TRUE.
H2_RemSt The Remote H2 Gas value is not measurable by the hardware, possibly caused by a Probe failure.
This will set the Alarms.H2_Remte field TRUE.
MxCnRcvT The Probe cleaning sequence is not permitted, possibly caused by a failure to achieve 95% of the Input
value before the defined maximum recovery time after cleaning has expired.
To resolve, launch the cleaning process and ensure the Probe clean sequence completes successfully. If
alarms continues, replace the probe.
MxImRcvT The Probe impedance measurement recovery time has been exceeded, possibly caused by a Probe
failure.
This will set the Alarms.ImpRcWrn field TRUE.
To resolve, launch the probe clean sequence and ensure it completes successfully. If alarms continues,
replace the probe.

T2550 HANDBOOK
D13.6.1 Fault Diagnostics (Cont.)
PrbImpHi The maximum probe impedance threshold value has been exceeded, possibly caused by a Probe failure.
This will set the Alarms.PrbImpHi field TRUE.
To resolve, ensure the Probe impedance measurement sequence completes successfully or reset the
impedance measurement message field (ImpMsgRt TRUE).
ImpRcvWn The Probe impedance measuring sequence could not be performed.
This will set the Alarms.ImpRcvWn field TRUE.
To resolve, launch the impedance measuring process and ensure the Probe impedance measuring
completes successfully.
Table D13.1 Fault Indication

T2550 HANDBOOK
D13.7.1 ZI Module
Input Types: Analogue voltage, Channel 1 - mV (TC), and Channel 2 - 2V (Zirconia probe)
Thermocouple Input Specification (Ch1 ONLY)

Calibration Accuracy: 0.1% of AI parameter reading, 10V.
Sensor Break Detect: 250nA break high.
Input Impedance: 10M
Cold Junction Sensor Specification (Ch1 ONLY)
Temperature Range: -10C to +70 C

CJ Rejection: < 30:1
CJ Accuracy: 1.3C, 0.5C typ. (Automatic cold junction compensation).
Zirconia Input Specification (Ch2 ONLY)

Calibration Accuracy: 0.2% of AI parameter reading.
Noise: <1.5mV p-p with 1.6s Filter, better with longer time constants.
Sensor Impedance Measurement: 0 to 100 k, 2%.
Input Impedance: >500 M
Input Leakage Current: -4.0 to +4.0nA, 1nA typ.


T2550 HANDBOOK
INDEX
Index T2550 Handbook

Symbols Changeover ....................................................... 1-3, 3-5, 4-7
.cpf file ............................................................................. 4-2 Automatic ..................................................................... 1-3
.dbf file .................................................... 1-5, 2-20, 5-4, 5-8 contacts .................................................................... D11-1
.gsd file .......................................................................... 5-12 Changeover and Communications LEDs, & Switches ............. 3-5
.gwf file ..................................................................... 5-4, 5-8 Desync switch ............................................................... 3-6
.ofl file ............................................................................. 5-4 Ethernet (Activity) LED .................................................... 3-6
.sdb file ............................................................................ 5-4 Ethernet (Speed) LED ...................................................... 3-6
.sfc file ............................................................................. 1-5 Ethernet Communications Port ......................................... 3-6
.sto file ............................................................................. 5-4 Primary LED .................................................................. 3-5
.stx file ............................................................................. 5-4 Standby LED ................................................................. 3-5
.udz file .......................................................................... 8 - 1 Sync switch ............................................................ 3-5, 3-6
.ujg file ............................................................................ 5-4 Coherent Data ............................................... 7-4, 7-7, C - 10
.unh file ........................................................................ C - 15 Cold Start ....................................................................... 2-12
.uxp file ............................................................................ 5-4 Parameter file ................................................................ 4-2
.uys file ............................................................................ 5-4 primary ...................................................................... 2-12
_auto.dbf file .................................................................... 1-4 secondary ................................................................... 2-13
_auto.run file .............................................................. 1-4, 5-2 Communications .............................................................. 2-17
3-Term Control ........................................................... 6-3, 6-4 Cabling ...................................................................... 2-18
3_Term block .................................................................... 6-1 ELIN ........................................................................... 2-17
ELIN Connectors .......................................................... 2-17
A Ethernet ...................................................................... 2-17
Ethernet HUBS/Switch ................................................. 2-18
ACTION block ........................................................... 1-5, 7-6
Modbus-TCP ............................................................... 2-17
Address
Profibus ...................................................................... 2-19
Internet Protocol, IP ...................................................... 2-10
Profibus Connectors ..................................................... 2-19
LIN Node Number .................................... 2-11, 2-12, 2-13
Serial ................................................................ 2-17, 2-19
Alarms page ................................................................... C - 8
Serial Connectors ........................................................ 2-19
All Subnet Enable .......................................................... C - 15
Compact Flash Card replacement ................................... 12 - 2
AN_CONN block ............................................................. 7-8
Configuration ............................................................. 1-1, 5-1
Application POST ............................................................ 11-9
Automatic ...................................................... 1-4, 1-5, 1-6
Automatic Configuration .................................................... 1-4
Ladder Diagrams .................................................... 1-5, 1-6
Automatic I/O Build ................................................... 5-2, 5-7
LINtools ........................................................................ 1-4
_auto.run ...................................................................... 5-2
Configuration Tools ........................................ 2-20, 5-1, C - 1
Preparing .............................................................. 5-2, 5-3
Automatic I/O Build ................................ 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-7
Automatic Tuning ............................................. 1-1, 6-13, 7-6
LINtools ...................................... 2-20, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, C - 1
Autosynchronisation ........................................................... 4-7
Terminal Configurator ....................... 2-20, 5-7, C - 1, C - 2
B Connections and Wiring .... 2-16, D2-2, D3-2, D4-2, D5-1, D6-
2, D7-2, D8-2, D9-2, D10-2, D11-2, D12-2, D13-2
Base Unit .......................................................................... 2-7
DC supply wiring ......................................................... 2-21
Layout .......................................................................... 2-4
Duplex connection ....................................................... 2-16
Mounting ...................................................................... 2-7
Safety earth ................................................................ 2-21
Basic I/O System (BIOS) .................................................. 11-1
Simplex connection ...................................................... 2-16
Battery ............................................... 2-6, 2-21, 11-2, 12 - 1
Watchdog relay .......................................................... 2-22
Replacement ............................................................. 12 - 3
Contact bounce suppression .......................... D6-1, D7-1, D8-1
Block
Control ............................................................................. 6-3
See also Function Block 3-Term ................................................................... 6-3, 6-4
Boot ROM POST ............................................................. 11-9
Motorised Valve ..................................................... 6-3, 6-4
On/Off ........................................................................ 6-3
C PID ........................................................................ 6-3, 6-4
Cables ........................................................................... 2-18 Valve Position ............................................................... 6-3
Category 5 ................................................................. 2-16 Control Strategy
Cross-over .................................................................. 2-17 See also Strategy
Straight-through ........................................................... 2-17 COSHH ........................................................................... 1-1
Cached block .................................................... 7-2, 7-4, 7-7 Battery ......................................................................... A-9
Central Processing Unit, CPU ...................... 3-4, 7-2, 7-6, B - 5 Battery Specification ...................................................... A-9
loading ........................................................................ 7-6 Simplex T2550S module ................................................ A-9
Time ............................................................................. 7-2 Current ............................................ D2-1, D4-1, D5-1, D12-1
HA028898 Index
Issue 10 Mar 09 Page Index - 1
T2550 HANDBOOK
D Fault ................................................................ D12-8, D13-6

Data ................................................................................ 7-7 Detection ...................................................... D12-8, D13-6
Coherent .......................................................... 7-7, C - 10 Diagnostics ................................................... D12-8, D13-6
Non-coherent ................................................................ 7-8 Features ........................................................................... 1-3
Data Archiving .................................................................. 9-2 Field writes ....................................................................... 7-8
Data Management ............................................................. 1-4 FILE .............................................................................. C - 14
Database ............................. 5-1, 5-4, 5-6, 11-1, 11-6, 11-10 Firmware upgrade ......................................................... 12 - 2
Configuration .............................................................. C - 4 Full Description page ....................................................... C - 6
Stop ........................................................................... 11-6 Function Block ........................................ 1-1, 2-20, 5-8, C - 1
Decoupled Instruments ..................................................... 11-6 Categories .................................................................. C - 4
DeleteReq ..................................................................... C - 11 Configuration .............................................................. C - 4
Desync switch ................................................................... 3-6 Diagnostic .................................................................... 1-5
Diagnostic ...................................................................... 11-1 Header ....................................................................... C - 4
Diagnostic blocks ......................................... 1-5, 11-1, 11-10 Structure ....................................................................... 1-5
Diagnostic Tests ...................................................... 11-1, B - 1 Support ................................................................. 1-5, 1-6
POSTs ........................................................................ 11-9 Tactician header block ........................................ 2-23, 8 - 2
DIN Rail ........................................................................... 2-7 Task Updates ................................................................ 7-8
Mounting ...................................................................... 2-7
Direct Panel ...................................................................... 2-7 G
Mounting ...................................................................... 2-7 Gain Scheduling .................................................... 6-10, 6-24
Duplex ...................................................................... 1-2, 2-4 GWProfS_CON block ..................................................... 5-10
Control System ............................................................ 2-16
LED .............................................................................. 4-7 H
LIN Terminal Unit .................................................... 1-3, 2-5 Handling precautions ......................................................... 2-3
Profibus Terminal Unit ............................................. 1-3, 2-5 HART Compatibility ......................................................... D3-4
Start-up sequence ................................................. 4-6, 11-9 Health Monitoring ............................................................. 1-4
Start-up sequence decisions ............................................ 4-7 High and low output limit ................................................. D9-1
Starting a duplex system ................................................. 4-6 High Impedance (Zirconia) ................................... D2-1, D13-1
Dynamic Tuning ................................................................ 7-6 Hot/Cold Start Switch ...................................................... 2-14
Hysteresis ....................................................................... 6-25
E
Electrical isolation ... D2-4, D3-3, D4-3, D5-2, D6-3, D7-4, D8- I
3, D9-3, D10-3, D12-5, D13-4 I/O Module .................................................................... D - 1
ELIN Compatibility .............................................................. D - 1
See also Ethernet Isolator Links & Fuses ................................................... D - 1
ELIN Setup page ........................................................... C - 15 Installation ......................................................... 1-1, 2-1, 2-4
Error .............................................................................. B - 1 Category II ................................................................... A-1
Event log .................................................................... 8 - 2 Safety requirements ....................................................... 2-1
Message .................................................................... B - 4 Instrument ................................................................ 1-2, 11-4
Number ................................................... 11-1, 11-9, B - 1 Failure modes ............................................................. 11-4
Number Structure ........................................................ B - 4 System Software ........................................................ 12 - 1
Error Conditions ............................................. 1-1, 11-1, 11-7 Instrument Properties dialog ............................................ C - 15
Diagnostic blocks ........................................................ 11-1 Inter-processor Communications Mechanism, ICM ................. 1-3
LEDs ........................................................................... 11-1 Communications ................................................... 1-3, 11-9
POSTs ........................................................................ 11-1 Inter-server connections ...................................................... 7-7
Ethernet ............................................................................ 1-3 IP (Intellectual Property) Protection ................................ 1-4, 5-6
Communications ........................................... 1-3, 2-17, 3-6 IP Address .......................................................... 2-10, C - 15
Hub/Switch ................................................................ 2-16 BootP ......................................................................... 2-10
LIN network .................................................................. 1-1 DHCP .................................................................. 2-10, 4-7
Event Log ......................................................... 1-1, 1-4, 8 - 1 Editing the network.unh file ......................................... 2-11
Execution times ................................................................. 7-3 Instrument Properties dialog ........................................ C - 15
Link-Local .................................................................... 2-10
F Manual ...................................................................... 2-10
Failure modes ................................................................. 11-4 network.unh .............................................................. C - 15
Instrument ................................................................... 11-4 Recovery from Unknown Configuration .......................... 2-11
Inter-processor Communications Mechanism ................... 11-5 Setting ........................................................................ 2-10
Local Instrument Network .............................................. 11-5 Isolator links and Fuses ....................................................... 2-8
Power ........................................................................ 11-4
Watchdog .................................................................. 11-4
Index HA028898
Page Index - 2 Issue 10 Mar 09
T2550 HANDBOOK
L Module ..................................................................... 1-2, 2-3

Label symbols ....................................................... 2-3, D11-2 Fitting ........................................................................... 2-9
Layout .............................................................................. 2-4 I/O1-2, 2-3, D2-1, D3-1, D4-1, D5-1, D6-1, D7-1, D8-1, D9-
LED ......................................................................... 3-1, 11-2 1, D10-1, D11-1, D12-1, D13-1
Battery ......................................................................... 4-5 Removing ..................................................................... 2-9
Changeover .................................................................. 3-5 T2550R ................................................................. 1-2, 2-4
Communications ..................................................... 3-5, 4-5 T2550S ................................................................. 1-2, 2-4
Duplex ......................................................................... 4-7 Motorised Valve Control .................................................... 6-3
Error Conditions .......................................................... 11-1 Mounting Base Unit ........................................................... 2-7
Error Displays ............................................................. 11-2 DIN Rail ....................................................................... 2-7
Front Panel ................................................................... 1-4 Direct Panel .................................................................. 2-7
Indication at start up (BIOS) ............................................ 4-5 Mounting Power Supply Module ..................................... D1 - 4
IP Resolution ................................................................. 4-7 DIN Rail ................................................................... D1 - 4
Primary ........................................................................ 4-5
Standby ........................................................................ 4-7 N
Status ........................................................................... 4-5 Network Ports ................................................................... 3-1
LIN .................................................................................. 1-3 Network setup page ...................................................... C - 12
Communications ............................................................ 1-3 Network.unh file .............................................................. 2-10
Instrument ..................................................................... 1-3 Non-coherent data transmission .......................................... 7-8
Local Instrument Network ................................................ 1-3
Node Number ............................................................ 2-10 O
Systems ...................................................................... B - 4 On-line Reconfiguration ....................................... 1-1, 5-4, 5-7
LIN Blocks DeleteReq ................................................................. C - 11
See also Function Block Tentative ................................................................... C - 10
LIN Database On-Time ........................................................ 6-3, 6-12, 6-23
See also Database On/Off control ........................................................... 6-1, 6-3
Links ..................................................... 2-15, D12-2, D12-11 Channel 2 Deadband, OP.CH2DeadB .......................... 6-26
LINtools .................................................... 1-1, 5-4, 6-1, C - 1 On/Off mode ............................................................... D11-1
Action .......................................................................... 5-4 Options Switch ................................................................ 11-9
Action, .sto file .............................................................. 5-4 Options.AllSubnt ........................................................... C - 15
Action, .stx file .............................................................. 5-4 Other Information Sources .................................................. 1-1
Configuration ................................................................ 1-4 Overview page ............................................................... C - 8
Database, .dbf file .......................................... 1-5, 5-4, 5-8
Ladder configuration ............................................... 1-5, 1-6 P
Modbus Gateway, .gwf file ........................... 5-4, 5-8, 5-10 Peer-to-Peer ....................................................................... 1-3
Modbus Gateway Configuration ..................................... 5-4 Communications ............................................................ 1-3
Modbus Gateway File ........................................... 5-8, 5-10 PID control ....................................................... 6-1, 6-3, 6-26
Object Properties pane ................................................ C - 5 Channel 2 Deadband, OP.CH2DeadB .......................... 6-26
On-line Reconfiguration .................................................. 5-4 Derivative Time, Td ............................................... 6-7, 6-11
Sequence ..................................................................... 1-5 Gain Scheduling ......................................................... 6-10
Sequential Function Chart, .sdb file .................. 1-1, 1-5, 5-4 High and Low Cutback, CBHand CBL ........... 6-8, 6-11, 6-18
Structured Text (ST) ................................................. 1-5, 4-2 Integral Time, Ti ................................................... 6-6, 6-11
Loop block ................................................... 6-11, 6-20, 6-24 Loop Break Time, LBT ............................................ 6-9, 6-24
Loop Break ....................................................................... 6-9 Manual Reset, MR ......................................................... 6-8
PID block ...................................................................... 6-1
M Proportional Band, PB ........................................... 6-5, 6-11
Maintenance schedule ................................................... 12 - 1 Relative Cool Gain, R2G .................... 6-7, 6-11, 6-17, 6-23
Manual Tuning ................................................................ 6-17 Plant sensors .................................. D2-1, D4-1, D12-1, D13-1
Manual tuning ................................................................... 7-6 Platinum Resistance Thermometers ..................................... D2-1
Mechanical Layout & Installation ......................................... 2-4 Pollution ........................................................................... 2-2
Minimum pulse time ....................................................... D11-1 Conductive Pollution ...................................................... 2-2
Modbus ........................................................... 1-1, 2-23, 5-8 Pollution degree 2 ......................................................... A-1
Communications .......................................................... 2-23 Port Number ................................................................... 2-10
Master ........................................................ 2-23, 5-8, 5-9 POSTs .............................................................................. 1-1
Slave .......................................................... 2-23, 5-8, 5-9 Power Consumption ......................................................... D - 1
Modbus Configuration Editor, Mdbtools ............................... 5-8 Power cycle .................................................................. C - 15
Modbus Configuration File, .ujg file ........................ 5-4, 5-10 Power On Self Tests (POSTs) .................................... 11-9, B - 1
Modbus Gateway File, .gwf file ............................. 5-8, 5-10 Application ................................................................. 11-9
Modbus-TCP ................................................................... 2-17 Boot ROM .................................................................. 11-9
Connector Pinout ......................................................... 2-17 Diagnostic tests ........................................................... 11-9
HA028898 Index
T2550 HANDBOOK
Power Supply ................................................... 1-3, 2-4, 2-21 Sequential Function Chart ............................. 1-1, 1-5, 3-6, 7-6
DC Wiring .................................................................. 2-21 Serial Communications .................................................... 2-17
Fuses .......................................................................... 2-21 Connector Pinout ......................................................... 2-19
Redundant Connection ................................................... 1-3 Serial line set-up ................................................................ 5-8
Safety earth connection ................................................ 2-21 Server .............................................................................. 7-3
Power Supply Module .................................................... D1 - 1 User task ...................................................................... 7-4
DIN Rail Mounting ..................................................... D1 - 4 Service .......................................................... 1-1, 3-1, 12 - 1
Input Specification ..................................................... D1 - 3 Setopint Program ............................................................... 1-4
Output Specification .................................................. D1 - 3 Setpoint Program ............................................................... 5-4
Product code ............................................................. D1 - 1 Setpoint Configuration, .uys file ...................................... 5-4
Serial number ........................................................... D1 - 1 Setpoint Tracking ............................................................. 6-20
Status Indication ........................................................ D1 - 3 Manual ...................................................................... 6-20
Wiring and Connections ............................................ D1 - 2 Simplex ..................................................................... 1-3, 2-4
Power-up Failure ............................................................. 11-7 Battery ..................................................................... 12 - 1
Power-up routine ......................................................... 11-7 Control System ............................................................ 2-16
Preventive Maintenance Schedule ................................... 12 - 1 Start-up Sequence .......................................................... 4-5
Primary/Secondary ........................................................... 4-1 Starting a Simplex system ............................................... 4-5
Criteria ........................................................................ 4-6 T2550S module ........................................................ 12 - 1
Product safety ................................................................... 2-2 Two Processor Non-redundant ........................................ 4-8
Profibus ........................................ 1-1, 1-3, 2-17, 2-23, 5-10 Snubber Circuits ............................................................ D11-1
Demand Data .................................................... 5-10, 5-15 Removal ................................................................... D11-6
Input data .......................................................... 5-10, 5-15 Software Function Blocks .................................................. C - 1
Master .............................................................. 5-10, 5-12 Specification ............................................................. 1-1, A-1
Output data ....................................................... 5-10, 5-15 2500P ..................................................................... D1 - 3
Slave ........................................................ 1-3, 5-10, 5-12 AI2 DC Module ........................................................... D2-8
AI2 mA Module ........................................................ D2-10
R AI2 TC Module ............................................... D2-7, D13-8
Real-Time Clock ................................................ 1-3, 2-4, 2-21 AI3 Module ................................................................ D3-6
RED_CTRL block ....................................................... 4-8, 11-6 AI4 mV Module ........................................................... D4-7
PrHWstat.ICM_Ok ....................................................... 11-5 AI4 TC Module ........................................................... D4-6
PrSWstat.Decoupld ...................................................... 11-6 AO2 Module .............................................................. D5-4
SeHWstat.ICM_Ok ...................................................... 11-5 DI4 Module ...................................................... D6-6, D8-6
SeSWstat.Decoupld ..................................................... 11-6 DI6 Module ................................................................ D7-6
Redundancy ...................................................................... 1-2 DO4 Module .................................................. D9-6, D10-6
Automatic Changeover .................................................. 1-3 FI2 Module ................................................... D12-9, D13-8
Decisions ...................................................................... 4-7 RLY4 Module ............................................................ D11-5
Power Supply ................................................................ 1-3 T2550R ........................................................................ A-2
T2550R modules ............................................ 1-4, 1-5, 1-6 SRAM ....................................................................... 1-3, 2-4
Redundancy Modes ........................................................... 4-1 Standby LED ..................................................................... 4-7
Duplex mode ................................................................ 4-1 Start-up ............................................................. 1-1, 4-1, 4-3
Simplex mode ............................................................... 4-1 Cold start ..................................................................... 4-2
Relay Output Duplex mode ................................................................ 4-6
Fused ....................................................................... D11-3 Hot start ....................................................................... 4-1
Unfused .................................................................... D11-3 Mode .................................................................... 4-1, 4-5
Repeat Rate ...................................................................... 7-3 Simplex mode ............................................................... 4-5
Repeat times ..................................................................... 7-3 Status
Replacement ..................................................................... 1-3 Indication D2-6, D3-5, D4-5, D5-3, D7-6, D8-5, D9-5, D10-
Battery ..................................................................... 12 - 3 5, D11-4, D12-7, D13-5
Compact Flash Card .................................................. 12 - 2 LEDs ............................................................................. 3-3
Live .............................................................................. 1-3 Strategy ........................... 2-20, 4-1, 5-4, 5-6, 5-7, 6-1, 11-1
Procedures ..................................................... 12 - 1, 12 - 2 Structured Text .................................................................. 1-5
User Algorithm .............................................................. 1-5
S Switch(s) ................................................... 2-12, 3-1, 3-3, 3-5
Safety & EMC Information .................................................. 2-1 Desync ......................................................................... 3-6
Safety Earth Connection ................................................... 2-21 Hot/Cold Start ............................................................ 2-14
Save Sync ............................................................................ 3-5
Database ...................................................................... 5-2 Watchdog Retry ................................................... 1-4, 2-14
Sensor Break Action ............................................ D2-1, D13-1 Symbols used in labelling ................................................... 2-3
Sequences ......................................................... 1-4, 1-5, 3-6 Sync switch ....................................................................... 3-5
Loading ................................................................. 1-5, 3-6 Synchronisation ................................................................. 4-7
Unloading ............................................................. 1-5, 3-6 Time to achieve ............................................................. 4-8
Index HA028898
T2550 HANDBOOK
T U
T2550 ............................................................................. 1-1 Unpacking ........................................................................ 2-3
Base Unit (T2550B) ....................................................... 1-2 User Calibration ............................... D2-1, D3-1, D4-1, D13-1
Duplex Module (T2550R) ........................................ 1-2, 2-4 User Interface
Duplex Module Layout ................................................... 2-6 (Battery) LED ................................................................. 3-3
I/O Modules (2500M) ................................................... 1-2 (Communications) LED .................................................... 3-3
Live Module Replacement ............................................... 1-3 (Status) LED ................................................................... 3-3
Simplex Module (T2550S) ....................................... 1-2, 2-4 Duplex LED ................................................................... 3-4
System Software ........................................................ 12 - 1 IP (IP Resolution) LED ...................................................... 3-4
Terminal Units (2500T) ................................................... 1-2 Status LEDs & Switches ................................................... 3-3
Tactician blocks ............................................................... 2-23 Watchdog Switch .......................................................... 3-4
TACTTUNE block ............................................................... 7-6 X (Fault) LED .................................................................. 3-3
Task ................................................................................. 7-1 User Screen PageSet ................................................... 5-4, 5-6
Functions ...................................................................... 7-1 Operator InterFace Language, .ofl file ............................. 5-4
Organisation & Tuning ................................................... 7-1 User Screen Configuration, .uxp file ................................ 5-4
Priorities ....................................................................... 7-1 User Task ......................................................................... 7-3
Scheduling .................................................................... 7-1 Execution Times ............................................................. 7-3
Task Organisation and Tuning ............................................ 1-1 Server Operation ................................................... 7-4, 7-5
TCP .................................................................................. 5-8 Terminology .................................................................. 7-3
Telnet ............................................................................. C - 2 Tuning ................................................................... 7-1, 7-6
Terminal Configurator ............................ C - 2, C - 4, C - 16 USERTASK block ............................................................... 7-6
Tentative ....................................................................... C - 10 UTILITIES OPTIONS menu ............................................... C - 13
Terminal Configurator ....................................... 1-1, 5-7, C - 1 APPLY/UNDO command ........................................... C - 14
Configurable items ...................................................... C - 1 FILE command ........................................................... C - 14
Initial menu ................................................................. C - 3 LOAD command ........................................................ C - 14
Initial Menu Access ...................................................... C - 2 SAVE command ........................................................ C - 13
LIN Database configuration .......................................... C - 4 START command ....................................................... C - 13
Modbus Configuration ............................................... C - 16 STOP command ........................................................ C - 13
Quitting ...................................................................... C - 3 TRY/UNTRY Changes command ................................. C - 14
Running ...................................................................... C - 2
Telnet ............................................................. C - 4, C - 16 V
Terminal Unit .................................................................... 1-2 Valve Position ....................................................... 6-3, D11-1
2500T ......................................................................... 1-2 Bounded VP (VPB) control ........................................ 6-1, 6-4
Duplex ................................................................ 2-6, 11-2 Boundless VP (VPU) control ...................................... 6-1, 6-4
Fitting ........................................................................... 2-8 Voltage ........................................... D2-1, D4-1, D5-1, D12-1
Layout .......................................................................... 2-5 Input curves ................................................................ D7-3
LIN ..................................................................... 2-6, 11-2
Links ........................................................................... 2-12 W
Profibus ............................................................... 2-6, 11-2 Watchdog Relay ................................................ 1-4, 4-5, A-4
Removing ..................................................................... 2-8 Alarm state ................................................................... 4-5
Simplex ............................................................... 2-6, 11-2 Watchdog Retry Switch .................................................... 2-14
Switches .............................................................. 2-12, 4-1 Wiring ........................................................................... 2-16
Thermocouples ............................... D2-1, D4-1, D12-1, D13-1
Time Localisation ............................................................... 1-4
Time Proportioning mode ............................................... D11-1
Time Proportioning output mode ............................ D9-1, D10-1
Tracking ................................................................ 6-19, 6-20
Manual ...................................................................... 6-20
Setpoint ...................................................................... 6-20
Total Output ................................................................ 6-22
Tune_Set block ......................................................... 6-2, 6-21
Gain Scheduling ......................................................... 6-10
Tuning ..................................................................... 6-11, 7-6
Automatic ................................................................... 6-13
Control Loop ............................................................... 6-11
Loop .......................................................................... 6-11
Manual ...................................................................... 6-17
Typical applications ........................................................... 1-2
HA028898 Index
T2550 HANDBOOK
Index HA028898
AUSTRALIA Sydney FINLAND Abo NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd. Eurotherm Finland Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099 Telephone (+358) 2250 6030 Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288 Fax (+358) 2250 3201 Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail info.fi@eurotherm.com E-mail info.nl@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.au@eurotherm.com
NORWAY Oslo
AUSTRIA Vienna FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm A/S
Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone (+47 67) 592170
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+33 478) 664500 Fax (+47 67) 118301
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
Fax (+33 478) 352490 E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
E-mail info.fr@eurotherm.com
POLAND Katowice
GERMANY Limburg Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone (+48 32) 218 5100
Eurotherm S.A/N.V. Telephone (+49 6431) 2980 Fax (+48 32) 217 7171
Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Fax (+49 6431) 298119 E-mail info.pl@eurotherm.com
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 E-mail info.de@eurotherm.com
E-mail info.be@eurotherm.com
SPAIN Madrid
Eurotherm Espaa SA
HONG KONG Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001
BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm Hongkong Fax (+34 91) 661 9093
Eurotherm Ltda. Telephone (+85 2) 2873 3826 E-mail info.es@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Fax (+85 2) 2870 0148
E-mail info.hk@eurotherm.com
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345
SWEDEN Malm
E-mail info.br@eurotherm.com
Eurotherm AB
INDIA Chennai Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Eurotherm India Limited Fax (+46 40) 384545
CHINA Telephone (+91 44) 2496 1129 E-mail info.se@eurotherm.com
Eurotherm China Fax (+91 44) 2496 1831
Shanghai Office E-mail info.in@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188 SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Fax (+86 21) 6145 262
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com IRELAND Dublin Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
Eurotherm Ireland Limited E-mail info.ch@eurotherm.com
Beijing Office Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800
Telephone (+86 10) 6310 8914 Fax (+353 1) 469 1300
Fax (+86 10) 6310 7291 E-mail info.ie@eurotherm.com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Guangzhou Office ITALY Como Fax (+44 1903) 265982
Eurotherm S.r.l E-mail info.uk@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+86 20) 3810 6506 Web www.eurotherm.co.uk
Telephone (+39 031) 975111
Fax (+86 20) 3810 6511
Fax (+39 031) 977512
E-mail info.it@eurotherm.com
U.S.A Leesburg VA
Eurotherm Inc.
DENMARK Copenhagen Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000
KOREA Seoul Fax (+1 703) 669 1300
Eurotherm Danmark AS Eurotherm Korea Limited E-mail info.us@eurotherm.com
Telephone (+45 70) 234670 Telephone (+82 31) 2738507 Web www.eurotherm.com
Fax (+45 70) 234660 Fax (+82 31) 2738508
E-mail info.dk@eurotherm.com E-mail info.kr@eurotherm.com ED56
E U ROT H E R M
EUROTHERM LIMITED
Specification subject to change without notice. Eurotherm Limited. HA028898/10 (CN25234)

Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, EPower, Eycon, Eyris and Wonderware
are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respec-
tive owners.
EPower
Advanced Power Controller

Specification Sheet
EPower is the Eurotherm series of advanced power control units.
Combining the advantages of the latest technologies and innovations
MODEL to produce a truly impressive performance for your process.
Ratings
The EPower current ratings cover the range from 50 Amps up to 630
Amps (nominal 16 Amps to 630 Amps). Ratings are designed at 40C,
but operation can be defined up to 50C with associated deratings.
Fully software The voltage rating can go up to a maximum of 690 volts.
configurable
Predictive Load Management (Patented)
Predictive Load You can reduce your energy costs across your plant by utilising the
Management Predictive Load Management functionality within EPower. This
innovative feature provides a better distribution of energy across
Current rating different loads in your installation by managing the priority and if
50A to 500A (630A) necessary, load shedding.
(nominal load 16A to 630A)
Multi Channel Unit
Voltage up to 690V ac EPower includes seven different power configurations within one unit,
All types of firing modes depending on the number of power modules fitted. From single phase
configuration to two times two phase control, the unit is perfectly
Better than 1% modular and configurable to your process requirements. Multiple
measurement accuracy zones can be controlled with one unit.
Large integral four row Many more features are available (Log file management, advanced
display alarm strategy, optional I/O) to provide you with the best of the
Remote display option technology for your process.
Multi-channel unit Display and Remote Display

EPower is fitted with a 4 line x 10 character display with indication of the
Event Log process values, and diagnostic information, along with an alarm and event
Optional I/O message centre. Optionally, the EPower has a 32h8e remote display to
allow for the process values and alarm information to be presented front
Modbus RTU of panel in a clear and unambiguous way. Secure access to the local
Profibus DP setpoint is also provided to allow for local control when needed. The
remote display, as an indicator, can also provide over temperature
DeviceNet policeman functionality removing the need for additional panel
communication instrumentation.
Ethernet (Modbus TCP) Communication

EtherNet/IP Eurotherm has an approach to open communications, offering
standard fieldbus networks such as Profibus DP, DeviceNet
CC-Link EtherNet/IP and CC-Link communications. The use of Fieldbus makes
integration into PLCs and other supervisory systems easy to
Voltage, current and accomplish. It allows an easier integration into PLCs and other
power control supervisory systems by using the main protocols of the market.
Complete diagnostics
Configuration
Energy counter Quick Start HMI menus provide an easy and friendly way to quickly
configure the unit. With the more complex configurations using the
Single phase Load Tap iTools software package.
Changer
EUROTHERM FLEXIBLE SOLUTIONS

General specification Environment
Temperature limits Operating: 0C to 50C (derate above 40C as per
General Standards
accompanying curves)
The product is designed and produced to comply with BS EN60947-4-3 (Low
Storage: -25C to 70C
voltage switch gear and control gear). Other applicable standards are cited
where appropriate. 630 Amp unit
600
500 Amp unit
Installation Categories 500
General installation category details for the driver and power units are 400 Amp unit
Maximum current (A)

400
summarised in the table below. 300

250 Amp unit
Installation Rated impulse Rated
200
160 Amp unit
Category withstand insulation
100 Amp unit
100
voltage (Uimp) voltage 50 Amp unit
Communications II 0.5kV 50V 0

0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature C
Standard/Optional I/O II 0.5kV 50V
Driver module power II 2.5kV 230V
Atmosphere: Non-explosive, non-corrosive and
Relays III 4kV 230V
non-conductive
Power Modules (up to 600V) III 6kV 600V
Humidity limits: 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Power Modules (690V) II 6kV 690V
Altitude (maximum): 1000 metres
Auxiliary (fan) supply II 2.5kV 230V
Protection: IP10 (EN60529)
External wiring: Must comply with IEC 364
Power (at 40C)
Shock (EN60068-2-29): 10g Pk; 6mS duration; 10 bumps
Caution Vibration (EN60068-2-6): 67-150Hz at 1g
Although the driver module supply voltage range is 85 to 265V ac, the
fans (if any) fitted to the power (thyristor) modules are specified for use EMC
at one of 115V ac or 230V ac as specified at time of order. Before Standard: EN60947-4-3 Emissions class A
plugging the fan harness into the driver module, ensure that the utility This product has been designed for
supply voltage is suitable for the fan(s). Otherwise, fan life may be
environment A (Industrial). Use of this
shortened or the cooling effect may not be sufficient, either case
product in environment B (domestic,
presenting a possible hazard to the equipment or to the operator.
commercial and light industrial) may cause
Driver module unwanted electromagnetic disturbances in
Voltage range: 100 to 240V ac (+10% - 15%) which cases the user may be required to take
Frequency range: 47 to 63Hz adequate mitigation measures.
Power requirement: 60W + Power Module fans Immunity criteria: Immunity criterion 1 (criterion 3 for voltage
(15W each for 400A/500A/630A power dips and short-time interruptions)
modules;
10W each for 160A/250A modules) Operator Interface
Power module Display: 4 lines of up to 10 characters each. Display
Number of modules: Up to four identical units per driver unit pages can be used to view process variable
Voltage range: 100 to 600V ac (+10% - 15%) or values and to view and edit the
100 to 690V ac (+10% - 15%) configuration of the unit. (Editing of the
as specified at time of order configuration is better carried out using
Frequency range: 47 to 63Hz configuration software (iTools). In addition
Nominal current: 16 to 630A depending on power module to the standard displays, up to four custom
Power dissipation: 1.3W per Amp per phase pages can be defined which allow bargraph
Cooling displays, text entry etc.
Up to and including 100A: Natural convection Character format: 7 high x 5 wide yellow-green LCD dot matrix
Above 100A: Fan cooling. Fans are connected in parallel array
to driver module connector Push buttons: 4 push buttons provide page and item entry
Fan supply voltage: 115 or 230V ac, as specified at time of order and scroll facilities
(see Caution above) LED indicators (beacons): 3 indicators (PWR LOC and ALM) are
Protection Thyristor drive: RC circuits and high-speed fuses (Type 1) supplied to indicate that power is applied,
Pollution degree: Pollution degree 2 (EN60947-1) that Local Control is selected and that
Rated short circuit there is one or more active alarm
conditional current: 92kA respectively
Utilisation categories AC51: non inductive or slightly inductive loads,
resistance furnaces Standard Inputs/Outputs (SK1)
AC56a: switching of transformers
Duty cycle: Uninterrupted duty/continuous operation All figures are with respect to driver module 0V, unless otherwise stated.
Form designation: Form 4 Number of inputs/outputs
Short circuit protection No of analogue inputs: 2
co-ordination type: Type1 No of analogue outputs: 1
Load types: Single or multiphase control of resistive No of digital inputs/outputs: 2 (each configurable as an input or an
loads (low/high temperature coefficient and output)
non-aging/aging types) and transformer 10V (Potentiometer) supply: 1
primaries. Load voltage/current feedback Update rate: Twice the mains frequency applied to power
either internal (standard) or external module 1. Defaults to 83.2Hz (12mS) if no
(option for use with transformer power applied to power module1 or if the
secondaries for example) frequency lies outside the range 47 to 63Hz)
Termination: Removable 10-way connector. (5.08 mm.
Physical pitch)
Dimensions and fixing centres See Fixing Details
Weight kg (lbs): Analogue Inputs
Performance: See Tables 1 and 2
(including 2kg for driver module)
Input types: Each input is configurable as one of: 0 to
Current 1 phase 2 phases 3 phases 4 phases 10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 20mA,
50A 6.5 (14.3) 11.0 (24.3) 15.5 (34.2) 20.0 (44.1) 4 to 20 mA
100A 6.5 (14.3) 11.0 (24.3) 15.5 (34.2) 20.0 (44.1) Absolute maxima + terminal: 16V or 40mA
160A 6.9 (15.2) 11.8 (26.0) 16.7 (36.8) 21.6 (47.6) - terminal: 1.5V or 300mA
250A 7.8 (17.2) 13.6 (30.0) 19.4 (42.8) 25.2 (55.6)
400A 11.8 (26.0) 21.6 (47.6) 31.4 (69.2) 41.2 (90.8)
500A 14.0 (30.9) 26.0 (57.3) 38.0 (83.8) 50.0 (110.2)
630A 14.5 (32.0) 27.0 (59.5) 39.5 (87.1) 52.0 (114.6)
Analogue input: Voltage input performance 10V supply (Potentiometer supply)
Parameter Typical Max/Min Output voltage: 10.0V 0.3V @ 5.5mA
Total voltage working input span (Note 1) -0.25V to +12.5V Short circuit o/p current: 15mA max.
Resolution (noise free) (Note 2) 13 bits Ambient temperature drift: 0.012%/C (typ); 0.04%/C (max.)
Calibration error (Notes 3 and 4) <0.25% <0.5% Absolute maxima Pin 1: (-0.7V or -300mA) or (+16V or +40mA)
Linearity error (Note 3) 0.1%
Ambient temperature error (Note 3) <0.01%/C Digital I/O
Input resistance (+ve terminal to 0V) >140k Hardware response time: 100s
Input resistance (-ve terminal to 0V) 150 Voltage inputs
Allowable voltage (-ve terminal to 0V) 1V Active level (high): 4.4V<Vin<30V
Series mode rejection of mains interference 46dB >30dB Non-active level (low): -30V<Vin<+2.3V
Common mode dc rejection 46dB >40dB Input impedance: 10k
Hardware response time 5ms Contact closure input
Note 1: w.r.t. to the relevant -ve input Source current: 10mA min; 15mA max
Note 2: w.r.t. total working span Open contact
Note 3: % of effective range (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) (non active) resistance: >500
Note 4: After warm up. Ambient = 25C Closed contact
Table 1 Analogue input specification table (voltage inputs) (active) resistance: <150
Current source output
Analogue input: Current input performance Source current: 9mA<Isource<14mA @ 14V
Parameter Typical Max/Min 10mA<Isource<15mA @ 0V
Total current working input span -1mA to +25mA 9mA<Isource<14mA @ -15V
Resolution (noise free) (Note 1) 12 bits Open circuit voltage: <14V
Calibration error (Notes 2 and 3) <0.25% <0.5% Internal pull-down resistance: 10k (to 0V)
Linearity error (Note 2) 0.1% Absolute maxima + terminal: 30V or 25mA
Ambient temperature error (Note 2) <0.01%/C - terminal: 2A
Input resistance (+ve to -ve terminal) 235
Input resistance (-ve terminal to 0V) 150 Notes:
Allowable voltage (-ve terminal to 0V) <1V 1. Absolute maximum ratings refer to externally applied signals
Series mode rejection of mains interference 46dB >30dB 2. The 10V potentiometer supply is designed to supply two 5k
Common mode dc rejection 46dB >40dB potentiometers connected in parallel with one another.
Hardware response time 5ms 3. The maximum current for any 0V terminal is 2A.
Note 1: w.r.t. total working span
Note 2: % of effective range (0 to 20mA) Relay Specification
Note 3: After warm up. Ambient =25C The relays associated with this 1.0
0.9
product have gold plated contacts 0.8
Table 2 Analogue input specification table (current inputs) applicable to dry circuit
Reduction factor
0.7
(low current) use. 0.6
Analogue outputs
Performance: See Tables 3 and 4 0.5
Output types: Each output is configurable as one of 0 to 0.4

10V, 1 to 5V, 2 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 0 to 20mA,
4 to 20 mA
0.3
1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2
Absolute maxima + terminal: (-0.7V or -300mA) or (+16V or +40mA)
0V terminal: 2A
Inductive life = resistive life x reduction factor
Analogue output: Voltage output performance Contact life Resistive loads: 100,000 operations (de-rate with inductive
Parameter Typical Max/Min loads as per figure)
Total voltage working span -0.5V to +12.5V High power use Current: <2A (resistive loads)
(within 20mA (typ.) current span) Voltage: <264V RMS
Short circuit current <24mA Low power use Current: >1mA
Resolution (noise free) (Note 1) 12.5 bits Voltage: >1V
Calibration error (Notes 2 and 3) <0.25% <0.5% Contact configuration: Single pole change-over (One set of
Linearity error (Note 2) <0.1% Common, Normally Open and Normally
Ambient temperature error (Note 2) <0.01%C Closed contacts)
Minimum load resistance >800 Termination Relay 1 (standard): 3-way connector on underside of driver
DC output impedance <2 unit
Hardware response time (10% to 90%) 20ms <25ms Watchdog relay (standard): 3-way connector on underside of driver
Note 1: w.r.t. total working span unit
Note 2: % of effective range (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) Relays two to four (option): 12-way option module connector
Note 3: After warm up. Ambient = 25C Absolute max switching capability: <2A at 240V RMS (resistive loads)
Table 3 Analogue output specification table (voltage outputs)
Note: Normally closed and normally open refer to the relay when the coil
is not energised.
Analogue output: Current output performance
Parameter Typical Max/Min Optional Input/Output Modules (SK3, SK4, SK5)
Total current working span -24mA to +24mA
Up to three input/output modules can be fitted, each containing the inputs
(within -0.3V to +12.5V voltage span)
and outputs detailed below. Unless otherwise stated below, the specification
Open circuit voltage <16V
for the optional I/O (including relays) is as given above for the standard I/O.
Resolution (noise free) (Note 1) 12.5 bits
Calibration error (Notes 2 and 3) <0.25% <0.5% Termination: Removable 12-way (5.08mm pitch)
Linearity error (Note 2) <0.1% connector per module
Ambient temperature error (Note 2) <0.01%C Number of modules: Up to 3
Maximum load resistance <550 Number of inputs: 1 analogue input and 2 digital inputs per
DC Output conductance <1A/V module
Hardware response time (10% to 90%) 20ms <25ms Number of outputs: 1 analogue output per module
Note 1: w.r.t. total working span Number of relays: 1 set of common, normally open and
Note 2: % of effective range (0 to 20mA) normally closed contacts per module
Note 3: After warm up. Ambient = 25C 10V potentiometer supply
Table 4 Analogue output specification table (current outputs) output voltage: 10.0V 0.3V at 5.5mA
Mains Network Measurements External Current Transformer
All network measurements are calculated over a full mains cycle, but Ratio: Chosen such that the full scale
internally updated every half-cycle. For this reason, power control, current output from the current transformer
limits and alarms all run at the mains half-cycle rate. The calculations are is 5 Amps
based on network waveform samples, taken at a rate of 20kHz.
Measurements on each network phase are synchronised to its own phase Communications
and if the line voltage cannot be detected, the measurements will stop for
that phase. It should be noted that, depending on the network Modbus TCP (Ethernet) Type: 10baseT (IEEE801)
configuration, the phase voltage referred to is one of: Protocol: Modbus TCP
Connector: RJ45 with indicators
a. the line voltage referenced to neutral in four star, (Green = Tx activity;
b. the line voltage referenced to neutral or another phase for single phase Yellow = Network activity)
networks or Modbus RTU Protocol: Modbus RTU slave
c. the line voltage referenced to the phase applied to the next adjacent Transmission standard: 3-wire EIA485
power module for three phase star or delta networks. Connector: Twin, parallel-wired RJ45, with
indicators (Green = Tx activity;
The parameters below are directly derived from measurements for each Yellow = Rx activity)
phase. Isolation (EN60947-4-3): Installation category II, Pollution
degree 2
Accuracy (20 to 25C) Terminals to ground: 50V RMS or dc to ground (double
Line frequency (F): 0.1Hz isolation)
Line RMS voltage (Vline): 0.5% of Nominal Vline DeviceNet: Protocol: DeviceNet
Load RMS voltage (V): 0.5% of Nominal V for readings Connector: 5-way with indicators
>1% of Nominal V (Network Status and Module Status)
Thyristor RMS current (IRMS): 0.5% of Nominal IRMS for current Profibus: Protocol: Profibus DPV1
readings >3.3% of Nominal IRMS Connector: 9-way D type with indicators
(Operator Mode and Status)
Unspecified for readings <3.3% of
EtherNet/IP: Protocol: EtherNet/IP
Nominal IRMS
Connector: RJ45 with 3 indicators
Note: For external current feedback this
CC-Link: Protocol: CC-Link version 1.1
specification does not include errors
Connector: 5-way with indicators
associated with external current
transformers.
Load RMS voltage squared (Vsq): 1% of (Nominal V)2
Thyristor RMS current squared (Isq): 1% of (Nominal I)2
True load power (P): 1% of (Nominal V) x (Nominal I)
Frequency resolution: 0.01Hz
Measurement resolution: 11 bits of Nominal value (noise
free)
Meas. drift with ambient temp: <0.02% of reading /C
Further parameters (S, PF, Q, Z, Iavg, IsqBurst, IsqMax, Vavg, Vsq Burst,
VsqMax and PBurst) are derived from the above, for each network
(if relevant). See EPower User Guide Section 6.19.1 (Meas submenu) for
further details.
Communications DeviceNet Connector Pinout

Network Status LED Indication
LED state Interpretation
Network Off Off-line or no power
Status Steady green On-line to one or more units
Pin Function
1 Flashing green On-line - no connections
1 V- (negative bus supply voltage) Steady red Critical link failure
2 CAN_L Flashing red 1 or more connections timed out
3 Cable shield
4 CAN_H
5 V+ (positive bus supply voltage) Module Status LED Indication
5
Notes: Off Power
1. See DeviceNet specification for power Module Steady green Operating normally
supply specification. Status Flashing green Missing or incomplete configuration
2. During startup, an LED test is performed, Steady red Unrecoverable fault(s)
satisfying the DeviceNet standard. Flashing red Recoverable fault(s)
Profibus Connector Pinout

Operation Mode LED Indication
Mode LED state Interpretation
Pin Function Pin Function Off Off-line or no power
5 Isolated ground Steady green On-line, data exchange
9 N/C Flashing green On-line, clear
4 RTS
PROFIBUS / DP
8 A (RxD -/TxD -) 5 Red single flash Parametrisation error

3 B (RxD+ / TxD+) 9
7 N/C Red double flash Profibus configuration error
2 N/C
6 +5 V (See Note 1)
1 N/C
6 1
Status LED Indication
Notes:
1. Isolated 5 Volts for termination purposes.
Any current drawn from this terminal Off No power or not initialised
affects the total power consumption. Steady green Initialised
Status Flashing green Diagnostic event present
2. The cable screen should be terminated to
the connector housing. Steady red Exception error
Electrical Installation
Drive Unit Connectors Power Unit Connectors
SK6
Relay 1
(De-energised)
External feedback
14 11 12 connections
(optional)
NO Com NC
Load I1
current I2
04 01 02 SK6
SK7
Watchdog Relay V1
(De-energised) Remote Load
display Voltage Load cable exit
NO = Normally open SK7
NC = Normally closed (isolated V2
Com = Common EIA485)
Neutral/phase
View on underside reference Example view
of Drive unit (either pin) on underside
of Power unit
SK8 SK9 External Feedback Connector Pinout and Polarising Details

Beacons Power Local Alarm Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4
PWR LOC ALM
I2 I1 I1 + I2 None
Current None I1 + I2
Pushbuttons Return Scroll Scroll Enter feedback
connector I1 I2
down up
Configuration
Port (EIA232)
V1 V2 V1 + V2 None
Voltage
SK1 Standard I/O Predictive Load feedback None V1 + V2
1 1 +10 Volts out SK2 Management Option connector V2 V1
2 Analogue i/p 1 + 1 1 Terminator A
3 Analogue i/p 1 - 2 Low
4 Analogue i/p 2 + 3 Shield
POWER
5 Analogue i/p 2 - 4 High Neutral/
PWR LOC ALM
6 Analogue o/p 1 + phase

5 5 Terminator B reference
7 Analogue o/p 1 0V connector
8 Digital i/o 1+
9 Digital i/o 2+ SK8 SK9
Supply output
10 10 Digital i/o 0V Max Load
for power 630A
Line/Load Termination
Supply in 50A 100A 160A 250A 400A 500A
current
module fan(s)
Communications
Terminal
N L N L E M8 M8 M8 M10 M12 2 x M12 2 x M12
Size
= Polarising pin
Min cable
SK2 cross-selection 35 35 70 120 240 2 x 150 2 x 185
mm2
SK3 Optional I/O 1 SK4 Optional I/O 2 SK5 Optional I/O 3 AWG/Kcmil 2 2 00 250 500 2 x 300 2 x 350
SK1
1 1 +10 Volts out 1 1 +10 Volts out 1 1 +10 Volts out Recommended
2 Analogue i/p 3 + 2 Analogue i/p 4 + 2 Analogue i/p 5 + Torque setting 12.5 12.5 12.5 25 28.8 30 30
3 Analogue i/p 3 - 3 Analogue i/p 4 - 3 Analogue i/p 5 - Nm
SK3 SK4 SK5 4 Analogue o/p 2 + 4 Analogue o/p 3 + 4 Analogue o/p 4 + (ft lb) (9.2) (9.2) (9.2) (18.4) (21.2) (22.1) (22.1)
5 Analogue o/p 2 0V 5 Analogue o/p 3 0V 5 Analogue o/p 4 0V
Earth
6 Digital i/p 3 + 6 Digital i/p 5 + 6 Digital i/p 7 + terminal size M6 M6 M6 M8 M10 M12 M12
7 Digital i/p 4 + 7 Digital i/p 6 + 7 Digital i/p 8 +
Safety Earth
8 Digital 0V 8 Digital 0V 8 Digital 0V Min earth cable

cross-selection 25 25 35 70 120 150 185
9 Not used 9 Not used 9 Not used
mm2
10 Relay 2 NO (24) 10 Relay 3 NO (34) 10 Relay 4 NO (44)
AWG/Kcmil 4 4 2 00 250 300 350
11 Relay 2 Com (21) 11 Relay 3 Com (31) 11 Relay 4 Com (41)
12 12 Relay 2 NC (22) 12 12 Relay 3 NC (32) 12 12 Relay 4 NC (42) Recommended
Torque setting 5 5 5 12.5 15 25 25
Polarising pins: Polarising pins: Polarising pins: Nm
Fixed connector: pins 1 and 2; Fixed connector: pins 2 and 3; Fixed connector: pins 1 and 3;
(ft lb) (3.7) (3.7) (3.7) (9.2) (11.1) (18.4) (18.4)
Mating connector: pin 3 Mating connector: pin 1 Mating connector: pin 2
Modbus RTU Pinout EtherNet/IP Connector Pinout

Pin 3-wire Pin Function NS (Network Status) LED Indication
Green
8 Reserved 1 Tx NS LED state Interpretation
7 Reserved 2 Tx- Off No power or no IP address
6 N/C 3 Rx+ Steady green On-line, one or more connections established
8 4 N/C (CIP class 1 or 3)
5 N/C
4 N/C 5 N/C Flashing green On-line, no connections established
MODBUS / RTU
3 Isolated 0V 6 Rx- 1 Steady red Duplicate IP address, FATAL error

1 Flashing red One or more connections timed out (CIP class 1 or 3)
2 A 7 N/C
1 B 8 8 N/C
8 MS (Module Status) LED Indication
Internal connections:
Pin 1 to 5V via 100k 1 LINK LED Indication Off No power
Pin 2 to 0V via 100k LED state Interpretation
LINK Steady green Controlled by a scanner in Run state
LEDs: Off No Link, no activity Flashing green Not configuration or scanner in idle state
Green = Tx activity Steady green Link established MS
Yellow Connectors Steady red Major fault (Exeption-state, FATAL error etc.)
Yellow = Rx activity in parallel Flickering green Activity Flashing red Recoverable fault(s)
Modbus TCP (Ethernet 10baseT) Pinout CC-Link Connector Pinout

Pin Function RUN LED Indication
1 DA (Rx+/Tx+) 110R, 1/2W, 5% across RUN LED state Interpretation
2 DB (Rx/Tx) pins 1 and 2 of first Off No network participation timeout status (no power)
Pin Function and last connectors
Yellow 3 DG (Signal ground) Green Participating, normal operation
8 N/C 4 SLD (Cable Shield) SLD and FG 1 Red Major fault (FATAL error)
MODBUS / TCP
7 N/C 5 FG (Protective Ground) connected internally

8
6 Rx-
5 N/C Notes:
4 N/C 1. A 110 Ohm (5% 1/2 watt) terminating resistor
1 should be connected across pins 1 and 2 of the
3 Rx+ ERR LED Indication
2 Tx- connectors at each end of the transmision line. 5 LED state Interpretation
1 Tx Green 2. The cable shield should be connected to pin 4 Off No error detected (no power)
LEDs: of each CC-Link connector. Steady red Major fault (Exception or FATAL event)
Green = Tx activity ERR Flickering red CRC Error (temporary flickering)
3. The shield and Protective earth terminals (pins 4
Yellow = Network activity and 5) are internally connected. Flashing red Station number of Buad rate has changed since startup
50Amps/100Amps/160Amps/250Amps 50Amps/100Amps
Fixing Details FRONT VIEW
6.5 (0.26)
Recommended fixing bolt size = M6 Line entry 21.5 (0.85)
Note: Units are shown with individual mounting
brackets. Multi-phase units come supplied with 2, 3 61.4 (2.42) 107.5 (4.23) 85.0 (3.35) 85.0 (3.35) 85.0 (3.35) 42.0
A B C D (1.65)
or 4 phase brackets as appropriate. See table
below for details. Safety
earth
(M6)
Dimension mm (inches)
Insert
5 (0.20)
317 (12.48)
330 (12.99)
50/100/160/250 AMPS Overall Widths screwdriver
No of phases 1 here, and
2 3 4
pull down
Door closed 149.5 (5.39) 234.5 (9.23) 319.5 (12.58) 404.5 (15.93) to release
Door open 211.0 (8.31) 296.0 (11.65) 381.0 (15.00) 466.0 (18.35) door
Door
Bracket Upper Lower (Open)
2-phase Use A & B Use E & F
3-phase Use A, B & C Use E, F & G
4-phase Use A, B, C & D Use E, F G & H
E F G H
Communications
252.2 (9.93)
Cable exit/entry
194.4 (7.65)
VIEW ON UNDERSIDE
400Amps/500Amps/630Amps 400Amps
Fixing Details FRONT VIEW
8.5 (0.33)
Recommended fixing bolt size = M8 Line entry 25 (0.98)

127.5 (5.02) 125 (4.92) 125 (4.92) 125 (4.92) 62
Note: Units are shown with individual mounting A B C D (2.44)
brackets. Multi-phase units come supplied with 2, 3
or 4 phase brackets as appropriate. See table
below for details. Safety
earth
Dimension mm (inches) (M10)
400/500/630AMPS Overall Widths

No of phases 1 2 3 4
Door closed 189.5 (7.46) 314.5 (12.38) 439.5 (17.30) 564.5 (22.22)
489.5 (19.27)
474.5 (18.68)
Door open 251.0 (9.88) 376.0 (14.80) 501.0 (19.72) 626.0 (24.65)
Bracket Upper Lower

2-phase Use A & B Use E & F
3-phase Door
Use A, B & C Use E, F & G (Open)
4-phase Use A, B, C & D Use E, F G & H
Communications
E F G H
Load entry 10 (0.39)

252.2 (9.93)
Cable exit/entry
208.4 (8.20)
N
L
N
L
E
VIEW ON UNDERSIDE
160Amps 250Amps
FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW
6.5 (0.26)
Recommended fixing bolt size = M6 Line entry 21.5 (0.85)
6.5 (0.26)
Recommended fixing bolt size = M6 Line entry 21.5 (0.85) 42.0

61.4 (2.42) 107.5 (4.23) 85.0 (3.35) 85.0 (3.35) 85.0 (3.35)
61.4 (2.42) 107.5 (4.23) 85.0 (3.35) 85.0 (3.35) 85.0 (3.35) 42.0 A B C D (1.65)
A B C D (1.65)
Safety Safety
earth earth
(M6) (M8)
Insert Insert
388 (15.28)
401 (15.79)
5 (0.20) 5 (0.20)
348 (13.70)
361 (14.21)
screwdriver screwdriver
here, and here, and
pull down pull down
to release to release
door door
Door Door
(Open) (Open)
CL
Communications CL
Communications
E F G H
E F G H
252.2 (9.93)
252.2 (9.93)
Cable exit/entry
Cable exit/entry
194.4 (7.65)
194.4 (7.65)
VIEW ON UNDERSIDE VIEW ON UNDERSIDE
500Amps/630Amps
FRONT VIEW Line entry 30 (1.18)
8.5 (0.33)
Recommended fixing bolt size = M8 Line entry 68 (2.68)

127.5 (5.02) 125 (4.92) 125 (4.92) 125 (4.92) 62
A B C D (2.44)
A
Safety
earth
(M12)
474.5 (18.68)
489.5 (19.27)
Door
(Open)
Communications
E F G H
296 (11.65)
Cable exit/entry
212 (8.34)
N
L
N
L
E
VIEW ON UNDERSIDE
Order codes
1 2 3 44 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
EPOWER
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
The code is divided in three sections:

1 Hardware, which defines the type, number and size of the unit and/or the modules.
2 Optional hardware and software functions.
3 QuickStart which is intend to configure the unit for maximum 60 to 80% of the application (single unit in 1, 2 or 3 legs configuration)
The code can then be either Short and include only the main hardware fields or medium and combine the hardware + the optional fields, or finally Long with the
additional quick start code at the end.
Basic Product 2 Voltage 8 Communications Protocol 14 Remote Panel
EPOWER Power Controller 600V 100V to 600V XX No optional fieldbus XX None

690V 100V to 690V communication 32ENG 32h8e English
XXX For Driver mod only Y2 2-wire 485 Modbus 32FRA 32h8e French
1 Phase/Amps (RJ45 connector) 32GER 32h8e German
1PH-50A 1 Phase unit 50A PB Profibus-DPV1 32ITA 32h8e Italian
1PH-100A 1 Phase unit 100A (with D type connector) 32SPA 32h8e Spanish
3 Fan Supply
1PH-160A 1 Phase unit 160A ET Modbus-TCP
1PH-250A 1 Phase unit 250A 230V 230V ac 160A DN DeviceNet
15 Software Option 1
1PH-400A 1 Phase unit 400A 115V 115V ac 160A IP Ethernet/IP
1PH-500A 1 Phase unit 500A XXX No fan 100A CC CC-Link XXX None
1PH-630A 1 Phase unit 630A EMS Energy Measurement
2PH-50A 2 Phase unit 50A (Counter)
2PH-100A 2 Phase unit 100A 9 Module 1 LTC Load Tap Changer
4 Warranty
2PH-160A 2 Phase unit 160A
2PH-250A 2 Phase unit 250A XX None
XXX Standard
2PH-400A 2 Phase unit 400A IO IO optional board 16 Software Option 2
WL005 5 Year
2PH-500A 2 Phase unit 500A USWL3 US Extended
2PH-630A 2 Phase unit 630A XXX None
3PH-50A 3 Phase unit 50A 10 Module 2 EMS Energy Measurement
3PH-100A 3 Phase unit 100A (Counter)
5 Internal Use XX None LTC Load Tap Changer
3PH-160A 3 Phase unit 160A IO IO optional board
3PH-400A 3 Phase unit 400A 17 Not Used
3PH-2500A 3 Phase unit 250A 11 Module 3
3PH-630A 3 Phase unit 630A XX Default
4PH-50A 4 Phase unit 50A 6 Internal Use XX None
4PH-100A 4 Phase unit 100A IO IO optional board
18 Quick Start
4PH-250A 4 Phase unit 250A
4PH-400A 4 Phase unit 400A 12 Predictive Load Management XX None - End of code
4PH-500A 4 Phase unit 500A QS Quick Start config
7 Option XXX None
4PH-630A 4 Phase unit 630A PLM Predictive Load
PWR-50A 50A Power module XX None - End of Code Management
PWR-100A 100A Power module 19 Language
00 Unit with options and/
PWR-160A 160A Power module or quick start definition
PWR-250A 250A Power module ENG English
13 External Feedback
PWR-400A 400A Power module FRA French
PWR-500A 500A Power module XX None - Standard unit GER German
PWR-630A 630A Power module XF External feedback* ITA Italian
DRV-XXX Driver module only SPA Spanish
* Factory option
General diagrams Caution

1. Neutral/phase reference connections (if applicable) must be located between any isolating device and the relevant Power Module.
2. For single phase configurations, all Neutral reference connections must be individually fused.
Single Phase Control Three Phase Control with Three Phase Control with Load Coupled in Three Phase Control with Load
Load Coupling in Delta or Star Open Delta Coupled in Star with Neutral
Phase Neutral Phase 1 2 3 Phase 1 2 3 Phase 1 2 3 Neutral
Safety and cut device Safety and cut device Safety and cut device Safety and cut device
Three
Phase
load
coupled
Single in open
phase delta
Neutral 1 2 Voltage 1 2 12 12 Voltage 1 2 12 12 Voltage 1 2 12 12
load Fuse
reference reference reference reference
Fuse Three phase load
coupled in delta or star Fuse Load coupled in
star with neutral
20 Load Current (nominal) 25 Firing Mode (Note 5) 31 Analogue Input 2 Type 36 Load Management
Configuration
16A 16 Amps PA Phase angle XX None
25A 25 Amps HC Half cycle 0V 0-10 Volt XX None Load Management
40A 40 Amps BF Burst firing 1V 1-5 Volt disabled
50A 50 Amps (default 16 cycles) 2V 2-10 Volt SH Sharing
63A 63 Amps FX Fix modulation period 5V 0-5 Volt I1 Incremental Type 1
80A 80 Amps (default 2 seconds) 0A 0-20 mA I2 Incremental Type 2
100A 100 Amps LG Logic mode 4A 4-20 mA RI Rotating Incremental
125A 125 Amps (Note 1) DC Distributed Control
160A 160 Amps (Note 1) DI Distributed Control and
32 Analogue Output Function
200A 200 Amps (Note 1) Incremental Control
26 Feedback RD Rotating Distributed Control
250A 250 Amps (Note 1) XX None
315A 315 Amps (Note 1) V2 RMS load X None and Incremental Control
400A 400 Amps (Note 1) voltage squared V Voltage
500A 500 Amps (Note 1) I2 RMS load I Current
630A 630 Amps (Note 1) current squared P Power 37 Predictive Load
TP True power R Impedance Management Address
VR RMS load voltage XX Predictive Load
21 Load Voltage (nominal) IR RMS load current
33 Analogue Output Type Management address
OL Open loop (00 to 63) Default address 00
100V 100 Volts
110V 110 Volts XX None
115V 115 Volts 0V 0-10 Volt
27 Current Transfer Mode 1V 1-5 Volt
120V 120 Volts
(Linear Current Limit) (Note 6) 2V 2-10 Volt
127V 127 Volts
200V 200 Volts XXX Off 5V 0-5 Volt
208V 208 Volts I2 RMS load current 0A 0-20 mA
220V 220 Volts squared transfer 4A 4-20 mA
230V 230 Volts IR RMS load
240V 240 Volts current transfer
277V 277 Volts 34 Digital Input 2 Function
380V 380 Volts
400V 400 Volts XX None
28 Analogue Input 1 Function AK Alarm acknowledgement SPARE FUSE FOR POWER MODULES
415V 415 Volts (Note 6)
440V 440 Volts RS Remote setpoint selection Current rating
460V 460 Volts XX None amps Fuse number
480V 480 Volts SP Setpoint 50A CS179139U315
500V 500 Volts HR Setpoint limit 35 Alarm Relay Configuration 100A CS179139U315
575V 575 Volts IL Current limit 160A CS179139U315
600V 600 Volts VL Voltage limit XX None 250A CS179139U350
660V 660 Volts (Note 2) PL Power limit AA Any alarm 400A CS179439U550
690V 690 Volts (Note 2) TS Current transfer span PA Process alarms 500A CS029859U630
FB Fuse blown 630A CS029960U900
22 Control Type (Note 3) 29 Analogue Input 1 Type
1P Single phase XX None Notes

2P Two phase control 1V 1-5 Volt 1. The maximum nominal current selectable is the current rating selected in
3P Three phase control 2V 2-10 Volt Field 1.
5V 0-5 Volt 2. Only available if 690V selected in Field 2.
0A 0-20 mA 3. Selection dependent on number of Phases selected in Field 1.
23 Load Configuration (Note 4) 4A 4-20 mA 1PH = IP only
2PH = IP or 2P only
1P Single phase 3PH = IP or 3P only
3S Star 4PH = IP or 2P only
30 Analogue Input 2 Function
3D Delta (Note 6) 4. Selection dependent on number of Phases selected in Field 1.
4S Star with neutral 1PH = 1P only
6D Open delta XX None 2PH = 1P, 3S or 3D only
SP Setpoint 3PH = Any
HR Setpoint limit 4PH = 1P, 3S or 3D only
24 Load Type IL Current limit If IP selected in Field 22 only option is IP.
VL Voltage limit 5. PA not selectable if 2P selected in Field 22.
XX Resistive PL Power limit HC not selectable if TR selected in Field 24.
TR Transformer primary TS Current transfer span 6. Except XX the selection in Fields 28 and 30 cannot be the same.
Up to Four Single Phase Control Two Phase Control with Two times Two Phase Control with
with Independent Loads Load Coupled in Delta or Star Loads Coupled in Delta or Star
Phase 1 2 3 4 Neutral (or Phase 1 2 3 Phase 1 2 3
other phase)
Safety and cut device Safety and cut device
Safety and cut device
3rd phase 1 2 12 12 12 3rd phase 1 2 12 Fuse 3rd phase 1 2 12 12 12 Fuse

reference reference reference
Fuse Four Three phase load Three phase load
independent coupled in delta or star coupled in delta or star
loads
Three phase load
coupled in delta or star
32h8e EPower Remote Panel
Mechanical Details
96 (3.78) 90 (3.54)
48 (1.89)
Panel cut-out 45 (1.77) (0.0 +0.6) x 92 (3.62) (0.0 +0.8)
10 (0.39)
Model number 32h8e is a horizontal 1/8DIN indicator and alarm unit

that performs the dual function of remote display for EPower and
38 (1.50)
independent policeman. The latter is intended to disconnect should
an overtemperature (or other excess process condition) occur.
32h8e communicates with EPower using Modbus protocol via the
EIA485 RJ45 connector located on the underside of the EPower
controller.
Dimension mm (inches)
The remote panel is normally ordered as an option with EPower units.
It is a fixed hardware build consisting of a relay output in OP1 and an
Recommended minimum spacing
analogue output in OP3. There are no user communications since this If more than one unit is mounted in the same panel they should be
is used to communicate with EPower and the supply is high voltage spaced to allow sufficient air flow between them.
only (100-240Vac). The unit is configured using QuickStart code on
initial start up.
Rear Terminals
The 32h8e is based on a 32h8i indicator and has the same and
additional features as this instrument. For features not covered please 100 to 240V ac Dig in B
50/60Hz Output 3 (OP3)
refer to HA029005. Neutral Line PV Retransmission Output 1 (OP1)
V/mA Changeover Relay
The 32h8e displays EPower Current, Voltage, Power and Setpoint
N L 3D 3C 3B 3A LC LB 2B 2A 1B 1A
parameters for each EPower Network. The Setpoint of the EPower
networks can be adjusted via the 32h8e HMI. Indication of selected
setpoint is included: local or remote.
Wire sizes
The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5mm (16 to
V- V+ VI LA C CT HF HE HD AC AB AA
22AWG). Hinged covers prevent hands or metal making accidental
contact with live wires. The rear screws should be tightened to 0.4Nm
(3.3lb in). T/C + B () A (+) COM
Digital Comms
Sensor
Pt100
! Ensure that the supply to the unit does not exceed 240Vac +10% Input Dig in A
mA
mV/V 2.49
N
Example Wiring Diagram L1
L2
L3 * General notes
Coil about relays and
Auxiliary Inductive Loads
circuit fuse Contactor
* When switching
32h8e Fuse inductive loads such as
L
contactors or solenoid
N
valves, wire the
N L 3D 3C 3B 3A LC LB 2B 2A 1B 1A 22nF/100 snubber
supplied across
EPower EPower EPower EPower normally open relay
Driver Power Power Power
terminals.
Unit Unit Unit
This will prolong

contact life and reduce
interference.
V- V+ VI LA C CT HF HE HD AC AB AA ! Snubbers pass
0.6mA at 110V and
+ 1.2mA at 230Vac,
RJ45
Furnace connector
which may sufficient to
Temperature Screen hold on high
T/C impedance loads.
Local ground
Specification - 32h8e Remote display Resistance thermometer types: 3-wire Pt100 DIN 43760
Environmental performance Bulb current: 0.2mA
Temperature Lead compensation: No error for 22 ohms in all leads
limits Operation: 0 to 55C Input filter: Off to 100s
Storage: -10 to 70C Zero offset: User adjustable over full range
Humidity limits Operation: 5 to 85% RH non condensing User calibration: 2-point gain & offset
Storage: 5 to 85% RH non condensing
Panel sealing: IP65, Nema 4X Notes
Shock: BS EN61010 (1) Calibration accuracy quoted over full ambient operating range and for all
Vibration: 2g peak, 10 to 150Hz input linearisation types
Altitude: <2000 metres (2) Contact Eurotherm for details of availability of custom downloads for
Atmospheres: Not suitable for use in explosive or alternative sensors
corrosive atmosphere
OP 1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Type: Form C (changeover)
Emissions and immunity: BS EN61326
Rating: Min 100mA @12V dc, max 2A@240Vac resistive
Functions: Alarms, events
Electrical safety
(BS EN61010): Installation cat. II; Pollution degree 2
OP 3
INSTALLATION CATEGORY II Isolation: 264V ac double insulated
The rate impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V mains is 2500V. Functions: Retransmission
Current output
POLLUTION DEGREE 2 Rating: 0-20mA into <500
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a Accuracy: (<0.25% of Reading + <50A)
temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected Resolution: 13.6 bits
Voltage output
Physical Rating: 0-10V into >500
Panel mounting: 1/8 DIN, horizontal Accuracy: (<0.25% of Reading +<25mV)
Dimensions and weight: 96mm (3.78) W x 48mm (1.89) H x Resolution: 13.6 bits
90mm (3.54 inches) D, 350g (0.77lbs)
Panel cut-out dimensions: 92mm (1.77 inches W x 45mm (3.62 inches) H
Software features
Operator interface Alarms
Type: LCD TN with backlight Number: 4
Main PV display: 5 digits, green or red Type: Absolute high & low, Rate of change
Lower display: 9 character starburst, green (rising or falling)
Status beacons: Units, outputs, alarms Latching: Auto or manual latching, non-latching,
event only
Power requirements Output assignment: Up to four conditions can be assigned to
Voltage: 100 to 240V ac, 15%, +10%, max 9W one output
Frequency: 48 to 62Hz EPower Alarms: Missing mains, Thyristor short circuit, Open
thyristor, Fuse blown, Over temperature,
Approvals Voltage dips, Frequency fault, Power module
CE, cUL listed (file E57766) 24V fault, Total load failure, Chop off, Partial
Load Failure, Partial Load Unbalance, Volt
fault, Temperature pre alarm, Power module
Communications
wdog fault, Power module comms error,
Serial communications option Power module timeout, Closed loop, Output
Protocol: Modbus RTU Master fault
Isolation: 264V ac, double insulated The pre-set alarms have a fixed medium priority enables indicator alarms to be
Transmission standard: EIA485 (2 wire) configured as lower, the same or higher priority.
EPower alarms can be globally acknowledged via the 32h8e HMI.
The 32h8e has Modbus Master RS485 Comms with a fixed set of EPower
Modbus addresses. Power up the display for the first time, configure the Other status outputs
QuickStart code for the standard indicator functions, and the process values Functions: Including sensor break, power fail, new
and alarm messages are immediately displayed, automatically configured to alarm, pre-alarm
match the EPower display - for example RMS values or average values for Output assignment: Up to four conditions can be assigned to
current, voltage and power displayed as 3 phase or as several times single phase one output
as defined by the EPower configuration.
Custom messages
32h8e Terminal RJ45 Pin Number Number: 15 scrolling text messages
HD White/Green Common 3 No of characters: 127 characters per message max
Languages: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian
HE Orange Rx A(+) 2 Selection: Active on any parameter status using
HF White/Orange Tx B(-) 1 conditional command
Recipes
Process variable input Number: 5 recipes with 19 parameters
Selection: HMI interface, communications or
Calibration accuracy: <0.25% of reading 1LSD (Note 1) digital IO
Sample rate: 9Hz(110ms)
Isolation: 264V ac double insulation from the PSU Other features
and communication Display colour: Upper display selectable green or red or
Resolution (V): <0.5V with 1.6s filter (mV range) change on alarm
<0.25mV with 1.6s filter (Volts range) Scrolling text: Parameter help, custom messages
Resolution (effective bits): >17 bits Display filter: Off to zero last 2 digits
Linearisation accuracy: < 0.1% of reading Peak monitor: Stores high and low values
Drift with temperature: <50ppm (typical) <100ppm (worst case)
Common mode rejection: 48-62Hz, >-120db
Series mode rejection: 48-62Hz, >-93dB
Input impedance: 100M (200K on volts range C)
Cold junction compensation: >30/1 rejection of ambient change
External cold junction: Reference of 0C
Cold junction accuracy: <1C at 25C ambient
Linear (process) input range: -10 to 80mV, 0 to 10V
Thermocouple types: K, J, N, R, S, B, L, T, C, custom download
(Note 2)
32h8e Initial configuration
If it has not previously been configured (e.g. a new instrument) it will start up showing the QuickStart configuration codes.
This consists of two Sets of five characters. The upper section of the display shows the set selected, the lower section shows the five which make
up the set.
Set 1
Input Type Display Units Decimal point PV Colour Top part of display only HOME display
Thermocouple C C 0 nnnnn G Green N PV only
B Type B f F 1 nnnn.n R Red A First Alarm SP only
J Type J K K 2 nnn.nn C Colour change on Alarm. Green to red 1 PV + Alarm SP R/W
K Type K X None 3 nn.nnn X Not applicable 2 PV + Alarm SP R/O
L Type L P % 4 n.nnnn I* Current
N Type N O Pa V* Voltage
R Type R 1 mPa E %RH P* Power
S Type S 2 Kpa G %O2
T Type T 3 Bar H %CO2 * When I, V or P has been configured the selected parameter for Network 1
C Custom C 4 mBar J %CP
will be displayed following a power cycle, exit from config. or timeout on an
RTD 5 PSI L V
P Pt100 6 Kg/cm2 M Amp indicator page.
Linear 7 mmWG R mA
M 0-80mV 8 inWG T mV Pressing will select the next networks V, I or P parameter (rms or
2 0-20mA 9 mmHG U Ohm average depending upon the network configuration).
4 4-20mA A Torr W ppm
0 0-10Vdc B L-H Y RPM
1 1-5vdc D L-m Z m-s
Set 1 is followed with Set this for the maximum
3 2-10Vdc
6 0-5Vdc display range required
Then Set this for the minimum

display range required
Set 2 follows these parameters See next panel
Set 2
OP1 OP3 OP4 (Not applicable) Digital Input A and B

X Unconfigured X Unconfigured X Unconfigured
Relay Output Analogue Output W Alarm Acknowledge
Alarm 1 PV Retransmission (Note 3) K Keylock
H High alarm 1 4-20mA U Remote up button
L Low alarm 2 0-20mA D Remote down button
R Rate-of-change - Rising 3 0-5Vdc V Recipe 2/1 select
N New alrm flag 4 1-5Vdc J Alarm Inhibit
O Sensor break 5 0-10Vdc M Peak Reset
P Power fail 6 2-10Vdc Y Freeze PV
With sensor Break (Note 1)
7 High alarm
8 Low alarm Notes
9 Rate-of-change Alarm should be set to High alarm for process alarm.
With power Fail (Note 2)
Alarm outputs are set to inverted when existing from Quick Code. This means the relay de-energises in alarm.
A High alarm
B Low alarm 1. The output relay operates when either a High alarm or Sensor Break alaram occurs.
C Rate-of-change 2. When power is restored after being removed an alarm message POWER FAIL is scrolled across the
With sensor Break and power Fail display. The relay remains relaxed in its alarm state. This relay will be reset and the alarm message can
(Note 2) celled when the alarm is acknowledged.
E High alarn 3. PV re-transmission is the PV of the indicator (normally process temperature).
F Low alarm
G Rate-of-change
Eurotherm: International sales and service

AUSTRALIA Sydney Beijing Office GERMANY Limburg KOREA Seoul SWEDEN Malmo
T (+61 2) 9838 0099 T (+86 10) 63108914 T (+49 6431) 2980 T (+82 31) 2738507 T (+46 40) 384500
E info.au@eurotherm.com E info.cn@eurotherm.com E info.de@eurotherm.com E info.kr@eurotherm.com E info.se@eurotherm.com
AUSTRIA Vienna Guangzhou Office HONG KONG NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn SWITZERLAND Wollerau
T (+43 1) 7987601 T (+86 20) 38106506 T (+85 2) 28733826 T (+31 172) 411752 T (+41 44) 7871040
E info.at@eurotherm.com E info.cn@eurotherm.com E info.hk@eurotherm.com E info.nl@eurotherm.com E info.ch@eurotherm.com
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG DENMARK Copenhagen INDIA Chennai NORWAY Oslo UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
T (+32) 85 274080 T (+45 70) 234670 T (+91 44) 24961129 T (+47 67) 592170 T (+44 1903) 268500
E info.be@eurotherm.com E info.dk@eurotherm.com E info.in@eurotherm.com E info.no@eurotherm.com E info.uk@eurotherm.com
BRAZIL Campinas-SP FINLAND Abo IRELAND Dublin POLAND Katowice www.eurotherm.co.uk
T (+5519) 3707 5333 T (+358) 22506030 T (+353 1) 4691800 T (+48 32) 2185100 U.S.A. Leesburg VA
E info.br@eurotherm.com E info.fi@eurotherm.com E info.ie@eurotherm.com E info.pl@eurotherm.com Eurotherm Inc.
CHINA FRANCE Lyon ITALY Como SPAIN Madrid T (+1 703) 443 0000
T (+86 21) 61451188 T (+33 478) 664500 T (+39 031) 975111 T (+34 91) 6616001 E info.us@eurotherm.com
E info.cn@eurotherm.com E info.fr@eurotherm.com E info.it@eurotherm.com E info.es@eurotherm.com www.eurotherm.com ED57
Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2008

Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, Eycon, Eyris, EPower and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates.
All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than
for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice.
The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only.
Printed on
Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
recycled paper
Part No. HA029669 Issue 4 EPower Specification Sheet in England 03.09
Compact NSX
100 a 630 A
Interruptores automticos de caja moldeada
Interruptores-seccionadores
Medida y comunicacin
Catlogo 08-09
Acceso directo
a la eficiencia
energtica
Compact NSX 100-630 A
La nueva generacin de interruptores automticos
Control, medida Continuidad Seguridad

y comunicacin de servicio y proteccin
ndice Compact NSX100 a 630 A
general
Interruptores automticos de caja moldeada
Interruptores-seccionadores
Medida y comunicacin
Introduccin
1 Funciones y caractersticas
2 Recomendaciones de instalacin
3 Dimensiones y conexionado
4 Esquemas elctricos
Caractersticas adicionales
5
6 Referencias
7 Glosario
8 ndice de referencias
Compact
NSX
reaviva
la energa
Compact NSX Compact NS se lanz al mercado en 1994 y rpidamente se convirti

constituye la ltima en el estndar de interruptores automticos de caja moldeada. Como
generacin de una sinnimo de alto rendimiento e innovacin, se imit en muchas ocasiones,
gama de productos pero nunca lleg a igualarse. Los instaladores y los fabricantes de
que establece un cuadros elctricos valoraban su pequeo tamao y su fcil instalacin.
nuevo estndar Y los usuarios se beneciaban de una proteccin superior, as como
de mercado que
de funciones electrnicas con una sencillez de funcionamiento sin
incluye funciones
precedentes.
de medida y
comunicacin. Compact NS simplemente se encontraba un paso por delante.
Compact NSX es Actualmente, han surgido nuevas necesidades. La abilidad de la
mucho ms que alimentacin es fundamental y los costes energticos deben optimizarse
un interruptor constantemente. Las instalaciones elctricas deben superar los
automtico. estndares para ofrecer nuevas funciones de anlisis, medicin
y comunicacin, adems de una proteccin sin restricciones.
La nueva gama de interruptores automticos de ltima generacin

Compact NSX est lista para responder a las actuales y futuras demandas
del mercado. De nuevo, destaca entre el resto, con todas las funciones de
medicin integradas en el mismo interruptor automtico.
Adems de la proteccin probada, Compact NSX ofrece funciones
electrnicas inteligentes. Con nuevas funciones de medicin y anlisis
y un acceso directo a la informacin detallada y a redes a travs de
protocolos abiertos, Compact NSX permite a los usuarios optimizar la
gestin de sus instalaciones elctricas.
Compact NSX es mucho ms que un interruptor automtico, es tambin

una herramienta de medicin y comunicacin preparada para responder
a las necesidades de los clientes mediante los siguientes aspectos:
optimizacin del consumo energtico.
aumento de la disponibilidad energtica.
mejora en la gestin de las instalaciones elctricas.
Por todo ello, Compact NSX lleva el nombre de Schneider Electric.
4
La mejora de la continuidad del servicio:
una mayor preocupacin
Para reducir las tensiones en el sistema
y evitar el sobredimensionamiento de
los cables, los interruptores automticos
Compact NSX ofrecen una gran limitacin
de la energa de defecto que se produce
por un cortocircuito. Cuando se utilizan
varios interruptores automticos en serie,
la selectividad garantiza la continuidad
de servicio al disparar el interruptor
automtico aguas arriba lo ms cerca
posible del defecto y al desconectar
nicamente el circuito correspondiente.
De esta forma, no afecta al interruptor
automtico aguas arriba y permite que los
dems circuitos permanezcan operativos.
Schneider Electric emplea sus 30 aos
de experiencia y sus conocimientos
tecnolgicos para mejorar en todo
momento la continuidad del servicio.
Compact
NSX
Poderes de corte a 415 V
NSX100 NSX160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630
36-50 kA :
aplicaciones estndar: plantas
L 150kA
industriales, edicios.
S 100kA
70-100 kA :
altas prestaciones:
H 70kA
(hospitales, aeropuertos).
N 50kA
150 kA :
aplicaciones exigentes, marina,
industria pesada. F 36kA
5
Compact
NSX
Rendimiento ptimo
Para ajustarse a todas las aplicaciones a la per-
feccin, Compact NSX ofrece nuevas funciones
de rendimiento junto a una amplia gama de
accesorios y unidades de control intercambia-
bles Micrologic.
Selectividad total ms econmica

Compact NSX se benecia del concepto
patentado de corte rotoactivo doble, junto a un
sistema de disparo reejo para obtener la mxi-
ma desconexin. Esto garantiza una proteccin
able, slida y sobre todo, calidades de limita-
cin excepcionales. La nueva gama avanza en
lo que respecta a la selectividad, en especial al
ofrecer una selectividad total con interruptores
automticos Multi 9 con especicaciones mni-
mas de 100 A. Con ello se consiguen grandes
ahorros al eliminar los interruptores automticos
sobredimensionados. Los dispositivos son
ms pequeos y los cuadros de distribucin
ms econmicos, por lo que se reduce el coste
Selectividad total entre dispositivos NSX100 y Multi 9. general de una instalacin.
6
Schneider Electric,
est presente
en todos los
continentes y en
190 pases, presta
servicio a los
mercados de todo
el mundo y cumple
las expectativas
de sus clientes
con productos que
se ajustan a los
estndares y las
normas de cada
pas.
Al igual que todos
los productos
de las gamas de
Baja tensin,
Compact NSX se ha
diseado segn las
directivas europeas
medioambientales
y ha recibido la
certificacin y
la aprobacin
internacional
de laboratorios
independientes.
mucho
que un
interruptor
automtico
Nuevas funciones con el mismo tamao
La nueva gama de interruptores automticos
Compact NSX incorpora unidades de control
electrnicas Micrologic que ofrecen funciones
de proteccin de gran abilidad y de supervi-
sin precisa de la potencia. Desde 16 A hasta
630 A, ofrecen funciones de anlisis, medicin
y comunicacin. Con ello se ahorra un gran
espacio en el cuadro de distribucin, as como
tiempo de instalacin y, sobre todo, se obtiene
la capacidad de gestionar la instalacin elctri-
ca de una forma eciente y ptima.
7
Compact
Diseo meticuloso para conseguir cuadros
de distribucin atractivos
La parte frontal de los interruptores automticos
Compact NSX presenta un atractivo perl en
curva. Las mediciones se leen fcilmente
en un panel blanco que destaca sobre la carca-
NSX
sa gris oscuro. El usuario tiene acceso directo
a los parmetros y ajustes. La navegacin por
las pantallas es intuitiva y los ajustes se simpli-
can por las lecturas inmediatas en amperios.
Adems, un LED Ready (preparado) parpa-
dea para indicar que todo est funcionando
correctamente.
Y adems, Compact NSX contribuye

a la proteccin del planeta
El diseo de Compact NSX facilita el desmonta-
Fcil de instalar, como es habitual je y el reciclado al nal de la vida til y cumple
Compact NSX se monta exactamente del mismo las directivas medioambientales RoHS y WEEE.
modo que Compact NS y presenta el Se encuentra disponible un Perl medioambien-
mismo diagrama de cableados, un factor clave tal del producto, previa solicitud. Ninguna planta
de xito. Las tapas son las mismas, indepen- de fabricacin contamina, segn la normativa
dientemente del tipo de mando. ISO 14001.
Se puede utilizar la misma instalacin y las (RoHS= Restriction of Hazardous Substances,
mismas conexiones en nuevos proyectos, con restriccin de sustancias peligrosas)
lo que se simplican las ampliaciones y las (WEEE = Waste of Electrical and Electronic
renovaciones y se reducen los costes de man- Equipment, residuos de equipos elctricos
tenimiento. y electrnicos).
8
Compact NSX
ofrece una
proteccin elctrica
superior, la funcin
esencial de
cualquier interruptor
automtico.
Adems, sus
nuevas funciones
de medicin y
comunicacin
ofrecen una
comodidad
y una seguridad
an mayores.
Compact NSX se
ha diseado para
facilitar el trabajo
de los instaladores,
los fabricantes
de cuadros y los
usuarios.
mucho
que un
interruptor
automtico
Un LED Ready (preparado) parpadea para

indicar que todo est funcionando correcta-
mente
Un LED Ready (preparado), situado en el
panel frontal blanco de la unidad de control,
parpadea tan pronto como la unidad de control
est lista para proteger. Con slo un vistazo, sa-
br que todo est funcionando como es debido.
Sin necesidad de recurrir a un kit de prueba.
9
Disparo reflejo
y funcionamiento inteligente
El interruptor automtico es ante todo, un
dispositivo de proteccin, diseado para
dispararse en caso de que se produzca un
defecto elctrico. Con la integracin de
funciones electrnicas, las unidades
de control han aumentado su velocidad y su
precisin, con lo que pueden establecerse
ajustes ms precisos, sobre todo en lo que
respecta a las temporizaciones. El resultado
es una mayor fiabilidad y una selectividad
mejorada.
Las unidades de control ahora son
verdaderos sistemas de supervisin de los
interruptores automticos.
Controles y ajustes seguros

Una cubierta precintable y transparente pro-
tege el acceso a los indicadores de la unidad
de control y evita un cambio de ajustes. Los
nuevos mandos motorizados tambin disponen
de cubierta transparente precintable para evitar
Compact su manipulacin accidental.
Un cubrebornes funcional
protege a los usuarios
NSX
Compact NSX dispone de cubrebornes que
ofrecen una excelente proteccin contra los
contactos directos (IP40 en todos los laterales,
IP20 en los puntos de entrada de cables) as
como una sencilla instalacin.
Lectura directa de la informacin en la

pantalla o en la unidad de visualizacin
del cuadro de distribucin
Las pantallas locales y remotas ofrecen un
acceso sencillo a los usuarios y facilitan los
principales valores elctricos: I, U, V, f, energa,
Instalacin sencilla con TLS* potencia, distorsin total de armnicos, etc.
Compact NSX dispone de un sistema de instala- La unidad de visualizacin del cuadro de
cin especial que garantiza que los tornillos que distribucin, de fcil utilizacin y navegacin
jan la unidad de control se encuentran co- intuitiva, se lee con ms comodidad y ofrece un
rrectamente alineados y que cada uno de ellos acceso rpido a una mayor cantidad de infor-
est apretado con el par necesario. El sistema macin. Un cable con conector RJ45 conecta
TLS ofrece una seguridad adicional y facilita el la unidad de visualizacin a la de disparo sin
trabajo, al no ser necesaria la utilizacin de llave ningn ajuste ni conguracin especiales. Por
dinamomtrica. eso es una unidad realmente plug & play.
*TLS: tornillo de limitacin de par.
10
mucho
La nueva gama Compact NSX, que incorpora
unidades de control electrnico Micrologic,
est formada por dispositivos de proteccin
de alta fiabilidad con una precisa central de
medida.
Compact NSX es ms que un interruptor
automtico excelente: es una herramienta
que un
de comunicacin lista para integrarse a las
aplicaciones actuales de eficacia energtica.
interruptor
Funciones de proteccin
automtico
independientes Mediciones de alta precisin y proteccin
de las de medicin sin fallos
Para mantener los costes bajo control y garan-
Las funciones de proteccin se gestionan
tizar la continuidad del servicio, la informacin
mediante un circuito ASIC
deber encontrarse disponible en tiempo real
(Application-Specific Integrated Circuit)
comn para todas las unidades de control. para poder adoptar la accin adecuada.
Al limitar el nmero de componentes, este La unidad de medida de Compact NSX ofrece
sistema electrnico aumenta la inmunidad toda la informacin necesaria para mantener
a las interferencias electromagnticas y controlada la instalacin elctrica: kilovatios-
mejora la fiabilidad. hora para optimizar
Las funciones de medicin se controlan y asignar los costes, tasa de distorsin arm-
mediante un microprocesador nica (THD) para supervisar la calidad de la
adicional. Estos sistemas electrnicos energa y noticacin de alarmas. Se pueden
se han diseado para soportar altas obtener mediciones de alta precisin gracias
temperaturas (105 C), con lo que se
a la incorporacin de transformadores de
garantiza la fiabilidad en condiciones de
corriente con ncleo de aire Rogowski. Estos
funcionamiento exigentes.
sensores se combinan con transformadores de
ncleo de hierro para la alimentacin
de los componentes electrnicos.
11
Herramientas de diagnstico para optimizar
los dispositivos instalados
Los indicadores de diagnstico facilitan el man-
tenimiento preventivo al facilitar informacin,
como el nmero de operaciones, el nivel de
desgaste de los contactos y el perl de carga
general. Con ello se facilita mucho ms la
supervisin del desgaste del equipo y se
pueden optimizar las inversiones a lo largo del
tiempo.
Fcil comunicacin en red

Todos los dispositivos Compact NSX se pueden
equipar con una funcin de comunicacin,
a travs de una conexin precableada con un
mdulo interface Modbus. Cuando se declara la
direccin Modbus, el dispositivo Compact NSX
se integra en la red. Existen cuatro niveles de
funciones que se pueden seleccionar segn las
Compact
necesidades:
comunicacin del estado del dispositivo: posi-
cin On/Off, indicacin de disparo e indicacin
de disparo por defecto.
comunicacin de comandos: abrir, cerrar
y rearmar.
NSX comunicacin de medidas: I, U, f, P, E,

THD, etc.
comunicacin de datos de asistencia de
funcionamiento: ajustes, alarmas, historiales y ta-
blas de eventos, indicadores de mantenimiento.
mucho
que un
Desde la comunicacin hasta
la supervisin de la alimentacin
El interface de comunicacin Modbus, utilizado
junto a softwares de supervisin PowerLogic:
interruptor SMS, PowerView... ofrece al usuario un conjunto

de parmetros y herramientas con los que se
facilita la supervisin del sistema.
automtico Adems, el software RSU permite congurar

las protecciones y alarmas, as como pruebas
de comunicacin con todos los dispositivos
instalados.
Funciones de anlisis y medida para gestionar la instalacin Los usuarios obtienen informacin en tiempo
Para que la instalacin elctrica sea ms sencilla de operar y para sacar real para realizar lo siguiente:
el mximo partido a la amplia gama de funciones de medida, los usuarios controlar la disponibilidad energtica.
pueden personalizar las alarmas con indicacin de hora de todos los pa- supervisar la calidad del suministro de alimen-
rmetros, asignndolas a pilotos indicadores, por ejemplo, as como elegir tacin.
prioridades de visualizacin y congurar umbrales de temporizacin optimizar el consumo de diferentes aplicacio-
y modos. Las tablas y los registros de eventos que se activan continua- nes o zonas prioritarias.
mente ofrecen a los usuarios una gran cantidad de informacin para establecer un plan de mantenimiento.
comprobar que el equipo instalado est funcionando De este modo, Compact NSX se convierte en
correctamente, optimizar la conguracin y aumentar al mximo la eca- una parte natural de una solucin Transparent
cia energtica. Ready.
El resultado es una gestin mejorada de toda la instalacin elctrica.
12
Compact
NSX
Funciones
y caractersticas
Seguridad Control, medida Continuidad

y proteccin y comunicacin de servicio
1 ndice Funciones y caractersticas
Compact NSX
1 Introduccin
Descripcin general de las aplicaciones 1/2
Caractersticas generales de la gama Compact NSX 1/4
Caractersticas y prestaciones de los interruptores automticos
Compact NSX de 100 a 630 A 1/6
Unidades de control Compact NSX 1/8
Descripcin general de las unidades de control para Compact NSX 1/10
Proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin

Unidades de control magnticas MA y magnetotrmicas TM 1/14
Unidades de control Micrologic 2 y 1.3-M 1/16
Unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A E 1/18
Funciones Power Meter

Micrologic electrnica 5 / 6 A o E 1/20
Funciones de ayuda a la explotacin

Funciones de la pantalla de visualizacin

Comunicacin Compact NSX

Bloques de comunicacin 1/26
Redes y software 1/28
Software RSU y RCU 1/30
Software de supervisin 1/31
Accesorios para unidades de control Micrologic 1/32
Proteccin diferencial
Proteccin adicional contra los defectos de aislamiento usando
bloque Vigi o rel Vigirex 1/34
Proteccin de motores
Informacin general sobre circuitos de alimentacin a motores 1/36
Caractersticas y soluciones en los circuitos de alimentacin a motores 1/39
Soluciones para los circuitos de alimentacin de motores
con Compact NSX 1/41
Unidades de control magnticas MA y Micrologic 1.3-M 1/42
Unidades de control electrnicas Micrologic 2-M 1/44
Unidades de control electrnicas Micrologic 6 E-M 1/46
ndice Funciones y caractersticas 1
Compact NSX
Aplicaciones especiales
Proteccin de generadores con las unidades de control Micrologic 2.2-G 1/50
Proteccin de aplicaciones de control industrial 1/52
Proteccin de red de 16 Hz 2/3. Unidad de control Micrologic 5 A-Z 1/54
Proteccin de sistemas de 400 Hz 1/56
Interruptores seccionadores
Descripcin general de las aplicaciones 1/58
Funciones de los interruptores seccionadores 1/59
Caractersticas y prestaciones de los interruptores seccionadores
Compact NSX de 100 a 630 NA 1/60
Sistemas inversores de redes

Presentacin 1/62
Inversores manuales 1/63
Inversores automticos y telemandados. Accesorio de
acoplamiento en pletina 1/64
Accesorios y auxiliares
Descripcin general de Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo 1/66
Descripcin general de Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable 1/68
Instalacin de los aparatos 1/70
Conexin de aparatos fijos 1/72
Conexin de aparatos extrables 1/75
Aislamiento de partes en tensin 1/77
Seleccin de auxiliares para Compact NSX100/160/250 1/78
Seleccin de auxiliares para Compact NSX400/630 1/80
Conexin de auxiliares elctricos 1/82
Contactos de sealizacin 1/84
Mdulos SDx y SDTAM para Micrologic 1/85
Mando motorizado (motorizacin) 1/86
Control a distancia 1/88
Mandos rotativos 1/90
Bloques de sealizacin y medida adicionales 1/92
Enclavamientos 1/94
Accesorios de precintado 1/95
Envolventes individuales 1/96
Marcos embellecedores 1/97
Recomendaciones de instalacin 2/1

Dimensiones y conexionado 3/1
Esquemas elctricos 4/1
Caractersticas adicionales 5/1
Referencias 6/1
Glosario 7/1
ndice de referencias 8/1
1 Introduccin
Descripcin general de las aplicaciones
Funciones y caractersticas
Compact NSX100 a 630 ofrece unas altas

Funciones Aplicaciones
prestaciones y una amplia gama de unidades de
control intercambiables para proteger la mayora G
de las aplicaciones. Las versiones electrnicas
ofrecen una proteccin de alta precisin con
amplias gamas de regulaciones y pueden integrar
funciones de medida y de comunicacin. Se
combinan las unidades de visualizacin FDM121
para ofrecer todas las funciones visualizacin y
medida.
Power Meter
pg. 1/20
El Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control Microlo-
gic 5 / 6 ofrece funciones de medida de tipo A (ampermetro)
o E (energa), as como de comunicacin. Mediante el uso
de los sensores y la inteligencia Micrologic, Compact NSX
ofrece acceso a las medidas de los principales parmetros
elctricos en la pantalla integrada, en una pantalla de visuali-
zacin FDM121 o a travs del sistema de comunicacin.
Ayuda a la explotacin
pg. 1/22
La integracin de funciones de medida ofrece a los usuarios
funciones de ayuda a la explotacin, incluidas alarmas que
se activan mediante valores de medida seleccionados
por el usuario, tablas de eventos e historiales con sealiza-
cin de hora e indicadores de mantenimiento.
Pantalla de visualizacin
pg. 1/24
Las medidas principales se pueden leer en la pantalla inte-
grada de las unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6.
Tambin se pueden ver en la pantalla de visualizacin
FDM121 mediante ventanas emergentes que indican las
alarmas principales.
Comunicacin
pg. 1/26
Compact NSX con unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6
ofrece funciones de comunicacin. Un sistema de conexin
mediante conectores RJ45 se conecta al bloque de interface
Modbus.
1/2
Introduccin 1
Descripcin general de las aplicaciones (continuacin)
Proteccin Los aparatos Compact NSX estn equipados con unidades de

control magnetotrmicas MA o TM o con unidades de control
Se pueden instalar fcilmente en todos los niveles de los sistemas
de distribucin, desde el cuadro de distribucin principal
de los sistemas electrnicas Micrologic 2 / 5 / 6 para ofrecer proteccin contra de BT hasta los cuadros de distribucin secundaria y las envol-
de distribucin cortocircuitos y sobrecargas en: ventes.
sistemas de distribucin alimentados por transformadores Todos los aparatos Compact NSX se pueden proteger contra
(220/690 Vca) sistemas de distribucin alimentados por generadores de motor los defectos de aislamiento agregando un bloque Vigi o un rel
cables de gran longitud en sistemas IT y TN. Vigirex.
pg. 1/14
Proteccin La gama Compact NSX incluye versiones para proteger

las aplicaciones de motores:
proteccin ms completa contra sobrecargas y cortocircuitos
con proteccin adicional especca de motores (desequilibrio de
de motores proteccin bsica contra cortocircuitos con unidades de control fase, rotor bloqueado, falta de carga y arranque prolongado) con
magnticas MA o la versin electrnica Micrologic 1-M, combina- unidades de control Micrologic 6 E-M. Estas versiones tambin
(220/690 Vca) da con un rel externo para ofrecer proteccin trmica ofrecen comunicacin, medida y asistencia en el funcionamiento.
proteccin contra sobrecargas, cortocircuitos y desequilibrio La excepcional capacidad de limitacin de los interruptores auto-
pg. 1/36 o prdida de fase con las unidades de control Micrologic 2-M mticos Compact NSX ofrece automticamente una coordinacin
de tipo 2 con el arrancador del motor, segn lo estipulado en la
norma IEC 60947-4-1.
Proteccin de Aplicaciones especiales :

La gama Compact NSX ofrece una serie de versiones para aplica-
Para todas estas aplicaciones, los interruptores automticos de
la gama Compact NSX ofrecen un seccionamiento con corte
aplicaciones ciones de proteccin especiales: plenamente aparente y estn indicados para el aislamiento segn
especiales conexin a la red de distribucin pblica. las normas IEC 60947-1 y 2.
generadores.
proteccin de mquinas.
pg. 1/50 con:
cumplimiento de las normas internacionales IEC 60947-2
y UL 508 / CSA 22-2 N14
cumplimiento de la norma estadounidense UL 489
instalacin en envolventes universales y funcionales.
sistemas de 16 Hz 2/3.
sistemas de 400 Hz.
Control Se encuentra disponible una versin de interruptor seccionador Para obtener informacin sobre las dems gamas de interruptores
de los interruptores Compact NSX para el control y el aislamiento seccionadores, consulte los catlogos Interpact y Fupact.
y aislamiento de circuitos.
con interrupto- Todas las funciones adicionales de los interruptores automti-
cos Compact NSX se pueden combinar con la funcin bsica
res seccionado- de interruptor seccionador, incluidas las siguientes:
res proteccin diferencial
mando motorizado
ampermetro, etc.
pg. 1/58
Inversores Para garantizar un suministro de alimentacin continuo,

algunas instalaciones elctricas se conectan a dos fuentes
Un sistema de inversin de redes puede ser:
manual con enclavamiento de aparatos mecnico
de redes de alimentacin: con mando motorizado y enclavamiento de aparatos mecnico
una fuente normal y/o motorizado
una fuente auxiliar para que la instalacin reciba alimentacin automtico asociando un automatismo para gestionar el cambio
pg. 1/62 cuando la fuente normal no se encuentre disponible. de una fuente a otra en funcin de parmetros externos.
Un sistema de enclavamiento mecnico y/o elctrico entre dos
interruptores automticos o interruptores seccionadores evita
cualquier riesgo de conexin paralela de las fuentes durante el
cambio.
1/3
1 Introduccin
Caractersticas generales de la gama Compact NSX
Conformidad con las normas

Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX y los auxiliares cumplen las siguientes
normas:
recomendaciones internacionales:
IEC 60947-1: normas generales
IEC 60947-2: interruptores automticos
IEC 60947-3: interruptores seccionadores
IEC 60947-4: contactores y arrancadores
IEC 60947-5.1 y siguientes: aparatos de circuitos de control y elementos de conmuta-
cin; componentes de control automtico
Normas europeas (EN 60947-1 y EN 60947-2) y las normas nacionales correspon-
dientes:
Francia NF
Alemania VDE
Reino Unido BS
Australia AS
Italia CEI
las especicaciones de las empresas de clasicacin marina (Veritas, Lloyd's Register
of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.), norma NF C 79-130 y las recomendaciones reali-
zadas por la organizacin CNOMO para la proteccin de las mquinas-herramientas.
Caractersticas normalizadas indicadas en la placa de
especicaciones: Para conocer las normas UL de Estados Unidos, CSA de Canad, NOM de Mxico y
1 Tipo de aparato: calibre y clase de poder de corte. JIS de Japn, consultarnos.
2 Ui: tensin asignada de aislamiento.
3 Uimp: tensin asignada soportada al impulso.
4 Ics: poder de corte de servicio asignado en cortocircuito.
Grado de polucin
5 Icu: poder de corte ltimo en cortocircuito segn la tensin Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX cuentan con la certicacin para su funcio-
de empleo Ue. namiento en entornos de grado de contaminacin III, tal y como denen las normas
6 Ue: tensin de funcionamiento.
7 Etiqueta de color que indica el tipo de poder de corte.
IEC 60947-1 y 60664-1 (entornos industriales).
8 Smbolo de interruptor seccionador.
9 Norma de referencia. Tropicalizacin
10 Principales normas que cumple el aparato.
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX han superado con xito las pruebas deni-
Nota: si el interruptor automtico dispone de mando rotativo das por las siguientes normas sobre condiciones atmosfricas extremas:
prolongado, la puerta debe abrirse para acceder a la placa de IEC 60068-2-1: fro seco (-55C)
caractersticas.
IEC 60068-2-2: calor seco (+85C)
IEC 60068-2-30: calor hmedo (humedad relativa del 95% a 55C)
IEC 60068-2-52 nivel de gravedad 2: bruma salina.
Medio ambiente
Compact NSX respeta la directiva medioambiental europea EC/2002/95 relativa a la
restriccin de sustancias peligrosas (RoHS).
Se han preparado perles medioambientales de los productos (PEP), que describen el
impacto medioambiental de cada producto a lo largo de su ciclo de vida, desde la fase
de produccin hasta el n de la vida til.
Todos los centros de produccin de Compact NSX han establecido un sistema de
gestin medioambiental que cuenta con la certicacin ISO 14001.
Cada fbrica supervisa el impacto de sus procesos de produccin. Se realizan todos
los esfuerzos posibles para evitar la contaminacin y reducir el consumo de recursos
naturales.
Temperatura ambiente
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX se pueden utilizar entre -25C y +70C.
A temperaturas superiores a 40C (65C para los interruptores destinados a la protec-
cin de salidas de motor), es necesario tener en cuenta los decalajes por temperatura
contemplados en las tablas (pg. 2/9).
Los interruptores elctricos debern ponerse en servicio en condiciones normales de
temperatura ambiente de funcionamiento. De forma excepcional, el interruptor auto-
mtico puede ponerse en servicio cuando la temperatura ambiente se encuentre entre
-35C y -25C.
El rango de temperatura de almacenamiento permisible para los interruptores autom-
ticos Compact NSX en su embalaje original es de -50C (1) y +85C.
(1) -40C en el caso de las unidades de control Micrologic con pantalla LCD.
1/4
Introduccin 1
Caractersticas generales de la gama Compact NSX (continuacin)
Compatibilidad electromagntica
Los aparatos Compact NSX estn protegidos contra lo siguiente:
sobretensiones producidas por conmutacin de circuitos (por ejemplo, circuitos de
iluminacin)
sobretensiones producidas por perturbaciones atmosfricas
los aparatos emisores de ondas de radio, como telfonos mviles, radios, walkie-
talkies, radares, etc.
las descargas electrostticas producidas por los usuarios.
Los niveles de inmunidad de Compact NSX cumplen las normas indicadas a continuacin.
IEC/EN 60947-2: Aparamenta de baja tensin, parte 2: Interruptores automticos:
Anexo F: Pruebas de inmunidad para interruptores automticos con proteccin
electrnica
Anexo B: Pruebas de inmunidad de proteccin de corriente residual
IEC/EN 61000-4-2: Pruebas de inmunidad de descargas electrostticas
IEC/EN 61000-4-3: Pruebas de inmunidad de campos radiados, de radiofrecuencia,
electromagnticos
IEC/EN 61000-4-4: Pruebas de inmunidad de rfagas/transitorios elctricos rpidos
IEC/EN 61000-4-5: Pruebas de inmunidad de sobretensiones
IEC/EN 61000-4-6: Pruebas de inmunidad a las perturbaciones conducidas e induci-
das por campos de radiofrecuencia
CISPR 11: Lmites y mtodos de medida de caractersticas de perturbaciones electro-
magnticas de equipos industriales, cientcos y de radiofrecuencia mdicos (ISM).
Selectividad
Compact NSX refuerza el concepto de selectividad de la gama Compact NS gracias a
la rapidez de clculo de las unidades de control Micrologic.
Ahora es posible la selectividad total entre NSX100 y los interruptores automticos Multi
9 de y 63 A (ver pg. 1/9).
Seccionamiento con corte plenamente aparente

Todos los interruptores automticos Compact NSX estn indicados para el secciona-
miento, tal y como se dene en la norma IEC 60947-2:
La posicin de seccionamiento corresponde a la posicin O (OFF).
La maneta no puede indicar la posicin OFF a menos que los contactos se encuen-
tren efectivamente abiertos.
No se pueden instalar cerraduras, a menos que los contactos estn abiertos.
La instalacin de un mando rotatorio o una mando motorizado no altera la abilidad del
sistema de posicin e sealizacin.
Grado de proteccin La funcin de seccionamiento cuenta con la certicacin de pruebas que garantizan lo
Segn normas IEC 60529 (grado de proteccin IP) e siguiente:
IEC 62262 (proteccin IK contra impactos mecnicos la abilidad mecnica del sistema de sealizacin de posicin
externos). la ausencia de corrientes de fuga
capacidad de resistencia a las sobretensiones entre las conexiones aguas arriba y
Aparato desnudo con cubrebornes aguas abajo.
Mando maneta: IP40, IK07. La posicin disparada no asegura el aislamiento con la sealizacin de contacto positi-
Mando rotativo directo estndar/VDE: IP40 IK07 va. nicamente se garantiza el aislamiento con la posicin OFF.
Interruptor automtico instalado en un cuadro elctrico
Mando maneta: IP40, IK07.
Instalacin en cuadros de distribucin clase II
Mando rotativo directo: Todos los interruptores automticos Compact NSX son aparatos clase II en su cara de-
estndar/VDE: IP40, IK07 lantera. Se pueden instalar a travs de la puerta de cuadros de distribucin de clase II
CCM: IP43 IK07 (segn las normas IEC 61140 y 60664-1) sin que se degrade el aislamiento del cuadro
CNOMO: IP54 IK08 de distribucin. La instalacin no requiere ninguna operacin especial, incluso cuando
Mando rotativo prolongado: IP56 IK08 el interruptor automtico est equipado con un mando rotativo o una mando motorizado.
Con mando elctrico: IP40 IK07.
1/5
1 Introduccin
Compact NSX de 100 a 630 A
Caractersticas comunes
Tensiones nominales
Tensin asignada de aislamiento (V) Ui 800
Tensin asignada soportada Uimp 8
al impulso (kV)
Tensin asignada de empleo (V) Ue 50/60 Hz ca 690
Aptitud para el seccionamiento IEC/EN 60947-2 s
Categora de empleo A
Grado de polucin IEC 60664-1 3
Interruptores automticos
Tipo de poder de corte
Caractersticas elctricas segn IEC 60947-2
Corriente nominal (A) In 40C
Nmero de polos
Poder de corte ltimo (kA ef)
Compact NSX100/160/250. lcu 50/60 Hz ca 220/240 V
380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
Poder de corte en servicio (kA ef)
lcs 50/60 Hz ca 220/240 V
380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
Endurancia (ciclos C-A) Mecnica
Elctrica 440 V In/2
In
690 V In/2
In
Caractersticas elctricas segn Nema AB1
Poder de corte (kA ef) 50/60 Hz ca 240 V
480 V
600 V
Caractersticas elctricas segn UL 508
Poder de corte (kA ef) 50/60 Hz ca 240 V
480 V
600 V
Compact NSX400/630.
Proteccin y medida
Proteccin contra cortocircuitos Magntica nicamente
Proteccin contra sobrecargas/cortocircuitos Magnetotrmica
Electrnica
con proteccin
de neutro (Off-0.5-1-OSN) (1)
con proteccin de defecto a tierra
con selectividad (ZSI) (2)
Pantalla de visualizacin/medidas I, U, f, P, E, THD/medida de corriente interrumpida
Opciones Pantalla FDM sobre puerta
Contadores
Histricos y alarmas
Com. de medida
Com. de control/estado del aparato
Proteccin diferencial Mediante bloque Vigi
Mediante rel Vigirex
Instalacin/conexiones
Dimensiones y pesos
Dimensiones (mm) L H P Fija, conexiones frontales 2/3P
4P
Peso (kg) Fija, conexiones frontales 2/3P
(1) OSN: Proteccin de neutro sobredimensionado para neutros
4P
que transporten altas corrientes (por ejemplo, armnicos de
tercer orden). Conexiones
(2) ZSI: Enclavamiento selectivo de zona con cables de control. Terminales de conexin Paso polar Con/sin espacia-
(3) Interruptor automtico 2P en caja 3P para tipo F, nicamente dores
con unidad de control magnetotrmica. Cables de Cu o Al Seccin mm
1/6
Introduccin 1
Compact NSX de 100 a 630 A (continuacin)
Control
Manual Con maneta p
Con mando rotativo directo o prolongado p
Elctrico Con telemando p
Versiones
Fijo p
Extrable Con zcalo p
Con chasis p
NSX100 NS 160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630
F N H S L F N H S L F N H S L N H S L N H S L
100 160 250 400 630

2 (3), 3, 4 2 (3), 3, 4 2 (3), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 85 100 120 150
36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 42 65 90 130
25 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 50 65 70 30 50 65 70
22 35 35 40 50 22 35 35 40 50 22 35 35 40 50 22 35 40 50 22 35 40 50
8 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 10 20 25 35 10 20 25 35
85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 85 100 120 150
36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 42 65 90 130
12,5 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 36 50 65 70 30 50 65 70 30 50 65 70
11 35 35 40 50 22 35 35 40 50 22 35 35 40 50 11 11 12 12 11 11 12 12
4 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 8 10 10 15 20 10 10 12 12 10 10 12 12
50.000 40.000 20.000 15.000 15.000
50.000 20.000 20.000 12.000 8.000
30.000 10.000 10.000 6.000 4.000
20.000 15.000 10.000 6.000 6.000
10.000 7.500 5.000 3.000 2.000
85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 90 100 120 150 85 100 120 150 85 100 120 150
35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 35 50 65 90 130 42 65 90 130 42 65 90 130
8 20 35 40 50 20 20 35 40 50 20 20 35 40 50 20 35 40 50 20 35 40 50
85 85 85 - - 85 85 85 - - 85 85 85 - - 85 85 - - 85 85 - -
25 50 65 - - 35 50 65 - - 35 50 65 - - 50 65 - - 50 65 - -
10 10 10 - - 10 10 10 - - 15 15 15 - - 20 20 - - 20 20 - -
p p p p p
p p p - -
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
p p p p p
105 161 86 105 161 86 105 161 86 140 225 110 140 225 110
140 161 86 140 161 86 140 161 86 185 255 110 185 255 110
2,05 2,2 2,4 6,05 6,2
2,4 2,6 2,8 7,90 8,13
35/45 mm 35/45 mm 35/45 mm 45/52,5 mm 45/52,5 mm

45/70 mm 45/70 mm
300 300 300 4 240 4 240
1/7
1 Introduccin
Unidades de control Compact NSX
Con las unidades de control Micrologic, el Unidad de control electrnica o magnetotrmica?

Compact NSX da un paso hacia adelante.
Las unidades de control magnetotrmicas protegen contra sobreintensidades
Gracias a la nueva generacin de sensores y su
y cortocircuitos mediante tcnicas probadas. Pero actualmente, la optimizacin de las
capacidad de procesamiento, la proteccin se instalaciones y la eciencia energtica se han convertido en factores decisivos y las
mejora an ms. Tambin ofrece medicin e unidades de control electrnicas que ofrecen funciones de proteccin ms avanzadas
informacin de funcionamiento de la instalacin. y combinadas con mediciones son la mejor opcin para responder a estas necesida-
des.
Las unidades de control electrnicas Micrologic combinan un control reejo y un
Numerosas funciones de seguridad funcionamiento inteligente. Gracias a la electrnica digital, las unidades de control
ahora son ms rpidas, precisas y ables. La amplia gama de regulaciones facilitan las
Tornillos con limitacin de par
ampliaciones de las instalaciones. Las unidades de control Micrologic, diseadas con
Estos tornillos jan la unidad de control al interruptor au- funciones de procesamiento, pueden ofrecer informacin de medida y ayuda a la ex-
tomtico. Cuando se llega al par de apriete correcto, se plotacin de las instalaciones. Con esta informacin, los usuarios pueden evitar o tratar
rompe la cabezal del tornillo. Con el par ptimo se evita con ms ecacia las perturbaciones y pueden desempear una funcin ms activa en
cualquier riesgo de aumento de temperatura. Siendo el funcionamiento del sistema. Pueden gestionar la instalacin, anticiparse a eventos
innecesarias las llaves dinamomtricas. y planicar cualquier reparacin necesaria.
Cambio sencillo y seguro de las unidades de control
Todas las unidades de control son intercambiables, sin Mediciones precisas para una proteccin completa
cableado. Un sistema de proteccin mecnico frente a Los aparatos Compact NSX se benecian de la amplia experiencia adquirida desde el
desajustes hace que sea imposible montar una unidad lanzamiento de los interruptores automticos Masterpact NW equipados con unidades
de control en un interruptor automtico de calibre inferior. de control Micrologic.
LED "Ready" (preparado) para una autoevaluacin Desde 40 amperios hasta las corrientes de cortocircuito, ofrecen una excelente preci-
continua sin de medida. Esto es posible mediante una nueva generacin de transformadores
de corriente que combinan sensores de "ncleo de hierro" para los componentes
El LED en la parte frontal de la unidad de control electr- electrnicos autoalimentados y sensores de "ncleo de aire" (toroidales Rogowski) para
nica indica el resultado de los autotests del sistema de la medida.
medida y la liberacin del control. Siempre Las funciones de proteccin se gestionan mediante un componente ASIC independien-
que el LED verde est parpadeando, los enlaces entre te de las funciones de medida. Esta independencia garantiza la inmunidad ante las
los interruptores automticos, los elementos electrnicos perturbaciones conducidas y radiadas y un alto nivel de abilidad.
de procesamiento y la apertura Mitop se encuentran
operativos. El interruptor automtico est listo para
proteger. No se necesita un kit de prueba. Slo es nece-
Sistemas de control coordinados
saria una corriente mnima de 15 a 50 A, en funcin del Compact NSX detecta los defectos an ms rpido y el tiempo de control se reduce.
aparato, para esta funcin de sealizacin. Protege mejor la instalacin y limita el desgaste de los contactos.
Un sistema de regulacin doble patentado para las
funciones de proteccin.
Se encuentra disponible en Micrologic 5/6 y el sistema
consta de lo siguiente:
una primera regulacin, sin alimentacin y con un
indicador, establece el valor mximo
una segunda regulacin, que se realiza a travs de
teclado o de forma remota, establece con precisin la
regulacin.
La segunda regulacin no puede superar la primera. Se
puede leer directamente en la pantalla Micrologic, hasta
un amperio y una fraccin de un segundo.
E.g. NSX100F Ir Isd Ii Umbral disparo reflejo Icu
Corrientes 100 A 1000 A N1500 A N2400 A 36000 A

L
Temporizacin 1 - 200 s
Funcin de Sobrecarga:
proteccin disparo lento S or S0
inversamente 20 - 500 ms
proporcional al Corta duracin:
cortocircuito impedante; I
nivel de corriente
disparo instantneo con 10 - 50 ms
temporizacin ajustable Instantneo:
S o fija S0 deteccin ultrarrpida con
temporizacin micro para < 5 ms
la selectividad Reflejo:
deteccin ultrarrpida
basada en energa con
limitacin de corriente principal (1)
(1) Este sistema de control es completamente independiente de la unidad de control.

Como acciona directamente el mecanismo, precede a la unidad de control en algunos milisegundos.
1/8
Introduccin 1
Unidades de control Compact NSX (continuacin)
Selectividad incomparable
Selectividad
NS400 NSX250
Compact NSX ofrece la mxima continuidad del servicio, as como ahorro, mediante un
nivel sin igual de selectividad:
gracias a la alta precisin en las medidas, la selectividad de sobrecargas se garantiza
incluso entre calibres prximos
en caso de defectos graves, gracias al rpido procesamiento de las unidades de con-
trol Micrologic el aparato aguas arriba puede anticipar la reaccin del que se encuentra
NS160 NSX100
aguas abajo. El interruptor aguas arriba ajusta la temporizacin del control para ofrecer
(100 A)
selectividad
para defectos muy altos, la energa del arco disipada por el cortocircuito en el inte-
rruptor aguas abajo produce un control reejo. La corriente que ve el aparato aguas
Multi 9 arriba se limita de forma signicativa. La energa no es suciente para producir el
control, por lo que la selectividad se mantiene, independientemente de la corriente del
cortocircuito.
Compact NSX100 con Micrologic para obtener selectividad
total con aparatos Multi 9 hasta y 63 A o C60. La mejor coordi- Para una selectividad total en toda la gama de posibles defectos, desde el largo retardo
nacin entre las funciones de proteccin reduce la diferencia en Ir hasta la ltima corriente de cortocircuito Icu, se debe mantener una proporcin de
las especicaciones necesarias para la selectividad total. 2,5 entre los calibres de los aparatos aguas arriba y aguas abajo. Esta proporcin es
necesaria para garantizar el control reejo selectivo en los cortocircuitos elevados.
Identificacin de las unidades de control electrnico Micrologic

Proteccin Calibre Medida Aplicaciones
1: I 2: NSX100/160/250 A: Ampermetro Distribucin, si no...

2: LS0I G: Generador
5: LSI M: Motores
6: LSIG Z: 16 Hz 2/3
I: Instantneo 3: NSX400/630 E: Energa

L: Largo retardo
S0: Corto retardo (1)
(temporizacin ja)
S: Corto retardo
G: Defecto a tierra
Ejemplos
Micrologic 1.3 Instantneo nicamente 400 630 A Distribucin
Micrologic 2.3 LS0I 400 630 A Distribucin
Micrologic 5.2 A LSI 100, 160 250 A Ampermetro Distribucin
Micrologic 6.3 E-M LSIG 400 630 A Energa Motor
(1) La proteccin LS0I es estndar en Micrologic 2. Para garantizar la selectividad, ofrece proteccin a corto retardo S0 con una
temporizacin no ajustable y proteccin instantnea.
1/9
1 Introduccin
Descripcin general de las unidades de control para Compact NSX
Compact NSX ofrece una gama de unidades Tipo de proteccin y aplicaciones

de control intercambiables, tanto magnticas,
MA magntico TM-D magnetotrmico
magnetotrmicas o electrnicas. Las versiones
5 y 6 de la unidad de control electrnica ofrecen
comunicacin y medida. Mediante sensores
y la inteligencia Micrologic, el Compact NSX
proporciona toda la informacin necesaria para
gestionar la instalacin elctrica y optimizar la
energa.
Distribucin
Motor Generadores
Interruptores automticos y unidades de control

Compact NSX100/160/250
MA Motor TM-D Distribucin

TM-G Generadores
1.3-M Motor
Compact NSX400/630
Regulaciones e indicaciones
Regulacin Regulacin
Umbrales de regulacin de los amperios con los Umbrales de regulacin de los amperios
selectores con los selectores
Temporizacin no ajustable Temporizacin no ajustable
1/10
Introduccin 1
(continuacin)
Micrologic 2 electrnica Unidades de control electrnicas Micrologic 5 / 6 A E

5AE 6AE 6 E-M
clase
Distribucin Distribucin Distribucin Motores

Generadores y generadores y generadores
Motores (slo I)
Motores
A: funciones de medida de intensidad
E: funciones de medida energtica y de intensidad.
2.2 Distribucin 5.2 A Distribucin y generadores 6.2 A Distribucin y generadores 6.2 E-M Motores
2.2-G Generadores 5.2 E Distribucin y generadores 6.2 E Distribucin y generadores
2.2-M Motores 5.2 A-Z Redes de 16 Hz 2/3
Micrologic 6.3 E-M
Ready
>30A >95
Alarm
% T
380
350 400
320 440 Ir Cl. Isd Iunbal tunbal Ijam tjam Ig tg
280 470
250 500
500
Ir (A) Ii=6500A
A IEC60947-4-1
.5 .6 .7 Class
.4 .8
N 1/A 2/B 3/C test
.3 .9
.2 OFF Mode OK Ir 7.2Ir Isd
Ig (x In)
2.3 Distribucin 5.3 A Distribucin y generadores 6.3 A Distribucin y generadores 6.3 E-M Motores
1.3-M Motores (slo I) 5.3 E Distribucin y generadores 6.3 E Distribucin y generadores
2.3-M Motores 5.3 A-Z Redes de 16 Hz 2/3
Alarm History 2/3
Total reactive
Power
Date: 07 May 2007
Time: 10:28:03.01 PM
ESC OK
Regulacin Regulacin
Umbrales de regulacin de Umbral de regulacin Conexin a la pantalla de visualiza-
los amperios mediante los selectores en los amperios cin del cuadro de distribucin
Temporizacin no ajustable
Preparado
Alarma
Ajuste preciso a travs del teclado

Indicaciones frontales
0.5
Temporizaciones ajustables
Conector de prueba
Preparado
Alarma
Autoevaluacin
Comunicacin a Modbus
Indicaciones frontales
Conector de prueba
Autoevaluacin
1/11
1 Introduccin
(continuacin)
Las unidades de control de Micrologic 5 / 6 A y las
unidades de control E se pueden combinar
con la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121.
Cuando ambos se conectan a travs de cable con
conectores RJ45, la combinacin ofrece todas
las funciones de Power Meter adems de todos
los parmetros necesarios para supervisar la
instalacin elctrica.
Micrologic (A) Ampermetro
Medidas I
Medida de corriente
Corrientes de fase y neutro I1, I2, I3, IN
Corriente media de las 3 fases Iavg
Corriente mxima de las tres fases Imx.
Corriente de defecto a tierra Ig
(Micrologic 6,2 / 6,3A)
Medidas mximas y mnimas de I
Asistencia en el funcionamiento
y el mantenimiento
Indicaciones, alarmas e historiales

Sealizacin de los tipos de defectos
Alarmas de umbrales de alarma alta/baja enlazada
a las medidas de I
Historiales de disparo, de alarmas y de funcionamiento
Tablas con sealizacin de hora para regulaciones
y medidas mximas
Indicadores de mantenimiento
Contadores de funcionamiento, control y alarma
Contador de horas de funcionamiento
Desgaste de contacto
Perl de carga e imagen trmica
Comunicacin
Modbus con bloque adicional
1/12
Introduccin 1
(continuacin)
Micrologic (E) Energa
Medidas de I, U, f, P, E, THD
Medidas de corriente
Corrientes de fase y neutro I1, I2, I3, IN
Corriente media de las 3 fases Iavg
Corriente mxima de las tres fases Imx.
Corriente de defecto a tierra Ig (Micrologic 6,2 / 6,3 A)
Medidas mximas y mnimas de I
Desequilibrio de corriente entre fases
Medidas de la tensin
Tensin entre fases (U) y fase a neutro (V)
Tensiones medias Uavg, Vavg
Desequilibrio de tensin Ph-Ph (U) y Ph-N (V)
Medidas de frecuencia
Frecuencia (f)
Indicadores de calidad de la alimentacin
Distorsin de armnicos (THD) de corriente y tensin
Medidas de alimentacin
Alimentacin activa, reactiva y aparente, total y por
fase
Factor de alimentacin y cos
Maxmetros/minmetros
Para todas las mediciones de I, U, f, P, E
Intensidad absorbida y mediciones de alimentacin
Valores de demanda, total y por fase
Demanda mxima
Medidas de energa
Energa activa, reactiva y aparente, total y por fase
Asistencia en el funcionamiento
y el mantenimiento
Indicaciones, alarmas e historiales

Sealizacin de los tipos de defectos
Alarmas de umbrales alto/bajo, enlazadas con medicio-
nes de I, U, f, P, E
Historiales de disparo, de alarmas y de funcionamiento
Tablas con sealizacin de hora para regulaciones y
medidas mximas de I, U, f, P, E
Contadores de funcionamiento, control y alarma
Contador de horas de funcionamiento
Perl de carga e imagen trmica
Comunicacin
Modbus con bloque adicional
1/13
1 Proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin
Unidades de control magnticas MA o magnetotrmicas TM
Las unidades de control magnticas MA Unidades de control magnetotrmicas TM-D y TM-G

y magnetotrmicas TM se pueden utilizar
Los interruptores automticos equipados con unidades de control magnetotrmicas
en interruptores automticos Compact
se utilizan principalmente en las aplicaciones de distribucin elctrica comercial e
NSX100/160/250 con niveles de poder de industrial:
corte F/H/N/S/L. TM-D, para la proteccin de sistemas de distribucin alimentados por transformado-
Las unidades de control TM estn disponibles res
TM-G, para generadores (corrientes de cortocircuito ms bajas que con transfor-
en 2 modelos:
madores) y sistemas de distribucin con grandes longitudes de cable (corrientes de
TM-D, para la proteccin de los circuitos de defecto limitadas por la impedancia del cable).
distribucin Proteccin
TM-G, para la proteccin de generadores Proteccin trmica (Ir)
o cables de gran longitud.
Proteccin trmica contra las sobrecargas basada en una pletina bimetlica que pro-
Se pueden aadir bloques Vigi o rels Vigirex a porciona una curva de tiempo inversa I2t, correspondiente a un lmite de aumento de la
todos los interruptores automticos para ofrecer temperatura. Superado este lmite, la deformacin de la pletina dispara el mecanismo
proteccin externa contra las fugas a tierra. de funcionamiento del interruptor automtico.
Esta proteccin funciona de acuerdo con:
Ir que se puede ajustar en amp. de 0,7 a 1 veces el calibre de la unidad de control
(de 16 A a 250 A), correspondiente a las regulaciones de 11 a 250 A para
el rango de unidades de control
un retardo no regulable, denido para garantizar la proteccin de los cables.
Proteccin magntica (Im)
Proteccin contra los cortocircuitos con una Im de activacin ja o regulable con dispa-
ro instantneo si se supera el lmite.
TM-D: activacin ja, Im, para calibres de 16 a 160 A y regulable de 5 a 10 In para
calibres de 200 y 250 A
activacin ja para calibres de 16 a 630 A.
Proteccin contra los defectos de aislamiento
Son posibles dos soluciones aadiendo:
un bloque Vigi que acta directamente en la unidad de control del interruptor automtico
un rel Vigirex conectado a una bobina de tensin MN o MX.
Modelos de proteccin
3 polos:
3P 3R: bloque de corte de 3 polos (3P) con proteccin en los 3 polos (3R)
3P 2R: bloque de corte de 3 polos (3P) con proteccin en 2 polos (2R).
4 polos:
4P 3R: bloque de corte de 4 polos (4P) con proteccin en 3 polos (3R).
4P 4R: bloque de corte de 4 polos (4P) con proteccin en los 4 polos (mismo umbral
para fases y neutro).
Unidades de control magnticas MA

En las aplicaciones de distribucin, los interruptores automticos equipados con unida-
des de control slo magnticas MA se utilizan para:
proteccin contra los cortocircuitos de devanados secundarios de transformadores de
BT/BT con proteccin contra las sobrecargas en el lado primario.
como alternativa a un interruptor-seccionador en la cabecera de un cuadro de distri-
bucin a n de ofrecer proteccin contra los cortocircuitos.
Su uso principal es sin embargo para las aplicaciones de proteccin de motores, junto con
un rel trmico y un contactor o arrancador (ver "Proteccin de motores", pg. 1/36).
Proteccin

Proteccin contra los cortocircuitos con una Im regulable que provoca el disparo instan-
tneo si se supera.
Im = In ... regulacin en amp. en un selector de regulacin para cubrir el rango
de 6 a 14 In para calibres de 2,5 a 100 A o de 9 a 14 In para calibres de 150 a 220 A.
Modelos de proteccin
3 polos (3P 3R): bloque de corte de 3 polos (3P) con proteccin en los 3 polos (3R).
4 polos (4P 3R): bloque de corte de 4 polos (4P) con proteccin en 3 polos (3R).
Nota: todas las unidades de control tienen una tapa transparente

precintable que protege el acceso a los selectores de ajuste.
1/14
Proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin 1
Unidades de control magnticas MA o magnetotrmicas TM (continuacin)
Unidades de control TM16D a 250D TM16G a 63G

magnetotrmicas
Especificaciones (A) In a 40C (1) 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p p p p p p p - - - - p p p p
Compact NSX160 - - p p p p p p p p - - - p p p
Compact NSX250 - - - - - p p p p p p p - - p p
Proteccin trmica
Rearme (A) Ir = In ... regulable en amps. desde 0,7 hasta 1 In
control entre
1,05 y 1,20 Ir
Temporizacin (s) tr no regulable no regulable
tr a 1,5 In 120 a 400 120 a 400
tr a 6 Ir 15 -
Proteccin magntica
Rearme (A) Im jo regulable jo
precisin 20% Compact NSX100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125
Compact NSX160/250 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 1250 1250 5 a 10 In 63 80 80 125
Temporizacin tm jo
Proteccin neutra
Neutro sin proteccin 4P 3D sin proteccin sin versin 4P3D
Neutro pleno 4P 4D 1 Ir 1 Ir
protegido
Unidades de control magntico MA 2,5 a 220
Especificaciones (A) In a 65C 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p p p p p - -
Compact NSX160 - - - p p p p -
Compact NSX250 - - - - - p p p
Proteccin magntica instantnea
Rearme (A) Im = In ... regulable en amps. regulable en amps. desde 9
precisin 20% de 6 a 14 In (9 regulaciones) hasta 14 In
Temporizacin (ms) tm ninguno
(1) Para temperaturas superiores a 40C, las caractersticas de proteccin trmica se modican. Consulte la tabla de reduccin de temperatura.
1/15
Unidades de control Micrologic 2 y 1.3-M
Las unidades de control Micrologic 2 se pueden Micrologic 2

utilizar en interruptores automticos NSX100 a
Preparado
Alarma
630 con niveles de poder de corte F/H/N/S/L.
Proporcionan:
proteccin estndar en los cables de
distribucin
Los interruptores automticos equipados con unidades de control Micrologic 2 se pue-
sealizacin de: den utilizar para proteger los sistemas de distribucin alimentados con transformado-
res. Para generadores y cables largos, las unidades de control Micrologic 2-G ofrecen
sobrecargas (a travs de LED) soluciones mejor adaptadas (ver pg. 1/50).
control por sobrecarga (a travs del bloque Proteccin
de rel SDx). La conguracin se realiza usando los selectores de regulacin con posibilidad
de regulacin precisa.
Los interruptores automticos equipados
con unidades de control Micrologic 1.3-M, sin Sobrecargas: Proteccin largo retardo (Ir)
proteccin trmica, se utilizan en determinadas Proteccin inversa contra las sobrecargas con umbral regulable Ir por selector y tempo-
aplicaciones para sustituir a los interruptores- rizacin no regulable tr.
seccionadores en la cabecera de los cuadros de Cortocircuitos: Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin fija (Isd)
distribucin. Las unidades de control Micrologic
Proteccin con umbral regulable Isd. El disparo se produce despus de un breve inter-
1.3-M estn dedicadas a los interruptores valo utilizado para permitir la selectividad con el aparato aguas abajo.
automticos Compact NSX400/630 A.
Cortocircuitos: Proteccin instantnea no regulable
Proteccin instantnea contra los cortocircuitos ja.
Proteccin de neutro
En los interruptores automticos de 3 polos, el neutro protegido no es posible.
En los interruptores automticos de 4 polos, la proteccin del neutro se puede ajustar
con un interruptor de tres posiciones:
4P 3R: neutro no protegido
4P 3R + N/2: neutro protegido a la mitad del valor de fase, es decir, 0,5 Ir
4P 4R: neutro pleno protegido a Ir.
Alarma
Preparado
Sealizaciones
Sealizaciones frontales
LED verde Ready parpadea lentamente cuando el interruptor automtico est listo
para disparar en caso de defecto.
LED naranja de prealarma de sobrecarga: se ilumina (jo) cuando I > 90% Ir
LED rojo de sobrecarga: jo cuando I > 105 % Ir
Bloque de rel de sealizacin remota SDx con su bornero.
Preparado
Alarma
Sealizaciones remotas
Se puede utilizar de forma remota una seal de control por sobrecarga instalando un
bloque de rel SDx dentro del interruptor automtico.
Este bloque recibe la seal de la unidad de control Micrologic a travs de un enlace
ptico para que est disponible en el bornero. La seal se elimina cuando se vuelve a
cerrar el interruptor automtico. Consulte la descripcin en la pg. 1/84.
Preparado
50A
Micrologic 1.3-M para proteccin magntica nicamente

Las unidades de control Micrologic 1.3-M proporcionan nicamente proteccin magn-
tica, mediante tecnologa electrnica. Estn dedicados a los interruptores 400/630 A de
3 polos (3P 3R) o de 4 polos con 3 polos protegidos (4P, 3R) y se utilizan en determi-
nadas aplicaciones para sustituir a los interruptores-seccionadores en cabecera de
Nota: todas las unidades de control incorporan una tapa trans- los cuadros de distribucin. Se utilizan especialmente en 3 polos para la proteccin de
parente precintable que protege el acceso a los selectores de motores, ver pg. 1/42.
regulacin.
1/16
Unidades de control Micrologic 2 y 1.3-M (continuacin)
Micrologic 2
Especificaciones (A) In a 40C (1) 40 100 160 250 400 630
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p - - - -
Compact NSX160 p p p - - -
Compact NSX250 p p p p - -
Compact NSX400 - - - p p -
Compact NSX630 - - - p p p Ii
L Largo retardo
Umbral de disparo (A) Io el valor depende del calibre de la unidad de control (In) en el regulador
Disparo entre In = 40 A Io = 18 18 20 23 25 28 32 36 40
1,05 y 1,20 Ir In = 100 A Io = 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100
In = 160 A Io = 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
In = 250 A (NSX250) Io = 100 110 125 140 160 175 200 225 250
In = 250 A (NSX400) Io = 70 100 125 140 160 175 200 225 250
In = 400 A Io = 160 180 200 230 250 280 320 360 400
In = 630 A Io = 250 280 320 350 400 450 500 570 630
Ir = Io ... 9 regulaciones nas de 0,9 a 1 (0,9 - 0,92 - 0,93 - 0,94 - 0,95 - 0,96 - 0,97 -
0,98 - 1) para cada valor de Io
Temporizacin (s) tr no regulable
precisin de 0 a -20% 1.5 Ir 400
6 Ir 16
7.2 Ir 11
Memoria trmica 20 minutos antes y despus del control
S0 Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin fija
Umbral de disparo (A) Isd = Ir ... 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
precisin 10 %
Temporizacin (ms) tsd no regulable
Tiempo mximo de sobrein- 20
tensidad
Duracin total de corte 80
I Proteccin instantnea
Umbral de disparo (A) li no regulable 600 1500 2400 3000 4800 6900
precisin 15 % Tiempo mximo de sobrein- 10 ms
tensidad
Duracin total de corte 50 ms para I > 1,5 Ii
(1) Si las unidades de control se utilizan en entornos de alta temperatura, la conguracin de Micrologic debe tener en cuenta los lmites trmicos
del interruptor automtico. Consulte la tabla de decalaje de temperatura.
Micrologic 1.3-M
Especificaciones (A) In a 65C 320 500
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX400 p -
Compact NSX630 p p
S Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin regulable
Umbral de disparo (A) Isd regulable directamente en amps.
precisin 15 % 9 regulaciones: 1.600, 1.920, 2.440, 9 regulaciones: 2500, 3000, 3500,
2.560, 2.880, 3.200, 3.520, 3.840, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500
4.160 A A
Tiempo mximo de sobrein- 20
tensidad
Duracin total de corte 60
Umbral de disparo (A) Ii no regulable 4800 6500
precisin 15 % Tiempo mximo de sobrein- 0
tensidad
Duracin total de corte 30 ms
1/17
Unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A o E
Las unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A Proteccin

(ampermetro) o E (energa) se pueden utilizar
Las regulaciones se pueden congurar de dos formas, usando los selectores o
en interruptores automticos NSX100 a 630
el teclado . El teclado se puede utilizar para realizar regulaciones nas en intervalos
con niveles de poder de corte F/H/N/S/L. Todos de 1 A por debajo del valor mximo denido por la regulacin del selector. El acceso a las
disponen de pantalla de visualizacin. modicaciones de las regulaciones a travs del teclado est protegido mediante una funcin
Ofrecen proteccin bsica LSI (Micrologic 5) o LSI de bloqueo que aparece en la pantalla y que se controla con un micro-contacto .
y proteccin de defecto a tierra G (Micrologic 6). El bloqueo se activa automticamente si el teclado no se utiliza durante 5 minutos. El acceso
al micro-contacto est protegido mediante una tapa transparente precintable. Con la tapa
Tambin ofrecen funciones de medida, alarma cerrada, sigue siendo posible mostrar las distintas regulaciones y medidas con el teclado.
y comunicacin. Sobrecargas: Proteccin de largo retardo (Ir)
Proteccin inversa contra las sobrecargas con umbral regulable Ir usando un selector o el
teclado para regulaciones nas. La temporizacin tr se ajusta con el teclado.
Preparado
Alarma
Cortocircuitos: Proteccin de corto retardo (Isd)

Proteccin contra los cortocircuitos con umbral regulable Isd y temporizacin regulable tsd,
con posibilidad de incluir parte de curva a tiempo inverso (I2t On).
Cortocircuitos: Proteccin instantnea (Ii)
Medicin Proteccin instantnea con umbral regulable Ii.
Visualizador
Ajustes Proteccin adicional de defecto a tierra (Ig) en Micrologic 6
Mantenimiento
Proteccin residual de defecto a tierra con umbral regulable Ig (con posicin Off) y tempori-
zacin regulable tg. Posibilidad de incluir parte de curva a tiempo inverso (I2t On).
Proteccin de neutro (4 polo)
En interruptores automticos de 4 polos, esta proteccin se puede ajustar a travs del
teclado:
Off: neutro no protegido
0,5: neutro protegido a la mitad del valor de fase, es decir, 0,5 Ir
Mens de la unidad de control. 1,0: neutro pleno protegido a Ir
OSN: neutro protegido sobredimensionado a 1,6 veces el valor de fase. Se utiliza cuando
Fallo Isd existe un alto nivel de armnicos de rango 3 (o mltiplos de 3) que se acumulan en el neutro
y crean una corriente elevada.
En este caso, el aparato se debe limitar a Ir = 0,63 In para la regulacin mxima de neutro
protegido de 1,6 Ir.
Con interruptores automticos de 3 polos, el neutro se puede proteger instalando un sen-
sor de neutro externo con la salida (T1, T2) conectada a la unidad de control.
Selectividad lgica (ZSI)
Fase defectuosa Corriente interrumpida Se puede utilizar un bornero ZSI para interconectar varias unidades de control Micrologic
a n de ofrecer selectividad lgica para la proteccin de corto retardo (Isd) y de defecto a
Visualizacin de la corriente interrumpida. tierra (Ig), sin temporizacin. Para los Compact NSX 100 a 250, la funcin ZSI se encuentra
disponible nicamente en relacin con el interruptor automtico aguas arriba (ZSI de salida).
Visualizacin del tipo de defecto

En disparo por defecto, se muestran el tipo de defecto (Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig), la fase en cues-
tin y la corriente interrumpida. Se necesita una fuente de alimentacin externa.
Sealizaciones
Preparado
Alarma
LED verde Ready: parpadea lentamente cuando el interruptor automtico est listo para
disparar en caso de defecto.
LED rojo de sobrecarga: jo cuando I > 105 % Ir
Sealizaciones remotas
Se puede utilizar un mdulo SDx instalado dentro del interruptor automtico para utilizar de
forma remota la siguiente informacin:
control por sobrecarga
prealarma de sobrecarga (Micrologic 5) o control por defecto a tierra (Micrologic 6).
Este bloque recibe la seal de la unidad de control Micrologic a travs de un enlace ptico
Bloque de rel de sealizacin remota SDx con su bornero. para que est disponible en el bornero. La seal se elimina cuando se vuelve a cerrar el
interruptor automtico.
Estas salidas se pueden volver a programar para asignarse a otros tipos de controles o alar-
precintable que protege el acceso a los selectores de regulacin.
mas. Este mdulo se describe detalladamente en la seccin que trata de los accesorios.
1/18
Unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A o E (continuacin)
Proteccin Unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A E

Especificaciones In a 40C (1) 40 100 160 250 400 630
(A)
Encendido
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p - - - -
Apagado
Compact NSX160 p p p - - -
Compact NSX250 p p p p - -
Compact NSX400 - - - - p -
Compact NSX630 - - - - p p
t
L Largo retardo
Umbral de disparo (A) Ir = ... regulacin de el valor depende del calibre de la unidad de control (In) y la regulacin
disparo entre selector en el selector
1,05 y 1,20 Ir In = 40 A Io = 18 18 20 23 25 28 32 36 40
In = 100 A Io = 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100
In = 160 A Io = 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
In = 250 A Io = 100 110 125 140 150 175 200 225 250
In = 400 A Io = 160 180 200 230 250 280 320 360 400
In = 630 A Io = 250 280 320 350 400 450 500 570 630
conguracin de Ajuste no en pasos de 1 A por debajo del valor mximo ajustado en el
teclado selector
Temporizacin (s) tr = ... conguracin de 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
precisin de 0 a -20 % teclado
1.5 Ir 15 25 50 100 200 400
6 Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
7.2 Ir 0.35 0.7 1.4 2.8 5.5 11
S Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin regulable
Umbral de disparo (A) Isd = ajuste de selector 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
precisin 10 % Ir ... Ajuste no en pasos de 0,5 Ir usando el teclado
Temporizacin (s) tsd = ... congu- I2Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
racin de I2On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
teclado
Tiempo mximo de sobreintensi- 20 80 140 230 350
dad (ms)
Duracin total de corte (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Umbral de disparo (A) Ii = In conguracin de Ajuste en pasos de 0,5 In en el rango de 1,5 In a:
precisin 15 % teclado 15 In (NSX100/160), 12 In (NSX250/400) o 11 In (NSX630)
Tiempo mximo de sobreinten- 10 ms
sidad
Duracin total de corte 50 ms para I > Ii
G Proteccin de defecto a tierra - para Micrologic 6 A o E
Umbral de disparo (A) Ig = In ajuste de selector
precisin 10 % In = 40 A 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Apagado
In > 40 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1 Apagado
Ajuste no en pasos de 0,05 A usando el teclado
Temporizacin (s) tg = ... congu- I2Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
racin de I2On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
teclado
Tiempo mximo de sobreintensi- 20 80 140 230 350
dad (ms)
Duracin total de corte (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Prueba Funcin Ig integrado
(1) Si las unidades de control se utilizan en entornos de alta temperatura, la conguracin de Micrologic debe tener en cuenta los lmites
trmicos del interruptor automtico. Consulte la tabla de reduccin de temperatura.
1/19
1 Funciones de Power Meter
Micrologic electrnica 5 / 6 A o E
Adems de las funciones de proteccin, las Las funciones de medida de las unidades de control Micrologic A y E son posibles gracias a la
unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 ofrecen todas inteligencia Micrologic y a la precisin de los sensores. Se tratan con un microprocesador que
las funciones de los productos Power Meter as funciona independientemente de las funciones de proteccin.
como la asistencia en el funcionamiento para el Visualizacin
interruptor automtico. Micrologic LCD
visualizacin de las regulaciones El usuario puede ver todas las regulaciones de proteccin y las medidas principales en la pantalla
LCD de la unidad de control.
funciones de medida: Micrologic A: medidas de corriente rms instantnea
Ampermetro (A) Micrologic E: medidas de alimentacin, tensin, frecuencia y energa, adems de las medidas
que ofrece la Micrologic A
Energa (E) Para que la visualizacin se encuentre disponible en todas las condiciones y aumente la comodidad
de funcionamiento, se recomienda utilizar una fuente de alimentacin externa para Micrologic A.
alarmas Es indispensable para:
historiales fechados y tablas de eventos ver defectos y medidas de corriente interrumpida
utilizar todas las funciones de Micrologic E (p. ej., medida de los valores de energa y baja
indicadores de mantenimiento potencia)
garantizar el funcionamiento del sistema de comunicacin.
comunicacin. La fuente de alimentacin externa se puede compartir con varios aparatos. Consulte la descrip-
cin en la pg. 1/32.
Pantalla de visualizacin FDM121
Se puede conectar una pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 a una unidad de control Micrologic
utilizando un cable prefabricado para mostrar todas las medidas en una pantalla. El resultado es
un verdadero Power Meter de 96 96 mm.
Adems de la informacin mostrada en la LCD Micrologic, la pantalla FDM121 muestra los valores
de demanda, calidad de alimentacin y medidas de mximos y mnimos junto con las alarmas,
historiales e indicadores de mantenimiento.
La pantalla de visualizacin FMD121 necesita una fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc. La unidad de
control Micrologic se alimenta con la misma fuente a travs del cable que la conecta al FDM121.
Pantalla LCD Micrologic integrada para mostrar la medida de Pantalla del PC
energa. Cuando el Micrologic, con o sin una pantalla de visualizacin para panel FDM121, se conecta a
una red de comunicacin, se puede acceder a toda la informacin a travs de un PC.
Main Menu Medidas
Quick View
Metering Medidas rms instantneas

Alarms
Las unidades de control Micrologic A y E muestran de forma continua el valor RMS de la corriente
Services
ms alta de las tres fases y el neutro (Imx). Los botones de navegacin se pueden utilizar
ESC OK
para desplazarse por las medidas principales. En caso de un disparo por defecto, la corriente in-
terrumpida se memoriza. Las unidades de control Micrologic A miden las corrientes de defecto a
tierra, fase y neutro. Las unidades de control Micrologic E ofrecen medidas de tensin, frecuencia
y potencia adems de las medidas que ofrece Micrologic A
Visualizacin FDM121: navegacin.
Medidas de mximos y mnimos
Todas las medidas instantneas que ofrece Micrologic A o E se pueden asociar a una medida de
I V 4/7
I1 310 A I2 315 A
402 V % 100 120
mximo y mnimo. Las medidas de mximos para la corriente ms alta de las 3 fases y el neutro,
U1
la intensidad absorbida y la potencia se pueden reiniciar a travs del teclado de la unidad de
% % 398 V % 100 120
I3 302 A IN 23 A U2 control, la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 o el sistema de comunicacin.
401 V % 100 120
U3
% % Medida de energa
ESC ESC
Las unidades de control Micrologic E tambin mide la energa consumida desde el ltimo reinicio
del medidor. El medidor de energa activa se puede restablecer con el teclado y la pantalla de
visualizacin FDM121 o el sistema de comunicacin.
Corriente Tensin
Valores de demanda y demanda mxima
Las unidades de control Micrologic E tambin calculan la intensidad absorbida y los valores de
PQS E
potencia. Estos clculos se pueden realizar usando un intervalo deslizante o bloqueo que se
P 64 kW Ep 14397 kWh
puede ajustar de 5 a 60 minutos en pasos de 1 minuto. La ventana se puede sincronizar con una
Q 38 kVar Eq 8325 kVarh
S 51 kVA Es 13035 kVAh

seal enviada a travs del sistema de comunicacin. Independientemente del mtodo de clculo,
los valores calculados se pueden recuperar en un PC a travs de la comunicacin Modbus.
ESC ESC
Se puede utilizar un software convencional de hoja de clculo para ofrecer curvas de tendencias
y previsiones basadas en estos datos. Proporcionan una base para las operaciones de deslastra-
do y reconexin usadas para ajustar el consumo a la potencia contratada.
Calidad de la alimentacin
Potencia Consumo Las unidades de control Micrologic E calculan los selectores de calidad de alimentacin ten-
Ejemplos de pantallas de medida en la pantalla de visualizacin diendo en cuenta la presencia de armnicos hasta el 15 orden, incluida la distorsin total de
FDM121. armnicos (THD) de corriente y tensin.
1/20
Funciones de Power Meter 1
Micrologic electrnica 5 / 6 A o E (continuacin)
Funciones Power Meter integradas en las unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 Tipo Visualizador
A E Micrologic Pantalla
LCD FDM121
Visualizacin de las regulaciones de proteccin
Rearmes (A) Se pueden mostrar todas las regulaciones Ir, tr, Isd, tsd, Ii, Ig, tg p p p
y temporizaciones
Medidas
Medidas rms instantneas
Corrientes (A) Fases y neutro I1, I2, I3, IN p p p p
Promedio de fases Iavg = (I1 + I2 + I3) / 3 p p - p
Corriente ms alta de las 3 fases Imx de I1, I2, I3, IN p p p p
y el neutro
Defecto a tierra (Micrologic 6) % Ig (ajuste de activacin) p p p p
Desequilibrio de corriente entre fases % Iavg - p - p
Tensiones (V) Compuesta U12, U23, U31 - p p p
Simple V1N, V2N, V3N - p p p
Promedio tensiones compuestas Uavg = (U12 + U21 + U23) / 3 - p - p
Promedio tensiones simples Vavg = (V1N + V2N + V3N) / 3 - p - p
Desequilibrio de tensin compuestas % Uavg y % Vavg - p - p
Secuencia de fases 1-2-3, 1-3-2 - p p p
Frecuencia (Hz) Sistema de alimentacin f - p p p
Alimentacin Activa (kW) P, total y por fase - p p p
Reactiva (kVAR) Q, total y por fase - p - p
Aparente (kVA) S, total y por fase - p - p
Factor de potencia y cos (fundamental) PF y cos , total y por fase - p - p
Medidas de mximos y mnimos
Asociados a mediciones instantneas rms Reinicio a travs de la Micrologic o la pan- p p - p
talla de visualizacin FDM121
Medida de energa
Energa Activa (kW), reactiva (kVARh) y aparente Total desde el ltimo reinicio - p p p
(kVAh) (1)
Modo con signo o absoluto
Intensidad absorbida (A) Fases y neutro Valor actual en la ventana seleccionada - p - p
Demanda mxima desde el ltimo reinicio - p - p
Potencia de demanda Activa (kWh), reactiva (kVAR), Valor actual en la ventana seleccionada - p - p
aparente (kVA)
Demanda mxima desde el ltimo reinicio - p - p
(2)
Ventana de clculo Deslizante, jo o sincronizado com. Regulable de 5 a 60 minutos en pasos de - p -
1 minuto
Tasa de distorsin de De la tensin con respecto al valor rms THDU, THDV de la tensin Ph-Ph y Ph-N - p - p
armnicos total (%)
De la corriente con respecto al valor rms THDI de la corriente de fase - p - p
(1) Modo absoluto: E absoluto = E de salida + E de entrada; modo con signo: E con signo = E de salida - E de entrada
(2) Disponible nicamente a travs del sistema de comunicacin.
Caractersticas tcnicas adicionales
Precisin de la medida
Las precisiones son las correspondientes a todo el sistema de medida, incluidos los sensores:
Corriente: Clase 1 segn IEC 61557-12
Tensin: 0.5 %
Potencia y energa: Clase 2 segn IEC 61557-12
Frecuencia: 0.1 %.
1/21
1 Funciones de ayuda a la explotacin
Personalizacin de alarmas con fechado

Tipos de alarma
El usuario puede asignar una alarma a todos los eventos o mediciones de las unidades de control
Micrologic A o E:
se pueden utilizar conjuntamente hasta 12 alarmas:
dos alarmas estn predenidas y se activan automticamente:
- Micrologic 5: sobrecarga (Ir) - Micrologic 6: sobrecarga (Ir) y defecto a tierra (Ig)
los umbrales, las prioridades y las temporizaciones se pueden ajustar para otras diez alarmas.
se puede utilizar la misma medida para diferentes alarmas a n de supervisar de forma precisa
determinados valores, como la frecuencia o la tensin
las alarmas tambin se pueden asignar a varios estados: adelanto/retraso de fase, cuatro
Pantalla LCD integrada de Micrologic. cuadrantes, secuencia de fases
seleccin de prioridades de visualizacin, con posibilidad de visualizacin emergente
fechado de alarmas.
Main Menu
Quick View Ajuste de alarmas

Metering
Las alarmas no se pueden ajustar con el teclado ni la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121. Se
Alarms
ajustan a travs de la comunicacin con el PC. La conguracin incluye el umbral, la prioridad,
Services
la temporizacin de activacin antes de la visualizacin y la temporizacin de desactivacin.
ESC OK
Tambin se puede volver a programar la asignacin estndar para las dos salidas de rel SDx de
las alarmas seleccionadas por el usuario.
Lectura de alarmas
Indicaciones de alarma remotas
Visualizacin FDM121: navegacin.
lectura en la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 o el PC a travs del sistema de comunicacin
indicaciones remotas a travs del rel SDx con dos contactos de salida para las alarmas.
Alarm History 2/3 Alarm History 2/3
Total reactive
Power
Over maximum
Current unbalance Historiales y tablas de eventos
Date:
Time:
07 May 2007
10:28:03.01 PM
Date:
Time:
10 Nov 2007
06:35:08.04 AM
Las unidades de control Micrologic A y E mantienen historiales y tablas de eventos que
siempre estn activos.
ESC OK ESC OK
Tres tipos de historiales fechados
Disparo por traspaso de lmite de Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig: 17 ltimos controles
Alarmas: 10 ltimas alarmas
Alarma de sobrepotencia. Alarma de desequilibrio Eventos de funcionamiento: 10 ltimos eventos
de fases. Cada registro de historial se guarda con:
indicaciones en texto claro en varios idiomas que puede seleccionar el usuario
fechado: fecha y hora del evento
Alarm History 2/3 Alarm History 3/3
Under voltage Under voltage

estado: activacin / desconexin
Pick-up Drop-out
Dos tipos de tablas de eventos fechados
Date: 05 Nov 2007 Date: 05 Nov 2007
Time: 02:31:03.61 AM Time: 02:32:26.12 AM Regulaciones de proteccin Medidas de mximos y mnimos
ESC OK ESC OK Visualizacin de alarmas y tablas
Los historiales fechados y las tablas de eventos se pueden ver en un PC a travs del sistema
de comunicacin.
Memoria integrada
Alarma de activacin y desconexin.
Las unidades de control Micrologic A y E tienen una memoria no voltil que guarda todos los
Ejemplos de pantallas de asistencia a la explotacin en la panta-
datos sobre las alarmas, historiales, tablas de eventos, contadores y selectores de mantenimiento
incluso si se corta la alimentacin.
lla de visualizacin FDM121.
Selectores de mantenimiento
Las unidades de control Micrologic A y E cuentan con indicadores, entre otros aspectos,
para el nmero de ciclos de maniobras, las horas de funcionamiento y el desgaste de contactos
(contador de horas de funcionamiento) del interruptor automtico Compact NSX. Es posible
asignar una alarma al contador de ciclos de maniobras para planicar el mantenimiento. Los
diferentes selectores se pueden utilizar juntos con los historiales de control para analizar el nivel
de tensin al que se somete el aparato. La informacin que proporcionan los indicadores no
se puede mostrar en la pantalla LCD de Micrologic. Aparece en el PC a travs del sistema de
comunicacin.
Gestin de los aparatos instalados

Todos los interruptores automticos que cuentan con una unidad de control Micrologic 5 6 se
pueden identicar con el sistema de comunicacin:
nmero de serie versin de rmware
versin de hardware nombre de aparato asignado por el usuario.
Esta informacin, junto con las indicaciones descritas anteriormente, ofrecen una clara visin del
estado de los aparatos instalados.
1/22
Funciones de ayuda a la explotacin 1
Funciones de ayuda a la explotacin de las unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 Tipo Visualizador

A E Microlo- Pantalla
gic LCD FDM121
Alarmas personalizadas
Regulaciones Hasta 10 alarmas asignadas a todas las medidas A y E p p - (2)
Adelanto/retraso de fase, cuatro cuadrantes, secuencia de fases, seleccin de prioridad - p - (2)
de visualizacin
Visualizador Alarmas y disparos p p - (2)
Indicaciones remotas Activacin de dos contactos dedicados en el mdulo SDx p p - -

Historiales fechados
Disparos Causa del disparo Ir, Isd, Ii (Micrologic 5, 6) p p - (2)
(ltimos 17) (fechado con ms)

Ig (Micrologic 6) p p - (2)
(2)
Alarmas p p -
(ltimos 10)
Eventos de Tipos de evento Modicacin del ajuste de proteccin mediante selector - p - (2)
funcionamiento Apertura del bloqueo de teclado (2)

(ltimos 10)
- p -
Prueba a travs del teclado - p - (2)
Prueba a travs de herramienta externa - p - (2)
Fechado (fecha y hora) - p - (2)
Reinicio para maxmetro/minmetro y medidor de energa p p p p

Fechado Presentacin Fecha y hora, texto, estado p p - (2)
Tablas de eventos fechados

Regulaciones de Ajuste modicado (valor mos- Ir tr Isd tsd Ii Ig tg p p - (2)
proteccin trado)
Fechado Fecha y hora de la modicacin p p - (2)
Valor anterior Valor antes de la modicacin p p - (2)
Mn./Mx. Valores supervisados I1 I2 I3 IN p - - (2)
I1 I2 I3 IN U12 U23 U31 f - p - (2)
Fechado de cada valor Fecha y hora del registro mn./mx. p p - (2)
Valor mn./mx. de corriente Valor mn./mx. p p - (2)
Contador Ciclos mecnicos (1) Asignable a una alarma p p - (2)
(1)
Ciclos elctricos Asignable a una alarma p p - (2)
Disparos Uno por tipo de disparo p p - (2)
Alarmas Uno para cada tipo de alarma p p - (2)
Horas Tiempo total de funcionamiento (horas) p p - (2)
Selector Desgaste de contacto % p p - (2)
Perl de carga Horas en diferentes niveles de % de horas en cuatro rangos de corriente: 0-49% In, 50-79% In, p p - (2)
carga 80 - 89% In y u 90% In

(1) Se necesita el bloque BSCM (pg. 1/27) para estas funciones. (2) Disponible nicamente a travs del sistema de comunicacin.

Cada vez que se abre el Compact NSX, la unidad de control Micrologic 5 / 6 mide la corriente interrumpida y aumenta el indicador de desgaste de contacto en funcin de la corrien-
te interrumpida y de acuerdo con los resultados de las pruebas guardados en la memoria. El corte en condiciones de carga normales tiene como resultado un incremento muy leve.
El valor del indicador se puede leer en la pantalla FDM121. Ofrece una estimacin del desgaste del contacto calculada en funcin de las fuerzas totales que afectan al interruptor
automtico. Cuando el selector alcanza el 80%, se recomienda sustituir el interruptor para garantizar la disponibilidad del equipo protegido.
Perfil de carga del interruptor automtico
La unidad de control Micrologic 5 / 6 calcula el perl de carga del interruptor automtico que protege un circuito de carga. El perl indica el porcentaje del tiempo total de funciona-
miento en cuatro niveles de corriente (% de In del interruptor):
0 al 49% In 50 al 79 % In 80 al 89 % In u 90% In.
Esta informacin se puede utilizar para optimizar el uso del equipo protegido o planicar ampliaciones.
1/23
1 Funciones de la pantalla de visualizacin
Las funciones de la unidad de control Micrologic Pantalla de visualizacin FDM121

se aprovechan al mximo con la pantalla de
La FDM121 es una pantalla de visualizacin que se puede integrar en el sistema
visualizacin FDM121. Se conecta al Compact
Compact NSX100 a 630 A. Utiliza la funcin de procesamiento y los sensores de la uni-
NSX a travs de un cable y muestra la informacin dad de control Micrologic. Es fcil de utilizar y no necesita ningn software ni regulacio-
de visualizacin de la unidad de control Micrologic. nes especiales. Pasa a estar inmediatamente operativo cuando se conecta al
El resultado es una verdadera unidad integrada Compact NSX.
que combina un interruptor automtico y un La FDM121 dispone de una pantalla de grandes dimensiones, pero necesita muy poca
Power Meter. Tambin se pueden mostrar profundidad. La pantalla grca antirreectante est retroiluminada para facilitar la
funciones adicionales de ayuda a la explotacin. lectura incluso en condiciones de poca luz ambiental y en ngulos pronunciados.
Visualizacin de alarmas y medidas de Micrologic
La FDM121 est pensada para mostrar medidas, alarmas e informacin de funciona-
miento de la unidad de control Micrologic 5 / 6. No se puede utilizar para modicar las
regulaciones de proteccin.
Se puede acceder fcilmente a las medidas a travs de un men.
Todas las alarmas denidas por el usuario se muestran de forma automtica. El modo
de visualizacin depende del nivel de prioridad seleccionado durante la conguracin
de las alarmas:
prioridad alta: una ventana emergente muestra la descripcin fechada de la alarma
y el LED naranja parpadea
prioridad media: el LED naranja de "Alarma" est jo
Visualizacin FDM121. Accesorio de montaje prioridad baja: sin visualizacin en la pantalla.
en supercie. Todos los defectos que tienen como resultado un disparo producen automticamente
una alarma de prioridad alta, sin que se necesiten regulaciones especiales.
En cualquier caso, el historial de alarmas se actualiza.
Si falla la alimentacin del FDM121, toda la informacin se guarda en la memoria no
voltil de la unidad de control Micrologic. Los datos se recuperan automticamente
cuando se restablece la alimentacin y se pueden consultar a travs del sistema de
comunicacin.
Indicaciones de estado y control remoto
Si el interruptor automtico dispone de bloque BSCM (pg. 1/27), la pantalla FDM121
tambin se puede utilizar para ver las condiciones de estado del interruptor automtico:
O/F: ON/OFF
SD: sealizacin de disparo
SDE: Sealizacin de disparo por defecto (sobrecarga, cortocircuito, defecto a tierra)
Caractersticas principales
Pantalla de 96 96 30 mm; necesita 10 mm detrs de la puerta (o 20 mm si se usa
el conector de alimentacin de 24 voltios).
Retroiluminacin blanca.
Gran ngulo de visualizacin: vertical 60, horizontal 30.
Conexin con la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121. Alta resolucin: excelente lectura de los smbolos grcos.
LED de alarma: naranja intermitente para la activacin de alarma, naranja jo tras el
reinicio del operador si persiste la condicin de alarma.
Rango de temperaturas de funcionamiento de -10C a +55C.
Marcado CE / UL.
Fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc, con tolerancias de 24 V -20% (19,2 V) a 24 V
+10% (26,4 V). Cuando la FDM121 se conecta a la red de comunicacin, los 24 V
se suministran por el sistema de cableado del sistema de comunicacin.
Consumo 40 mA.
Montaje
La FDM121 se instala fcilmente en un cuadro de distribucin.
Corte de puerta estndar de 92 92 mm.
Unin mediante clips.
Para evitar un corte en la puerta, est disponible un accesorio para el montaje en
supercie taladrando tan slo dos oricios de 22 mm de dimetro.
El grado de proteccin de la FDM121 es IP54 en la parte frontal. El IP54 se conserva
despus de montar el cuadro de distribucin usando la junta suministrada durante la
instalacin.
1/24
Funciones de la pantalla de visualizacin 1
Conexin
I
I1 310 A I2 315 A
La FDM121 est equipado con los siguientes elementos:
% %
un bornero de 24 Vcc:
I3 302 A IN 23 A
tipo enchufable con 2 entradas de cable por punto para facilitar la conexin
% %
en cadena
ESC rango de fuente de alimentacin de 24 V -20% (19,2 V) a 24 V +10% (26,4 V)
dos conectores RJ45.
La unidad de control Micrologic se conecta al bornero de comunicacin interno del
Compact NSX a travs del cable precableado NSX. La conexin a uno de los conecto-
1 2 3 4 5 6 res RJ45 en la FDM121 establece automticamente la comunicacin entre la unidad de
control Micrologic y la FDM121 y suministra alimentacin para las funciones de medida
1 Escape de la unidad de control Micrologic.
2 Abajo Si no se utiliza el segundo conector, debe jarse con un nal de lnea.
3 OK
4 Arriba Navegacin
5 Contexto
Existen cinco botones para una navegacin rpida e intuitiva.
6 LED de alarma
El botn Context (contexto) se puede utilizar para seleccionar el tipo de visualizacin
(digital, grco de barras, analgica).
Produit Id Main Menu El usuario puede seleccionar el idioma de visualizacin (chino, ingls, francs, alemn,
Micrologic 5.3A Quick View
italiano, portugus, espaol, etc.). Se pueden descargar otros idiomas.
Metering
Serial number: P07451
Part number: LU432091

Alarms Pantallas
Services
Firmware: 1.02
ESC ESC OK
Men principal
Cuando se enciende, la pantalla FDM121 muestra automticamente el estado de
encendido o apagado del aparato.
Identicacin del producto. Vista rpida. Vista rpida
Metering U Average 9/10

Medida
I
387 V % 100 120
avg
U-V
392 V % 100 120
Alarmas
PQS MIN
E 388 V % 100 120
F - PF - cos
MAX
Ajustes
ESC OK ESC
Cuando no se utiliza, la pantalla no est retroiluminada. La retroiluminacin se puede

activar pulsando uno de los botones. Se apaga transcurridos 3 minutos.
Medida: submen. Medida: U media. Acceso rpido a la informacin bsica
Quick view (vista rpida) ofrece acceso a cinco pantallas que muestran un resumen
NonResettableEnergy 1/3 Display
de la informacin de funcionamiento esencial (I, U, f, P, E, THD, interruptor automtico
EpIN 5111947 kWh
Contrast On / Off).
Brightness
EpOut 12345678 kWh
Language Acceso a la informacin detallada
"Metering" (medida) se puede utilizar para ver los datos de medida (I, U-V, f, P, Q, S, E,
ESC ESC OK THD, PF) con los valores mn./mx. correspondientes.
Las alarmas muestran las que estn activas as como el historial de alarmas.
Los ajustes ofrecen acceso a los contadores de maniobras, la funcin de restableci-
miento de energa y maxmetro, los selectores de mantenimiento, la identicacin de los
Medida: valores. Ajustes. bloques conectados al bus interno y las regulaciones internas de la FDM121 (idioma,
contraste, etc.).
1/25
1 Comunicacin Compact NSX
Mdulo de comunicacin
Todos los aparatos Compact NSX pueden integrar Cuatro niveles funcionales
la funcin de comunicacin a travs de un sistema El Compact NSX se puede integrar en un entorno de comunicacin Modbus. Los cuatro
de conexin precableado con un interface de red niveles funcionales se pueden utilizar por separado o combinados.
Modbus. Comunicacin de las indicaciones de estado
El interface se puede conectar directamente o a Este nivel es compatible con todos los interruptores automticos Compact NSX, inde-
travs de la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121. Se pendientemente de la unidad de control, as como con todos los interruptores-secciona-
pueden combinar cuatro niveles funcionales para dores. Gracias al mdulo BSCM, es posible acceder a la siguiente informacin:
adaptarse a todos los requisitos de supervisin. posicin ON/OFF (O/F)
sealizacin de disparo (SD)
sealizacin de disparo por defecto (SDE).
Comunicacin de comandos
Disponible tambin en todos los interruptores automticos e interruptores-seccionado-
res, este nivel (control remoto de comunicacin) se puede utilizar para:
abrir
cerrar
rearmar.
Comunicacin de medidas con la unidad de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A o E
Este nivel ofrece acceso a toda la informacin disponible:
valores de demanda e instantneos
medidas de mximos y mnimos
medida de energa
potencia e intensidad absorbida
calidad de la alimentacin.
Comunicacin de la ayuda a la explotacin con la unidad de control
Micrologic 5 / 6 A o E
regulaciones de alarma y proteccin
historiales fechados y tablas de eventos
indicadores de mantenimiento.
Conexiones y componentes de comunicacin
Modbus
24 V DC
10
10
1.3 m
Conexiones
El Compact NSX est conectado al interface Modbus o a la 1 Red Modbus
pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 a travs del bornero interno 2 Interface Modbus
para el cable NSX equipado con un conector RJ45. 3 Cable NSX
cable disponible en tres longitudes: 0,35 m, 1,3 m y 3 m. 4 Bornero interno para la comunicacin a travs del cable NSX
modelo aislado de 0,35 m para instalaciones > 480 Vca 5 Mdulo BSCM
posibilidad de contar con longitudes de hasta 10 m usando 6 Precableado
extensiones. 7 Unidad de control Micrologic
La pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 est conectada al 8 Pantalla de visualizacin FDM121
interface Modbus mediante un cable de comunicacin con 9 Cable RJ45
conectores RJ45 en ambos extremos. 10 Final de lnea (en conector no utilizado, en su caso)
1/26
Comunicacin Compact NSX 1
Mdulo de comunicacin (continuacin)
Mdulo de interface Modbus
Funciones
Este mdulo, obligatorio para la conexin a la red,
contiene la direccin Modbus (1 a 99) declarada por el
usuario a travs de dos selectores en la parte frontal.
Se adapta automticamente (velocidad en baudios,
paridad) a la red Modbus en la que est instalado.
Mdulo BSCM
Est equipado con un interruptor de bloqueo para ha-
bilitar o deshabilitar operaciones relativas a la escritura Funciones
en la Micrologic, p. ej., reinicio de contadores, modi- El mdulo opcional de control y estado del interruptor
caciones de ajuste, comandos de apertura y cierre de BSCM se utiliza para adquirir indicaciones del estado de
aparatos, etc. los aparatos y controlar la funcin del control remoto
Existe una funcin de prueba integrada para comprobar Mdulo de interface de comunicacin.
las conexiones del mdulo de interface Modbus con la Modbus. Incluye una memoria que se usa para gestionar los
Micrologic y la pantalla de visualizacin FDM121.
selectores de mantenimiento.
Montaje
Indicaciones de estado
El mdulo se monta en un carril DIN. Se pueden unir con
Sealizacin del estado del aparato:
clips varios mdulos uno al lado de otro.
O/F, SD y SDE.
Para ello, se encuentra disponible un accesorio de apila-
do para la conexin rpida con clip del enlace Modbus Indicadores de mantenimiento
y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc. El mdulo BSCM gestiona los siguientes indicadores:
El mdulo de interface Modbus suministra 24 Vcc al Mi- contador mecnico de maniobras
crologic correspondiente, la pantalla FDM121 y el bloque contador de maniobras elctricas
BSCM. El consumo del mdulo es de 60 mA / 24 Vcc. historial de indicaciones de estado.
Se puede asignar una alarma a los contadores de
maniobras.
Controles
El bloque se puede utilizar para realizar operaciones de
control remoto de comunicacin: (abrir, cerrar y reiniciar)
en diferentes modos (manual, auto.).
Montaje
El mdulo BSCM se puede instalar en todos los inte-
rruptores automticos Compact NSX e interruptores-
seccionadores. Se ja simplemente a las ranuras de los
contactos auxiliares. Ocupa las ranuras de un contacto
A/C y un contacto SDE. El BSCM se alimenta a 24 Vcc
automticamente a travs del cable NSX cuando est
instalado el sistema de comunicacin.
1 Modbus de cinco puntos y conector de 24 Vcc

2 Dos selectores de direccin Modbus (1 a 99)
3 LED de trco Modbus
4 Bloqueo para desactivar la escritura en el NSX
5 LED de prueba
6 Botn de prueba
7 Dos conectores para el cable RJ45
Mdulo BSCM.
Montaje con accesorio de apilado.
1/27
Redes y software
El Compact NSX utiliza el protocolo de Modbus

comunicacin Modbus, compatible con Modbus es el protocolo de comunicacin ms utilizado
los sistemas de supervisin ION Enterprise en las redes industriales. Funciona en el modo maestro-
PowerLogic. esclavo. Los aparatos (esclavos) se comunican uno tras
otro mediante una pasarela (maestro).
Dos softwares especficos facilitan la implantacin Los productos Masterpact, Compact NSX, PowerLogic
de las funciones de comunicacin. y Sepam funcionan todos con este protocolo. Una red
Modbus se implanta por lo general a escala del cuadro
de distribucin de BT o MT.
En funcin de los datos supervisados y de la velocidad
de actualizacin deseada, una red Modbus conectada
a una pasarela puede prestar servicio a entre 4 y 16
aparatos. Para las instalaciones ms grandes, se pueden
conectar varias redes Modbus a una red Ethernet (proto-
colo TCP/IP/Modbus) a travs de sus pasarelas.
Notificacin
automtica
Firewall
Modo
Internet nmada
Intranet local
Ethernet (TCP/IP/Modbus)
Consulta Consulta
EGX400 EGX400 RSU RSU
RCU RCU
Modbus Modbus
FDM121
Masterpact Compact NSX Sepam PowerLogic

Power Meter
1/28
Redes y software (continuacin)
Software Micrologic
Las unidades de control Micrologic disponen de
2 softwares de aplicacin, RSU y RCU, cuya nalidad
es ayudarle a iniciar la instalacin de la comunicacin.
Destinado a los Compact NSX y Masterpact, el software
se puede descargar de la web de Schneider Electric.
La funcin "Live update" permite la actualizacin inme-
diata para obtener las versiones ms recientes. Estas
sencillas utilidades incluyen ayuda al inicio y ayuda en
lnea. Son compatibles con Microsoft Windows 2000, XP
y Vista.
Pantalla de conguracin RSU para un Micrologic 5.2.
Gateway
La pasarela realiza dos funciones:
acceso a la Intranet de la empresa (Ethernet) convir-
tiendo las redes Modbus al protocolo TCP/IP/Modbus
servidor opcional de pginas Web para la informacin
procedente de los aparatos.
Ejemplo: EGX400
Pasarelas Ethernet EGX100 y EGX400
Las pasarelas PowerLogic EGX100 y EGX400 actan Pantalla de mini-supervisin de RCU para las medidas de
como servidor web facilitando la supervisin de la corriente.
instalacin elctrica.
Fcil acceso a los datos elctricos de su instalacin me-
diante un navegador web (Internet Explorer, Netscape...),
comunicacin de alta velocidad y noticacin rpida de
alarmas:
Comunicacin Ethernet a 10 o 100 Mb/s.
Servidor web para sus equipos elctricos comunican-
tes de Schneider Electric (slo EGX400).
Acceso transparente a travs de Intranet/Internet me-
diante Modbus / TCP.
Fcil conguracin de forma remota mediante el nave-
gador web.
1/29
Software RSU y RCU
Existen dos programas, RSU y RCU, para facilitar la RSU (Utilidad Remota de Configuracin)
instalacin de la comunicacin.
Este software se usa para congurar las funciones de proteccin y las alarmas de cada
Se pueden descargar de la web de Schneider aparato Masterpact y Compact NSX.
Electric e incluyen una funcin "Live update" que Despus de la conexin de la red y la introduccin de la direccin Modbus del inte-
permite una actualizacin inmediata. rruptor automtico, el software detecta automticamente el tipo de unidad de control
instalada.
Existen dos modos de funcionamiento posibles.
Software desconectado de la red de comunicacin fuera de lnea
Para cada interruptor automtico seleccionado, el usuario puede:
Determinar los regulaciones de proteccin
Los regulaciones se realizan en una pantalla que muestra la parte frontal de la unidad
de control. La pantalla, el teclado y los selectores de regulaciones de Micrologic se
simulan para facilitar la utilizacin de todas las funciones de ajuste de Micrologic.
Guardar y duplicar las regulaciones de proteccin
Cada conguracin creada se puede guardar para programaciones posteriores de
los aparatos. Tambin se puede duplicar y utilizar como base para programar otros
interruptores automticos.
Software conectado a la red en lnea
De la misma forma, para cada interruptor automtico seleccionado, el usuario puede:
Ver los regulaciones actuales
El software muestra la unidad de control y ofrece acceso a todos los regulaciones.
Ver las curvas de proteccin correspondientes
Un bloque de curvas grcas en el software muestra la curva de proteccin correspon-
diente a los regulaciones. Es posible establecer una segunda curva sobre la primera
para estudios de selectividad.
RSU: RSU (Remote Setting Utility) de Micrologic. Modificar regulaciones de forma segura
Existen diferentes niveles de seguridad:
contrasea: por defecto, es la misma para todos los aparatos, pero se puede modi-
car para cada uno de ellos
bloqueo del bloque de interface Modbus, que se debe desbloquear para poder ajus-
RCU (Utilidad de Control Remoto) tar el aparato correspondiente de forma remota
El software RCU se utiliza para probar la comunicacin regulaciones mximas limitadas por las posiciones de los dos selectores de la unidad
de todos los aparatos conectados a la red Modbus. Est frontal.
diseado para utilizarse con aparatos Compact NSX, Estos selectores, que ajusta el usuario, determinan las regulaciones mximas que se
Masterpact, Advantys OTB y Power Meter. Ofrece varias pueden realizar con el sistema de comunicacin.
funciones. Las regulaciones se modican:
congurando directamente o en lnea, las regulaciones de proteccin en la pantalla
Mini supervisor cargando las regulaciones preparadas en el modo fuera de lnea. Esto es posible
Visualizacin de medidas I, U, f, P, E y THD para cada nicamente si las posiciones de los selectores muestran las nuevas regulaciones.
aparato a travs de la navegacin Todas las regulaciones manuales realizadas posteriormente en el aparato tienen prioridad.
Visualizacin del estado ON/OFF Alarmas de programa
Mando de apertura y cierre para cada aparato Se pueden vincular hasta 12 alarmas a las medidas o eventos.
Debe introducirse en primer lugar una contrasea comn dos alarmas estn predenidas y se activan automticamente:
o individual. Micrologic 5: sobrecarga (Ir)
Cuando se hayan probado todas las funciones, esta Micrologic 6: sobrecarga (Ir) y defecto a tierra (Ig)
utilidad se sustituye por el software de supervisin selec- los umbrales, las prioridades y las temporizaciones se pueden ajustar para otras diez
cionado para la instalacin. alarmas. Se pueden seleccionar entre una lista de 91 alarmas
Ajuste de las salidas de los rels SDx
Es obligatorio cuando el usuario desee cambiar la conguracin estndar y asignar
diferentes seales a las 2 salidas del rel SDx.
RCU: Remote Control Utility (utilidad de control remoto) para

pruebas de comunicacin.
1/30
Software de supervisin
El software avanzado, de gestin y de supervisin Tipos de software

de instalaciones elctricas de Schneider Electric
Las funciones de comunicacin Masterpact y Compact NSX estn diseadas para
integra bloques de identificacin Compact NSX.
actuar de interface con el software dedicado a las instalaciones elctricas:
supervisin del cuadro de distribucin
supervisin de la instalacin elctrica
gestin del sistema de alimentacin: sistemas avanzados en ingeniera elctrica
control de procesos
Software tipo SCADA (Supervisory Control & Data Acquisition), EMS (Enterprise Mana-
gement System) o BMS (Building Management System).
Integracin del Compact NSX

Los Compact NSX se integran a travs de bloques de interface Modbus conectados
con pantallas de visualizacin FDM121 o cables NSX.
Para facilitar la conexin de los diferentes bloques, el precableado se identica con
smbolos ULP (Universal Logic Plug). Los puntos de conexin en los bloques compati-
bles estn marcados de la misma manera.
Soluciones de Schneider Electric

Supervisin de un cuadro de distribucin elctrica a travs
de servidores Web EGX400
Smbolo de conexin para bloques compatibles
con Compact NSX. Es una solucin sencilla para aquellos clientes que deseen consultar los parmetros
elctricos principales de la aparamenta del cuadro de distribucin sin un software
especco.
Se conectan hasta 16 aparatos de cuadro de distribucin a travs de interfaces
Modbus a una pasarela Ethernet EGX400 que integra las funciones de un servidor de
pginas Web. Las pginas Web integradas se pueden congurar fcilmente con tan
slo unos clics del ratn. La informacin que proporcionan se actualiza en tiempo real.
Las pginas Web se pueden consultar usando un navegador Web estndar en un PC
conectado a travs de Ethernet a la Intranet de la empresa o de forma remota a travs
de un mdem. La noticacin automtica de las alarmas y la superacin de umbrales
es posible a travs del correo electrnico o ION Enterprise (Short Message Service,
servicio de mensajes cortos).
Supervisin de la instalacin elctrica a travs del software PowerView
PowerLogic est especialmente adaptado a la necesidades de supervisin de las apli-
caciones de sistemas pequeos y controla hasta 32 aparatos. Instalado en un PC con
Windows, representa una solucin rentable y fcil de instalar que ofrece lo siguiente:
deteccin automtica de aparamenta compatible
supervisin de datos en tiempo real, incluido el consumo de alimentacin
se puede exportar un generador de informes con varios informes predenidos a Excel
asignacin de costes
Software PowerView. posibilidades de registro de datos con fechado
Comunicacin compatible con Modbus serie y Modbus TCP/IP.
Software de sistema avanzado de ingeniera elctrica ION Enterprise
PowerLogic ION Enterprise es una gama de productos de software para Web destina-
da a las aplicaciones de supervisin de sistemas de suministro elctrico de gama alta.
Est diseada para los grandes sistemas de suministro elctrico.
Las soluciones ION Enterprise ofrecen un anlisis detallado de los eventos elctricos,
registro de datos de larga duracin y funciones extensas y econmicas de creacin de
informes (p. ej., supervisin de consumo y gestin de tarifas).
Se puede ver en tiempo real una gran variedad de pantallas, registros de alarmas con
enlaces para ver las formas de onda e informes predenidos sobre la calidad de la
energa y los gastos de servicio.
Otros software
Los aparatos Compact NSX pueden reenviar la informacin de medida y funciona-
miento a un software especial que integra la instalacin elctrica y otras instalaciones
tcnicas:
Software de control de procesos SCADA: Vijeo CITECT
Software del sistema de gestin de edicios BMS: TAC Vista.
Consultarnos.
1/31
1 Accesorios para Unidades de
control Micrologic
Transformador de corriente externo para neutro (ENCT)

El transformador externo es un sensor obligatorio para un interruptor automtico
de tres polos, en un sistema con neutro distribuido para medir la corriente de neutro
con el n de:
proteger el conductor neutro
proteger contra los defectos de aislamiento.
Este transformador de intensidad se puede conectar a las unidades de control Microlo-
gic 5 / 6. La especicacin del transformador debe ser compatible con la del interruptor
automtico.
Transformadores de corriente de neutro externo. Transformadores de intensidad obligatorios para diferentes

modelos de interruptores automticos
Tipo de interruptor automtico Especificaciones Referencia
NSX100/160/250 25 100 A LV429521
150 250 A LV430563
NSX400/630 400 630 A LV432575
Acoplamiento de tensin de neutro externa (Ref. LV434208).

Acoplamiento de tensin de neutro externo (ENVT)
El transformador de tensin de neutro es obligatorio para la medida de potencia en
la unidad de control Micrologic E con un interruptor automtico de tres polos en un
sistema con neutro distribuido. Se utiliza para conectar el neutro a la unidad de control
Micrologic a n de medir las tensiones de fase a neutro (Ph-N).
Bloque de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc

Utilizacin
Se necesita una fuente de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc para las instalaciones
con comunicacin, independientemente del tipo de unidad de control.
En las instalaciones sin comunicacin, est disponible como opcin para la unidad de
control Micrologic 5/6 con el n de poder:
Bloque de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc. modicar las regulaciones cuando el interruptor automtico est abierto
ver las medidas cuando la corriente que circula por el interruptor automtico es baja
(de 15 a 50 A en funcin del calibre)
mantener la visualizacin de la causa del disparo y la corriente cortada.
Caractersticas
Se puede utilizar una sola fuente de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc para todo
el cuadro de distribucin.
A continuacin se indican las caractersticas necesarias:
tensin de salida: 24 Vcc 5%
uctuaciones: 1%.
categora de sobretensin: OVC IV - segn IEC 60947-1
Estn disponible bloques de alimentacin externos de 24 Vcc con una corriente
de salida de 1 A:
Bloques externos de alimentacin disponibles Referencia

Fuente de alimentacin Vcc (5%) 24/30 54440
48/60 54441
100/125 54442
Vca (+10%, 110/130 54443
-15%) 200/240 54444
380/415 54445
Tensin de salida 24 Vcc (5%)
Fluctuaciones 1 %
Categora de sobretensin (OVC) OVC IV - segn IEC 60947-1
Consumo total
Para determinar la corriente de salida necesaria de la fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc,
es preciso sumar las corrientes consumidas por las diferentes cargas suministradas:
Consumo de los bloques Compact NSX Bloque Consumo (mA)

Micrologic 5/6 20
Bloque BSCM 10
FDM121 40
Interface de comunicacin Modbus 60
Cable NSX U > 480 Vca 30
1/32
Accesorios para Unidades de 1
control Micrologic
(continuacin)
Batera de prueba
Esta batera de bolsillo se conecta al conector de prueba de la unidad de control
Micrologic. Alimenta la Micrologic y el LED Ready, alimentando la pantalla y permitiendo
realizar las regulaciones con el teclado.
Batera de prueba (Ref. LV434206).
Bloque de batera
El bloque de batera es una fuente de alimentacin auxiliar para el bloque de alimen-
tacin externa. Las tensiones de entrada/salida son de 24 Vcc y pueden suministrar
alimentacin durante aproximadamente tres horas (100 mA).
Bornero de alimentacin de 24 Vcc

Bloque de bateras (Ref. 54446).
El bornero de alimentacin de 24 Vcc se puede instalar nicamente en las unidades de
control Micrologic 5/6. Es obligatorio encender la unidad de control cuando sta no est
conectada a una pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 o al sistema de comunicacin. Si se
utiliza, excluye la conexin de un cable NSX.
Cable NSX
Para la tensin U y 480 V, disponible en 3 longitudes prefabricadas: 0,35 m, 1,3 m y 3 m.
Para tensiones U > 480 V, se necesita un cable especial de 0,35 m con un accesorio
Bornero de alimentacin Cable NSX U > 480 V de aislamiento.
de 24 Vcc (Ref. LV434210). (Ref. LV434204). Est disponible un juego de cables con conectores RJ45 para adaptarse a las diferen-
tes distancias entre los aparatos.
Maletn de mantenimiento
El maletn incluye:
bloque de conguracin y mantenimiento
fuente de alimentacin (110...220 Vca / 50-60 Hz 24 Vcc - 1 A)
cable especial para la conexin al conector de prueba de la unidad de control
cable USB estndar
cable RJ45 estndar
Maletn de mantenimiento (Ref. TRV00910). manual del usuario
enlace Bluetooth opcional (al PC).
Bloque de configuracin y mantenimiento

Incluido en el kit de mantenimiento, este bloque prueba el funcionamiento de la unidad
de control Micrologic y ofrece acceso a todos los parmetros y regulaciones. Se conec-
ta al conector de prueba Micrologic y puede funcionar en dos modos.
Modo autnomo para:
alimentar la unidad de control Micrologic y supervisar el funcionamiento a travs del
LED Ready
comprobar el funcionamiento mecnico del interruptor automtico (control usando el
pulsador).
Bloque de con guracin y mantenimiento (Ref. TRV00911). Modo PC, conectado a un PC a travs de enlace Bluetooth o USB. Este modo ofrece
acceso a las regulaciones de proteccin, las regulaciones de alarma y las lecturas
de todos los indicadores. Usando la utilidad de software asociada RSU, es posible
30
guardar, en un archivo dedicado para cada aparato, todos los datos que se pueden
transferir a otro aparato.
Visualizador
Este modo ofrece tambin funciones de prueba de funcionamiento:
comprobar la temporizacin del control (curva de control)
comprobar la duracin de defecto de control (selectividad)
Conector de prueba
comprobar la funcin ZSI (Zone Selective Interlocking)
simulacin de alarmas
visualizacin de las curvas de ajuste
TES
T visualizacin de las corrientes
impresin de los informes de prueba
Enlace Bluetooth u OUB
110/240 V
Utilizacin del bloque de mantenimiento y conguracin.
1/33
1 Proteccin diferencial
bloque Vigi o rel Vigirex
Existen dos formas de aadir proteccin Interruptor automtico con bloque adicional Vigi
diferencial a cualquiera de los interruptores (Vigicompact NSX)
automticos Compact NSX100 a 630 de tres
o cuatro polos equipados con una unidad de Para las caractersticas generales de los interruptores automticos, ver pgs. 1/6 y 1/7.
Bloques adicionales Vigi. La proteccin diferencial se consigue instalando un bloque
control magntica, magnetotrmica o Micrologic
Vigi (caractersticas y criterios de seleccin en la siguiente pgina) directamente en los termi-
2, 5 6: nales del interruptor automtico. Acciona directamente la unidad de control (magntica,
aadiendo un bloque Vigi al interruptor magnetotrmica o Micrologic).
automtico a fin de formar un Vigicompact NSX
Interruptor automtico combinado con un rel Vigirex
usando un rel Vigirex y toroidales separados.
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX + rel Vigirex
Los rels Vigirex se pueden utilizar para aadir proteccin diferencial externa a los inte-
rruptores Compact NSX. Los interruptores automticos deben estar equipados con una
bobina de tensin MN o MX. Los rels Vigirex aaden umbrales de control especiales y
temporizaciones para la proteccin diferencial.
Los rels Vigirex resultan muy tiles cuando existen problemas de instalacin importan-
tes (interruptor ya instalado y conectado, espacio limitado disponible, etc.).
Caractersticas de los rels Vigirex
Sensibilidad ajustable de 30 mA a 250 mA y 9 regulaciones de temporizacin (de 0 a
4,5 segundos).
Toroidales cerrados hasta 630 A (de 30 a 300 mm de dimetro), toroidales divididos
hasta 250 A (de 46 a 110 mm de dimetro) o sensores rectangulares
hasta 630 A.
Sistemas de distribucin de 50/60 Hz, 400 Hz.
Opciones
Sealizacin de control con un contacto a prueba de defectos
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630.
Contacto de prealarma y LED, etc.
Cumplimiento de normas
IEC 60947-2, anexo M
IEC/EN 60755: requisitos generales para aparatos de proteccin que funcionan con
corriente residual
IEC/EN 61000-4-2 a 4-6: pruebas de inmunidad
CISPR11: pruebas de emisin de radiofrecuencia radiada y conducida
UL1053 y CSA22.2 n 144 para rels RH10, RH21 y RH99 con tensiones de alimenta-
cin hasta 220/240 V.
Rel Vigirex carril DIN
Toroidales separados
1/34
Proteccin diferencial 1
bloque Vigi o rel Vigirex (continuacin)
Interruptores automticos Vigicompact NSX100 a 630

con proteccin diferencial
La incorporacin del bloque Vigi no afecta a las caractersticas del interruptor:
cumplimiento de normas
grado de proteccin, aislamiento frontal de clase II
seccionamiento plenamente aparente
caractersticas elctricas
caractersticas de la unidad de control
modos de instalacin y conexin
auxiliares de sealizacin, medida y control
accesorios de instalacin y conexin.
Dimensiones y pesos NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630

Dimensiones 3 polos 105 236 86 135 355 110
L H P (mm) 4 polos 140 236 86 180 355 110
Peso (kg) 3 polos 2.5 8.8
4 polos 3.2 10.8
Bloques de proteccin diferencial Vigi

Cumplimiento de normas
IEC 60947-2, anexo B.
Decreto del 14 de noviembre de 1988 (para Francia).
IEC 60755, clase A, inmunidad a los componentes de c.c. hasta 6 mA
funcionamiento hasta -25 C segn VDE 664.
Sealizacin a distancia
Los bloques Vigi se pueden equipar con un contacto auxiliar (SDV) para la sealizacin
a distancia de disparo por un defecto a tierra.
Utilizacin de bloque Vigi de 4 polos con un Compact NSX de 3 polos
En una instalacin trifsica con neutro ininterrumpido, un accesorio permite utilizar un bloque
Vigi de 4 polos con conexin del cable de neutro.
Fuente de alimentacin
Los bloques Vigi se alimentan solos internamente gracias a la tensin del sistema de distri-
bucin, por lo que no necesitan ninguna fuente externa. Siguen funcionando incluso cuando
se alimentan con slo dos fases.
Seleccin de bloque Vigi

Tipo Vigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB
Nmero de polos 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NSX100 p p -
NXS160 p p -
NSX250 - p -
NSX400 - - p
NSX630 - - p
Caractersticas de proteccin
1 Ajuste de sensibilidad
2 Ajuste de temporizacin (para la proteccin selectiva de fugas Sensibilidad jo ajustable ajustable
a tierra). In (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30
3 Accesorio precintado para acceso controlado a las regulacio- Temporizacin jo ajustable ajustable
nes. Retardo < 40 0 - 60 (2) - 150 (2) - 310 (2) 0 - 60 - 150 - 310
4 Botn de prueba a n de simular un defecto a tierra para las intencionado (ms)
comprobaciones peridicas de la funcin de control
Tiempo total. < 40 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800
5 Botn de reinicio (Reset, obligatorio despus de un control por
del corte (ms)
defecto a tierra).
6 Placa de caractersticas. Tensin nominal 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550
7 Alojamiento para el contacto auxiliar SDV. Vca 50/60 Hz
(1) Los bloques Vigi 3P tambin se pueden utilizar en interruptores automticos 3P usados para la
Aparatos de conexin proteccin bifsica.
(2) Si la sensibilidad se ajusta en 30 mA, no hay temporizacin, independientemente de su ajuste.
El bloque Vigi se puede instalar en un zcalo.
Se necesitan accesorios especiales (consulte el
captulo del nmero del catlogo). Seguridad de funcionamiento
El bloque Vigi es un aparato de seguridad del usuario. Se debe probar a intervalos
peridicos (cada 6 meses).
1/35
1 Proteccin de motores
Informacin general sobre circuitos de alimentacin a motores
Los parmetros que se deben tener en cuenta Circuito de alimentacin de un motor

para la proteccin de los circuitos de motor,
Una unidad de alimentacin de un motor consta de una aparamenta para la proteccin
dependen de lo siguiente:
y el control del motor.
la aplicacin (tipo de mquina, seguridad
operativa, frecuencia de funcionamiento, etc.)
el nivel de continuidad de servicio que necesita Aislamiento
la carga o la aplicacin y proteccin contra
los cortocircuitos Interruptor automtico
las normas aplicables para la proteccin de con proteccin
personas y bienes. magntica
Las funciones elctricas necesarias son
las siguientes:
aislamiento
Conmutacin de potencia
conmutacin, por lo general en niveles altos de Contactor
resistencia
proteccin contra las sobrecargas y los
cortocircuitos, adaptada al motor
proteccin especial adicional. Proteccin contra las Proteccin trmica,
El circuito de alimentacin de motor debe cumplir sobrecargas o proteccin separada o integrada
trmica
los requisitos de la norma IEC 60947-4-1 en el interruptor automtico
relativos a los contactores y sus protecciones:
coordinacin de componentes del circuito de
alimentacin
Proteccin de motores
clases de control de rel trmico interna o especfica Funciones de
proteccin adicionales
categoras de uso del contactor
coordinacin de aislamiento.
M
Funciones de aparamenta en una unidad de alimentacin de motor.
Aislamiento
La nalidad es aislar los conductores en tensin del sistema de distribucin aguas
arriba para permitir el trabajo del personal de mantenimiento sin que corra ningn
riesgo. Esta funcin se obtiene gracias a un interruptor automtico que ofrece el corte
plenamente aparente y posibilidades de bloqueo.
Conmutacin
La nalidad es controlar el motor (ON/OFF), ya sea de forma manual, automtica
o remota, teniendo en cuenta las sobrecargas en el arranque y la necesidad de una
larga vida. Esta funcin se obtiene mediante un contactor. Cuando la bobina del elec-
troimn del contactor recibe alimentacin, el contactor se cierra y establece a travs de
los polos el circuito entre el suministro aguas arriba y el motor, a travs del interruptor
automtico.
Proteccin bsica
Proteccin contra cortocircuitos
Deteccin y corte, con la mayor rapidez posible, de altas corrientes de cortocircuito
para evitar daos en la instalacin. Esta funcin se proporciona mediante un interruptor
automtico magntico o magnetotrmico.
Proteccin contra las sobrecargas

Deteccin de corrientes de sobrecarga y desconexin del motor antes del aumento de
temperatura en el motor y de que los conductores daen el aislamiento.
Esta funcin se proporciona mediante un interruptor automtico magnetotrmico o un
rel trmico separado.
1/36
Proteccin de motores 1
Informacin general sobre circuitos de alimentacin a motores (continuacin)
Sobrecargas: I < 10 In
Se producen por lo siguiente:
un problema elctrico, relacionado con una anomala en el sistema de distribucin (por ejem-
plo, defecto de fase, tensin que no cumple las tolerancias, etc.)
un problema mecnico, relacionado con un defecto de funcionamiento de un proceso (por
ejemplo, par excesivo) o daos en el motor (por ejemplo, vibraciones de cojinete).
Estas dos causas generan adems tiempos de arranque excesivamente prolongados.
Cortocircuitos impedantes: 10 In < I < 50 In
Este tipo de cortocircuito por lo general se debe a un aislamiento deteriorado de los devanados del
motor o cables de suministro daados.
Cortocircuitos: I < 50 In
Este tipo de defecto relativamente poco habitual, puede estar producido por un error de conexin
durante el mantenimiento.
Proteccin contra desequilibrios o prdidas de fase

El desequilibrio o desfase puede producir un aumento de la temperatura y pares de fre-
nado que pueden producir un desgaste prematuro del motor. Estos efectos son an ma-
yores durante el arranque, por lo que la proteccin debe ser prcticamente inmediata.
Proteccin electrnica adicional
Rotor bloqueado
Carga insuciente
Arranques largos y rotor calado
Defectos de aislamiento.
Soluciones de unidades de alimentacin de motor

La norma IEC 60947 dene tres tipos de combinaciones de aparatos para la proteccin
de unidades de alimentacin de motor.
Tres aparatos
interruptor automtico magntico + contactor + rel trmico.
Dos aparatos
interruptor automtico magnetotrmico + contactor.
Un aparato
interruptor magnetotrmico + contactor en una solucin integrada (por ejemplo,
Tesys U).
Coordinacin de aparamenta
Los diferentes componentes de un circuito de alimentacin de motor deben coordinar-
se. La norma IEC 60947-4-1 dene tres tipos de coordinacin, en funcin de la condi-
cin de funcionamiento de la aparamenta tras una prueba normalizada de cortocircuito.
Coordinacin de tipo -1
Ningn peligro para las personas ni los bienes.
El contactor y/o el rel trmico pueden daarse.
Puede que sea necesario reparar y sustituir las partes antes de continuar con el
servicio.
Coordinacin de tipo -2
Ningn peligro para las personas ni los bienes.
No se permite ningn dao ni ajuste. El riesgo de la soldadura de contactos se acepta
siempre que se puedan separar fcilmente.
El aislamiento debe mantenerse tras el incidente, la unidad de alimentacin de motor
debe poder seguir utilizndose sin realizar reparaciones ni sustituciones de partes.
Una inspeccin rpida es suciente antes de volver a activar el servicio.
Coordinacin total
No se permite ningn dao ni ningn riesgo de soldadura de contactos en los apa-
ratos que conforman la unidad de alimentacin de motor. El circuito de alimentacin
del motor debe encontrarse en un estado ptimo para seguir utilizndose sin realizar
reparaciones ni sustitucin de partes.
Este nivel se proporciona mediante soluciones integradas de 1 aparato, como Tesys U.
1/37
Informacin general sobre circuitos de alimentacin a motores (continuacin)
Categoras de utilizacin de contactores

En una solucin concreta de circuito de alimentacin de motor, la categora de utili-
zacin determina la capacidad de resistencia del contactor en lo que respecta a la
frecuencia de funcionamiento y resistencia. La seleccin, que depende de las condi-
ciones de funcionamiento que imponga la aplicacin, puede tener como resultado un
sobredimensionamiento del contactor y la proteccin del interruptor automtico.
La norma IEC 60947 dene las siguientes categoras de utilizacin de contactores.
Categoras de utilizacin de contactores (corriente ca)

Categoras de utiliza- Tipo de carga Uso del contactor Aplicaciones tpicas
cin de contactores
AC1 No inductivas (cos u 0,8) Conexin Calefaccin, distribucin
AC2 Motor de anillos rozantes Arranque Mquina de dibujo
(cos u 0,65) Apagado del motor durante el funcionamiento
Freno regenerativo
Marcha a impulsos
AC3 Motor de jaula de ardilla Arranque Compresores, ascensores, bombas, mezclado-
(cos = 0,45 para y 100 A) Apagado del motor durante el funcionamiento ras, escaleras mecnicas, ventiladores, cintas
(cos = 0,35 para > 100 A) transportadoras, aire acondicionado
AC4 Arranque Impresoras, laminadoras
Apagado del motor durante el funcionamiento
Frenado regenerativo
Conexin
Marcha a impulsos
Categora de utilizacin AC3 - tablas de coordinacin comn para los interruptores

y los contactores
Esta categora abarca motores asncronos de jaula de ardilla que se desactivan durante
el funcionamiento, que es la situacin ms comn (85% de los casos). El contactor crea
la corriente de arranque y desactiva la corriente nominal a una tensin de aproximada-
mente una sexta parte del valor nominal. La corriente se interrumpe sin dicultad.
Las tablas de coordinacin de los contactores y los interruptores automticos de
Compact NSX se utilizan para los contactores de la categora de utilizacin AC3,
en cuyo caso garantizan una coordinacin de tipo 2.
Categora de utilizacin AC4 - posible sobredimensionamiento
Esta categora cubre motores asncronos de jaula de ardilla que pueden funcionar en
condiciones de frenado regenerativo o a impulsos. El contactor crea la corriente de
arranque y puede interrumpirla a una tensin que puede ser igual a la del sistema
de distribucin.
Con estas condiciones tan difciles es necesario sobredimensionar el contactor
y, en general, el interruptor automtico de proteccin con respecto a la categora AC3.
1/38
Caractersticas y soluciones en los circuitos de alimentacin a motores
La clase de control determina la curva de control Clase de arranque de un aparato de proteccin trmica
del aparato de proteccin trmica (curva de
El circuito de alimentacin del motor incluye proteccin trmica que puede integrarse
tiempo inversa) para los circuitos de alimentacin
en el interruptor automtico. La proteccin debe contar con una clase de control ade-
de motores. cuada para el arranque del motor. En funcin de la aplicacin, el tiempo de arranque
La norma IEC 60947-4-1 define las clases de del motor oscila entre unos segundos (arranque sin carga) a unas decenas de segun-
control 5, 10, 20 y 30. dos (carga de gran inercia).
La norma IEC 60947-4-1 dene las siguientes clases de control como una funcin del
Estas clases son las duraciones mximas, ajuste de corriente Ir de proteccin trmica.
en segundos, del arranque del motor con
una corriente de arranque de 7,2 Ir, donde Ir Clase de control de rels trmicos como una funcin de su ajuste Ir
es el ajuste trmico indicado en la placa de Clase 1,05 I r (1) 1,2 Ir (1) 1,5 Ir (2) 7,2 I r (1)
caractersticas del motor. 5 t>2h t < 2h t < 2 mn 2s<ty5s
Ejemplo: En la clase 20, el motor debe haber terminado de 10 t>2h t < 2h t < 4 mn 4 s < t y 10 s
arrancar en 20 segundos (6 a 20 s) para una corriente de arran-
que de 7,2 Ir.
20 t>2h t<2h t < 8 mn 6 s < t y 20 s
30 t>2h t<2h t < 12 mn 9 s < t y 30 s
(1) Tiempo para un motor fro (apagado y enfriamiento de motor).

(2) Tiempo para motor caliente (motor en funcionamiento en condiciones normales).
Corrientes de motores de jaula de ardilla con carga

mxima
Valores normalizados en cv
Potencia operativa Valores indicativos de las corrientes operativas nominales Ie (A) para
nominal 110 - 120 V 200 V 208 V 220 - 240 V 380 - 415 V 440 - 480 V 550 - 600 V
cv
1/2 4.4 2.5 2.4 2.2 1.3 1.1 0.9
3/4 6.4 3.7 3.5 3.2 1.8 1.6 1.3
1 8.4 4.8 4.6 4.2 2.3 2.1 1.7
1 1/2 12 6.9 6.6 6 3.3 3 2.4
2 13.6 7.8 7.5 6.8 4.3 3.4 2.7
3 19.2 11 10.6 9.6 6.1 4.8 3.9
5 30.4 17.5 16.7 15.2 9.7 7.6 6.1
7 1/2 44 25.3 24.2 22 14 11 9
10 56 32.2 30.8 28 18 14 11
15 84 48.3 46.2 42 27 21 17
20 108 62.1 59.4 54 34 27 22
25 136 78.2 74.8 68 44 34 27
30 160 92 88 80 51 40 32
40 208 120 114 104 66 52 41
50 260 150 143 130 83 65 52
60 - 177 169 154 103 77 62
75 - 221 211 192 128 96 77
100 - 285 273 248 165 124 99
125 - 359 343 312 208 156 125
150 - 414 396 360 240 180 144
200 - 552 528 480 320 240 192
250 - - - 604 403 302 242
300 - - - 722 482 361 289
Nota: 1 cv = 0,7457 kW
1/39
Caractersticas y soluciones en los circuitos de alimentacin a motores
(continuacin)
Valores normalizados en kW
Potencia operativa Corrientes Ie (A) para:
td nominal
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Duracin kW A A A A
de arranque
0.06 0.35 0.32 0.16 0.12
td
0.09 0.52 0.3 0.24 0.17
0.12 0.7 0.44 0.32 0.23
Ir Id Id
0.18 1 0.6 0.48 0.35
0.25 1.5 0.85 0.68 0.49
Curva de arranque de motor tpica
0.37 1.9 1.1 0.88 0.64
0.55 2.6 1.5 1.2 0.87
0.75 3.3 1.9 1.5 1.1
1.1 4.7 2.7 2.2 1.6
1.5 6.3 3.6 2.9 2.1
2.2 8.5 4.9 3.9 2.8
3 11.3 6.5 5.2 3.8
4 15 8.5 6.8 4.9
5.5 20 11.5 9.2 6.7
7.5 27 15.5 12.4 8.9
11 38 22 17.6 12.8
15 51 29 23 17
18.5 61 35 28 21
22 72 41 33 24
30 96 55 44 32
37 115 66 53 39
45 140 80 64 47
55 169 97 78 57
75 230 132 106 77
90 278 160 128 93
110 340 195 156 113
132 400 230 184 134
160 487 280 224 162
200 609 350 280 203
250 748 430 344 250
315 940 540 432 313
Parmetros de arranque de motores asncronos

A continuacin, se indican los parmetros principales del arranque directo en lnea de
los motores asncronos trifsicos (90% de todas las aplicaciones).
Ir: corriente nominal
Esta es la corriente generada por el motor a plena carga nominal (por ejemplo, aproxi-
madamente 100 A rms para 55 kW a 400 V).
Id: corriente de arranque
Esta es la corriente generada por el motor durante el arranque, una media de 7,2 In para
una duracin td de 5 a 30 segundos, en funcin de la aplicacin (por ejemplo, 720 A rms
durante 10 segundos). Estos valores determinan la clase de control y cualquier aparato de
proteccin adicional de "arranque largo" que puedan ser necesarios.
Id: corriente de pico de arranque
Esta es la corriente subtransitoria durante las dos primeras ondas medias cuando el sistema
se enciende, una media de 14 In durante 10 a 15 ms (por ejemplo, 1.840 A mximo).
Las regulaciones de proteccin deben proteger de forma ecaz el motor, sobre todo
mediante una clase de arranque idnea para rel trmico, pero deben permitir el paso de la
corriente de arranque mxima.
1/40
Soluciones para los circuitos de alimentacin de motores con Compact NSX
Los interruptores automticos para motores Gama de proteccin de motor Compact NSX
Compact NSX se han diseado para las soluciones
Las unidades de control Compact NSX se pueden utilizar para crear soluciones
de unidades de arranque de motor mediante lo
de circuitos de alimentacin de motor que consten de dos o tres aparatos.
siguiente: Los aparatos de proteccin se han diseado para el servicio continuo a 65C.
tres aparatos, incluida una unidad de control Soluciones de tres aparatos
nicamente magntica MA o 1.3-M 1 interruptor automtico NSX con una unidad de control MA o Micrologic 1.3-M
dos aparatos, incluida una unidad de control 1 contactor
magnetotrmica TM-D o 2-M. 1 rel trmico.
Soluciones de dos aparatos
Se han diseado para utilizarse con contactores
en la categora de utilizacin AC3 (80% de todos 1 interruptor automtico Compact NSX
con una unidad de control electrnica Micrologic 2.2-M o 2.3-M
los casos) y garantizan una coordinacin de tipo
con una unidad de control electrnica Micrologic 6 E-M. Esta versin ofrece protec-
2 con el contactor.
cin adicional y funciones de Power Meter.
Para la categora de utilizacin AC4, las 1 contactor.
condiciones difciles, hacen necesario por
lo general sobredimensionar el interruptor
automtico de proteccin con respecto a la
categora AC3.
Tipo de proteccin 3 aparatos 2 aparatos

de motor
Interruptor automtico NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630 NSX100 a 630
Compact NSX
Coordinacin de tipo Contactor + rel trmico Contactor
2 con
Unidad de Tipo MA Micrologic 1.3-M Micrologic 2-M Micrologic 6 E-M
control Tecnologa Magntica Electrnica Electrnica Electrnica
Rel trmico Separado p p

Integrado, clase 5 p p
10 p p
20 p p
30 p
Funciones de proteccin del interruptor automtico Compact NSX
Cortocircuitos p p p p
Sobrecargas p p
Defectos de Defecto a tierra p
aislamiento
Funciones de Desequilibrio de fase p p
motor espe-
ciales
Rotor bloqueado p
Carga insuciente p
Arranque prolongado p
Funciones de Power Meter integradas
I, U, energa p
Contadores (ciclos, p
controles, alarmas,
horas)
Selector de desgaste p
de los contactos
Perl de carga e ima- p
gen trmica
1/41
Unidades de control magnticas MA y Micrologic 1.3-M
Las unidades de control magntico MA se utilizan Unidades de control magnticas MA

en soluciones de circuitos de alimentacin de
motores con 3 aparatos. Se pueden instalar con
todos los interruptores automticos Compact
NSX100/160/250 con niveles de poder de corte
F/H/N/S/L.
Ofrecen proteccin contra cortocircuitos para
motores de hasta 110 kW a 400 V. Los interruptores automticos con una unidad de control MA se combinan con un rel
trmico y un contactor o un arrancador.
Proteccin
Las unidades de control Micrologic 1.3-M
se utilizan en soluciones de circuitos de Proteccin contra los cortocircuitos con una Im de umbral regulable con disparo instan-
alimentacin de motores con 3 aparatos con tneo si se supera.
Im = In ... se establece en un selector de ajuste en mltiplos del calibre de la uni-
interruptores automticos Compact NSX400/630
dad de control:
con niveles de poder de corte H/N/S/L.
6 a 14 In (caractersticas de 2,5 a 100 A)
Ofrecen proteccin contra cortocircuitos para 9 a 14 In (caractersticas de 150 a 200 A)
motores de hasta 250 kW a 400 V. Modelo de proteccin
Tambin ofrecen las ventajas de la tecnologa 3 polos (3P 3R): tamao de 3 polos (3P) equipado con proteccin en los 3 polos (3R).
electrnica:
Unidades de control Micrologic 1.3-M
regulaciones precisas
Preparado
50A
pruebas
LED "Ready" (preparado).
Los interruptores automticos con una unidad de control Micrologic 1.3-M se combinan
con un rel trmico y un contactor.
Proteccin
Los regulaciones se realizan con un regulador.
Proteccin con Isd de umbral regulable. Se produce una temporizacin muy breve para
permitir el pico de corriente de arranque de motor.
Isd se ajusta en amperios de 5 a 13 In, tal y como se indica a continuacin:
de 1.600 a 4.160 A para calibre 320 A.
de 2.500 a 6.500 A para calibre 500 A.
Cortocircuitos: Proteccin instantnea no regulable (li)
Proteccin instantnea con umbral no regulable Ii.
Modelo de proteccin
3 polos (3R): tamao de 3 polos (3P) equipado con proteccin en los 3 polos (3R).
Sealizaciones
LED verde Ready: parpadea lentamente cuando el interruptor automtico funciona
correctamente.

1/42
Unidades de control magnticas MA y Micrologic 1.3-M (continuacin)
Unidades de control magntico MA 2,5 a 220

(1)
Caractersticas (A) In a 65 C 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p p p p p - -
Compact NSX160 - - - p p p p -
Compact NSX250 - - - - - p p p
Proteccin magntica instantnea
Activacin (A) Im = In ... Regulable de 6 a 14 In Regulable de 9 a 14 In
precisin 20% (regulaciones 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14) (ajuste 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14)
Temporizacin (ms) tm jo
Micrologic 1.3-M
Caractersticas (A) In a 65 C (1) 320 500
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX400 p -
Compact NSX630 p p
S Proteccin de corto retardo
Activacin (A) Isd Regulable directamente en amps
precisin 15 % 9 regulaciones: 1.600, 1.920, 2.440, 9 regulaciones: 2.500, 3.000, 3.500,
2.560, 2.880, 3.200, 3.520, 3.840, 4.000, 4.500, 5.000, 5.500, 6.000,
4.160 A 6.500 A
Temporizacin (ms) tsd No regulable
Tiempo mximo de sobre-
intensidad 20
Tiempo total de corte 60
Activacin (A) Ii no regulable 4800 6500
precisin 15 % Tiempo mximo de sobre-
intensidad 0
Tiempo total de corte 30 ms
(1) Los estndares de los motores requieren un funcionamiento a 65 C. Las clasicaciones de los interruptores automticos se reducen para
tener en cuenta este requisito.
1/43
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 2-M
Las unidades de control Micrologic 2-M ofrecen
Alarma
Preparado
proteccin magntica y trmica integrada.
Clase
Se utilizan como soluciones de circuitos de
alimentacin de motor con 2 aparatos, en Clase
interruptores automticos Compact NSX100

a 630 con niveles de poder de corte F/H/N/S/L.
Ofrecen proteccin para motores de hasta Los interruptores automticos con una unidad de control Micrologic 2.2 / 2.3-M incluyen
315 kW a 400 V frente a: una proteccin similar a un rel trmico inverso. Se combinan con un contactor.
cortocircuitos
Proteccin
sobrecargas con seleccin de clase de control Los regulaciones se realizan con un regulador.
(5, 10 20)
Sobrecargas (o proteccin trmica): Proteccin de largo retardo y clases de control
desequilibrio de fases. (Ir)
Proteccin trmica inversa contra sobrecargas con umbral regulable Ir.
Los regulaciones se realizan en amperios. La curva de disparo para la proteccin de
largo retardo, que indica la temporizacin tr antes del disparo, se dene mediante las
clases de disparo seleccionadas.
Clase de disparo (clase)
La clase se selecciona como una funcin del tiempo de arranque de motor normal.
Clase 5: tiempo de arranque inferior a 5 s
Para una clase determinada, es necesario comprobar que todos los componentes de
la unidad de alimentacin del motor estn dimensionados para soportar la corriente de
arranque de 7,2 Ir sin un aumento de temperatura excesivo durante el tiempo corres-
pondiente a la clase.
Proteccin con umbral regulable Isd. Se produce una temporizacin muy breve para
permitir el pico de corriente de arranque de motor.
Proteccin instantnea con umbral no regulable Ii.
Desequilibrio de fases o prdida de fase (lunbal) ( )
Bloque de rel de sealizacin remota SDTAM con su bornero.
Esta funcin abre el interruptor automtico si se produce un desequilibrio de fase:
que sea superior al 30% de la activacin ja Iunbal
tras la temporizacin no regulable tunbal igual a:
0,7 s durante el arranque
4 s durante el funcionamiento normal.
La prdida de fase es un caso extremo de desequilibrio de fase y produce el disparo
en las mismas condiciones.
Sealizaciones
LED verde Ready: parpadea lentamente cuando el interruptor automtico est listo
para dispararse en caso de defecto.
LED rojo de alarma de funcionamiento del motor: se enciende cuando la imagen tr-
mica del rotor y del estator es superior al 95% del aumento de temperatura permisible.
Sealizaciones a distancia por medio de un bloque SDTAM
Los aparatos Compact NSX con un Micrologic 2 se pueden equipar con un bloque
SDTAM dedicado a las aplicaciones de motor para:
un contacto para indicar la sobrecarga de un interruptor automtico
un contacto para abrir el contactor. En caso de un desequilibrio de fase o una sobre-
carga, esta salida se activa 400 ms antes del disparo del interruptor automtico para
abrir el contactor y evitar el disparo del interruptor automtico.
Este bloque sustituye a las bobinas MN/MX y al contacto NANC.

1/44
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 2-M (continuacin)
Micrologic 2.2 / 2.3-M

Caractersticas (A) In a 65 C (1) 25 50 100 150 220 320 500
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p p - - - -
Compact NSX160 p p p p - - -
Compact NSX250 p p p p p - -
Compact NSX400 - - - - - p - Clase
Compact NSX630 - - - - - p p
L Sobrecargas (o proteccin trmica): Proteccin de largo retardo y clase de disparo
Umbral (A) Ir el valor depende de la especicacin de la unidad de control (In) y el ajuste en
disparo entre el selector
1,05 y 1,20 Ir In = 25 A Ir = 12 14 16 18 20 22 23 24 25
In = 50 A Ir = 25 30 32 36 40 42 45 47 50
In = 100 A Ir = 50 60 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
In = 150 A Ir = 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
In = 220 A Ir = 100 120 140 155 170 185 200 210 220
In = 320 A Ir = 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320
In = 500 A Ir = 250 280 320 350 380 400 440 470 500
Clase de disparo segn IEC 60947-4-1 5 10 20
Temporizacin (s) tr 1,5 Ir 120 240 480 para motor caliente
en funcin de la clase de disparo seleccionada 6 Ir 6.5 13.5 26 para motor fro
7,2 Ir 5 10 20 para motor fro
Ventilador de refrigeracin no regulable - motor con auto-refrigeracin
S0 Cortocircuitos: Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin fija
Umbral (A) Isd = Ir ... 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
precisin 15%
Tiempo mximo de sobrein-
tensidad 20
Tiempo total de corte 60 (1) Los estndares de
los motores requieren
I Cortocircuitos: Proteccin instantnea no regulable
un funcionamiento a
Umbral (A) li no regulable 425 750 1500 2250 3300 4800 6500 65C. Las clasicacio-
precisin 15% nes de los interruptores
Temporizacin (ms) Tiempo mximo de sobrein- automticos se reducen
tensidad 0 para
Tiempo total de corte 30 tener en cuenta este
Desequilibrio de fase o prdida de fase requisito.
Umbral (A) Iunbal en % de corriente > 30 % (2) La medida de
precisin 20% media (2) desequilibrio tiene
Temporizacin (s) no regulable 0,7 s durante el arranque en cuenta la fase de
4 s durante el funcionamiento normal ms desequilibrio con
respecto a la corriente
media.
Desequilibrio de fase Zona de motor
apagado
1 a 200 s
Se produce un desequilibrio en sistemas trifsicos cuando las tres tensiones no son iguales en amplitud y/o no se desplazan 120 entre s. Esto
se debe por lo general a cargas de una sola fase que se distribuyen de forma incorrecta por el sistema y desequilibran las tensiones entre las
Retorno
fases. Lmite de
duracin de
Estos desequilibrios crean componentes de corriente negativa que generan pares de frenado y aumentos de temperatura en las mquinas arranque largo
asncronas, con lo que se produce un envejecimiento prematuro. Duracin

de arranque
Prdida de fase
La prdida de fase es un caso especial de un desequilibrio de fase. Superacin
Durante el funcionamiento normal, produce los efectos mencionados anteriormente y la activacin debe producirse tras cuatro segundos. 10 % Ir Ir
1,5 Ir (Micrologic 2-M) o
llong (Micrologic 6 E-M)
Durante el arranque, la ausencia de una fase puede producir la inversin del motor, es decir, es la carga la que determina la direccin de
rotacin. Esto requiere un control prcticamente inmediato (0,7 segundos).
Tiempo de arranque segn la clase (Micrologic 2-M)
Para el arranque de motor normal, Micrologic 2-M comprueba las condiciones indicadas a continuacin con respecto a la activacin de protec-
cin trmica (de largo retardo) Ir:
corriente > 10% Ir (motor fuera de lmite)
superacin de 1,5 Ir umbral, y a continuacin vuelve por debajo de este umbral antes de que nalice una temporizacin de 10 s.
Si no se cumple alguna de estas condiciones, la proteccin trmica dispara el aparato tras un tiempo mximo igual al de la clase seleccionada.
La activacin Ir debe haberse ajustado a la corriente indicada en la placa de caractersticas del motor.
Arranques largos (Micrologic 6 E-M)
Si esta funcin no est activada, las condiciones de arranque son las indicadas anteriormente.
Si se activa, esta proteccin complementa la proteccin trmica (clase). Desequilibrio de corrientes de
Un arranque prolongado provoca la activacin y se caracteriza por lo siguiente: fase y tensiones
corriente > 10% Ir (motor fuera de lmite) con:
superacin de la activacin de tiempo prolongado (1 a 8 Ir) sin volver por debajo de la activacin antes del nal de la temporizacin de largo
retardo (1 a 200 s)
o bien, sin superacin de la activacin de tiempo prolongado (1 a 8 Ir) antes del nal de la temporizacin de largo retardo (1 a 200 s).
La activacin Ir debe haberse ajustado a la corriente indicada en la placa de caractersticas del motor.
Esta proteccin debe coordinarse con la clase seleccionada.
1/45
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6-M
Micrologic 6.E-M se utiliza como solucin en
Alarma
Preparado
circuitos de alimentacin de motores con
2 aparatos.
Ofrece la misma proteccin que Micrologic 2-M:
cortocircuitos
sobrecargas con seleccin de las mismas clases Proteccin
de disparo (5, 10 20), ms la clase de disparo Las funciones de proteccin son idnticas a las de la unidad de control
30 para el arranque de mquinas con gran inercia. Micrologic 2-M y se pueden ajustar con precisin a travs del teclado . El acceso
Adems, ofrece funciones de proteccin de motor a la modicacin de los regulaciones a travs del teclado se protege mediante una
especficas que pueden ajustarse a travs del funcin de bloqueo que se controla por medio de un micro-contacto . El bloqueo
se activa automticamente si el teclado no se utiliza durante 5 minutos. El acceso al
teclado.
micro-contacto est protegido mediante una tapa transparente con precinto. Es posible
desplazarse por los regulaciones y las medidas con la cubierta cerrada.
Sobrecargas (o trmicas), clase y cortocircuitos
Las funciones de corto retardo, de largo retardo e instantnea son idnticas a las del
Micrologic 2-M. Adems, existe una clase de control 30 para la proteccin a largo
retardo y un ajuste para motores con auto-refrigeracin o con refrigeracin mediante
ventiladores ( ).
Proteccin de defecto a tierra (Ig)
Proteccin residual de defecto a tierra con una activacin regulable Ig (con posicin
Off) y temporizacin regulable tg.
Desequilibrio de fase o prdida de fase (lunbal)
Esta funcin abre el interruptor automtico si se produce un desequilibrio de fase:
que sea superior a la activacin de Iunbal que puede ajustarse con precisin de
10 a 40% (30% de forma predeterminada)
tras la temporizacin tunbal que es:
0,7 s durante el arranque
se puede ajustar de 1 a 10 segundos (4 segundos de forma predeterminada) durante
el funcionamiento normal.
La prdida de fase es un caso extremo de desequilibrio de fase y produce el disparo
en las mismas condiciones.
Bloque de rel de sealizacin remota SDTAM con su bornero.
Rotor bloqueado (Ijam)
Esta funcin detecta el bloqueo del eje del motor producido por la carga.
Durante el arranque del motor (ver pg. 1/45), la funcin se encuentra desactivada.
Durante el funcionamiento normal, produce el disparo:
por encima de la activacin Ijam que puede ajustarse con precisin de 1 a 8 Ir
junto con la temporizacin tjam que puede ajustarse de 1 a 30 segundos.
Subcarga (Iund)
Esta funcin detecta el funcionamiento del motor sin carga debido a una carga insu-
ciente (por ejemplo, una bomba que se ha drenado). Detecta la subintensidad de fase.
Durante el arranque del motor (ver pg. 1/45), la funcin se encuentra siempre activada.
Durante el funcionamiento normal, produce el control:
Sealizacin por debajo de la activacin lund que puede ajustarse con precisin de 0,3 a 0,9 Ir
Sealizaciones frontales junto con la temporizacin tund que puede ajustarse de 1 a 200 segundos.
LED verde Ready: parpadea lentamente cuando el Arranques largos (Ilong)
interruptor automtico est listo para dispararse en caso
Esta proteccin sirve de complemento a la proteccin trmica (clase). Se utiliza para
de defecto.
ajustar mejor la proteccin a los parmetros de arranque. Detecta el arranque anmalo
LED rojo de alarma de funcionamiento del motor:
del motor, es decir, cuando la corriente de arranque sigue siendo demasiado alta o
se enciende cuando la imagen trmica del rotor o del
demasiado baja con respecto a un valor de activacin y una temporizacin.
estator es superior al 95% del aumento de temperatura
Provoca el control:
permisible.
en relacin con una activacin llong que puede ajustarse con precisin de 1 a 8 Ir
Sealizaciones a distancia por medio de un bloque junto con la temporizacin tlong que puede ajustarse de 1 a 200 segundos.
SDTAM o SDx (ver "arranques largos" pg. 1/45)
Ver la descripcin en la pg. 1/44 para SDTAM y en la
pg. 1/85 para SDx. Visualizacin del tipo de defecto
En un disparo por defecto, se muestran el tipo de defecto (Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig, lunbal,
ljam), la fase en cuestin y la corriente interrumpida.
1/46
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6-M (continuacin)
Micrologic 6.2 / 6.3 E-M

Caractersticas (A) In a 65C (1) 25 50 80 150 220 320 500
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p p - - - -
Compact NSX160 p p p p - - -
Compact NSX250 p p p p p - -
Compact NSX400 - - - - - p - Clase
Compact NSX630 - - - - - p p
L Sobrecargas: Proteccin de largo retardo
Umbral (A) Ir Ajuste de selector El valor depende del calibre de la unidad de control (In) y el ajuste en el selector
Disparo entre In = 25 A Ir = 12 14 16 18 20 22 23 24 25
1,05 y 1,20 Ir In = 50 A Ir = 25 30 32 36 40 42 45 47 50
In = 80 A Ir = 35 42 47 52 57 60 65 72 80
In = 150 A Ir = 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
In = 220 A Ir = 100 120 140 155 170 185 200 210 220
In = 320 A Ir = 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320
In = 500 A Ir = 250 280 320 350 380 400 440 470 500
Ajuste de teclado Regulaciones nas en pasos de 1 A por debajo del valor mximo ajustado en el selector
Clase de control segn IEC 60947-4-1 5 10 20 30
Temporizacin (s) tr 1,5 Ir 120 240 480 720 para motor caliente
en funcin de la clase de control seleccionada 6 Ir 6.5 13.5 26 38 para motor fro
7,2 Ir 5 10 20 30 para motor fro
Ventilador de refrigeracin Regulaciones para motores con auto-refrigeracin o con refrigeracin mediante ventiladores
S0 Cortocircuitos: Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin fija
Umbral (A) Isd = Ir ... 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
precisin 15% tsd no regulable
Temporizacin (ms) Tiempo mximo de sobreinten- 20
sidad
I Cortocircuitos: Proteccin instantnea no regulable
Umbral (A) Ii no regulable 425 750 1200 2250 3300 4800 6500
precisin 15% Tiempo mximo de sobreinten- 0 ms
sidad
G Defecto a tierra
Umbral (A) Ig = In ... Ajuste de selector
precisin 10% In = 25 A Ig = 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Apagado
In = 50 A Ig = 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Apagado
In > 50 A Ig = 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 1 Apagado
regulaciones nas en pasos de 0,05 In
Temporizacin (ms) tg 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Tiempo mximo de sobreinten- 20 80 140 230 350
sidad
Tiempo total de corte 80 140 200 320 500
Desequilibrio de fase o prdida de fase
Umbral (A) lunbal = en % de corriente media (2) se puede ajustar de 10 a 40%, ajuste predeterminado = 30%
precisin 20% regulaciones con precisin en pasos de 1% con el teclado
se activa durante el arranque del motor
Temporizacin (s) tunbal 0,7s durante el arranque
de 1 a 10 segundos durante el funcionamiento normal, ajuste predeterminado = 4
segundos, regulaciones con precisin en pasos de 1 s con el teclado
Rotor bloqueado
Umbral (A) Ijam = Ir ... 1 8 Ir con posicin Off, ajuste predeterminado = Off
precisin 10% ajuste preciso en pasos de 0,1 Ir usando el teclado, inibido durante el arranque
del motor
Temporizacin (s) tjam = de 1 a 30 segundos
regulaciones con precisin en pasos de 1s con el teclado, ajuste predeterminado = 5s
Carga insuficiente (corriente insuficiente) (1) Los estndares
Umbral (A) Iund = Ir ... 0,3 0,9 Ir con posicin Off, ajuste predeterminado = Off de los motores
precisin 10% requieren un funcio-
Regulaciones con precisin en Ir pasos de 0,01 con el software RSU, se activa
namiento a 65C.
durante el arranque del motor
Las clasicaciones
Temporizacin (s) tund = de 1 a 200 segundos
de los interruptores
regulaciones con precisin en pasos de 1s con el software RSU, ajuste predeter-
automticos se re-
minado = 10s
ducen para tener en
Arranques prolongados cuenta este requisito.
Umbral (A) Ilong = Ir ... 1 8 Ir con posicin Off, ajuste predeterminado = Off (2) La medida de
precisin 10 % Regulaciones con precisin en Ir x pasos de 0,01 con el software RSU, se activa desequilibrio tiene
durante el arranque del motor en cuenta la fase de
Temporizacin (s) tlong = de 1 a 200 segundos ms desequilibrio
regulaciones con precisin en pasos de 1 s con el software RSU, ajuste predeter- con respecto a la
minado = 10s corriente media.
1/47
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6 E-M (continuacin)
La unidad de control Micrologic 6 E-M ofrece Funciones de Power Meter

funciones de Power Meter con medida de energa.
Las funciones integradas de Power Meter de la unidad de control Micrologic 6 E-M son
Con la pantalla de visualizacin de FDM121,
las mismas que las de la unidad de control Micrologic 6-E presentadas en la seccin
todos los datos de medida y los selectores de sobre distribucin (ver pg. 1/20). Cuando se utilizan exclusivamente en la versin trifsi-
funcionamiento se encuentran disponibles en ca, se excluyen las medidas de neutro.
el panel frontal del cuadro de distribucin. Esta
versin tambin muestra la imagen trmica del Funciones de ayuda en el funcionamiento
motor.
Las funciones de ayuda a la explotacin de la unidad de control Micrologic 6 E-M son
las mismas que las de la unidad de control Micrologic 6-E presentadas en la seccin
sobre distribucin (ver pg. 1/22).
Funciones especiales para unidades de alimentacin de motor
Se encuentran disponibles funciones de funcionamiento adicionales especcamente
para las unidades de alimentacin del motor.
Secuencia de fases
El orden en el que se conectan las fases L1, L2, L3 determina la direccin de la rotacin
del motor. Si se invierten dos fases, la direccin se invierte.
Se ofrece informacin sobre la direccin de rotacin. Se puede enlazar a una alarma
para detectar una inversin en la direccin tras una reparacin sin tensin e impedir el
arranque.
Micrologic 6 E-M. Imagen trmica del rotor y el estator

La unidad de control Micrologic 6 E-M ofrece una funcin de imagen trmica.
Teniendo en cuenta el ajuste de Ir y la clase, un algoritmo simula el aumento de
I
165 A % 100 120

temperatura del rotor y el estator. Incluye el aumento lento de temperatura del estator
I1
y el peso del metal. Tambin se incluye el aumento de temperatura rpida del rotor de
I2
165 A % 100 120
motor = 97% cobre.
164A % 100 120
I3 La funcin de proteccin trmica dispara el interruptor automtico cuando la imagen
ESC ESC trmica calculada llega al 100% del aumento de temperatura permisible.
La comunicacin indica el valor de la imagen trmica como un porcentaje del aumento
de temperatura permisible. Se puede asignar una o ms alarmas a los umbrales selec-
cionados. Un LED rojo en la parte frontal indica que el valor supera el 95%.
Valores de corriente. Alarma de imagen trmica. Se puede utilizar un bloque SDx con dos salidas programadas para los valores de
imagen trmica para implementar otras funciones de alarma.
Pantalla de PC con imagen trmica del motor y supervisin del

valor.
Las caractersticas tcnicas adicionales son idnticas a las de Micrologic 6-E (ver pgs. A-21 y A-23).
1/48
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6 E-M (continuacin)
(1) Modo absoluto: E absoluto = E de salida + E de entrada;

modo con signo: E con signo = E de salida - E de entrada
(2) Disponible a travs del sistema de comunicacin.
(3) Se necesita el bloque BSCM (pg. 1/27) para estas funciones.
Funciones integradas de Power Meter y ayuda en el funcionamiento de Micrologic 6 E-M Visualizador

Micrologic Pantalla de
LCD visualizacin
FDM121
Medidas
Medidas rms instantneas
Corrientes (A) Corrientes de fase y valor medio I1, I2, I3 y Iavg = (I1 + I2 + I3) / 3 p p
La corriente mayor de las 3 fases Imax de I1, I2, I3 p p
Proteccin de defecto a tierra % Ig (ajuste de activacin) p p
Desequilibrio de corriente entre fases % Iavg - p
Tensiones (V) Tensiones de fase a fase y valor medio U12, U23, U31 y Uavg = (U12 + U21 + U23) / 3 p p
Desequilibrio entre tensiones de fase a fase % Uavg - p
Secuencia de fases 1-2-3, 1-3-2 p -
Frecuencia (Hz) Sistema de alimentacin F p p
Alimentacin Activa (kW), reactiva (kVAR) y aparente (kVA) P, Q, S total y por fase - p
Factor de potencia y cos (fundamental) PF, cos , total y por fase - p
Mximos y mnimos Asociados a medidas instantneas rms Reinicio a travs de Micrologic y la pantalla de visualizacin - p
Medida de energa
Energa Activa (kWh), reactiva (kVARh), aparente (kVAh) Total desde el ltimo reinicio p p
Modo con signo o absoluto (1) - p
(2)
Intensidad absorbida Fases Valor presente en la ventana seleccionada -
(2)
(A) Demanda mxima desde el ltimo reinicio -
(2)
Potencia de demanda Activa (kWh), reactiva (kVARh) Valor presente en la ventana seleccionada -
(2)
y aparente (kVAh) Demanda mxima desde el ltimo reinicio -
(2)
Ventana de clculo Deslizante, jo o sincronizado com. Regulable de 5 a 60 minutos en pasos de 1 minuto -
Modo con signo o absoluto (1) - (2)
Distorsin total De la tensin con respecto al valor rms THDU, THDV de la tensin Ph-Ph y Ph-N - p
de armnicos (%) De la corriente con respecto al valor rms THDI de la corriente de fase - p
Alarmas personalizadas
Regulaciones Se pueden asignar hasta 10 alarmas a todas las medidas y eventos, as como a adelanto/retraso de fase, - (2)
cuatro cuadrantes, secuencia de fases e imagen trmica - (2)
Historiales fechados
(2)
Controles ltimos 17 Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig, Iunbal, Ijam, Iund, Ilong -
(2)
Alarmas ltimos 10 -
(2)
Eventos 10 ltimos eventos y tipo: Modicacin del ajuste de proteccin mediante selector -
de funcionamiento Apertura del bloqueo de teclado - (2)
(2)
Prueba a travs del teclado -
(2)
Prueba a travs de herramienta externa -
(2)
Fechado (fecha y hora) -
(2)
Reinicio para maxmetro/minmetro y medidor de energa p
(2)
Fechado Presentacin Fecha y hora, texto, estado -
Tablas de eventos fechados
(2)
Regulaciones de Una de las siguientes regulaciones modicadas Ir tr Isd tsd Ii Ig tg -
proteccin Sealizacin de hora de la modicacin Fecha y hora de la modicacin - (2)
(2)
Valor anterior Valor antes de la modicacin -
(2)
Mn./Mx. Valor supervisado I1 I2 I3 U12 U23 U31 f -
(2)
Sealizacin de fecha del valor mn./mx. Fecha y hora de registro -
(2)
Valor mn./mx. presente Mn./mx. registrado para el valor -
Selectores de mantenimiento
Contador Ciclos mecnicos (3) Asignable a una alarma - (2)
Ciclos elctricos (3) Asignable a una alarma - (2)
(2)
Controles Uno por tipo de control -
(2)
Alarmas Uno para cada tipo de alarma -
(2)
Horas Tiempo total de funcionamiento (horas) -
Selector Desgaste de contacto % - p
(2)
Perl de carga Horas en diferentes niveles de carga % de horas en cuatro rangos de corriente: 0-49% In, 50- -
79% In, 80-89% In, u 90% In
(2)
Imagen trmica Estator y rotor % de aumento de temperatura permisible -
1/49
1 Aplicaciones especiales
Proteccin de generadores con las unidades de control Micrologic 2.2-G
Las unidades de control Micrologic G se utilizan
Preparado
Alarma
para la proteccin de sistemas alimentados
por generadores o que incluyan cables de
grandes longitudes. Se pueden montar en
todos los interruptores automticos Compact
NSX100/160/250.
Al presentar amplias posibilidades de ajuste, Los interruptores automticos equipados con unidades de control Micrologic G prote-
las unidades de control Micrologic 5 ofrece las gen los sistemas alimentados por generadores (corrientes de cortocircuito ms bajas
mismas funciones desde 100 hasta 630 A. que con transformadores) y los sistemas de distribucin que incluyan cables de gran-
des longitudes (las corrientes de defecto se limitan por la impedancia del cable).
Tambin se encuentra disponible una unidad
de control magnetotrmica para el NSX100 Proteccin
(consultar la pg. 1/15).
La conguracin se realiza usando los selectores de ajuste con los que se
pueden realizar regulaciones precisas.
Sobrecargas: Proteccin de largo retardo (Ir)
Proteccin trmica inversa contra las sobrecargas con una activacin de corriente
regulable Ir y una temporizacin muy breve no regulable tr (15 segundos para 1,5 Ir).
Cortocircuitos: Proteccin de corto retardo (lsd) con temporizacin fija
Proteccin contra cortocircuitos con activacin regulable Isd, temporizada a 200 ms,
segn los requisitos de las empresas de clasicacin marina.
Proteccin contra cortocircuitos instantnea con activacin ja necesaria para la pro-
teccin de los generadores.
Proteccin de neutro
En los interruptores automticos de 3 polos, la proteccin de neutro no es posible.
En los interruptores automticos de 4 polos, la proteccin del neutro se puede ajustar
con un interruptor de tres posiciones:
4P 3R: neutro sin proteger
4P 3R + N/2: proteccin de neutro a la mitad del valor de fase, es decir, 0,5 Ir
4P 4R: neutro totalmente protegido a Ir.
Sealizacin
Preparado
Alarma
LED verde Ready: parpadea lentamente cuando el interruptor automtico est listo
para disparar en caso de defecto.
LED rojo de sobrecarga: jo cuando I > 105% Ir
Sealizaciones a distancia
Se puede utilizar un bloque de rel SDx instalado dentro del interruptor automtico para
utilizar de forma remota la seal de control por sobrecarga.
ptico para que est disponible en el bornero. La seal se elimina cuando se vuelve a
cerrar el interruptor automtico.
El bloque se describe detalladamente en la seccin que trata de los accesorios.
1/50
Aplicaciones especiales 1
Proteccin de generadores con las unidades de control Micrologic 2.2-G
(continuacin)
Micrologic 2.2-G
Especificaciones (A) In a 40C (1) 40 100 160 250
Interruptor automtico Compact NSX100 p p - -
Compact NSX160 p p p -
Compact NSX250 p p p p
L Proteccin largo retardo
Umbral (A) Io el valor depende del calibre de la unidad de control (In) y el ajuste en el Ii
disparo entre selector
1,05 y 1,20 Ir In = 40 A Io = 18 18 20 23 25 28 32 36 40
In = 100 A Io = 40 45 50 55 63 70 80 90 100
In = 160 A Io = 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 150 160
In = 250 A (NSX250) Io = 100 110 125 140 150 176 200 225 250
Ir = Io ... 9 regulaciones precisas de 0,9 a 1 para cada valor de Io
Temporizacin (s) tr no regulable
precisin de 0 a -20% 1,5 Ir 15
6 Ir 0,5
p 7,2 Ir 0,35
Memoria trmica 20 minutos antes y despus del disparo
S0 Proteccin de corto retardo con temporizacin fija
Umbral (A) Isd = Ir ... 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6
precisin 10% 7 8 9
Tiempo mximo de sobreinten- 140
sidad
I Proteccin instantnea no regulable
Umbral (A) li no regulable 600 1.500 2.400 3.000
precisin 15 % Tiempo mximo de sobreinten- 15 ms
sidad
(1) Si las unidades de control se utilizan en entornos de alta temperatura, la conguracin de Micrologic debe tener en cuenta los lmites trmicos del interruptor automtico.
Consulte la tabla de decalaje de temperatura.
1/51
Proteccin de aplicaciones de control industrial
Tambin se incluyen interruptores automticos Equipamiento para mquinas

Compact NSX en los paneles de control industrial.
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX equipados para la distribucin elctri-
Se utilizan como aparatos de entrada o pueden
ca o funciones de proteccin de motores, tal y como se ha descrito en las pginas
combinarse con contactores para proteger los anteriores, se pueden utilizar en equipos de control industrial. Los accesorios de la
circuitos de alimentacin de motores: gama Compact NSX estn indicados para las necesidades especiales de este tipo de
cumplimiento de las normas internacionales, aplicaciones.
incluida IEC 60947-2 y UL 508 / CSA 22-2 n 14
Auxiliares
proteccin contra sobrecargas y cortocircuitos
El usuario puede agregar todos los auxiliares al interruptor automtico:
aislamiento con sealizacin de seccionamiento dispositivos para candado (en la posicin OFF (desactivado))
plenamente aparente, por lo que se pueden mando rotativo
reparar mquinas con seguridad aislndolas de contactos auxiliares de sealizacin de estado (ON (activado), OFF (desactivado)
todas las fuentes de alimentacin y disparado)
bobinas de emisin (MX) o de mnima tensin (MN)
instalacin en envolventes universales y de tipo contactos avanzados a la apertura al cierre.
funcional Mando rotativo
versin de interruptor seccionador NA. Versiones directas o prolongadas para montar hasta 600 mm tras la parte frontal:
frontal negro con mando negro
frontal amarillo con mando rojo (maquinaria o parada de emergencia, segn lo estipu-
lado en IEC 204 / VDE 0013).
Todas los mandos rotativos se pueden bloquear en la posicin OFF. Enclavamiento de
puerta opcional, recomendado para paneles de MCC (centros de control de motores).
Cuando el aparato dispone de un mando rotativo prolongado, un accesorio de control
montado sobre el eje hace que el aparato pueda funcionar con la puerta abierta.
El aparato se puede cerrar en la posicin OFF, segn lo establecido en UL508.
Contactos avanzados a la apertura o al cierre
Estos contactos se pueden utilizar respectivamente para alimentar una bobina de mni-
ma tensin MN antes de que el interruptor automtico se cierre o para abrir el circuito
de control del contactor antes de que se abra el interruptor automtico.
Funciones especiales
Sealizacin de sobrecargas trmicas con el bloque SDx.
Apertura temprana del contactor para defectos de sobrecarga con el bloque SDTAM.
Enlaces con autmatas a travs del sistema de comunicacin.
Medida de todos los parmetros elctricos con la unidad de control Micrologic A y E.
Alarmas programables con la unidad de control Micrologic 5 y 6.
1/52
Proteccin de aplicaciones de control industrial (continuacin)
Instalacin en envolventes
Cert
of Co ificate

ratori
es In
c. Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX se pueden instalar en una envolvente
rs La b o mplia
Un d e
rwriteE
CAT E
nce metlica junto a otros aparatos (contactores, interruptores automticos de proteccin de
TIFI C
CER PLIAN motores, LED, etc.) (ver pg. 1/96).
O M
OF C
Cumplimiento con las normas norteamericanas de equipos

de control industriales
Los interruptores Compact NSX han recibido la aprobacin UL508 / CSA 22-2 n 14 de
equipos de control industrial de los tipos "Controlador de motor manual", "Arrancador",
"Uso general" y "Medios de desconexin".
Los aparatos de tipo NA son interruptores seccionadores que siempre deben proteger-
se aguas arriba.
Aprobacin UL508
Interruptores automticos Unidades de control Aprobaciones
Compact NSX100 a 630 TMD, Micrologic 2, 5 y 6 Uso general
F/N/H Medios de desconexin de motores
NA, MA, Micrologic 1.3 M, Controlador de motor manual
2.2 M, 2.3 M, Micrologic 6.2 Arrancador
E-M y 6.3 E-M Medios de desconexin de motores
Tabla de potencias de motores trifsicos en cv

(1 cv = 0,7457 kW)
Especificaciones de Vca
TMD NA, MA Micrologic 1.3 M, 2.2 115 230 460 575
Micrologic 2, 5 y 6 M, 2.3 M Micrologic 6.2 E-M
y 6.3 E-M
25 25 3 7,5 15 20
50 50 7,5 15 30 40
100 100 15 30 75 100
160 150 25 50 100 150
250 220 40 75 150 200
400 320 - 125 250 300
550 500 - 150 350 500
Las reducciones indicadas en las pgs. 2/9 y 2/10 se aplican a las unidades de control TMD,
. Micrologic 2, 5 y 6, especicadas a 40 C
1/53
Proteccin de red de 16 Hz 2/3. Unidad de control Micrologic 5 A-Z
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX Redes de 16 Hz 2/3

pueden utilizarse en sistemas de 16 Hz 2/3 con
Las redes de distribucin monofsicas con una frecuencia de 16 Hz 2/3 se utilizan en
unidades de control especiales magnetotrmicas
aplicaciones ferroviarias en algunos pases europeos.
y electrnicas (Micrologic 5 A-Z).
Capacidad de corte para 16 Hz 2/3 a 250/500 V
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX del tipo 3P 2R o del tipo 3P 3R protegen
redes de 16 Hz 2/3 a 250 V 500 V.
Pueden estar equipados con lo siguiente:
una unidad de control magnetotrmica TM-D para Compact NSX100 a 250
o una unidad de control electrnica Micrologic 5.2 A-Z para Compact NSX100 a 250
o una 5.3 A-Z para Compact NSX400/630.
Los posibles niveles de prestaciones de la capacidad de corte son F, N y H, tal y como
se indica a continuacin.
Capacidad de corte Icu

Tensin de funcionamiento Unidades de control TMD y Micrologic 5 A-Z
Prestaciones F N H
250 V / 500 V Icu (kA) 36 50 70
Proteccin
Unidades de control magnetotrmicas TM-D
La frecuencia de 16 Hz 2/3 no modica las regulaciones trmicas con respecto a las de

50 Hz (ver pg. 1/15). Las activaciones magnticas se modican tal y como se muestra a
continuacin.
Proteccin magntica para Compact NSX 100/160/250 a 50 Hz y

a 16 Hz 2/3
Especificacin 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
(A) In a 40C
Activacin (A) Im Fijo Regulable
precisa 20%
NSX100 50 Hz 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800
16 Hz 2/3 170 270 360 450 450 450 580 720
NSX160/250 50 Hz 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 1.250 1.250 5 a 10 In
16 Hz 2/3 170 270 360 450 450 450 580 720 1.100 1.100 4,5 a 9 In
1/54
Proteccin de red de 16 Hz 2/3. Unidad de control Micrologic 5 A-Z
(continuacin)
Unidades de control Micrologic 5 A-Z
Las unidades Micrologic 5.2 A-Z y 5.3 A-Z se dedican a las redes 16 Hz 2/3.
Utilizan una frecuencia de muestreo adecuada. Las regulaciones de proteccin son
idnticas a las de Micrologic 5 A (ver pg. 1/19). Adems ofrecen una funcin de medida
de corriente para esta frecuencia especca.
Seleccin de unidades de control

Especificaciones 16 88 100 160 250 400 630
Compact
NSX100 TM-D
NSX160 TM-D
NSX250 TM-D
NSX100 a 250 Micrologic 5.2 A-Z
NSX400/630 Micrologic 5.3 A-Z
Cableado para NSX100 a 630 A

Fase y neutro aislado interrumpidos - 250 / 500 V
B y F (versin 3P 2R) N y H (versin 3P 3R)
L N L N
load load
Observacin. Para una tensin de funcionamiento > 250 V, la instalacin debe disearse de
forma que elimine todos los riesgos de defectos a tierra dobles.
2 polos en serie
Neutro conectado a tierra - 250 / 500 V
B y F (versin 3P 2R) N y H (versin 3P 3R)
L N L N
load load
1/55
Proteccin de sistemas a 400 Hz
Se pueden utilizar interruptores automticos Sistemas de distribucin de 400 Hz

Compact NSX en sistemas de 400 Hz.
Las principales aplicaciones de 400 Hz se encuentran en el campo de la aeronutica
y algunos barcos militares. Los aviones actuales disponen de redes trifsicas de 115/200 V
400 Hz.
Impacto en los aparatos de proteccin

Debido a la frecuencia mayor, los interruptores automticos estn sujetos a un aumento
adicional de la temperatura para niveles de corriente idnticos, lo que produce mayores
prdidas provocadas por las corrientes de Foucault y un aumento del efecto pelicu-
lar (reduccin en la seccin til de los conductores). Para mantenerse dentro de los
lmites de aumento de temperatura de estos aparatos, es necesaria una reduccin de la
corriente.
Los niveles de potencia de las aplicaciones de 400 Hz rara vez superan algunos
Unidad de control Micrologic TM-D. cientos de kW con corrientes de cortocircuito relativamente bajas, que por lo general no
superan en cuatro veces la corriente nominal.
Las gamas estndar Compact NSX y Masterpact NT/NW estn indicadas para aplica-
ciones de 400 Hz si se aplican coecientes de reduccin a las regulaciones de protec-
cin. Consulte la tabla reduccin indicada a continuacin.
Capacidad de corte de los interruptores automticos Compact

NSX en sistemas de 400 Hz, 440 V
Interruptor automtico Capacidad de corte Icu
NSX100 10 kA
NSX160 10 kA
NSX250 10 kA
NSX400 10 kA
NSX630 10 kA
Unidades de control equipadas con proteccin

magnetotrmica
Las regulaciones de corriente de 400 Hz se obtienen multiplicando los valores de 50 Hz
por el siguiente coeciente de adaptacin:
K1 para unidades de control trmicas
K2 para unidades de control magnticas.
Estos coecientes son independientes del ajuste de la unidad de control.
Unidades de control trmicas
Las regulaciones de corriente son inferiores a 400 Hz que a 50 Hz (K1 < 1).
Unidades de control magntico
Y a la inversa, las regulaciones de corriente son mayores a 400 Hz que a 50 Hz
(K2 > 1). Por consiguiente, cuando las unidades de control se pueden ajustar, deben
ajustarse con el valor mnimo.
Coeficientes de adaptacin para unidades de control magnetotrmicas

Interruptor Unidad Trmica a 40C Magntica
automtico de control In (A) 50 Hz Im (A) 50 Hz
K1 400 Hz K2 400 Hz
NSX100 TM16G 16 0,95 15 63 1,6 100
TM25G 25 0,95 24 80 1,6 130
TM40G 40 0,95 38 80 1,6 130
TM63G 63 0,95 60 125 1,6 200
NSX100 TM16D 16 0,95 15 240 1,6 300
TM25D 25 0,95 24 300 1,6 480
TM40D 40 0,95 38 500 1,6 800
TM63D 63 0,95 60 500 1,6 800
TM80D 80 0,9 72 650 1,6 900
TM100D 100 0,9 90 800 1,6 900
NSX250 TM100D 100 0,9 90 800 1,6 900
TM160D 160 0,9 144 1.250 1,6 2.000
TM200D 200 0,9 180 1.000 a 2.000 1,6 1.600 a 3.200
TM250D 250 0,9 225 1.250 a 2.500 1,6 2.000 a 4.000
Ejemplo: NSX100 equipado con un TM16G y con regulaciones de 50 Hz Ir = 16 A e Im = 63 A.

Regulaciones de 400 Hz Ir = 16 0,95 = 15 A e Im = 63 A 1,6 = 100 A.
1/56
Proteccin de sistemas a 400 Hz (continuacin)
Unidades de control electrnicas Micrologic

Las unidades de control Micrologic 2.2, 2.3 o 5.2, 5.3 con funciones de medida A o E
estn indicadas para 400 Hz. La utilizacin de la electrnica ofrece la ventaja de una
mayor estabilidad operativa cuando la frecuencia vara. Sin embargo, las unidades
siguen estando sujetas al aumento de temperatura provocado por la frecuencia.
Las consecuencias prcticas son:
ajuste de lmite a 0,9 In (ver la tabla de reduccin Ir a continuacin)
las activaciones a largo retardo, a corto retardo e instantneas no se modican
(ver pgs. 1/17 o 1/19)
la precisin de las medidas mostradas es del 2% (clase II).
Reduccin trmica: ajuste de Ir mximo

Unidad de control Micrologic 5 E. Interruptor automtico Coeficiente de ajuste mximo Ajuste Ir mx. a 400 Hz
NSX100N 1 100
NSX250N 0,8 225
NSX400N 0,8 320
NSX630N 0,8 500
Ejemplo: Un NSX250N, equipado con una unidad de control Micrologic 2.2, Ir = 250 A a 50 Hz,
debe limitarse su uso a Ir = 250 0,9 = 225 A. Su activacin a corto retardo con temporizacin ja
se puede ajustar a partir de 1,5 hasta 10 Ir (60 a 400 A). La activacin instantnea permanece en
3.000 A.
Contacto auxiliar OF.
Contactos auxiliares OF en redes a 400 Hz

Caractersticas elctricas de los contactos auxiliares
Contactos Estndar Bajo nivel
Cat. de utilizacin (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 CA12 CA15
Corriente 24 V 6 6 5 3
de funcionamiento 48 V 6 6 5 3
(A)
110 V 6 5 5 2,5
220/240 V 6 4 5 2
Bobina de tensin MX o MN. 380/415 V 6 2 5 1,5
R
Bobinas de tensin MN y MX para Compact NSX100/630
a MN/MX a 400 Hz y 440 V
U volt 125 V DC Para los interruptores automticos en los sistemas a 400 Hz, nicamente pueden utilizarse
bobinas MN o MX de 125 Vcc. Las bobinas deben alimentarse en la red de 400 Hz por
a 400 Hz medio de un puente recticador (que deber seleccionarse de la tabla mostrada a con-
tinuacin) y una resistencia adicional cuyas caractersticas dependern de la tensin del
Esquema de cableado. sistema.
U (V) 400 Hz Rectificador Resistencia adicional

220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz o 4,2 k-5 W
General Instrument W06 o
Semikron SKB a 1.2/1.3
380/420 V Semikron SKB a 1.2/1.3 10,7 k-10 W
Nota: se pueden utilizar otros modelos de puentes recticadores si sus caractersticas son al menos
equivalentes a los modelos indicados anteriormente.
Contactos de sealizacin SDx

El bloque SDx se puede utilizar en sistemas a 400 Hz para tensiones de 24 a 440 V.
Se puede utilizar un bloque de rel SDx instalado dentro del interruptor automtico para
utilizar de forma remota la seal de control por sobrecarga.
ptico para que est disponible en el bornero. La seal se elimina cuando se vuelve
a cerrar el interruptor automtico.
Estas salidas se pueden volver a programar para que se asignen a otros tipos de con-
trol o alarma (ver pg. 1/85).
1/57
1 Interruptores seccionadores
Descripcin general de las aplicaciones
Un interruptor seccionador es un aparato de Posicin de los interruptores seccionadores

control que se puede utilizar para abrir y cerrar
Los interruptores seccionadores Compact NSX se utilizan principalmente para las
un circuito en condiciones de funcionamiento
siguientes aplicaciones:
normales. aislamiento y acoplamiento de barras
Est indicado para el seccionamiento, tal y como aislamiento de cuadros de distribucin industriales y paneles de control industriales
se indica en la placa de caractersticas mediante aislamiento de cuadros de distribucin secundaria para aparatos modulares
aislamiento de envolventes locales
el smbolo.
aislamiento de envolventes de distribucin nal para aplicaciones comerciales
interruptores seccionadores de paneles de control industriales.
Interruptor-seccionador
de acoplamiento de cargas
Fuente
de sustitucin
Cuadro de distribucin de Cuadro de distribucin de
alimentacin principal para alimentacin principal para
aplicaciones comerciales aplicaciones industriales
y 1000 A 15 - 40 kA y 1600 A 20 - 80 kA
Cuadro de distribucin
secundario para Cuadro de
productos modulares distribucin industrial
y 160 A : 15 - 25 kA
y 160 A 15 - 25 kA y 400 A y 400 A : 20 - 80 kA
Envolvente de
Envolvente distribucin Envolvente
de final para de
aislamiento aplicaciones aislamiento Panel de
local comerciales local control industrial
y 63 A y 10 kA y 40 A y 5 kA
y 63 A y 630 A
y 10 kA y 25 kA
M M M M M
N.B. Adyacente o integrado en la mquina
Consumo de edificios Distribucin Procesos continuos Procesos de fabricacin

de edificios y mquinas individuales
1/58
Interruptores seccionadores 1
Funciones de los interruptores seccionadores
Los interruptores seccionadores Compact Idoneidad para el aislamiento con sealizacin

NSX100 a 630 NA se encuentran disponibles de seccionamiento
en versiones fija, sobre zcalo y chasis. Utilizan
los mismos accesorios y ofrecen las mismas Los interruptores seccionadores Compact NSX estn indicados para el seccionamiento
tal y como se dene en la norma IEC 60947-3. Las pruebas de conformidad garantizan:
posibilidades de conexin que las dems versiones
la abilidad mecnica de la sealizacin de posicin, es decir la posicin O (OFF)
de interruptores automticos. indicada mediante el aparato de control, siempre reeja la posicin abierta de los
Se pueden enclavar con otro interruptor contactos:
seccionador Compact o interruptor automtico existe la distancia necesaria entre los contactos
para formar un sistema inversor de redes. no se pueden instalar candados, a menos que los contactos estn abiertos
la ausencia de corrientes de fuga
poder de resistencia a las sobretensiones entre las conexiones aguas arriba y aguas
abajo.
La instalacin de un mando rotativo o una mando motorizado no altera la abilidad del
sistema de posicin e sealizacin.
Funcin de apertura de emergencia

Se combina un Compact NSX NA con una bobina MN o MX conectada a un botn de
parada de emergencia. En caso de emergencia, un operador en una ubicacin remota
puede interrumpir el circuito en la carga nominal para aislar todo el cuadro de distribu-
cin y las cargas aguas abajo.
Interruptor seccionador Compact NSX.

Mando motorizado
Los aparatos Compact NSX NA equipados con un mando motorizado permiten el
cierre y la apertura remota. Esta funcin se puede combinar con la de desactivacin de
emergencia. En este caso, la funcin de desactivacin de emergencia se combina con
un bloqueo de cierre que debe reiniciarse intencionadamente (diagrama elctrico con
bloqueo de cierre).
Proteccin diferencial
Se puede aadir un bloque Vigi a un interruptor seccionador para supervisar todas las
corrientes de fuga en los circuitos salientes del cuadro de distribucin en el que se
instale el interruptor seccionador. Cuando el bloque Vigi detecta una corriente diferen-
cial, el interruptor seccionador interrumpe la corriente de carga. Esta funcin se puede
Interruptor seccionador Compact NSX equipado combinar con la mando motorizado y la funcin de parada de emergencia, utilizando
con un mando motorizado. una bobina MN o MX.
Proteccin de los interruptores seccionadores

El interruptor seccionador puede crear y cortar su corriente nominal. En caso de una
sobrecarga o un cortocircuito, debe protegerse mediante un aparato aguas arriba,
segn los estndares de la instalacin.
Las tablas de coordinacin de interruptor automtico/interruptor seccionador determi-
nan los interruptores automticos aguas arriba necesarios. Sin embargo, gracias a un
bloque de rels magntico de alto umbral, los interruptores seccionadores Compact
NSX100 a 630 A estn autoprotegidos.
Categora de utilizacin de los interruptores seccionadores

En funcin de la corriente de funcionamiento nominal y la endurancia mecnica (A para
el funcionamiento frecuente o B para el funcionamiento no frecuente), la norma IEC
60947-3 dene las categoras de utilizacin tal y como se indican en la siguiente tabla.
Los interruptores seccionadores Compact NSX NA cumplen las categoras de funciona-
miento AC22A o AC23A.
Interruptor seccionador Compact NSX equipado

Categora de utilizacin Aplicaciones tpicas
con un bloque Vigi. Funcionamiento Funcionamiento
poco frecuente frecuente
AC-21A AC-21B Cargas resistivas incluidas sobrecargas moderadas
(cos = 0,95)
AC-22A AC-22B Cargas mixtas resistivas e inductivas incluidas sobrecar-
gas moderadas (cos = 0,65)
AC-23A AC-23B Cargas de motor u otras cargas altamente inductivas
(cos = 0,45 0,35)
1/59
1 Interruptores seccionadores
Compact NSX de 100 a 630 A
Segn las normas de instalacin, se requiere Caractersticas comunes
proteccin aguas arriba. Sin embargo, los
Tensiones nominales
interruptores seccionadores Compact NSX100
Tensin de aislamiento (V) Ui 800
a 630 NA se encuentran autoprotegidos por su
Tensin de resistencia a impulsos (kV) Uimp 8
bloque de rels magntico de alto umbral
Tensin de funcionamiento (V) Ue 50/60 Hz ca 690
Idoneidad para el aislamiento IEC/EN 60947-3 s
Categora de utilizacin AC 22 A/AC 23 A - DC 22 A/DC 23 A
Grado de polucin IEC 60664-1 3
Interruptores seccionadores
Caractersticas elctricas segn en IEC 60947-3 y EN 60947-3
Intensidad trmica convencional (A) Ith 60C
Nmero de polos
Intensidad asignada de empleo le 50/60 Hz ca
(A) en funcin de la categora de 220/240 V
utilizacin
380/415 V
440/480 V (2)
500/525 V
660/690 V
cc
250 V (1 polo)
Compact NSX100 a 250 NA. 500 polos (2 polos en serie)
750 V (3 polos en serie)
Poder de cierre de cortocircuito lcm mn. (interruptor seccionador solo)
(kA de pico) mx. (proteccin mediante interruptor
automtico aguas arriba)
Intensidad de corta duracin admi- lcw durante 1s
sible (A rms) 3s
20 s
Endurancia (ciclos C-A) mecnica
elctrico ca
440 V In/2
In
690 V In/2
In
cc 250 V (1 polo) y In/2
500 V (2 polos en serie) In
Corte plenamente aparente
Grado de polucin
Proteccin
Proteccin diferencial adicional Mediante bloque Vigi
Mediante rel Vigirex
Auxiliares de sealizacin y de mando complementarios
Compact NSX400 a 630 NA. Contactos de sealizacin
Bobinas de control Bobina de emisin MX
Bobina de mnima tensin MN
Selector de presencia de tensin
Bloque del transformador de intensidad
Bloque del ampermetro
Bloque de vigilancia de aislamiento
Comunicacin a distancia mediante bus
Sealizacin de los estados del aparato
Mando a distancia del aparato
Contador de maniobras
Instalacin/conexiones
Dimensiones (mm) ja, conexiones frontales 2/3P
LHP 4P
Peso (kg) ja, conexiones frontales 3P
4P
Sistemas inversores de redes (consulte el captulo sobre sistemas inversores de redes)
Inversores manuales
(1) 2P en caja 3P.
(2) Indicado para 480 V NEMA. Inversores con mando elctrico y automtico
1/60
Interruptores seccionadores 1
Compact NSX de 100 a 630 A (continuacin)
Mando
Manual Con empuadura p
Con mando rotativo directo o prolongado p
Elctrico Con telemando p
Conexin
Fijo p
Extrable Zcalo p
Chasis p
NSX100NA NSX160NA NSX250NA NSX400NA NSX630NA
100 160 250 400 630

2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
100 160 250 400 630
2,6 3,6 4,9 7,1 8,5
330 330 330 330 330
1.800 2.500 3.500 5.000 6.000

1.800 2.500 3.500 5.000 6.000
690 960 1.350 1.930 2.320

50.000 40.000 20.000 15.000 15.000
AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A AC22A / AC23A
35.000 30.000 15.000 10.000 6.000
20.000 15.000 7.500 5.000 3.000
15.000 10.000 6.000 5.000 3.000
8.000 5.000 3.000 2.500 1.500
10.000 10.000 10.000 2.000 2.000
5.000 5.000 5.000 1.000 1.000
p p p p p
III III III III III
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
p p
105 161 86 140 255 110

140 161 86 185 255 110
de 1,5 a 1,8 5,2
de 2 a 2,2 6,8
p p
p p
1/61
1 Sistemas inversores de redes
Presentacin
Algunas instalaciones utilizan dos fuentes de Inversor de redes manual

alimentacin para poder utilizar una de ellas
Este aparato es el inversor ms simple. Requiere de la intervencin del personal de
en caso de prdida temporal de la alimentacin
explotacin y, en consecuencia, la duracin del basculamiento de la red normal a la red
principal. de reserva est en funcin de la intervencin humana.
Se necesita un sistema inversor de redes para Un inversor de redes manual puede componerse de 2 o 3 aparatos (segn gama)
cambiar con seguridad entre las dos fuentes. accionados manualmente (interruptores automticos o interruptores en carga) e interen-
clavados mecnicamente.
La fuente de reserva puede ser un conjunto de
generadores u otra red. Inversor de redes telemandado
Es el aparato ms empleado en los aparatos de gran calibre (a partir de 400 A).
No requiere ninguna intervencin humana para su funcionamiento. El basculamiento de
la red normal a la red de reserva est pilotado elctricamente.
Un inversor de redes telemando est constituido por 2 o 3 aparatos (segn gama) a
los cuales est asociado un interenclavamiento elctrico realizado segn diferentes
esquemas. El mando de los aparatos est asegurado mediante un interenclavamiento
mecnico que protege de cualquier mal funcionamiento elctrico e impide una manio-
bra manual errnea.
Inversor de redes automtico

La asociacin de un automatismo dedicado con un inversor de redes telemandado
permite el pilotaje automtico de las redes segn diferentes modos programados.
Esta solucin asegura una gestin ptima de la energa:
Permutacin sobre una fuente de reserva en funcin de las necesidades externas.
Gestin de las alimentaciones.
Regulacin.
Basculamiento de seguridad...
El automatismo puede disponer de una opcin de comunicacin a un supervisor.
Sector de servicios:
quirfanos de hospitales
sistemas de seguridad para edicios altos
salas de ordenadores (bancos, compaas de seguros, etc.)
sistemas de iluminacin en centros comerciales, etc.
Industria:
lneas de montaje
salas de mquinas en barcos
auxiliares esenciales en estaciones de energa trmica, etc.
Infraestructuras:
sistemas de iluminacin de autopistas
instalaciones portuarias y de ferrocarriles
sistemas de control para instalaciones militares, etc.
1/62
Sistemas inversores de redes 1
Inversor de redes manual
Interenclavamiento de los mandos por empuadura

ON
I
Sistema de enclavamiento
ON
I tripp
rese
t
ed
Se pueden enclavar dos aparatos con este sistema. Se pueden emplear dos sistemas
tripp
rese
t
ed O OFF
de enclavamiento idnticos para enclavar tres aparatos instalados de forma contigua.
O OFF Posiciones autorizadas:
un aparato cerrado (ON), los dems abiertos (OFF)
Interenclavamiento de los Enclavamiento de dos todos los aparatos abiertos (OFF).
mandos por empuadura. aparatos con mandos El sistema se bloquea con una o dos cerraduras (dimetro de argolla de 5 a 8 mm).
rotativos. Este sistema se puede ampliar a ms de tres aparatos.
Existen dos modelos de sistema de enclavamiento:
uno para Compact NSX100 a 250
otro para Compact NSX400/630.
Combinaciones de aparatos normales y de reserva
Todos los interruptores automticos e interruptores seccionadores Compact NSX100
a 630 jos, del mismo tamao se pueden enclavar. Todos los aparatos debern ser de
versin ja o de versin extrable en zcalo.
Enclavamiento de dos aparatos con mandos rotativos

Enclavamiento con cerraduras. Enclavamiento en una Sistema de enclavamiento
placa base. El enclavamiento supone el cierre de las mandos rotativos en dos aparatos, que pue-
den ser interruptores automticos o interruptores seccionadores.
Posiciones autorizadas:
un aparato cerrado (ON), el otro abierto (OFF)
los dos aparatos abiertos (OFF).
El sistema se bloquea con hasta tres cerraduras (dimetro de argolla de 5 a 8 mm).
Existen dos modelos de sistema de enclavamiento:
uno para Compact NSX100 a 250
uno para Compact NS400/630.
Todos los interruptores automticos e interruptores seccionadores jos con mando
rotativo o extrables en zcalo Compact NSX100 a 630 del mismo tamao se pueden
Enclavamiento de dos aparatos en enclavar. Todos los aparatos debern ser de versin ja o de versin extrables en
una placa base zcalo.
Se puede instalar una placa base diseada para dos Enclavamiento de una serie de aparatos con cerraduras
aparatos Compact NSX de forma horizontal o vertical (llaves prisioneras)
en un perl de montaje. El enclavamiento se realiza en
El enclavamiento con cerraduras es muy sencillo y con l es posible enclavar dos
la placa base mediante un mecanismo situado detrs de
o ms aparatos que se encuentren fsicamente distantes o que presenten caracters-
los aparatos. De este modo, no se bloquea el acceso a
ticas muy diferentes, por ejemplo aparatos de media y baja tensin o un interruptor
los controles de los aparatos y a las unidades de control.
automtico Compact NSX100 a 630 y un interruptor seccionador.
Todos los interruptores automticos e interruptores
Cada aparato est equipado con una cerradura idntica y la llave se encuentra ja en
seccionadores de mando rotativo o maneta Compact
el aparato cerrado (ON). Se encuentra disponible una sola llave para todos los apara-
NSX100 a 630 se pueden enclavar. Todos los aparatos
tos. Es necesario abrir en primer lugar (posicin OFF) el aparato con la llave antes de
debe ser de versin ja o extrables en zcalo, con o sin
poder extraer la llave y utilizarla para cerrar otro aparato.
proteccin diferencial o bloque de medida.
Un sistema de cajas de llaves jas de montaje en pared ofrece un gran nmero de
Se necesita un kit de adaptacin para realizar el encla-
combinaciones posibles entre muchos aparatos.
vamiento:
dos aparatos extrables en zcalo Combinaciones de aparatos normales y de reserva
un Compact NSX100-250 con un NSX400-630. Todos los interruptores automticos e interruptores seccionadores Compact NSX100
La conexin a la instalacin aguas abajo se puede rea- a 630 de mando rotativo se pueden enclavar entre s o con cualquier otro aparato equi-
lizar fcilmente mediante un accesorio de acoplamiento pado con el mismo tipo de cerradura.
(consulte la siguiente pgina).
1/63
1 Sistemas inversores de redes
Sistemas de inversin de redes automticos y telemandados
Accesorio de acoplamiento en la placa base
Sistemas telemandados
Consta de dos aparatos con motorizaciones, montados en una placa base y combina-
dos con lo siguiente:
una unidad de enclavamiento elctrico
sistema de enclavamiento mecnico opcional.
Unidad de enclavamiento elctrico (IVE)
Enclava dos aparatos equipados con motorizaciones y contactos auxiliares.
La unidad IVE es obligatoria para garantizar la temporizacin necesaria para realizar
una conmutacin segura.
Sistema de enclavamiento mecnico
El sistema enclavamiento mecnico se recomienda para limitar los efectos de errores
Sistema de inversin de redes o por telemando. de diseo o de cableado y para evitar errores de conmutacin manual.
Sistemas automticos
4 Un controlador automtico puede gestionar el cambio de una fuente a la otra.
El controlador puede ser:
un aparato que facilite el cliente
un controlador BA integrado
un controlador UA integrado.
Un controlador automtico integrado BA o UA gestiona la transferencia de fuentes se-
QN 5..
.8
gn las secuencias seleccionadas por el usuario y que pueden incluir el establecimien-
u auto
5..
.8 manu
auto
to de prioridades de fuentes, el arranque de un generador, la vuelta a la fuente Normal,

manu
man
etc. Una placa de control de auxiliares ACP facilita la instalacin de los controladores
BA y UA. La placa incluye dos interruptores automticos para proteger los circuitos
3 1 2
de control y dos contactores para controlar los mecanismos de los motores de los
aparatos.
1 Interruptor automtico QN equipado con una mando motoriza-

do y contactos auxiliares, conectados a la fuente Normal
2 Interruptor automtico QR equipado con una mando motoriza-
do y contactos auxiliares, conectados a la fuente de Reserva
3 Placa de base con enclavamiento mecnico
4 Unidad de enclavamiento elctrico IVE
5 Accesorio de acoplamiento (conexin aguas abajo)
Accesorio de acoplamiento en la placa base

1
Este accesorio se puede utilizar con un sistema inversor de redes manual o de tele-
mando (con o sin un controlador automtico). Respeta la distancia de montaje entre los
aparatos jados a la placa ACP y ofrece un acoplamiento aguas abajo de los dos con-
juntos de juegos de barras. Es compatible con los accesorios de aparato estndares.
Los cubrebornes cortos del aparato se pueden instalar en las conexiones aguas arriba
del accesorio de acoplamiento. Aguas abajo, se pueden utilizar los accesorios de
conexin y los cubrebornes largos o cortos del aparato.
2
1 Cubrebornes cortos
2 Terminales
3 3 Separadores de fase
4 Cubrebornes largos
Se pueden utilizar accesorios de aparatos estndares para el

accesorio de acoplamiento en la placa de base.
1/64
Sistemas inversores de redes 1
Sistemas de inversin de redes automticos y telemandados
Accesorio de acoplamiento en la placa base (continuacin)
Al combinar un sistema inversor de redes de Funciones de los automatismos BA y UA
telemandado con un controlador automtico
Automatismo BA UA
BA o UA integrado, se puede controlar
Interruptores automticos compatibles Interruptores automti-
automticamente la transferencia de fuentes
cos Compact NSX100
segn las secuencias seleccionadas por el usuario. a 630
Interruptor de 4 posiciones
Funcionamiento automtico p p
Funcionamiento forzado en fuente "Normal" p p
Funcionamiento forzado en fuente de Reserva p p
Parada (fuentes Normal y de Reserva apagadas) p p
Funcionamiento automtico
Supervisin de la fuente Normal y transferencia automtica de una p p
fuente a otra
Control de arranque del grupo electrgeno p
Apagado temporizado (regulable) del grupo electrgeno p
Controlador BA. Deslastrado de cargas y reconexin de cargas no prioritarias p
Transferencia a la fuente de Reserva si una de las fases de la fuente p
Normal se ausenta
Test
Abriendo el interruptor automtico P25M aguas arriba del p
controlador
Pulsando el botn de prueba situado en la parte frontal p
del controlador
Sealizacin
Sealizacin del estado del interruptor automtico en la parte frontal p p
del controlador: ON, OFF, control por defecto
Contacto de sealizacin de modo automtico p p
Controlador UA. Otras funciones
Seleccin de la fuente de tipo Normal p
(monofsica o trifsica)
Transferencia voluntaria a la fuente de Reserva p p
Funcionamiento forzado en la fuente Normal si la fuente de Reserva p

no se encuentra operativa
Contacto de prueba adicional (no forma parte del automatismo) p p
Transferir a la fuente de Reserva nicamente si el contacto est
cerrado (por ejemplo, para una comprobacin de frecuencia de UR)
Ajuste del tiempo de arranque mximo para la fuente de Reserva p
Fuente de alimentacin
Tensiones de control (1) 220 a 240 V 50/60 Hz p p
380 a 415 V 50/60 Hz p p
440 V 60 Hz p p
Umbrales de funcionamiento
Mnima tensin 0,35 Un y tensin y 0,7 Un p p
Defecto de fase 0,5 Un y tensin y 0,7 Un p
Platina de comando auxiliar a PC. Presencia de tensin tensin u 0,85 Un p p
Caractersticas de los contactos de salida (contactos sin tensin, secos)
Corriente trmica nominal (A) 8
Carga mnima 10 mA a 12 V
ca cc
Categora de utilizacin AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13
(IEC 60947-5-1)
Intensidad de empleo 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2
(A) 48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -
110 V 8 6 4 4 0,6 -
(1) Alimentacin del automatismo mediante la pletina auxiliar
de mando ACP. Debe utilizarse la misma tensin para la placa 220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -
ACP, la unidad IVE y los mandos elctricos. Si dicha tensin es la 250 V - - - - 0,4 -
misma que la de la tensin de la fuente, las fuentes "Normal" y de 380/415 V 5 - - - - -
"Reserva" se pueden utilizar directamente para la alimentacin.
440 V 4 - - - - -
De lo contrario, debe utilizarse un transformador de aislamiento.
660/690 V - - - - - -
1/65
1 Accesorios y auxiliares
Descripcin general de Compact NSX100 a 630 versin fija
Accesorios de aislamiento
1/77
Separador de fases
Cubrebornas precintable
Auxiliares elctricos Contacto de sealizacin
1/84 y 1/85
Bobina de tensin
Mdulo SDTAM
Mdulo SDx
Proteccin y medida
Unidad De Control Micrologic 2
1/92
BloqueVigi
Unidad De Control Micrologic 5 / 6
Bloque transformador
de intensidad Unidad De Control TM-D, TM-G
Bloque ampermetro
1/66
Accesorios y auxiliares 1
Descripcin general de Compact NSX100 a 630 versin fija (continuacin)
Conexin
1/72 y 1/73
Espaciador monobloc
Conectores de cable
Conectores posteriores
Extensiones Conectores de cable

de terminal
Mdulo BSCM
Cable NSX
Comunicacin
y visualizacin
1/26 y 1/27
Interface Modbus
FDM121
Mando rotativo directo Mando rotativo prolongado
Accesorios de control
1/86
Mando motorizado
1/67
1 Accesorios y componentes auxiliares
Descripcin general de Compact NSX100 a 630 versiones extrables
Accesorios de aislamiento
1/77
Separacin de fases
Cubrebornes largo precintable

para zcalo de conexin
Auxiliares elctricos
1/82
Conector auxiliar extrable automtico
Conector auxiliar manual
Accesorios mecnicos
1/71
Placa lateral del interruptor automtico
Placa lateral del chasis
1/68
Accesorios y componentes auxiliares 1
Descripcin general de Compact NSX100 a 630 versiones extrables
(continuacin)
Conexin
1/72, 1/73,
Conectores de cable Tomas posteriores
1/75 y 1/76
Terminales
Conectores posteriores
Adaptador
Conectores de cable
Extensiones de terminal
zcalo de conexin
Interruptor automtico
Conexiones de alimentacin
Conexiones de alimentacin para Vigicompact
Accesorios de conexin
de alimentacin
1/69
Instalacin de aparatos
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX Interruptores automticos fijos

pueden instalarse horizontalmente, verticalmente
Los interruptores automticos jos estn diseados para una conexin estndar con
o planos sobre su parte posterior, sin que los
barras o cables con terminales. Pueden utilizarse conectores de cable pelado para la
niveles de prestaciones resulten afectados. conexin de cables de aluminio o de cobre desnudo.
Existen tres versiones de instalacin del aparato: Para la conexin de cables grandes, pueden utilizarse diversas soluciones con
distribuidores tanto para cables con terminales como para cables pelados.
fijo
de conexin en zcalo
extrable en chasis.
Para las dos ltimas versiones, deben aadirse
componentes (zcalo, chasis) a la versin fija.
Las tres versiones comparten numerosos
componentes de conexin.
Montaje en una placa posterior. Montaje en carriles. Montaje en carril DIN

(con adaptador).
L3
L2
L1
8 Nm
L2
8 Nm
L3
8 Nm
L3
L2
L1
Montaje en una placa de montaje Prisma. Montaje en juegos de barras

Compact NSX250 jo. Posiciones de instalacin. con un adaptador.
Interruptores automticos con zcalo
La versin sobre zcalo permite:
extraer y/o sustituir rpidamente el interruptor automtico sin necesidad de tocar las
conexiones de la base
incorporar futuros circuitos mediante la instalacin de bases que dispondrn ms
adelante de un interruptor automtico
aislar los circuitos de alimentacin cuando el aparato est montado en o dentro de un
panel. Acta de barrera para las conexiones del zcalo. Se logra un total aislamiento
gracias a los cubrebornes de terminales cortos, obligatorios del aparato. Los grados de
proteccin son los siguientes:
interruptor automtico conectado = IP4
interruptor automtico extrado = IP2
interruptor automtico extrado, base equipada con pantallas = IP4.
Partes de una configuracin de conexin
Compact NSX250 con zcalo. Posiciones de instalacin. Una conguracin de conexin se obtiene aadiendo un "kit de conexin" a un aparato
jo.
Para evitar la conexin o desconexin de los circuitos de alimentacin en condiciones
de carga, un control de seguridad ocasiona el control automtico si el aparato se en-
cuentra conectado, antes de acoplarlo o retirarlo. El control de seguridad, que se inclu-
ye con el kit, debe instalarse en el aparato. Si el aparato est desconectado, el control
de seguridad no funciona. El aparato puede utilizarse fuera del cuadro de distribucin.
Accesorios Montaje
Se ofrecen accesorios de aislamiento opcionales.
Cubrebornes de terminales para la proteccin contra el
contacto directo.
Separador de fases para el refuerzo del aislamiento
entre fases y la proteccin contra el contacto directo.
Montaje en una placa posterior. Montaje dentro de un panel frontal. Montaje en carriles.
1/70
Instalacin de aparatos (continuacin)
Interruptores automticos extrables

Adems de las ventajas que ofrece el zcalo, la instalacin en un chasis facilita el ma-
nejo. Ofrece tres posiciones, con cambio de una a otra tras un desbloqueo mecnico:
conectado: los circuitos de alimentacin estn conectados
desconectado: los circuitos de alimentacin estn desconectados, el aparato puede
utilizarse para comprobar el funcionamiento auxiliar
extrado: el aparato est suelto y puede retirarse del chasis.
Partes de una configuracin extrable
Una conguracin extrable requiere dos placas laterales instaladas en la base y dos
placas laterales montadas en el interruptor automtico. Al igual que la versin sobre
zcalo, un control de seguridad ocasiona el control automtico si el aparato se encuen-
tra conectado, antes de acoplarlo o retirarlo, y permite utilizar el aparato en la posicin
"desconectado".
Accesorios
Compact NSX250 extrable.
Los accesorios son los mismos que los del zcalo, adems de:
contactos auxiliares para la instalacin en la parte ja, en los que se indican las posi-
ciones "conectado" y "desconectado"
bloqueo con 1 a 3 cerraduras (dimetro de abrazadera de 5 a 8 mm), para:
evitar la insercin para la conexin
bloquear el interruptor automtico en la posicin "conectado" o "desconectado"
Posiciones de instalacin. Arco de cambio para interruptores automticos con mando directo a travs de panel
frontal, destinado a mantener el grado de proteccin independientemente de la posi-
cin del interruptor automtico (suministrado con prolongador de maneta)
eje telescpico para mandos rotativos prolongados. La puerta puede cerrarse con el
aparato en las posiciones "conectado" y "desconectado".
Conectado Desconectado Extrado
Marco de estanqueidad para maneta y prolongador de maneta Eje prolongado.

para ofrecer una proteccin IP4 en las posiciones "conectado"
y "desconectado".
Montaje
Montaje en una placa posterior. Montaje dentro de un panel frontal. Montaje en carriles.
1/71
Conexin de aparatos fijos
Los interruptores automticos fijos estn Conexin frontal

diseados para una conexin frontal estndar con
Barras o cables con terminales
barras o cables con terminales.
Terminales estndar
Los conectores de cables se ofrecen para cables
pelados. Tambin puede realizarse una conexin Compact NSX100 a 630 se ofrece con terminales que incluyen tuercas de jacin con
posterior. tornillos:
Compact NSX100: tuercas y tornillos M6. Compact NSX160/250: tuercas y tornillos M8
Compact NSX400/630: tuercas y tornillos M10.
Estos terminales pueden utilizarse para:
conexin directa de barras o cables aislados con terminales
extensiones de terminales que ofrecen una gran variedad de posibilidades de co-
nexin.
Se recomiendan separadores de fases o cubrebornes de terminales. Su uso resulta
Barra aislada.
obligatorio para determinados accesorios de conexin (en cuyo caso, se suministran
separadores de fases).
Barras
Cuando la conguracin del cuadro de distribucin no se ha comprobado, resulta
obligatorio utilizar barras aisladas.
Tamao mximo de barras

Terminal pequeo Interruptor automtico Compact NSX 100/160/250 400/630
para cables de cobre. Sin espaciadores inclinacin (mm) 35 45
tamao de barra mximo (mm) 20 2 32 6
Con espaciadores inclinacin (mm) 45 52.5
tamao de barra mximo (mm) 32 2 40 6
Terminales
Existen dos modelos, para cables de aluminio y de cobre.
Es necesario utilizar terminales estrechos, compatibles con las conexiones del aparato.
Terminal pequeo
Debern utilizarse con separador de fases o cubrebornes largos. Los terminales se
para cables AI.
ofrecen con separador de fases y pueden utilizarse para los siguientes tipos de cables.
Tamaos de cables para la conexin con terminales

Interruptor automtico Compact NSX 100/160/250 400/630
Cables de cobre tamao (mm) 120, 150, 180 240, 300
pliegue caones hexagonales o perforaciones
Cables de aluminio tamao (mm) 120, 150, 180 240, 300
pliegue caones hexagonales
Extensiones de Extensiones Extensiones de Extensiones de terminales
terminales rectas de terminales terminales de 45.
de ngulo recto Pueden conectarse extensiones con salientes antigiratorios a los terminales estndar
para ofrecer numerosas posibilidades de conexin en un espacio reducido:
extensiones de terminales rectas
extensiones de terminales de ngulo recto
extensiones de terminales de canto
extensiones de doble L
extensiones de 45.
Extensiones Extensiones Espaciadores
de terminales de terminales
de canto. de doble L.
1/72
Conexin de aparatos fijos (continuacin)
Espaciadores
Pueden utilizarse distribuidores para aumentar la inclinacin:
NSX100 a 250: la inclinacin de 35 mm puede aumentar a 45 mm
NSX400/630: la inclinacin de 45 mm puede aumentar a 52 70 mm.
Pueden conectarse barras, terminales de cables o conectores de cables a los
extremos.
Espaciador monobloc para NSX100 a 250
La conexin de cables de gran seccin puede requerir una mayor distancia entre los
terminales del aparato.
El espaciador monobloc permite:
aumentar la inclinacin de 35 mm de los terminales del interruptor automtico NSX100
a 250 a la inclinacin de 45 mm de un aparato NSX400/630
utilizar todos los accesorios de conexin y aislamiento disponibles para el tamao de
bastidor inmediatamente superior (terminales, conectores, distribuidores, extensiones
de terminales de ngulo recto y de canto, cubrebornes de terminales y separador de
fases).
Tambin puede utilizarse para interruptores seccionadores Interpact INS.
Los aparatos Compact NSX, equipados con un espaciador monobloc, pueden montarse:
en la parte posterior de un cuadro de distribucin
detrs del panel frontal con un elevador.
El distribuidor de una parte tambin permite:
alinear aparatos con diferentes tamaos de bastidor en el cuadro de distribucin
utilizar la misma placa de montaje, independientemente del aparato.
Paso polar (mm) en funcin del tipo de espaciador

Interruptor automtico Compact NSX NSX100 a 250 NSX100 a 630
Sin espaciadores 35 45
Con pletinas espaciadoras 45 52,5 70
Con espaciador monobloc 45 -
Montaje en la parte Montaje detrs

posterior de un cuadro del panel frontal
de distribucin. con un elevador.
1/73
Conexin de aparatos fijos (continuacin)
Cables pelados
Para los cables pelados (sin terminales), pueden utilizarse los conectores de cable
pelado prefabricados tanto para cables de cobre como de aluminio.
Conectores de 1 cable para Compact NSX100 a 250
Los conectores se acoplan directamente a los terminales del aparato o se jan me-
diante clips a las extensiones de terminales rectas y de ngulo recto as como a los
distribuidores.
Conectores de 1 cable para Compact NSX400 a 630
Los conectores se atornillan directamente a los terminales del aparato.
Conectores de 2 cables para Compact NSX100 a 250 y 400/630
Los conectores se atornillan a los terminales del aparato o a las extensiones de termina-
les de ngulo recto.
Conectores de distribucin para Compact NSX100 a 250
Cable pelado. Estos conectores se atornillan directamente a los terminales del aparato. Los conecto-
res de distribucin se ofrecen con separador de fases, pero stas pueden ser sustitui-
das por cubrebornes largos. Cada conector puede recibir seis cables con secciones
comprendidas entre 1,5 y 35 mm cada uno.
Repartidor Polybloc para Compact NSX100 a 630
Polybloc se conecta directamente a los terminales del aparato.
Se utiliza para conectar hasta seis o nueve cables exibles o rgidos con secciones no
Conector de Conector de superiores a 10 16 mm a cada polo.
1 cable para 2 cables para La conexin se realiza con los terminales de resorte sin tornillos.
NSX100 a 250. NSX400/630 NSX100 a 250. NSX400/630
Tamao mximo de los cables en funcin del tipo de conector

Interruptor automtico 100 / 250 400 630
Compact NSX 160
Conectores de acero 1,5 a 95 mm p
Conectores de aluminio 25 a 95 mm p p
Conector de distribucin Bloques de distribucin 120 a 185 mm p p
para NSX100 a 250. Polybloc de 100/160 A y 250 A.
2 cables de 50 a 120 mm p p
2 cables de 35 a 240 mm p p
35 a 300 mm p p
Conectores de distribucin 6 cables de 35 mm p p
Repartidor Polybloc 6 9 cables de 10/16 mm p p
Conexin posterior
El montaje del aparato en una placa posterior con los oricios adecuados permite una
conexin posterior.
Las conexiones posteriores para barras o cables con terminales se ofrecen en dos lon-
gitudes. Las barras pueden colocarse planas, de canto o en ngulos de 45, en funcin
del modo en que estn posicionadas las conexiones posteriores.
Las conexiones posteriores se jan con facilidad a los terminales de conexin del apa-
rato. Pueden darse todas las combinaciones de posiciones y longitudes de conexin
Cuatro posiciones. Dos longitudes. posterior en un aparato determinado.
Cables pelados
Para la conexin de cables pelados, pueden jarse los conectores de 1 cable para
Compact NSX100 a 250 a las conexiones posteriores mediante el uso de clips.
Conexin posterior.
Conexin de cables pelados con NSX100 a 250.
1/74
Conexin de aparatos extrables
La conexin es idntica para ambas versiones Conexin

sobre zcalo o chasis. Pueden utilizarse los
mismos accesorios empleados para los aparatos
fijos. El zcalo est equipado con terminales que, en funcin de su orientacin, sirven para la
conexin frontal o posterior.
Para la conexin posterior de un zcalo montado en una placa posterior, los terminales
debern sustituirse por extensiones de terminales de ngulo recto largas aisladas.
Para la conexin de los aparatos Compact NSX630 se requieren a menudo distribuido-
res de inclinacin de 52,5 70 mm.
Conexin frontal. Conexin frontal Conexin posterior

con distribuidores. de un zcalo montado
Cuatro posiciones. Dos longitudes. en una placa posterior.
Accesorios de conexin
Todos los accesorios para los aparatos jos (barras, terminales, extensiones de termina-
les y distribuidores) pueden utilizarse con el zcalo (ver pgs. de 1/72 a 1/74).
Cables pelados
Todos los terminales pueden estar equipados con conectores de cable pelado.
Ver la seccin "Conexin de aparatos jos".
Con un zcalo de 100 a 250 A. Con un zcalo de 400/630 A.
1/75
Conexin de aparatos extrables (continuacin)
Adaptador para zcalo de conexin

El adaptador es un componente de plstico para el zcalo de 100 a 250 A y el zcalo
de 400/630 A que permite utilizar todos los accesorios de conexin del aparato jo.
Se requiere para los separadores de fases y los cubrebornes de terminales largos
y cortos.
Adaptador para zcalo de 100 a 250 A - 3P. Adaptador para zcalo de 400/630 A - 4P.
Conexin con barras o cables con terminales. Conexin con distribuidores y separador de fases.
1/76
Aislamiento de partes en tensin
Los cubrebornes son idnticos para las versiones Cubrebornes

fija y sobre chasis o zcalo y cubren todas las
Accesorios de aislamiento utilizados para la proteccin contra el contacto directo con
aplicaciones hasta 1.000 V.
circuitos de alimentacin. Ofrecen un grado de proteccin IP40 y una proteccin contra
Existen para calibres de 100 a 250 A y 400/630 impactos mecnicos IK07.
A, en versin corta y larga. Tipos de cubrebornes
Compact NSX100 a 250 y NSX400/630 3P 4P pueden incluir:
cubrebornes de terminales cortos
cubrebornes de terminales largos.
Todos los cubrebornes de terminales disponen de oricios o perforaciones en la parte
frontal para los indicadores de presencia de tensin.
Cubrebornes cortos
Se utilizan con:
Cubrebornes largos. Cubrebornes cortos. versiones extrables y de conexin en todas las conguraciones de conexin
versiones jas con conexin posterior.
1 Cubrebornes largos
2 Se utilizan para la conexin frontal con cables o barras aisladas.
Incluyen dos partes ensambladas con tornillos de jacin, que forman una cubierta
IP40.
La parte superior est equipada con rejillas deslizantes con marcas de ruptura para
una adaptacin precisa a los cables o las barras aisladas.
La parte posterior bloquea completamente la zona de conexin. Los cuadrados par-
cialmente cortados pueden retirarse para adaptarse a cualquier tipo de conexin
1 Cuadrados extrables parcialmente cortados. de cables con terminales o barras de cobre.
2 Rejillas con marcas de ruptura. Los cubrebornes de terminales largos pueden montarse aguas arriba o aguas abajo de:
los aparatos jos
la base de las versiones sobre zcalo o chasis, completando as el aislamiento pro-
porcionado por los cubrebornes de terminales cortos obligatorios del aparato
el distribuidor de una parte para NSX100 a 250
los distribuidores de 52,5 mm para NSX400/630.
Cubrebornes de terminales e inclinacin
A continuacin, se muestran las posibilidades de combinacin.
Ensamblado con tornillos de jacin.
Interruptor automtico NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630

Cubrebornes de terminales cortos
Inclinacin (mm) 35 45
Cubrebornes de terminales largos
Inclinacin (mm) 35 45 52.5
Separador de fases
Accesorios de seguridad para el mximo aislamiento en los puntos de conexin de
alimentacin:
se jan fcilmente al interruptor automtico
Separador de fases.
una nica versin para aparatos jos y adaptadores en bases de conexin
no compatibles con cubrebornes de terminales
el adaptador para el zcalo se requiere para el montaje en las versiones sobre zcalo
o chasis.
Pantallas de aislamiento posteriores

Accesorios de seguridad que ofrecen aislamiento en la parte posterior del aparato.
Su uso resulta obligatorio para los aparatos con distribuidores, instalados en placas
posteriores, cuando no se utilizan cubrebornes de terminales.
A continuacin, se muestran las dimensiones de pantallas disponibles.
Interruptor automtico NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630

3P An Al grosor (mm) 140 105 1 203 175 1,5
4P An Al grosor (mm) 175 105 1 275 175 1,5
Pantallas de aislamiento posteriores.
1/77
Seleccin de auxiliares para Compact NSX100/160/250
Estndar Sealizaciones a distancia

Todos los interruptores seccionadores e interruptores Los interruptores automticos equipados con unidades de control Micrologic pueden
automticos Compact NSX100/160/250 cuentan con incluir una sealizacin de disparo por defecto para identicar el tipo de defecto me-
ranuras para los componentes auxiliares elctricos que diante la instalacin de:
se indican a continuacin.
1 bloque de sealizacin con dos salidas (ver pg. 1/85)
5 contactos de sealizacin (ver pg. 1/84) un bloque SDx con Micrologic 2.2 /5.2 A E / 6.2 A E
2 de ON/OFF (OF1 y OF2) o un bloque SDTAM con Micrologic 2.2 M 6-2 E-M (proteccin de motor).
1 de sealizacin de disparo (SD) Este bloque ocupa las ranuras de un contacto OF y una bobina MN/MX.
1 de sealizacin de disparo por defecto (SDE)
Todos estos componentes auxiliares pueden instalarse con un mando motorizado
1 de sealizacin de defecto a tierra (SDV), cuando el
o un mando rotativo.
aparato est equipado con un bloque Vigi.
En la siguiente tabla, se indican las posibilidades de componentes auxiliares en funcin
1 bobina de control a distancia (ver pgs. 1/88 y 1/89) del tipo de unidad de control.
1 bobina de mnima tensin MN
o 1 bobina de emisin MX.
NA, TMD, TMG, MA

Estndar
Motorizacin /
mando rotativo
SD SDE
OF1 OF2 OF2
SD SDE OF1
MN /
MX MN /
MX
SDV
SDV
Micrologic 2 / 5 / 6
Estndar Sealizaciones a distancia a travs de SDx o SDTAM
Motorizacin /
mando rotativo Motorizacin /
mando rotativo
OF1 OF2 24 V DC
bornero de alimentacin
SD SDE SDx /
o SDTAM
MN /
MX
El bloque SDx o SDTAM utiliza las ranuras OF1 y MN/MX.

La conexin externa se realiza a travs de un bornero en la ranura OF1.
La fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc alimenta la pantalla de la unidad de control Micrologic
5 / 6 cuando el aparato est desconectado o en condiciones de baja carga.
1/78
Seleccin de auxiliares para Compact NSX100/160/250 (continuacin)
Comunicacin Comunicacin de medidas
La comunicacin requiere componentes auxiliares espe- Disponible en unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6, el sistema est constituido por:
ccos (ver pg. 1/26). 1 cable NSX (bornero interno) para la comunicacin y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc
de Micrologic.
Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado La comunicacin de las medidas es compatible con una mando motorizado estndar
1 bloque BSCM. o con comunicacin y un mando rotativo.
1 cable NSX (bornero interno) para la comunicacin Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado, controles y medidas
y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc de BSCM.
La comunicacin de las condiciones de estado es com- Disponible en unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6, el sistema est constituido por:
patible con una mando motorizado estndar y un mando 1 bloque BSCM
rotativo. 1 cable NSX (bornero interno) para la comunicacin y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc
de BSCM y Micrologic.
Comunicacin de controles y sealizaciones de 1 mando motorizado de comunicacin conectado al bloque BSCM.
estado
La instalacin de SDx o SDTAM es compatible con la comunicacin.
Adems de los componentes auxiliares anteriores,
requiere: En la siguiente tabla, se indican las posibilidades de componentes auxiliares en funcin
1 mando motorizado de comunicacin conectado al del tipo de unidad de control.
bloque BSCM.
NA, TMD, TMG, MA, Micrologic 2

Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado Comunicacin de controles y sealizaciones de estado
Motorizacin
Motorizacin / comunicable
mando rotativo
BSCM
NSX cord
BSCM
o
NSX cord
Micrologic 5 / 6
Comunicacin de medidas con o sin pantalla FDM121 Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado, controles y medidas
con o sin pantalla FDM121
Motorizacin / Motorizacin
mando rotativo comunicable
NSX cord BSCM

o NSX cord
1/79
Seleccin de auxiliares para Compact NSX400/630
Estndar Sealizaciones a distancia

Todos los interruptores seccionadores e interruptores Los interruptores automticos equipados con unidades de control Micrologic pueden
automticos Compact NSX400/630 cuentan con ranuras incluir una sealizacin de disparo por defecto para identicar el tipo de defecto me-
para los componentes auxiliares elctricos que se indi- diante la instalacin de:
can a continuacin.
1 bloque de sealizacin con dos salidas (ver pg. 1/85)
7 contactos de sealizacin (ver pg. 1/84) un bloque SDx con unidad de control Micrologic 2.2 /5.2 A E / 6.2 A E
4 de ON/OFF (OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4) o un bloque SDTAM con unidad de control Micrologic 2.2 M 6-2 E-M (proteccin
1 de sealizacin de disparo (SD) de motor).
1 de sealizacin de disparo por defecto (SDE) Este bloque ocupa las ranuras de una bobina MN/MX.
1 de sealizacin de defecto a tierra (SDV), cuando el
Todos estos componentes auxiliares pueden instalarse con un mando motorizado
aparato est equipado con un bloque Vigi.
o un mando rotativo.
1 bobina de control a distancia (ver pgs. 1/88 y 1/89) En la siguiente tabla, se indican las posibilidades de componentes auxiliares en funcin
1 bobina de mnima tensin MN del tipo de unidad de control.
o 1 bobina de emisin MX.
NA, Micrologic 1.3 M

Estndar
Motorizacin/
mando rotativo
OF1,
OF2, SD
OF1 SD OF3
SDE
OF2
OF3 OF4
SDE
Reserved OF4 Reserved
MN / MN /
MX MX
SDV
SDV
Micrologic 2 / 5 / 6
Estndar
Motorizacin / Motorizacin /
mando rotativo mando rotativo
OF1 SD
OF2 24 V DC
OF3 SDE o bornero
Reserved OF4 SDx / de alimentacin
MN / SDTAM
MX
El bloque SDx o SDTAM utiliza la ranura reservada y las ranuras MN/MX.

La conexin externa se realiza a travs de un bornero en la ranura reservada.
La fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc alimenta la pantalla de Micrologic 5 / 6 cuando el aparato
est desconectado o en condiciones de baja carga.
1/80
Seleccin de auxiliares para Compact NSX400/630 (continuacin)
Comunicacin Comunicacin de medidas
La comunicacin requiere componentes auxiliares espe- Disponible en la unidad de control Micrologic 5 / 6, el sistema est constituido por:
ccos (ver pg. 1/26). 1 cable NSX (bornero interno) para la comunicacin y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc
de la unidad de control Micrologic.
Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado La comunicacin de las medidas es compatible con una mando motorizado estndar
1 bloque BSCM o de comunicacin y un mando rotativo.
1 cable NSX (bornero interno) para la comunicacin Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado, controles y medidas
y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc de BSCM.
La comunicacin de las condiciones de estado es com- Disponible en Micrologic 5 / 6, el sistema est constituido por:
patible con una mando motorizado estndar y un mando 1 bloque BSCM
rotativo. 1 cable NSX (bornero interno) para la comunicacin y la alimentacin de 24 Vcc
de BSCM y Micrologic.
Comunicacin de controles e sealizaciones de 1 mando motorizado de comunicacin conectado al bloque BSCM.
estado
La instalacin de SDx o SDTAM es compatible con la comunicacin.
Adems de los componentes auxiliares anteriores,
requiere: En la siguiente tabla, se indican las posibilidades de componentes auxiliares en funcin
1 mando motorizado de comunicacin conectado al del tipo de unidad de control.
bloque BSCM.
NA, Micrologic 1.3 M, Micrologic 2

Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado Comunicacin de controles y sealizaciones de estado
Motorizacin / Motorizacin
NSX cord NSX cord
o
BSCM BSCM
Micrologic 5 / 6
Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado Comunicacin de sealizaciones de estado, controles y medidas
con o sin pantalla FDM121
Motorizacin/ Motorizacin
NSX cord
o
BSCM
NSX cord
1/81
Conexin de auxiliares elctricos
Compact NSX fijo

Los circuitos auxiliares salen del aparato a travs de una perforacin de la cubierta
frontal.
Compact NSX sobre chasis o zcalo

Conectores auxiliares automticos
Los circuitos auxiliares salen del interruptor automtico a travs de uno a tres conecto-
res auxiliares automticos (nueve cables cada uno). stos estn constituidos por:
una parte mvil, conectada al interruptor automtico a travs de un soporte (un sopor-
te por interruptor automtico)
una parte ja, montada en el zcalo, equipada con conectores para cables pelados
Compact NSX jo.
de hasta 2,5 mm.
Las opciones de la unidad de control Micrologic tambin se conectan a travs de los
conectores auxiliares automticos.
Seleccin de conectores auxiliares automticos

Segn las funciones instaladas, se requerirn de uno a tres conectores auxiliares auto-
1
mticos.
3 2
1
2 4
3 5
6
4
5 7
6 8
9
7
8
9
Compact NSX con zcalo o chasis.
Conector 1 Conector 1
Conector 2 Conector 2
Conector 3
Conector auxiliar automtico:
Compact NSX400/630
Parte ja
Parte mvil
1/82
Conexin de auxiliares elctricos (continuacin)
Compact NSX extrable

Conectores auxiliares manuales
Como opcin para los conectores auxiliares automticos, los interruptores automticos
sobre chasis pueden disponer de una a tres clavijas con nueve cables cada una. En la
posicin "desconectado", los componentes auxiliares permanecen conectados.
Podrn comprobarse utilizando el aparato.
Conector 1
Conector auxiliar manual de 9 cables Conector 2
Compact NSX100/160/250 Conector 1

Conector 2
Conector 3
Cada componente auxiliar dispone de un bornero con

terminales numerados para la conexin de cables de
hasta:
1,5 mm para contactos auxiliares y bobinas de tensin
2,5 mm para el bloque de mando motorizado.
Interruptor Conector 1 Conector 2 Conector 3

automtico
OF1 SDx/ OF2/SDV / ZSI (1) OF3
o
MN/MX SDTAM SDE OF4
SD Cable NSX ZSI entrada
MT ZSI salida
MTc
24 Vcc
NSX100/160/250 p p -
NSX400/630 p p p
(1) Slo para NSX100 a 250. Compact NSX400/630

MT: mando motorizado.
MTc: mando motorizado comunicable.
1/83
Contactos de sealizacin
Un tipo de contacto nico ofrece sealizaciones Estos contactos de inversin de punto comn ofrecen informacin de estado del inte-
de estado del interruptor automtico (OF - SD - rruptor automtico remoto.
SDE - SDV). Pueden utilizarse para sealizaciones, enclavamientos elctricos, rels, etc.
Cumple la recomendacin internacional IEC 60947-5.
Puede utilizarse un contacto junto con un mando
rotativo, para anticipar la apertura o el cierre del Funciones
aparato.
Sealizaciones de estado del interruptor automtico, durante el funcionamiento
Un contacto CE / CD indica si el chasis est normal o tras un defecto
conectado o desconectado. Un nico tipo de contacto ofrece todas estas funciones de sealizacin diferentes:
OF (ON/OFF) indica la posicin de los contactos del interruptor automtico
SD (sealizacin de control) indica que el interruptor automtico se ha disparado
debido a:
una sobrecarga
un cortocircuito
un defecto a tierra (Vigi) o un defecto a tierra (Micrologic 6)
activacin de una bobina de tensin
activacin del botn "pulsar para disparar"
desconexin cuando el aparato est conectado.
El contacto SD vuelve al estado sin alimentacin cuando se reinicia el interruptor automtico.
SDE (sealizacin de control por defecto) indica que el interruptor automtico se ha
disparado debido a:
Contactos de sealizacin. una sobrecarga
un cortocircuito
un defecto a tierra (Vigi) o un defecto a tierra (Micrologic 6).
El contacto SDE vuelve al estado sin alimentacin cuando se reinicia el interruptor
automtico.
SDV indica que el interruptor automtico se ha disparado debido a un defecto a tierra.
Vuelve al estado sin alimentacin cuando se reinicia el bloque Vigi.
Todos los contactos auxiliares anteriores tambin se ofrecen en versiones de "bajo nivel"
capaces de conmutar cargas muy bajas (p. ej., para el control de autmatas o circuitos
electrnicos).
Interruptores de carro CE/CD.
Contacto de posicin de mando rotativo para funciones de conexin avanzada al
cierre o a la apertura
Los contactos CAM (funcin de accin avanzada a la maniobra) indican la posicin
del mando rotativo.
Se utilizan especialmente para la apertura anticipada de aparatos de control de
seguridad (corte avanzado) o para alimentar un aparato de control antes del cierre del
interruptor automtico (conexin avanzada).
Contactos de posicin de chasis
Los contactos CE/CD (conectado/desconectado) son interruptores de tipo micro-
contacto para interruptores automticos extrables.
Instalacin
Funciones OF, SD, SDE y SDV: un nico tipo de contacto ofrece todas estas funciones
de sealizacin diferentes, en funcin del lugar del aparato en el que se inserte. Los
contactos se jan a las ranuras detrs de la cubierta frontal del interruptor automtico
(o el bloque Vigi para la funcin SDV).
La funcin SDE de un interruptor automtico equipado con una unidad de control mag-
netotrmica requiere el accionador SDE.
Funcin CAM: el contacto se ja a la unidad de mando rotativo (directa o extendida).
Funcin CE/CD: los contactos se jan a la parte ja del chasis.
Caractersticas elctricas de los contactos auxiliares

Contactos Estndar Bajo nivel
Tipos de contactos Todos OF, SD, SDE, SDV
Corriente trmica nominal (A) 6 5
Carga mnima 100 mA a 24 Vcc 1 mA a 4 Vcc
Cat. de utilizacin (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Corriente 24 V ca/cc 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
de funciona- 48 V ca/cc 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
miento (A) 110 V ca/cc 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V ca 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V cc - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V ca 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V ca 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V ca 6 0.1 - - - - - -
1/84
Bloques SDx y SDTAM para Micrologic
SDx y SDTAM son bloques de rel con dos salidas Bloque SDx
estticas. Envan diferentes seales en funcin del
El bloque SDx utiliza de forma remota las condiciones de control o alarma de los inte-
tipo de defecto. No pueden utilizarse juntos.
rruptores automticos Compact NSX equipados con proteccin electrnica.
La salida SD2, disponible en todas las unidades de control Micrologic, corresponde a la
sealizacin de control de sobrecarga.
La salida SD4, disponible en Micrologic 5 / 6, se asigna a:
prealarma de sobrecarga (Micrologic 5)
sealizacin de control por defecto a tierra (Micrologic 6).
Estas dos salidas se reinician automticamente cuando el aparato se cierra (conectado).
Para Micrologic 5 / 6, las salidas SD2 y SD4 pueden reprogramarse para asignarse a
otros tipos de control o alarma.
Caractersticas de salida
Se puede asignar una funcin:
enganche con temporizacin. La vuelta al estado inicial se produce al nalizar la
temporizacin
enganche permanente. En este caso, la vuelta al estado inicial tiene lugar a travs
de la funcin de comunicacin.
Salidas estticas: 24 a 415 Vca/cc; 80 mA mx.
Bloque SDTAM
Bloque de rel SDx con su bornero.
El bloque SDTAM se utiliza especcamente para las unidades de control Micrologic
de proteccin de motor
2.2 M, 2.3 M y 6.2 E-M, 6.3 E-M.
El bloque SDTAM, vinculado al controlador de contactor, abre el contactor cuando se
produce una sobrecarga o cualquier otro defecto del motor, evitando as la apertura del
interruptor automtico.
Unidad de control Micrologic 2 M
La salida SD4 abre el contactor 400 ms antes de la apertura normal del interruptor
automtico en los siguientes casos:
sobrecarga (proteccin de largo retardo para la clase de control)
desequilibrio de fases o prdida de fase.
La salida SD2 sirve para memorizar la apertura del contactor por SDTAM.
Unidad de control Micrologic 6 E-M
La salida SD4 abre el contactor 400 ms antes de la apertura normal del interruptor
automtico en los siguientes casos:
sobrecarga (proteccin de largo retardo para la clase de control)
Bloque de rel SDTAM con su bornero.
desequilibrio de fases o prdida de fase
rotor bloqueado
falta de carga (proteccin de mnima intensidad)
arranque largo.
La salida SD2 sirve para memorizar la apertura del contactor por SDTAM.
Caractersticas de salida
El reinicio de salida puede ser:
manual mediante un pulsador incluido en el diagrama de cableado
automtico tras una temporizacin regulable (de 1 a 15 minutos) para tener en cuenta
el tiempo de enfriamiento del motor.
Salidas estticas: 24 a 415 Vca/cc; 80 mA mx.
a (+) 24 to 415 V
a (+) 24 to 415 V Manual Closing

SDT KAI
reset order KMI
PAL Ir
SDT SD3 SD2 SD4
or SDG
or output 1
or output 2
SDTAM
SD3 SD2 SD4
6 8 Opening
SDx Q 4 10 order
2 12
1 14
Q KAI
OFF 15
Auto reset (mn)
KMI
SD1
SD1
KMI
a (-)
a (-)
Diagrama de cableado de SDTAM con control de contactor.
Diagrama de cableado de SDx.
1/85
Mando motorizado
Cuando estn equipados con un mando motorizado, los interruptores automticos

Compact NSX ofrecen una resistencia mecnica muy elevada as como un funciona-
miento sencillo y seguro:
toda la informacin y las sealizaciones del interruptor automtico permanecen visi-
bles y accesibles, incluidas las regulaciones e sealizaciones de la unidad de control
se mantiene la idoneidad para el aislamiento y el uso de candados sigue siendo
posible
doble aislamiento de la parte frontal.
Para el funcionamiento a travs de la funcin comunicable, se requiere una mando
motorizado especco. Esta mando motorizado comunicable deber conectarse al
bloque BSCM para recibir las rdenes de apertura y cierre. El funcionamiento es idnti-
Compact NSX250 con mando motorizado. co al de un mando motorizado estndar.
1 2 3 Aplicaciones
Funcionamiento accionado por motor local, funcionamiento centralizado, control de
distribucin automtico.
Inversin o cambio de una fuente normal/auxiliar a una fuente de sustitucin para
garantizar la disponibilidad u optimizar los costes energticos.
0OFF discharged
Deslastrado de cargas y reconexin.
4 Sincro-acoplamiento.
Funcionamiento
El tipo de funcionamiento se selecciona utilizando el interruptor de seleccin de modo
manual/automtico (7). Una tapa hermtica precintable transparente controla el acceso
OFF ON al interruptor.
Automtico
Cuando el interruptor se encuentra en la posicin "automtico", se bloquean los botones
8 7 6 5 ON/OFF (I/O) y la palanca de carga del mecanismo.
Interruptor automtico ON y OFF controlado por dos seales mantenidas o de tipo
1 Indicador de posicin
(sealizacin de contacto positivo) impulso.
2 Indicador de estado del muelle (cargado, descargado) Carga automtica de resorte tras el control voluntario (por MN o MX), con cableado
3 Palanca de carga del muelle manual estndar.
4 Aparato de cerradura (opcional) Reinicio manual obligatorio tras el control debido a un defecto elctrico.
Aparato de enclavamiento (posicin OFF), con 1 a 3 candados,
dimetro de abrazadera de 5 a 8 mm, no suministrado Manual
5 Pulsador I (ON) Cuando el interruptor se encuentra en la posicin "manual", pueden utilizarse los boto-
6 Pulsador O (OFF)
7 Interruptor de seleccin de modo manual/automtico nes ON/OFF (I/O). Un micro-contacto vinculado a la posicin manual puede enviar de
La posicin de este interruptor puede indicarse forma remota la informacin.
de forma remota Interruptor automtico ON y OFF controlado por 2 pulsadores I/O.
8 Contador de maniobras (Compact NSX400/630) Recarga del sistema por accionamiento de la palanca (8 maniobras).
Candado en posicin OFF.
1/86
Mando motorizado (continuacin)
Instalacin y conexiones
Se mantienen todas las posibilidades de instalacin (ja, zcalo, chasis) y conexin.
Las conexiones del bloque de mando motorizado se realizan detrs de su cubierta
frontal con los terminales integrados, para cables de hasta 2,5 mm.
Accesorios opcionales
Cerradura para enclavamiento en posicin OFF.
Contador de operaciones para el Compact NSX400/630, que indica el nmero de
ciclos ON/OFF. Deber instalarse en la parte frontal del bloque de mando motorizado.
Caractersticas
Mando motorizado MT100 a MT630
Tiempo de respuesta (ms) apertura < 600
cierre < 80
Cadencia de maniobras ciclos/minuto mx. 4
Tensin de control (V) cc 24/30 - 48/60 - 110/130 - 250
50/60 Hz ca 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 - 220/240 -
380/440
Consumo (1) cc (W) apertura y 500
cierre y 500
ca (VA) apertura y 500
cierre y 500
(1) Para NSX100 a NSX250, la intensidad de entrada es de 2 In durante 10 ms.
Resistencia elctrica
50
40
30 NSX100
20 NSX160
15
10 NSX250
6 NSX400
4 NSX630
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 I/In
Interruptor automtico + bloque de mando motorizado, en miles de operaciones

(IEC 60947 2), a 440 V.
1/87
Control a distancia
Las bobinas de disparo MX o MN se utilizan para disparar el interruptor automtico.

Sirven principalmente para comandos de desconexin de emergencia remotos.
Se recomienda probar el sistema cada seis meses.
Bobina de mnima tensin MN
La bobina MN abre el interruptor automtico cuando su tensin de suministro se reduce
a un valor por debajo del 35% de su tensin nominal Un.
El control por mnima tensin, combinado con un botn de desconexin de emergen-
cia, ofrece un control a prueba de defectos. La bobina MN est alimentada de forma
constante, p. ej., si el suministro se interrumpe:
voluntariamente, por el botn de desconexin de emergencia,
o accidentalmente, por la prdida de alimentacin o un cableado defectuoso, la bobi-
Bobina de tensin MX o MN. na ocasiona la apertura del interruptor automtico.
Condiciones de apertura
Failsafe opening Possible opening
El control del interruptor automtico por una bobina MN cumple los requisitos de la
0 norma IEC 60947-2.
0.35 0.7 1.1 Un La apertura automtica del interruptor automtico queda garantizada cuando el sumi-
Condiciones de apertura de la bobina MN. nistro de tensin continuo a la bobina U y 0,35 Un.
Si la tensin de suministro oscila entre 0,35 y 0,7 Un, la apertura es posible, pero no
Failsafe closing est garantizada. Por encima de 0,7 Un, la apertura no es posible.
Condiciones de cierre
0
0.85 1.1 Un
Si no existe suministro a la bobina MN, no podr cerrarse el interruptor automtico, ya
Condiciones de cierre de la bobina MN. sea de forma elctrica o manual. El cierre queda garantizado cuando el suministro de
tensin a la bobina U u 0,85 Un. Por debajo de este umbral, el cierre no est garanti-
zado.
Delayed
trip order
Caractersticas
10 12 Fuente de alimentacin Vca 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240
Time-delay 50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
unit Vcc 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
3 6 Umbral de funcionamiento Apertura 0,35 a 0,7 Un
Instantaneous
trip order Cierre 0,85 Un
Rango de funcionamiento 0,85 a 1,1 Un
D2 Consumo (VA o W) Rearme: 30 - Mantenimiento: 5
Tiempo de respuesta (ms) 50
MN
Temporizacin para bobina MN
D1 Una unidad de temporizacin para la bobina MN elimina el riesgo de controles intem-
pestivos debidos a una cada de tensin transitoria con una duracin y 200 ms. Para
los microcortes de menor duracin, un sistema de condensadores ofrece un suministro
Bobina MN con una unidad Diagrama de cableado para
de temporizacin. la funcin de desconexin de
temporal a la bobina MN de U > 0,7 para garantizar la falta de control.
emergencia con MN + unidad A continuacin, se indica la correspondencia entre las bobinas MN y las unidades de
de temporizacin. temporizacin.
Fuente de alimentacin Bobina MN correspondiente

Unidad con temporizacin fija de 200 ms
48 Vca 48 Vcc
220/240 Vca 250 Vcc
Unidad con temporizacin ajustable y 200 ms
48 - 60 Vca/cc 48 Vcc
100 - 130 Vca/cc 125 Vcc
1/88
Control a distancia (continuacin)
Bobina de emisin MX
Apertura posible Apertura asegurada
La bobina de emisin MX abre el interruptor automtico a travs de una orden manteni-
0 da o de tipo impulso (u 20 ms).
0.7 1.1 Un
Condiciones de apertura
Condiciones de apertura de la bobina MX.
Cuando la bobina MX recibe suministro, abre automticamente el interruptor automti-
co. La apertura queda garantizada para una tensin U u 0,7 Un.
Caractersticas
Fuente de alimentacin Vca 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240
50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
Vcc 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Rango de funcionamiento 0,7 a 1,1 Un
Consumo (VA o W) Rearme: 30
Tiempo de respuesta (ms) 50
Control de interruptor automtico por MN o MX

Cuando el interruptor automtico ha sido disparado por una bobina MN o MX, deber
reiniciarse antes de que pueda volverse a cerrar.
El control de MN o MX tiene prioridad sobre el cierre manual.
En presencia de una orden de control ja, no se pueden cerrar los contactos,
ni siquiera temporalmente.
Conexin con borneros integrados mediante cables de hasta 1,5 mm.
Nota: la apertura del interruptor automtico con una bobina MN

o MX deber reservarse para las funciones de seguridad.
Este tipo de control aumenta el desgaste del mecanismo de
apertura. Su uso repetido reduce la resistencia mecnica
del interruptor automtico en un 50%.
1/89
Mandos rotativos
Existen dos tipos de mando rotativo: Mando rotativo directo

mando rotativo directo Mando estndar
mando rotativo prolongado. Grado de proteccin IP40, IK07.

El mando rotativo directo mantiene:
Existen dos modelos: visibilidad y acceso a las regulaciones de la unidad de control
idoneidad para el aislamiento
estndar con un mando negro sealizacin de las tres posiciones O (OFF), I (ON) y disparado
mando rojo y parte frontal amarilla para el acceso al botn "pulsar para disparar".
control de mquinas-herramienta. Enclavamiento del aparato
El mando rotativo facilita el enclavamiento del interruptor automtico.
Candado:
situacin estndar, en la posicin OFF, uso de 1 a 3 candados, dimetro de abrazade-
ra de 5 a 8 mm, no suministrado
con una simple modicacin, en las posiciones ON y OFF. El enclavamiento en la
posicin ON no evita el libre control del interruptor automtico si se produce un defecto.
En este caso, el mando permanece en la posicin ON tras el control del interruptor
automtico. El desenclavamiento resulta necesario para ir a la posicin disparado y
despus, a la posicin OFF.
Cerradura (y candado)
Se puede instalar una cerradura Ronis o Profalux (opcional) en la base del mando para
obtener las mismas funciones que ofrece un candado.
Contactos de conexin anticipada y corte anticipado (opcional)
Con el mando rotativo pueden utilizarse contactos de conexin anticipada y/o de corte
anticipado. As pues, se puede:
Compact NSX con un mando rotativo. proporcionar suministro a una bobina de mnima tensin MN antes de cerrarse el
interruptor automtico
abrir el circuito de control de contactor antes de abrirse el interruptor automtico.
Control de cuadro de distribucin MCC
El control de un cuadro de distribucin MCC se obtiene aadiendo un kit al mando
estndar. Adems de las funciones estndar, el kit ofrece las siguientes caractersticas.
Mayor grado de proteccin IP
Grado de proteccin IP43, IK07.
El IP aumenta mediante una junta integrada.
Enclavamiento de puerta en funcin de la posicin del aparato
La puerta no puede abrirse si el interruptor automtico se encuentra en las posi-
ciones ON o disparado. En situaciones excepcionales, el enclavamiento de la puerta
puede desactivarse temporalmente con una herramienta para abrir la puerta cuando
el interruptor automtico est cerrado. Esta operacin no es posible si el mando est
bloqueada con un candado.
Compact NSX con un mando rotativo MCC. El cierre del interruptor automtico se desactiva si se abre la puerta. Esta funcin
puede desactivarse.
Control de mquinas-herramienta de acuerdo con CNOMO
El control de una mquina-herramienta se logra aadiendo un kit al mando estndar.
Adems de las funciones estndar, el kit ofrece las siguientes caractersticas.
Proteccin mecnica e impermeabilidad mejoradas
Cumplimiento de CNOMO E03.81.501N.
Mando rotativo prolongado

El mando rotativo prolongado permite utilizar los interruptores automticos instalados en
la parte posterior de los cuadros de distribucin desde la parte frontal de los mismos.
Mantiene:
visibilidad y acceso a las regulaciones de la unidad de control
Compact NSX con un mando rotativo de mquina-herramienta idoneidad para el aislamiento
CNOMO. sealizacin de las tres posiciones O (OFF), I (ON) y disparado.
1/90
Mandos rotativos (continuacin)
Enclavamiento mecnico de puerta cuando el aparato est cerrado

Una caracterstica estndar del mando rotativo prolongado es la funcin de enclava-
miento, integrada en el eje, que desactiva la apertura de la puerta cuando el interruptor
automtico est en las posiciones ON o disparado.
El enclavamiento de la puerta puede desactivarse temporalmente con una herramienta
para abrir la puerta sin abrir el interruptor automtico. Esta operacin no es posible si el
mando est bloqueada con un candado.
Desactivacin voluntaria del enclavamiento mecnico de puerta
Una modicacin del mando, que puede realizarse en las instalaciones, desactiva com-
pletamente el enclavamiento de la puerta, inclusive cuando hay instalado un candado.
La modicacin es reversible.
Cuando se instalan varios mandos rotativos prolongados en un puerta, esta funcin de
Compact NSX con un mando rotativo prolongado instalada en la
desactivacin sirve para garantizar el enclavamiento de la puerta con un nico aparato.
parte posterior de un cuadro de distribucin, con la opcin de
cerradura y llave. Aparato y candado de puerta
El candado bloquea el mando del interruptor automtico y desactiva la apertura de la
puerta:
situacin estndar, en la posicin OFF, uso de 1 a 3 candados, dimetro de abrazade-
ra de 5 a 8 mm, no suministrado
con una simple modicacin, en las posiciones ON y OFF. El enclavamiento en la posi-
cin ON no evita el libre control del interruptor automtico si se produce un defecto.
En este caso, el mando permanece en la posicin ON tras el control del interruptor auto-
mtico. El desenclavamiento resulta necesario para ir a la posicin "disparado"
y despus, a la posicin "OFF".
Si los controles de la puerta se han modicado para desactivar voluntariamente el
enclavamiento de la puerta, el candado no bloquea la puerta, pero s desactiva el fun-
cionamiento del mando del aparato.
Enclavamiento del aparato mediante el uso de una cerradura dentro del cuadro de
distribucin
Se puede instalar una cerradura Ronis o Profalux (opcional) en la base del mando rotati-
vo para bloquear el aparato en las posiciones OFF u ON.
Accesorio para utilizar el aparato con la puerta abierta
Cuando el aparato est equipado con un mando rotativo prolongado, un accesorio
de control montado en el eje permite su uso con la puerta abierta.
El aparato puede cerrarse con candado en la posicin OFF.
El accesorios cumple UL508.
Contactos de conexin anticipada y corte anticipado (opcional)
El mando rotativo prolongado ofrece las mismas posibilidades con contactos de
conexin anticipada y/o corte anticipado que el mando rotativo estndar.
Partes de los mandos rotativos prolongados
Una unidad que sustituye la cubierta frontal del interruptor automtico (jada con
tornillos).
Un conjunto (mando y placa frontal) en la puerta que siempre est jado en la misma
posicin, tanto si el interruptor automtico est instalado vertical como horizontalmente.
Un eje de prolongacin que debe ajustarse a la distancia. La distancia mn./mx. entre
la parte posterior del interruptor automtico y la puerta es:
185600 mm para Compact NSX100 a 250
209600 mm para Compact NS400/630.
Para los aparatos extrables, el mando rotativo prolongado tambin se ofrece con un eje
telescpico para compensar la desconexin del aparato. En este caso, las distancias
mn./mx. son:
248600 mm para Compact NSX100 a 250
272...600 mm para Compact NS400/630.
Inversor de redes manual

Un accesorio adicional enclava dos aparatos con mandos rotativos para crear un sis-
tema de inversin de redes. El cierre de un aparato slo es posible si el segundo est
abierto.
Esta funcin es compatible con mandos rotativos directos o prolongados.
Pueden utilizarse hasta tres candados para el enclavamiento en la posicin OFF u ON.
1/91
Bloques de sealizacin y medida adicionales
Indicador de presencia de tensin

El indicador detecta e indica que los terminales del interruptor automtico reciben
alimentacin.
Instalacin
Indicador de presencia de tensin. Montado en los cubrebornes de terminales largos o cortos, a travs de las perforaciones.
Puede colocarse aguas arriba o aguas abajo del interruptor automtico.
Incompatible con el bloque de mando motorizado.
Caractersticas elctricas
Funciona en todas las redes con tensiones que oscilan entre 220 y 550 Vca.
Bloque de transformador de intensidad

Este bloque permite la conexin directa de un aparato de medida como un ampermetro
o un potencimetro.
Instalacin
El bloque se instala directamente en los terminales del interruptor automtico aguas
abajo.
Aislamiento de clase II entre la parte frontal y los circuitos de alimentacin.
Conexin a 6 conectores integrados para cables de hasta 2,5 mm.
Transformadores de intensidad con devanado secundario de 5 A.
Clase 3 para los siguientes valores de potencia consumida de salida:
Precisin:
Calibre de 100 A: 1,6 VA
Calibre de 150 A: 3 VA
Calibre de 250 A: 5 VA
Calibre de 400/600 A: 8 VA.
Bloque de transformador de intensidad con salidas

de medida de tensin
Este bloque permite la conexin directa de un aparato de medida digital como un
Power Meter PM700, PM800, etc. (no suministrado).
Instalacin
abajo.
Conectores integrados para cables de 1,5 a 2,5 mm.
Tensin nominal de funcionamiento Ue: 530 V
Frecuencias de valores medidos: 50...60 Hz
Tres TI con devanados secundarios de 5 A para la intensidad nominal principal In :
clase de 0,5 a 1 para valores de consumo de potencia nominal en la salida:
Especicaciones de 125 A, 150 A y 250 A: clase 1 para 1,1 VA
Especicacin de 400/600 A: clase 0,5 para 2 VA
Conexin con un cable de 2,5 mm2 con una longitud de hasta 2,5 m.
Compact NSX con bloque de transformadores de intensidad.
Cuatro salidas de medida de tensin que incluyen proteccin con reinicio automtico.
impedancia de salida de medida de tensin de 3.500 25%, intensidad mxima de
1 mA
Las salidas de medida de tensin se destinan nicamente a medidas
(1 mA mx.) y no pueden utilizarse para alimentar la pantalla.
1/92
Bloques de sealizacin y medida adicionales (continuacin)
Ampermetro y bloques de ampermetro Imax

Bloque de ampermetro
Mide y muestra la intensidad de cada fase (seleccin de fases con el interruptor de 3
posiciones de la parte frontal).
Bloque de ampermetro Imx.
Mide y muestra la intensidad mxima que uye en la fase media. El valor Imx. puede
reiniciarse en la parte frontal.
Instalacin
Idntica para ambos tipos de bloque de ampermetro.
abajo.
El ampermetro se ja al bloque en cualquiera de las cuatro posiciones de 90, es
decir, que puede instalarse en aparatos montados tanto vertical como horizontalmente.
Compact NSX con bloque ampermetro. Bloque de ampermetro: clase de precisin 4,5
Bloque de ampermetro Imx.: precisin 6%
Las intensidades mximas slo se muestran si duran u 15 minutos.
Bloque de supervisin de aislamiento

Este bloque detecta e indica una reduccin de aislamiento en un circuito de carga
(sistemas TN-S o TT).
El funcionamiento es idntico al del bloque Vigi, pero sin el control del interruptor auto-
mtico.
Sealizacin mediante un LED rojo en la parte frontal.
Puede instalarse un contacto auxiliar para las sealizaciones de reduccin de aisla-
miento remotas.
Cuando el aislamiento desciende por debajo de un umbral mnimo establecido por el
usuario, el LED se enciende y el contacto auxiliar se activa. La sealizacin de defecto
slo puede cancelarse pulsando el botn de reinicio manual.
Instalacin
abajo.
Doble aislamiento de la parte frontal.
Bloque de supervisin de aislamiento.
Regulaciones: 100 - 200 - 500 - 1.000 mA
Precisin: -50 +0 %
Temporizacin tras la reduccin de aislamiento: 5 a 10 segundos
Tensin de sistema ca: 200 a 440 Vca.
1/93
Enclavamientos
Enclavamiento de conmutacin con candados y un accesorio: El enclavamiento en la posicin OFF garantiza el aislamiento segn IEC 60947-2.
Los sistemas de candado pueden recibir hasta tres candados con dimetros
de abrazadera comprendidos entre 5 y 8 mm (candados no suministrados).
Algunos sistemas de enclavamiento requieren un accesorio adicional.
Aparato de control Funcin Medio Accesorios necesarios

Maneta Enclavamiento en Candado Aparato extrable
posicin OFF
Enclavamiento en Candado Aparato jo
posicin OFF u ON
Mando rotativo Estn- Enclavamiento en Candado -
directo dar posicin OFF Cerradura Aparato de enclavamiento
Aparato extrable. Aparato jo conectado
posicin OFF u ON (1) + cerradura
a la caja.
MCC Enclavamiento en Candado -
Enclavamiento de mando rotativo con una cerradura: posicin OFF
posicin OFF u ON (1)
CNO- Enclavamiento en Candado -
MO posicin OFF
Mando rotativo Enclavamiento en Candado -
prolongado posicin OFF
con apertura de puerta
evitada (2)
Enclavamiento en Candado Accesorio de control UL508
posicin OFF
posicin OFF u ON (1) Cerradura Aparato de enclavamiento
dentro del cuadro de + cerradura
distribucin
Mando motorizado Enclavamiento en posi- Candado -
cin OFF funcionamien- Cerradura Aparato de enclavamiento
to remoto desactivado + cerradura
Interruptor automtico Enclavamiento en Candado -
con chasis posicin desconec- Cerradura Aparato de enclavamiento
tada + cerradura
posicin conectada Cerradura Aparato de enclavamiento
+ cerradura
(1) Tras una simple modicacin del mecanismo.

(2) A menos que el enclavamiento de la puerta haya sido desactivado voluntariamente.
5...8
u auto
man
Enclavamiento de mando rotativo con un candado Enclavamiento de motoriza

o una cerradura. cin con un candado o una
cerradura.
Enclavamiento de chasis en la posicin conectada.
1/94
Accesorios de precintado
Identificacin de circuito de salida

Compact NSX100 a 630 puede incorporar soportes de etiquetas suministrados
en juegos de diez (Ref. LV429226).
Son compatibles con marcos embellecedores.
Accesorios de precintado
Accesorios de identicacin.
Se ofrecen accesorios de precintado. Cada bolsa de accesorios contiene todas las
partes necesarias para los tipos de precintado que se indican a continuacin.
Una bolsa contiene:
6 accesorios de precintado
6 sellos de plomo
0,5 m de cable
2 tornillos.
Accesorios de precintado.
Tipos de precintos y sus funciones correspondientes

Mando maneta
Mando rotativo
Mando motorizado
5...8
5...8
u auto
man
u auto
man
5...8
auto
Tipos de precintos Tornillo de fijacin de cubierta Cubierta transparente Cubierta transparente Tornillo de fijacin de
frontal de unidad de control de mando motorizado cubreborne
Operaciones protegidas extraccin frontal modicacin de regulaciones acceso al interruptor de acceso a conexiones de
acceso a componentes acceso al conector de seleccin de modo manual/ alimentacin (proteccin contra
auxiliares prueba. automtico: en funcin de su contactos directos).
extraccin de unidad de posicin, el funcionamiento
control. manual (1) o automtico no es
posible.
(1) En este caso, el funciona-

miento local no es posible.
Acceso a regulaciones
del bloque Vigi
Tipos de precintos Aparato de fijacin del bloque Cubierta de proteccin para

Vigi regulaciones
Operaciones protegidas extraccin del bloque Vigi. modicacin de regulaciones.
1/95
Marcos embellecedores
Los marcos pueden montarse de forma opcional Marcos embellecedores IP30 IP40 para aparatos fijos
en la puerta del cuadro de distribucin. Aumentan
IP30
el grado de proteccin a IP40, IK07. Los marcos
de proteccin mantienen el grado de proteccin, Los tres tipos se pegan al corte de la puerta frontal del cuadro de distribucin:
independientemente de la posicin del aparato marco para cualquier tipo de control (cambio, mando rotativo o mando motorizado)
sin acceso a la unidad de control
(conectado, desconectado).
con acceso a la unidad de control
para bloques Vigi, puede combinarse con los anteriores.
IP40
Los cuatro tipos, con una junta, se atornillan al corte de la puerta:
tres marcos embellecedores idnticos a los anteriores, pero IP40
un modelo ancho para bloques Vigi y de ampermetro que puede combinarse
con los anteriores.
Marco para cambio sin o con acceso a la unidad de control.
Marco IP30.
160
A 120
80
40
0
160/5A
Marco para bloque Vigi. Marco ancho para ampermetro.
Marco IP30 con acceso a la unidad de control.
1/96
Marcos embellecedores (continuacin)
Marcos embellecedores IP40 para aparatos con chasis

IP40 para aparatos extrables
Los dos tipos, con una junta, se atornillan al corte de la puerta:
para el mando rotativo o el mando motorizado: marco IP40 estndar
para cambio con extensin: marco estndar + collarn para extraccin.
Marco con collarn para maneta.
5
5...8
...8 5...8
Marco estndar Marco estndar Marco estndar con collarn

con mando rotativo. para mando motorizado. para extraccin, para maneta.
IP40 para bloque Vigi en aparatos extrables

Marco para bloque Vigi. Los dos tipos, con una junta, se atornillan al corte de la puerta:
para el mando rotativo o el mando motorizado: marco IP40 estndar
para maneta: marco estndar + collarn para extraccin.
5...8
Fuelle de estanqueidad para maneta.
Marco para bloque Vigi, con marcos para los tres tipos de control.
Cubierta de cambio IP43

Disponible slo para aparatos con cambios. Se coloca sobre la maneta y la cubierta
frontal del aparato.
Montada en la parte frontal del interruptor automtico.
Cubierta frontal de sustitucin NS.
Cubierta de maneta.
Cubiertas frontales de renovacin

Estas cubiertas frontales de sustitucin permiten instalar aparatos NSX en los cuadros
de distribucin existentes que contienen aparatos NS mediante la instalacin de las
cubiertas de renovacin de tipo NS en los aparatos NSX.
Cubierta NS100 a 250.
Cubierta NS400/630.
1/97
Compact
NSX
Recomendaciones
de instalacin

ndice Compact NSX
Recomendaciones de instalacin
Funciones y caractersticas 1/1
2
2 Condiciones de funcionamiento
Condiciones de funcionamiento 2/2
Instalacin en cuadros de distribucin

Fuente de alimentacin y pesos 2/3
Mrgenes de seguridad y distancias mnimas 2/4
Ejemplo de instalacin 2/5
Cableado de control
Cableado de control 2/6
Desclasificacin de temperatura
Compact NSX100 a 250 equipado con unidades de control
magnetotrmicas 2/9
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control electrnicas 2/11
Prdida de potencia/Resistencia
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control magnetotrmicas 2/12
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control electrnicas 2/13
Dimensiones y conexionado 3/1

Caractersticas tcnicas 5/1
Referencias 6/1
Glosario 7/1
Condiciones de funcionamiento
2 (m)
2000
Desclasificacin con la altitud
Las caractersticas de los interruptores automticos Compact NSX no se ven afectadas
de forma signicativa hasta los 2.000 m. A altitudes superiores, ser necesario tener
en cuenta la reduccin de la resistencia dielctrica y la capacidad de refrigeracin del
aire.
En la tabla siguiente se muestran las correcciones que se deben aplicar para altitudes
superiores a 2.000 metros.
Las capacidades de corte no experimentan cambios.
Compact NSX100 a 630

Altitud 2000 3000 4000 5000
Tensin de resistencia dielctrica (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Tensin de aislamiento (V) Ui 800 700 600 500
Tensin mxima de utilizacin (V) Ue 690 590 520 460
Corriente trmica media (A) a 40 C In x 1 0.96 0.93 0.9
Vibraciones
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX estan garantizados contra los niveles de
vibraciones electromagnticas o mecnicas.
Las pruebas se llevan a cabo en conformidad con la norma IEC 60068-2-6 para los
niveles exigidos por las organizaciones de inspeccin de la marina mercante (Veritas,
Lloyds, etc.):
2 a 13,2 Hz: amplitud 1 mm.
13,2 a 100 Hz: aceleracin constante 0,7 g.
El exceso de vibraciones puede provocar el disparo, cortes en las conexiones o daos
en las partes mecnicas.
Grado de proteccin
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX se han sometido a prueba para determinar
su grado de proteccin (IP) y su nivel de proteccin ante los impactos mecnicos (IK).
Consulte la pgina 1/5.
Perturbaciones electromagnticas
Los aparatos Compact NSX estn protegidos contra:
Sobretensiones provocadas por la conmutacin de circuitos.
Sobretensiones provocadas por perturbaciones atmosfricas o por un corte en el
sistema de distribucin (p. ej., el defecto de un sistema de iluminacin).
Aparatos emisores de ondas de radio (radios, walkie-talkies, radares, etc.).
Descargas electrostticas producidas directamente por los usuarios.
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX han superado con xito las pruebas de
compatibilidad electromagntica (CEM) denidas en las siguientes normas internacio-
nales. Consulte la pgina 1/5.
Estas pruebas aseguran que:
No se producen disparos intempestivos.
Se cumplen los intervalos de disparo.
2/2
Alimentacin y pesos
Alimentacin aguas arriba o aguas abajo

Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX pueden alimentarse indistintamente aguas
2
arriba o aguas abajo, incluso cuando estn equipados con un bloque de proteccin
contra Vigi, sin reduccin alguna del rendimiento. Esta capacidad facilita la conexin
cuando se instalan en un cuadro de distribucin.
Todos los accesorios de conexin y de aislamiento se pueden utilizar con interruptores
automticos alimentados desde la parte superior o inferior.
Peso
En la tabla siguiente se muestran los pesos (en kg) de los interruptores automticos
y de los accesorios principales, que se deben sumar para obtener el peso total de las
conguraciones completas. Los valores mostrados son vlidos para todas las catego-
ras de rendimiento.
Tipo de aparato Interruptores automticos Zcalo Chasis Bloque Vigi Bloque Visu Motorizacin
NSX100 3P/2R 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
3P/3R 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4R 2.4 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NSX160 3P/2R 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
3P/3R 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4R 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NSX250 3P/2R 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
3P/3R 2.4 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4R 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NSX400/630 3P/3R 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 4.6 2.8
4P/4R 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 4.9 2.8
2/3
Mrgenes de seguridad y distancias mnimas
2 Conexiones de alimentacin
En la tabla siguiente se muestran las reglas que se
Reglas generales
Cuando se instale un interruptor automtico, debern mantenerse las distancias
deben observar para los aparatos Compact NSX100 a mnimas (mrgenes de seguridad) entre el aparato y los paneles, las barras y otros
630 con el n de asegurar el aislamiento de las piezas en aparatos de proteccin instalados cerca del mismo. Estas distancias, que dependen
tensin para los diversos tipos de conexin. de la capacidad de corte nal, se denen por medio de pruebas realizadas de acuerdo
aparatos jos con conexin frontal (FC) o posterior (RC) con la norma IEC 60947-2.
aparatos enchufables o extrables Si la conformidad de la instalacin no se comprueba mediante pruebas de prototipo,
Los accesorios de conexin, como los terminales de tambin ser necesario:
pliegue, los conectores de cable pelado, las extensiones utilizar barras aisladas para las conexiones del interruptor automtico
de terminal (rectas, en ngulo recto, en doble L y separar las barras de distribucin por medio de pantallas aislantes
de 45) y los distribuidores, se suministran con separa- Para los aparatos Compact NSX100 a 630 se recomienda el uso de cubrebornas termi-
dor de fases. nales y separador de fases, cuya utilizacin podra ser obligatoria segn la tensin de
Los cubrebornas terminales largos proporcionan un funcionamiento del aparato y el tipo de instalacin (ja, extrable, etc.).
grado de proteccin de IP40 (entrada) e IK07 (impactos
mecnicos).
Compact NSX100 a 630: reglas que deben observarse para asegurar el aislamiento de las piezas en tensin
Fija, conexin
Tipo de conexin Fija, conexin frontal Enchufable o extrable
posterior
En placa posterior A travs de
panel
Accesorios posibles, recomendados u obligatorios: Sin accesorio Separador de Cubrebornas Cubrebornas Cubrebornas Cubrebornas
aislante fases terminales terminales terminales cortos terminales
largos cortos cortos
Con:
tensin tipo de conductor

de funcionamiento
y 500 V Barras aisladas
Posible Posible Posible Recomendado Recomendado Obligatorio
Terminales de Posible (en

extensin Obligatorio lugar de
No Recomendado Recomendado Obligatorio
Cables + termina- (suministrado) barreras de
les de pliegue fase)
Cables pelados + Posible para Posible para Posible para
conectores NSX100 a 250 NSX100 a 250 NSX100 a 250
Posible (en Recomendado Recomendado Obligatorio
Obligatorio lugar de
No
(suministrado) barreras de
fase)
> 500 V Barras aisladas
No No Obligatorio Obligatorio Obligatorio Obligatorio
Terminales de
extensin
No No Obligatorio Obligatorio Obligatorio Obligatorio
Cables + termina-
les de pliegue
Cables pelados +
conectores No No Obligatorio Obligatorio Obligatorio Obligatorio
2/4
Ejemplo de instalacin
Distancia mnima entre dos interruptores automticos Margen de seguridad

2
adyacentes
Distancia mnima entre el interruptor automtico y los paneles superior, inferior
A1
o laterales
D1 D1 D1
Distancia mnima entre el interruptor automtico D2 C1

y los paneles delantero o posterior
Parte F Aparatos sin accesorios. Aparatos con separador de fases o cubrebornas terminales largos.
frontal
Mrgenes de seguridad mnimos para los aparatos

Tensin de Margen
funcionamiento (mm)
Entre Entre aparato y lmina de metal
aparatos
Lmina de metal pintada Lmina de metal desnuda
A1 C1 D1 D2 C1 D1 D2
U y 440 V
para aparatos equipados
con:
B=0 F
sin accesorios 0 0 30 30 5 40 40
separador de fases 0 0 0 0 5 0 0
Lmina de metal desnuda o pintada
cubrebornas terminales 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Nota: si F < 8 mm: deber utilizarse obligatoriamente una
largos
pantalla aislante o un cubreborna terminal largo
(consulte la pgina 1/77). 440 V < U y 600 V
para aparatos equipados con:
separador de fases (1) 0 0 0 0 20 10 10
largos (2)
U > 600 V
para aparatos equipados
con:
largos
(1) Solo para NSX100 a 250.

(2) Para todos los casos.
Mrgenes con respecto a las barras de distribucin

Separacin y 60 mm Separacin > 60 mm desnudas en tensin
Barras Mrgenes mnimos para los aparatos Compact NSX100 a 630
Estos mrgenes se pueden reducir para instalaciones especiales, siempre y cuando se
F1 F1 compruebe la conguracin por medio de pruebas.
Mrgenes mnimos para los aparatos Compact NSX100 a 630

Margenes con respecto a las barras de distribucin desnudas
Tensin de funcionamiento en tensin
separacin y 60 mm separacin > 60 mm
F1 F2 F1 F2
F2 F2
U < 440 V 350 350 80 80
U y 440 V y 600 V 350 350 120 120
Barras
U > 600 V prohibido: se necesita una pantalla aislante entre el aparato
Barras de distribucin en tensin. y las barras de distribucin
2/5
Cableado de control
(continuacin)
2 N L1 L2 L3 3P+N Disparo a distancia por medio de bobina MN o MX

El consumo elctrico es de aproximadamente:
30 VA para la activacin de las bobinas de MN y MX.
Cable
listo para 300 VA a 500 VA para el mecanizacin.
conexin En la tabla siguiente se indica la longitud mxima de cable permitida para diferentes
I tensiones de alimentacin y secciones transversales de cable.
U
Longitudes de cable mximas recomendadas (en metros)
ENVT
Cable externo Tensin de alimentacin (Vcc) 12 V 24 V 48 V
Seccin transversal del cable (mm2) 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5
Acoplamiento de tensin de neutro externo (ENVT). MN Fuente U 100 % 15 160 640
Fuente U 85% 7 40 160
MX Fuente U 100 % 60 240 960
Fuente U 85% 30 120 480
N L1 L2 L3 3P+N: suministro por la parte superior Motorizacin Fuente U 100 % 10 16 65 110
Fuente U 85% 2 4 17 28
Nota: la longitud indicada es la de cada uno de los dos cables.

T2
I
T1 Acoplamiento de tensin de neutro externo (ENVT)
U Esta conexin es necesaria para poder obtener medidas de alimentacin precisas en
H2 T1
los interruptores automticos de 3 polos equipados con unidades de control Micrologic
ENCT 5 / 6 E en instalaciones con un neutro distribuido. Se puede utilizar para medir tensiones
H1 T2 entre fase y neutro y calcular la potencia por medio del mtodo de los 3 vatmetros.
Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX de 3 polos incluyen un cable instalado en
el aparato para realizar la conexin al ENVT.
Este cable est equipado con un conector para realizar la conexin a un cable externo
con las siguientes caractersticas:
N L1 L2 L3 3P+N: suministro por la parte inferior
Seccin transversal de entre 1 y 2,5 mm.
Longitud mxima de 10 metros.
T2 Transformador de corriente externo de neutro (ENCT)

Esta conexin es necesaria para proteger los interruptores automticos de 3 polos
T1
I equipados con unidades de control Micrologic 5 / 6 A o E en instalaciones con un
neutro distribuido. Para las unidades de control Micrologic 6 A o E, es necesaria para la
U
proteccin de defecto a tierra de tipo G.
H2 T1
El ENCT se conecta de la misma manera para un aparato jo, enchufable o extrable:
ENCT
H1 T2 Los aparatos jos se conectan a travs de los terminales T1 y T2 del bornero interno.
Los aparatos enchufables y extrables no se conectan a travs de los terminales
auxiliares. Los cables se deben conectar/desconectar en el interior del aparato a travs
Transformador de corriente de neutro externo (ENCT). de los terminales T1 y T2.
El ENCT se debe conectar a la unidad de control Micrologic mediante un par trenzado
blindado. El cubreborna debe conectarse a la tierra del cuadro de distribucin nica-
mente en el extremo TI, a no ms de 30 cm del TI.
Las conexiones de alimentacin del TI al neutro (H2 y H1) deben realizarse de la
misma manera para la fuente de alimentacin desde la parte superior o inferior (vase
la gura). Debe asegurarse que no se inviertan en el caso de los aparatos alimentados
desde la parte inferior.
Seccin transversal de entre 0,4 y 1,5 mm.
Longitud mxima de 10 metros.
2/6
Cableado de control
(continuacin)
Modbus
24 V DC
Sistema de conexin ULP entre la unidad de control
Micrologic, la pantalla del cuadro de distribucin 2
FDM 121 y el interface Modbus
El sistema de cableado ULP (Universal Logic Plug) empleado por los interruptores
1 automticos Compact NSX para conectarse a la red Modbus no requiere herramientas
2
ni regulaciones.
Los cables prefabricados permiten tanto la transferencia de datos como la distribucin
1 RJ45 de una alimentacin de 24 Vcc. Los conectores de cada componente se identican
2 Terminador de lnea mediante smbolos ULP (Universal Logic Plug) y garantizan una total compatibilidad
3 Smbolo ULP entre cada componente.
Cables disponibles
Todas las conexiones se realizan con cables prefabricados:
3 Cable NSX para conectar el bornero interno al interface Modbus o a la pantalla FDM
ULP wiring 121 a travs de un conector RJ45. El cable est disponible en tres longitudes, 0,35, 1,3
y 3 metros.
Sistema de conexin ULP. Cables ULP con conectores RJ45 en cada extremo para las dems conexiones entre
los componentes. El cable est disponible en seis longitudes, 0,3, 0,6, 1, 2, 3
y 5 metros. Para distancias mayores, se pueden interconectar dos cables mediante el
accesorio RJ45 hembra/hembra.
Longitud mxima de 10 m entre 2 bloques y de 30 m en total.
24 V DC 24 V DC Se debe colocar un terminador de lnea en todos los componentes que dispongan de
un conector RJ45 no utilizado.
Batera
Bloque de alimentacin de 24 Vcc

Utilizacin
Se necesita una fuente de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc para instalaciones con
comunicacin, independientemente del tipo de unidad de control.
En instalaciones sin comunicacin, est disponible como opcin para las unidades de
control Micrologic 5/6 con el n de:
Modicar los regulaciones cuando el interruptor automtico est abierto
Fuente de alimentacin, sin la funcin de comunicacin, a travs
del bornero con una batera de reserva.
(posicin OFF).
Mostrar las medidas cuando la corriente que uye por el interruptor automtico
sea baja.
24 V DC Mantener la visualizacin de la causa del disparo.
Modbus Caractersticas
La fuente de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc se puede utilizar para todo el cuadro
de distribucin.
Las caractersticas necesarias se indican en la tabla siguiente.
Caractersticas
Tensin de salida 24 Vcc -20% a +10%
Fluctuaciones 1 %
Categora de sobretensin (OVC) OVC IV - segn IEC 60947-1
Cableado ULP aguas

abajo para alimentacin Dimensiones
de 24 Vcc Las dimensiones deben tener en cuenta todos los bloques alimentados.
Alimentacin, con la funcin de comunicacin, a travs del
interface Modbus. Bloque Consumo (mA)
Micrologic 5 / 6 40
Bloque BSCM 10
FDM 121 40
Interface de comunicacin Modbus 60
Cable NSX U > 480 Vca 30
Bloque SDx / SDTAM 20
2/7
Cableado de control
(continuacin)
2 Red Modbus
24 V DC 24 V DC
Cableado
Micrologic 5 o 6 que no utilice la funcin de comunicacin
Batera La fuente de alimentacin externa de 24 Vcc se conecta a travs del bornero del inte-
rruptor automtico.
Masterpact NW
El uso de una batera de 24 Vcc proporciona alimentacin de reserva durante xx minu-
Masterpact NT tos en caso de interrumpirse la alimentacin externa.
Micrologic 5 o 6 que utilice la funcin de comunicacin
La fuente externa de 24 Vcc se conecta a travs del interface Modbus mediante un
conector de cinco patillas, incluidas dos para la fuente de alimentacin. Se pueden
apilar los accesorios (consulte la pgina A-27) para alimentar una serie de interfaces
por medio de una conexin rpida con clip.
La alimentacin de 24 Vcc se distribuye aguas abajo a travs de los cables de comuni-
cacin ULP (Universal Logic Plug) con conectores RJ45. Este sistema garantiza tanto la
transferencia de datos como la distribucin de alimentacin a los bloques conectados.
Bloque de
Wires
Recomendaciones para el cableado de 24 Vcc

4
ON
contactos
Termination
Modbus
No conectar el terminal positivo a tierra.
OFF
Wires
2
4
5/OUT 0/IN
No conectar el terminal negativo a tierra.
La longitud mxima para cada conductor (+/-) es de diez metros.
Mdulo de Para distancias de conexin de ms de diez metros, los conductores ms y menos de
interface la fuente de 24 Vcc deben estar trenzados para mejorar la CEM.
Modbus
Los conductores de 24 Vcc deben cruzarse con los cables de alimentacin perpen-
FDM121 dicularmente. Si esto resulta difcil o imposible, los conductores ms y menos debern
estar trenzados.
Modbus
Cada interruptor automtico Compact NSX equipado con la unidad de control Micro-
logic 5/6 y una pantalla FDM 121 se conecta a la red Modbus a travs del bloque de
interface Modbus.
La conexin de todos los interruptores automticos y de otros aparatos Modbus del
cuadro de distribucin a un bus Modbus se facilita considerablemente si se utiliza un
PM800 Compact NSX bloque de contactos Modbus RJ45 instalado en el cuadro de distribucin.
Recomendaciones para el cableado de Modbus
El cubreborna puede estar conectado a tierra.
Los conductores deben estar trenzados para mejorar la inmunidad (CEM).
Los conductores Modbus deben cruzarse con los cables de alimentacin perpendicu-
larmente.
2/8
Desclasificacin con la temperatura
Compact NSX100 a 250 equipado con unidades de control magnetotrmicas
Cuando se utilizan unidades de control

magnetotrmicas a temperaturas ambiente
La proteccin contra sobrecargas se calibra a 40 C en el laboratorio. Por este motivo,
cuando la temperatura ambiente es inferior o superior a 40 C, la activacin de la pro-
teccin de Ir se modica ligeramente.
2
distintas de 40 C, se modifica la activacin de Ir.
Para obtener el tiempo de disparo para una temperatura dada:
consulte las curvas de disparo para 40 C (vanse las pginas E-2 y E-3)
(A) determine los tiempos de disparo correspondientes al valor de Ir (ajuste trmico del
aparato), corregido para la temperatura ambiente de la manera indicada en las tablas
110
siguientes.
Regulaciones de Compact NSX100 a 250 equipado con unidades de control TM-D
100 y TM-G, como una funcin de la temperatura
En la tabla se indica el valor real de Ir (A) para una especicacin y temperatura dadas.
90
Espec. Temperatura (C)

80 (A) 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
16 18.4 18.7 18 18 17 16.6 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
25 28.8 28 27.5 27 26.3 25.6 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 (C)
32 36.8 36 35.2 34.4 33.6 32.8 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
Curva de reduccin de temperatura para Compact NSX100. 40 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 57.5 56 55 54 52.5 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 72 71 69 68 66 65 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
10 000
80 92 90 88 86 84 82 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
5 000
100 115 113 110 108 105 103 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
2 000
1 000 125 144 141 138 134 131 128 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
500 160 184 180 176 172 168 164 160 156 152 148 144 140 136
200 200 230 225 220 215 210 205 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
100
250 288 281 277 269 263 256 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
50
20 Ejemplo 1. Cul es el tiempo de disparo de un Compact NSX100 equipado con una
10 unidad de control TM100D ajustada a 100 A, para una sobrecarga I = 500 A?
5 La sobrecarga I/Ir se calcula como una funcin de la temperatura. Utilice los valores
t(s)
2 anteriores y la curva de la pgina E-3 (mostrada a la izquierda) para calcular el tiempo
1 correspondiente.
.5
A 40 C, Ir = 100 A, I/Ir = 5 y el tiempo de disparo est comprendido entre 6 y 60
.2 NSX80/100 segundos.
.1 A 20 C, Ir = 110 A, I/Ir = 4,54 y el tiempo de disparo est comprendido entre 8 y 80
.05
segundos.
.02 A 60 C, Ir = 90 A, I/Ir = 5,55 y el tiempo de disparo est comprendido entre 5 y 50
.01
Disparo reflejo: segundos.
.005
t < 10 ms Ejemplo 2. Qu ajuste permite obtener un Ir real de 210 A, teniendo en cuenta la tem-
.002
peratura, para un Compact NSX250 equipado con una unidad de control TM250D?
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200300 A continuacin se muestra el ajuste de selector necesario, en amperios.
I / Ir A 40 C, Ir = (210/250) 250 A = 210 A
A 20 C, Ir = (210/277) 250 A = 189,5 A
A 60 C, Ir = (210/225) 250 A = 233 A
Ejemplo 1. Defecto I = 500 A

I/Ir 4.5 5 5.5
TC 20 C 40 C 60 C
t mn. 8s 6s 5s
t mx. 80 s 60 s 50 s
Curva de proteccin trmica con valores mnimos

y mximos.
2/9
Compact NSX100 a 250 equipado con unidades de control magnetotrmicas
Recomendaciones de instalacin (continuacin)
2 Coeficiente de reduccin adicional para un bloque adicional

Los valores indicados en las tablas anteriores son vlidos para los interruptores autom-
ticos fijos equipados con uno de los bloques siguientes:
bloque Vigi
bloque de control de aislamiento
bloque del ampermetro
bloque del transformador de corriente
Tambin son aplicables a los interruptores automticos enchufables o extrables
equipados con:
bloque del ampermetro
bloque del transformador de corriente
Sin embargo, para los interruptores automticos enchufables o extrables equipados
con un bloque Vigi o un bloque de control de aislamiento, se debe aplicar el coeciente
0,84.
En la tabla siguiente se resume la situacin para los bloques adicionales.
Bloque del
Especificacin Bloque
Tipo de Interruptor ampermetro o del
de la unidad de Vigi o de control
aparato automtico transformador
disparo TM-D de aislamiento de corriente
Fijo NSX100 a 250 de 16 a 100
NSX160 a 250 125
NSX160 a 250 160
1
NSX250 de 200 a 250
1
Enchufable NSX100 a 250 de 16 a 100
o extrable NSX160 a 250 125
NSX160 a 250 160
0.84
NSX250 250
2/10
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control electrnicas
Las unidades de control electrnicas no

se ven afectadas por las variaciones de
En la tabla siguiente se indica el ajuste Ir (A) mximo para proteccin a largo retardo 2
temperatura. Si las unidades de control se utilizan (LR) en funcin de la temperatura ambiente.
en entornos de alta temperatura, la configuracin
de Micrologic deber tener en cuenta los lmites Tipo de Especifica- Temperatura (C)
de temperatura del interruptor automtico. aparato cin (A) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NSX100/160
Fijo, enchufable 40 sin reduccin
Los cambios de temperatura no afectan a las medidas o extrable 100 sin reduccin
realizadas por las unidades de control electrnicas. NSX250
Los sensores de TI integrados con toroidales Rogowski Fijo, enchufable 100 sin reduccin
miden la corriente. o extrable 160 sin reduccin
Los sistemas electrnicos de control comparan el valor
Fijo 250 250 250 250 245 237 230 225
de la corriente con los regulaciones denidos para 40 C.
Enchufable 250 250 245 237 230 225 220 215
Puesto que la temperatura no afecta a las medidas de
o extrable
los toroidales, no es necesario modicar los umbrales de
disparo.
Compact NSX400 y 630
Sin embargo, el aumento de temperatura provocado por
el ujo de corriente y la temperatura ambiente incremen- En la tabla siguiente se indica el ajuste Ir (A) mximo para proteccin a largo retardo
tan la temperatura del aparato. Para evitar alcanzar el ni- (LR) en funcin de la temperatura ambiente.
vel de resistencia trmica del equipo, es necesario limitar
la corriente que uye por el aparato, es decir, el ajuste Ir Tipo de Especifica- Temperatura (C)
mximo como una funcin de la temperatura. aparato cin (A) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NSX400
Fijo 400 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
Enchufable/ 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
extrable
NSX630
Fijo 630 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
Enchufable/ 630 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
extrable
Ejemplo: Un Compact NSX400 jo equipado con una unidad Micrologic puede tener un ajuste
Ir mximo de:
400 A hasta 50 C.
380 A hasta 60 C.
Coeficiente de reduccin adicional para un bloque adicional

Para interruptores automticos fijos o enchufables/extrables, la incorporacin de un:
Bloque Vigi.
Bloque de control de aislamiento.
Bloque del ampermetro.
Bloque del transformador de corriente puede modicar los valores de reduccin.
Aplique los coecientes mostrados a continuacin.
Reduccin de un Compact NSX equipado con una unidad

de control Micrologic
Especificacin Bloque Vigi / de Bloque del
Tipo de Interruptor de la unidad de control ampermetro /
aparato automtico control TM-D de aislamiento Sensor externo (TI)
Fijo NSX100 a 250 de 40 a 100
NSX160 a 250 125
NSX250 250 1
Enchufable NSX100 a 250 de 40 a 100
o extrable NSX160 a 250 160
1
NSX250 250 0.86
Fijo NSX400 de 250 a 400 0.97
NSX630 de 250 a 630 0.90
Enchufable NSX400 de 250 a 400 0.97
o extrable NSX630 de 250 a 630 0.90
Nota: para proporcionar la funcin Visu, los interruptores automticos Compact NSX, con o sin
un bloque Vigi, se combinan con interruptores-seccionadores INV. Los valores de disparo para la
combinacin seleccionada se indican en el catlogo de Interpact.
2/11
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control magnetotrmicas
2 Los valores de prdida de potencia trmica en el

Compact NSX se utilizan para calcular el aumento
Los valores indicados en las tablas siguientes son valores tpicos para un aparato
a plena carga nominal y 50/60 Hz.
total de temperatura en el cuadro de distribucin Prdida de potencia por polo (P/polo) en vatios (W)
en el que se instalan los interruptores automticos. El valor indicado es la prdida de potencia a IN, 50/60 Hz, para un interruptor automti-
co de tres o cuatro polos. La medida y el clculo de la prdida de potencia se llevan
a cabo de acuerdo con las recomendaciones del Anexo G de la norma IEC 60947-2.
N L1 L2 L3
Resistencia por polo (R/polo) en miliohmios (m)
El valor de la resistencia por polo se facilita como una indicacin general para un nuevo
aparato.
El valor de la resistencia de los contactos se debe determinar en funcin de la cada de
tensin medida, de acuerdo con el procedimiento de prueba del fabricante (documento
de instrucciones de ABT n 1 - BEE - 02.2 -A).
Nota: esta medida no basta para determinar la calidad de los contactos, es decir, la capacidad del
interruptor automtico para transportar su corriente nominal.
Con un bloque Vigi, la desviacin de las barras N y L3 que es
necesaria para pasar a travs del toroidal tiene como resultado Prdida de potencia adicional
prdidas de potencia ms altas en comparacin con las de las La prdida de potencia adicional es igual a la suma de la potencia disipada por los
barras L1 y L2.
siguientes elementos:
Bloque Vigi: observe que la desviacin de las barras N y L3 que es necesaria para
pasar a travs del toroidal tiene como resultado prdidas de potencia ms altas en
comparacin con las de las barras L1 y L2 (diagrama contiguo). Cuando calcule la
prdida de potencia total, utilice L1, L2, L3 para un aparato 3P y N, L1, L2, L3 para un
aparato 4P.
Contactos de desconexin (aparatos enchufables y extrables).
Bloque del ampermetro.
Bloque del transformador.
Clculo de la prdida de potencia total
La prdida de potencia total a plena carga nominal y 50/60 Hz es igual a la suma de las
prdidas de potencia adicional y del aparato por polo, multiplicado por el nmero de
polos (2, 3 o 4).
Si se instala un bloque Vigi, ser necesario distinguir entre N y L3 por una parte y L1
y L2 por otra.

TM-D y TM-G
Tipo de aparato Aparato fijo Potencia adicional / polo
Enchu- Bloque del Bloque del
Espec. R/polo Vigi Vigi
3/4 polos P/polo
(A) (N, L3) (L1,L2) fable/ amper- transfor-
extrable metro mador
NSX100 16 11.42 2.92 0 0 0 0 0
25 6.42 4.01 0 0 0.1 0 0
32 3.94 4.03 0.06 0.03 0.15 0.1 0.1
40 3.42 5.47 0.10 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
50 1.64 4.11 0.15 0.08 0.3 0.1 0.1
63 2.17 8.61 0.3 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.1
80 1.37 8.77 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.88 8.8 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NSX160 80 1.26 8.06 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.77 7.7 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
125 0.69 10.78 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.55 13.95 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NSX250 125 0.61 9.45 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.46 11.78 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
200 0.39 15.4 2.8 1.4 4 0.8 0.8
250 0.3 18.75 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
2/12
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control magnetotrmicas/electrnicas

MA/1.3-M
2
Bloque
Enchu- Bloque del
Espec. R/polo Vigi Vigi del
3 polos P/polo fable/ amper-
(A) (N, L3) (L1, L2) transfor-
extrable metro mador
NSX100 2.5 148.42 0.93 0 0 0 0 0
6.3 99.02 3.93 0 0 0 0 0
12.5 4.05 0.63 0 0 0 0 0
25 1.66 1.04 0 0 0.1 0 0
50 0.67 1.66 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.1
100 0.52 5.2 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NSX160 150 0.38 8.55 1.35 0.68 2.6 0.45 0.45
NSX250 220 0.3 14.52 2.9 1.45 4.89 0.97 0.97
NSX400 320 0.12 12.29 3.2 1.6 6.14 1.54 1.54
NSX630 500 0.1 25 13.99 7 15 3.75 3.75
Compact NSX equipado con unidades de control

electrnicas
Los valores indicados en la tabla siguiente son valores tpicos para un aparato a plena
carga nominal y 50/60 Hz. Las deniciones y la informacin son las mismas que se
indican para los interruptores automticos equipados con unidades de control magne-
totrmicas.

Micrologic
Enchu- Bloque
Espec. R/polo Vigi Vigi Bloque del
3/4 polos P/polo fable/ del
(A) (N, L3) (L1, L2) amper-
extrable transfor-
metro mador
NSX100 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NSX160 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NSX250 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2
250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
NSX400 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4
NSX630 630 (1) 0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95
(1) Los valores de la prdida de potencia para los bloques Vigi y los interruptores automticos
extrables se indican para 570 A.
2/13
Compact
NSX
Dimensiones
y conexionado

ndice Compact NSX
Dimensiones y conexionado

3 Dimensiones e instalacin
Compact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo
3/2
3/3
Compact NSX100 a 630, modelo conectable 3/4
Compact NSX100 a 630, modelo extrable 3/6
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, modelos conectable y extrable 3/8
Funcin Visu para Compact NSX100 a 250, modelo fijo
Funcin Visu para Compact NSX400/630, modelo fijo
3/9
3/10
3
Bloque de mecanismo de motor para Compact NSX100 a 630 3/11
Mando rotativo directo para Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630 3/12
Mandos rotativos directos de tipo MCC y CNOMO
para Compact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo 3/13
Mando rotativo prolongado para Compact NSX100 a 630 3/14
Bloques de sealizacin y medida
Distribuidor de una pieza para Compact NSX100 a 250, modelo fijo 3/16
Pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 3/17
Accesorios del panel frontal

Compact NSX100 a 630 3/18
Troqueles del panel frontal

Compact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo 3/20
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo 3/22
Compact NSX100 a 630, modelos conectable y extrable 3/24
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, modelos conectable y extrable 3/25
Funcin Visu para Compact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo 3/26
Bloque de mecanismo de motor para Compact y Vigicompact
NSX100 a 630 3/27
Mando rotativo directo para Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630 3/28
Mandos rotativos directos de tipo MCC y CNOMO
Mando rotativo prolongado para Compact NSX100 a 630 3/14
Bloques de sealizacin y medida para Compact NSX100 a 630 3/30
Pantalla de visualizacin FDM121 3/17
Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, modelo fijo 3/32
Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, modelos conectable y extrable 3/36
Conexin de cables barras aisladas con terminales para Compact
y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630 3/40
Conexin de cables pelados a Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630 3/41

Referencias 6/1
Glosario 7/1
Dimensiones e instalacin
Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo
Dimensiones 2/3P 4P
A4
A3
A A2
A1
X X X
3 A A2
A3
A4
C1 B B
C2 B1 B2
C3
Z Y Y
Separadores de fase. Cubrebornes largos (tambin disponibles para distribuidores NSX400/630 con inclina-
Cubrebornes cortos. cin de 52,5 mm: B1 = 157,5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Montaje NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630 NSX100 a 630

En la placa posterior 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
E4
X X X
E2
E1 E3
2 6 Y T(1) Y 4 6 Y 4 6
(1) Los oricios T son obligatorios nicamente para la conexin posterior.

Para los interruptores automticos de dos polos, no son obligatorios los oricios intermedios.
En carriles 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F3
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E2
E1
2 6 Y Y 4 6 Y 4 6
En perfil DIN con placa de adaptador (NSX100 a 250)
G4
G5
G3 X
G2
G1
3/2
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, fijo (continuacin)
Dimensiones 3/4P 3/4P

NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
A4
A3
A A2
X X X
A6 A8 3
A5 A7 A9
C1 B
C2 B1 B
C3 B2 B1
Y B2
Z
Y

En la placa posterior 3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
X X X
E6 E1
E8
E5
E7
6 6 6 6
T(1) 3 6 Y Y
Y
En carriles 3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F3
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E6 E1
E5
Y 6 6 Y 6 6
Y 3 6
Tipo A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B B1 B2 C1 C2 C3 E1
NSX100/160/250 80.5 161 94 145 178.5 155.5 236 169 220 253.5 52.5 105 140 81 86 126 62.5
NSX400/630 127.5 255 142.5 200 237 227.5 355 242.5 300 337 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 100
Tipo E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 F1 F2 F3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 T U
NSX100/160/250 125 70 140 137.5 200 145 215 35 17.5 70 95 75 13.5 23 17.5 24 y 32
NSX400/630 200 113.5 227 200 300 213.5 327 45 22.5 90 - - - - - 32 y 35
3/3
Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable sobre zcalo
Dimensiones 2/3P 4P
M
N
A11
3 M A
A1
A2
A10
X
N X X
A A2
A10
A11
B
B1
B
27 B2
45
Y
D1 C3
Z Y
Cubrebornes largos (tambin disponibles para espaciador de distribuidores NSX400/630

Separadores de fase para zcalo.
con paso de 52,5 mm: B1 = 157,5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Cubrebornes corto en interruptor.
Adaptador para zcalo, obligatorio para montar cubrebornes largos separadores de fase.
Montaje
A travs del panel frontal (N) 2/3P 3P 4P
NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630 NSX100 a 630
F1 F1 F3
N F2 F2 F2
E10 E12 X X Y
X
E9 E11
F4 F4 F4 4 6
2 6 4 6
F5 F5 F6
Y Y Y
3/4
Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable sobre zcalo (continuacin)
En la placa posterior (M) 2/3P 4P
Conexin frontal (se suministra una pantalla de proteccin con el zcalo que se debe jar entre sta y la placa posterior)
F1 F3
F2 F2
E14 X X
E13 3
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Conexin mediante tomas posteriores exteriores

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14 E16 X
X
E13 E15
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
(1) Los oricios T1 son obligatorios nicamente para la conexin posterior (para los
interruptores automticos de dos polos, los oricios intermedios no son necesarios).
Conexin mediante tomas posteriores interiores
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14
E18 X
X
E13 E17
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
En carriles 2/3P 4P
F7 F8
F9 F9
U
X X
E20
E19
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Tipo A A1 A2 A10 A11 B B1 B2 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15

NSX100/160/250 80.5 161 94 175 210 52.5 105 140 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 79
NSX400/630 127.5 255 142.5 244 281 70 140 185 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250 126
Tipo E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 T1 U
NSX100/160/250 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 54.5 109 144 70 105 35 24 y 32
NSX400/630 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 71.5 143 188 100 145 50 33 y 35
3/5
Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable en chasis
Dimensiones 2/3P 4P
M
N
A10
M A12 A11
3 N
X X X
A13 A11
A10
B3 B3
27 B4 B6
45 B5 B7
Y Y
D1 C3
Z
M
N
C3 32
Z
Separadores de fase para zcalo. Cubrebornes largos.

Cubrebornes corto en interruptor. Adaptador para zcalo, obligatorio para montar cubrebornes largos separadores de fase.
Montaje
A travs del panel frontal (N) 2/3P 3P 4P
NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630 NSX100 a 630
F1 F1 F3
N
F2 F2 F2
E10 E12 X X X
3
E9 E11
F10 F10 4 6 F10 4 6

2 6
F11 F11 F12
Y Y Y
3/6
Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable en chasis (continuacin)
En la placa posterior (M) 2/3P 4P

Conexin frontal (se suministra una pantalla de proteccin con el zcalo que se debe jar entre sta y la placa posterior)
F1 F3
F2 F2
E14 X X
E13 3
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Conexin mediante tomas posteriores exteriores

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14 E16 X
X
E13 E15
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
Conexin mediante tomas posteriores interiores
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14
E18 X
X
E13 E17
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
En carriles 2/3P 4P
F7 F8
F9 F9
U
X X
E20
E19
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Tipo A10 A11 A12 A13 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14
NSX100/160/250 175 210 106.5 103.5 92.5 185 216 220 251 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155
NSX400/630 244 281 140 140 110 220 250 265 295 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250
Tipo E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 T1 U
NSX100/160/250 79 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 70 105 35 74 148 183 24 y 32
NSX400/630 126 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 100 145 50 91.5 183 228 33 y 35
3/7
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630 extrable
Dimensiones, extrable sobre zcalo NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

3/4P 3/4P
M
N
A11
3 M
N
A10
A
A2
X X X
A6
A10 A5 A7
A11
27 B
45 B1 B
D1 C3 B2 B1
Z Y B2
Y
Separadores de fase. Cubrebornes largos (tambin disponibles para espaciadores de NSX400/630 con paso de 52,5 mm:
Cubrebornes corto en interruptor. B1 = 157,5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Adaptador para zcalo, obligatorio para montar cubrebornes largos separadores de fase.
Dimensiones, extrable sobre chsis NSX100 a 630

3P 4P
M M
N N
X X X
27 B3 B3
45 B4 B6
D1 C3 32 B5 B7
Z Y Y
Montaje
A travs del panel frontal (N)
Consulte Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable sobre zcalo, pg. 3/4, chsis, pg. 3/6
En la placa posterior (M)
En carriles
Tipo A A2 A5 A6 A7 A10 A11 B B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C3 D1

NSX100/160/250 80.5 94 155.5 236 169 175 210 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 126 75
NSX400/630 127.5 142.5 227.5 355 242.5 244 281 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 168 100
3/8
Funcin Visu para Compact NSX100 a 250, fijo
Dimensiones, combinacin con Interpact INV100 a 250 3P 4P
138
131
96
86 140 140
35 35 35 35 35 35
3
284.5 X X X
233.5 331.5 215

215
314
X X X
80.5 94
145
178.5
52.5 52.5
Z 105 140
Y Y
Separadores de fase.
Cubrebornes cortos.
Cubrebornes largos.
Montaje 3P 4P
En carriles placa posterior
70 70
7 6 35 9 6 35
17.5 17.5
U U
100 X 100 X
50 50
22.3 22.3
157.5 157.5
125 X 125 X
62.5 62.5
Y Y
U y 32
3/9
Funcin Visu para Compact NSX400/630, fijo
Dimensiones, combinacin con Interpact INV400 a 630 3P 4P
162
160.4
130 185
120 185 45 45 45
45 45 45
3
477.5
X X
X
492.5
422.5 241
365
241
X X
X
127.5 142.5
200
237
70
70 185
Y 140 Y
Y
Separadores de fase para zcalo.
Cubrebornes cortos.
Cubrebornes largos.
Montaje 3P 4P
En carriles placa posterior
90 90
9 6 45 9 6 45
22.5 22.5
U U
X X
150 150
75 75
33 33
241 241
200 200
X X
100 100
Y Y
U y 35
3/10
Mando elctrico para Compact NSX100 a 630
Dimensiones 3P 4P
Interruptor automtico fijo
A17
A15 X X X
5...8
A14 A16
3
C4 B8 B8
C5/C6 B9 B9
B B
B1 B2
Z Y Y
C5: sin cerradura

C6: con cerradura
Interruptor automtico extrable sobre zcalo
M M
N N
5...8
27
45
D1 C5
Interruptor automtico extrable en chsis
M M
N N
X
5...8
27
45
D1 C5 32
Z
Tipo A14 A15 A16 A17 B B1 B2 B8 B9 C4 C5 C6 D1

NSX100/160/250 27.5 73 34.5 62.5 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 143 182 209.5 75
NSX400/630 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61.5 123 215 256 258 100
3/11
Mando rotativo directo para Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630
Dimensiones 3P 4P
Interruptor automtico fijo
B10
I
60
A15 X X X
3 A14 60
O
A18
B8 B8
B9 B9
C7
B B
C8/C9 B1 B2
Z Y Y
C8: sin cerradura
C9: con cerradura
Interruptor automtico extrable sobre zcalo
M M
N N
27
45
D1 C8
Z
Interruptor automtico extrable en chsis
M M
N N
27
45
D1 C8 32
Tipo A14 A15 A18 B B1 B2 B8 B9 B10 C7 C8 C9 D1

NSX100/160/250 27.5 73 9 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 9.25 121 155 164 75
NSX400/630 40 123 24.6 70 140 185 61.5 123 5 145 179 188 100
3/12
Mando rotativo directo tipo MCC y CNOMO para Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo
Dimensiones
Mando rotativo directo tipo MCC
A18
A20
5...
8
X X
A19
3
1...3 max.
P1 B10
B11
B12
Z
Y
Mando rotativo directo tipo CNOMO
N
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac
A18 A22
8
X X
5...
push
to
trip
A21
1...3 max.
P2 B10
B13
B14
Z Y
Troquel del panel frontal NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

Mando rotativo directo tipo MCC
145
100
X X
8
5...
41 51
50 75
100 145
Y Y
Mando rotativo directo tipo CNOMO
N
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac
8
5...
150
push
to
trip
119
X X
50.5 50.4
Tipo A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 B10

NSX100/160/250 9 60 120 65 130 9.25
NSX400/630 24.6 83 160 82 164 5 68.75
80
Tipo B11 B12 B13 B14 P1 P2 119
150
NSX100/160/250 69 120 65 130 125 135 Y
Y
NSX400/630 85 160 82 164 149 158
3/13
Mando rotativo prolongado para Compact NSX100 a 630
Dimensiones
Interruptores automticos fijos y extrables sobre zcalo
M M
N N
3 10
X
Corte para eje (mm)

27 Tipo R1
45
D1 R1 47 NSX100/160/250 mn. 171
mx. 600
Z
NSX400/630 mn. 195
mx. 600
Interruptor automtico extrable sobre chsis
M M
N N
27 Corte para eje (mm)

45
D1 R2 47 Tipo R2
NSX100/160/250 mn. 248
Z mx. 600
NSX400/630 mn. 272
mx. 600
Dimensiones y troquel del panel frontal
60 45 50
A18 A18
75 X X
37.5
60 2 4.2
36
72
B10
B10
37.5
Y
75
Y
Tipo A18 B10 D1

NSX100/160/250 9 9.25 75
NSX400/630 24.6 5 100
3/14
Bloques de sealizacin y medida para Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo
Dimensiones
Interruptor automtico con bloque de ampermetro Interruptor automtico con bloque de transformador de intensidad
A4 A4
A3 A3
A A2 A A2
X X
3
A6 A8 A6 A8
A5 A7 A9 A5 A7 A9
160
A 120
80
40
0
160/5A
C1 C1
C2 C2
Separadores de fase. C11
Cubrebornes cortos.
Cubrebornes largos. Z Z

En la placa posterior 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
X X X
E6 E1
E8
E5
E7
T(1) 3 6 6 6 6 6
Y Y Y
En carriles 2/3P 3P 4P
F1 F1 F3
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E6 E1
E5
Y 3 6 Y 6 6 Y 6 6
Tipo A A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 C1 C2 C11 E1 E5 E6 E7 E8
NSX100/160/250 80.5 94 145 178.5 155.5 236 169 220 253.5 81 86 137 62.5 137.5 200 145 215
NSX400/630 127.5 142.5 200 237 227.5 355 242.5 300 337 95.5 110 162 100 200 300 213.5 327
Tipo F1 F2 F3 T U
NSX100/160/250 35 17.5 70 24 y 32
NSX400/630 45 22.5 90 32 y 35
3/15
Espaciadores monobloc para Compact NSX100 a 250, modelo fijo
Dimensiones
Alineacin posterior Alineacin frontal
185
99 140
98 110 70.5
3 201
255.5
130
80.5
X X X
Y
Separadores de fase. Z
24
Cubrebornes cortos.
Cubrebornes largos. Z
Montaje
Alineacin posterior 2/3P 4P
45 90
22.5 62.5
4 6 6 6
163 163
X X
125 125
62.5 62.5
17.5 17.5
35 70
Y Y
Alineacin frontal 2/3P 4P
45 90
22.5 62.5
7 6 8 6
25 163
163 X
25 X 50
50
62.5
62.5
17.5
17.5 70
35 70
70 105
Y Y
3/16
Pantalla de visualizacin FDM121
Dimensiones
96
X
3
96
Y
Montaje
A travs del panel
+ 0,8
92 0
X X
+ 0,8
10.6 92 0
30 23 Y
Z
En el panel
2 22.5
16.5
99.3
X +0.5 X
-
32
19
+
- 0.3
15 37 20 13 2 22.5
+1.5
-
33
Z 17
99.3
Y
Conector (opcional).
3/17
Marco IP30 para el panel frontal

Para mando maneta, rotativo motorizado
X X
A
3 B
Y
4
Para mando maneta, rotativo con acceso a la unidad de control
X X
A1
B 4
Y
Para Vigicompact
X X
64
65 4
Y
Marco IP40 para el panel frontal

Para mando maneta, rotativo motorizado
X A3 X
A2
B1 3.5 6.5
Y
Para Vigicompact con collarn de proteccin bloque de ampermetro
93.5 X 80.5 X
157 3.5 6.5

Y
3/18
Compact NSX100 a 630 (continuacin)
Marco IP40 para el panel frontal (cont.)

Para Vigicompact
79 X 64 X
69
Y
3.5 6.5
3
Cuadros de proteccin para marcos IP40 de panel frontal

Para cambio
X X
A4
B2 35
Y
Para Vigicompact
X
52.5
91 35
Y Interruptor automtico con
maneta mando rotativo.
63
Interruptor automtico con
bloque de motorizacin.
Tapa de estanqueidad IP43
X
A5
B3 C
Y
Tipo A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 C
NSX100/160/250 113 138 114 101 73 85 113 157 91 103 40
NSX400/630 163 215 164 151 122.5 138 163 189 122.5 138 60
3/19
Troquel del panel frontal
Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo
Metal laminado sin revestimiento NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

Para maneta
127
X 77 X X
29.5
42
3
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
Para maneta con acceso a la unidad de control
X X X
102 179
54.5
94
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
Con marco IP30 para el panel frontal NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

Para maneta
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
X X X
102 179
54.5
94
P3 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
3/20
Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo (continuacin)

Para maneta
155
X 103 X X
42.5 56.5
3
P4 74 90
148 180
Z Y Y
Con tapa de estanqueidad IP43 NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

Para maneta
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
P4 47.5 63.5
95 127
Z Y Y
Tipo P3 P4 Nota: Las dimensiones de corte de la puerta se indican para

la posicin de un aparato en la envolvente, donde
NSX100/160/250 88 89 u 100 + (h 5) con respecto a la bisagra de la puerta. h
NSX400/630 112 113
3/21
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, fijo

Para maneta
X X X
85.5
3 38
148
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y
X X X
85.5
148
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y

Para maneta
X X X
85.5
148
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y
3/22
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, fijo (continuacin)
Con marcos IP30 para el panel frontal (cont.) NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
X X X
85.5
148
3
38
38
P3 14.5
29
Z Y 29
32
Y

Para maneta
X X X
71
132
68
68
29
58
P4 47
Z Y 58
Tipo P3 P4 Nota: Las dimensiones de corte de la puerta se indican para

la posicin de un aparato en la envolvente, donde
NSX100/160/250 88 89 u 100 + (h 5) con respecto a la bisagra de la puerta. h
NSX400/630 112 113
3/23
Compact NSX100 a 630, extrable
Modelo extrable sobre zcalo
M M
N
N
3 X
27
45
D1 P3
Z
Metal laminado sin revestimiento

Consulte Compact NSX100 a 630, jo, pg. 3/20
Con marco IP30 para el panel frontal
Con tapa de estanqueidad
Modelo extrable sobre chsis NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

Con collarn de proteccin y marco IP40 para el panel frontal
M M
N
N
155
X 103 X X
42.5
56.5
74 90
148 180
27 Y Y
45
D1 P5
3/24
Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, extrable (continuacin)
Modelo extrable sobre zcalo
M M
N
N
X 3
27
45
D1 P3
Z

Modelo extrable sobre chsis NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

Con collarn de proteccin y marco IP40 para el panel frontal
M M
N
N
X X X
55
122.5
82.5
82.5
74
148
Y 90
27
148
45
Y
D1 P5
Z
Tipo D1 P3 P5 Nota: Las dimensiones de corte de la puerta se indican

para la posicin de un aparato en la envolvente, donde h
NSX100/160/250 75 88 123 u 100 + (h 5) con respecto a la bisagra de la puerta.
NSX400/630 100 112 147
3/25
Funcin Visu para Compact NSX100 a 630, fijo
Compact NSX100 a 250 con funcin Visu Interpact INV100 a 250

132
66
82
3 X
17.5
115.5
88
Z Y
162
81
103
X 17.5
105
89
Z Y
Compact NSX400/630 con funcin Visu Interpact INV400 a 630
172
86
127
22.5
X
177.5
112
Y
Y
202
101
153
22.5
X
164.5
113
Y
Y
3/26
Mando elctrico para Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630

Interruptor automtico fijo, extrable sobre zcalo chsis
M M
N
N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
5...8
3
47.5 63.5
27 95 127
45 P6 Y Y
D1 P7
Z

Interruptor automtico fijo, extrable sobre zcalo chsis
M M
N
N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
5...8
47.5 63.5
27 95 127
45 P6 Y Y
D1 P7
Z

Interruptor automtico fijo, extrable sobre zcalo chsis con acceso al bloque Vigi
M M
N
N
X 155
103 X X
42.5 56.5
5...8
27 74 90
45 P8 148 180
D1 P9
Z Y Y
Interruptor automtico fijo extrable sobre zcalo con acceso al bloque Vigi
M 148 180
M
N 90
N 74
X
103 X 155
X
42.5
55 56.5
5...8
122.5
27
45
Y
D1 P8 Y
Z
(1) (2) (1) (2)
Tipo D1 P6 P7 P8 P9
NSX100/160/250 75 145 177 146 178 (1) Modelo conectable.
NSX400/630 100 217 249 218 250 (2) Modelo extrable.
3/27
Mando rotativo directo para Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630
Interruptores automticos fijos extrables sobre zcalo NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

M M
N N
127
X 77 X X
3 29.5
85.5
42
148
47.5
27
45 95
63.5
D1 P10
Z Y 127
Y
Metal laminado sin revestimiento con acceso a la unidad de control
M M
N N
X 102 X 179 X
54.5
85.5 94
148
47.5
27
45 95
D1 P10 63.5
Z Y 127
Y
M M
N N
127
X 77 X X
29.5 42
85.5
148
47.5
27
45 95
63.5
D1 P10
Z Y 127
Y
3/28
Mando rotativo directo para Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630 (continuacin)
Interruptores automticos fijos extrables sobre zcalo (cont.) NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
Con marco IP30 de panel frontal con acceso a la unidad de control
M M
N N
X 102 X 179 X
54.5
85.5 94
3
148
47.5
27
45 95
D1 P10 63.5
Z Y 127
Y
M M
N N
103 155
X X X
42.5
56.5
85.5
148
74
27
45 148
90
D1 P11
Z Y 180
Y
Interruptores automticos fijos extrables sobre chsis NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630

M M 180
148
90
N N 74
X 103 X 155
X
42.5
55 56.5
122.5
Y
27 Y
45
D1 P12
Z
Tipo D1 P10 P11 P12

NSX100/160/250 75 89 90 123
NSX400/630 100 112 113 147
3/29
Bloques de indicacin y medida para Compact NSX100 a 630
Interruptores automticos fijos extrables sobre zcalo con bloque de ampermetro y selector de presencia de tensin
Con maneta Mando rotativo
M M M
31
N N N
3 X X
J1
X
J2
56.5
K1
27 27 93
45 45
Y
D1 P3 D1 P10
Z Z
3/30
Bloques de indicacin y medida para Compact NSX100 a 630 (continuacin)
Interruptores automticos fijos extrables sobre zcalo con bloque de ampermetro y selector de presencia de tensin (cont.)
Con mando IP40 para el panel frontal
Con maneta Mando rotativo
M M M
31
N N N
X X
J1
X
3
J3
82.5
K2
27 27
148
45 45
D1 P4 D1 P11 Y
Z Z
Tipo D1 J1 J2 J3 K1 K2 P3 P4 P10 P11

NSX100/160/250 75 78.5 67.5 55 46.5 74 88 89 89 90
NSX400/630 100 122 129 122.5 64.5 90 112 113 112 113
3/31
Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, fijo
Posicin de las conexiones

C1 B1 B1 B1
A1
X X
A2
3 A3
C2 Y
Tipo A1 A2 B1 C1 C2 Tipo A1 A3 B1 C1 C2
NSX100/160 70 140 35 19.5 19.5 NSX100/160 + Vigi 70 215 35 19.5 21.5
NSX250 70 140 35 21.5 19.5 NSX250 + Vigi 70 215 35 21.5 21.5
NSX400/630 113.5 227 45 26 26 NSX400/630 + Vigi 113.5 327 45 26 26
Conexin frontal sin accesorios con toma frontal

NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
Z Z
10.5 14
70 113.5
X X
Cables con terminales/barras Barras/cables con terminales
Conexin con accesorios
Tomas posteriores largas y cortas
NSX100 a 250
Z
43 para los RC cortos
88 para los RC largos
10 8.6
13
18
70
6 20
X
NSX400/630
Z
50 para los RC cortos
115 para los RC largos
15 13 23.2
14
30
113.5
8
X
3/32
Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, fijo (continuacin)
Conexin con accesorios (cont.)

Bornes
NSX100 a 250
Z 63
22
3
70
70
X
X
NSX400/630
Z Z
46.5
14
113.5 113.5
X X
Borne de reparticin (para NSX100 a 250 nicamente)

X
70
41
(a) Bloque Vigi 64.5

NSX250 66.5 (a)
Z
Pletinas en ngulo recto (slo aguas arriba)
NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
Z
Z 8
37.5 61
39.5 (b) 4
34
20.5
70 113.5
(b) NSX250 X X
Pletinas rectas (para NSX100 a 250 nicamente)
4
41
30
70
3/33

Pletinas de canto NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
Z
30
Z
23.5
3 53
58
42 8 42
70 113.5
4
X X
Pletinas a 45 NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
Z
Z 10
13.5
61.5
40 48
31 8
4
70 113.5
X X
Pletinas en doble L NSX100 a 250
Z
45
4
46
35
70
3/34

Pletinas espaciadoras 3P 4P
NSX100 a 250
E1 E3
E2 E2 F2 E2 E2 E2 C3
F1
3
X X X
NSX400/630
Y Y
C4
Tipo C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 F1 F2
NSX100/160 23.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
X
NSX250 25.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
NSX400/630 - 44 135 52.5 187.5 152.5 15
170 70 240 166 15 Z
Espaciador monobloc (para NSX100 a 250 nicamente)
180.5 98
140 26
45 45 45
130
113.5
X X
Y
Z
3/35
Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, extrable
Posicin de las conexiones

M B1 B1 B1
N
A4
V
X X
A5
Y
27
45
D1
Z
Tipo A4 A5 B1 D1 Nota:
para el montaje en placa posterior, se debe instalar la pantalla de aislamiento suministrada
NSX100 a 250 100 200 35 75 con el zcalo.
NSX400/630 156.5 313 45 100 para los modelos extrables, se recomienda utilizar cubrebornes cortos.
Conexin sin accesorios

Conexin frontal: montaje en placa posterior (M) carriles (V)
NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
26 6
19 4
Z Z
108.5 171
156.5
100
X X
Conexin posterior: montaje a travs del panel frontal (N) en carriles (V)
NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
114.5
75.5 100.5
67
4 6
Z Z
80.5 129
49
63.5 57.5 104 82.5
96.5
X X
114.5
75.5 100.5
67
Z Z
8.5 11
70 49 113.5
57.5 82.5
96.5
X X
3/36
Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630, extrable (continuacin)
Conexin con accesorios

Bornes: montaje en placa posterior (M) carriles (V)
NSX100 a 250 70
48.5
Z
110
100 Z
163
3
100
X
30
X
30
NSX400/630
68 94
171 Z
203
156.5
156.5
X
55
X
55
Bornes: montaje a travs del panel frontal (N) en carriles (V)

NSX100 a 250
74
54
Z
110
100 163
Z
X 100
18
X
18
NSX400/630
111
84
Z
Z
171 203
156.5
156.5
X
18 X
18
3/37

Pletinas a 45: montaje a travs del panel frontal (N) en carriles (V)
NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
57
33
3 4
8
218
140 204.5
Z Z
131
156.5
100
X X
18 18
Pletinas en doble L: montaje en placa posterior (M) carriles (V)

NSX100 a 250
47
146
135 Z
100
X
30
Pletinas en doble L: montaje a travs del panel frontal (N) en carriles (V)
NSX100 a 250
51
146
135 Z
100
X
18
3/38

Pletinas espaciadoras: montaje en placa posterior (M) carriles (V)
3P 4P NSX100 a 250
E1 E3
E2 E2 F2 E2 E2 E2 27
3
F1
X X X
NSX400/630
Y Y 50
Tipo E1 E2 E3 F1 F2
NSX100 a 250 114 45 159 130 11
NSX400/630 135 52.5 187.5 195.5 15 X
170 70 240 209 15
Z
Tomas posteriores largos aislados: montaje en placa posterior (M) carriles (V)
Tomas posteriores montados en exterior NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
108.5
75.5 94.5
67
Z
Z
80.5 129
30 55
X X
Tomas posteriores montados en interior NSX100 a 250 NSX400/630
108.5
75.5 94.5
67
Z
Z
63.5 104
30 55
X X
Las pletinas largas y aisladas son obligatorias.
3/39
Conexin de cables barras aisladas con terminales para Compact
y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630
Conexin directa con NSX100 a 630

Dimensiones NSX100 NSX160/250 NSX400/630
400
Barras L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
d
I d (mm) y 10 y 10 y 15
L e (mm) y6 y6 3 y e y 10
e (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Barra Terminales L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
3 Par (Nm) (1)

Par (Nm) (2)
(mm) 6.5
10
5/5
8.5
15
5/5
10.5
50
20/11

Par (Nm) (3) 8 8 20
(1) Par de apriete en el interruptor automtico para terminales barras.

L (2) Par de apriete en aparatos jos para tomas posteriores//par de apriete en aparatos extrables
Terminal. para las tomas de alimentacin.
(3) Par de apriete de las pletinas sobre el zcalo.
Accesorios para NSX100 a 250
Pletinas prolongadoras rectas Pletinas prolongadoras de

Conexin con accesorios a NSX100 a 250 (IEC 228)
doble L Inclinacin de polo
Sin espaciador 35 mm
Con espaciador 45 mm
Dimensiones Con espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras
Cobre estaado Cobre estaado NSX100 NSX160/250
Espaciadores en
Barras L (mm) y 25 y 25
partes separadas Espaciador monobloc l (mm) 20 y I y 25 20 y I y 25
400 d (mm) y 10 y 10
e (mm) y6 y6
d
I (mm) 6.5 8.5
L
L Terminales L (mm) y 25 y 25
Cobre estaado e (mm) 6.5 8.5
Para U > 600 V, el kit de aislamiento obligatorio no es Par (Nm) (1) 10 15
compatible con espaciadores separados. Se debe utilizar Par (Nm) (2) 5 5
el espaciador monobloc.
(1) Par de apriete en el interruptor automtico para espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras.
(2) Par de apriete en el zcalo para espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras.
Accesorios para NSX400 y 630
Pletinas separadas para inclinacin de 52,5 Los espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras rectas, de ngulo recto, 45, doble L
y 70 mm y de canto se suministran con barreras de interfase exibles.
Conexin con accesorios a NSX400 y 630 (IEC 228)
Inclinacin de polo
Sin espaciadores 45 mm
Cobre estaado Con espaciadores 52.5 70 mm
Para U > 600 V, la utilizacin de los espaciadores con inclinacin de Dimensiones Con espaciadores Con pletinas prolongadoras
52,5 mm necesita un kit de aislamiento especco.
No se pueden utilizar espaciadores con inclinacin de 70 mm. Barras L (mm) y 40 y 32
l (mm) d + 15 30 y I y 34
Accesorios para NSX100 a 630 400 d (mm) y 20 y 15

d e (mm) 3 y e y 10 3 y e y 10
I
Pletinas prolongadoras Pletinas prolongadoras de L (mm) 12.5 10.5
L
en ngulo recto canto Terminales L (mm) y 40 y 32
e
(mm) 12.5 10.5
Par (Nm) (1) 50 50
Par (Nm) (2) 20 20
Cobre estaado Cobre estaado (1) Par de apriete en el interruptor automtico para espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras.
Para montar en el lado (2) Par de apriete en el zcalo para espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras.
aguas arriba.
Los espaciadores pletinas prolongadoras de ngulo recto, 45 y de canto se sumi-
Pletinas a 45
nistran con barreras de interfase exibles.
Detalle de mon-
Cobre taje: 2 cables
estaado con terminales.
3/40
Conexin de cables pelados a Compact y Vigicompact NSX100 a 630
Conexin para NSX100 a 250
Conector Conector Conector Bloque de distribucin

de 1 cable de 2 cable de distribucin Polybloc
Conector de 1 cable Acero

y 160 A
Aluminio
y 250 A
3
L (mm) 25 25
S (mm) Cu / Al 1,5 a 95 (1) De 25 a 50 de 70 a 95 de 120 a 185
150 mx. ex.
L Par (Nm) 12 20 26 26
Conector de 2 cable
S
L (mm) 25 50
S (mm) Cu / Al 2 50 a 2 120
Par (Nm) 22
Conector de distribucin de 6 cables (cobre aluminio)
L (mm) 15 30
S (mm) Cu / Al 1,5 a 6 (1) de 8 a 35
Par (Nm) 4 6
Repartidor Polybloc (6 9 cables)
L (mm) 12 16
S (mm) Cu / Al 6 4 a 10 3 6 a 16
(1) Para cables exibles de 1,5 a 4 mm, conexin con etiquetas plegadas autoplegables.
Conexin a NSX400 y 630
Conector de 1 cable Conector de 2 cable
Conector de 1 cable Conector de 2 cable

L (mm) 30 30 60
S (mm) Cu / Al 35 a 300 rgido 2 35 a 2 240 rgido
240 mx. ex. 240 mx. ex.
L Par (Nm) 31 31
Tensiones electrodinmicas y materiales de los conductores

Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX se pueden conectar indistintamente
a Tomas de cobre pelados, cobre estaado y aluminio estaado (barras rgidas
o exibles, cables).
En caso de producirse un cortocircuito, se ejercen las tensiones trmica y electrodin-
mica en los conductores. Por lo tanto, deben tener el tamao correcto y sujetarse con
soportes.
Los puntos de conexin elctrica de los aparatos de aparamenta (interruptores sec-
cionadores, contactores, interruptores automticos, etc.) no deben utilizarse para el
soporte mecnico.
Cualquier particin entre las conexiones aguas arriba y aguas abajo del aparato debe
realizarse con material no magntico.
3/41
Compact
NSX
Esquemas
elctricos

ndice Compact NSX
Esquemas elctricos

Dimensiones e instalacin 3/1
4 Compact NSX100 a 630

Interruptores automticos fijos
Interruptores automticos de conexin/extrables
4/2
4/4
Motorizacin 4/6
Mdulo SDx con Micrologic 4/8
Mdulo SDTAM con Micrologic M 4/9
Caractersticas adicionales 5/1

Referencias 6/1
Glosario 7/1
4
Interruptores automticos fijos
Esquemas elctricos
Alimentacin Micrologic Funcionamiento a distancia

aguas arriba a (+) a (+)
3P o 4P Cable NSX
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
N L1 L2 L3 SDE 81
BPO BPF
+ -
HL
82 84
D2
C2
A4
A2
B4
B2
Z1
Z2
MN MX
T1
Q T2 auto
4 I ou manu
0 I
Z3
Z4
Z5
U
A1
L1
D1
C1
a (-)
manu SDE
a (-)
Motorizacin (MT)
Cable NSX
3P + N
N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
a (220/240 V)
Interruptor automtico + -
aguas abajo HL
BSCM
B4
Z1
Z2
Q I U T1
T2
Z3
Z4
Z5
ENVT auto 0 I
manu
A1
ENCT
H2 T1 a
Motorizacin
H1 T2 comunicacin (MTc)
Micrologic A E Funcionamiento a distancia

A/E Comunicacin MN: bobina de mnima tensin
H(WH), L(BL): datos o
- (BK), + (RD): fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc
MX: bobina de emisin
A/E ZSI (Zone Selective Interlock))
Z1: ZSI OUT SOURCE Motorizacin (MT)
Z2: ZSI OUT
Z3: ZSI IN SOURCE A4: orden de apertura
Z4: ZSI IN ST (corto retardo) A2: orden de cierre
Z5: ZSI IN GF (defecto a tierra)
B4, A1: fuente de alimentacin a la motorizacin
Nota: Z3, Z4, Z5 para NSX400/630 nicamente.
L1: posicin manual (manu)
A/E ENCT: transformador de intensidad neutro externo:
- cable blindado con 1 par trenzado (T1, T2) B2: Enclavamiento SDE (obligatorio para el funcionamiento correcto)
- blindaje a tierra en un extremo nicamente (extremo TI). BPO: pulsador de apertura
Conexin L = 30 cm mx.
- longitud mxima de 10 metros BPF: pulsador de cierre
- seccin de cable de 0,4 a 1,5 mm2 Motorizacin comunicante (MTc)
- cable recomendado: Belden 8441 o equivalente.
B4, A1: alimentacin de la motorizacin
E ENVT: acoplamientos de tensin neutro externos para la conexin al
neutro a travs de un interruptor automtico 3P. BSCM: estado del interruptor automtico y bloque de control
4/2
Interruptores automticos fijos (continuacin)
Esquemas elctricos
Abierto Cerrado Defecto Defecto Cerrado Abierto Defecto
102
104
134
124
42
32
22
12
72
82
84
92
94
44
34
24
14
74
WH
RD
YE
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 WH CAO1 SDV
RD
GY
4
131
41
31
21
71
121
101
81
91
11
El diagrama aparece con circuitos desactivados, Contactos de sealizacin

todos los aparatos abiertos, conectados y
OF2 / contactos de sealizacin ON/OFF
cargados y los rels en posicin normal.
OF1: del interruptor automtico
Los terminales que se muestran en rojo O deber conectarlos OF4 / contactos de sealizacin ON/OFF del
el cliente.
OF3: interruptor automtico (NSX400/630)
SDE: contacto de sealizacin de disparo por defecto (cortocircuito, sobre-
carga, defecto a tierra, fuga a tierra)
SD: contacto de sealizacin de disparo
CAF2/CAF1: contacto avanzado al cierre (nicamente mando rotativo)
CAO1: contacto avanzado a la apertura (nicamente mando rotativo)
SDV: contacto de sealizacin de disparo de defecto o fuga a tierra
(bloque Vigi adicional)
Cdigo de colores del cableado auxiliar

RD: rojo VT: violeta
WH: blanco GY: gris
YE: amarillo OR: naranja
BK: negro BL: azul
GN: verde
4/3
Interruptores automticos extrables
Esquemas elctricos
Alimentacin Micrologic
Micrologic Funcionamiento a distancia
aguas arriba a (+)
a (+)
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
SDE 81
Cable NSX
3P o 4P BPO BPF
N L1 L2 L3
82 84
C2
D2
B4
A4
A2
84
RD +
84 BK -
RD
A1 BL L
24/34
22/32
B4 WH
A2 WH
H
BL
C2 OR
A4 OR
BL
A2
D2
B4
B2
Z2 YE
Z1 VT
4 MN MX
T1
Q T2 auto
0 I
I or manu
BK Z3
GN Z4
RD Z5
A1
L1
D1
C1
GN
WH
BK
41
42
44
A1
D1/C1
a (-) manu L1 a (-) SDE
Motorizacin (MT)
Cable NSX
3P + N
N L1 L2 L3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
Z5
a (220/240 V)
+ -
HL
Interruptor automtico BSCM

aguas abajo
B4
Z1
Z2
B4 GN
Z2 YE
Z1 VT
Q I U
T1
T2 auto
ENVT 0 I
manu
BK Z3
GN Z4
RD Z5
OR A1
ENCT
Z3
Z4
Z5
H2 T1
A4
H1 T2 a
Motorizacin de comunicacin (MTc)

El diagrama aparece con circuitos desactivados,
todos los aparatos abiertos, conectados,
cargados y los rels en posicin normal.
4/4
Interruptores automticos extrables (continuacin)
Esquemas elctricos
Contactos de sealizacin Contactos de chasis
Abierto Cerrado Defecto Defecto Cerrado Abierto Defecto Enchufado Desenchufado

42
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
44
34
24
14
72
74
42 GN
82 GN
92 GN
44 RD
84 RD
94 RD
32 YE
22 YE
12 YE
72 YE
34 VT
24 VT
14 VT
74 VT
102
314
312
352
354
104
134
124
WH
GY
GY
RD
YE
VT
VT
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO1 SDV CE CD 4
WH
YE
YE
GY
RD
131
121
101
BK 41
GY 31
GY 21
BK 81
BK 91
311
351
GY 71
GY 11
41
31
21
71
81
91
11
Micrologic A E Funcionamiento a distancia

A/E Comunicacin MN: bobina de mnima tensin
H(WH), L(BL): datos o
- (BK), + (RD): fuente de alimentacin de 24 Vcc MX: bobina de emisin
A/E ZSI (Zone Selective Interlock) Motorizacin (MT)
Z1: ZSI OUT SOURCE
A4: orden de apertura
Z2: ZSI OUT
Z3: ZSI IN SOURCE A2: orden de cierre
Z4: ZSI IN ST (corto retardo) B4, A1: alimentacin de la motorizacin
Z5: ZSI IN GF (defecto a tierra) L1: posicin manual (manu)
Nota: Z3, Z4, Z5 para NSX400/630 nicamente. B2: Enclavamiento SDE (obligatorio para la recarga
A/E ENCT: transformador de intensidad neutro externo: automtica o a distancia)
- cable blindado con 1 par trenzado (T1, T2) BPO: pulsador de apertura
- blindaje a tierra en un extremo nicamente (extremo TI). BPF: pulsador de cierre
Conexin L = 30 cm mx.
- longitud mxima de 10 metros Motorizacin comunicante (MTc)
- seccin de cable de 0,4 a 1,5 mm2 B4, A1: alimentacin de la motorizacin
- cable recomendado: Belden 8441 o equivalente. BSCM: estado del interruptor automtico y bloque de control
E ENVT: acoplamientos de tensin neutro externos para la co-
nexin al neutro a travs de un interruptor automtico 3P.
Cdigo de colores del cableado auxiliar OF2 / contactos de sealizacin ON/OFF del interruptor
RD: rojo VT: violeta OF1: automtico
WH: blanco GY: gris OF4 / contactos de sealizacin ON/OFF del interruptor
YE: amarillo OR: naranja OF3: automtico (NSX400/630)
BK: negro BL: azul SDE: contacto de sealizacin de disparo por defecto
GN: verde (cortocircuito, sobrecarga, defecto a tierra, fuga a tierra)
SD: contacto de sealizacin de disparo
CAF2/CAF1: contacto avanzado al cierre
Los terminales que se muestran en rojo v / O deber conectarlos el cliente. (nicamente mando rotativo)
CAO1: contacto avanzado a la apertura
(nicamente mando rotativo)
SDV: contacto de sealizacin de disparo de defecto o fuga
a tierra (bloque Vigi adicional)
4/5
Motorizacin
Esquemas elctricos
El diagrama aparece con circuitos desactivados, Motorizacin (MT) con rearme automtico
todos los aparatos abiertos, conectados y
cargados y los rels en posicin normal. a (+)
Tras el disparo iniciado mediante el botn "Trip" o mediante la

bobina de mnima tensin (MN) o la bobina de emisin (MX), el SDE 81
rearme del interruptor puede ser automtico, a distancia BPO BPF
o manual.
Tras el disparo debido a un defecto elctrico (con un contacto 82 84

SDE), el rearme debe realizarse de forma manual.
A4
A2
B4
B2
Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
L1
4 manu SDE
a (-)
Motorizacin (MT) con rearme a distancia

a (+)
SDE 81
BPO BPF Reinicio
82 84
A4
A2
B4
B2
Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
L1
manu SDE
()
Motorizacin (MT) con rearme manual

a (+)
SDE 81
BPO BPF
Smbolos
82 84
Q: interruptor automtico
A4
A2
B4
B2
A4: orden de apertura

A2: orden de cierre
L1: posicin manual (manu)
B2: Enclavamiento SDE (obligatorio para el Q
funcionamiento correcto) auto
0 I
BPO: pulsador de apertura manu
BPF: pulsador de cierre
A1
L1
SDE: contacto de sealizacin de disparo por

defecto (cortocircuito, sobrecarga, defecto manu SDE
a tierra, fuga a tierra)
a (-)
4/6
Motorizacin (continuacin)
Esquemas elctricos
Motorizacin comunicante (MTc)
NSX cord
a (220/240 V)
+ -
HL
BSCM
B4
Q
auto 0 I
manu
4
A1
a
Representacin esquemtica de la motorizacin comunicante (MT).

Pantalla de RSU de la motorizacin comunicante (MTc)
Pantalla de conguracin de la utilidad RSU

para la motorizacin comunicante.
Diagrama de una sola lnea de la motorizacin comunicante

Las rdenes de apertura, cierre y rearme se transmiten a travs de la red de comuni-
cacin.
Los parmetros "Activar rearme automtico" y "Activar rearme incluso si SDE" deben
ajustarse con el software RSU a travs de la pantalla, haciendo clic en el texto azul.
"Auto/manu" es un interruptor de la parte frontal del motorizacin.
Smbolos
BSCM: estado del interruptor automtico y bloque de control
Los terminales que se muestran en rojo O deber conectarlos el cliente.
4/7
Bloque SDx con Unidad de Control Micrologic
Esquemas elctricos
El diagrama aparece con circuitos desactivados, Conexin

todos los aparatos abiertos, conectados
y cargados y los rels en posicin normal. a (+) 24 a 415 V
STD o PAL Ir o
Smbolos salida 1 SDG o
SD1, SD3: fuente de alimentacin del bloque SDx salida 2
SD3 SD2 SD4
SD2: salida 1 (80 mA mx.)
SDx
SD4: salida 2 (80 mA mx.)
Q
SD2 SD4
Micrologic 2 SDT -
Micrologic 5 SDT o salida 1 PAL Ir o salida 2
Micrologic 6 SDT o salida 1 SDG o salida 2 SD1
Los terminales que se muestran en rojo O deber conectarlos el

cliente.
4 a (-)
Funcionamiento
tr a 6 Ir
> 105 % Ir
> 90 % Ir
I
PAL Ir
SDG
SDT
Q
Preparado
Alarma
Orden de disparo Rearme del

del interruptor interruptor
automtico automtico
Preparado
Alarma
Preparado
Alarma
I: corriente de carga
PAL Ir: prealarma de sobrecarga trmica
SDG: seal de defecto a tierra
SDT: seal de defecto trmico
4/8
Bloque SDTAM con Micrologic M
Esquemas elctricos
El diagrama aparece con circuitos desactivados, Conexin

todos los aparatos abiertos, conectados
y cargados y los rels en posicin normal. a (+) 24 a 415 V
Rearme Orden
Smbolos manual SDT KA1 de
cierre KM1
SD1, SD3: fuente de alimentacin del bloque SDTAM SD3 SD2 SD4
SD2: salida de seal de defecto trmico
SDTAM
(80 mA mx.)
6 8 Orden
SD4: salida de control de contactor de
4 10
(80 mA mx.) Q apertura
2 12
1 14
OFF 15 KA1
SD2 SD4 Rearme automtico (minutos)
Micrologic 2-M SDT KA1 SD1
Micrologic 6 E-M SDT KA1 KM1
KM1
Los terminales que se muestran en rojo O deber conectarlos
el cliente.
a (-)
4
Funcionamiento
Clase (tr) a 7,2 Ir
> 95 % T
400 ms
< 95 % T
I
SDT
KA1
KM1
Q
Preparado
Alarma
%T 400 ms antes de la Orden de

orden de disparo cierre del
del interruptor contactor
automtico
Preparado
Alarma
%T Rearme
manual o
automtico
I: corriente de carga
SDT: seal de defecto trmico
KA1: rel auxiliar (por ejemplo, rel Schneider Electric RDN o RTBT)
KM1: contactor de motor
4/9
Compact
NSX
Caractersticas
adicionales

ndice Compact NSX
Caractersticas tcnicas

5 Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX100 a 250 proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin
Compact NSX100 a 250 proteccin de motores
5/2
5/6
Compact NSX400 a 630 proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin 5/8
Compact NSX400 a 630 proteccin del motor 5/10
Compact NSX100 a 630 disparo reflejo 5/12
Curvas de limitacin de energa y corriente
Referencias 6/1
Glosario 7/1
5
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX100 a 250. Proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin
Unidades de control magntico TM

TM16D / TM16G TM25D / TM25G
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM16D : Im = 12 x In TM25D : Im = 12 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
TM16G : Im = 4 x In
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01 TM25G : t < 10 ms
t < 10 ms
Im = 3.2 x In
.005 .005
5 .002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
TM32D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM40D : Im = 12 x In TM63D : Im = 8 x In
1 1
.5 .5
TM32D : Im = 12.5 x In TM50D : Im = 10 x In
.2 .2
TM40G : TM63G :
.1 .1
Im = 2 x In Im = 2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
5/2
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX100 a 250. Proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin (continuacin)
Unidades de control magntico TM (continuacin)

TM80D / TM100D TM125D / TM160D
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 TM125D : Im = 10 x In
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
.5 .5 TM160D :
TM80D/TM100D : Im = 8 x In
.2 Im = 8 x In .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
5
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
TM200D / TM250D
10 000
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2 TM200D/TM250D :
1 Im = 5 ... 10 x In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01 t < 10 ms
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
5/3
Curvas de disparo
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 2.2 y 2.2 G

Micrologic 2.2 - 40... 160 A Micrologic 2.2 - 250 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 40 A : Ir = 16 ...40 A 5 000
100 A : Ir = 36 ...100 A 250 A : Ir = 90 ...250 A
2 000 160 A : Ir = 57 ...160 A 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
5 .002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 15 x In
50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 12 x In
50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
Micrologic 2.2 G - 40... 160 A Micrologic 2.2 G - 250 A
10 000 10 000
40 A : Ir = 16 ...40 A
5 000 5 000
100 A : Ir = 36 ...100 A 250 A : Ir = 90 ...250 A
2 000 160 A : Ir = 57 ...160 A 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 1.5 ...9 x Ir Isd = 1.5 ...9 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
Ii = 15 x In Ii = 12 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
5/4
Curvas de disparo
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 5.2 y 6.2 A E

Micrologic 5.2 y 6.2 A E - 40... 160 A Micrologic 5.2 y 6.2 A E - 250 A
10 000 10 000
40 A : Ir = 16 ...40 A
5 000 5 000 250 A : Ir = 90 ...250 A
100 A : Ir = 36 ...100 A
2 000 160 A : Ir = 56 ...160 A 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
tr = 0.5 ...16 s tr = 0.5 ...16 s
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
2 2
1 1
It ON It ON
.5 0.4 .5 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 .2 0.2
.1 It OFF 0.1 .1 It OFF 0.1
.05 .05
0 0
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 t < 10 ms .005 t < 10 ms
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10
Ii = 1.5 ...15 In
20 5 7 10 20 30 50
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10
Ii = 1.5 ...12 In
20 5 7 10 20 30 50
5
I / Ir I / In I / Ir I / In
Disparo reejo.
Micrologic 6.2 A E (proteccin de defecto a tierra)
10 000
5 000
2 000 40 A : Ig = 0.4 ...1 x In

1 000 > 40 A : Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) It ON
2
1
.5
0.4
0.3
.2
It OFF 0.2
.1 0.1
.05
0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
La curva de disparo es idntica a la de Micrologic 5.

La proteccin de defecto a tierra se muestra por separado.
5/5
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX100 a 250. Proteccin de motores
Unidades de control magntico MA

MA2.5... MA100 MA150 y MA220
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500 Resistencia trmica
200 200 MA220

100 100 MA150
Resistencia trmica
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Im = 6 ... 14 x In Im = 9 ... 14 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
5 .002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 2.2-M

Micrologic 2.2 M - 25 A Micrologic 2.2 M - 50... 220 A
10 000 10 000
50 A : Ir = 25 ...50 A
5 000 25 A : Ir = 12 ...25 A 5 000
100 A : Ir = 50 ...100 A
2 000 2 000 150 A : Ir = 70 ...150 A
220 A : Ir = 100 ...220 A
1 000 1 000
500 clase 20 500 clase 20
clase 10 clase 10
200 200
clase 5 clase 5
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01 t < 10 ms
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
5/6
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX100 a 250. Proteccin de motores (continuacin)
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6.2 E-M y 6 E-M

Micrologic 6.2 E-M - 25 A Micrologic 6.2 E-M - 50... 220 A
10 000 10 000 50 A : Ir = 25 ...50 A

5 000 5 000 80 A : Ir = 35 ...80 A
25 A : Ir = 12 ...25 A
2 000 2 000 150 A : Ir = 70 ...150 A
clase 30 220 A : Ir = 100 ...220 A
1 000 1 000
clase 20
500 500 clase 30
clase 10
clase 20
100 100 clase 5
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 17 x In
50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 15 x In
50 70 100 200 300
5
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
Micrologic 6 E-M (proteccin de defecto a tierra)
10 000
5 000
2 000 25 A : Ig = 0.6 ...1 x In

50 A : Ig = 0.3 ...1 x In
1 000
> 50 A : Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
1
.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
.1 0.1 0.1
.05
0 0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
La curva de control es idntica a la de Micrologic 6.

5/7
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX400 a 630. Proteccin de los sistemas de distribucin
Unidades de control electrnicas Micrologic 2.3, 5.3 y 6.3 A E

Micrologic 2.3 - 250... 400 A Micrologic 2.3 - 630 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 250 A : Ir = 63 ...250 A 5 000
630 A : Ir = 225 ...630 A
400 A : Ir = 144 ...400 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
5 .002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 12 x In
50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 11 x In
50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
Micrologic 5.3 y 6.3 A E - 400 A Micrologic 5.3 y 6.3 A E - 630 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
400 A : Ir = 100 ...400 A 630 A : Ir = 225 ...630 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
tr = 0.5 ...16 s tr = 0.5 ...16 s
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir t(s) Isd = 1.5 ...10 x Ir
2 2
1 1
It ON It ON
.5 0.4 .5 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 .2 0.2
.1 It OFF 0.1 .1 It OFF 0.1
.05 0 .05
0
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 t < 10 ms .005 t < 10 ms
.002 .002
Ii = 1.5 ...12 In Ii = 1.5 ...11 In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50
I / Ir I / In I / Ir I / In
Disparo reejo.
5/8
Curvas de disparo
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6.3 A E (continuacin)

Micrologic 6,3 A E (proteccin de defecto a tierra)
10 000
5 000
2 000 40 A : Ig = 0.4 ...1 x In

1 000 > 40 A : Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s) It ON
2
1
.5
0.4
0.3
.2
It OFF 0.2
.1 0.1
.05
0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5
I / In

5/9
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX400 a 630. Proteccin de motores
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 1.3 M y 2.3 M

Micrologic 1.3 M - 320 A Micrologic 1.3 M - 500 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 Resistencia trmica 100 Resistencia trmica
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
.2 Isd = 5 ...13 x In .2 Isd = 5 ...13 x In

.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
5 .002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 15 x In
50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 13 x In
50 70 100 200 300
I / In I / In
Disparo reejo.
Micrologic 2.3 M - 320 A Micrologic 2.3 M - 500 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
320 A : Ir = 160 ...320 A 500 A : Ir = 250 ...500 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
clase 10 clase 10
200 200
clase 5 clase 5
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
5/10
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX400 a 630. Proteccin de motores (continuacin)
Unidades de control electrnico Micrologic 6.3 E-M y 6 E-M

Micrologic 6.3 E-M - 320 A Micrologic 6.3 E-M - 500 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
320 A : Ir = 160 ...320 A 500 A : Ir = 250 ...500 A
2 000 2 000
1 000 clase 30 1 000 clase 30
clase 20 clase 20
clase 5 clase 5
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir Isd = 5 ...13 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 15 x In
50 70 100 200 300
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
Ii = 13 x In
50 70 100 200 300
5
I / Ir I / Ir
Disparo reejo.
Micrologic 6 E-M (proteccin de motor)
10 000
5 000
2 000
Ig = 0.2 ...1 x In
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
1
.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
.1 0.1 0.1
.05
0 0
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05 .07 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30
I / In

5/11
Curvas de disparo
Compact NSX100 a 630. Disparo reflejo
Los Interruptores automticos Compact NSX100

a 630 estn equipados con el sistema exclusivo
de disparo reflejo. 20
El sistema interrumpe intensidades de defecto

muy elevadas. NSX630
El aparato se dispara mecnicamente a travs de

un "pistn" que se acciona directamente mediante
10 NSX400
la presin que produce el cortocircuito en las
unidades de corte. t
8
(ms)
Para cortocircuitos elevados, este sistema ofrece 7
una interrupcin ms rpida, por lo que se
garantiza la selectividad. 6
NSX250
5
Las curvas de disparo reflejo slo estn en funcin
del calibre del interruptor automtico.
4
NSX100
NSX160
3
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200
kA rms
5/12
Curvas de limitacin de energa e intensidad
La capacidad de limitacin de un interruptor Icc = 100% Icu

automtico es la capacidad para permitir el
La extraordinaria capacidad de limitacin de la gama NSX reduce en gran medida las
acceso de una intensidad durante un cortocircuito,
fuerzas que crean las intensidades de defecto en los aparatos.
que sea inferior a la intensidad prevista del Esto se traduce en un importante aumento de las prestaciones de la interrupcin.
cortocircuito. En particular, la capacidad de corte en servicio Icc es igual al 100% de Icu.
El valor de Icc, denido por la norma IEC 60947-2, se garantiza mediante ensayos que
incluyen los siguientes pasos:
(Icc) interrupcin tres veces consecutivas de una intensidad de defecto igual al 100% de Icu
Icc cresta
previsto comprobacin de que el aparato sigue funcionando de forma normal, es decir:
conduce la intensidad nominal sin un aumento anmalo de la temperatura
Intensidad
prevista las funciones de proteccin se realizan dentro de los lmites especicados por la
norma
Icc prevista la idoneidad para el aislamiento no se ve afectada.
Icc cresta Longevidad de las instalaciones elctricas

limitada
Intensidad Los interruptores automticos de limitacin de intensidad reducen en gran medida los
real efectos negativos de los cortocircuitos en las instalaciones.
Icc
limitada Efectos trmicos
Se produce un aumento menor de la temperatura en los conductores, por lo que se
(t)
prolonga la vida til de los cables.
La extraordinaria capacidad de limitacin de la gama Compact
Efectos mecnicos
NSX se consigue gracias a la tcnica de doble interrupcin
giratoria (repulsin natural muy rpida de los contactos y la Se producen menos fuerzas electrodinmicas, por lo que existe menos riesgo de que
aparicin de dos tensiones de arco en serie con una curva frontal los contactos elctricos o los juegos de barras se deformen o se rompan.
muy pronunciada).
Efectos electromagnticos
Menos perturbaciones en los aparatos de medida situados junto a los circuitos elctricos.
5
Economa gracias a la filiacin
La liacin es una tcnica que se deriva directamente de la limitacin de intensidades.
Los interruptores automticos con capacidades de interrupcin inferiores a las de la
intensidad de cortocircuito prevista se pueden instalar aguas abajo de un limitador.
La capacidad de interrupcin se refuerza por la capacidad de limitacin del aparato
aguas arriba. Por consiguiente, se pueden obtener importantes ahorros en los equipos
y envolventes aguas abajo.
5/13
(continuacin)

La capacidad de limitacin de un interruptor automtico se expresa mediante dos cur-
vas que estn en funcin de la intensidad de cortocircuito prevista (la intensidad que
uira si no se instalaran aparatos de proteccin):
la intensidad mxima real (intensidad limitada)
tensin trmica (A2s), es decir, la energa disipada por el cortocircuito en un conduc-
tor con una resistencia de 1 .
Ejemplo
Cul es el valor real de un cortocircuito previsto de 150 kA rms (es decir, de 330 kA de
pico) limitado por un NSX250L aguas arriba?
La respuestas es 30 kA como mximo (curva pg. 5/15).
Tensiones mximas permisibles de los cables

La siguiente tabla indica las tensiones trmicas mximas permisibles de los cables,
en funcin de su aislamiento, el conductor (Cu o Al) y su rea de seccin (CSA).
Los valores de la seccin se expresan en mm y las tensiones trmicas en A2s.
CSA 1,5 mm2 2,5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2

PVC Cu 2,97 104 8,26 104 2,12 105 4,76 105 1,32 106
Al 5,41 105
PRC Cu 4,10 104 1,39 105 2,92 105 6,56 105 1,82 106
Al 7,52 105
CSA 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2
PVC Cu 3,4 106 8,26 106 1,62 107 3,31 107
5 PRC
Al
Cu
1,39 106
4,69 106
3,38 106
1,39 107
6,64 106
2,23 107
1,35 107
4,56 107
Al 1,93 106 4,70 106 9,23 106 1,88 107
Ejemplo
Un cable de Cu/PVC con una seccin de 10 mm se encuentra protegido correctamen-
te mediante un NSX160F?
La tabla anterior indica que la tensin permisible es de 1,32 106 A2s.
Todas las intensidades de cortocircuito en el punto en el que se ha instalado el
NSX160F (Icu = 35 kA) se limitan con una tensin trmica inferior a 6 105 A2s
(curva pg. 5/15).
Por consiguiente, la proteccin del cable se garantiza hasta el lmite de la capacidad
de interrupcin del interruptor automtico.
5/14
(continuacin)
Curvas de limitacin de intensidad

Tensin 400/440 Vca Tensin 660/690 Vca
Intensidad de cortocircuito limitada (k mxima) Intensidad de cortocircuito limitada (k mxima)
300 300
200 200
146 146
100 100
80 80
70 70
60 L NSX630 60
50 S 50
H NSX400
40 N 40 L NSX630
k L NSX250 k S
30 S 30 H NSX400
H NSX100
N
F NSX160 L
20 20 N S NSX250
NSX100
NSX160
10 10 N, H
8 8 F
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
65
kA rms kA rms
5
Curvas de limitacin de energa
Tensin 400/440 Vca Tensin 660/690 Vca
Energa limitada Energa limitada
9 9
10 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
1.41 1.41
8 8
10 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
7 7
10 10
2 2 L
As 5 S L As 5 S NSX630
N H NSX630 H
3 NSX400 3 NSX400
2 2 N
6 6 L
10 F N H S L 10 S NSX250
NSX250 N, H
NSX100 F NSX100
5 NSX160
5 NSX160
3 3
2 2
5 5
10 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300
kA rms kA rms
5/15
Compact
NSX
Referencias

Glosario
Compact NSX
Rels y contactos auxiliares

Contacto incluido en un circuito auxiliar y operado mecnicamente por el aparato
Contacto auxiliar
de conmutacin.
IEC 60947-1
1/90 Contacto auxiliar o de control que se cierra cuando los contactos principales del aparato de
Contacto de conexin
conmutacin mecnica se cierran y que se abre cuando stos se abren.
IEC 60947-1
1/90 Contacto auxiliar o de control que se abre cuando los contactos principales del aparato de
Contacto de corte
conmutacin mecnica se cierran y que se cierra cuando stos se abren.
IEC 60947-1
1/85 Salida de un rel formada por un tiristor o componente electrnico triac. La baja Poder de con-
Bloque de rel con salida esttica
mutacin signica que se necesita un rel de potencia. Es el caso de las salidas SDx y SDTAM.
1/18 Aparato diseado para producir cambios bruscos predeterminados en uno o varios circuitos
Rel (elctrico)
de salida elctricos cuando se cumplen determinadas condiciones en los circuitos de entrada
IEC 60947-1
elctricos que controlan el aparato.
7/13
Glosario
Compact NSX
Selectividad / Filiacin
La liacin implanta el poder de limitacin de Intensidad de un interruptor automtico, lo que
Filiacin
hace posible instalar interruptores automticos aguas abajo con niveles de prestaciones ms
bajos.
El interruptor automtico aguas arriba reduce cualquier Intensidad de cortocircuito elevada. Esto
hace posible instalar interruptores automticos aguas abajo con Poderes de corte inferiores a la
Intensidad de cortocircuito prevista en su punto de instalacin.
La ventaja principal de la liacin es reducir el coste general de la aparamenta.
Puesto que la Intensidad se limita aguas abajo del circuito del interruptor de limitacin, la liacin
se aplica a todos los aparatos situados aguas abajo.
1/18 Varios interruptores automticos con unidades de control electrnico Micrologic estn interconec-
Selectividad lgica (ZSI)
tadas una tras otra mediante un cable piloto. En caso de defecto a tierra o de corto retardo:
a falta de informacin aguas abajo, el interruptor automtico afectado directamente por el
defecto (esto es, situado exactamente aguas arriba del defecto) cambia a la temporizacin ms
corta y enva una seal aguas arriba
el aparato aguas arriba, al recibir la seal del aparato aguas abajo, conserva su temporizacin
normal.
De esta forma, el defecto se elimina rpidamente por el interruptor automtico ms prximo al
defecto.
1/8 La selectividad queda garantizada entre los interruptores automticos aguas arriba y abajo si,
Selectividad
cuando se produce un defecto, slo se dispara el interruptor automtico situado inmediatamente
aguas arriba del defecto.
La selectividad es la clave para garantizar la continuidad de servicio de una instalacin.
Selectividad basada en la diferencia entre las regulaciones de proteccin de Inten-

Selectividad amperimtrica
sidad de los interruptores automticos. La diferencia de las regulaciones entre dos
interruptores automticos sucesivos de un circuito debe ser suciente para que el
interruptor automtico aguas abajo pueda eliminar el defecto antes de que se dispare
el interruptor aguas arriba.
1/8 Esta funcin es especca del Compact NSX (ver Disparo rex en la pg. 7/8) y comple-
Selectividad energtica
menta los otros tipos de selectividad.
Selectividad basada en la diferencia entre los regulaciones de temporizacin de los

Selectividad cronomtrica
interruptores automticos. La unidad de disparo aguas arriba se retarda para propor-
cionar al interruptor aguas abajo el tiempo necesario para eliminar el defecto.
1/8 La selectividad es parcial si las condiciones para la selectividad total no se cumplen

Selectividad parcial
para la ltima Intensidad de cortocircuito Icu, pero nicamente hasta un valor inferior.
Dicho valor se denomina lmite de selectividad. Si un defecto supera el lmite de selec-
tividad, se disparan los dos interruptores automticos.
7 La selectividad total queda garantizada entre los interruptores automticos aguas
Selectividad total 1/8
arriba y abajo si, para todos los valores de defecto (desde las sobrecargas hasta los
cortocircuitos slidos), slo se dispara el interruptor automtico aguas abajo y el inte-
rruptor aguas arriba permanece cerrado.
7/14
Glosario
Compact NSX
Unidades de control
1/89 Este tipo de bobina funciona cuando se alimenta con Intensidad. La bobina MX provo-
Bobina de emisin (MX)
ca la apertura del interruptor automtico cuando recibe una seal mantenida
o de tipo impulso.
1/8 Los interruptores automticos Compact NSX poseen un sistema de disparo reejo
Disparo reflejo
patentado que se basa en la energa del arco y que es independiente de las dems
funciones de proteccin. Funciona de forma extremadamente rpida, antes que las
dems funciones de proteccin. Se trata de una funcin de seguridad adicional que
funciona antes que las dems en caso de que se produzca un cortocircuito muy
elevado.
Aparato conectado mecnicamente a un aparato de conmutacin mecnico (p. ej.,

Bobina
un interruptor automtico), que libera las retenciones y permite abrir o cerrar el aparato
IEC 60947-1
de conmutacin. Para los interruptores automticos, las bobinas a menudo estn inte-
gradas en una unidad de disparo.
1/88 Este tipo de bobina funciona cuando la tensin de alimentacin cae por debajo del
Bobina de mnima tensin (MN)
mnimo establecido.
1/16 Unidad de control que mide continuamente la Intensidad que atraviesa cada fase
Unidad de control
y el neutro, en su caso. Para Micrologic, las mediciones se realizan con sensores de
electrnica (Micrologic)
Intensidad integrados vinculados a un convertidor digital-analgico con una frecuencia
de muestreo elevada. ASIC compara continuamente los valores de medida con los
regulaciones de proteccin. Si se supera un ajuste, el rel Mitop dispara el interruptor
automtico del mecanismo.
Este tipo de unidad de control ofrece una mejor activacin y precisin de ajuste de
temporizacin que las unidades de control magnetotrmico. Tambin ofrece una am-
plia gama de funciones de proteccin.
1/14 Unidad de control que combina la proteccin trmica para sobrecargas y proteccin
Unidad de control magnetotrmica
magntica.
1/14 Rel accionado por una bobina o palanca. Un aumento importante de la Intensidad
Rel magntico
(p. ej., un cortocircuito) genera en la bobina o la palanca un cambio en el campo mag-
ntico que mueve un ncleo. Esto dispara el mecanismo de apertura del interruptor
automtico. La accin es instantnea y el ajuste de activacin se puede ajustar.
1/14 Apertura en la que una pletina bimetlica se calienta por el efecto Joule. Superado un
Rel trmico
umbral de aumento de temperatura que est en funcin de la Intensidad y su duracin
(curva I2t = constante, que representa el aumento de temperatura de los cables), la
pletina bimetlica se dobla y libera el mecanismo de apertura del interruptor automti-
co. Se puede ajustar la activacin.
7/15
Compact
NSX
ndice
de referencias

ndice Compact NSX
ndice de referencias

Referencias 6/1
Accesorios 7/1
8 ndice de referencias
Referencias 8/2
8
Referencia Clave Pgina Referencia Clave Pgina
04000 LV429000
04031 A 6/16 LV429003 C 6/12
04033 C 6/16 LV429004 C 6/12
04034 A 6/16 LV429005 C 6/12
LV429006 C 6/12
29000 LV429008
LV429009
C
C
6/12
6/12
29315 C 6/24
LV429010 C 6/12
29370 A 6/21, 6/41
LV429011 C 6/12
29372 C 6/22
LV429018 C 6/12
29450 A 6/18, 6/38
LV429019 C 6/12
29452 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429030 B 6/12
LV429031 B 6/12
32000 LV429032 B 6/12
32556 C 6/44 LV429033 B 6/12
32595 C 6/44 LV429034 B 6/12
32623 C 6/42 LV429035 B 6/12
LV429036 B 6/12
LV429037 B 6/12
33000 LV429040 B 6/12
33680 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429041 B 6/12
33681 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429042 B 6/12
33682 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429043 B 6/12
LV429044 B 6/12
41000 LV429045 B 6/12
41940 A 6/21, 6/23, 6/41, 6/43 LV429046 B 6/12
41950 A 6/22, 6/42 LV429047 B 6/12

LV429050 C 6/12
LV429051 C 6/12
42000 LV429052 C 6/12
42878 B 6/22, 6/42 LV429053 C 6/12
42888 B 6/21, 6/23, 6/41, 6/43 LV429054 C 6/12
LV429055 C 6/12
54000 LV429056 C 6/12
54440 C 1/32, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45 LV429057 C 6/12
8 54441
54442
C
C
1/32, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45
1/32, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45
LV429070
LV429072
B
B
6/12
6/12
54443 C 1/32, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45 LV429075 B 6/13
54444 C 1/32, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45 LV429076 B 6/13
54445 C 1/32, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45 LV429080 B 6/12
54446 C 1/33, 6/14, 6/25, 6/33, 6/45 LV429082 B 6/12

LV429085 B 6/13
LV429086 B 6/13
LV429089 C 6/13
8/2

LV429090 C 6/12 LV429215 B 6/13
LV429091 C 6/12 LV429216 A 6/13
LV429095 C 6/12 LV429218 B 6/16
LV429096 C 6/12 LV429219 B 6/16
LV429221 C 6/16
LV429100 LV429222
LV429223
C
B
6/16
6/16
LV429100 C 6/12
LV429224 B 6/16
LV429101 C 6/12
LV429226 C 6/24, 6/44
LV429105 C 6/12
LV429227 B 6/16
LV429106 C 6/12
LV429228 B 6/16
LV429110 C 6/12
LV429234 B 6/24
LV429111 C 6/12
LV429235 B 6/15, 6/16
LV429116 C 6/12
LV429236 B 6/15, 6/16
LV429120 B 6/13
LV429241 B 6/16
LV429121 C 6/13
LV429242 B 6/16
LV429122 C 6/13
LV429243 B 6/16
LV429123 C 6/13
LV429248 B 6/16
LV429124 C 6/13
LV429249 B 6/16
LV429125 C 6/13
LV429252 B 6/17
LV429130 C 6/13
LV429253 B 6/17
LV429135 C 6/12
LV429254 B 6/17
LV429136 C 6/12
LV429256 B 6/17
LV429140 C 6/12
LV429257 B 6/17
LV429141 C 6/12
LV429258 B 6/17
LV429152 C 6/13
LV429259 B 6/16
LV429153 C 6/13
LV429260 B 6/16
LV429154 C 6/13
LV429261 B 6/16
LV429155 C 6/13
LV429262 B 6/16
LV429162 C 6/13
LV429263 B 6/16
LV429163 C 6/13
LV429264 B 6/16
LV429164 C 6/13
LV429265 C 6/15, 6/23
LV429165 C 6/13
LV429266 B 6/15, 6/23
LV429170 C 6/13
LV429267 B 6/15, 6/23
LV429172 C 6/13
LV429268 B 6/15, 6/23
LV429174 C 6/13
LV429269 B 6/15
LV429180 C 6/13
LV429270 B 6/15, 6/23
LV429182 C 6/13
LV429184 C 6/13
LV429271
LV429272
C
B
6/23
6/23, 6/43
8
LV429273 B 6/23, 6/43
LV429200 LV429274 B 6/23
LV429210 B 6/13 LV429275 B 6/23
LV429211 A 6/13 LV429276 B 6/23
LV429212 B 6/13 LV429282 C 6/15
LV429213 A 6/13 LV429283 C 6/15
LV429214 B 6/13 LV429284 B 6/23
8/3

LV429285 B 6/23, 6/43 LV429387 A 6/18, 6/38
LV429286 A 6/23, 6/43 LV429388 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429287 C 6/23, 6/43 LV429389 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429288 B 6/15 LV429390 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429289 B 6/15 LV429391 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429290 B 6/15 LV429392 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429291 B 6/15 LV429393 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429292 B 6/15 LV429394 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429300 LV429400
LV429305 C 6/22 LV429402 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429306 B 6/17, 6/23 LV429403 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429307 B 6/17, 6/23 LV429404 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429308 A 6/16 LV429405 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429309 A 6/16 LV429406 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429312 C 6/24 LV429407 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429313 C 6/24 LV429408 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429316 B 6/22, 6/42 LV429409 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429317 B 6/22 LV429410 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429318 B 6/22, 6/42 LV429411 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429319 C 6/22 LV429412 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429325 C 6/20 LV429413 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429329 C 6/17 LV429414 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429330 B 6/17 LV429424 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429331 B 6/17 LV429426 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429337 A 6/20 LV429427 C 6/18, 6/38
LV429338 A 6/20 LV429433 C 6/19
LV429339 B 6/20 LV429434 B 6/19
LV429340 B 6/20 LV429435 B 6/19
LV429341 B 6/20 LV429436 C 6/19
LV429342 C 6/20 LV429437 C 6/19
LV429343 A 6/20 LV429438 B 6/19
LV429344 A 6/21, 6/22 LV429439 C 6/19
LV429345 B 6/20 LV429440 C 6/19
LV429346 B 6/20, 6/40 LV429441 B 6/19
LV429348 B 6/16, 6/36 LV429449 B 6/21
8 LV429354
LV429369
B
B
6/22
6/22
LV429451
LV429455
A
C
6/18
6/20
LV429371 A 6/21 LV429456 C 6/20
LV429375 B 6/22, 6/42 LV429457 C 6/20
LV429382 C 6/18, 6/38 LV429458 C 6/20
LV429383 C 6/18, 6/38 LV429459 C 6/13
LV429384 C 6/18, 6/38 LV429460 C 6/13
LV429385 B 6/18, 6/38 LV429461 C 6/20
LV429386 B 6/18, 6/38 LV429462 C 6/20
8/4

LV429478 C 6/24 LV429640 A 6/4
LV429479 C 6/24 LV429641 A 6/4
LV429481 C 6/24 LV429642 B 6/4
LV429483 C 6/24, 6/44 LV429643 B 6/4
LV429484 C 6/24, 6/44 LV429644 B 6/4
LV429486 C 6/24, 6/44 LV429645 B 6/4
LV429646 B 6/4
LV429500 LV429647 B 6/4

LV429650 B 6/4
LV429502 C 6/24
LV429651 B 6/4
LV429504 B 6/17, 6/36
LV429652 B 6/4
LV429505 B 6/17, 6/36
LV429653 B 6/4
LV429506 B 6/17, 6/36
LV429654 B 6/4
LV429507 B 6/17, 6/36
LV429655 B 6/4
LV429513 C 6/24
LV429656 B 6/4
LV429515 B 6/15, 6/17, 6/23
LV429657 B 6/4
LV429516 B 6/15, 6/17, 6/23
LV429670 B 6/9
LV429517 A 6/17
LV429671 B 6/9
LV429518 B 6/17
LV429672 C 6/9
LV429521 B 1/32, 6/14
LV429673 C 6/9
LV429525 B 6/22
LV429674 C 6/9
LV429526 B 6/22
LV429675 C 6/9
LV429527 B 6/22, 6/42
LV429676 C 6/9
LV429528 C 6/24
LV429677 C 6/9
LV429532 B 6/18, 6/38
LV429680 B 6/9
LV429681 B 6/9
LV429600 LV429682 C 6/9
LV429619 C 6/11 LV429683 C 6/9
LV429620 C 6/4 LV429684 C 6/9
LV429621 C 6/4 LV429685 C 6/9
LV429622 C 6/4 LV429686 C 6/9
LV429623 C 6/4 LV429687 C 6/9
LV429624 C 6/4 LV429690 C 6/9
LV429625 C 6/4 LV429691 C 6/9
LV429626 C 6/4 LV429692 C 6/9
LV429627 C 6/4 LV429693 C 6/9
LV429629 B 6/11 LV429694 C 6/9
LV429630
LV429631
B
B
6/4
6/4
LV429695
LV429696
C
C
6/9
6/9
8
LV429632 B 6/4 LV429697 C 6/9
LV429633 B 6/4
LV429634 B 6/4
LV429635 B 6/4 LV429700
LV429636 B 6/4 LV429740 B 6/5
LV429637 B 6/4 LV429741 C 6/5
LV429639 B 6/11 LV429742 C 6/5
8/5

LV429743 C 6/5 LV429843 C 6/7
LV429744 C 6/5 LV429844 C 6/7
LV429745 C 6/5 LV429845 C 6/7
LV429750 B 6/8 LV429846 C 6/7
LV429751 C 6/8 LV429847 C 6/7
LV429752 C 6/8 LV429850 B 6/7
LV429753 C 6/8 LV429851 B 6/7
LV429754 C 6/8 LV429852 C 6/7
LV429755 C 6/8 LV429853 C 6/7
LV429760 B 6/10
LV429854 C 6/7
LV429761 C 6/10
LV429855 C 6/7
LV429762 C 6/10
LV429856 C 6/7
LV429763 C 6/10
LV429857 C 6/7
LV429764 C 6/10
LV429860 C 6/7
LV429765 C 6/10
LV429861 C 6/7
LV429770 B 6/4
LV429862 C 6/7
LV429772 C 6/4
LV429863 C 6/7
LV429780 B 6/4
LV429864 C 6/7
LV429782 C 6/4
LV429865 C 6/7
LV429790 B 6/9
LV429866 C 6/7
LV429792 C 6/9
LV429867 C 6/7
LV429793 B 6/9
LV429794 C 6/9 LV429868 B 6/4
LV429795 B 6/7 LV429869 B 6/4
LV429797 C 6/7 LV429878 B 6/4

LV429879 B 6/4
LV429880 B 6/5
LV429800 LV429882 C 6/5
LV429800 B 6/9 LV429885 B 6/5
LV429802 B 6/9
LV429887 B 6/5
LV429803 B 6/9
LV429890 B 6/7
LV429804 B 6/9
LV429892 C 6/7
LV429805 B 6/7
LV429895 B 6/7
LV429807 C 6/7
LV429897 C 6/7
LV429825 B 6/5
LV429827 C 6/5
LV429828 C 6/5 LV429900
LV429830 B 6/8
8 LV429832 C 6/8
LV429930
LV429931
B
B
6/6
6/6
LV429833 C 6/8 LV429932 B 6/6
LV429835 B 6/10 LV429933 B 6/6
LV429837 C 6/10 LV429934 B 6/6
LV429838 C 6/10 LV429935 B 6/6
LV429840 B 6/7 LV429936 B 6/6
LV429841 B 6/7 LV429937 B 6/6
LV429842 C 6/7 LV429940 A 6/6
8/6

LV429941 A 6/6 LV430500 B 6/13
LV429942 B 6/6 LV430505 B 6/12
LV429943 B 6/6 LV430506 B 6/12
LV429944 B 6/6 LV430510 B 6/13
LV429945 B 6/6 LV430515 B 6/12
LV429946 B 6/6 LV430516 B 6/12
LV429947 B 6/6 LV430520 B 6/13
LV429950 C 6/6 LV430521 B 6/13
LV429951 C 6/6 LV430554 B 6/24
LV429952 C 6/6 LV430555 C 6/20
LV429953 C 6/6 LV430556 C 6/20
LV429954 C 6/6 LV430557 C 6/20
LV429955 C 6/6 LV430558 C 6/20
LV429956 C 6/6 LV430561 C 6/20
LV429957 C 6/6 LV430562 C 6/20
LV429970 B 6/6 LV430563 C 1/32, 6/14
LV429972 C 6/6 LV430619 C 6/11
LV429980 B 6/6 LV430620 C 6/4
LV429982 C 6/6 LV430621 C 6/4
LV430622 C 6/4
LV430623 C 6/4
LV430000 LV430629 C 6/11
LV430391 B 6/12 LV430630 B 6/4
LV430396 B 6/12 LV430631 B 6/4
LV430403 B 6/12 LV430632 B 6/4
LV430404 B 6/12 LV430633 B 6/4
LV430405 B 6/12 LV430639 C 6/11
LV430406 B 6/12 LV430640 A 6/4
LV430408 B 6/12 LV430641 A 6/4
LV430409 B 6/12 LV430642 A 6/4
LV430410 B 6/12 LV430643 B 6/4
LV430411 B 6/12 LV430650 B 6/4
LV430430 B 6/12 LV430651 C 6/4
LV430431 B 6/12 LV430652 C 6/4
LV430440 B 6/12 LV430653 C 6/4
LV430441 B 6/12 LV430670 B 6/9
LV430450 B 6/12 LV430671 B 6/9
LV430451
LV430470
B
B
6/12
6/12
LV430672
LV430673
B
C
6/9
6/9
8
LV430475 B 6/13 LV430680 B 6/9
LV430480 B 6/12 LV430681 B 6/9
LV430485 B 6/13 LV430682 B 6/9
LV430490 B 6/12 LV430683 C 6/9
LV430491 B 6/12 LV430690 C 6/9
LV430495 B 6/12 LV430691 C 6/9
LV430496 B 6/12 LV430692 C 6/9
8/7

LV430693 C 6/9 LV430931 B 6/6
LV430770 B 6/4 LV430932 B 6/6
LV430771 B 6/4 LV430933 B 6/6
LV430775 B 6/7 LV430940 A 6/6
LV430776 B 6/7 LV430941 A 6/6
LV430780 B 6/4 LV430942 A 6/6
LV430781 B 6/4 LV430943 B 6/6
LV430786 B 6/7 LV430950 C 6/6
LV430788 C 6/7 LV430951 C 6/6
LV430790 B 6/9 LV430952 C 6/6
LV430791 B 6/9 LV430953 C 6/6
LV430794 B 6/9 LV430970 B 6/6
LV430795 B 6/9 LV430971 B 6/6
LV430800 B 6/9 LV430973 C 6/6
LV430801 B 6/9 LV430980 B 6/6
LV430804 B 6/9 LV430981 B 6/6
LV430805 B 6/9 LV430983 C 6/6
LV430830 B 6/5 LV430985 B 6/5
LV430831 B 6/5 LV430986 B 6/5
LV430832 B 6/8 LV430988 B 6/8
LV430833 B 6/8 LV430989 B 6/8
LV430834 B 6/10 LV430991 B 6/10
LV430835 B 6/10 LV430992 B 6/10
LV430840 B 6/7
LV430841 B 6/7
LV430842 B 6/7
LV431000
LV430843 C 6/7 LV431060 C 6/16
LV430850 B 6/7 LV431061 C 6/16
LV430851 B 6/7 LV431064 C 6/16
LV430852 B 6/7 LV431160 B 6/5
LV430853 C 6/7 LV431161 C 6/5
LV430860 B 6/7 LV431165 B 6/8
LV430861 B 6/7 LV431166 C 6/8
LV430862 B 6/7 LV431170 B 6/10
LV430863 C 6/7 LV431171 C 6/10
LV430879 B 6/4 LV431391 B 6/12
LV430880 B 6/5 LV431396 B 6/12
8 LV430881
LV430885
B
B
6/5
6/5
LV431403
LV431404
B
B
6/12
6/12
LV430886 B 6/5 LV431405 B 6/12
LV430889 B 6/4 LV431406 B 6/12
LV430890 B 6/7 LV431408 B 6/12
LV430891 B 6/7 LV431409 B 6/12
LV430895 B 6/7 LV431410 B 6/12
LV430896 B 6/7 LV431411 B 6/12
LV430930 B 6/6 LV431430 B 6/12
8/8

LV431431 B 6/12 LV431622 C 6/4
LV431440 B 6/12 LV431623 C 6/4
LV431441 B 6/12 LV431629 B 6/11
LV431450 C 6/12 LV431630 B 6/4
LV431451 C 6/12 LV431631 B 6/4
LV431470 B 6/12 LV431632 B 6/4
LV431475 B 6/13 LV431633 B 6/4
LV431480 B 6/12 LV431639 B 6/11
LV431485 B 6/13 LV431640 A 6/4
LV431489 C 6/13 LV431641 A 6/4
LV431490 C 6/12 LV431642 B 6/4
LV431491 C 6/12 LV431643 B 6/4
LV431495 C 6/12 LV431650 B 6/4
LV431496 C 6/12 LV431651 C 6/4
LV431500 C 6/13 LV431652 C 6/4
LV431505 C 6/12 LV431653 C 6/4
LV431506 C 6/12 LV431670 B 6/9
LV431510 B 6/13 LV431671 B 6/9
LV431515 C 6/12 LV431672 C 6/9
LV431516 C 6/12 LV431673 C 6/9
LV431520 C 6/13 LV431680 B 6/9
LV431521 C 6/13 LV431681 B 6/9
LV431533 B 6/13 LV431682 C 6/9
LV431534 B 6/13 LV431683 C 6/9
LV431535 A 6/13 LV431690 B 6/9
LV431536 B 6/13 LV431691 C 6/9
LV431540 C 6/19 LV431692 C 6/9
LV431541 B 6/19 LV431693 C 6/9
LV431542 B 6/19 LV431748 C 6/5
LV431543 C 6/19 LV431749 C 6/5
LV431544 C 6/19 LV431752 C 6/8
LV431545 B 6/19 LV431753 C 6/8
LV431546 B 6/19 LV431756 C 6/10
LV431548 C 6/19 LV431757 C 6/10
LV431549 B 6/19 LV431770 B 6/4
LV431563 C 6/16 LV431771 C 6/4
LV431564 C 6/16 LV431772 C 6/4
LV431565
LV431566
C
C
6/20
6/20
LV431780
LV431781
B
C
6/4
6/4
8
LV431567 C 6/20 LV431782 C 6/4
LV431568 C 6/20 LV431790 B 6/9
LV431569 C 6/20 LV431791 C 6/9
LV431570 C 6/20 LV431792 C 6/9
LV431619 C 6/11 LV431795 C 6/9
LV431620 C 6/4 LV431796 C 6/9
LV431621 C 6/4 LV431797 C 6/9
8/9

LV431800 B 6/9 LV431950 C 6/6
LV431801 C 6/9 LV431951 C 6/6
LV431802 C 6/9 LV431952 C 6/6
LV431805 C 6/9 LV431953 C 6/6
LV431806 C 6/9 LV431970 B 6/6
LV431807 C 6/9 LV431971 C 6/6
LV431830 B 6/7 LV431972 C 6/6
LV431831 B 6/7 LV431980 B 6/6
LV431832 B 6/7 LV431981 C 6/6
LV431833 B 6/7 LV431982 C 6/6
LV431840 A 6/7
LV431841 A 6/7
LV431842 B 6/7
LV432000
LV431843 B 6/7 LV432068 B 6/32
LV431850 B 6/7 LV432069 B 6/32
LV431851 C 6/7 LV432071 B 6/32
LV431852 C 6/7 LV432072 B 6/32
LV431853 C 6/7 LV432074 C 6/32
LV431860 C 6/5 LV432075 C 6/32
LV431861 C 6/5 LV432077 B 6/32
LV431862 C 6/5 LV432078 B 6/32
LV431865 C 6/5 LV432080 B 6/32
LV431866 C 6/5 LV432081 B 6/32
LV431867 C 6/5 LV432082 B 6/32
LV431870 B 6/7 LV432084 B 6/32
LV431871 C 6/7 LV432085 B 6/32
LV431872 C 6/7 LV432086 B 6/32
LV431875 B 6/7 LV432089 C 6/32
LV431876 C 6/7 LV432090 C 6/32
LV431877 C 6/7 LV432091 C 6/32
LV431880 C 6/7 LV432093 C 6/32
LV431881 C 6/7 LV432094 C 6/32
LV431882 C 6/7 LV432096 C 6/32
LV431885 C 6/7 LV432097 C 6/32
LV431886 C 6/7 LV432099 C 6/32
LV431887 C 6/7 LV432100 C 6/32
LV431890 B 6/4 LV432102 C 6/32
8 LV431895
LV431930
B
B
6/4
6/6
LV432103
LV432105
C
C
6/32
6/32
LV431931 B 6/6 LV432106 C 6/32
LV431932 B 6/6 LV432108 C 6/32
LV431933 B 6/6 LV432109 C 6/32
LV431940 A 6/6 LV432111 C 6/32
LV431941 A 6/6 LV432112 C 6/32
LV431942 B 6/6 LV432403 B 6/32
LV431943 B 6/6 LV432404 B 6/32
8/10

LV432405 B 6/32 LV432539 C 6/34
LV432408 B 6/32 LV432540 C 6/34, 6/35
LV432409 B 6/32 LV432541 C 6/34, 6/35
LV432410 B 6/32 LV432552 C 6/44
LV432414 B 6/32 LV432553 C
LV432416 B 6/32 LV432554 C 6/44
LV432453 B 6/33 LV432557 B 6/42
LV432454 A 6/33 LV432558 B 6/42
LV432455 B 6/33 LV432559 B 6/42
LV432456 A 6/33 LV432560 C 6/42
LV432457 B 6/33 LV432566 C 6/40
LV432459 C 6/44 LV432570 C 6/37
LV432460 C 6/44 LV432571 C 6/44
LV432461 C 6/44 LV432575 C 1/32, 6/33
LV432475 B 6/34, 6/36 LV432578 B 6/37
LV432476 B 6/34, 6/36 LV432579 B 6/37
LV432479 B 6/36 LV432584 C 6/37, 6/43
LV432480 B 6/36 LV432585 C 6/37, 6/43
LV432481 B 6/36 LV432586 C 6/36
LV432482 B 6/36 LV432587 C 6/36
LV432484 B 6/36 LV432591 B 6/34, 6/37, 6/43
LV432485 B 6/36 LV432592 B 6/34, 6/37, 6/43
LV432486 B 6/36 LV432593 B 6/37
LV432487 B 6/36 LV432594 B 6/37
LV432490 B 6/34, 6/36 LV432595 C 6/37
LV432491 B 6/34, 6/36 LV432596 C 6/37
LV432492 B 6/34 LV432597 A 6/40
LV432493 B 6/34 LV432598 A 6/40
LV432498 C 6/44 LV432599 B 6/40
LV432500 B 6/36 LV432600 B 6/40
LV432501 B 6/36 LV432602 C 6/40
LV432502 B 6/36 LV432603 B 6/40
LV432503 B 6/36 LV432604 A 6/41, 6/42
LV432513 C 6/44 LV432605 B 6/40
LV432516 B 6/34, 6/43 LV432606 B 6/40
LV432517 B 6/34, 6/43 LV432614 B 6/42
LV432518 B 6/34, 6/43 LV432621 B 6/42
LV432520
LV432521
B
C
6/34, 6/43
6/43
LV432631
LV432639
B
C
6/41
6/39
8
LV432523 B 6/43 LV432640 C 6/39
LV432525 B 6/43 LV432641 B 6/39
LV432526 B 6/43 LV432642 B 6/39
LV432532 C 6/35 LV432643 C 6/39
LV432533 C 6/35 LV432644 C 6/39
LV432534 C 6/43 LV432645 B 6/39
LV432538 C 6/34 LV432646 C 6/39
8/11

LV432647 C 6/39 LV432861 C 6/40
LV432648 C 6/39 LV432862 C 6/40
LV432649 B 6/41 LV432885 B 6/28
LV432652 C 6/39, 6/40 LV432886 B 6/28
LV432653 C 6/40 LV432893 B 6/28
LV432654 C 6/40 LV432894 A 6/28
LV432655 C 6/40 LV432895 B 6/30
LV432656 C 6/40 LV432896 A 6/30
LV432657 C 6/40 LV432899 B 6/28
LV432658 C 6/40 LV432900 B 6/28
LV432659 C 6/33 LV432901 B 6/30
LV432660 C 6/33 LV432902 B 6/30
LV432685 B 6/28 LV432933 B 6/29
LV432686 B 6/28 LV432934 A 6/29
LV432693 B 6/28 LV432949 C 6/28
LV432694 A 6/28 LV432950 C 6/30
LV432695 B 6/30 LV432956 C 6/31
LV432696 B 6/30 LV432957 C 6/31
LV432699 B 6/28 LV432976 C 6/28
LV432700 B 6/28 LV432977 C 6/30
LV432701 B 6/30
LV432702 B 6/30
LV432707 B 6/28
LV434000
LV432708 B 6/28 LV434200 C 6/19, 6/25, 6/39, 6/25, 6/45
LV432709 B 6/30 LV434201 C 6/19, 6/25, 6/39, 6/25, 6/45
LV432710 B 6/30 LV434202 C 6/19, 6/25, 6/39, 6/25, 6/45
LV432733 B 6/29 LV434204 C 1/33, 6/19, 6/25, 6/39, 6/25, 6/45
LV432734 A 6/29 LV434205 C 6/19, 6/25, 6/39, 6/25, 6/45
LV432749 C 6/28 LV434206 C 1/33, 6/26, 6/25, 6/46
LV432750 C 6/30 LV434207 C 6/26, 6/47
LV432756 C 6/31 LV434210 C 1/33, 6/14, 6/33
LV432757 C 6/31 LV434212 C 6/14, 6/33
LV432776 B 6/28 LV434849 C 6/20
LV432777 B 6/30 LV434850 C 6/20
LV432803 B 6/32 LV434851 C 6/20
LV432804 B 6/32 LV434852 C 6/40
LV432805 B 6/32 LV434853 C 6/40
8 LV432808
LV432809
B
B
6/32
6/32
LV432810 B 6/32
LV4SM000
LV432814 B 6/32 LV4SM100 C 6/26, 6/47
LV432816 B 6/32
LV432855
LV432856
C
C
6/40
6/40
LV4ST000
LV432857 C 6/40 LV4ST100 C 6/26, 6/47
LV432858 C 6/40 LV4ST121 C 6/26, 6/47
8/12
Referencia Clave Pgina
TRV00000
TRV00121 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00128 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00210 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00217 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00803 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00806 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00810 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00820 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00830 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00850 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00870 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00880 C 6/25, 6/45
TRV00910 C 1/33, 6/26, 6/46
TRV00911 C 1/33, 6/26, 6/46
TRV00915 C 6/26, 6/46
TRV00917 C 6/26, 6/46
WW3A000
VW3A8114 C 6/26, 6/46
VW3A8306DRC C 6/25, 6/45
8/13
DIRECCION REGIONAL NORDESTE DIRECCION REGIONAL CENTRO
Delegacin BARCELONA Delegacin MADRID
Sicilia, 91-97, 6. Tel.: 93 484 31 01 Fax: 93 484 31 57 Ctra. de Andaluca km 13 Pol. Ind. Los Angeles
08013 BARCELONA del.barcelona@es.schneider-electric.com Tel.: 91 624 55 00 Fax: 91 682 40 48 28906 GETAFE (Madrid)
del.madrid@es.schneider-electric.com
Delegaciones:
Delegaciones:
BALEARES
Gremi de Teixidors, 35, 2. Tel.: 971 43 68 92 Fax: 971 43 14 43 GUADALAJARA-CUENCA
07009 PALMA DE MALLORCA Tel.: 91 624 55 00 Fax: 91 682 40 47
GIRONA TOLEDO
Pl. Josep Pla, 4, 1., 1. Tel.: 972 22 70 65 Fax: 972 22 69 15 Tel.: 91 624 55 00 Fax: 91 682 40 47
17001 GIRONA
LLEIDA DIRECCION REGIONAL LEVANTE

Prat de la Riba, 18 Tel.: 973 22 14 72 Fax: 973 23 50 46
25004 LLEIDA Delegacin VALENCIA
Font Santa, 4, local D Tel.: 96 318 66 00 Fax: 96 318 66 01
TARRAGONA 46910 ALFAFAR (Valencia) del.valencia@es.schneider-electric.com
Carles Riba, 4 Tel.: 977 29 15 45 Fax: 977 19 53 05
43007 TARRAGONA Delegaciones:
ALBACETE
Paseo de la Cuba, 21, 1. A Tel.: 967 24 05 95 Fax: 967 24 06 49
DIRECCION REGIONAL NOROESTE 02005 ALBACETE
Delegacin A CORUA
Pol. Ind. Pocomaco, parcela D, 33 A Tel.: 981 17 52 20 Fax: 981 28 02 42 ALICANTE
15190 A CORUA del.coruna@es.schneider-electric.com Monegros, s/n Edificio A-7, 1., locales 1-7 Tel.: 965 10 83 35
Fax: 965 11 15 41 03006 ALICANTE del.alicante@es.schneider-electric.com
Delegaciones:
CASTELLON
ASTURIAS Repblica Argentina, 12, bajos Tel.: 964 24 30 15 Fax: 964 24 26 17
Parque Tecnolgico de Asturias Edif. Centroelena, parcela 46, oficina 1. F 12006 CASTELLON
Tel.: 98 526 90 30 Fax: 98 526 75 23 33428 LLANERA (Asturias)
del.oviedo@es.schneider-electric.com MURCIA
Senda de Enmedio, 12, bajos Tel.: 968 28 14 61 Fax: 968 28 14 80
GALICIA SUR-VIGO 30009 MURCIA del.murcia@es.schneider-electric.com
Ctra. Vella de Madrid, 33, bajos Tel.: 986 27 10 17 Fax: 986 27 70 64
36214 VIGO del.vigo@es.schneider-electric.com
DIRECCION REGIONAL SUR
LEON
Moiss de Len, bloque 43, bajos Tel.: 987 21 88 61 Fax: 987 21 88 49 Delegacin SEVILLA
24006 LEON del.leon@es.schneider-electric.com Avda. de la Innovacin, s/n Edificio Arena 2, 2. Tel.: 95 499 92 10
Fax: 95 425 45 20 41020 SEVILLA del.sevilla@es.schneider-electric.com
DIRECCION REGIONAL NORTE Delegaciones:
Delegacin VIZCAYA ALMERA

Estartetxe, 5, 4. Tel.: 94 480 46 85 Fax: 94 480 29 90 Calle Lentisco s/n Edif. Celulosa III, oficina 6, local 1 Pol. Ind. La Celulosa
48940 LEIOA (Vizcaya) del.bilbao@es.schneider-electric.com Tel.: 950 15 18 56 Fax: 950 15 18 52 04007 ALMERIA
Delegaciones CADIZ
Polar, 1, 4. E Tel.: 956 31 77 68 Fax: 956 30 02 29
ALAVA 11405 JEREZ DE LA FRONTERA (Cdiz)
Portal de Gamarra, 1. Edificio Deba, oficina 210
Tel.: 945 12 37 58 Fax: 945 25 70 39 01013 VITORIA-GASTEIZ CORDOBA
Arfe, 16, bajos Tel.: 957 23 20 56 Fax: 957 45 67 57
CANTABRIA 14011 CORDOBA
Sainz y Trevilla, 62, bajos Pol. Ind. de Guarnizo
Tel.: 942 54 60 68 Fax: 942 54 60 46 39611 ASTILLERO (Santander) GRANADA
Baza, s/n Edificio ICR Pol. Ind. Juncaril
GUIPUZCOA Tel.: 958 46 76 99 Fax: 958 46 84 36 18220 ALBOLOTE (Granada)
Parque Empresarial Zuatzu Edificio Urumea, planta baja, local 5
Tel.: 943 31 39 90 Fax: 943 21 78 19 20018 DONOSTIA-SAN SEBASTIAN HUELVA
del.donosti@es.schneider-electric.com Tel.: 954 99 92 10 Fax: 959 15 17 57
NAVARRA JAEN
Parque Empresarial La Muga, 9, planta 4, oficina 1 Paseo de la Estacin, 60 Edificio Europa, 1. A
Tel.: 948 29 96 20 Fax: 948 29 96 25 31160 ORCOYEN (Navarra) Tel.: 953 25 55 68 Fax: 953 26 45 75 23007 JAEN
MALAGA
DIRECCION REGIONAL CASTILLA-ARAGON-RIOJA Parque Industrial Trevenez Escritora Carmen Martn Gaite, 2, 1., local 4
Tel.: 95 217 92 00 Fax: 95 217 84 77 29196 MALAGA
Delegacin CASTILLA-BURGOS
Pol. Ind. Gamonal Villimar 30 de Enero de 1964, s/n, 2.
Tel.: 947 47 44 25 Fax: 947 47 09 72 EXTREMADURA-BADAJOZ
09007 BURGOS del.burgos@es.schneider-electric.com Avda. Luis Movilla, 2, local B
Tel.: 924 22 45 13 Fax: 924 22 47 98 06011 BADAJOZ
Delegaciones:
EXTREMADURA-CACERES
ARAGON-ZARAGOZA Avda. de Alemania Edificio Descubrimiento, local TL 2
Pol. Ind. Argualas, nave 34 Tel.: 976 35 76 61 Fax: 976 56 77 02 Tel.: 927 21 33 13 Fax: 927 21 33 13 10001 CACERES
50012 ZARAGOZA del.zaragoza@es.schneider-electric.com
CANARIAS-LAS PALMAS
CENTRO/NORTE-VALLADOLID
Ctra. del Cardn, 95-97, locales 2 y 3 Edificio Jardines de Galicia
Topacio, 60, 2. Pol. Ind. San Cristbal
Tel.: 928 47 26 80 Fax: 928 47 26 91 35010 LAS PALMAS DE G.C.
Tel.: 983 21 46 46 Fax: 983 21 46 75
del.canarias@es.schneider-electric.com
47012 VALLADOLID del.valladolid@es.schneider-electric.com
CANARIAS-TENERIFE
Miembro de:
LA RIOJA Custodios, 6, 2. El Cardonal Tel.: 922 62 50 50 Fax: 922 62 50 60

Avda. Po XII, 14, 11. F Tel.: 941 25 70 19 Fax: 941 27 09 38
38108 LA LAGUNA (Tenerife)
26003 LOGROO
Make
the most
of your
energy
www.schneiderelectric.es
Soporte y Servicio Tcnico a clientes
es-sat@es.schneider-electric.com
902 10 18 13
Instituto Schneider Electric de Formacin

93 433 70 03
www.isefonline.es
Schneider Electric Espaa, S.A. Bac de Roda, 52, edificio A 08019 Barcelona Tel.: 93 484 31 00 Fax: 93 484 33 07 En razn de la evolucin de las normativas y del material,
Dep. legal: B.39.748-2008
las caractersticas indicadas por el texto y las imgenes de

este documento no nos comprometen hasta despus de una
confirmacin por parte de nuestros servicios. Los precios de
las tarifas pueden sufrir variacin y, por tanto, el material ser
siempre facturado a los precios y condiciones vigentes en el
momento del suministro.
0200027 I08

Documentacion Calentamiento

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Documentacion Calentamiento

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

MAQUINA DE CALENTAMIENTO

DIRECTO SITA EN INAUXA S,A

SITA EN INAUXA S,A

Realizado por: Jose Ramn Bilbao

Revisado por: Eloy Acillona

Fecha de revisin: 12/04/2.010

Documento N 1 12/04/2.010 Revisin A

Nombre Tipo de datos Direccin Comentario

Bloque: OB1 "Main Program Sweep (Cycle)"

Informacin del smbolo

Informacin del smbolo

Informacin del smbolo

Nombre Tipo de datos Direccin Valor inicial Comentario

Segm.: 1 TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO

U "CONDICIONES O.K" M51.6

Segm.: 2 TIEMPO DEL PULSO DE SEALIZACION

Segm.: 3 TIEMPO DE CADENA

U "S10.5.1" E5.4 -- DETECTOR CADENA

UN "SIEMPRE OFF" M255.1

Segm.: 5 SIEMPRE OFF

U "SIEMPRE OFF" M255.1

Segm.: 6 TIEMPO DE PREBARRIDO

Segm.: 7 CONTADOR DE BARRAS

Segm.: 9 MINIMO TIEMPO DE ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N1

U "ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N1" M52.2

Segm.: 10 MINIMO TIEMPO DE ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N2

U "ENFRIAMIENTO ZONA N2" M52.4

Informacin del smbolo

Informacin del smbolo

Informacin del smbolo

Informacin del smbolo

Informacin del smbolo

Nombre Tipo de datos Direccin Comentario

U "S8.6.1" E3.5 -- SOLICITUD RECONOCIMIENTO ALARMAS

Segm.: 2 FALTA DE GAS

Segm.: 3 EXCESO DE GAS

Segm.: 4 FALTA DE AIRE

Segm.: 5 ESTANQUEIDAD INCORRECTA

U "K32.4.1" E0.6 -- PRUEBA DE ESTAQUEIDAD INCORRECTA

Segm.: 6 TERMICO DEL VENTILADOR

Segm.: 7 TERMICO AGITADOR N1

Segm.: 8 TERMICO AGITADOR N2

Segm.: 9 TERMICO CADENA TRANSPORTE

Segm.: 10 TERMICO EXTRACTOR N1

Segm.: 11 TERMICO EXTRACTOR N2

Segm.: 12 EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA ZONA N1

Segm.: 13 EXCESO DE TEMPERATURA ZONA N2

Nombre Tipo de datos Direccin Comentario

Segm.: 1 MARCHA VENTILADOR

Segm.: 2 MARCHA AGITADOR N1

Segm.: 3 MARCHA AGITADOR N2

Segm.: 4 MARCHA EXTRACTOR N1

Segm.: 5 MARCHA EXTRACTOR N2

Segm.: 6 MARCHA REDUCTOR CADENA

Segm.: 7 MARCHA ESTANQUEIDAD

U "K3.2.1" E0.3 -- CONFIRMACION VENTILADOR EN SERVICIO

Segm.: 8 CONDICIONES O.K

U "MARCA EXCESO DE GAS" M50.2

Segm.: 9 COMIENZO PREBARRIDO

U "CONDICIONES O.K" M51.6

Segm.: 10 SERVOS ZONA N1

U "FIN DE PREBARRIDO" M52.0

CALL "TABLA DE SERVOS" FC4